Ennore 230KV 110KV Spec 15.11.2022

SECTION – 3
50MVA, 110/33KV & 16MVA, 110/11KV POWER TRANSFORMER

1.0. SCOPE
1.1. The scope of supply of the 50MVA, 110/33KV & 16MVA, 110/11KV Power Transformer
include Design, Manufacture, Inspection, Testing, Packing & Forwarding, arranging insurance
cover towards Transit & Storage, Transporting the power transformers complete with all fittings,
accessories & associated equipments detailed herein, and placing on at our substation sites by
unloading on the plinth or nearer to the plinth, in case the plinth is not ready, as decided by the
site Engineer.
1.2. The equipment shall be manufactured in the manner setout in this specification or where
not setout, to the reasonable satisfaction of the purchaser.The transformers shall conform in all
respects to high standards of engineering, design and workmanship and latest revisions of
relevant standards at the time of offer, and the purchaser shall have the power to reject any
work or material, which, in his judgment is not in full accordance therewith.
1.3. All fittings and accessories or apparatus which may not have been specifically mentioned
below, but which are necessary and essential for the efficient working of the equipment, shall be
deemed to be included in the contract. All outdoor apparatus including bushing insulators with
their mountings shall be designed so as to avoid any accumulation of water.
2.0. CLIMATIC CONDITIONS
The climatic conditions at site under which the equipment shall operate satisfactorily are,
(a) Atmosphere : Highly polluted
(b) Maximum ambient air temperature : 50  C.
(c) Minimum ambient air temperature : 5  C.
(d) Maximum daily average ambient air temperature : 40  C.
(e) Maximum yearly weighted average ambient air : 32  C

temperature
1
(f) Maximum Humidity : 95%
(g) Average thunder storm days per annum : 65
(h) Average dust storm days per annum : Occasional
(i) Average rainy day per annum. : 65
(j) Average annual rainfall : 100 cm.
(k) Number of months during which tropical monsoon : 5

conditions prevails
(l) Maximum wind pressure : 150kgf/sq.m.
(m) Altitude above M.S.L : <1000 M
3.0. CODES AND STANDARDS
3.1. The design, material, construction, manufacture, inspection, testing and performance of the
power transformers shall comply with all currently applicable statutes, regulations and safety
codes.
3.2. Except otherwise stated, the transformers and associated accessories shall conform in all
respects to the latest issues of relevant Indian/International standards. Some of them are
given below:
International and
Indian
Internationally
Standard TITLE
recognised
No.
Standards
IS-325 Three Phase Induction Motors IEC- 34
IS-335 Insulating oils for transformers and Switchgears IEC-296,BS-148
IS-778 Gun metal gate, globe and check-valves for general purpose.
IS-1866 Code of practice for maintenance and supervision of insulating oil
in service.
IS-1886 Code of practice for installation and maintenance of transformers.
IS-2099 Bushings for AC voltage above 1000V IEC-137, BS 223
IS-2026 Power transformers IEC-76
Degrees of protection provided by enclosures for low voltage
IS-2147
switchgear and control gear
IS-2705 Current Transformers IEC-185
IS-3203 Code of practice of climatic proofing of electrical equipments.
IS-3347 Specification for Outdoor Bushings.
2
IS-3401 Silica gel
IS-3637 Gas operated relays
IS-3639 Fittings & Accessories for power transformers.
IS-4253 Cork and rubber
IS-5561 Electric power connector
Marking and arrangements for switch gear, bus bars, Main
IS-5578
connections and auxiliary wiring.
IS-6272 Industrial cooling fans
IS-6600 Guide for loading of oil immersed transformers BSCP-0160
IS-8468 ON load tap changer IEC-60214
IS-8478 Application guide for OLTC IEC-60542
IS-9434 Guide for sampling and analysis of dissolved gas in oil filled
IS-10593 equipments,
Oil impregnated paper-insulated condenser Bushing Dimension
IS-12676
and requirements.
Insulation Coordination, Indian Electricity Rules 1959 IEC-71
High voltage test techniques IEC-60
IEMA Standard publication - Transformer -1
CBIP Manual on power transformers-1999 & 2006
BUREAU OF INDIAN STANDARDS, ManakBhawan, No.9, Bahadur
IS
Shah zafarMarg, New Delhi - 110 001, INDIA.
IEC INTERNATIONAL ELECTRO TECHNICAL COMMISSION, Bureau
Central de ta Commission Electro Technique International I, Rue
de Verembe, Geneva, SWITZERLAND.
IS- 1554
Part 2 Control cables
1988
3.3. Wherever the relevant ISS are not applicable, the specifications of the specifications of IEC,
CBIP and BSS may be adopted and will be subjected to acceptance by the Purchaser
3.4. The equipment or materials, meeting recognized National or International Standards which
ensure an equal or superior quality than Indian/IEC standards specified, will also be accepted.
When the equipment offered by the supplier conforms to other standards, salient points of
difference between standards adopted and the standards specified in this specification shall be
clearly brought out in the offer.
4.0. TYPE, RATING AND OTHER TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
The requirement of Power Transformers shall be as below
i) For 50MVA, 110/33KV - ANNEXURE – I(a).
3
i) For 16MVA, 110/11KV - ANNEXURE – I(b).
5.0. INSULATION:
The insulation requirement of windings shall be as below
6.0. Impedances
6.1. The percentage Impedance Voltage at principal tapping and on the rated primary /
secondary MVA base shall be as below.
6.2. Impedance shall include positive and zero sequence and shall be expressed in terms of
branches of the star connected equivalent diagrams, all on the same MVA base, and the range
shall be given for each branch of the equivalent circuit in turn.
6.3. The tenderer shall indicate the guaranteed impedance, tolerances and upper and lower limit
of impedance which can be offered without an increase in the quoted price. Tender shall also
indicate the percentage variation from the normal tap to extreme taps.
6.4 Positive tolerance of + 10% for Impedance is accepted. (Negative tolerance

shall not be accepted)
6.5. To achieve the above percentage impedance values no reactor shall be used, either inside
or outside the tank.
6.6 Tap 1 should correspond to highest voltage/lower impedance and the last Tap
should correspond to the lowest voltage/higher impedance.
7.0. LOSSES
4
7.1. The No load loss at rated voltage & frequency and Load loss at the rated current,
frequency and rated output at 75C and auxiliary loss for the Power Transformer, shall not
exceed the limits as follows.
For 50MVA, 110/33KV
No Load Loss at rated voltage and frequency : 25.0 KW (Max.)
I2R Loss at rated current and at 75°C for HV and

LV windings at principal tap position : 105.0 KW (Max.)
Stray + Eddy Loss : 20.0 KW (Max.)
Load Loss at rated current and at 75°C for HV and

Auxiliary Loss at rated voltage and frequency : 3.0 KW (Max.)
For 16MVA, 110/11KV
No Load Loss at rated voltage and frequency : 12.0 KW (Max.)
I2R Loss at rated current and at 75°C for HV and

Stray + Eddy Loss : 12.0 KW (Max.)
Load Loss at rated current and at 75°C for HV and

Auxiliary Loss at rated voltage and frequency : 1.0 KW (Max.)
8.0. TEMPERATURE RISE :
8.1. The transformer shall be capable of operating continuously at full rating giving rated
output without exceeding the temperature limits specified below, over and above the ambient
temperature of 50o C.
5
Permissible Temperature rise of top oil, measured by thermometer : 50 o C.
Permissible Temperature rise of winding, measured by resistance : 55 o C.
9.0 DUTY REQUIREMENTS
9.1. The transformers would be used for Bi-directional flow of rated power.
9.2. The transformer and all its accessories like bushing CTs, etc. shall be designed to
withstand, without injury, the thermal and mechanical effects of any external short circuit to
earth and of short circuits at the terminals of any winding for a period of 2 seconds.
Transformer windings shall be capable of withstanding the thermal and mechanical stresses
caused by symmetrical or asymmetrical faults.
9.3. The transformer shall be capable of being loaded in accordance with IS 6600 / IEC 6007-7.
There shall be no limitation imposed by bushings, tap-changer etc. All accessories like
bushings, CTs, OLTC’s shall be rated to carry 120% of Transformer current on
extreme minus tap.
9.4. The overload capacity of the transformer and their emergency short time ratings shall be in
accordance with IS 6600.
9.5. The transformer shall be suitable for continuous operation with a frequency variation of ±
5% without exceeding the specified temperature rise.
9.6. The transformer shall be capable of being operated without danger on any tapping at the
rated MVA with voltage increase of 10% in the system corresponding to the voltage of that
tapping and at the same time with a frequency of 5% below normal.
9.7. Transformers of similar ratio & impedance, now in service in TANTRANSCO shall operate
satisfactorily in parallel with each other.
9.8. Radio interference and Noise Level:
 The transformer shall be designed with particular attention to the suppression of har-
monic voltages, especially the third and fifth to the maximum extent, so as to minimise
interference with communication circuits.
6
 The noise-level, when energised at normal voltage and frequency with fans running,
shall be less than 78 decibels in the case of 50MVA, 110/33KV and 70 decibels
in the case of 16MVA, 110/11KV when measured under standard conditions.
9.9. The maximum flux density in any part of the core and yoke at the rated MVA, voltage and
frequency shall be such that under 10% continuous over voltage condition it does not exceed
1.9 Tesla at all tap position.
9.10. The maximum current density in any part of winding shall not exceed 240 Amps/
sq.cm.
9.11. Transformer shall be capable of operating under the natural air cooled condition up to the
specified load. The forced air cooling equipment shall come into operation by pre-set contact of
winding temperature indicator and transformer shall operate in forced cooling mode as ONAF
upto rated load. (For applicable capacity of transformers)
9.12. Transformer shall be capable of remaining in operation at full load for 10 minutes after
failure of the fans without the calculated winding hot-spot temperature exceeding 140C. Also,
stopping of one or two cooling fans should not have any effect on the cooling system.
Transformers fitted with two coolers each capable of dissipating 50 % of the loss at continuous
maximum rating shall be capable of remaining in operation for 20 minutes in the event of failure
of fans associated with one cooler without the estimated winding hot-spot temperature
exceeding 140C.
9.13 The tenderer shall submit supporting calculations for the above and the same shall be re-
viewed during design review.
9.14 Transformer shall withstand, without damage, heating due to the combined voltage and
frequency fluctuation, which produce the following over fluxing conditions:
i) 110% continuously
ii) 125% for 1 minute
iii) 140% for 5 seconds.
iv) Withstand time for 150% & 170% over fluxing condition shall be indicated.
v) Over fluxing characteristics up to 170 % shall be provided.
7
9.15. The transformer shall be free from any Electrostatic Charging Tendency (ECT) under all
operating conditions and maximum oil velocity shall be such that it does not lead to static dis -
charges inside the transformer while all coolers are in operation.
10.0. CONSTRUCTIONAL FEATURES
10.1. The transformer and accessories shall be designed to facilitate operation, inspection,
maintenance and repairs.
10.2. All materials used shall be of the best quality and of the class most suitable for working
under the conditions specified and shall withstand the variations of temperature arising under
working conditions and atmospheric conditions without undue distortion or deterioration or
setting up of undue stresses in any part and also without affecting the strength and suitability of
the various parts for the work which they have to perform.
10.3. Patching, plugging, shimming or other such means of over-coming defects, discrepancies
or errors are not acceptable.
10.4. Corresponding parts liable for replacement shall be interchangeable.
10.5. All outdoor apparatus, including bushing insulators with their mounting shall be designed
so as to avoid pocket in which water can collect.
10.6. All mechanism shall, wherever necessary, be made out of stainless steel, brass or gun-
metal to prevent sticking due to rust or corrosion.
10.7. FASTENERS:
10.7.1 All bolts, studs, screw threads, pipe threads, bolts and nuts shall comply with
appropriate Indian Standards for metric threads or the technical equivalent.
10.7.2 Bolts or studs shall not be less than 6 mm. in diameter except when used for small
wiring terminals.
10.7.3 If bolts and nuts are placed so that they are inaccessible by means of ordinary spanners,
spectral spanners shall be provided.
10.7.4 Taper washers shall be provided where necessary.
8
10.7.5 Protective washers of suitable material shall be provided front and back of the securing
screws.
10.7.6 All nuts and pins shall be adequately locked. Nuts, bolts and pins used inside the
transformer and tap-changer compartment where gaskets are not used shall be provided with
spring washers or locknuts. Where galvanizing is specified, it shall be applied by the hot dipped
process or by electro-galvanizing process and for all parts, other than steel wires, shall consist of
a thickness of zinc coating equivalent to not less than 610 gm of zinc per square metre of
surface. The zinc coating shall be smooth, of uniform thickness and free from defects.
10.7.7 All taper pins used in any mechanism shall be of the split type.
10.7.8 Surface, which are in contact with oil, shall not be galvanised or cadmium plated.
10.7.9 Labels or plates of non-corrosive material shall be provided for all apparatus such as
relays, switches and fuses, contained in any cubicle or marshalling kiosks.
10.7.10 Steel bolts and nuts exposed to atmosphere shall be with suitable finishes like
cadmium plated or zinc coated.
10.8. PAINTING
INTERIOR PAINTING
10.8.1 Before painting or filling with oil, all ungalvanised parts shall be completely cleaned
and freed from rust, scale and greases, and all external surface cavities on castings shall be
filled by metal deposition.
10.8.2 The interior of transformer tank and other oil filled chambers and internal structural steel
work shall be cleaned off all scale and rust by shot-blasting.
“These surfaces shall be coated with not less than two coats of heat resistant
varnish (Hot oil proof)”. Un-exposed welds need not be painted.
10.8.3 All interior surfaces of mechanism chambers and kiosks, except those which have
received anticorrosion treatment, shall receive three coats of paint, applied to the thoroughly
cleaned metal surface. The final coat shall be of a light coloured anti-condensation mixture.
9
EXTERIOR PAINTING
10.8.4 Similarly the outer surface shall also be cleaned off all scale and rust by shot blasting,
and then the primary coat shall be applied, immediately after cleaning. The second coat shall be
of Aluminium paint. Before despatch, the transformer shall be given another final coat of
Aluminium paint. Primer paint shall be, ready made zinc chrome as per IS: 2932.
10.8.5 Metal parts not accessible for painting shall be made of corrosion - resistant material.
10.8.6 Marshalling box and drive mechanism box shall also be painted with aluminium paint. The
RTCC panel shall be painted with light grey as per shade-631 of IS-5.
10.8.7 DAMAGED PAINT WORK:
10.8.7.1. Any damage occurring to any part of a painting scheme shall be made good to the
same standard of corrosion protection and appearance as that was originally applied. Any
damaged paint work shall be made good as follows:
 The damaged area, together with an area extending 25mm. around its boundary, shall
be cleaned down to bare metal.
 A priming coat shall be immediately applied, followed by a full paint finish equal to that
originally applied and extending 50mm around the perimeter of the original damage.
 The repainted surface shall present a smooth surface. This shall be obtained by
carefully chamfering the paint edges before and after priming.
10.8.8. DRY FILM THICKNESS
10.8.8.1. To the maximum extent practicable the coats shall be applied as a continuous film of
uniform thickness and free of pores. Overspray, skips, runs, sags, and drips should be avoided.
The different coats may or may not be of the same colour.
10.8.8.2. Each coat of paint shall be allowed to harden before the next is applied as per
manufacturer’s recommendation.
10
10.8.8.3. Particular attention must be paid to full film thickness at the edges.
10.8.9. TESTS FOR PAINTED SURFACE:
10.8.9.1. The painted surface shall be tested for paint thickness.
10.8.9.2. The painted surface shall pass the cross hatch adhesion test and impact test as
acceptance tests and Salt spray test and Hardness test as type test as per the relevant
ASTM standards.
NOTE: Supplier shall guarantee the painting performance requirement for a period of not less
than 5 years.
11.0. CORE
11.1. The core shall be constructed from cold rolled, non-ageing, high permeability grade, low
loss, better grain oriented, silicon steel laminations, known as HI-BI or MOH steel trade name.
The maximum flux density in any part of the core and yoke at the rated MVA, Voltage and
Frequency shall be such that under 10% continuous over voltage condition it does not exceed
1.9 Tesla at all tap positions. This has to be ensured during stage inspection; otherwise the unit
will not be accepted. Core assembly shall employ mitred-interleaved joints. Indian transformer
manufacturers shall use core material as per above specification with BIS certification.
11.2. The oxide-silicate coating given on the core steel is adequate. However, laminations
can be insulated at least on one side by hot resistant insulation, other than paper and
varnish, is welcome. The insulation shall be inert to the action of hot transformer oil.
11.3. The design of the magnetic circuit shall be such as to avoid static discharges,
development of short circuit paths within itself or to the earthed clamping structure and the
production of flux components at right angles to the plane of the lamination which may cause
local heating.
11.4. The insulation structure for the core to bolts and core clamp plates shall be such as to
withstand a voltage of 2000V AC for one minute without breakdown after the transformer is
filled with liquid and insulation resistance should be atleast 1 Giga ohm for new
11
transformer. The bolts and clamps, used in the assembly of the core, shall be suitably
insulated with fibre glass tubes and the clamping structure shall be constructed so that eddy
current will be minimum.
11.5. All steel sections, used for supporting the core, shall be thoroughly sand blasted or shot-
blasted after cutting, drilling and welding.
11.6. Adequate lifting lugs shall be provided to enable the core and windings to be lifted.
11.7. Suitable projecting guides shall be provided on core assembly to facilitate removal of
tank, in case Bell type tank construction or the core assembly from the transformer tank
11.8. Core and winding shall be capable of withstanding the shock to which they may be
subjected during transport, installation and service. Adequate provision shall be made to prevent
movement of the core and winding, relative to the tank, during these conditions.
11.9. The core and winding assembly shall be secured independently, with no connections to the
tank cover.
11.10. The supporting frame work of the core shall be so designed, as to avoid the presence of
pockets which would prevent complete emptying of the tank through the drain valve, or cause
trapping of air during filling.
11.11. Oil ducts shall be provided, where necessary, to ensure adequate cooling. The winding
structure and major insulation shall not obstruct the free flow of oil through such ducts. Where
the magnetic circuit is divided into segments by cooling ducts, parallel to the planes of the
laminations or by insulating material above 0.25 mm thick, tinned copper bridging strips shall
be inserted to maintain electrical continuity between segments. The frame work and clamping
arrangements shall be earthed as specified separately, herein.
11.12 The Serial Number of the transformer is to be engraved in the Yoke Plate /
Channel of the Transformer.
12.0.WINDINGS
12
12.1. The conductor shall be of electrolytic grade copper free from scales and burrs. Oxygen
content shall be as per IS 12444. Epoxy bonded Continuously Transposed Conduc-
tor (CTC) shall be used in main winding for rated current of 400 A or more.
12.2. The windings shall be made in dust proof, humidity controlled environment with positive
atmospheric pressure. The supplier shall furnish the facilities available in this regard at
their works, along with the tender offer.
12.3.The conductors shall be transposed at sufficient intervals in order to minimize eddy current
and equalize the distribution of currents and temperature along the windings.
12.4. The maximum current density in any part of the winding at Normal Tap shall not ex-
ceed 240 amps per sq.cm.
12.5. Coils of the windings of identical voltage and ratings shall be interchangeable.
12.6.The star connected winding shall have uniform insulation and shall be made from high-
density paper having high mechanical strength. The neutral point of the star connected
winding shall be insulated for the voltages specified in IS:2026.
12.7.The windings shall be of interleaved continuous disc type designed to reduce the out-of-
balance forces in the transformer to a minimum, at all voltage ratios. They shall withstand
the impulse and power frequency test voltages as specified in this specification.
12.8.The insulation of transformer windings and connections shall be free from insulating com-
pounds which are liable to soften, ooze out, shrink or collapse and be non-catalytic and
chemically in-active in transformer oil during service.
12.9.Coil assembly and insulating spacers shall be so arranged as to ensure free circulation of oil
and to reduce the hot spot temperature of the windings.
12.10.The stacks of windings shall have adequate shrinkage treatment before final
assembly. Adjustable devices shall be provided for taking up any possible shrinkage of
coils in service.
12.11.Coils shall be supported at frequent intervals by means of wedge type insulation spacers
permanently secured in place and arranged to ensure proper oil circulation. To ensure
13
permanent tightness of winding assembly, the insulation spacers shall be dried and com-
pressed at high pressure, before use. Interlayer insulation between tap leads shall be
wound with crape papers of DP>1200 with adequate thickness.
12.12.The completed core and coil assembly shall be dried in vacuum , at not more
than 0.5 mm of mercury absolute pressure and shall be immediately impregnated with
oil after processing to ensure the elimination of air and moisture within the insulation.
12.13.All threaded connections shall be provided with locking facilities. All leads from the wind-
ing to terminal board and bushings shall be framed and fastened rigidly to permallic wood
with adequate clearances to prevent damages from vibration. Where applicable, guide
tubes shall be used for the leads.
12.14.Adequate insulation and clearances between high voltage windings and low voltage wind-
ings shall be provided. All clearances of windings and other live parts shall be adequate
for the normal voltage of operation plus 20%.
12.15.The conductors shall be transposed at sufficient intervals in order to minimise eddy cur-
rent and equalise the distribution of currents and temperature along the windings.
12.16.The connection of all tapping winding segment shall be silver braced. All the winding seg-
ment and joints are to be silver braced except where bracing is not possible they may be
crimped.
12.17.Secondary side Ratio link board to be sturdy and shall be fixed to the top yoke channel
and the material shall be either Permallic wood or fiber glass board.
12.18. The strip conductor wound on edge shall not have a width exceeding six times its
thickness.
12.19. The transformer shall be capable of withstanding the stresses due to short circuits on HV
and LV terminals.
12.20.The core coil assembly shall be securely held in position to avoid any movement under
short circuit conditions. by providing jack bolt or pressure screws.
14
12.21.The barrier insulation including spacers shall be made from high density pre-
compressed pressboard (1.15 gm/cc minimum for load bearing and 0.95 gm/
cc minimum for non-load bearing) to minimize dimensional changes. Kraft in-
sulating paper used on conductor should have density of >0.75 g/cc.
12.22.Wherever required, electrostatic shield, made from material that will withstand the me-
chanical forces, will be used to shield the high voltage windings from the magnetic circuit.
12.23.All insulating materials and structures shall be protected from contamination and the ef-
fects of humidity during and after fabrication, and after receipt, by storing them in a sep -
arate, climate-controlled area. All blocks shall be installed such that the grain is oriented
in the horizontal direction, perpendicular to the winding compressive forces.
12.24.Wherever required, electrostatic shield, made from material that will withstand the me-
chanical forces, will be used to shield the high voltage windings from the magnetic circuit.
12.25.All insulating materials and structures shall be protected from contamination and the ef-
fects of humidity during and after fabrication, and after receipt, by storing them in a sep -
arate, climate-controlled area.
12.26.All blocks shall be installed such that the grain is oriented in the horizontal direction, per -
pendicular to the winding compressive forces.
12.27.Winding paper moisture shall be less than 0.5%.
12.28.Current carrying connections:
The mating faces of bolted connections shall be appropriately finished and prepared for
achieving good long lasting, electrically stable and effective contacts. All lugs for crimping
shall be of the correct size for the conductors. Connections shall be carefully designed to
limit hot spots due to circulating eddy currents.
12.29.Winding Terminations into Bushings:
12.29.1 Winding termination interfaces with bushings shall be designed to allow for repeatable
and safe connection under site conditions to ensure the integrity of the transformer in
service.
15
12.29.2 The winding end termination, insulation system and transport fixings shall be so de-
signed that the integrity of the insulation system generally remains intact during re-
peated work in this area.
12.29.3 Allowances shall be made on the winding ends for accommodating tolerances on the
axial dimensions of the set of bushings and also for the fact that bushings may have to
be rotated to get oil level inspection gauges to face in a direction for ease of inspection
from ground level.
13.0. INSULATING OIL:
13.1. The insulating oil, supplied with the transformer shall be unused, uninhibited New Trans -
former Oil conforming to IEC-60396 : 2020 / IS 335. All the tests, specified in the stan-
dard, shall be carried out for confirmation of the quality on the oil samples, drawn at the
following stages.
i) Prior to filling of the transformer.

ii) Carrying out the Heat-Run test.
iii) After carrying out the Heat-Run test.
iv) Before energizing the transformer at site.
13.2.Oil shall be filtered and tested for breakdown voltage (BDV) and moisture content before
filling. The design and all materials and processes used in the manufacture of the trans-
former shall be such as to reduce to a minimum the risk of the development of acidity in
the oil.
13.3.The insulating oil shall be subjected to testing at the manufacture's works/reputed labora-
tory before supply, in the presence of Inspecting personnel.
13.4.Sufficient quantity of oil necessary for first filling of all tanks, coolers and radiators, conser-
vator(s) shall be supplied in sealed non-returnable containers, suitable for outdoor stor-
age.
13.5.A minimum of 5% of the oil quantity shall be supplied as spare (in addition to first filling)
for maintaining required oil level in case of leakage in tank radiators, conservator etc.,
16
13.6.The tenderer shall furnish the following information in his offer to enable the purchaser, to
procure, if decided to go for separate procurement.
i) Recommended Technical parameters of the oil.
ii) List of manufacturers of oil, who are preferred by the tenderer for the trans-
formers offered by them.
13.7.Where the supplier prefers to dispatch the transformer without oil, due to limitations in the
handling and transport facility, the transformer tank shall be filled with dry Nitrogen or
equivalent inert gas from factory to the respective site after final testing at works, and
provision of spare nitrogen cylinders fitted to the Main tank.
13.8.A gas cylinder, with suitable reducer connection and pressure gauge, shall be supplied to
monitor the pressure of the gas in the tank during transit and storage at site, till comple -
tion of oil filling. These accessories shall become the property of the Purchaser.
13.9.The resistivity of the first filling of transformer oil shall be at least 50x10 12 ohm
cm at 90°C.
14.0.TANK AND TANK ACCESSORIES:
14.1.TANK CONSTRUCTION:
14.1.1. The transformer tank shall be of conventional type construction, with removable top
cover. The transformer tank and cover shall be fabricated from good quality, low carbon
steel, of adequate thickness and shall be designed to withstand
 lifting of the complete transformer with the tank completely filled with oil, by crane or
jacks and transportation, by road or rail , without overstraining any joints and without
causing subsequent leakage of oil.
 Mechanical shocks, during transportation
 Vacuum filling of oil
 Continuous internal pressure of 35 kN/sq.m, over normal hydrostatic pressure of oil.
 Short circuit forces

17
14.1.2.The base of each tank shall be so designed that it shall be possible to move the
complete unit by skidding on metal plates or rails in any direction without injury.
14.1.3. The minimum thickness of the Side & Top tank plate shall be as per ANNEXURE – Ia and
I b respectively. Adequate stiffeners shall be provided , wherever necessary, for general
rigidity and these shall be designed to prevent retention of rain water.
Bottom plate thickness of the Tank

Length of tank (m) Minimum plate thickness (mm)
Over 2.5 m but less than 5m 20
Over 5 m but less than 7.5m 26
Over 7.5 m 32
14.1.4. Wherever possible the transformer tank and its accessories shall be designed without
pockets wherein gas may collect. Where pockets can not be avoided, pipes shall be provided to
vent the gas into the main expansion pipes.
14.1.5. Adequate space shall be provided at the bottom of the tank for collection for
sediments. Suitable guides shall be provided for positioning the core & coil assembly and other
various parts during assembly or dismantling.
14.1.6. All seam and joints, other than those which may have to be opened, shall be welded
and wherever possible, double welded. After completion of construction of tank and before
painting, dye penetration test shall be carried out on welded parts of jacking bosses, lifting
lugs and all load bearing members.
14.2. LIFTING AND HAULAGE FACILITIES
Each tank shall be provided with:
 Lifting lugs, suitable for lifting the transformer complete with oil.
 Pulling eyes shall be provided to facilitate movement of the transformers and they
shall be suitably braced in vertical direction, so that bending does not occur when
the pull has vertical component.
 Lashing lugs.
18
 A minimum of four jacking pads at a height of about 500 mm (from the bottom of
the tank) to enable the transformers, complete with oil, to be raised or lowered
using hydraulic or screw jacks.
14.3. TANK COVER:
14.3.1. The detachable top portion of the cover shall be designed for adequate strength. It
shall be sloped to prevent collection of water on any part. It must be separate from the core
and coil and shall be capable of being lifted separately from the tank for inspecting the core
and winding at site. It shall not distort, when lifted.
14.3.2. Inspection openings shall be provided, as necessary to give easy access to bushings,
core and windings, OLTC, earth connection, etc. Each inspection opening shall be of ample
size for the purpose for which it is provided and at least two openings one at each end of the
tank, shall be provided.
14.3.3. The inspection covers either on the top or on the sides of transformer shall be of
box type to avert trapping of air during oil filling, or gas during incipient faults inside the
transformers, from entering the Bucholtz relay. As an alternative the space under the cover
shall be blanked with a solid insulating material, fitted to the cover itself. The inspection
covers shall not be of stud mounted type.
14.3.4. The tank cover and inspection covers shall be provided with suitable lifting
arrangements. Unless otherwise approved, inspection covers shall not weigh more than 25
kg, each.
14.3.5. The tank cover shall be provided with pockets for the probes/bulbs for oil temperature
and winding temperature indicators. Metal sheath protection shall be provided to the capillary
tubes of the temperature indicators. It shall be possible to remove these bulbs without
lowering the oil in the tank.
14.3.6. The pockets for Temperature indicator shall be fitted with a captive screwed top to
prevent ingress of water.
19
14.3.7. Bushing turrets, covers of inspection openings, thermometer pockets shall not
permit ingress of water into or leakage of oil from the tank.
14.3.8 The Serial Number of the Transformer is to be engraved in the Transformer

Tank also.
15.0. VALVES AND AIR RELEASE PLUGS:
15.1. Each tank shall be fitted with the following valves.
i) Oil valves between each cooler and main tank.
ii) One 80 mm drain valve with padlocking arrangement, located on the low
voltage side of the transformer at the bottom most point of the tank , enabling
complete draining of oil.
iii) Two 50 mm filter valves, one on the top of the tank and at a diagonally opposite end
to that of drain valve and another at the bottom. The bottom valve shall be with
padlocking arrangement. These shall have adoptor suitable for 32 mm hose.
iv) Two sampling valves (size 25 mm) at top and bottom of the main tank, with
provision for fixing PVC pipe.
v) One 15 mm air release plug on the top cover.
15.2. All valves with opening to atmosphere, shall be fitted with blank flanges.
15.3. All valves shall be of gun metal or cast steel bodies with gun metal fittings.
15.4. Valves shall be provided with flanges, having machined faces/ screw connection for
external piping.
15.5. All valves in oil line shall be suitable for continuous operation with transformer
oil at 115°C.
16.0. AXLES AND WHEELS
16.1. The transformers are to be provided with bi-directional flanged wheels and axles of
suitable dimensions and so supported that under any service condition, they shall not
deflect sufficiently to interfere with the movement of the transformer, complete with oil.
20
Suitable locking arrangements shall be provided to prevent the accidental movement of the
transformer.
16.2. All wheels should be detachable and shall be provided with suitable bearings which shall
be rust and corrosion resistant. Fittings for lubrication shall also be provided. The flanged
wheels shall be suitable for use on gauge track and shall be so placed that a pinch bar can
be used to move the transformer. Track shall be of 1435 mm gauge between adjacent rails,
both on longer and shorter axis.
16.3. The wheels shall be arranged so that they can be turned through an angle of 90 deg.
(on both directions) when the tank is jacked up, clear of the rails or floor. Necessary jacking
steps shall be provided . Bi directional wheels with swivel movements and without locking shall
be provided.
16.4. Anti Earthquake Clamping Device:
To prevent transformer movement during earthquake, clamping device shall be provided

for fixing transformer to the foundation. The Bidder shall supply necessary bolts for embedding
in the concrete foundation. The arrangements shall be such that the transformer can be fixed
to or unfastened from these bolts as desired. The fixing of the transformers to the foundations
shall be designed to withstand seismic events to the extent that a static co-efficient of 0.3g.
applied in the direction of least resistance to that loading will not cause the transformer or
clamping devices as well as bolts to be over stressed.
The details of the device used and its adequacy shall be brought out in the additional
information schedule.
17.0. CONSERVATOR TANK AND ITS ACCESSORIES:
17.1. For 50MVA, 110/33KV Power Transformer, the Main conservator shall have air cell type
constant oil pressure to prevent oxidation and contamination of oil due to contact with moisture
and shall be fitted with magnetic oil level gauge with low oil electrically insulated alarm
contacts.
21
For 16MVA, 110/11KV Power Transformer, the Main conservator shall be of
conventional type and fitted with magnetic oil level gauge with low oil electrically insulated
alarm contacts.
17.2. OLTC conservator shall have conventional type conservator with prismatic oil level
gauge.
17.3. The conservator shall have adequate capacity between the highest and the lowest
visible levels to meet the requirement of expansion of the total cold oil volume in the
transformer and cooling equipment from the minimum ambient temperature to 100C or 7.5%
of the total volume of oil in the main tank whichever is higher.
17.4. One end of the conservator shall have bolted cover so that it can be removed for cleaning.
17.5. The conservator shall be bolted into position so that it can be removed for cleaning
purpose.
17.6. The conservator shall be fitted in such a position, as not to obstruct the electrical
connections to the transformer & lifting of the OLTC units.
17.7. The conservator shall be provided with one 50 mm flanged valve for oil filling and this
shall have a bend pipe extension arrangement attached to the valve flange and
blanked to avoid entry of water, if fitted on the top.
17.8. The conservator shall be provided with one 50 mm flanged valve to completely drain the
oil from the conservator.
17.9. a) The conservator shall have provision to receive one 80mm dia. feed pipe from the main
tank, fitted with Bucholtz relay with two shut off valves on either side of the Bucholtz
relay. Of the two valves one shall be on the conservator side, beyond a length of
240mm (3 times the internal diameter of the pipe line) and another on the main tank
side beyond a length of 400mm (5 times the internal diameter of the pipe line) from
the Bucholtz relay.
b) The feed pipe shall be free from sharp bends and make an inclination of 3  to 7 to
the horizontal.
22
c) The feed pipe shall extend inside the conservator for at least 25mm so as to form a
sump inside the conservator.
17.10. The main conservator tank shall be provided with a ladder at a convenient location so as
to reach it easily for inspection.
17.9. MAGNETIC OIL LEVEL GAUGE:
17.9.1. The conservator shall be fitted with one magnetic oil level gauge having,
i) Dial with minimum, maximum and normal (at 30o C) oil level markings and a pointer.
MOG with reflector type is accepted.
ii) Low oil level alarm contacts of 0.5 Amp. 220V D. C. Rating.
17.10 OIL SEALING SYSTEM:

17.10.1. The Main conservator shall be fitted with breathers to prevent oxidation and
contamination of oil by the atmospheric oxygen/moisture. 2 Nos. of breathers (of identical)
in series, with a valve shall be provided. Separate breathers shall be provided for the main and
OLTC portion of the conservator. A separate 2 Nos. of silica gel breathers in series with its
pipe line is to be provided for the OLTC portion of the conservator. Design shall be such that,,
i) The passage of air is through silicagel, not less than 1 kg for every 3500 litres of
oil in the tank.
ii) The silicagel is isolated from atmosphere by an oil seal.
iii) The moisture absorption, indicated by a change in colour of the tinted crystals, can
be easily seen from a distance.
17.10.2. The Breathers shall be mounted at an approximate height of 1,400 mm above
ground level.
18.0. PRESSURE RELIEF DEVICE
18.1. Adequate number of pressure relief devices of sufficient size (atleast two numbers, one
on each end) shall be provided at suitable locations for rapid release of any pressure that may
be generated inside the tank and which may result in damage to the equipment. They shall be
mounted directly on the tank without any pipe for mounting. If mounted on the tank cover, they
shall be away from the active parts of the transformer and the openings in the top cover shall be
23
provided with a skirt, extending 25 mm inside the tank and holding a deflector plate, sufficiently
away from the opening, so as to avert inadvertent trapping of gas during incipient fault inside
the transformer. The device shall operate at a static pressure less than the hydraulic test
pressure of transformer tank. Suitable hood shall be provided to prevent ingress of rain in such
a way that it shall not hinder the actuation of flag provided in the PRD.
18.2 It is desirable to provide the PRV on the top cover. If there is any constraint in the space
on the top cover, in such cases the PRV may be fixed directly on one side of the main tank
below the top cover.
18.3. The pressure relief device shall be of safety valve type, capable of resealing after any
pressure developed inside the tank is released. It shall be provided with switches for
actuating trip contacts, when it acts. The switches shall be able to reset, once the pressure is
released, only by manually.
18.4. SUDDEN PRESSURE RELAY/RAPID PRESSURE RISE RELAY:
18.4.1. One number of Sudden Pressure Relay/ Rapid Pressure Rise Relay with trip
contact (Terminal connection plug & socket type arrangement) shall be provided on tank of
transformer. Operating features and size shall be reviewed during design review.
Suitable canopy shall be provided to prevent ingress of rain water. Pressurised water
ingress test for Terminal Box (routine tests) shall be conducted on Sudden Pressure Relay/
Rapid Pressure Rise Relay.
18.4.2. Pressurised water ingress test for Terminal Box (routine tests) shall be conducted on
Sudden Pressure Relay/ Rapid Pressure Rise Relay.
19.0. EARTHING ARRANGEMENTS
19.1. All metal parts of the transformer with exception of the individual core laminations,
core bolts and associated individual clamping plates shall be maintained at some fixed potential.
19.2. EARTHING OF CORE CLAMPING STRUCTURE
Main core clamping structure at the top shall be connected to the tank body by a copper
strip. The bottom clamping structure shall be earthed by one or more of the following methods.
24
a) By connecting through vertical tie-rods to the top structure.
b) By direct metal-to -metal contact with the tank base maintained by the weight of
the core and winding.
c) By connection to the top structure on the same side of the core as the main earth
connection to the tank.
19.3. EARTHING OF MAGNETIC CIRCUIT:
19.3.1. The magnetic circuit shall be earthed to the clamping structure at one point only through
a link placed in an accessible position beneath an inspection opening in the tank cover, the
connection to the link shall be on the same side of the core as the main earth connection.
19.3.2. Magnetic circuits having an insulated sectional construction shall be provided with a
separate link for each individual section. Where oil ducts insulating barriers parallel to the plane
the laminations divide the magnetic circuit in to two or more electrically separate parts the ducts
or barriers shall be bridged and the magnetic circuit shall not be regarded as being of sectional
construction.
19.4. EARTHING OF COIL CLAMPING RINGS:
Where coil clamping rings are of metal, each ring shall be connected to the adjacent core
clamping structure on the same side of transformer as the main earth connections, so as to
maintain at earth potential.
19.5 SIZE OF EARTHING CONNECTION
All earthing connections with the exception of those from the individual coil clamping
rings shall have a cross sectional area of not less than 0.8 sq.cm. Connections inserted
between laminations of different sections of core and shall have a cross sectional area of not
less than 0.2 sq.cm.
19.6. Two earthing pads, at diagonally opposite external ends of the main tank, at its bottom,
capable of carrying the short circuit current for 3 seconds without injurious heating, shall be
provided with clamp type terminal for external connection.
25
20.0. RATING AND DIAGRAM PLATES
20.1. The following plates, suitable for outdoor use, shall be fixed to the transformer tank, at
an average height of about 1750 mm above ground level.
(a) A rating plate, of not less than 300 X 300 mm size , bearing the data specified in the
appropriate clause of IS 2026.The details of the current transformers and normal
operating pressure of PRV may also be indicated.
(b) A diagram plate, showing the internal connections and also the voltage vector
relationship of the several windings in accordance with IS 2026 and in addition a plan
view of the transformer giving the correct physical relationship of the terminals. No-
load voltage shall also be indicated for each tap.
(c) A plate, showing the location and function of all valves and air release cocks or plugs.
This plate shall also warn operators to refer to the maintenance instructions before
applying the vacuum treatment for drying.
(d) A plate showing the schematic wiring diagram of the respective cubicle may be
provided in the cubicle.
(e)Guarantee period should be engraved in the name plate
(f) The Nameplate details of all Bushing CTs including WTI shall be engraved and fixed on
the respective turrets. The details shall not be worn-out during all climatic conditions,
in cases where turrets are not provided.
(g)The details of the CTs shall be provided separately along with the main Name plate
details.
(h)If the transformer has failed within the guarantee period the date of repair
and the subsequent validity of Guarantee period (s) are to be engraved in
the Name plate.
(i) The rating diagram and other plates shall be of brass or stainless steel.
(j) FOR (D) Unit Price of the Transformer shall be engraved in the name plate.
26
21.0. JOINTS AND GASKETS:
21.1. All gaskets used for making oil tight joints shall be of proven material such as neoprene
RC 70 C grade granulated cork bonded gaskets conforming to IS:4253, unless otherwise
specified.
21.2 All bolted joints shall be fitted with weather proof, hot oil resistant gaskets in between, for
complete oil tightness. Special attention shall be given to the oil tight joints between the tank
and the cover and the bushing ,the turrets, covers of inspection openings, thermometer pockets
etc and the other outlets to prevent ingress of water into or leakage of oil even under hot
condition from the tank. If gasket is compressible, metallic stops shall be provided to prevent
over compression.
21.3 One complete set of gaskets shall be supplied with the transformer additionally, for all
openings.
22.0. TERMINAL ARRANGEMENT
A) BUSHING:
22.1 HV (110 KV) bushings shall be RIP Bushings. Resin Impregnated Paper with
Polymer Housing Bushing )
22.2 LV Bushings shall be of porcelain and leads shall be brought out of the tank
22.3 The Neutral Bushing and support insulator Bushings shall be of porcelain Bushing only.
The Neutral Bushing leads shall be brought out of the tank.
The rating of the neutral bushings shall meet the BIL of the neutral point.
22.4 The Type Test conducted on HV (110 KV) and LV and Neutral Bushings shall be
within seven (7) years on the date of tender opening.
22.5 Bushings shall be robust and designed for adequate cantilever strength to meet the re-
quirement of seismic condition, substation layout and movement along with the spare trans-
former with bushing erected and provided with proper support from one foundation to another
27
foundation within the substation area. The electrical and mechanical characteristics of bushings
shall be in accordance with IS / IEC: 60137. All details of the bushing shall be submitted for ap-
proval and design review.
22.6 Oil filled condenser type bushing shall be provided with at least following fittings:
a. Oil level gauge
b. Tap for capacitance and tan delta test. Test taps relying on pressure contacts
against the outer earth layer of the bushing is not
c. Oil filling plug & drain valve (if not hermetically sealed)
22.7 Bushing shall be provided with tap for capacitance and tan delta test. Test taps re-
lying on pressure contacts against the outer earth layer of the bushing is not acceptable.
22.8 Where current transformers are specified, the bushings shall be removable without dis-
turbing the current transformers.
22.9 Bushings of identical rating of different makes shall be interchangeable to optim-

ise the requirement of spares. The standard dimensions for lower portion of the condenser
bushings shall be followed.
22.10 Polymer insulator shall be seamless sheath of a silicone rubber compound. The hous-
ing & weather sheds should have silicon content of minimum 30% by weight. It should
protect the bushing against environmental influences, external pollution and humidity. The inter-
face between the housing and the core must be uniform and without voids. The strength of the
bond shall be greater than the tearing strength of the polymer. The manufacturer shall follow
non-destructive technique (N.D.T.) to check the quality of jointing of the housing interface with
the core. The technique being followed with detailed procedure and sampling shall be finalized
during finalization of MQP.
22.11 The weather sheds of the insulators shall be of alternate shed profile as per IS 16683-3/
IEC 60815-3. The weather sheds shall be vulcanized to the sheath (extrusion process) or moul-
ded as part of the sheath (injection moulding process) and free from imperfections. The vulcan -
28
ization for extrusion process shall be at high temperature and for injection moulding shall be at
high temperature & high pressure.
22.12 Any seams/ burrs protruding axially along the insulator, resulting from the injection
moulding process shall be removed completely without causing any damage to the housing. The
track resistance of housing and shed material shall be class 1A4.5 according to IS 9947.
22.13 The strength of the weather shed to sheath interface shall be greater than the tearing
strength of the polymer. The polymer insulator shall be capable of high pressure wash-
ing.
22.14 End fittings shall be free from cracks, seams, shrinks, air holes and rough edges. End fit-
tings should be effectively, sealed to prevent moisture ingress, effectiveness of sealing system
must be supported by test documents. All surfaces of the metal parts shall be perfectly smooth
with the projecting points or irregularities which may cause corona. All load bearing surfaces
shall be smooth and uniform so as to distribute the loading stresses uniformly.
22.15 The hollow silicone composite insulators shall comply with the requirements of IEC-61462
and the relevant parts of IEC-62217. The design of the composite insulators shall be tested and
verified according to IEC-61462 (Type & Routine test).
22.16 Clamps and fittings shall be of hot dip galvanised/stainless steel.
22.17 Bushing turrets shall be provided with vent pipes, to route any gas collection through the
Buchholz relay.
22.18 No arcing horns shall be provided on the bushings.
22.19 Corona shield, wherever required, shall be provided at bushing terminal (air end)
to minimize corona. Stress shield for the bushings shall be considered as an integral part of the
bushing- assembly.
22.20 Bushing shall be specially packed to avoid any damage during transit and suitable for long
storage, with non-returnable packing wooden boxes with hinged type cover. Without any gap
between wooden planks. Packing Box opening cover with nails/screws type packing arrange-
ment shall not be acceptable. Manufacturer shall submit drawing/ documents of packing for ap-
29
proval during detail engineering. Detail method for storage of bushing including accessories shall
be brought out in the instruction manual.
22.21 Oil end portion of RIP/RIS type bushings shall be fitted with metal housing with positive
dry air pressure and a suitable pressure monitoring device shall be fitted on the metal housing
during storage to avoid direct contact with moisture with epoxy. The pressure of dry air need to
be maintained in case of leakage.
22.22 Tan delta measurement at variable frequency (in the range of 20 Hz to 350 Hz)
shall be carried out on each condenser type bushing (RIP/ RIS) at Transformer man-
ufacturing works as routine test before despatch and the result shall be compared at site
during commissioning to verify the healthiness of the bushing.
22.23 Tan δ value of RIP/RIS condenser bushing shall be 0.005 (max.) in the tem-
perature range of 10°C to 40°C. If Tan Delta is measured at a temperature beyond
above mentioned limit, necessary correction factor as per IEEE shall be applicable.
22.24 All bushings shall be equipped with suitable terminals and terminal clamps of approved
type and size and all external current carrying contact surfaces shall be adequately silver plated.
Main terminals shall be solderless. Flexible connectors shall be made from tinned copper sheets.
Size of terminal/ conductor for which the clamp is suitable and the rated current shall be em-
bossed/ punched.
22.25 Each bushing shall be co-ordinated with the insulation class of the winding.
22.26 All porcelain, used in bushings, shall be homogeneous and free from cavities or other
flaws. The glazing shall be uniform in colour and free from blisters, burrs and other defects. The
glaze shall be brown.
22.27 Bushing-turrets shall be provided with vent pipes which shall be connected to route the
gas collection if any, through the Buchholz relay. The bushings shall be removable without dis-
turbing the current transformers.
30
22.28 Specific requirements of bushings and their ratings etc, are given in the Annexure-I. The
Bushing Terminals on HV side shall be of outdoor type provided with clamping arrangement
(shall be of free end type) and Suitable Bi – metallic sleeves to receive the 3’’ Aluminum Bus bar.
22.29. TERMINAL CONNECTORS FOR BUSHING (OUTDOOR TYPE)
a. Bushing terminals on HV side (RIP Bushing), shall be out door type provided with clamping
arrangement (shall be of free end type) and suitable bi-metallic sleeves to receive 3" Alu -
minium bus bar.
b. Bushing terminals on LV side shall be provided with clamping arrangement and suitable
bimetallic sleeves to receive ‘ZEBRA’ conductor. The clamp shall be such that the conduc-
tor takes off from the bushings vertically.
c. The connectors shall be designed for minimum 120% of the maximum current carrying ca-
pacity of the conductor and the temperature rise under any condition shall not be
more than 50% of that in the main conductor.
d. All the terminal connectors to be provided shall conform to IS:5561 of latest issue and
shall be of type tested design.
e. All castings shall be free from blow holes, surface blisters, cracks and cavities. All sharp
edges and corners shall be blurred and rounded off.
f. All ferrous parts shall be hot dip galvanised conforming to IS:2633. For bimetallic clamps
copper alloy liner of minimum 2 mm thickness shall be cast integral with aluminium
body.
g. Size of the terminal/conductor for which the clamp/connector is suitable shall be em-
bossed/punched on each clamp/connector.
h. Neutral bushing terminal shall be suitable to receive 2 Nos. 75X12 mm G.I flats placed
side by side on insulators up to ground level. Necessary outdoor type porcelain insulators,
GI flats and bi-metallic sleeves shall also be supplied.
23.0. BUSHING CURRENT TRANSFORMERS:
31
23.1 Bushing current transformers of required ratio PS class may be provided in the bushing
turrets of HV, LV and neutral ends of each phase for restricted earth fault protection. The
requirement of the bushing current transformers shall be as per ANNEXURE – Ic & Id
respectively.
23.2. The current transformers shall be of low resistance type, complying with I.S 2705,
Part-IV of latest issue. The current transformers on HV and LV sides shall have matching
characteristics to the extent feasible to have differential protection scheme more effective. The
bushing current transformers shall be housed in separate turrets and shall not be an in-built unit
of the transformer. The housing of current transformers shall be so arranged that bushing can
be removed, without disturbing the current transformers. The magnetization characteristic
curves, indicating the knee point voltage, excitation current and secondary resistance shall be
furnished.
23.3. It shall be possible to remove the current transformers from the tank without removing
the tank cover. Necessary precautions shall be taken to minimise the eddy currents and local
heat generation in the turret.
23.4. All secondary leads shall be brought into a terminal box near each bushing. The
terminals shall be wired up to marshalling box, using separate cables for each core.
23.5 The Nameplate details of all Bushing CTs including WTI shall be engraved and fixed on
the respective turrets. The details shall not be worn-out during all climatic conditions, in cases
where turrets are not provided the details of the CTs shall be provided separately along with the
main Name plate details.
23.6 The secondary termination from the CTs to the terminal blocks shall only be lugged and
no eyeing shall be made
24.0. VOLTAGE CONTROL EQUIPMENT (ON LOAD TAP CHANGER)
24.1 The transformer shall be provided with reputed make voltage control equipment of the on-
load tap changing type for varying its specified effective transformation ratio as furnished in
Annexure I SL.NO.15, without producing phase displacement and suitable for remote control
operation from switch board in the control room, in addition to being capable of local-manual
32
as well as local-electrical operation. The design, manufacture and performance of the OLTC shall
comply with the CBIP regulations, other statutes and safety codes and IS 8468 of latest issue.
The transformer supplier shall ensure the above.
24.2. a) On Load Tap Changer shall be sourced from reputed manufacturer and it should be
type tested as per relevant IEC 60214 and test methods shall be in full conformance to the
procedures indicated in IEC 60214.
b) The on-load tap changer shall include the following:
a) An oil immersed divertor switch of transition resistor type.
b) Motor driven mechanism for local as well as remote operation.
c) Control and protective devices.
d) Remote Tap Changer control panel.
e) Annunciation schemes.
f) Local - manual operating device.
24.3. The tap changing switches and mechanism shall be mounted in oil tanks or compartments
mounted in an accessible position on the transformer tank. It shall not be possible for the oil in
the divertor switch to mix with oil in the transformer tank. The OLTC oil shall be of the same
EHV grade oil as used for the main transformer or of higher quality insulating oil and low
viscosity is preferred. The oil in the OLTC compartment shall be maintained under conservator
head by means of a pipe connection from the highest point of the chamber to the OLTC
conservator. This connection shall be controlled by a suitable valve, and shall be arranged so
that any gas leaving the chamber will pass into the gas and oil actuated relay. This surge
relay shall be of reputed make.
24.4. The OLTC chamber shall have oil filling valve, air release plug, pressure relief device, tap
position indicator, oil sampling valve and provision for circulation of oil in the OLTC
compartment and equalization of OLTC compartment and main tank during application of
vacuum. Necessary pipes, valves, blanking plates etc for the above purpose shall form part of
the accessories.
33
24.5. The tap changer shall be so mounted that top cover of the transformer can be lifted
without removing the connections between the windings and the tap changer.
24.6. It is preferable that the contact be accessible for inspection without lowering oil level in
the main tank and the contact tips shall be replaceable. Special tools and tackles if any,
required for maintenance of OLTC gear shall be supplied.
24.7. The divertor switch or arcing switch shall be designed so as to ensure that its operation
once commenced shall be completed independent of the operation of the control relays or
switches, failure of auxiliary supply etc. OLTC shall have a mechanical fuse incorporated in the
design to ensure the protection of diverter switch in the event of an undue mechanical stress on
the Tap changer.
24.8. Drive mechanism chamber shall be mounted on to the transformer tank, in an accessible
position. It shall be adequately ventilated and provided with anti-condensation metal clad
heater. All contactors, relay coils or other parts shall be protected against corrosion or
deterioration due to condensation, fungi, etc.
i) The Tap selector contacts shall not be of the threaded type to ensure positive, full face
and firm contact from Transformer leads to tap changer.
ii) No continuity break shall be allowed during changeover between any two taps. The
OLTC shall be tested for the same by ensuing that there is no open circuit showing while
changing two taps.
iii) OLTC design should have been seismic tested and qualified.
iv) OLTC manufacturer shall conduct the following routine tests fully in compliance with IEC 60214 on every unit, as
given below, before despatch to assure the quality of the products.
Sl. No. IEC Reference - Test Description

1. Cl.5.3.1 - Mechanical Test
2. Cl.5.3.2 - Sequence Test
3. Cl.5.3.3 - Auxiliary circuits Insulation Tests
4. Cl.5.3.4 - Pressure Test
34
5. Cl.5.3.4 - Vacuum Test
All the relevant test reports shall be submitted along with the test report of transformer
for approval.
v) The Tap Changer shall be suitably protected through Oil Surge Relay. This surge relay
shall be tested for an Oil flow velocity of 1.20+/- 0.20 m/s.
24.9. The whole of the drive mechanism shall be of robust design and capable of giving
satisfactory service and shall not require frequent maintenance under the operating conditions
met with, in service.
24.10. A permanently legible lubrication chart shall be fitted within the driving mechanism
chamber.
24.11. The OLTC driving mechanism and its associated control equipment shall be mounted in
an outdoor, weather-proof and vermin proof housing which shall include
a) Driving motor, operating on 3 phase 415V, 50HZ AC supply.
b) Remote/local electrical and local manual selector switch. It shall control in
the following manner.
(i) When the selector switch is in LOCAL position, it shall be possible to operate
the RAISE/LOWER control switches. Remote control of RAISE/LOWER
functions shall be prevented.
(ii) When the selector switch is in REMOTE, the RAISE/LOWER switches in the local
control cubicle shall become inoperative. Remote control of the RAISE, LOWER
functions shall be possible from the remote control panel. The local REMOTE
selector switch shall have at least two spare contacts per position which are
closed in that position.
c) Motor starting contactor with thermal overload relay, isolating switch and MCB to protect
the motor from overloading. All relays, switches, MCBs etc. shall be mounted in the drive
mechanism chamber and shall be clearly marked for the purpose of identification.
35
d) Limit switch, to prevent motor over-travel in either direction.
e) Counter (digital type), to indicate the number of operations completed.
f) Electrically interlocked reversing contactors.
g) Space heaters with switches.
h) Master/follower selector switch.
i) Cable termination glands for power and control cables.
j) Interior lighting with door switch.
k) Auxiliary relays.
l) Mechanical tap- position indicator.
m) Manual operating device. This cranking device for manual operation shall be
removable and suitable for operation by man at ground level. It shall have mechanical
stops to prevent over cranking of the mechanism beyond the extreme tap
positions. The mechanism shall have interlock with the motor to block motor-start-up
during manual operation.
n) Necessary lamp indications and annunciation schemes of various operations of OLTC

gear from RTCC panel.
O) RAISE-LOWER CONTROL SWITCH shall be spring loaded to return to the centre

OFF position and shall require movement to the RIGHT, to raise the voltage
of the transformer. Movement to LEFT shall lower the voltage of the transformer.
This switch shall be operative only when the LOCAL/REMOTE SELECTOR switch is in
LOCAL position.
p) In OLTC lugs, terminal numbers should be punched.

24.12. TAP CHANGER CONTROL REQUIREMENTS :
24.12.1. It shall not be possible for any two controls (ie. MANUAL, LOCAL
ELECTRICAL, REMOTE) to be in operation at the same time.
36
24.12.2. It shall be capable of permitting parallel operation with transformers of the same
ratio, say maximum four units.
24.12.3. Suitabe selector switch shall be provided, so that, any one transformer of the group
can at a time be selected as 'Master' 'Follower' or independent.
24.12.4. An ou-of-step device with timer contacts shall be provided, which shall be
arranged to prevent further tap-changing when transformers in a group, operating in 'Parallel
control' are one tap out-of-step.
24.12.5. The eqipment shall be suitable for supervisory control and indication with "Make
before Break" multi-way switch, having one potential free contact for each tap position.
This switch shall be provided in addition to any other switch/switches which may be required for
the purpose of remote tap position indication. All other components of the supervisory gear, if
required, shall be provided separately.
24.12.6. Operation from the local or remote control switch shall cause one tap movement only,
until the control switch is returned to the 'off' position between successive operations.
24.12.7. All electrical control switches and the local operating gear shall be clearly labeled in
a suitable manner to indicate the direction of tap-changing.
24.12.8. Limit switches to prevent motor 'over-travel' in either direction may be loated in the
control circuit of the operating motor, provided with a mechanical declutching mechanism.
24.12.9. Necesary interlock, blocking the independent controls when the units are in
parallel, shall be provided.
24.12.10. A time delay relay for INCOMPLETE STEP alarm, consisting of a normally open
contact, which closes, if the tap changer fails to make a complete tap change. The alarm shall
not operate momentarily for loss of auxiliary supply.
25.0. COOLING EQUIPMENTS:
25.1. COOLER:
37
25.1.1. The cooler shall be supplied with the requisite number of radiators. The wall thickness
of radiator shall be not less than 1.2 mm complying as per IS 513.
25.1.2. Each radiator shall be designed to withstand the pressure test. When assembled, they
shall be accessible for cleaning and painting. Each radiator unit shall be provided with the
following:
(a) An 80 mm shut-off valve at each point of connection to the header/

transformer tank
(b) Removable blanking plates to permit blanking-off the oil connection
(c) A drain valve of size 25mm at the lowest point
(d) Air release plug of 15 mm dia. at the highest point
(e) Lifting lugs
25.1.3 The clearance between all pipe work and live parts shall be more than the clearance for
live parts to earth.
25.1.4 The radiator bank shall be designed for same pressure and vacuum conditions as
specified for main tank.
25.1.5 The Manufacturer shall furnish the calculations including the detailed design of the cool-
ing system after awarding of contract to analyze the performance.
25.1.6. For the cooler circuits Two (2) grounding terminals suitable for termination
of two (2) Nos. 75x12 mm galvanised steel flats.
25.2 OIL PIPING AND FLANGES:
25.2.1. Necessary oil piping shall be provided for connecting each transformer to the coolers and
oil pumps. The oil piping shall be with flanged gasketed joints. Cast iron pipes shall not be
used.
25.2.2. A suitable expansion piece (expandable metallic bellow) shall be provided, in each oil
pipe connection, between the transformer and the separately mounted oil coolers.
38
25.2.3. Drain valves/plugs shall be provided in order that each sections of pipe work can be
drained independently. Drain valves shall be provided with blanking plates.
25.2.4. The drilling of all pipe flanges shall comply with IS:3639.
25.3. OIL PUMPS FOR 50MVA:
25.3.1. Each forced oil cooler shall be provided with two 100%, motor driven, oil pumps of the
on-line type and of adequate capacity, out of which, one will be connected standby. The oil
pump shall be of impeller type to permit oil circulation when the pump is idle.
25.3.2. It shall be possible to remove the pump and motor from the oil circuit without having to
lower the level of oil in the transformers or coolers and without having to disturb the pump
foundation fixing. Oil pump shall be capable of dealing with the maximum output of transformer
and total head which may occur in service and with the varying head due to changes in the
viscosity of the oil.
25.3.3. Each pump assembly shall be provided with an oil flow indicator with alarm contacts to
indicate normal pump operation and oil flow.
25.3.4. A Measures shall be taken to prevent mal-operation of Buchholz relay when all oil pumps
are simultaneously put into service. Suitable baffles shall be provided inside the tank at oil inlet
points when forced oil circulation is used.
25.4. AIR BLOWERS/FANS:
25.4.1. Adequate number of air blowers/fans, for use with oil coolers shall be provided. They
shall be suitable for continuous outdoor operation; Two numbers connected - standby air-
blowers, one in each cooler bank, shall also be provided additionally.
25.4.2. Air blowers/fans shall be capable of withstanding the stresses, imposed when
brought up to speed by the direct application of full line voltage to the motor.
25.4.3. Air blowers/fans shall be complete with all necessary air-ducting and coolers shall be
designed so that they operate with a minimum of noise or drumming. They shall not be
mounted-on to the radiators and must be physically separate from the radiators. It shall be
39
possible to remove the blower complete with motor, without disturbing or dismantling the
cooler structure frame work.
25.4.4. If fans are mounted at a height less than 2.5 m, suitably painted wire-mesh guards
with a mesh, not greater than 25 mm, shall be provided to prevent accidental contact with the
blades. Fans mounted at more than 2.5 m, height, shall be provided with outside guards
against birdage. Fans shall be so mounted that hot air shall not get directed towards the
transformer.
25.5. MOTORS:
25.5.1.Motors shall be of the squirrel cage, totally enclosed, weather proof type and shall comply
with IS:325. The motors shall be capable of operating at all loads without undue vibration and
with a minimum noise. They shall be suitable for direct starting and for continuous running from
415-440 volts, three phase, 4 wire, 50 Hz supply.
25.5.2. Motors shall also be capable of continuous operation at 85 percent of the nominal
voltage, at normal frequency, without injurious overheating. Motors shall be provided with
thermal overload and short circuit protection.
25.6. LOCAL COOLER CONTROL CUBICLE:
25.6.1. Each transformer shall be supplied with outdoor type, vermin and weather proof local
cooler control cubicle for accommodating the control gears of the cooling fans and pumps,
besides cable termination from remote tap changer control panel and other transformer
accessories.
25.6.2. The cooler control cubicle shall be provided with three pole, electrically operated,
contactor and with control gears of suitable design, both for starting and stopping the
individual oil pumps and groups of cooling fans, manually and also automatically, from the
contacts of the Winding Temperature Indicating device. These shall be accommodated in the
local cooler control cubicle.
25.6.3. The local control panel shall have all necessary devices meant for cooler control viz.
(a) MCBs of adequate capacity for main supply.
40
(b) Protection against over load
(c) Protection against single phasing
(d) Selector switch for Manual/Automatic operation of individual pump
& groups of cooling fans.
(e) Selector switch for Local/Remote operation of individual pumps and
groups of cooling fans.
(f) Pump control ON/OFF/Test for each pump. (for applicable capacity)
(g) Fan control ON/OFF/Test for each fan.
25.6.4. The following additional terminals shall be provided in the cooler control cubicle for
remote indication.
a) Oil flow fail alarm.

b) Cooling fan trip (for each group of fans & standby)
c) Cooler pump trip (for each pumps in service & standby)
d) Cooler supply failure.
e) Low oil level alarm.
25.6.5. The following initiating contacts for lamp indicators shall be provided for local as well
as remote indication
(a) Cooling system is on 'Manual' control

(b) Cooling system is on 'Automatic control'.
(c) Selector switch is in 'Auto' or 'Manual'or 'Local'
(d) Pump 'ON', pump 'OFF' for each pump.
(e) Fan 'ON' / 'OFF' for each group each group of fan and each pump.
(f) Oil flow failure.
25.6.6. All the fans are to be properly earthed individually and to be terminated with
the main earth suitably.
26.0. GAS AND OIL ACTUATED RELAYS (BUCHHOLZ RELAY):
26.1. Double float gas detector relay (Buchholz relay) conforming to IS 3637 shall be
provided with the following:
41
a) Two electrically independent ungrounded contacts to cause an alarm and tripping
in the event of accumulation of gas and sudden changes in oil pressure.
b) Shut off valve of 80mm on either side of the relay and flange coupling, to
permit easy removal , without lowering oil level in the main tank.
c) A drain plug at the bottom most point of the relay-casing.
d) A test cock suitable for a flexible pipe connection for checking its operation and taking
gas sample
e) A copper or stainless steel tube shall be connected from the gas collector to a valve
located at about 1200 mm above ground level to facilitate sampling, with the
transformer in service
f) Locking arrangement during transport.
g) The relay with Mercury switches is dispensed with and Buchholz relay with reed
type is acceptable.
h) The Buchholz relay should be insensitive to vibrations and shocks with acceleration up
to 0.5 g.
i) The protection cables to the Buchholz relay shall be terminated only on the side or in
the bottom of the relay.
j) The termination Box shall be dust and water resistance proof.
26.2. The arrangement for mounting this relay, the associated pipe work and the cooling
plant shall be such that all gas emitted from the transformer shall pass into the relay and
mal-operation of the relays shall not take place under normal service conditions.
27.0. TEMPERATURE INDICATORS/CONTROLLERS:
27.1. OIL TEMPERATURE INDICATOR (OTI):
The transformer shall be provided with one 150 mm dial type, oil-temperature indicator
for indicating top oil temperature. The indicator shall have two adjustable electrically
independent, ungrounded contacts with micro switches and maximum reading pointer. The
42
temperature sensing element shall be suitably located in a pocket on the top of the transformer
and shall be connected to the oil temperature indicator by means of capillary tubing protected
with a metal sheath. The accuracy class of the OTI shall be ±1.00 % of full scale deflection.
27.2. WINDING TEMPERATURE INDICATOR (WTI):
The transformer shall also be provided with a device for indicating the temperature of
the winding (HV / LV). It shall comprise the following:
a) Temperature sensing element suitably located on the top cover of the transformer
b) Image coil
c) Auxiliary CTs, if required to match the image coil, shall be mounted in the cooler control
cabinet.
d) 150 mm dial, local indicating instrument with maximum reading pointer, mounted in the
cooler control cabinet and two adjustable electrically independent, ungrounded contacts
with micro switches (besides that required for control of cooling equipment). The
tripping contacts shall be adjustable to close between 60 o C and 120 o
C and alarm
contacts to close between 50o C and 100o C and both shall re-open when the
temperature has fallen by a desired amount between 5 o C and 20  C. All contacts shall
be adjustable on a scale. They shall be accessible on removal of the cover and it shall
be possible to check the operation of the contacts and associated equipments.
Connections from the contacts shall be brought down to the terminal BLOCK, placed
inside the marshalling Box. The accuracy class of the WTI shall be ±1.00 %.
e) Calibration device
28.0. MARSHALLING BOX:
The Marshalling Box shall be tank mounted type and shall not hinder the ccess to
inspection covers, vermin and weather proof marshalling box, shall be provided with a controlled
metal-clad heater to accommodate the following :
(a) Temperature indicators/controllers.
43
(b) Terminal blocks, made up of molded, non inflammable plastic material with adequate
size terminals, washers, binding screws/nuts for external wire connections, a white
marking strip for circuit identification and a molded plastic cover.
(c) Suitable glands with gland plates for incoming and outgoing cables, meant
for oil level alarm, Temperature alarm/Trip, Buchholtz alarm/trip,
annunciation and indication provisions for RTCC panel etc.
(d) The internal wiring provided in the marshalling Box shall be of FRLS 1100/650V grade
stranded copper conductor, PVC insulated, PVC sheathed, steel wire armoured and PVC
jacketed cable of required size as applicable.
(e) Isolator Transformer of adequate capacity shall be provided for the Main AC control
supply in Marshalling Box.
(f) Suitable three (3) phase MCB with Neutral (3 phase 4 way MCB) and socket of
current rating of 32 Amps shall be provided for AC supply arrangement.
(g) The provision for stand by AC supply to the marshalling box from the control room is
required.
(h) The terminal Box wiring pertaining to CTs shall be independent and not combined with
annunciation and other indication circuits.
29.0. AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY CONTROL PANEL FOR OLTC AND COOLER
CONTROL
29.1. Auxiliary power supply shall be provided by the purchaser at one place for OLTC control
and cooler control.
29.2. Control cabinet for OLTC control and cooler control shall be of free standing, floor
mounting type.
29.3. Control cabinet can be made out of 3 mm thick sheet steel or 10mm thick
aluminium plate / Aluminium casting. Hinged door shall be provided with padlocking
arrangement. Sloping Rain-hood shall be provided to cover all sides. 15mm thick Neoprine or
better type of gaskets shall be provided to ensure high degree of protection as per IS2147. The
painting shall be as specified earlier.
44
29.4. Auxiliary electrical equipments to be supplied by the tenderer shall be suitable for
operation on the following supply system :
a. Power devices like drive motors rating 1 KW 415V, 3 phase 4 wire 50 Hz, neutral
and above grounded AC supply
b. Lighting, space heaters and fractional KW 240V, single phase, 50 Hz neutral

motors grounded AC supply
c. Alarm, control and protective devices 220V / 2 wire DC supply
29.5. All AC loads shall be fed by one of the two feeders through an electrically interlocked
automatic transfer switch housed in any one of the local control cabinets. Design features of the
transfer-switch shall include the following:
a) Selection of one of the feeders as normal source and other as stand by
b) Upon failure of normal source, automatic transfer of loads from normal source to the
standby source after an adjustable time delay
c) Indication for” failure of normal source” and for transfer to standby Source” and also
for “failure to transfer” shall be provided locally and as well as in the remote tap
changer control panel.
d) Automatic retransfer to normal source with an adjusted time delay,following re-

energisation of the normal sources.
e) The transfer and re-transfer shall not cause paralleling of the two sources at any time.
29.6. Necessary isolating-switches, MCBs and other components for the above power supply
transfer arrangement shall be in the scope of the supply of the supplier.
29.7. Bus bars, if used, shall be tinned copper of adequate cross section to carry the normal
current without exceeding the permissible temperature rise over an ambient temperature of 50 o
C.
45
29.8. Isolating-switches shall be group operated units (3/4 pole for use on 3 phase supply
system and 2 pole for single phase supply system), quick make and break type capable of
breaking the rated current of the associated circuit safely. Switch handle shall have provision for
locking in both fully opened and fully closed positions.
29.9. Push button shall be rated for not less than 6 Amps, 415 V, AC or 2 Amps, 220/110V DC
and shall be flush mounted on the cabinet door and provided with appropriate name plates.
Red, Green and Amber indicating lamps shall be flush mounted.
29.10. i) FOR APPLICABLE CAPACITY OF TRANSFORMERS: For motors up to 5 KW,

contactors shall be direct-on-line, air break, single throw type and shall be suitable
for making and breaking the stalled current of the associated motor which shall be
assumed equal to 6.5 times the full load current of the motor at 0.2 p.f.
iv)For motors above 5 KW, automatic star-delta type starters shall be provided. 3 pole
contactors shall be furnished for 3 phase motors and 2 pole contactors for single phase
motors. Reversing contactors shall be provided with electrical interlocks between
forward and reverse contactors. If possible, mechanical interlocks shall also be
provided. Contactors shall be suitable for uninterrupted duty and shall be of duty
category class AC4 as defined in IS:2959. The main contacts of the contactors shall be
silver plated and the insulation class for the coils shall be class E or better. The dropout
voltage of the contactors shall not exceed 70% of the rated voltage.
iii) Contactors shall be provided with a three element, positive acting, ambient
temperature compensated, time lagged, hand reset type thermal overload relay with
adjustable setting, hand reset button shall be flush with the front door of the cabinet
and suitable for resetting with starter compartment door closed.
29.11. Single phasing preventer relay shall be provided for 3 phase motors to provide positive
protection against single phasing.
29.12. Mini starters shall be provided with No-volt coils whenever required.
46
29.13. Purchaser's power cable shall be FRLS 1100 / 650V grade stranded copper conductor,
PVC insulated, PVC sheathed, steel wire armoured and PVC jacketed cable. All cable terminating
accessories such as brass cable glands, lugs etc. shall be included in the scope of supply.
29.14. Separate Terminal-Blocks shall be provided for circuits of various voltage classes.
29.15. The terminal blocks shall be 1100V grade and have 10 Amps continuous rating. They
shall be fully enclosed with removable slip-on/clip-on covers and made of molded non-
inflammable plastic material with block and barrier molded integrally. Such blocks shall have
non-disconnecting stud type terminals, washers, nuts and lock nuts. All terminals shall be clearly
marked with identification numbers or letters to facilitate connection to external wiring. No live
metal shall be exposed at the back of the terminal blocks.
29.16. In all terminal blocks at least 20% spare terminals shall be provided uniformly.
29.17. The terminal blocks meant for control circuits shall be suitable for connecting minimum
of 2 numbers of 2.5 sq.mm. Copper cable. Terminals meant for CT circuits shall be capable of
accommodating at least 2 numbers of 4 sq.mm. copper cable.
29.18. The terminal boards shall be mounted obliquely towards the rear doors to be easily
accessed to termination and to enable ferrule numbers to be read without difficulty. The
terminal boards shall be placed at least above a distance of 250mm from the cable gland so as
to permit satisfactory arrangement of multi core cable tiles.
29.19. Terminal board rows should be spaced not less than 150mm apart to permit convenient
access to wires and terminations.
29.20. Control cabinet shall be provided with a 230V LED lamp operated by a door switch.
29.21. The cabinet shall be provided with a 240V, single phase,5 amps, 3 pin socket for hand
lamp.
29.22. Strip heaters shall be provided inside the cabinet with thermostat (preferably differential
type) to prevent moisture condensation. The heaters shall be controlled by suitably rated
double pole miniature circuit breakers.
47
29.23. Signal lamps provided shall be of neon, screw type, with wire & resistors enclosed in
bakelite body. Each signal lamp shall be provided with a fuse integrally mounted in the lamp
body. If separate fuse units are used they shall be of the cartridge type. Fuses shall be labeled.
29.24. Electric measuring instruments shall be of moving iron type. Ammeters for measuring
currents upto 30 amps shall be directly connected while those for measuring above 30 amps
shall be connected through suitable CT's. Ammeter and Voltmeters shall be provided with
selector switches.
29.25 The terminal Box wiring pertaining to CTs shall be independent and not combined with
annunciation and other indication circuits.
30.0. REMOTE TAP-CHANGER CONTROL PANEL:
The Remote In-door Tap Changer control cubicle of height 2312 mm with sufficient
inner working space for easy access to the instruments, wherever necessary ,shall house
the following:
30.1 i) CONTROLS:
a) Push button switch to Raise/Lower the tap.
b) Tap position indicator (digital type).
c) Selector switch for Local/Remote operation.
d) Four position Selector switch for Independent/OFF/Master/Follower.
e) Emergency 'supply - off ' push button.
f) Relays, Heater, illumination lamps, MCBs etc.
ii) Repeater dial of winding temperature indicator with selector switches.
iii) Control selector switch for the fans/pumpsof the cooler -for applicable capacity of
transformers.
30.2. LAMP INDICATIONS for the following (ON: Red indication; OFF: Green indication)
a) Cooling pump ON/OFF (Group).

b) Cooling fans ON/OFF (Group).
c) OLTC supply HEALTHY.
d) Cooler control on AUTOMATIC/MANUAL.
e) Tap change IN-PROGRESS.
f) Selector switch on ÀUTO' or `MANUAL' or `LOCAL' for each fan groups.
48
30.3. Facia type annunciation scheme for the following trip, non-trip & alarm INDICATIONS,
suitable for 220V DC operation.
a) Pressure Relief Device -trip

b) Bucholtz Relay - alarm
c) Bucholtz Relay - trip
d) Winding Temperature Indicator – alarm
e) Winding Temperature Indicator - Trip
f) Oil Temperature Indicator - alarm
g) Oil Temperature Indicator – trip
h) Tap Changer Surge Relay - trip
i) Tap Changer Drive Motor – trip
j) Tap Changer Out of Step - alarm
k) Tap change delay - indication
l) OLTC supply failure relay- alarm
m) Cooling Fan – trip (For each group of fans & standby)
n) Cooling Pump – trip (For pumps in service & standby)
o) Cooler supply failure indication
p) Oil flow fail – alarm
q) Low oil level – alarm
r) Spare contactors- 4Nos.
30.4. DIFFERENTIAL RELAY:
The RTCC panel shall house numerical Differential relay of reputed make as per the
specification as given below with suitable test terminal block & wired with 4 sq.mm. wire using
disconnecting type terminal blocks. Test terminal Block shall be provided on the front panel of
the RTCC.
30.5. NUMERIC DIFFERENTIAL RELAY FOR TRANSFORMER PROTECTION:

30.5.1. SCOPE:
Τhis specification covers the requirements concerning the technical and operational
characteristics and also testing requirements for numerical differential relays used for the
protection of 3-phase, Power Transformers of this Packages.
49
30.5.2. KEY WORDS:
Numerical Transformer differential relays, for two – winding transformers. Areva, Easun

Reyrolle, Siemens, ABB, SEL, NARI, GE make relays preferred.
30.5.3. USE:
The digital differential relays are to be used for the protection of the Power transformers.
30.5.4. STANDARDS:
The relays shall conform to the latest IEC standards. Relays based on ANSI / ΙEEE or
DIN / VDE standards can be offered, subject however, to the Purchaser’s approval.
30.5.5. OPERATING CONDITIONS:
1. Installation : Indoors
2. Temperature range : 50ºC to 55ºC
3. Relative Humidity : 5% to 95%
30.5.6. GENERAL-BIAS DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION RELAY FOR TWO WINDING

TRANSFORMER PROTECTION :
Shall be of Numerical type
1. three phase with faulty phase identification.

2. shall have continuous self monitoring and diagnostic feature.
3. shall have instantaneous high set feature with facility to adjust 5 to 20 times normal
current .
4. shall have second & fifth harmonic restraint feature with harmonic content in the range
of 15 to 25%.
5. the disturbance recording functions should be integrated in the relay module. The
disturbance recorder shall have facility to record at least 4 numbers of digital signals
apart from digital signal from the relay and currents in HV &LV winding.
6. Facility to set transformer vector group and CT ratio selection/ correction through
software.
50
7. Rated current of 1 amp.
8. Thermal withstand current continuous 2 amps and for 1 sec 70 amps.
9. Rated voltage: 220V DC.
10. Basis bias setting 20 to 40% in steps 10% or 15 to 45% in steps of 15%.
11. Operating current setting range 15 to 30%.
12. have operating time not greater than 35ms at 3 times normal current.
13. Maximum operating time for instantaneous operation: 25ms+/-4% of set value.
14. Recording memory capacity: 5 secs.
15. Shall have inbuilt restricted earth fault protection inbuilt over fluxing protection and
inbuilt LBB protection.
16. Shall have impedance protection. If the same is not an inbuilt feature of the
differential protection relay then the same may be provided separately.
17. Shall have front or back RS232 port for connecting Lap Top (suitable connecting
cards/ converter to be supplied) and rear RJ45 or fibre optic port for local and remote
communication. However for uniformity all the relays shall be provided either with RJ45
port or fibre optic port at the rear. The communication shall be through IEC61850
protocols.
18. Have time synchronizing facility with IRIGB / DCF77/SNTP whichever is compatible to
IEC 61850.
30.5.7. CHARACTERISTICS OF THE ELECTRICAL SYSTEM:
1. Rated Voltage (phase to phase) : : 110 KV rms
2. Maximum Operating Voltage : 132 KV rms
3. Rated frequency : 50 Hz
4. System Neutral : Solidly Earthed
5. Operating frequency range : 50 Hz ± 5 Hz
6. Rated short circuit level : 25 KA at 150 KV
7. Maximum permissible duration of fault in order to maintain stability : ≤ 500m sec.
51
30.5.8. CURENT TRANSFORMER CHARACTERISTICS:
The numerical differential relays will be used in conjunction with current transformers
characteristics installed in the transformer.
30.5.9.NUMERICAL DIFFERENTIAL RELAY REQUIRED PROTECTION

CHARACTERISTICS:
1. Protection capability:
a. Against all three and two phase internal faults.
b. Against all inter-turn faults
c. Against all phase to ground internal faults.
2. Operating Characteristic : Dual slope percentage operating characteristic.
Relay should have a High set Instantaneous Over-current Protection which shall
prevent operation unless the differential current is greater than a certain percentage of
the through fault current. This percentage shall be adjustable either continuously or by
steps.
3. a) Provision of compensation of Transformer vector group should be available in the

Relay setting itself.
b) Current transformer and ratio adaptation (correction) : There shall be no need for
external interposing CTs.
In other words, the relay must be equipped with capability of adjusting CT ratio and
angle (phase) in its input.
4. Blocking characteristics:
a. Second harmonic blocking or restrain plus dc blocking for transformer inrush

current.
b. Fifth harmonic blocking against transformer over excitation current.
52
c. Zero –sequence current filtering so that out of-zone earth faults are not seen by
the transformer protection as an in-zone fault.
5. Additional Blocking characteristics : Restrain against external faults with current

transformer saturation.
6. Protection against out–of–balance current: The out-of- balance current produced by the
transformer tap–changing or current transformer mismatch shall be compensated by
means of the percentage bias feature.
7. SER/DFR Comtrade file Format Recording minimum 1 sec Record duration with atleast 5
record storage facility.
8. The Relay should have a provision for Zone segregation of faults based on the number
of Bus-sections provided.
30.5.10. Numerical Differential Relay - Required Technical Characteristics
1. Type of differential relay : Numerical.
2. Input rated current : 1Α and 5A.
3. Auxiliary voltage supply : 220 VD C as per requirement.
4. Auxiliary voltage supply tolerance : + 10% - 15%
5. Output Contacts
a. Trip contacts
Number : at least two (4)
Continuous current rating : 5 A.
Switching making capacity : 1000 W at 220V DC
Switching breaking capacity : 30 W at 220V DC
Current rating for 0.5 sec : 30 Α.
b. Alarm contacts - Number of alarm contacts : at least two (2) selectable contacts,
plus two N/O contacts all free of voltage. - Contact continuous current rating : 1 A.
6. Construction : The relay shall be suitable for panel flush mounting.

53
7. Relay Housing (case) : The housing shall provide a degree of protection of IP50 as per
IEC.
8. Self – diagnostics : Τhe relay shall be equipped with self - diagnostics capacity, thus
facilitating repairs.
9. Short circuiting of contacts of the current input unit (if any) : Automatic short – circuit of
all current contacts shall be foreseen, if the input unit is of the draw – out type.
10. Construction design: Τhe construction preferably will be of the modular design with
plug – units.
11. COMMUNICATIONS:
a) Shall be capable of uploading all settings (parameterization) HMI by means of an
integrated keyboard and a display and by a PC /Laptop by Front Ethernet Port so
as to provide Galvanic isolation. Also a rear Ethernet Port may be provided for
future Networking of the Relays.
b) The settings shall be stored in a non–volatile–memory, so that they will not be lost
even during interruption of the substation auxiliary voltage and relay’s internal
battery (if any).
30.5.11. Numerical Differential Relay- Required Additional Features
1. Fault Recording: All faults shall be recorded and stored for analysis. The capacity of memory
shall permit the storage of at least four (4) faults. Capability shall exist so that the fault data can
be read remotely via modem. The recording shall include both analog and digital signals.
2. Measurements:
i) The measurement function shall be capable of measuring in real time all phase currents and
capability shall exist so that this data can be read either locally or remotely via modem.
ii) Also Negative Differential current, 2 nd harmonic current, 5th harmonic current and negative
sequence current monitoring features should be available in the Relay monitoring menu.
54
3. Synchronization : Besides an internal synchronization clock, the relay shall be capable of
being synchronized via a substation automation control system’s master clock which has
capability of GPS synchronization besides of its own.
4. External wiring of the relay : The relay shall be equipped with screw type terminals suitable
for 4 mm 2 conductors.
5. Special Accessories : Any special accessories needed for testing and communication purposes
must be provided (such as special communication cables, plugs, interfaces, adaptors etc).
6. Necessary Relay software, Manuals and Drawings- 2 sets for each Relay should be provided.
31.0. FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES:
The fittings and accessories, mentioned in this specification, are only indicative and any
other fittings which are generally required for satisfactory operation of the transformer are
deemed to be included.
32.0. CENTRE OF GRAVITY:
The centre of gravity of the assembled transformer shall be low and as near the vertical
centre line as possible. The transformer shall be stable with or without oil. If the centre of
Gravity is eccentric, relative to track either with or without oil, its location shall be shown in the
"Outline" drawing.
33.0. CONTROL WIRING, TERMINAL BOARDS, FUSES ETC:
33.1. All wirings shall be with multi strand copper. All wiring connections, terminal boards, fuses
and links shall be suitable for tropical atmosphere. Any wiring liable to be in contact with oil shall
have oil resisting insulation and the Board ends of stranded wire shall be sweated together
to prevent creepage of oil along the wire.
33.2. There shall be no possibility of oil entering into the connection boxes, used for cables or
wiring.
55
33.3. Panel connections shall be neatly and squarely fixed to the panel. All instruments and
panel wiring shall be run in PVC or non-rusting metal cleats of the limited compression type. All
wiring to a panel shall be taken from suitable terminal boards.
33.4. Where conduits are used, the runs shall be laid with suitable falls, and the lowest parts of
the run shall be external to the boxes. All conduit runs shall be adequately drained and
ventilated. Conduits shall not be run at or below ground level.
33.5. When 415 Volt connections are taken through junction boxes or marshalling boxes they
shall be adequately screened and "415 volts Danger" notices must be affixed to the outside of
the junction boxes or marshalling boxes.
33.6. All box wiring shall be in accordance with relevant IS. All wiring shall be of stranded
copper of 1100 grade and size not less than 4.00 sq.mm. for CT leads and not less than 2.5
sq.mm. for other connections.
33.7. All wires on panels and all multicore cables shall have ferrules which bear the same
number at both ends.
33.8. At those points of interconnection between the wiring carried out by separate contractors,
where a change of number cannot be avoided, double ferrule shall be shown on the appropriate
diagram of the equipment.
33.9. The same ferrule numbers shall not be used on wires in different circuits on the same
panels.
33.10. Ferrule shall be of yellow insulating material and shall be provided with glossy finish to
prevent the adhesion of dirt. They shall be clearly and durably marked in black and shall not be
affected by damp or oil.
33.11. Stranded wires shall be terminated with tinned Ross countney terminals, claw washers or
crimped tubular lugs. Separate washers shall be used for each wire. The size of the washers
shall be suitable to the size of the wire terminated. Wiring shall, in general, be accommodated
on the sides of the box and the wires for each circuit shall be separately grouped. Back of panel
56
wiring shall be arranged so that access to the connecting stems of relays and other apparatus is
not impeded.
33.12. Wires shall not be jointed or tied between terminal points.
33.13. Wherever practicable, all circuits in which the voltage exceeds 125 Volts, shall be kept
physically separated from the remaining wiring. The function of each circuit shall be marked on
the associated terminal boards.
33.14. Where apparatus is mounted on panels, all metal cases shall be separately earthed by
means of copper wire or strip having a cross section of not less than 2.0 sq.mm. where strip is
used, the joint shall be sweated.
33.15. All wiring diagram for control and relay panel shall preferably be drawn as viewed from
the back and shall show the terminal boards arranged as in service. All diagrams shall show,
which view is employed.
33.16. Multicore cable tails shall be so bound that each wire may be traced without difficulty to
its cable.
33.17. The screens or screen pairs of multicore cable shall be earthed at one end of the cable
only. The position of earthing connections shall be shown clearly on the diagrams.
33.18. All terminal boards shall be mounted obliquely towards the rear doors to give easy access
to terminations and to enable ferrule numbers to be read without difficulty.
33.19. Terminal board rows should be spaced adequately, not less than 100 mm apart, to
permit convenient access to wires and terminations.
33.20. Terminal boards shall be so placed with respect to the cable gland (at a minimum
distance of 200 mm), as to permit satisfactory arrangement of multicore cable tails.
33.21. Terminal boards shall have pairs of terminals of incoming and outgoing wires. Insulating
barriers shall be provided between adjacent connections. The height of the barriers and the
spacing between terminals shall be such as to give adequate protection while allowing easy
access to terminals. The terminals shall be adequately protected with insulating dust-proof
covers.
57
33.22. No live metal shall be exposed at the back of the terminal boards.
33.23. All fuses shall be of the cartridge type.
33.24. Fuses and links shall be labeled.
34.0. QUALITY PLAN AND INSPECTION:
34.1. The tenderer shall furnish the programme of manufacturing works well in advance.
34.2. The purchaser or the accredited representative of the purchaser shall have access to the
contractor or sub-contractor's works at any time during working hours for the purpose of
inspection of manufacture and selection of samples of the materials going into the equipment
and testing. The contractor shall provide necessary facilities for such inspection or test.
34.3. Documents like invoice or receipted challans, detailing the source of supply of raw
materials and their specification, shall be shown by the supplier on demand either during the
manufacturing process or at the time of inspection of the transformer.
34.4. The core and coil assembly, shall be offered for inspection and to verify the guaranteed
technical parameters prior to connections and tanking. The readiness for such inspection shall
be intimated at least 15 days in advance. Further process of manufacture of core and coil
assembly, shall be taken up only after our approval in this regard.
34.5. The transformers shall be completely assembled arrange for conducting all the
TYPE/SPECIAL/ROUTINE tests as per IS 2026 of latest issue at manufacturers work or at the
accredited laboratories, in the presence of purchaser or the accredited representative of the
purchaser. The readiness of the transformer with all its accessories for testing/inspection shall
be intimated at least 15 days in advance. The transformer shall be despatched only after the
approval of the test certificates by the purchaser.
34.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. A quality assurance programme shall generally cover the following:
1. Organisation structure for the management and implementation of the proposed

quality assurance programme
58
2. Document control system
3. Qualification data for bidder’s key personnel
4. The procedure for purchases of materials, parts, components and selection of Sub-
contractor’s services including vendor analysis, source inspection, incoming raw
material inspection, verification of material purchases, etc.,
5. System of shop manufacturing and siteerection controls including process controls
and fabrication and assembly control
6. Control of non-conforming items and system for corrective actions
7. Inspection and test procedure both for manufacture and field activities
8. Control of calibration and testing of measuring instruments and field activities
9. System for indication and appraisal of inspection status
10. System for quality audits
11. System for authorising release of manufacture product to the Purchaser
12. System for maintenance of records
13. System for handling storage and delivery
14. The manufacturing quality plan detailing out the specific quality control mea-
sures and procedures adopted for controlling the quality characteristics relevant
to each item of equipment furnished and/or services rendered
15. A field quality Plan covering field activities
B. The manufacturing & Field quality Plans shall be mutually discussed and approved by the
Purchaser after incorporating necessary corrections by the Supplier as may be required
C. The Purchaser or his duly authorised representative reserves the right to carryout quality
audit and quality surveillance of the system and procedure of the Purchaser / his vendor’s
quality management and control activities
D. The Bidder would be required to submit all the Quality Assurance documents as stipulated
in the quality Plan at the time of Purchaser’s Inspection of equipment/ material.
35.0. TESTING:
35.1 TYPE TEST:
59
(a) All the TYPE Tests shall be carried out as per IS 2026 / IEC 60076 and latest issue of
IS/IEC and submitted for approval at the time of sub vendor approval. The validity shall
be as per the Technical Requirement clause of the specification.
35.2 SPECIAL TEST:
a. Special Test (Short circuit) has been conducted at NABL accredited CPRI / any other Gov-
ernment approved / Government recognized laboratory tested with the testing instruments /
equipment having valid calibration certificate issued from third party agency (CPRI) and the va-
lidity shall be as per the Technical Requirement clause of the specification.
35.3 ROUTINE TEST:
All the ordered quantity as per IS 2026 of latest issue / IEC 60076 shall be carried out at
suppliers COST in the presence of purchaser or purchaser's representative or by the third party
agency (ERDA/CPRI) with the testing instruments / equipment having valid calibration
certificate issued from third party agency (ERDA/CPRI).
35.4 The supplier shall ensure that the testing instruments and equipment used for testing /
measurements have calibration certificates issued by a Government recognized / Government
laboratory or the testing instruments / equipment have calibration certificate issued
from third party agency (ERDA/CPRI) not earlier than one year from the date of testing
used for testing/measurements.
35.5 The correction for the errors of measuring instruments / testing transformers and resis-
tance of test connections shall be applied, as specified in IEC before coming to the conclusion on
the test results.
35.6 One unit out of the ordered quantity will be selected at the discretion of TANTRANSCO
shall be tested for measuring No-load and load losses concurrently by at NABL accredited
CPRI / ERDA / any other Government approved / Government recognized High Voltage
testing laboratory and tested with the testing instruments / equipment having
valid calibration certificate issued from third party agency (ERDA/CPRI) as decided by
TANTRANSCO. The arrangements connected towards testing shall be made by the supplier.
60
35.7 The Purchaser has the right to have the test carried out at his own cost by an indepen -
dent agency whenever there is a dispute regarding the quality of supply.
35.8 The Purchaser at its discretion may re-test the same Transformer or any other Trans-
former (s) at a Govt. / or Govt. Recognized laboratory of his choice for reconfirmation of the test
results, particularly no load losses, load losses and percentage impedance, which will be taken
as the final and binding as per the clause 35.6 mentioned above.
36.0. TYPE/SPECIAL/ROUTINE TESTS:
35.9.1 The following type test as per IS 2026 of latest issue shall be carried out on the first
unit or any other unit at the discretion of TANTRANSCO at Supplier’s cost in the presence of
Board's representative.
a. Oil Leakage Test:
All tanks and oil filled compartments shall be completely filled with air or oil of a viscosity
not greater than that of insulating oil conforming to IEC 60296 at the ambient
temperature and subjected to a pressure equal to normal head of oil plus 35 kN/sq.m (5
psi) measured at the base of the tank. This pressure shall be maintained for a period of
not less than 12 hours for oil and 1 hour for air during which no leakage shall occur.
b. Vacuum test on the transformer tank:
The transformer tank shall be tested at an internal pressure of 3.33 KN/sq.m. (25torr) for one hour.
The permanent deflection of flat plates, after the vacuum has been released, shall not exceed the
values below and the performance of the transformer shall not be affected in any way.
Horizontal length of Flat Plate (mm). Permanent deflection (mm).

Upto and including 750 5
751- 1250 6.5
1251 to 1750 8.0
1751 to 2000 9.0
2001 to 2250 11.0
2251 to 2500 12.5
2501 to 3000 16.0
Above 3000 19.0
c. Pressure test:
61
The transformer tank shall be subjected to a pressure corresponding to twice the normal
head of oil or to normal pressure plus 35 KN/sq.m. whichever is lower. The applied
pressure shall be measured at the base of the tank and maintained for Eight (8) hours.
The equivalent air pressure corresponding to oil pressure calculated at the base of the
tank to be considered for Air Pressure test. The permanent deflection of flat plates, after
the excess pressure has been released, shall not exceed the values specified under the
caption 'Vacuum test'.
d. Temperature rise test at the lowest tap.
e. Full wave lightning Impulse voltage withstand test on all three phases including chopped
impulses on principle tap and extreme taps. (This test shall precede power frequency high
voltage tests).
f. Capacitance and Tan-delta measurement.
g. Zero sequence impedance tests.
h. Noise Level Test.
i. Measurement of harmonic voltages.
35.9.2 Measurement of transformer oil required for first filling for entire transformer including ra-
diators, coolers, conservator etc. shall also be done on 1st unit.
36.2. STAGE & FINAL INSPECTION:
36.2.1. The supplier shall offer the core, windings and tank of each transformer for inspection by
the purchaser’s representative(s). During stage Inspection, all the measurements like diameter,
window height, leg centre, stack width, stack thickness, thickness of laminations etc. for core
assembly, conductor size, Insulation thickness, winding height, major and minor insulations for
both H.V and L.V windings, length, breadth, height and thickness of plates of Transformer tank,
the quality of fittings and accessories will be taken / determined.
36.2.2. The supplier can offer for final inspection of the transformers subject to clearance of the
stage Inspection report by the purchaser. The Proforma for Stage & Final inspection is furnished
in Annexure. VII & VIII.
36.2.3. The manufacturer shall offer the core for stage inspection and get approval
from purchaser during manufacturing stage. The BIS certified prime core materials
62
are only to be used. The manufacturer has to produce following documents at the
time of stage inspection for confirmation of use of prime core materials.
i. Invoice of supplier.
ii. Mills approved test certificates.
iii. Packing list.
iv. Bill of lading.
v. Bill of entry certificate by custom.
vi. Description of material, electrical analysis, physical inspection, certificate for surface
defects, chemical composition certificate, thickness and width of the materials.
vii. Place of cutting of core materials.
36.3 ROUTINE TESTS (FOR ACCEPTANCE):
36.3.1. The following Routine tests as per IS 2026 of latest issue and special tests shall also
be carried out on all the transformers, at supplier’s cost.
(a) Measurement of winding resistance on all taps.
(b) Measurement of voltage ratio on all taps and check of voltage vector relationship.
(c) Measurement of impedance voltage / short circuit impedance, load-loss & spill current
at principal and extreme taps. The test shall be repeated at 415 volts for comparison
during pre-commissioning tests at site.
(d) Measurement of No-load loss and current corresponding to normal & extreme taps at
100%,90% and 110% of rated voltage.
(e) Measurement of insulation resistance.
(f) Dielectric Tests (Short duration Power frequency withstand voltage test and Induced
over voltage withstand test with line/leakage current measured)
(g) Oil leakage test on transformer tank:
63
The tank and oil filled compartments shall be tested for oil tightness by completely
filling with air/oil of viscosity not greater than that of insulating oil, conforming
to IS:335 1983/'87 at the ambient temperature and applying a pressure, equal to
the normal pressure plus 35 KN/sq.m. measured at the base of the tank. This
pressure shall be maintained for a period of not less than 12 Hours for oil and 1
Hour for air during which time no leakage shall occur.
(h) Magnetic balance test.
(i) Measurement of No-load current with 415 Volts supply.
(j) Check of polarity and ratio, tests for knee point voltage, and magnetizing current for
Bushing current transformer.
(k) Tests on on- load tap changer (fully assembled on transformer ) as per Clause 10.8 of
IEC: 60076-1 as referred in Clause 5.3 of IEC:60214/2003.
(l) Measurement of neutral unbalance current which shall not exceed 2% of the full rated
current of the transformer.
(m) Full wave lightning Impulse voltage withstand test on all three phases
including Chopped Impulses on principle tap and extreme taps. (This test
shall precede power frequency high voltage tests).
(n) Capacitance and Tan-delta measurement
(o) Sweep Frequency Response Analysis (SFRA) test is to be carried out at

works:
36.3.2. The test sequence shall be: -
Tests on transformer tank, Heat run test, Oil leakage test on the assembled transformer,
Impulse test, Routine tests and Special tests.
36.3.3. INSPECTION FOR WITNESSING OF ACCEPTANCE TESTS:

36.3.3.1. The purchaser will witness the acceptance tests as identified in the approved QA plan.
36.3.3.2. The acceptance tests carriedout in the manufacturers premises will be witnessed by
the officials nominated by TANTRANSCO. The entire expenditure towards To & Fro travel,
64
Boarding, lodging and all other expenses in this connection with the inspection shall be borne by
the bidder.
36.3.3.3. The inspection and acceptance of any equipment shall not relieve the supplier of his
obligation of furnishing equipment in accordance with the specification and shall not prevent
subsequent rejection if the equipment is found to be defective.
36.3.3.4. The supplier shall keep the purchaser informed in advance, about the manufacturing
program so that arrangement can be made for inspection.
36.3.3.5. The purchaser reserves the right to insist for witnessing the acceptance / routine
testing of the bought out items also.
36.3.3.6. No material shall be dispatched from its point of manufacture unless the material has
been satisfactorily inspected and tested / or the same is waived by the purchaser in writing and
issue of dispatch instruction after approval of test reports by the purchaser.
36.4. FURTHER TESTS:
36.4.1. The purchaser reserves the right of having other reasonable tests carried out at his own
expense either before transport or at site, to ensure that the transformer complies with the
requirements of TANTRANSCO specification.
36.4.2. It may also be noted that the purchaser reserves the right to conduct short circuit
test, Temperature rise test, and impulse voltage withstand test in accordance with the
IS, afresh on each ordered rating at Purchaser’s cost as and when required, even if the
transformers of the same rating and similar design are already tested. This test shall be carried
out on any no. of transformer either offered for inspection or randomly from supply already
made at site and under erection. The finding and conclusion of these tests shall be
binding on the supplier.
36.5. TEST CERTIFICATES:
36.5.1. Six copies of the test certificates on the above type tests/ special tests/ routine tests
with the endorsement of the inspecting officer shall be furnished to the Chief
Engineer/Transmission/ 5th Floor, TANTRANSCO HQ Building, 144, Anna salai, Chennai -2.
65
36.5.2. The test report shall contain the following information.
i) Complete identification data, including serial No. of the transformer.
ii) Method of application where applied, duration, and interpretation of results in each
test.
iii) Details of Temperature rise corrected to 75 o C .
36.5.3. The equipment will be rejected if test results are not in conformity with the Guaranteed
Technical particulars.
36.5.4. Besides the above test certificates, manufacturer's test certificates in respect of the
following accessories shall also be furnished in sixtuplicate.
a) Bushings (HV, LV & Neutral).

b) Buchholtz relay and surge relay.
c) Magnetic oil level gauge.
d) Winding Temperature Indicator.
e) Oil Temperature Indicator.
f) Radiators.
g) Transformer oil (including Dissolved Gas Analysis tests)
h) OLTC
i) Pressure relief device
36.5.5. TYPE TEST FOR BOUGHT OUT COMPONENTS:
a. Tenderers are requested to furnish the above type test certificates for the bought out
components before the offer of inspection in full shape as conforming to relevant IS/IEC
standards of latest issue obtained from a Government/Government Recognized Labora-
tory. The above test certificates should accompany the drawings of the material/equip-
ment, duly signed under seal by the institution who has issued the type test certificate.
b. The original type test certificate shall be furnished for verification on request.
c. The supplier shall also furnish test certificates to the effect that the withstand capability
of the insulation between the core and all core bolts, side plates & structural frame has
66
been tested with 2500 Volts DC for one minute after assembling the core and prior to
the dispatch of the transformer.
36.6. TESTS AT SITE
36.3.1. After erection at site and prior to commissioning, the transformer shall be subjected to
the following tests by the contractor in the presence of the TANTRANSCO’s Engineer.
a) Insulation resistance test.

b) Ratio and polarity test on all taps.
c) Open circuit and short circuit test.
d) Tests on the operation of OLTC.
e) Tests on the protective devices and interlocks.
f) Measurement of winding resistance at all taps.
g) Vector group verification.
h) Capacitance and Tan-delta measurement on windings and bushings.
i) Other tests that may be required to ensure that the transformer complies with
the requirements of the specification.
j) SFRA (Sweep Frequency Response Analysis) test.
36.3.2.After erection at site and prior to commissioning, the Transformer shall be subjected to
the following tests by the Purchaser in the presence of the supplier at supplier’s cost at
TANTRANSCO / TANGEDCO Laboratory.
i. All relevant tests on oil.
ii. Dissolved Gas Analysis on Transformer (The test figures will form the base values for
comparison in future).
iii. Oil Samples shall be taken from the Main Tank as well as from the OLTC and
to be got tested separately.
37.0. DRAWING, TECHNICAL LITERATURE AND GUARANTEED TECHNICAL

PARTICULARS
67
37.1. (a) General out line drawing, showing front side elevations and plan views of the
transformer and all accessories and external features with detailed dimensions,
weights, crane lift for un-tanking and for erection/removal of bushings, size of
lifting lugs and pulling eyes, HV and LV terminal clearances, live terminal to ground
clearance, quantity of insulating oil, dimensional details for foundation etc with list of
fittings and accessories.
(b) Assembly drawings of HV, LV /cable box and Neutral bushings

(c) Mounting arrangement for cooling pipes, radiators, fans etc.
(d) Schematic control and wiring drawing and drawings showing temperature indicator /
recorder circuits, and control system for cooling equipment.
(e) Drawing, showing construction and mounting details of marshalling Boxes.
(f) Drawing, giving details of name plate, terminal marking and connection Diagram.
(g) Drawing on OLTC gear assembly.
(h) Remote Tap Changer control panel.
(i) Remote Tap Changer control circuit.
(j) Drawing on Terminal Clamps.
(k) The responsibility rests with the supplier in case of any corrections or modification on
scrutiny of the drawings.
37.2. Six complete sets of final drawings shall be supplied for the transformer, sufficiently
before the actual despatch of the equipment.
37.3. Six copies of all bulletins, complete instruction manuals for the erection, operation and
maintenance of the transformer are to be supplied, before they are despatched.
37.4. Any approval given to the detailed drawings by the purchaser shall not relieve the
contractor of the responsibility for correctness of the design, completeness of the equipment
supplied and in the execution of the works in accordance with the terms of specification.
38.0. REJECTION
38.1. The transformer may be rejected if any of the following conditions arise during the tests or
while in service.
68
(a) No load loss exceeds the guaranteed value.
(b) Load loss exceeds the guaranteed value.
(c) Percentage impedance values exceed by the guaranteed figure.
(d) Temperature rise of oil and or windings exceed the specified values.
(e) Transformer fails during impulse test.
(f) Transformer fails during power frequency voltage withstand test.
(g) If either of the test results conducted at factory and site (during pre-
commissioning test) are not satisfactory.
(h) Transformer has not been manufactured in accordance with the Specification
and approved drawings.
39.0. SPARES:
3 Nos. of One litre capacity Oil Sampling Flask (Stainless Steel) shall be provided.
40.0. DESIGN REVIEW:
40.1.The transformer shall be designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with the best
international engineering practices under strict quality control to meet the requirement stipu-
lated in the technical specification. Adequate safety margin w.r.t. Thermal, Mechanical, Dielectric
and Electrical Stress etc., shall be maintained during design, selection of raw material, manufac-
turing process etc. in order to achieve long life of transformer with least maintenance.
40.2.Design reviews will be conducted by TANTRANSCO or by an appointed consultant during
the procurement process; however, the entire responsibility of design shall be with the manufac-
turer. TANTRANSCO may also visit the manufacturers works to inspect design, manufacturing
and test facilities.
40.3.The design review shall be finalized before commencement of manufacturing activity and
shall be conducted generally following the “CIGRE TB 529: Guidelines for conducting design re-
views for power transformers”.
40.4.The manufacturer shall provide all necessary information and calculations to demonstrate
that the transformer meets the requirements of mechanical strength and inrush current.
40.5.The manufacturer will be required to demonstrate the use of adequate safety margins for
Thermal, Mechanical, Dielectric and Vibration etc., in design to take into account the uncertain-
69
ties of his design and manufacturing processes. The scope of such design review shall include
but not limited to the requirement mentioned.
40.6.Each page of the design review document shall be duly signed by the authorized represen-
tatives of manufacturer and purchaser and shall be provided to the purchaser for record and ref-
erence before commencement of manufacturing.
*****
SECTION- 4
POWER TRANSFORMER ERECTION
1.0. GENERAL:
1.1. Unless otherwise stated the work shall be carried out as per Section-K of CBIP guidelines
and latest CEA guidelines.
1.2. The following shall supplement the conditions already contained in the other parts of
these specifications and documents and shall govern that portion of the work on this Contract
to be performed at site.
1.3 The Contractor, shall nominate a responsible person as its representative at site
suitably designated for the purpose of overall responsibility and co-ordination of the works
to be performed at site.
1.4 The Shock/Impact recorders for ICTs have to be sealed after fixing in the concerned
equipments at manufacturer works and the same shall be downloaded at the project site and a
soft copy as well as hard copy of the same has to be handed over to TANTRANSCO before
taking back the Shock/ Impact recorders. The manufacturer has to submit the findings of the
Shock/Impact recorder within 3 days of removal of the Shock/Impact recorder.
1.5. The acceptable value of the Shock/Impact recorders shall be indicated in the concerned
drawings and get it approved from TANTRANSCO before shifting the equipments from the
manufacturer works. After getting the approval from TANTRANSCO for the Shock/Impact
recorder, the equipments shall be allowed for erection.
70
1.6. The data of impact recorder shall be analysed jointly by the purchaser in association with
the manufacturer. In case the impact recorder indicates shocks of ≥ 3g during
shipment, further course of action for internal inspection shall be taken jointly by the
manufacturer & supplier. Impact Recorder should be detached from the Transformer/
Reactor, preferably after the main unit has been placed on its foundation.
2.0. SCOPE OF WORK:
The scope of work shall be to make the transformer ready for testing and commissioning
include the following
a) Placing of the transformer on the plinth and fixing of wheels and
carrying- out stop block welding including moving the transformer to
the plinth, where the transformer is supplied and unloaded near the
plinth.
b) The Contractor has to supply, lay and erect M.S Channel of size
100x50x6mm for vertical support with supporting insulators, 50x8 mm
copper flat including green painting and fixing with adequate size SS / GI
bolts and nuts for earthing the neutral bushing of the Power Transformer
at two different earth points of newly established earth pit. The body
earthing of Transformer tank, Cooler fan, pumps, D.M box, RTCC panel
& other accessories shall be done as per standards with 50x8 mm
copper flats.
(c) Erection of the following, wherever applicable:
(i) HV bushing with turrets
(ii) LV and neutral bushing with turrets.
(iii) Cable boxes
(iv) Bushing current transformers
(v) Conservators
(vi) Valves
(vii) Radiators
(viii) Fans/pumps
71
(ix) Buchholz relay
(x) Surge relay
(xi) Gaskets
(xii) Temperature indicators
(xiii)Others wherever stated
d) Erection of the Drive Mechanism Box, Marshalling at site with equipment
and RTCC Panel in the control room after removing the existing panel, if
any.
e) First filling of transformer oil in the transformer and OLTC under hot oil
circulation, vacuum drying wherever applicable/necessary to the
required level and circulation of oil till satisfactory results are obtained
before commissioning.
f) i) The Contractor scope of work shall include all the control cables of
minimum 7 strands required for the successful commissioning of
Auto/Power Transformers including supply, laying, providing suitable
glands ferrules, lugs, termination etc., but not limited to the above
mentioned for successful commissioning of the transformer as per
standard requirement.
1) Protection schemes of Auto/Power Transformer including differential
protection cable.
2) Indication/Annunciation scheme for cooler fan and pumps.
3) OLTC Remote operation
4) OLTC fan, pump D.M. power supply cable
5) DC cable from control room to Transformer
6) Scada scheme for Remote/Automation operation
7) CTs cable from CT secondaries to Marshalling Box and Marshalling

box to LV panel/RTCC panels
72
8) Any other control cable with required site for successful
commissioning of the transformer
9) Interconnection of cables for AC/DC panels to RTCC/LV panels
ii) All CT cables shall be 4 sq.mm. (minimum) and shall be copper,
armoured cables. The other cables that are to be provided shall be 2.5
sq.mm. minimum), copper multi-strand minimum of 7 strands and armoured
cables, separate cables for AC and DC are to be used. The AC supply cables
shall be sufficient to cater the load of pumps, fans and the load of pumps,
fans and the loads of transformer for the AC panel around in the
transformer end.
Additional adequate quantity of cable length shall be provided at the
Transformer end and at the RTCC/LV panels ends in case of shifting of
panels/ Transformers. All the cables shall be laid end to end without any joints
and it should be ensured that the cables so provided shall comply with
TANTRANSCO control cable specification and should be strictly adhered. All
the control cables shall be neatly laid /buried in control cable duct/trench by
suitable dressing.
However any additional work and in the schedule of cables shall be discussed
with the site Engineers/ TANTRANSCO Engineers before laying of cables and
necessary approval shall be obtained before connection to the panels/
Transformer ends.
g) Painting as required will be carried out so as to maintain the finish of the surface of
the transformer and accessories prior to the erection of the same at site.
h) Required assistance for testing and commissioning
Any other works not covered in items (a) to (h) but required for satisfactory
commissioning of the power transformer shall also to be carried out by the contractor free of
cost.
2.2. The supplier shall prepare a schedule of the works to be carried out with specific periods
for each item of work involved. All assembly and erection drawing shall be made available at
site.
73
2.3. If the commissioning of the transformer is delayed due to incompletion of erection works,
the Board has the right to recover an estimated amount for such pending erection works from
the contractor besides Levy of L.D. clause.
3.0. REGULATION OF LOCAL AUTHORITIES AND STATUTES:
The Contractor shall comply with all the rules and regulations of local authorities
during the performance of its field activities. The Contractor shall also comply with the
Minimum Wages Act, 1948 and the payment of Wages Act (both of the Government of India)
and the rules made there under in respect of any employee or workman employed or engaged
by it or its Sub-Contractor.
4.0. OWNER’S LIEN ON EQUIPMENT:
The Owner shall have lien on all equipment including those of the Contractor, brought
to the Site for the purpose of erection, testing and commissioning of the plant. The Owner
shall continue to hold the lien on all such equipment throughout the period of Contract. No
material brought to the site shall be removed from the site by the Contractor and/or its Sub-
contractors without prior written approval of the Site Engineer.
5.0. INSPECTION, TESTING AND INSPECTION CERTIFICATES:
The provisions of the clause entitled inspection, Testing and Inspection Certificates under
Technical Specification applicable to the erection portion of the Works. The Site Engineer shall
have the right to re-inspect any equipment, even though the same may have been previously
inspected and approved by him at the Contractor’s works, before and after the same are
erected at Site. If by the above inspection, the Site Engineer rejects any equipment, the
Contractor shall make good such rejected equipment etc., either by replacement or
modification/repairs as may be necessary to the satisfaction of the Site Engineer. Such re-
placements will also include the replacements or re-execution of such of those works of other
Contractors and/or agencies, which might have got damaged or affected by the replacements
or re-work done to the Contractor’s work.
6.0. ACCESS TO SITES AND WORKS ON SITE:
74
6.1 The works so far as it is carried out on the Owner's premises, shall be carried out at
such time as the Owner may approve and the Owner shall give the Contractor reasonable
facilities for carrying-out the works.
6.2 In the execution of the works, no person other than the Contractor or its duly
appointed representative, Sub-Contractor and workmen, shall be allowed to do work on the
site except by the special permission, in writing of the Site Engineer or his representative.
7.0. CO-OPERATION WITH OTHER CONTRACTORS:
7.1 The Contractor shall co-operate with all other Contractors or tradesmen/ representative(s)
of the Owner, who may be performing other works on behalf of the Owner and the workmen
who may be employed by the Owner and doing work in the vicinity of
the works under the Contract. The Contractor shall also so arrange to perform its work as to
minimise, to the maximum extent possible, interference with the work of other Contractors and
their work-men. Any injury or damage that may be sustained by the employee(s) of the
other Contractors and the Owner, due to the Contractor’s work shall promptly be made good
by the Contractor at its own expense. The site Engineer shall determine the resolution of any
difference or conflict that may arise between the Contractor and other Contractors or between
the Contractor and the workmen of the Owner in regard to their work. If the work of the
Contractor is delayed because of any acts of omission of another Contractor, the Contractor
shall have no claim against the Owner on that account other than an extension of time for
completing its works.
7.2. The Site Engineer shall be notified promptly by the Contractor of any defects in the
other Contractor’s works that could affect the Contractor’s works. The Site Engineer shall
determine the corrective measures, if any, required to rectify this situation after inspection of
the works and such decisions by the Site Engineer shall be binding on the Contractor.
8.0. DISCIPLINE OF WORKMEN:
The Contractor shall adhere to the disciplinary procedure set by the Site Engineer
in respect of its/its Sub-Contractor’s employees and workmen at site. The Site Engineer shall
be at liberty to object to the presence of any representative or employee of the
Contractor/its Sub-Contractor at the site, if in the opinion of the Site Engineer such
75
representative/ employee has misconduct himself or is incompetent or negligent or other-wise
undesirable. The Contractor shall remove such person(s) objected to, and provide competent
replacement in his place.
9.0. PROTECTION OF WORK:
The Contractor shall have total responsibility for protecting its works till it is finally taken
over by the Site Engineer. No claim will be entertained by the Owner or by the Site Engineer
for any damage or loss to the Contractor’s works and the Contractor shall be responsible for
complete restoration of the damaged works to original conditions, to comply with the
specification(s) and drawings. Should any such damage to the Contractor’s works occur
because of any other party not being under its supervision or control, the Contractor shall
make its claim directly to the party concerned without involving the Owner. If disagreement or
conflict or dispute develops between the Contractor and the other party or parties concerned
regarding the responsibility for damage to the Contractor’s works the same shall be resolved
as per the provisions of Clause 6.0 above titled co-operation with other Contractors. The
Contractor shall not cause any delay in the repair of such damaged works because of any
delay in the resolution of such disputes. The Contractor shall proceed to repair the work
immediately and no cause thereof will be assigned pending resolution of such disputes.
10.0. EMPLOYMENT OF LABOUR:

10.1 The Contractor will be expected to employ on the work only its regular skilled
employees with experience in the particular type of work. No female labour shall be employed
after darkness. No person below the age of eighteen years shall be employed.
10.2 All traveling expenses including provisions of all necessary transport to and from site,
lodging allowances and other payments to the Contractor’s employees shall be the sole
responsibility of the Contractor.
10.3 The hours of work on the site shall be decided by the Owner and the Contractor shall
adhere to it. Working hours will normally be eight (8) hours per day-Monday through Saturday.
10.4 Contractor’s employees shall wear identification badges while on work at Site.
76
10.5 In case the Owner becomes liable to pay any wages or dues to the labour or any
Government agency under any of the provisions of the Minimum Wages Act, Workmen
Compensation Act, Contract Labour Regulation Abolition Act or any other law due to act of
omission of the Contractor, the Owner may make such payments and shall recover the same
from the Contractor's bills.
10.6 The Contractor shall be provided with free supply of electricity for the purposes of the
Contract only, at one point in the project Site. The Contractor, at its own cost shall make its
own further distribution arrangement. All temporary wiring shall comply with local regulations
and will be subject to Site Engineer's inspection and approval before connection to supply.
11.0. FACILITIES TO BE PROVIDED BY THE CONTRACTOR:
11.1 Tools, scaffolding and tackle
11.1.1.The Contractor shall bring to site all the construction/erection equipment tools,
tackle, scaffolding etc required for pre-assembly, erection of the equipment covered under
the contract. He shall submit a list of all such materials to the Site Engineer before the
commencement of pre- assembly at Site.
11.1.2. The following items are generally required
(1) Lifting equipment:
(a) Derrick or mobile crane of adequate capacity.
(b) wire ropes
(c) pulley blocks
(d) chain blocks
(e) Manila ropes,
(f) shackles
(g) sleepers.
(2) Oil purifier with heating and vacuum facilities and hot oil resistant
hose pipes.
(3) Vacuum pump
(4) Oil storage tank.
77
11.1.3. The Owner shall have a lien on such goods for any sum or sums which may at any time
be due or owing to it by the Contractor.
11.1.4. After the completion of the Works, the Contractor shall not remove from the Site,
the materials such as construction equipment, erection tools and tackle, scaffolding etc.
without permission of the Site Engineer.
11.2. FIRST – AID:
The Contractor shall provide necessary first-aid facilities for all its employees,
representatives and workmen working at the site. Adequate number of Contractor’s personnel
shall be trained in administering first-aid.
11.3. CLEANLINESS:
11.3.1. The Contractor shall be responsible for keeping the entire allotted area clean and free
from rubbish, debris etc. during the period of Contract.
11.3.2. Waste oil shall be disposed off in a manner acceptable to the Owner. Under no
circumstances shall waste oil be dumped into uncontrolled drains.
12.0. FIRE PROTECTION:
12.1. All the Contractor’s supervisory personnel and sufficient number of workers shall be
trained for fire-fighting and shall be assigned specific fire protection duties. Enough of such
trained personnel shall be available at the Site during the entire period of the Contract.
12.2. The Contractor shall provide enough fire protection equipment of the types and number
for the ware-house, office, temporary structures, labour colony area etc. Access to such fire
protection equipment, shall be easy and kept open at all times.
13.0. SECURITY:
The Contractor shall have total responsibility for all equipment and materials in its
custody, stored, loose, semi-assembled and/or erected by it at Site. The Contractor shall
make suitable security arrangements including employment of security personnel to
ensure the protection of all materials, equipment and works from theft, fire, pilferage and any
other damages and loss. All materials of the Contractor shall enter and leave the work site
only with the written permission of the Site Engineer in the prescribed manner.
78
14.0. MATERIALS HANDLING AND STORAGE:
All the equipment furnished under the Contract and arriving at Site shall be promptly
received, unloaded and transported and stored in the storage by the Contractor.
14.2. The Contractor shall be responsible for examining all the consignment and shall notify
the Site Engineer immediately of any damage, shortage, discrepancy etc. for the purpose of Site
Engineer’s information only. However, the Contractor shall be solely responsible for any
shortages or damage in transit, handling and/or in storage and erection of the equipment at
site as well as for preferring all claims with the underwriter(s). Any demurrage, wharfage and
other such charges claimed by the transporters, railways etc., shall be to the account of the
Contractor.
14.3. The Contractor shall maintain an accurate and exhaustive record detailing out the list
of all equipment received by it for the purpose of erection and keep all such record open for
the inspection of the Site Engineer.
14.4. All equipment shall be handled very carefully to prevent any damage or loss. No bare
wire ropes, slings, etc. shall be used for unloading and/or handling of the equipment without
the specific written permission of the Site Engineer. The equipment stored shall be properly
protected to prevent damage either to the equipment or to the floor where they are stored.
14.5. The Contractor shall ensure that all the packing materials and protection devices used
for the various equipment during transit and storage are removed before the equipment
are installed.
14.6. All the materials stored in the open or dusty location(s) shall be covered with
suitable weather-proof and flameproof covering material, wherever applicable.
14.7. The Contractor shall be responsible for making suitable indoor storage facilities, to
store all equipment which require indoor storage. Normally, all the electrical equipment such
as motors, control gears and consumables shall be stored in the closed storage space.
15.0. CONSTRUCTION MANAGEMENT:
15.1. The field activities of the Contractor’s working at site, will be co-
ordinated by the Site Engineer and the Site Engineer's decision shall be final in resolving
any dispute or conflict between the Contractor and other contractors and tradesmen of the
79
Owner regarding scheduling and co-ordination of work. Such decision by the Site Engineer
shall not be a cause for extra compensation or extension of time for the Contractor.
15.2. Time is the essence of the Contract and the Contractor shall be responsible for
performance of its works in accordance with the specified construction schedule.
16.0. PROTECTION OF PROPERTY AND CONTRACTOR`S LIABILITY:
The Contractor shall be responsible for any damage resulting from its operations. It
shall also be responsible for protection of all persons including members of public and
employees of the owner and the employees of other Contractors and Sub-Contractors and all
public and private property including structures, building, other plants and equipment and
utilities either above or below the ground.
17.0. INSURANCE:
17.1. In addition to the conditions covered under the Clause, titled Insurance the following
provisions will also apply to the portion of works to be done beyond the Contractor's own or
its Sub-Contractor's manufacturing Works.
17.2. WORKMEN’S COMPENSATION INSURANCE:
This insurance shall protect the Contractor against all claims applicable under
the Workmen's Compensation Act, 1948(Government of India). This policy shall also
cover the Contactor against claims for injury, disability disease or death of its or its Sub-
Contractor’s employees, which for any reason are not covered under the Workmen’s
Compensation Act, 1948. The liabilities shall not be less that
Workmen's Compensation : As per statutory Provisions
Employee's liability : As per statutory Provisions
17.3. COMPREHENSIVE AUTOMOBILE INSURANCE:

This insurance shall be in such form to protect the Contractor against all claims for
injuries, disability, disease and death to members of public including the Owner's men and
damage to the property of other arising from the use of motor vehicles during on or off the
Site operations, irrespective of the owner-ship of such vehicles. The minimum liability covered
shall be as herein indicated :
80
Fatal Injury : Rs. 100,000 each person
: Rs. 200,000 each occurrence
Property Damage : Rs. 100,000 each occurrence
17.4. COMPREHENSIVE GENERAL LIABILITY INSURANCE:
17.4.1. The insurance shall protect the Contractor against all claims arising from injuries,
disabilities, disease or death of members of public or damage to property of others, due to any
act or omission on the part of the Contractor, its agents, its employees, its representatives
and Sub Contractors or from riots, strikes and civil commotion. This insurance shall also cover
all the liabilities of the Contractor arising out of the Clause titled Defence of Suits under General
Conditions of Contract of this Volume-1A.
17.4.2. The hazards to be covered will pertain to all the works and areas where the
Contractor, its Sub-Contractors, its agents and employees have to perform work pursuant to the
Contract.
17.5. The above are only illustrative list of insurance covers normally required and it will be
the responsibility of the Contractor to maintain all necessary insurance coverage to the extent
both in time and amount to take care of all its liabilities either direct or indirect, in pursuance of
the Contract.
18.0. WORK & SAFETY REGULATIONS:
18.1. The Contractor shall ensure proper safety of all the workmen, materials plant and
equipment belonging to it or to the others, working at the site. The Contractor shall also be
responsible for provision of all safety notices and safety equipment required by the relevant
legislations and deemed necessary by the Site Engineer.
18.2. All equipment used in construction and erection by Contractor shall meet
Indian/International Standards and where such standards do not exist, the Contractor shall
ensure these to be absolutely safe. All equipment shall be strictly operated and maintained
by the Contractor in accordance with manufacturer's operation manual and safety
instructions and as per Guidelines/Rules in this regard.
18.3. Periodical examinations and all tests for all lifting/hoisting equipment & tackle shall be
carried-out in accordance with the relevant provisions of Factories Act 1948, Indian Electricity
81
Act and associated Laws/Rules in force from time to time. A register of such examinations
and tests shall be properly maintained by the Contractor and will be promptly produced as
and when desired by Site Engineer or by the persons authorised by him.
18.4. No electric cable in use by the Contractor/Owner will be disturbed without prior
permission.
18.5. No repair work shall be carried out on any live equipment. The equipment must be
declared safe by the Site Engineer and a permit to work shall be issued by the Site Engineer
before any repair work is carried out by the Contractor. While working on electric
lines/equipment whether live or dead, suitable type and sufficient quantity of tools will have to
be provided by Contractor to electricians/workmen/officers.
18.6. The Contractor shall employ necessary number of qualified, full time
electricians/electrical supervisors to maintain its temporary electrical installations.
18.7. In case any accident occurs during the construction/ erection or other associated
activities undertaken by the Contractor, thereby causing any minor or major or fatal injury to
its employees due to any reason whatsoever, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to
promptly inform the same to the Site Engineer in prescribed form and also to all the authorities
envisaged under the applicable laws.
18.8. The Site Engineer shall have the right at its sole discretion to stop the work, if in its
opinion the work is being carried out in such a way as may cause accidents and endanger the
safety of the persons and/or property, and/or equipment. In such cases, the Contractor shall
be informed in writing about the nature of hazards and possible injury/accident and he shall
comply to remove short-comings promptly. The Contractor, after stopping the specific work,
can, if felt necessary, appeal against the order of stoppage of work to the Site Engineer within
3 days of such stoppage of work and the decision of the Site Engineer in this respect shall be
conclusive and binding on the Contractor.
18.9. The Contractor shall not be entitled for any damages/compensation for stoppage of work
due to safety reasons as provided above and the period of such stoppage of work will not be
taken as an extension of time for completion of work and will not be the ground for waiver of
levy of liquidated damages.
82
18.10. The Contractor shall follow and comply with all Safety Rules, relevant provisions of
applicable laws pertaining to the safety of workmen, employees plant and equipment as may
be prescribed from time to time without any demur, protest or contest or reservation. In case
of any unconformity between statutory requirement and Safety Rules referred above, the latter
shall be binding on the Contractor unless the statutory provisions are more stringent.
18.11. If the Contractor does not take all safety precautions and/or fails to comply with the
Safety Rules as prescribed by the Owner or as prescribed under the applicable law for the
safety of the equipment, plant and personnel and the Contractor does not prevent
hazardous conditions which may cause injury to its own employees or employees of other
Contractors, or Owner or any other person at Site or adjacent thereto, the Contractor shall be
responsible for payment of compensation to the Owner as per the following schedule :-
a) Fatal injury or accident Rs. 1,00,000/ ) These are
causing death (per person ) applicable
fordeathinjury
to any person
whosoever.
b) Major injuries or accident Rs. 20,000/-
accident causing 25% or (per person )
or more permanent disability
to work men or employees
Permanent disability shall have the same meaning as indicated in Workmen's
Compensation Act. The compensation mentioned above shall be in addition to the compensation
payable to the workmen/employees under the relevant provisions of the Workmen's
Compensation Act and rules framed there under or any other applicable law as applicable from
time to time. In case the Owner is made to pay such compensation, the Contractor will be liable
to reimburse the Owner such amount(s) in addition to the compensation indicated above.
19.0. CODE REQUIREMENTS:
The erection requirements and procedures to be followed during the installation of
the equipment shall be in accordance with the relevant ASME codes, accepted good engineering
83
practice, the Engineer’s Drawings and other applicable Indian codes and laws and regulations of
the Government of India.
20.0. CHECK OUT OF CONTROL SYSTEMS:
After completion of wiring and cabling the Contractor shall check out the operation
of all control systems for the equipment furnished and installed under these specifications and
documents.
21.0. CABLING:
21.1. All cables shall be supported by conduits or cable tray run in air or in cable channels.
These shall be installed in exposed runs parallel or perpendicular to dominant surfaces with
right angle turn made of symmetrical bends for fittings. When cables are run on cable trays,
they shall be clamped at a minimum intervals of 2000 mm or otherwise as directed by the Site
Engineer.
21.2. Each cable, whether power or control, shall be provided with a metallic or plastic tag of
an approved type, bearing a cable reference number indicated in the cable and conduit list
(prepared by the Contractor), at every 5 meter run or part thereof and at both ends of the
cable adjacent to the terminations. Cable routing is to be done in such a way that cables are
accessible for any maintenance and for easy identification.
21.3. Sharp bending and kinking of cables shall be avoided. The minimum radii for PVC
insulted cables 1100 V grade shall be 15 D where D is the overall diameter of the cable.
Installation of other cables like high voltage, coaxial, screened, compensating, mineral
insulated shall be in accordance with the cable manufacturer's recommendations. Wherever
cables cross roads and water, oil, sewage or gaslines, special care should be taken for the
protection of the cables in designing the cable channels.
21.4. In each cable run some extra length shall be kept at a suitable point to enable one or
two straight through joints to be made, should the cable develop fault at a later date.
21.5. Control cable terminations shall be made in accordance with wiring diagrams, using
identifying codes subject to Site Engineer's approval. Multicore control cable jackets shall
be removed as required to train and terminate the conductors. The cable jacket shall be left on
the cable as far as possible to the point of the first conductor branch. The insulated
84
conductors from which the jacket is removed shall be neatly twined in bundles and terminated.
The bundles shall be firmly but not tightly tied utilising plastic or nylon ties or specifically
treated fungus protected cord made for this purpose. Control cable conductor insulation shall
be securely and evenly out.
21.6. The connectors for control cables shall be covered with a transparent insulating
sleeve so as to prevent accidental contact with ground or adjacent terminals and shall
preferably terminate in Elmex terminals and washers. The insulating sleeve shall be fire
resistant and shall be long enough to over pass the conductor insulation. All control cables shall
be fanned out and connection made to terminal blocks and test equipment for proper operation
before cables are corded together.
“CONSERVATION OF ENERGY IS SERVICE TO NATION”
ANNEXURE – I(a).
TYPE, RATING AND TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
85
50MVA, 110/33KV Power Transformer
Sl. Description Unit TECHNICAL

No PARAMETERS
1. Voltage ratio (Line-to-Line) kV 110/33
2. Rated capacity (HV and LV) MVA 50
3. No of phases 3 (Three)
4. Vector Group YNyn0
5. Type of transformer Power Transformer
6. Applicable Standard IEC 60076 / IS 2026
7. Cooling type ONAN/ONAF
8. Rating at different cooling % 60 / 100
9. Cooler Bank Arrangement 1 X 100%
10. Frequency Hz 50
11. Tap changer
i) Type On-load tap changer
(CFVV)
ii) Tapping range and steps -15% to +5% in steps of
1.25% for HV variation
iii) Location of tap changer On HV neutral end
12. HV-LV Impedance at 75°C, at
highest MVA base
i) Max. Voltage tap % 13.2
ii) Principal tap % 12.5
iii) Min. Voltage tap % 11.8
13. Tolerance on Impedance % As per IEC
14. Service Outdoor
15. Duty Continuous
16. Overload Capacity IEC 60076-7
17. Temperature rise over 50°C
ambient temp.
O
i) Top oil measured by C 45
thermometer
O
ii) Average winding measured C 50
by resistance method
18. Winding hot spot rise over 61
86
yearly weighted temperature of
32 °C
19. Tank hot spot temperature 110
O
20. Maximum design ambient C 50
temperature
21. Windings
i) Lightning Impulse withstand
Voltage
HV kVp 550
LV kVp 170
HV Neutral kVp 95
LV Neutral kVp 170
ii) Chopped Wave Lightning
Impulse Withstand Voltage
HV kVp 605
LV kVp 187
iii) Switching Impulse withstand
Voltage
HV kVp 460
iv) One Minute Power Frequency
withstand Voltage
HV kVrms 230
LV kVrms 70
HV Neutral kVp 38
LV Neutral kVp 70
v) Neutral Grounding (HV and Solidly grounded
LV)
vi) Insulation
HV Graded
LV Uniform
vii) Tan delta of winding % ≤0.5%
22. Bushings
i) Rated voltage
HV kV 145
LV, LV Neutral & HV Neutral kV 36
ii) Rated current (Min.)
HV A 1250
LV A 1250
HV Neutral & LV Neutral A 1250
87
iii) Lightning Impulse withstand
Voltage
HV kVp 650
LV, HV Neutral and LV Neutral kVp 170
iv) One Minute Power Frequency
withstand Voltage
HV kVrms 305
LV, HV Neutral and LV Neutral kVrms 77
v) Tan delta of bushing at % ≤ 0.5
ambient Temperature
vi) Minimum total creepage (Specific creepage distance:
distances 31mm/kV corresponding to
the line to line highest
system voltage)
HV mm 4495
LV, HV Neutral and LV Neutral mm 1116
Maximum Partial discharge pC 10
level at Um on HV
23. Maximum Partial discharge pC 100
level at
1.58*Ur/√3
Maximum Noise level at rated 75
24. voltage, at principal tap & no dB
load and all cooling active
25. Maximum Permissible For 50 MVA
Losses of Transformers
i) Max. No Load Loss at rated kW 25
voltage and frequency
ii) Max. Load Loss at rated kW 125
current and frequency and at
75°C at principal tap between
HV & LV
iii) Max. I2R Loss at rated kW 105
current and frequency and at
75°C at principal tap between
HV & LV
iv) Max. Auxiliary Loss at rated kW 3
voltage and frequency
88
26 Tank Thickness (mm)
(a) Sides mm 10
(b) Top mm 12
27. Clearances (mm) 110KV 33KV
(a) Phase to Phase mm 1220 350
(b) Phase to Earth mm 1050 320
PARAMETERS OF CURRENT TRANSFORMER FOR 50 MVA, 110/33KV

TRANSFORMERS
Description Current Transformer Parameters
HV HV Neutral LV LV Neutral Side
Side Side Side
Ratio
CORE 1 300/1 300/1 1000/1 1000/1
CORE 2 300/1 - - -
Minimum knee point voltage or burden and accuracy class
CORE 1 300V, PX / 300V, 1000V, 1000V, PX/PS
PS PX/PS PX/PS
CORE 2 0.2S Class - -
15VA ISF ≤ 5
Maximum CT Secondary Resistance
CORE 1 1.5 Ohm 1.5 Ohm 4 Ohm 4 Ohm
CORE 2 - - - -
Application
CORE 1 Restricted REF REF REF
Earth Fault
(REF)
CORE 2 Metering - - -
Maximum magnetization current (at knee point voltage)
CORE 1 100 mA 100 mA 25 mA 25 mA
CORE 2 - - - -
Notes:
1. Parameters of WTI CT for each winding shall be provided by the manu-
facturer / contractor.
2. The CTs used for REF protection must have the identical parameters in or-
der to limit the circulating current under normal condition for stability of
protection.
89
ANNEXURE-I(b)
TYPE, RATING AND TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS 16MVA, 110/11KV Power
Transformer
Sl.No DESCRIPTION REQUIREMENT

1. Maximum continuous rating(MVA)
(a) HV 16
(b) LV 16
2. Maximum continuous rating and cooling (MVA)
(a) ONAN 10
(b) ONAF 16
3. Type of cooling (a) ONAN/ONAF
(b) 1 X 100% or separately 2X50%
cooler Banks
(c) 2 fans as stand-by one for each
cooler bank)
o
4. Temperature rise over ambient of 50 C.
(a) winding 55o C
(b) oil 50o C
I Limit of hot spot temperature with 98o C
yearly weighted average ambient
temperature of 32 oC
(d)Maximum hot spot temperature 140o C
5. Maximum flux density at 100% normal
voltage and frequency. 1.72 Tesla
6. (i) Rated system voltage(KV)
(a) H.V winding 110
I L.V winding 33-11 KV & 22-11 KV
(ii) Variation in the system voltage ± 10%
7. Number of phases 3
8. Rated frequency 50 ± 5%
9. Voltage ratio (KV) 110/33-11 KV
10 (i) Type of connection
(a) HV Delta
(b) LV Star
(ii) Vector group Dyn11
(iii)Neutral Effectively earthed
11. Type of winding
(a) HV Continuous disc
(b) LV Continuous disc
12. Max current density of winding 240 A/cm2
13. Insulation levels HV LV Neutral
90
(1) Winding voltage KV (RMS) 110 33- 22-
11 11
(2)Highest system voltage KV (RMS) 123 36 24 17.5

(3) Lighting impulse withstand voltage 550 170 125 95
KV (PEAK)
(4) Power frequency rated short 230 70 50 50
duration with stand voltage (KV rms)
14. Duration of short circuit withstand 2 secs
Capacity
15. (a) Tap changer OLTC with remote control panel
(b) Tapping range. On HV winding for HV variation of
+5% to -20% in steps of 1.25%
16. D.C. voltage for relays etc. 220 Volts.
17. Percentage impedance. 10 % + 10% tolerance (Negative
tolerance is not accepted)
18. Cooling medium/insulating oil. EHV grade transformer oil
conforming to IEC-60396-2020 /
IS 335
19. Losses
a) No-Load Loss 12.0 KW (Max)
b) I2 R loss 46.0 KW (Max)
c) Stray & Eddy Current Loss 12.0 (Max)
d) Load Loss 58.0 KW (Max)
e) Auxiliary Loss 1.0 KW (Max)
20. Termination arrangement. Open type, suitable for outdoor
operation. HV side with free end
clamp with bi-mettalic strip
suitable for 3 inch Al. Bus bar
21. Terminal bushings HV LV
System voltage 110 33-11 22-11
(a) Voltage rating(KV rms) 145 36 36
(b) Current rating (Amps) 800 2000 2000
I Impulse withstand voltage (KV 650 170 125
Peak)
22. Bushing current transformers
a)Ratio 110/33-11 110/22-11
HV 90/1 90/1
LV 300- 450-900/0.577
900/0.577
b) Accuracy class PS
91
c) Knee point voltage shall be more than 40*I*(Rct+Ra)
where
Rct = secondary resistance of the
current transformer
Ra = lead resistance(2 ohms)
1. Shall be less than 100 mA at
HV @ 90/1 A
knee point voltage. (HV Side)
d) Magnetizing cur-
2. Shall be less than 25 mA at
rent
LV @ 900/0.577 A knee point voltage. (LV Side)
23. Tank:
i) Type Conventional
ii)Thickness (mm)
(a) Bottom Refer Technical specification
(b) Sides 10
(c) Top 12
iii)Pressure release device
(a) Type Safety valve type spring operated
(b) Number One
(c) Sudden Pressure Relief device One
24 Clearances (mm) 110KV 33- 22-11KV
11KV
(a) Phase to phase 1220 350 330
(b) Phase to Earth 1050 320 230
25. Noise level Less than 70 db
26. Oil preservation (Main conservator ) Conventional type with 2 Nos.
breathers in Series associated with
oil seal with a valve.
(OLTC conservator)
2 Nos. Breathers in series with oil
seal.
27. Expected life period of the transformer 25 Years.
92
ANNEXURE – II (A)
SCHEDULE OF GUARANTEED PERFORMANCE AND OTHER TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF
TRANSFORMER (TO BE FILLED BY THE TENDERER)
FOR 50 MVA, 110/33 KV & 16MVA, 110/11KV POWER TRANSFORMERS.
Sl.
ITEM DESCRIPTION VALUES
No.
1 Name of the manufacturer and address
2 Applicable standards.
3 Continuous ratings under conditions specified in IS
2026(Part-I) 1977 Clause -3
a) Type of cooling
b) Rating in (MVA) HV LV
(i) With ONAN cooling
(ii) With ONAF cooling
(iii) With ODAF coolng
c) Rated System Voltage.
(i) HV (KV)
(ii) LV (KV)
d) Variation in the system voltage
e) Rated frequency (Hz)
f) Frequency variation
g) Number of phases.
h) Current at rated load and voltage on principal tap
(i) HV amps.
(ii) LV amps.
4 Connections.
(i) HV
(ii) LV
5 Connection Symbol.
6 Maximum Temperature rise (above peak ambient.
a) Temperature rise of oil (By thermometer) (in OC)
(i) At full ONAN rating
(ii) At full ONAF rating
(iii) At full ODAF rating
b) Temperature rise of winding (By resistance method) (in
O
C)At full ONAN rating
(i)
(ii) At full ONAF rating
(iii) At full ODAF rating
c) Temperature gradient between winding and oil (in OC)
93
d) Limit of hot spot temperature for which the
transformer is designed (in OC)
e) Time in minutes for which the transformer can be run
at full load without exceeding the maximum permissible
temperature at reference ambient temperature when.
(i) Supply of fan is cut off but oil pumps are working
(ii) Supply of oil pump is cut off but fans are working
(iii) Supply of both fans and oil pumps are cut off
(f) Ambient peak temperature specified (in OC)
7 Tappings on windings on HV side.
(a) Number of steps
(b) Range of tappings for variation
8 Losses (KW-MAX)
(a) No-load losses at rated voltage and Frequency at
principal tap.
(b) Load-losses at rated output, rated Frequency and
corrected for 75O C
(c) Auxiliary losses at rated output, normal ratio, rated
voltage, rated frequency and ambient temperature (KW)
(d) Total losses at normal ratio inclusive of auxiliary
equipment losses (KW) corrected to 75OC.
9 Resistance per phase (ohms)
(a) H.V. winding
(b) L.V. winding
10 Positive sequence impedance on rated MVA base at rated
current and frequency at 75OC winding temperature in %
(a) At Principal tap (normal voltage)
(b) At Highest voltage tap (Tap 1).
(c) At Lowest voltage tap (last tap)
11 Zero Sequence impedance at reference temperature of
75OCat principal tap percent .
12 Noise level in decibels when energized at normal voltage
and normal frequency at No-Load.
13 % Reactance at rated MVA base at rated Current and
frequency
(i) At unity power factor
(ii)At 0.8 pf (lagging)
14 Regulation at full load and 75 OC Winding temperature
expressed as a percentage of normal voltage
(i) At unity power factor percent
(ii) At 0.8 pf(lagging)percent
15 % Efficiency at 75OC winding temperature as derived
from guaranteed loss figures and at UPF
(a) Full load percent
(b) 3/4 load percent
(c) 1/2 load percent
94
(d) 1/4 load percent
16 Short time rating for 3 seconds of
(a) HV winding
(b) LV winding
17. Permissible over loading
(a) HV winding
(b) LV winding
18 a) Over load capacity of transformer duration for the
following over loads starting with transformer unexcited
(ambient temp at 50 C)
i) 10 %
ii) 20 %
ii) 30 %
iv) 50 %
v) 75 %
vi) 100 %
18 b) Overload capacity of transformer duration for the
following overloads, starting with Transformer after
continuous running on Open circuit. ( Ambient Temp. at
50 C)
iii) 10 %
ii) 20 %
iv) 30 %
iv) 50 %
vi) 75 %
vi) 100 %
c) Permissible emergency short time, loading of the
transformer immediately following full load run (ambient
temp at 50C )
i) 2 seconds.
ii) 5 seconds.
iii) 10 seconds.
iv) 30 seconds.
v) 1 minute.
vi) 5 minute.
19 Terminal arrangement
(i) High voltage (HV) – Free end clamp with bi-metalic
strip suitable for 3 inch Al. bus bar
(ii) Low voltage (LV)
(iii) Neutral
20 Insulating and cooling medium
21 Test Voltage HV LV
i) Lightning impulse withstand voltage (KV Peak)
ii) Power frequency withstand test voltage
(dry and wet) (KV rms)
iii) Induced over voltage withstand voltage (KV rms)
95
iv) Voltage to earth for which star Points of the
transformer LV windings will be insulated.
22 External short circuit withstand capacity (MVA) and
duration (seconds)
23 Over flux withstand capacity of the transformer
II. ADDITIONAL TECHNICAL PARTICULARS:

Sl.
ITEM DESCRIPTION VALUES
No.
1 Details of core:
a) Type of core construction
b) Type of core joints
c) Flux density at rated voltage and frequency at
principal tap in Tesla
i) Rated voltage
ii) 110% rated voltage
iii) 90% rated voltage
d) Magnetising current on HV side at normal ratio
and frequency and at
i) 85 % of Rated voltage
ii) 100 % of Rated voltage
iii) 110 % of Rated voltage
e) Power factor of Magnetizing current at normal
voltage ratio and frequency
f) i) Material of core laminations (CRGO)
ii) Thickness of core laminations (mm)
iii) Specific loss of the core material watts per kg at
working flux density
g) i) Whether core construction is without core
bolts
ii) Insulation of core bolt
i) Insulation of core bolt washers
ii) Insulation between core lamination
iii) Core bolt insulation withstand voltage for 1
minute( KVrms )
h) Insulation of clamping plate
i) Describe location / Method of core grounding
j) Details of oil ducts in core
2 Method of making joints carrying current
3 Details of winding HV LV
a) Type of winding
b) Material of winding conductor
c) Maximum current density of windings (at rated Current density Conductor
current) and conductor area (A/cm2) Area (cm2)
i) HV
96
ii) LV
iii) Regulating
d) Whether HV windings are interleaved
e) Whether windings are preshrunk
f) Whether adjustable coil clamps are provided
for HV and LV windings
g) Whether steel rings used for the windings if
so, whether they are split
h) Whether electro-static shields are provided to ob-
tain uniform voltage
i) Insulating material used for
i) HV Winding
ii) LV Winding
3 j) Insulating material used between
i) HV and LV Winding
ii) LV Winding and Core
iii) Regulating winding and earth
k) Type of axial coil supports
i) HV Winding
ii) LV Winding
l) Type of radial coil supports
i) HV Winding
ii) LV Winding
m) Maximum allowable torque on coil clamping bolts
4 Bushings: HV LV N
a) Make and type
b) i) Rated Voltage class (KV)
ii) Rated current (Amps)
c) Lightning impulse withstand test voltage (1.2 x 50
micro second) (KV peak)
d) Switching surge withstand test voltage(KVpeak)
e) Power frequency withstand test voltage
i) Wet for 1 minute (KV rms)
ii) Dry for 1 minute (KV rms)
f) Visible corona discharge voltage (KV rms)
g) Partial discharge level
h) Creepage distance in mm
i) Creepage distance (protected)
j) Whether test tap is provided
k) Quantity of oil in bushing and specification of oil
used (Kg)
l) Weight of assembled bushing (Kg)
m) Minimum clearance height for removal of
bushing (mm)
5 Details of bushing current transformers HV LV N
a) Type and Make
97
b) Ratio
c) Class of Accuracy as per IS 2705 Part IV of latest issue
d) V.A.Burden
e) Knee point voltage
f) Magnetising current at knee point voltage
g) Secondary resistance
In Oil In Air
6 Minimum clearance (mm): Bet. Ph. to Bet. Ph. to
Phases Gnd Phases Gnd
i) HV
ii) LV
7 Approximate weight
a) Core steel in Kg
b) Coil with insulation in Kg
c) Core and winding in Kg
d) Oil required for first filling in Kg
e) Fittings & accessories in Kg
f) Tank and fittings with Accessories in Kg
g) Un tanking weight in Kg
h) Total weight with oil and fittings in Kg
8 Details of Tank
a) Type of tank
b) Approximate thickness of sheet
i) Sides in mm
ii) Bottom in mm
iii) Cover in mm
iv) Cooling tubes/Radiators in mm
c) Materials of tank and construction
d) Vacuum to be maintained during oil filling in trans-
former tank in torr
e) Vacuum to which the tank can be subjected without
distortion in torr
f) No of bi-directional wheels provided
g) Track gauge required for the wheels Transverse Longitudinal
Axis Axis
h) Size of rail recommended for the track

i) Type and quantity of pressure relief device/and
pressure at which it operates
9 Conservator
a) Total volume in litres
b) Volume between the highest and lowest visible oil
levels in litres
10 Oil
a) Governing Standard
At 27o C At 90o C
b) Specific resistance shall be at least 50x 1012
In ohms-cms In ohms-cms
98
ohm cm at 90°C
c) Tan delta
d) Water Content
e) Dielectric strength (Break down voltage)(KV)
f) Characteristic of oil after ageing test as per
ASTM D – 1934
i) Specific Resistance at 27O C
ii) Tan Delta
iii) Sludge content
iv)Neutralisation number
g) Details oil preserving equipment offered
11 Radiator
a) No. of banks attached whether attached/sepa-
rate
b) Overall dimensions (lxbxh) (in mm)
c) Total weight with oil (in kg)
d) Total weight without oil (in kg)
e) Thickness of radiator tube(in mm)
f) Type of mounting
g) Vacuum withstand capability
12 Cooling System
a) Make and type
b) No. of connected units
c) No. of stand by units
d) Rated power input
e) Capacity (cu m/min) or (litres/min)
f) Rated voltage (volts)
g) Locked rotor current (Amps)
h) Efficiency of motor at full load (percent)
i) Estimated time constant in hours for
i) Natural Cooling
ii) Forced air cooling
j) Temp.rise of motor at full load (Deg.C)
k) BHP of driven equipment
l) Temperature range over which control is ad-
justable(Deg.C)
m) Whether the fans suitable for continuous opera-
tion at 85 percent of their rated voltage
13 Gas and oil operated relay Make and type
14 Magnetic oil level gauge make and type
Temperature controllers for OIL WINDING
15
i) Make and Type
99
ii) Permissible setting ranges for alarm and trip
iii) Number of contacts
iv) Current rating of each contact
v) Diameter of the dial
i) Minimum clearance height for lifting core and
winding from tank cover in mm
16
ii) Minimum clearance height for lifting tank cover
in mm
17 Shipping details
a) Approximate weight of heaviest package in kg
b) Approximate dimension of largest package
lxbxh in mm
18 Transformer will be transported with oil/ gas
19 Tap-changing equipment
a) Make
b) Type
c) Power Flow – Unidirectional / Bi-directional /
Restricted bi-directional
d) Rated voltage to earth (in KV)
e) Rated Current (in amps)
f) Step Voltage (in Volts)
g) Number of steps
h) Control-Manual/Local electrical/Remote electri-
cal
i) Line drop compensation provided/not provided
j) Parallel Operation
k) Protective devices
l) Auxiliary supply details
m) Approximate overall dimensions of tap changer
n) Approximate overall weight
o) Approximate mass of oil
p) Details of the OLTC control panel for installation
in the control room:
1) Tap Change delay
2) Tap Change out of step
3) Tap Change drive motor trip
4) Oil Temperature alarm
5) Winding Temperature alarm
6) Winding Temperature trip
7) Buchholz alarm
8) Buchholz trip
9) Tap changer surge relay trip
10) Tap changer out of step alarm
100
11) Cooling fan trip(for each group of fans and
standby)
12) Pressure relief device acted
13) Cooler supply failure
14) OLTC Buchholz alarm
15) Low oil level alarm
20 Driving mechanism box
i) Make and Type
ii) Details of apparatus proposed to be housed in

the box
21 Weight of copper used in Kgs i) HV
ii) LV
Quantity of transformer oil used (K.litres)
22
(including cooling system, OLTC & conservator)
23 Type of gaskets used in the transformer
24 Overall dimensions
a) Length in mm
b) Breadth in mm
c) Height in mm
Note: a) Write N.A to Not Applicable items

b) These figures except losses furnished shall be guaranteed with IS tolerance if any
101
ANNEXURE – II (B)
SCHEDULE OF GUARANTEED PERFORMANCE AND OTHER TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF
TRANSFORMER (TO BE FILLED BY THE TENDERER)
MVA, KV TRANSFORMER
Sl. LV
PARTICULARS
No. HV Tap
33 22
1 Phase Current in Amps
2 Cross sectional Area (A) in mm2
3 Current density
4 a) Type of Coil
b) ID in mm
c) OD in mm
d) Mean diameter (Dm)=(b+c)/2
e) Size of conductor including par-
allel
5 No. of turns/phase (T)
6 No. of spacers per circle
7 Winding radial Duct
8 Oil duct
9 Length of mean turn (Lmt)=( x Dm x T)
10 Wt. of copper (kg) = Lmtx A x 8.89x10-3
Per phase resistance of winding
11 (Ohms)
=(0.0211 x Lmt) / A
12 I 2 R Loss (Kw)
102
13 Eddy Current & Stray loss (Kw)
14 Total copper loss
15 Guaranteed loss at 75o C
Source of receipt including details of
16
import of following:
a) EC Grade copper
b) Paper Insulation
c) Press board & other insulating
materials
Note: The Tenderers may please note that all data as per Sl.No. 1 to 16 are to be brought out
separately for each winding i.e. HV, LV and tap. Also it may be noted that the loss figures
against Sl.No. 12,13,14,15 are to be indicated at 75oC.
ANNEXURE – II (C)
TECHNICAL DATA—CORE
Sl.No. PARTICULARS VALUES

1 Core Material
2 a) No. of steps of core
b) Thickness of steps
c) No. of limbs
3 Gross core area
4 Stacking factor
5 Net core area (A) in mm2
6 Core circle dia.(D) in mm
7 i)Height of window (H) in mm
ii)Width of window (W) in mm
Centre to centre distance of limb (C)
8
in mm
9 Voltage per turn (V/t)
Weight of core in kg.
10
= ((2.1 x d) +3H+4C) x A x 0.000765
Working flux density (B in tesla)
11
= [(v/t) x 104] / 4.44 x f x A
12 Core loss in watt per kg. from graph
103
for grade of core material and selected
flux density
13 Building factor
No. Load Loss in Watts
14 = (Core wt. x watts per kg. x Building
factor)
15 Guaranteed No load Loss (in Watts)
16 Source of receipt with proof of import
ANNEXURE – II (D)
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS
Transformer Biased Differential Relay: (To be filled by the Tenderer)
Sl.No. PARTICULARS VALUES / DATA

1 Make & Type
2 Numerical
3 Rated DC Voltage
4 Current i) Rated
ii) Continuous
iii) For 1 sec
5 Two Winding Relay
6 Operating time at 3 times normal current
Operating time for instantaneous
7
operation
8 Bias setting range with steps
9 Availability of faulty phase identification
Availability of instantaneous High set
10
feature with current setting range
Range of second harmonic restrain
11
feature available
Availability of continuous self-monitoring
12
and diagnostic features.
Transformer vector group and CT ratio
13
selection/ corrections through software
104
14 Disturbance recorder:
a) No. of external digital signal that
can be recorded.
b) Facility to record currents in HV &
LV Winding
15 Memory Capacity of D.R
a) Fault records
b) No. of fault records that can be
stored
c) Details of ports available with pro-
tocol
ANNEXURE – III
PROFORMA FOR STAGE INSPECTION OF AUTO/ POWER TRANSFORMERS
(A) GENERAL INFORMATION:
1. Name of firm :
2. Order No. and date :
3. Voltage rating available :
4. Details of offer
a) Capacity :
b) Quantity :
c) Serial Nos. :
5. Details of last stage inspected lot :

a) Total quantity inspected :
b) Serial Nos. :
c) Date of stage inspection :
d) Quantity offered for final :
Inspection of (a) above with :
Date
(B) Availability of material for offered quantity:

Details to be filled in :
:
(C) Position of manufacturing stage of the offered quantity
a) Complete tanked assembly :
b) Core and coil assembly ready :
c) Core assembled :
d) Coils ready for assembly :
(i) HV coils :
(ii) LV coils :
S. Particulars As per PO As observed Deviation &
No. during Remarks
inspection
105
(A) Inspection of Core
(I) Core material
(1) Manufacturer’s characteristic
Certificate in respect of grade of
Lamination used (Please furnish
Test certificate)
(2) Remarks regarding Rusting

& smoothness of core
(3) Whether laminations used for

top and bottom yoke are in one
Lot
(II) Core construction:

(1) No. of steps
(2) Dimension of steps
Step No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
As offered:
W
mm
T
mm
As found:
W
mm
T
mm
(3) Core dia. (mm)
(4) Total cross sectional area of
core
(5) Effective cross sectional area of
core
(6) Clamping arrangement
(i) Channel size
(ii) Bolt size and no.
(iii) Tie rods size and no.
(iv) Painting
(a) Channels
(b) Tie Rods
(c) Bolts
(7) Thickness of insulation provided

between core base and support
channel
(8) Core length (leg center to leg
106
center)
(9) Window height
(10) Core height
(11) Core weight only
(without channels etc.)
(12) Core/Yoke bolt
(a) Insulation provided
(b) No. of core/yoke bolts
(c)Insulation checked for 2KV
(B) INSPECTION OF WINDING

(I) Winding material
(1) Material used for
(a) HV winding
(b) LV winding
(c) Tapping winding
(2) Grade of material for

(a) HV winding
(b) LV winding
(c) Tapping winding
(3) Test certificate of manufacturer
(enclose copy) for winding material
of
(a) HV winding
(b) LV winding
(c) Tapping winding
(II) Constructional details

(1) Size of cross sectional area of
conductor for:
(a) HV winding
(b) LV winding
(c) Tapping winding
(2) Type of insulation for conductor

of
(a) HV winding
(b) LV winding
(c) Tapping winding
(3) Diameter of wire used for delta

formation (mm)
(4) Diameter of coils in

(a) LV winding
107
i) Internal dia. (mm)
ii) Outer dia. (mm)
(b) HV winding
i) Internal dia. (mm)
ii) Outer dia. (mm)
(5) Current density of winding

material used for
(a) HV
(b) LV
(6) No. of taps
(7) Method of HV coil joints
(8) Total weight of coils of

a) LV winding (Kg.)
b) HV winding (Kg.)
(C) INSULATION MATERIALS

(I) Material
1) Craft paper
a) Make
b) Thickness (mm)
c) Test certificate of manufacturer
(enclose copy)
(2) Press Board

a) Make
b) Thickness (mm)
c) Test certificate of manufacturer
(enclose copy)
(3) Material used for top and

bottom yoke and insulation
(II) Type and thickness of

material used (mm)
a) Between core and LV
b) Spacers
c) Interlayer
d) Between HV & LV winding
e) Between phases
f) End insulation
108
(D) TANK
(I) Constructional details
1) Thickness of side wall (mm)
2) Thickness of top &bottom plate
(mm)
3) Tank internal dimensions(mm)
a) Length
b) Breadth
c) Height
(i) On HV side
(ii) On LV side
(II) General details
1) Inside painted by oil corrosion
resistant paint (please specify which
type of coating done)
2) Gasket between top cover and
tank
i) Material
ii) Thickness (mm)
iii) Jointing over laps (mm)
3) Reinforcement of welded angle

(specify size and no. of angle
provided) on side walls of tank
4) Provision of lifting lugs
a) Numbers
b) Whether lugs provided
5) Provision of air release plugs
6) Deformation of lengthwise side

wall of tank when subject to
a) Vacuum of 3.33 KN/sq.m
(25 torr) for 1 hour
b) Pressure in KN/sq.m
(E) Radiators
1) Fin Radiators of 1.2mm thick
sheet
a) Dimension of each fin (LXBXT)
b) Fins per radiator
c) Total no. of radiators
2) Verification of manufacturer’s test
certificate regarding heat dissipation
(excluding top and bottom) in
w/sq.m.
109
(F) Conservator
1. Dimensions (LXD) in mm.

2. Volume (m3)
3. Inside dia. Of Conservator tank
pipe
4. Whether drain valves and filling
hole with cover is provided
(G) Bushings
1. Whether HV bushings mounted
on side walls (for cable box type)
2. Position of mounting of LV
bushings (as applicable for cable
box type)
3.Bushing clearance (mm)

(as applicable for cable box
type)
a) LV to earth
b) HV to earth
c) Between LV bushings
d) Between HV bushings
4. Whether support insulation for
cable box provided
5. Neutral bushing
6. Neutral channels support
insulator
(H) Tank Base Channel/Rollers

1. Size of channel(mm)
2. Whether channels welded across
the length of the tank
3. Size and type of Roller (mm)
4. Whether rail gauge bi-directional
wheels provided
5. Whether jacking pads provided
(I) No. of Valves:

i) Tank
ii) Conservator
iii) OLTC
iv) Radiators
(J) Engraving:
1. Engraving of Sl.No. and name of
firm
110
i) On bottom of clamping channel of
core-coil assembly
ii) On side wall and top cover of
tank
2. CT details/ Name plate
3. Bushing mountings
TANTRANSCO’S INSPECTING OFFICER FIRM’S REPRESENTATIVE
DATE OF INSPECTION:
ANNEXURE – IV
PROFORMA FOR PRE-DELIVERY (FINAL) INSPECTION OF

POWER TRANSFORMERS
1. Name of firm :
2. Details of offer made :
(i) Order No. and date :
(ii) Rating :
(iii) Quantity :
(iv) Sl.No. of transformers :
3. Date of stage inspection of the lot :
111
4. Reference of stage inspection :
clearance
5. Quantity offered and inspected :
against the order prior to this lot
(A) ACCEPTACE TESTS TO BE CARRIED OUT
S. Particulars Observations
N
o
1. (a) Ratio Test
(b) Polarity Test
2. No load loss measurement
TOTAL
Multiplying factor
CT
Wattmeter
Total X Mf
NET LOSS
3. Load loss measurement
TOTAL
Multiplying factors:
CT
Wattmeter
PT
Total X Mf
NET LOSS
Loss at ambient temperature (watt)
Loss at 75C (with calculation sheet) (watt)
4. Winding Resistance :
HV ( in ohms)on all taps
(a) At ambient temperature of 45C
(b) Resistance at 75C
LV ( in ohms)
(a) At ambient temperature of 45C
(b) Per phase Resistance at 75C
112
5. Insulation Resistance in M. ohms
HV-LV
HV-E
LV-E
6. Separate source POWER FREQUENCY withstand test

voltage
HV …… for 60 secs
LV ……… for 60 secs
7. Induced over-voltage withstand test at double voltage

and double frequency
8. No load current at
90% volts
110% volts
9. Unbalance current
10 Vector group test Diagram and readings be
. shown in separate sheets
11 Percentage Impedance at 75C (Please furnish calculation
. sheet)
12 Transformer oil test (BDV)
.
13 Oil leakage test
.
14 Heat run test (Temperature Rise) To be carried out once
. against the order
15 Bushing clearance (mm) HV LV
.
(a) Phase to phase
(b) Phase to earth
16 Comments on compliance by the firm on the
. modifications done as per stage inspection clearance
letter issued
17 Whether silica gel breather with tin container is fitted on
. the transformers offered
18 Whether engraving of Sl.No. & name of the firm on core
. clamping channel has been verified.
19 Oil:
.
1. Name of Supplier
2. Break down voltage of oil (KV)
i) Filled in tanked transformer
ii) In storage tank (to be tested by Inspecting Officer)
3. Supplier’s test certificate (enclose copy)
113
20 Test certificate for painted surface
.
21 Routine test reports for OLTC
.
22 Type test reports for 1st unit
.
23 Magnetic Balance test
.
24 Pressure test (Type test for 1st unit)
.
25 Vacuum test (Type test for 1st unit)
.
26 Test on Bushing CT
.
a) Polarity & ratio check
b) Knee point voltage test
c) Magnetising current
27 Impulse test
.
28 Manufacturer’s Test certificate for accessories (bought
. out components) as per Section VI – cl. 36.5.4
29 i) Rating plate of size 300X300 mm. welded on width side
. of stiffener
ii) Following details engraved (as per approved GTP)
a) Serial Number
b) Name of firm
c) Order No. and date
d) Rating
e) Name of Inspecting Officer
f) Designation
g) Probable Date/month of dispatch
30 Name Plate details

.
Whether name plate is as per approved drawing
NOTE: Apart from the tests mentioned above, any other tests as per the requirement of the P.O.
specifications, shall also to be conducted during final inspection.
TANTRANSCO’S INSPECTING OFFICER FIRM’S REPRESENTATIVE
DATE OF INSPECTION:
114
ANNEXURE – V
FITTING AND ACCESSORIES TO BE SUPPLIED ALONG WITH EACH UNIT
1. Conservator with partition for main transformer and OLTC:
(1) For main transformer :
(a)50 mm oil filling valve.
(b)25 mm drain cum sampling valve with dummy plug.
(c) 40 mm filter valve with dummy plug.
(d)Lifting hooks.
(e)Ladder
(2) For OLTC conservator :
(a)50 mm oil filling valve.
(b)25 mm drain cum sampling valve with dummy plug.
(c) 25 mm shut-off valve.
(d)Prismatic oil level gauge.
(e)Surge relay.
2. Magnetic type oil gauge with low oil level alarm contacts.
3. Silicagel breather with oil seal 100% (2 Nos.).
4. Buchholz relay double float with alarm and trip contacts with shut off valves on either side of
the relay of size 80 mm.
5.Pressure relief device (safety valve type) with alarm contacts.
6. Pockets for thermometer on tank cover.
7. Oil temperature controller with maximum pointer and two sets of contacts, with mercury
switches.
8.Winding temperature controllers with maximum pointer and four sets of contacts with mercury
switches.
9. Valves.
(i) between cooler and tank.
(ii) One 80 mm drain valve with padlocking arrangement, located on the low voltage side.
115
(iii) Two 50 mm filter valves at diagonally opposite corners with padlocking arrangement
for the bottom valve.
(iv) Two sampling valves of 25 mm with provision for fixing PVC pipe.
(v) One 15 mm air release plug.
10. 2 Nos. earthing terminals.
11. Rating, diagram, terminal marking, schematic wiring and valve position plates, (stainless
steel) of not less than 300 x 300 mm.
12.Inspection cover.
13.Bi-directional rollers with greasing duct and nipple.
14.Wiring upto marshalling box with PVC stranded copper cables of 1100V grade from
various points.
15.Lifting and hauling facilities.
(i) Lifting lugs.
(ii) Pulling eyes.
(iii) Jacking pads at a height of 500 mm.
(iv) Latching lugs.
(v) Lifting eyes for the tank cover.
(vi) Fixed ladder with anti clamping device.
16.Weather-proof marshalling boxes for housing control equipment and terminal
connections.
17.OLTC gear with remote control panel comprising, among other things,
a) Necessary valves for filling drain and sampling of oil.
b) Conservator for OLTC.
c) Equaliser pipe with valve between divertor and main tank.
d) Drive mechanism box.
e) Local control panel with necessary wiring and with the following:
(i) Remote/Local selector switch.
(ii) Push button switch; Raise/off/lower.
(iii) Limit switch to prevent motor over-travel in either direction.
116
(iv) Counter.
(v) Electrically interlocked reversing contractors.
(vi) Heaters with switch and HRC fuse.
(vii) Master/follower selector switch.
(viii) Interior lighting
(ix) Auxilliary relays.
(x) Manual operating device.
(f) Remote control panel.
(i) Control push button switch: Raise/off/lower.
(ii) Independent/Off/Master/follower selector switch.
(iii) Lamp indications and initiating contacts as specified.
(iv) Remote top position indicator. (digital type)
(v) Alarm annunciation scheme for trip and non-trip alarm as specified.
(vi) Local/remote selector switch for OLTC.
(vii) Provision with dummy plate for fixing differential relay in the panel.
10. Cooling accessories:
(1) Requisite number of radiators with shut-off valves at top and bottom, air release plug,
drain plug and lifting eyes.
(2) Fans and pumps.
(3) Cooler control cubicle with necessary wiring and with the following:
(a) Lamp indications as specified.
(b) Initiating contacts.
(c) Selector switch for local/auto/remote control
(d) Fan control switch for ON/OFF/Test.
(e) Pump control switch for ON/OFF/Test.
(4) Transformer oil required for first filling at site including wastage in pre - commissioning
process.
11. Bushing.
20. Bushing current transformers as specified on HV & LV (as applicable).
117
21. Terminal clamps for HV, LV and Neutral.
22. One set of spare gaskets for assembling at site.
ANNEXURE-VI
PAINTING PROCEDURE
PAINTING Surface Primer Intermedi Finish Total Colour

preparation coat ate coat Dry shade
undercoat Film
Thick-
ness
(DFT)
External Shot Blast Epoxy Epoxy high Aliphatic Minimum RAL 7035
surfaces: cleaning base build polyureth 155m
Main tank, Sa 2 ½* Zinc Micaceous ane (PU)
pipes, primer iron oxide (Minimum
conservator (30- (HB MIO) 50m)
tank, oil 40m) (75m)
storage tank &
Driving
Mechanism
(DM) Box etc.
Internal Shot Blast Hot oil -- -- Minimu Glossy
surfaces: cleaning resistant, m white for
Main tank, Sa 2 ½* non- 30m paint
pipes (above corrosive
80 NB#), paint, low
conservat or viscosity
tank, oil varnish or
storage tank epoxy
& DM Box e tc.
Radiator Chemical / Epoxy Epoxy PU paint Minimu Matching
(external Shot Blast base base Zinc (Minimum m shade of
surfaces) cleaning Zinc primer 50m) 100m tank /
Sa 2 ½* primer (30- different
(30- 40m) shade
40m) aesthetic
ally
matching
to tank
118
Manufacturer may also offer Radiators with hot dip
galvanised (in place of painting) with minimum thickness of
40m (min)
119
Radiator Chemical Hot oil -- -- -- --
and pipes cleaning, if proof, low
up to required viscosity
80 NB varnish or
(Internal Hot oil
surfaces) resistant,
non-
corrosive
Paint
Digital Seven Zinc -- EPOXY Minimu RAL
RTCC tank chromate paint with m 80m 7035
process as
Panel per primer PU top / for shade
IS:3618 & (two coat powder for
IS:6005 coats) or coated exterior
POWDER
coated minimu and
m Glossy
100m white for
interior
Control cabinet / Marshalling Box - No painting is required.
Note:
*indicates Sa 2 ½ as per Swedish Standard SIS 055900 of ISO 8501 Part-
1. #NB: Nominal Bore
120
ANNEXURE - VII
1100 V GRADE POWER & CONTROL CABLES

1.1 Separate cables shall be used for AC & DC.
1.2 Separate cables shall be used for DC1 & DC2.
1.3 At least one (1) core shall be kept as spare in each copper control cable of
4C, 5C or 7C size whereas minimum no. of spare cores shall be two (2) for
control cables of 10 core or higher size.
1.4 The Aluminium/Copper conductors used for manufacturing the cables shall
be true circular in shape before stranding; shall be of good quality, free
from defects and shall conform to IS 8130.
1.5 The fillers and inner sheath shall be of non-hygroscopic, fire retardant ma-
terial, shall be softer than insulation and outer sheath shall be suitable for
the operating temperature of the cable.
1.6 Progressive sequential marking of the length of cable in metres at every one
metre shall be provided on the outer sheath of all cables.
1.7 Strip wire armouring method (a) mentioned in Table 5, Page-6 of IS: 1554
(Part 1) – 1988 shall not be accepted for any of the cables. For control ca-
bles only round wire armouring shall be used.
1.8 The cables shall have outer sheath of a material with an oxygen index of
not less than 29 and a temperature index of not less than 250°C.
1.9 All the cables shall conform to fire resistance test as per IS: 1554 (Part -
I).
1.10 The normal current rating of all PVC insulated cables shall be as per IS:
3961.
1.11 Repaired cables shall not be accepted.
1.12 Allowable tolerance on the overall diameter of the cables shall be ± 2 mm.
1.13 PVC Power Cables
1.13.1 The PVC insulated 1100V grade power cables shall be of Fire Retar-
121
dant Low Smoke Halogen (FRLSH) type, C2 category, conforming to IS: 1554
(Part-I) and its amendments read along with this specification and shall be
suitable for a steady conductor temperature of 85°C. The conductor shall
be stranded aluminium of H2 grade conforming to IS 8130. The insulation
shall be extruded PVC of type-C of IS: 5831. A distinct inner sheath shall
be provided in all multi core cables. For multi core armoured cables, the in-
ner sheath shall be of extruded PVC. The outer sheath shall be extruded
PVC of Type ST-2 of IS: 5831 for all cables. The copper cable of required
size can also be used.
1.14 PVC Control Cables
1.14.1 The 1100V grade control cables shall be of FRLSH type, C2 category
conforming to IS: 1554 (Part-1) and its amendments, read along with this
specification. The conductor shall be stranded copper. The insulation shall
be extruded PVC of type A of IS: 5831. A distinct inner sheath shall be pro-
vided in all cables whether armoured or not. The outer sheath shall be ex-
truded PVC of type ST-1 of IS: 5831 and shall be grey in colour except
where specifically advised by the purchaser to be black.
1.14.2 Cores shall be identified as per IS: 1554 (Part-1) for the cables up to
five (5) cores and for cables with more than five (5) cores the identification of
cores shall be done by printing legible Hindu Arabic Numerals on all cores
as per clause 10.3 of IS : 1554 (Part - 1).
122
ANNEXURE-VIII
SPECFICATION FOR OIL STORAGE TANK

1. Oil storage tank shall be of adequate capacity as specified by the utility
along with complete accessories. The oil storage tank shall be designed
and fabricated as per relevant Indian Standards e.g. IS: 803 or other in-
ternationally acceptable standards. Transformer oil storage tanks shall be
towable on pneumatic tyres and rested on manual screw jacks of ade-
quate quantity & size. The tank shall be cylindrical in shape and mounted
horizontally and made of mild steel plate of adequate thickness. Diameter
of the tank shall be 2.0 meter approximately. The tank shall be designed
for storage of oil at a temperature of 100°C.
2. The maximum height of any part of the complete assembly of the storage
tank shall not exceed 4.0 metres above road top.
3. The tank shall have adequate number of jacking pad so that it can be kept
on jack while completely filled with oil. The tank shall be provided with
suitable saddles so that tank can be rested on ground after removing the
pneumatic tyres.
4. The tank shall also be fitted with manhole, outside & inside access ladder,
silica gel breather assembly, inlet & outlet valve, oil sampling valve with
suitable adopter, oil drainage valve, air vent etc. Pulling hook on both ends
of the tank shall be provided so that the tank can be pulled from either end
while completely filled with oil. The engine capacity in horse power to pull
one tank completely fitted with oil shall be indicated.
5. Oil level indicator shall be provided with calibration in terms of litre so that
at any time operator can have an idea of oil in the tank.
6. Solenoid valve (Electro-mechanically operated) with Centrifugal pump shall be
123
provided at bottom inlet so that pump shall be utilised both ways during oil fill
up and draining. Suitable arrangement shall also be provided to prevent
overflow and drain from the tank.
7. The following accessories shall also form part of supply along with each
Oil storage tank.
(a) Four numbers of 50 NB rubber hoses suitable for Transformer oil applica-
tion up to temperature of 100°C, full vacuum and pressure up to 2.5 Kg/
cm2 with couplers and unions each not less than 10 metre long shall be
provided.
(b) Two numbers of 100 NB rubber hose suitable for full vacuum without col-
lapsing & kinking vacuum hoses with couplers & unions, each not less
than 10 metre long, shall also be provided.
(c) One number of digital vacuum gauge with sensor capable of reading up to
0.001 torr, operating on 240V 50Hz AC supply shall be supplied. Couplers
and unions for sensor should block oil flow in the sensor. Sensor shall be
provided with at-least 8 meter cable so as to suitably place the Vacuum
gauge at ground level.
(d) The painting of oil storage tank and its control panel shall be as per An-
nexure-VI.
(e) The tank shall contain a self-mounted centrifugal oil pump with inlet and
outlet valves, with couplers -suitable for flexible rubber hoses and neces-
sary switchgear for its control. There shall be no rigid connection to the
pump. The pump shall be electric motor driven, and shall have a dis-
charge of not less than 6.0 kl/hr. with a discharge head of 8.0m. The
pump motor and the control cabinet shall be enclosed in a cubicle with
IP-55 enclosure.
124
ANNEXURE-IX
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF OIL BDV TEST SET
Particulars Specification
Functional 1. The instrument should be suitable for Automatic
Requirement Measurement of Electrical Breakdown Strength of
Transformer oil as per relevant standards.
2. The test results should have repeatability, consistency
in laboratory condition.
Test Output 0-100 kV (Rate of rise: 0.5 to 5kV/Sec)
Accuracy ± 1 kV
Resolution 0.1 kV
Switch off Time ≤ 1ms
Display/Control LCD/Keypads
Printer In-built/External
Measurement Fully Automatic Pre-programmed/User programmed Test

Programmes Sequences as per latest IEC & other National/International
standards.
Test Lead/ One complete set of electrodes, gauge etc. compatible with
Accessories the instruments should be provided for successfully carrying
out the test in the purchaser’s substation. Additionally, all
the required accessories, tools, drawing, documents should
be provided for the smooth functioning of kit. Further a
robust/ rugged carrying case shall be provided for ensuring
proper safety of the kit during transportation.
Design/Engg. The complete equipment along with complete accessories

must be designed/ engineered by Original Equipment
Manufacturer.
125
Power Supply It shall work on input supply variations, V: 230 V ±10 %, f:
50 Hz ±5 % on standard sockets.
Operating 0 to +50 oC
Temperature
126
Relative Max. 90% non-condensing
humidity
Protection/ Adequate protection shall be provided against short circuit,
Control over load, transient surges etc. Also the instrument
should have facility of stopping automatically on power
failure. Also the kit should have facility of HV chamber
interlocking as well as zero start interlocking.
Environment The test kit shall be compatible for EMI/EMC/Safety

environment requirement as per IEC.
Warranty Warranty Period: Minimum of five (5) years from the date of
successful & complete commissioning of the test kit at
the purchaser’s sub-station.
All the materials, including accessories, cables, laptops etc.

are to be covered under warranty period. If the kit is to be
shifted to supplier’s works for repairs within
warranty/guaranty period, suppliers will have to bear the
cost of spares, software, and transportation of kit.
Calibration Unit shall be duly calibrated before supply and the date of
Certificate calibration shall not be older than two month from the date
of supply of Kit.
Training Supplier shall have to ensure that the instrument is user

friendly. Apart from the detailed demonstration at site, the
supplier shall also have to arrange necessary training to the
purchaser’s engineers.
Commissioning, Successful bidder will have to commission the instrument to

handing over the satisfaction of the purchaser. The instrument failed during
the Instrument the demonstration shall be rejected and no repairs are
allowed.
After sales Bidder will have to submit the documentary evidence of having
service established mechanism in India for prompt after sales
services.
127
ANNEXURE-X
SPECFICATION FOR OIL SAMPLING BOTTLES
1. Oil sampling bottles shall be supplied as specified by the utility and shall be
suitable for collecting oil samples from transformers and shunt reactors, for
Dissolved Gas Analysis (DGA). Bottles shall be robust enough, so that no
damage occurs during frequent transportation of samples from site to labo-
ratory.
2. Oil sampling bottles shall be made of stainless steel having a capacity of
one litre. Oil Sampling bottles shall be capable of being sealed gas-tight and
shall be fitted with cocks on both ends.
3. The design of bottle & seal shall be such that loss of hydrogen shall not ex-
ceed 5% per week.
4. An impermeable oil-proof, transparent plastic or rubber tube of about 5 mm
diameter, and of sufficient length shall also be provided with each bottle
along with suitable connectors to fit the tube on to the oil sampling valve of
the equipment and the oil collecting bottles respectively.
SPECFICATION FOR OIL SYRINGE
1. If specified by the utility, the glass syringe of capacity 50 ml (approx.) and

three way stop cock valve shall be supplied. The syringe shall be made from
Heat resistant borosilicate Glass, shall have metal luer lock tip and shall
comply with BS EN ISO 595-2 and ISO 80369-7. The material and construc-
tion should be resistant to breakage from shock and sudden temperature
changes, reinforced at luer lock tip Centre and barrel base.
2. The cylinder-plunger fitting shall be leak proof and shall meet the re-
quirement of IEC-60567. Plunger shall be grounded and fitted to barrel for
smooth movement with no back flow. Barrel rim should be flat on both
sides to prevent rolling and should be wide enough for convenient finger tip
grip. The syringe shall be custom fit and uniquely numbered for matching.
The syringe shall be clearly marked with graduations of 2.0 ml and 10.0 ml
and shall be permanently fused for life time legibility.
128
SECTION – 11
11 KV RING MAIN GEAR (RMG) SWITCHGEAR
SPECIFICATION FOR MAINTENANCE FREE 11 KV RING MAIN GEAR (RMG)
SWITCHGEAR
1.0. SCOPE
1.1 Design, Engineering, Manufacture, assembly, Stage testing, inspection and
testing before supply and delivery at site, Erection, Installation, testing &
Commissioning of Ring Main units outdoor type SF6 (with 2 numbers Load break
Isolators for 11 KV Incoming & Out going cables and VCB / SF6 Breaker for
Distribution Transformer)
1.1.1 This Specification provides for design, manufacture, inspection and testing
before despatch, packing and delivery F.O.R.(Destination) of SF6 insulated RMUs
with necessary take off terminal units for future automations, other accessories and
auxiliaries equipments and mandatory spares, described herein. The objective of the
RMUs is for extremely small construction width, Compact, maintenance free,
independent of climate, easy installation, operational reliability, Safe and easy to
operate, minimum construction cost, minimum site work and minimum space
requirement.
1.2. The RMUs shall conform in all respects to high standards Of Engineering
design, workmanship and latest revisions of relevant stan-dards at the time of offer
and purchaser shall have the right to reject any work or material which in his
judgment is not in full accordance therewith.
1.3. The type of the 11 KV circuit breaker shall be either SF6 / VCB and
insulating medium for load break isolators, Earth switch, 11 KV Bus-es and other
associated equipments should be SF6 gas.
2.0. GENERAL:
The Ring Main Unit shall be installed at 11 KV junction points to have
continuous supply by isolating faulty sections. The RMU shall be extensible and
consists of the following combinations of load break switches and Circuit breakers
for a nominal voltage of 12 KV using SF6 gas as insulating and SF6 / Vacuum as arc
quenching medium.
The RMU and combition shall be erected at outdoor, tropicalised and outdoor
metal enclosed type. The RMU metal parts
129
shall be of high thickness high tensile
steel which must be grit / short blasted, thermally sprayed with Zinc alloy,
phosphate and subsequently painted with polyurethane based powder paint, the
overall paint layer thickness shall be not less than 150 microns.
Relevant IE rules for clearances, safety and operation inside the enclosure
shall be applicable. The enclosure shall be IP 54 and type tested for weather proof
at ERDA/CPRI.
All live parts except for the cable connections shall be insulated with SF6 gas.
The SF6 enclosure shall be made of robotically welded stainless steel / Metallised
Cast Resin.
The cubicle shall be metal enclosed with a sheet steel of high thickness and
provided with a pressure relief arrangement away from operator.
Both the load break switches and the tee off circuit breaker shall be suitable
for motorization in future.
Any accidental over pressure inside the sealed chamber shall be limited by
the opening of a pressure-limiting device in the rear/top part of the enclosure. Gas
will be release to the rear of the switchboard away from the operator to ensure
safety of the operating personnel and all the manual operations will be carried out
on the front of the switchboard.
The Entire units of RMU shall be in a single compact metal clad, outdoor type
suitable for all weather conditions. The switchgear and bus bar shall all be filled with
SF6 at 0.5 bar G/IEC/IS Standards relative pressure to ensure the insulation and
breaking functions. The enclosure must be sealed for life and shall meet the “sealed
pressure system” criterion in accordance with the IEC 298 standard. The RMU must
be a system for which no handling of gas is required throughout the 20 years of
service life.
The enclosure for switchgear and metallic RMU housing shall have a design
such that in the event of an internal arc fault, the operator shall be safe. This should
be in accordance with IEC 298 and releavent Test certificates shall be submitted
relay with the Tender.
Suitable temperature rise test on the RMU with enclosure shall be carried out
& test reports shall be submitted with tender for technical bid evaluation.
Each switchboard shall be identified by an appropriately sized label, which
clearly indicates the functional units and their electrical characteristics.
130
The switchgear and switchboard shall be designed so that the position of the
different devices is visible to the operator on the front of the switchboard and
operations are visible as well.
The entire system shall be totally encapsulated. There shall be no access to
exposed conductors. In accordance with the standards in effect, the switchboards
shall be designed so as to prevent access to all live parts during operation without
the use of tools.
The entire 11 KV RMU are insulated by inert gas (SF6) suitable for operating
voltage up to 12 KV respectively. The 11 KV circuit breakers must be VCB/SF6
breaker. It is necessary to fit an absorption material in the tank to absorb the
moisture from the SF6 gas to regenerate the SF6 gas following arc interruption. The
SF6 insulating medium shall be constantly monitored via a temperature
compensating gas pressure indicator offering a simple indication. All the combination
of the RMUs should have the required SF6 insulation by providing necessary gas
chamber capacity.
SULPHUR HEXA FLUORIDE GAS (SF6 GAS)
The SF6 gas shall comply with IEC 376,376A,and 376B and shall be suitable
in all respects for use in 11 KV panels under the operating conditions. The SF6 shall
be tested for purity, dew point air hydrolysable fluorides and water content as per
IEC 376,376A and 376B and test certificate shall be furnished to the owner
indicating all the tests as per IEC 376 for each Lot of SF6 Gas . The metallic
enclosure should be tested for leakage at site.
3.0 STANDARDS
Unless otherwise specified elsewhere in this Specification, the RMU,
Switchboard (Switchgear), Load break isolators, Instrument Transformers and other
associated accessories shall conform to the latest revisions and amendments thereof
of the following standards.
1) IEC 60 298/IEC 62 271-200/IS 12729:1988 - General requirement for
Metal Enclosed Switchgear
2) IEC60129/IEC62271-102/IS 9921 - Alternating current
disconnector’s (Load break
isolators) and earthing
switch
3) IEC 62 271-100/IEC 60 056/IS 13118:1991 - Specification for
alternating IEC 62 271-200
current circuit breakers.
131
 IEC 62 271-1/IEC 60694 - Panel design, SF6/Vacuum Circuit Breakers

 IEC 60044-1/IEC 60185/IS 2705:1992 - Current Transformer
 IEC 60265/IS 9920:1981- High voltage switches.
 IEC 376- Filling of SF6 gas in RMU.
 IEC 60273/IS :2099 - Dimension of Indoor & Outdoor post
insulators with voltage > 1000 Volts.
10)IEC 60529/IS 13947(Part-1)- Degree of protection provided by

enclosures for low voltage
switchgear and control gear.
4.0. Indian Electricity Rules/Bills

Equipment meeting with the requirements of any other authoritative
standards, which ensures equal or better quality than the standard mentioned above
shall also be acceptable. If the equipments, offered by the Bidder conform to other
standards, salient points of difference between the standards adopted and the
specific standards shall be clearly brought out in relevant schedule. In case of any
difference between provisions of these standards and provisions of this specification,
the provisions contained in this specification shall prevail. One copy of such
standards with authentic English Translations shall be furnished along with the offer.
(Hard copy)
5.0. THE STANDARDS MENTIONED ABOVE ARE AVAILABLE FROM:
REFERENCE/ NAME AND ADDRESS FROM WHICH THE

ABBREVIATION STANDARDS ARE AVAILABLE
IEC INTERNATIONAL ELECTRO-TECHNICAL

COMMISSION,
BUREAU CENTRAL DE LA COMMISSION, ELECTRO TECHNIQUE

INTERNATIONAL, 1, RUE DE VEREMBE, GENEVA, SWITZERLAND.
ISO INTERNATIONAL STANDARD

ORGANISATION
6.0. RMU OUTDOOR METAL CLAD

The RMU enclosure must be a metallic, it follows an industrialized process of
manufacturing. The RMU shall be of single bus bar SF6 gas insulated outdoor,
tropicalised and metal enclosed type. The RMU metal parts shall be made of high
thickness high tensile steel which must be grit/short blasted, thermally sprayed with
Zinc alloy, phosphate and subsequently painted with polyurethane based powder
132
paint, the overall paint layer thickness shall be not less than 150 microns.The rating
of enclosure shall be suitable for operation on three phase, three wire, 11 KV, 50
cycles, A.C. System with short-time current rating of 20KA for 3 seconds with
Panels.
7.0. ISOLATORS (LOAD BREAK TYPE):
The load break isolators for Incoming and Outgoing supply must be provided
and the load break isolators are fully insulated by SF6 gas. The load break isolators
shall consist of 630 Amp fault making/load breaking spring assisted ring switches,
each with integral fault making earth switches. The switch shall be naturally
interlocked to prevent the main and earth switch being switched ‘ON’ at the same
time. The selection of the main and earth switch is made by a lever on the facia,
which is allowed to move only if the main or earth switch is in the off position. The
load break isolators should have the facility for future remote operation. Each load
break switch shall be of the triple pole, simultaneously operated, non automatic type
with quick break contacts and with integral earthing arrangement.
8.0. EARTHING OF ISOLATORS AND DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER
BREAKERS (EARTH SWITCH)
Necessary arrangements are provided at Load break isolators / Distribution
Transformer Breaker for selecting Earth position. Mechanical interlocking systems
shall prevent the RMU function from being operated from the ‘ON’ to ‘Earth On’
position without going through the ‘OFF’ position.
9.0. DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER BREAKER (SF6 / VACUUM)
The SF6/VCB breaker for the controlling of DTs must be provided inside the
outdoor metal clad and insulated by SF6 gas.
The SF6/VCB circuit breaker must be a spring assisted three positions with
integral fault making earth switch. The selection of the main/earth switch lever on
the facia, which is allowed to move only if the main or earth switches is in the off
position.
The manual operation of the circuit breaker shall not have an effect on the trip
spring. This should only be discharged under a fault (electrical) trip; the following
manual reset operation should recharge the trip spring and reset the circuit breaker
mechanism in the main off position.
The circuit breaker shall be fitted with a mechanical flag, which shall operate
in the event of a fault (electrical) trip occurring. The ‘tripped’ flag should be an
unambiguous colour differing from any other flag or mimic.
133
Both the circuit breaker and ring switches are operated by the same
unidirectional handle.
The protection on the circuit breaker shall comprise of the following
components:The circuit breaker unit fitted with 3 class X protection CT’s, a low
burden trip coil and auxiliary switch assembly allowing the use of a self powered
(No external DC or AC source required) IDMT protection relays
(Numeric/Micro processor based) 3 x over current and earth fault element shall
be Definite Time type relay . The protection system should be suitable for protecting
transformers of rated power from 250 KVA on wards. The relay should be housed
within a pilot cable box accessible. A facility of provision for the delay of transformer
in-rush current shall be provided on relay to avoid nuisance tripping.
10.0. BUSHINGS
The units are fitted with the standardized bushings that comply with IEC
standards. All the bushings are the same height from the ground and are protected
by a cable cover.
11.0. CABLE BOXES
All the cable boxes shall be air insulated suitable for dry type cable
terminations. The cable boxes at each of the two ring switches suitable for accepting
HV cables of sizes 3c x 300/3c x 120 sq.mm and circuit breaker cable suitable up to
3c x 120 sq.mm.. Necessary Right angle Boot should be supplied to the cable
terminations .The type of the Right angle Boot should be cold applied
insulating Boot.
12.0. CABLE TESTING FACILITY
It shall be possible to test the cable without opening the cable boxes.
14.0.VOLTAGE INDICATOR LAMPS AND PHASE COMPARATORS
The RMU shall be equipped with a voltage indication to indicate whether or
not there is voltage on the cable. There should be a facility to check the
synchronization of phases with the use of external device. It shall be possible for the
each of the function of the RMU to be equipped with a permanent voltage indication
as per IEC 601958 to indicate whether or not there is voltage on the cables.
15.0. WIRING & TERMINALS:
The wiring should be of high standard and should be able to withstand the
tropical weather conditions. All the wiring and terminals (including take off terminals
wiring for future automation, DC, Control134
wiring), Spare terminals shall be provided
by the contractor. The wiring cable must be standard single-core non-sheathed,
Core marking (ferrules), stripped with non-notching tools and fitted with end
sleeves, marked in accordance with the circuit diagram with printed adhesive
marking strips.
The wiring should be of high standard and should be able to withstand the
tropical weather conditions. All wiring shall be provided with single core multistrand
copper conductor wires with P.V.C insulation and shall be flame retardant low smoke
type.
The wiring shall be carried out using multi-strand copper conductor super
flexible PVC insulated wires of 650/1100V Grade for AC Power, DC Control and CT
circuits. Suitable colored wires shall be used for phase identification and interlocking
type ferrules shall be provided at both ends of the wires for wire identification.
Terminal should be suitably protected to eliminate sulphating. Connections and
terminal should be able to withstand vibrations. The terminal blocks should be stud
type for controls and disconnecting link type terminals for CT leads with suitable
spring washer and lock nuts.
Flexible wires shall be used for wiring of devices on moving parts such as
swinging Panels (Switch Gear) or panel doors. Panel wiring shall be securely
supported, neatly arranged readily accessible and connected to equipment
terminals, terminal blocks and wiring gutters. The cables shall be uniformly bunched
and tied by means of PVC belts and carried in a PVC carrying trough.
The position of PVC carrying trough and wires should not give any hindrance
for fixing or removing relay casing, switches etc., Wire termination shall be made
with solder less crimping type of tinned copper lugs. Core identification plastic
ferrules marked to correspond with panel wiring diagram shall be fitted with both
ends of each wire. Ferrules shall fit tightly on the wire when disconnected. The wire
number shown on the wiring shall be in accordance with the IS.375.
All wires directly connected to trip circuits of breaker or devices shall be
distinguished by addition of a red color unlettered ferrule.
Inter-connections to adjacent Panels (Switch Gear) shall be brought out to a
separate set of Terminal blocks located near the slots or holes to be provided at the
top portion of the panel. Arrangements shall be made for easy connections to
adjacent Panels (Switch Gear) at site and wires for this purpose shall be provided
and bunched inside the panel. The bus wire shall run at the top of the panel.
135
Terminal block with isolating links should be provided for bus wire. At least 10% of
total terminals shall be provided as spare for further connections. Wiring shall be
done for all the contacts available in the relay and other equipment and brought out
to the terminal blocks for spare contacts. Color code for wiring is preferable in the
following colours.
Voltage supply - Red, Yellow, Blue for phase and Black for Neutral
CT circuits - similar to the above
DC circuits - Grey for both positive and negative
250V AC circuits - Black for both phase and neutral
Earthing - Green
The wiring shall be in accordance to the wiring diagram for proper functioning
of the connected equipment. Terminal blocks shall not be less than 650V grade and
shall be piece-molded type with insulation barriers.
The terminal shall hold the wires in the tight position by bolts and nuts with
lock washers. The terminal blocks shall be arranged in vertical formation at an
inclined angle with sufficient space between terminal blocks for easy wiring.
The terminals are to be marked with the terminal number in accordance with
the circuit diagram and terminal diagram. The terminals should not have any
function designation and are of the tension spring and plug-in type.
17.0. EARTHING
The RMU outdoor metal clad, Switch Gear, Load break isolators, Distribution
Transformer, R.S.Joists, M.S. Channels / M.S. Angles etc., shall be equipped with an
earth bus securely fixed along the base of the RMU.
COPPER Earth spikes over the R.S.Joists must be provided for protection of the
Distribution Transformer and RMU . The spikes should be earthed to ground earth
pit by providing necessary separate M.S. Flat along the leg member of the R.S. Joist.
The contractor must provide separate earthing pits and earth bus for the
following and the same shall be interconnected by using M.S. Flats
 RMU Outdoor metal body, (Switch Gear & Load break isolators)
Distribution Transformer tank, R.S.Joists, M.S.Channels, Earth Spikes and
other metal parts,
 Distribution Transformer Neutral.
The size of the earth bus shall be made of IEC/IS standards with tinned
copper flat for RMU and M.S.Flat for Distribution Transformer, earth spike
136
and neutral earthing. Provision shall be made on end of RMU for connecting the
earth bus to the earth grid by erecting suitable 2 earth pipes of 40mm dia MS rod of
3 mts in pits. Both the earth pipes are also to be connected in a grid formation.
Necessary terminal clamps and connectors shall be included in the scope of supply.
NOTE: If there are two or more Distribution Transformers, separate Earth Pipes in a
pit should be provided for each Transformer Neutral and it shall be connected with
the main Earth grid.
All metal parts of the switchgear which do not belong to main circuit and
which can collect electric charges causing dangerous effect shall be connected to the
earthing conductor made of copper having CS area of minimum 75 mm . Each end
of conductor shall be terminated by M12/equivalent quality and type of terminal for
connection to earth system installation. Earth conductor location shall not obstruct
access to cable terminations.
The following items are to be connected to the main earth conductor by rigid
or copper conductors having a minimum cross section of 75 mm
 earthing switches
 Cable sheath or screen
 capacitors used in voltage control devices, if any.
All metallic cases of the relays, instruments and other panel mounted
Equipment’s shall be connected to the earth bus by independent copper wires of size
shall be made of IEC/IS standards. The colour code of earthing wire shall be green.
Earthing wires shall be connected on the terminals with suitable clamp connectors
and soldering shall not be permitted.
18.0 CIVIL WORKS
The work shall include the following
1)Mass plinth foundation for mounting RMU and associate combination of
Isolators and Breakers
2)Mass plinth foundation for R.S.Joists for mounting DTs foundation for DTs
suit to the site conditions.
3)Foundation at water locking area shall be elevated, additional cost will not be
provided.
19.0 STRUCTURE FOR DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER:
The Distribution Transformer structure has to be fabricated with the following
materials:
137
1) RS Joists for leg member : 150 x 75 mm
2) MS angle for seating : 65 x 65 x 6 mm

3) Chequered Plate : 8 mm thickness.
4) PVC Pipes : 140 mm dia. or higher size wherever
required.
Arrangement for collection and discharge of oil deposit from transformer
seating platform to ground is to be provided.
Necessary cement collar for Earth pit.
Wherever 2 distribution transformer combinations comes, necessary
arrangements for providing extra R.S. Joists, chequered plate, ms angle and
Earthing must be made.
Necessary indicative drawing for the same is enclosed. However if necessary,
the drawings suitable as per site conditions shall be designed, and got approved
from TANTRANSCO before fabrication and erection at site. Any saving and material
will be recovered. All the Bolts, Nuts fasteners shall be galvanized. All structures
should be painted with three coating of aluminium.
20.0. ACCESSORIES & SPARES:
The following spares and accessories shall be supplied along with the main
equipments at free of costs.
 Charging lever for operating load break isolators & circuit breaker of each
RMU.
 Pressure gauges – 5 numbers
 Any other spares & Tools, which are all essentially required at the time of
emergency and routine maintenance.
Provision shall be made for padlocking the load break switches/ Circuit
breaker, and the earthing switches in either open or closed position with lock &
master key.
21.0.TESTING OF EQUIPMENT & ACCESSORIES:
Provision for testing CTs, Relays, Breakers and Cables shall be made
available. Procedure and schedule for Periodical & Annual testings of equipments,
relays, etc. shall be provided by the supplier.
22.0. TESTS:
22.1 ACCEPTANCE AND ROUTINE TESTS
All acceptance and routine tests as stipulated in the latest IEC- shall be
carried out by the supplier in the presence
138 of Board’s representative. The supplier
shall give at least 7 days advance intimation to the Board to enable them to depute
their representative for witnessing the tests. The cost towards transport, stay and
other expenses shall be borne by the supplier.
22.2. ADDITIONAL TESTS
The Board reserves the right for carrying out any other tests of a reasonable
nature at the works of the supplier/laboratory or at any other recognized
laboratory/research institute in addition to the above mentioned type, acceptance
and routine tests at the cost of the Board to satisfy that the material complies with
the intent of this specification.
22.3. PRE-COMMISSIONING TESTS
The supplier has to arrange all the pre-commissioning tests in the presence of
the Board testing engineer and necessary drawing manual and periodical test tools
shall be arranged to be supplied. Also outdoor test for RMU should be conducted.
The above tests are the responsibility of the contractor till the RMUs are put
in to service.
23.0.INSPECTION:
The inspection may be carried out by the Board at any stage of manufacture.
The supplier shall grant free access to Board’s representative at a reasonable time
when the work is in progress. Inspection and acceptance of any equipment under
this specification by the Board shall not relieve the supplier of his obligation of
furnishing equipment in accordance with the specification and shall not prevent
subsequent rejection if the equipment is found to be defective.
The supplier shall keep the Board informed in advance, about the
manufacturing programme so that arrangement can be made for inspection. The
Board reserves the right to insist for witnessing the acceptance/routine testing of
the bought out items. The Board has rights to inspect the supplier’s premises for
each and every consignment for type & routine test. The cost towards transport,
stay and other expenses shall be borne by the supplier.
No material shall be dispatched from its point of manufacture unless the
material has been satisfactorily inspected and tested / unless the same is waived by
the Board in writing.
24.0. QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN:
The bidder shall invariably furnish following information along with his offer.
(i) Statement giving list of important raw materials including but not limited to
139
 Contact material
 Insulation
 Sealing material
 Contactor, limit switches, etc. in control cabinet.
Name of sub-suppliers for the raw materials, list of standards according to
which the raw materials are tested, list of test normally carried out on raw materials
in presence of Bidder’s representative, copies of test certificates.
 Information and copies of test certificates as in (i) above in respect of bought
out accessories.
 List of areas in manufacturing process, where stage inspections are normally
carried out for quality control and details of such tests and inspections.
 Special features provided in the equipment to make it maintenance free.
 List of testing equipment available with the Bidder for final testing of Rmus
and associated combinations vis-à-vis, the type, special, acceptance and
routine tests specified in the relevant standards. These limitations shall be
very clearly brought out in the relevant schedule i.e. schedule of deviations
from specified test requirements. The supplier shall, within 15days from the
date of receipt of Purchase Order submit following information to the Board.
 List of raw materials as well bought out accessories and the names of sub-
suppliers selected from those furnished along with offer.
 Necessary test certificates of the raw material and bought out accessories.
 Quality Assurance Plan (QAP) with hold points for Board’s inspection. The
quality assurance plan and hold points shall be discussed between the Board
and supplier before the QAP is finalised.
The supplier shall submit the routine test certificates of bought out items and
raw material, at the time of routine testing of the fully assembled breaker.
26.0 DOCUMENTATION
All drawings shall conform to relevant International Standards Organization
(ISO) Specification. All drawings shall be in ink and suitable for microfilming.
27.0. DRAWINGS
The tenderer shall submit along with his tender dimensional general
arrangement drawings of the equipments, illustrative and descriptive literature in
triplicate for various items in the RMUs which are all essentially required for future
automation.
140
 Schematic diagram of the RMU panel
 Instruction manuals
 Catalogues of spares recommended with drawing to indicate each items of
spares
 List of spares and special tools recommended by the supplier.
 Copies of Type Test Certificates as per latest IS/IEC.
 Drawings of equipments, relays, control wiring circuit, etc.
 Foundation drawings of RMU and D.T.Structure.
 Dimensional drawings of each material used for item Vii.
 Actual single line diagram of RMU/RMUs with or without Extra combinations
shall be made displayed on the front portion of the RMU so as to carry out the
operations easily.
The following should be supplied to each consignee circle along with the initial
supply of the equipments ordered.
5 copies of printed and bound volumes of operation, maintenance and erection
manuals in English along with the copies of approved drawings and type test reports
etc.
3 sets of the manuals as above shall be supplied. A soft copy of the all
Technical and Drawing furnished in a CD
28.0. NAME PLATE:
Each RMU and its associated equipments shall be provided with a nameplate
legible and indelibly marked as in general technical requirements.
29.0. ERECTION AND COMMISSIONING:
All the erection works like Transportation, erection of RMUs with necessary take off terminal units for
future automations, foundation structures for RMUs which includes civil & concrete works, foundation
structures for R.S.Joists for mounting DTs, earthing, Control cable wiring etc. shall be erected, tested &
commissioned under turnkey basis.
30.0. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR RMU

I. 11KV Bus Bar
Type of material : Copper
Current Carrying Capacity : 630 Amps.
Short time rating current for 3 secs. : 20 KA
Insulation of bus bar : SF6
Bus bar connections : Anti-oxide grease
II. Parameters for Switch Gear of DT and load break isolators

Type : Metal enclosed
No of Phases 141 :3
No. of poles :3
Rated voltage :12 KV
Operating voltage :11 KV(+10% to –20%)
Rated lightning impulse withstand voltage : 75KV
Rated power frequency withstand voltage :28 KV
Insulating gas :SF6
Rated filling level for insulation :0.5
bar/As Per IEC.
Max.permissible site altitude at the above gas pressures : 1000m
(The operating pressure has to be adjusted for greater altitudes)
Rated short time current :20 KA.
Rated short time :3s
Rated peak withstand current :50 KA.
Operating mechanism: Circuit breaker with spring assisted anti reflex
mechanism.
Rated current (Bus): :630 A
Rated current (breaker) :200 A
Circuit Breaker interrupter :SF6/VCB
Rated frequency : 50 Hz
Rated operating sequence :O-3min- CO
Number of mechanical/Remote operations for earthing As per IEC
& Ring switches & Number of mechanical/ 60298
remote operations for circuit breakers
III.PRINCIPAL FEATURES:
Sl No DESCRIPTION DT
breaker
1 Circuit label Yes
2 Mimic diagram Yes
3 Supply voltage indication Yes
4 Current Transformer Yes
5 Self Powered based Microprocessor Yes
based IDMT Relay (3OL)/EL
6 Anti –Reflexing Relay Yes
7 Interlock to defeat the operation of Yes

the line side earthing when the line
side isolator is ON.
8 Interlock to defeat the operation of Yes
the earthing when the breaker is in
service position and is ON.
9 Local /Remote Switch Yes
10 Breaker ON/OFF indication Yes
11 Spring Charge indication / Spring Yes
assisted mechanism.
12 Fault Tripping indication Yes
13 Bus bar end caps Yes
14 Whether the SF6 gas pressure gauge Yes
indicator and142filling arrangement.
assis
15 Whether the spring ted Yes
hand
mechanism with operating le
for ON/OFF.
16 Whether the earth positions with Yes
arrangement for padlocking in each
man
position and independent ual
operation with mechanically
operated indicator are provided
17 RMUs are provided with necessary Yes
take off terminals for future
automation.
IV. Load break switch(Isolators)
Type : SF6 load breaking and fault
making.
Rated current :630 A
Fault making capacity(KA peak min.) : 50 KA
V. Earthing switch for 11 KV Line side Isolation and DT
Rated short time current :20 KA.
Rated short time :3s
Rated peak withstand current :50 KA
143
Interlocking facility: 1) Between 11 KV Line side isolator ‘ON”& Earthing.
 Between 11 KV DT side breaker on close condition &
Earthing.
VI. Current Transformers for breaker
CT Type : Tape wound
CT Description :The CTs of DT breaker shall be
suitable for sensing the minimum primary variable current in the order of
10-60 A and the secondary current for the CT is 1 A. The CT shall be housed
in outside SF6 chamber for testing and Maintenance
Accuracy Class : class X/5P10 protection
Rated burden : Suitable for self powered relay.
TERMINATIONS
The Terminations should be provided by the contractor at the following
places in RMU.
 Incoming cable to Isolators
 Outgoing cable from Isolators
 Outgoing cable from Dt Breaker of RMU to the DT HT
 Incoming cable to DT HT side.
The terminations should be suitable for Indoor of the RMU & outdoor of
the DT. The terminations shall be Heat shrinkable. Necessary suitable
clamps shall be provided. The size of the cable will be 11KV 120 sqmm XLPE
cable.
Further, the bidder shall submit Schedule of Guaranteed Particulars
for
 Out door Metal Clad,
 DT Breaker
 Load Break Isolators & Earthing arrangements
 Current Transformers and
 Self Powered Micro Processor based Numercal Relays.
SECTION - 12
HEAT VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
1.0. GENERAL
The scope of work comprises the design calculation, engineering, preparation
of shop drawings, obtaining approvals, procurement, manufacture, supply, factory
testing, marking, packing, shipping, transportation to site installation, testing and
commissioning of the plant to obtain a complete and fully functional air-conditioning
and ventilation system including power / control panels, automatic control and
related cabling and wiring according to the requirements of the Contract Documents.
This specification shall be applicable for the new 230 kV substation.
It is not the intent to specify completely herein all the details of design and
manufacturing of the functional air-conditioning and ventilation systems. It may be
noted that norms specified are the bare minimum that is required. The HVAC System
shall conform in all respects to high standards of engineering design and
Workmanship and should be capable of performing continuous commercial operation
within the parameters guaranteed by the Bidder / Contractor in a manner acceptable
to TANTRANSCO.
All equipment, parts and components as well as any kind of work, services,
safety measures, test and samples not mentioned nor particularly specified but
essential and required for the proper and normal operation, service or maintenance
of the systems, shall be included in the design/construction package.
The conceptual layout, system description and operation, design, calculations,
shop drawings, materials and equipment of all HVAC systems shall be submitted to
TANTRANSCO for his review and approval, before the Bidder / Contractor may start
with the fabrication, construction, erection and installation work.
Air-Conditioning and ventilation systems shall be selected, calculated,
designed, manufactured, executed and tested in conformity with the latest issues of
the relevant and internationally recognized codes and standards.
Calculation of heat loads and losses, cooling loads, ventilation and airflow
requirements shall be made in accordance with the ASHRAE Standard for Cooling
Load Calculation and with the Duct System Design Method.
Commercially available cooling load and duct system design programs may be
used for load calculation and the results of the calculation process shall be submitted
along with a hard and a soft copy of the calculations..
Tests on equipment and duct work for proper functioning, air-tightness and
guaranteed data shall be undertaken according to the related Standards and shall be
performed according to approved test procedures and test protocols.
The Bidder/Contractor is obliged to co-ordinate in due time the design,
installation and integration of the air-conditioning and ventilation system at the
building with the related design and construction requirements of the architectural,
civil, electrical and mechanical works.
2.0.EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION AND COLOUR CODES
Concerning Air-Conditioning and Ventilation Systems Identification the
following shall be used.
Coloured Arrows and Texts shall be provided to identify concealed and
exposed ducts and pipes. Details shall be submitted for approval.
3.0. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
3.1.HVAC Works
All equipment shall be installed according to the requirements of this
Specification and by following the manufacturer's instructions and recommended
best practice, and as per approved drawings and in accordance with the directions of
Tantransco on site. All necessary shims, anchor bolts, hangers, brackets, junction
pieces, lubricating oil and other items required for proper installation shall be
furnished.
Ductwork made of hot dipped galvanized (Z27) steel sheets shall be straight
and smooth on the inside with neatly finished joints, flanged connections and shall
be air-tight. Sheet metal thickness shall be 0.8 mm for ducts up to 1.0 m width and
1.00 mm for wider ducts.
Changes in dimensions and shape of ducts shall be made in a gradual
manner. All ducts or motorized fire dampers passing through partitions or formed
openings in concrete walls or floor slabs shall be thoroughly installed in straight
alignment.
Where sheet metal ducts are embedded in concrete, the Bidder/Contractor
shall take proper precautions to prevent collapsing the sides of the ducts when
concrete is being placed. The exposed surfaces of embedded ductwork shall be
protected against corrosion.
Horizontal duct runs shall be supported with galvanized steel threaded rod
and steel angles, hot dip galvanized after fabrication.
Vertical duct risers and other duct runs where the method of support specified
above is not applicable shall be supported by substantial angle brackets designed to
meet site requirements. All supports, brackets etc. shall be hot dip galvanized after
fabrication.
All the sheet metal supplies air and return air ducts shall be insulated with 38
mm thick rigid fibreglass. The insulation shall be adhered to duct surfaces with an
approved adhesive and stick clips. All edges of insulation shall be butted and all
joints shall be sealed with a vapour barrier mastic and vapour barrier tape.
All the insulated ductwork shall be wrapped with 6 oz. (minimum) Canvas
Cloth with one coat of weather protection and two coats of vapour barrier. All the
visible and A/C Plant Room installed sheet metal insulated ducts shall have external
sheet metal cladding of 0.8 mm thick aluminium sheeting.
Rubber mounts shall be provided between ducts, pipes and the related
hangers and brackets.
Wooden pieces treated with wood preservative coating and equivalent to the
insulation thickness shall be provided between the insulated duct and pipe and the
mounting clamps. The wooden pieces shall be embedded within the insulation and
shall be covered by the vapour barrier insulation or cover.
All air ducts shall be equipped with a sufficient lot of access doors and
inspection openings of an adequate size for easy inspection, service and cleaning of
the duct from inside, for the service, inspection and maintenance of the dampers,
electric heaters and of all the other duct mounted devices and units.
Test holes with plugs shall be provided on supply air ducts, return air ducts
and ventilation ducts for static and dynamic air pressure and air flow measurements.
To maintain the specified noise criteria sound attenuators shall be provided in
the air supply return and exhaust ducts.
All equipment, components of the plants as well as components for
monitoring, controlling, indicating, announcing, acting, switching, alarming,
measuring, servicing and maintenance shall be clearly labelled.
The labels shall, depending on the purpose for which they are to be used, be
made of non-transparent or translucent heat resisting synthetic resin, stainless steel
or aluminium subject to Tantransco approval of samples.
The identification labels for the fire dampers shall be made of trafolite plates
with red border, white background and red engraving.
Flow-direction arrow plates shall be provided in the vicinity of branch-off
connections, at the inlet branch connections and down stream of all valves and
dampers. Pipes, ducts and valves shall be identified by self adhesive tapes in the
identification colour of the medium transported.
Generally, each mechanical and electrical device shall be provided with an
earthing screw of sufficient diameter suitable for connection to the protective
earthing system. The Bidder/Contractor is responsible that all metallic housings,
ducts, pipes and other parts of the complete installation, such as equipment, fans,
pumps, compressors, tanks, fire dampers, filters, etc., are effectively connected by
earth conductors Duct and pipe risers shall be covered by masonry enclosure with
inspection and cleaning openings including removable cover plates of stainless steel
and tile finishing.
The Bidder/Contractor shall supply, install and connect all necessary drainage
and waterproofing of his ventilation and A/C plants. The drainage and waterproofing
shall include all drain pans, condensed water drains, siphons, funnels and drain
pipes connected to the next floor drain.
All relevant safety regulations shall be observed carefully. All heavy
equipment such as ACCU, AHUs, pumps, fans, etc., shall be placed on concrete
foundations with sub-layers of anti-vibration material to avoid the conduction of
vibrations from the noisy equipment through the building structure into surrounding
areas and spaces. Where necessary, the equipment shall be set up on additional
spring type anti-vibration pads or isolating rubber.
The air-handling units shall be installed in a separate room of sufficient size or on the roof
with clearances for easy and proper maintenance with the following minimum clearances to the equipment .
Front side: 1.5 m

Rear side : 1.0 m
Other Sides: 1.0 m
Between two AHUs: Width of the AHU + 0.2 m.
If it is in a room, the sufficient clear height (4.5m) to accommodate the
ductwork under the roof or floor slab and beams, shall be considered.
The A/C plant room doors shall have a sufficient opening size to allow for the
easy and complete removal of the AHUs.
If HVAC equipment is installed on the top of buildings, the metallic stairs shall
be provided for maintenance work. Vertical cage ladders are not acceptable for that
purpose.
Final arrangement of HVAC equipment including installation method shall be
the subject of TANTRANSCO’s approval.
4.0. DESIGN CRITERIA FOR THE HVAC SYSTEMS
4.1.GENERAL SYSTEM DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
The HVAC systems shall be designed for a trouble-free, continuous, safe,
effective and economic operation of the entire HVAC plant and of the served electric,
electronic, mechanical and civil installations and substation operating personnel if
any.
Stand-by capacities shall be provided as mentioned below and shall include an
automatic switchover function in case of a unit failure as well as suitable control and
indication facilities at approved locations.
The systems shall be designed to serve as a centralized air-conditioning
system for all areas and spaces of the entire S.S with air-conditioned air.
Summer Room Noise Unit’s

DB Winter DB Air
Level from
Temperatu Temperatur
Area / Space re e Humidity Capacity
HVAC
(˚C) (˚C) [% r. h.] Split (%)
dB(A)
Office, Control
Rooms, 23 ± 2 21 ± 2 50 ± 10 45 4 x 100
Relay Room 23 ± 2 50 ± 10 45 4 x 50
21 ± 2
Note: If rooms of different standby percent requirements are grouped under one
system due to practical reasons the higher percentage standby (i.e. 100% standby)
shall be considered without any financial impact.
It should be noted that in a Central air-conditioning system whenever RH
% controlled rooms and RH% uncontrolled rooms are grouped under one air
system due to practical reasons the RH% control needs to be applied for the full
air system. So the total airflow of the air system has to be considered in the
calculation of heater capacity.
The following situation shall be considered for calculating duct-reheated
capacity.
Winter, any time of the day when there is no cooling demand, FA intake
at 7degC DB and RH 100% condition.
Air Temperature and Humidity:
Summer Winter
Max. dry bulb temp 45 °C Min. dry bulb temp 18 °C
Max. moisture
Max. wet bulb temp. 30 °C content 100%
Average daily range 14 °C
Therefore only the highest available material standard shall be applied with
special coating and painting of all exposed surfaces to prevent the equipment from
all corrosion effects.
The capacities of this equipment shall be de-rated for the specified local
outdoor air-conditions. In case of non-availability of the certified de -rated capacity
from the manufacturer of the equipment, the nominal capacity shall be reduced in
the design calculation by 25%. Proper condensate water connections with drain-
traps to the main drainpipes shall be provided.
Any area / room not covered by the A/C units shall be air-conditioned
according to similar rooms as directed by TANTRANSCO.
4.2. HEAT TRANSMISSION DATA:
Unless otherwise indicated, the heat transmission coefficient for the cooling
load calculation shall be re-checked by the Bidder/Contractor and submitted for
approval to TANTRANSCO.
Construction material shall be selected in such a way that the U-values will
not exceed the requirements of local regulations applicable if any
Data such as U-valves, thermal resistances or thermal conductivities shall be
taken only from the following sources
ASHRAE fundamentals volume
Carrier design handbook
Values provided by manufacturers of particular construction materials.
The Bidder/Contractor shall submit the calculations with the actual values and
guarantee the proper performance of the HVAC plant.
2.3. Fresh Air Rate
The minimum fresh air rate per person shall be 60 m3 / h but not less than
the following:
Total amount of air extracted out of the air-conditioned area. Plus 5% of the
supply air flow rate.
2.4. Air Change Rate
Toilets and kitchen 10 AC/hr.
Airflow rates into air-conditioned areas shall be determined by the cooling load
calculations.
4.5.Space Pressurization
Unless otherwise indicated or required, the return airflow rate of the air-
conditioned areas shall be 95% of the supply air quantity. This is to create a slight
positive pressure in the building to prevent the Infiltration of humid, dust-laden air
into the building. However, the battery, kitchen and sanitary rooms shall have slight
negative pressure.
4.6.Air Filtration
For the classification of the air filtration the ASHRAE standard 52-76 shall be
applied. The filter efficiency shall be measured and defined by the dust filter
coloration method according to this standard (with synthetic dust). The following
filter efficiencies are to be provided for the indicated areas:
Area/Space Air Filter Efficiency
Switch-Gear Rooms 95%
Cable cellar Rooms 95%.
4.7.Air Flow Velocities
The maximum airflow velocities shall be as follows:
Room, Equipment Air Flow Velocity (m/s)
0.15 - 0.25 at 1.5 m a. fl.
In air-conditioned rooms l.
 Through bag type air filter insets 1.5 - 2.0
Through air cooling coils 1.5 - 2.5
 Through air grilles, registers or
diffusers 2.0 - 2.5
 Through facade air louvers 1.0 - 1.5
 Through perforated floor tiles 1.5 - 1.5
 Through main air ducts 5.0 - 7.0
 Through branch air ducts 3.0 - 5.0
The ductwork shall be designed on basis of the equal friction method for a
maximum friction of 4 Pa/m of duct length (or 0.05 inch per 100 ft).
For the final design of the above-mentioned airflow velocities, the induction
effects of the jet air distribution and the maximum allowable sound pressure level
shall be considered, too.
4.8. Load Calculation Figures
Only the real heat dissipation of the equipment, switchgears and control
panels confirmed by the supplier/manufacturer shall be considered in the design of
the HVAC systems and a copy of these values shall be submitted to TANTRANSCO.
for approval before the cooling load and the air flow design calculations will be
performed.
The heat load from further equipment, switchgear, control panels and cables
planned as an extension of the SS in the future shall also be considered in design.
A safety margin of 10% shall be considered in all design calculations.
Glass shading factor shall be neglected and calculated with 1.0.
Ballast factor of 1.25 shall be considered for fluorescent lamps.
Lighting loads shall be considered with 20 W/m2 for control and relay rooms,
communication rooms, offices, social rooms and 15 W/m2 for switchgear and other
rooms and areas.
Load calculations to be done by ASHRAE or Carrier load estimating program
E20-II.
Design time and date shall be at first computer estimated for the peak solar time for
each space to get the peak load.
5.0. DESIGN, DRAWINGS, APPROVAL OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
5.1. DRAWINGS
The following drawings shall be prepared for the design, construction and
commissioning:
 Clear architectural/structural drawings without dimensions showing the
arrangement of the electric equipment layout (with thin dotted lines)
 HVAC layout drawings, 1:100 scale, for the conceptual layout and
coordination
 HVAC working drawings, 1:100 scale
 HVAC sectional views 1:50
 HVAC construction and assembly details, 1:20 or as required
 Civil work drawings with openings, reservations, block outs and foundation
slabs
o Separate HVAC drawings for each floor, with necessary sections and
elevations.
o Air ducts axiometric schemes
o HVAC equipment schedules
o HVAC control diagrams
5.2. DESIGN
The following steps shall be considered for the design of the HVAC system:
b1)Preparation and submission of a system description and its functional
operation for approval, including the control and alarm systems
b2) Preparation and submission of layout, arrangement, work and as-built
drawings
b3) Design calculations.
The following calculations shall be submitted by the Bidder/Contractor:
 Tabulation of interior heat loads
 Calculation of heating load
 Calculation of the cooling load
 Calculation of air flow rates
 Calculation of make-up air flow rates for the building pressurization
 Calculation of static duct pressure drops
 Sizing of ducts, grilles, registers, diffusers, valves, dampers, louvers,
filters, cooling coils, air heaters, fans, compressors, condensers, refrigerant
and drain pipes
 Calculation for circuit breaker sizing, cable sizing.
b4) Work and construction drawings
After the approval of system description, the conceptual layout drawings and
the design calculations, the work and construction drawings with legend, schedule of
materials and equipment, typical details and sections shall be submitted for
approval.
5.3. APPROVAL OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
The following documents shall be submitted for the approval of materials and
equipment:
 At least one complete original catalogue/manufacturer's for each material
and equipment (equipment and material data on Bidder/Contractors’ letter
head will not be accepted)
o Setting values/working range of timer, pressure, temperature cut-out etc.,
shall be available in the submittals
o Data verifying the cooling capacity at 500C along with performance curves,
the air flow rates, operating temperatures, voltage, ampere, protection
class, insulation class, rated power supply, rpm, details of compressor,
motor, blower, fan, coil, casing materials, surface protection
o Test certificates, wiring diagrams, graphs for applicable material
o Statistics of the climatic conditions shall be available in the manufacturer's
literature
o Materials and equipment not depending on design calculations shall be
submitted for approval at an early stage.
o A summary sheet on the cover of each submittal shall state the Content,
Revision Number, Date and CSD number of each submittal
o Model No, capacity, details, specification of material and equipment to be
included in each submittal.
6.0. SYSTEM DESIGN FEATURES
6.1. GENERAL DESIGN CONCEPT
A central air-conditioning system shall be provided for the entire Substation,
consisting of the following systems:
 One central A/C System with 2 x 100% (One working + one stand-by) for
Control Room Building, Relay Room and Office Building.
 Separate Ventilation Systems with 3 x 50% (Two working + one stand-by).
 Separate Exhaust Systems with 2 x 100% (One working + one stand-by).
Each system shall be complete in every respect for a trouble free operation,
including AHUs, fans, pumps, expansion units, ducting, refrigerant and drain piping,
thermal and vapour insulation for ducts and pipes, sun protection shields for outdoor
installed equipment, grilles, registers, diffusers, louvers, dampers, sound
attenuators, vibration isolators, air coolers, electric air heaters, air filters etc.
All outdoor installed metal parts shall be made of appropriate material and
given with anti-corrosive finish, in particular, the fan’s casing and wheel, the shaft
and motor base, the housing and the perforated cover sheet of the splitters of the
sound attenuators, the mounting hangers, supports, brackets, bolts, washers, nuts,
etc. and the sand trap louvers, the weather protection louvers, the mounting frames
and the unit frames, the outdoor installed air ducts, dampers and accessories.
The fresh air louvers, extract air louvers and extract fans installed on external
walls shall be evenly sized, leveled and distributed considering the aesthetic view.
The fixing of grilles, diffusers, louvers etc. shall be concealed type as far as possible.
If wood/wooden frames are used for fixing grilles they shall be painted with
approved fire retardant paint.
6.2. VENTILATION SYSTEMS
Exhaust shall be by 2 x 100% (one working + one stand-by) extract fans with
automatic changeover function, including air ducts, grilles, registers, valves,
diffusers, a damper for Battery room.
Battery room shall be ventilated with 6 Ach/hr or the minimum extract flow
rate recommended by Battery Manufacturer whichever is higher. All ventilation
equipment shall be made of acid resistant plastic material or suitably corrosion
protected metal for the required application if lead acid batteries are used. The fans,
isolators, switches, etc used for battery rooms shall be explosion proof.
7.0. EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
7.1. AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNITS (ACCU)
Air cooled condensing units with casing construction made of galvanized
sheet metal with 2 layers of an appropriate primer and an epoxy resin finish of 120
m - 6 thickness. Only semi-hermetic reciprocating piston type compressors with
built-in suction gas cooled motor and with integrated capacity control system shall
be applied for high efficiency and safe operation.
Condensing units shall be equipped with oil filter, sight glass, replaceable core
type filter-drier unit, expansion and safety valves and liquid line solenoid valves.
Condenser coils shall be made of copper tubes with copper fins and especially
coated for corrosion protection by plastic coating.
Each ACCU shall be mounted on vibration isolation device under the base
frame.
All components shall be protected from weather, heat, sun radiation and salt
bearing air. Units shall be complete with refrigerant piping for the connection of the
condensing unit and the AHU. Each ACCU shall have its own HP, LP and oil pressure
gauges with isolating valves.
The unit control panel shall have all necessary safety and control devices for
automatic operation under high ambient temperatures of up to 50°C and shall be
protected from sun radiation by a sun shed.
Each condensing unit shall have a weatherproof local isolator switch with a
sun shed and more than one completely separated compressor and refrigeration
circuits.
7.2. AIR HANDLING UNITS (AHU)
Air-handling units shall consist of a double skin casing construction with top
supply and return connections and hinged access panels with minimum 35 mm panel
insulation and external plastic plating, a unit base frame made from galvanized
sectional steel with 2 layers of an appropriate primer and an epoxy resin finish of
120 m -6 thickness, flexible supply and return connections, high efficiency bag filters
with galvanized steel unit frame for the filter elements, plus washable synthetic air
pre-filters with stainless steel unit frame for the filter elements, access doors and
interior lighting by marine type lamps and all necessary safety, pressure difference
monitor and automatic control devices.
The AHU shall include the centrifugal fan with spiral casing made from
continuously welded and completely galvanized sheet steel with 2 layers of an
appropriate primer and an epoxy Resin finish of 120 m-6 thickness, including the
impeller with backward curved blades for high efficiency made from continuously
welded and completely galvanized sheet steel with 2 layers of an appropriate primer
and an epoxy resin finish of 120 m-6 thickness, statically and dynamically balanced,
shaft made of smooth polished stainless steel with bearing blocks and designed for a
theoretical service life time of more than 40,000 operating hours in maintenance free
and silent roller bearings with insulating gaskets and permanent lubrication,
mounted on a common base frame for the fan casing and the motor, equipped with
a V-belt drive consisting at least of 2 endless-type V-belts and designed for a trouble
free start-up and steady operation even if one of the belts is broken, an electric
motor including 10% power reserve at minimum designed for the maximum ambient
condition and for the maximum power consumption of the fan, including stainless
steel slide rails with stainless steel clamping devices and adjustable stainless steel
belt tightening, a belt guard consisting of an easy accessible and removable
protective casing made of reinforced and stiffened perforated stainless sheet steel,
and combined with flexible duct connections spring or rubber type anti-vibration
mountings, a copper drain device and copper wire-mesh guards at the intake-air
cones of the fan’s casing. The evaporator shall be made of copper tubes with
aluminum fins altogether fully tin plated against corrosion and drained by a stainless
steel drip water pan and a plastic water trap with floating ball valve and a drain
connection pipe. The evaporator shall include the electronic expansion valve, all
refrigerant piping, thermal insulation with sun radiation and mechanical protection
sheeting.
The refrigerant charge and all insulation material must be free of chlorinated
components.
Potable water supply pipes with tap and hose connection and suitable power
point shall be provided close to the AHUs/CUs.
7.3. REFRIGERATION PIPING
All refrigerant pipes shall be made of copper, type "L" according to ASTM
B88-96 in straight length and including the matching fittings.
Refrigerant pipes shall be installed on heavy duty (galvanized and epoxy
coated for out-door installation) trays and ladders supported at every 1.0 meter.
Crossover steps made from galvanized and epoxy coated steel frames and
checkered plates shall be provided wherever required.
7.4.CONDENSE WATER DRAIN PIPES
All condense water drain pipes shall be made of a PVC pipes including fittings,
water traps and with access openings for cleaning.
Crossover steps made from galvanized and epoxy coated steel frames and
checkered plates shall be provided wherever required.
Indoor installed condense water drain pipes shall be insulated with minimum
12 mm thick closed cell foam rubber insulation and shall be claded with 0.80 mm
galvanized steel sheeting. Out door installed condense water drain pipes shall be
insulated with minimum 12 mm thick closed cell foam rubber insulation and shall
be claded with 0.80 mm galvanized steel sheeting to protect from the weather.
7.5.REFRIGERANT PIPE INSULATION
Indoor and outdoor installed refrigeration pipe shall be insulated with
minimum 19 mm thick closed cell foam rubber insulation with vapour sealing
(cloth, foster) and shall be covered with 0.80 mm aluminum sheeting.
7.6.AIR EXTRACT/EXHAUST FANS (E.F.)
Extract/exhaust fans shall consist of aluminum or GI casing, cadmium plated
fixing bolts, dynamically balanced fan wheel made of aluminum, built-in local
weather proof isolator switch, flexible connections, resilient mountings, easily
removable access cover, air operated shutter, bird guard, motor with sealed-for-life
bearing, directly driven by motor, necessary safety and control devices for automatic
operation.
All the twin fans shall have automatic switchover control in the event of fan
failure, and manual/duty selector switches with run and trip indicator lights.
The construction and components of battery room extract fans shall be
suitable to withstand all the conditions of acid vapour and corrosion and shall be
explosion proof.
All the extract / exhaust air fans shall be rooftop mounted.
7.7.ELECTRIC AIR RE-HEATERS (EH)
Electric air re-heaters shall be provided in the main S/A-ducts for air heating
and humidity control. The requirements of the humidity control shall override all the
other requirements.
The electric heating elements shall be arranged in 3 equally sized heating
banks to form 3 separate heating steps for an adequate control sequence.
The electric heaters shall consist of flanged frames with removable heater
sections, finned tubular heating elements, manual reset thermal cut-outs, automatic
thermal cut-outs, air flow switches, magnetic contactors, disconnect switch interlocks
with terminal box covers, pilot lights, terminal boxes, stage contactors, fuses, step
controllers, remote temperature and humidity sensors and controllers.
The casing of electric heater shall be manufactured from galvanized steel.
The heating elements shall consist of 80/20-nickel chrome resistance wire centred in
a metal tube and filled with magnesium oxide.
The frame of electric heaters shall exactly match with the frame of the duct
connection and all the joints shall be airtight.
The setting values of manual cut-out, automatic cut-out and airflow switch
shall be identified in submittal.
7.8.AIR OUTLETS AND AIR INLETS (REGISTERS, GRILLES, DIFFUSERS
AND VALVES)
Air outlets and air inlets shall be manufactured from high quality anodized
extruded aluminum sections with non-visible and mitered corners and joints with
sponge rubber gaskets behind the frame and nylon bushings at the blade connection
to the frame. Air outlets and air inlets for battery room shall be epoxy coated.
Air outlets and air inlets for other fixing surfaces shall have natural satin
finish.
All the air outlets and air inlets shall be selected for their particular application
and quiet operation.
7.9.SUPPLY AIR REGISTERS (SAR)
SAR shall be with double deflection blades, having horizontal blades at front
and vertical blades at back, fitted with key operated opposed blade dampers for
airflow adjustment.
7.10. RETURN AIR REGISTERS (RAR)
RAR shall be similar to the SAR.
7.11.SUPPLY AIR GRILLES (SAG)
SAG without blade dampers for air flow adjustment is not permitted.
7.12.RETURN AIR GRILLES (RAG)
RAG without blade dampers for air flow adjustment is not permitted.
7.13.SUPPLY AIR DIFFUSER (SAD)
SAD shall be supplied with hinged removable face and opposed blade
dampers operated through an outside key for the rooms having false ceiling.
SAD for raised floors must be reinforced to walk on them and shall have
perforated floor tiles.
7.14.RETURN AIR DIFFUSER (RAD)
RAD shall be similar to SAD.
7.15.EXHAUST AIR VALVES (EAV)
EAV with round air valve made of steel or plastic with white finish shall be
used for toilets, showers and tea-kitchens.
7.16.DOOR GRILLES (DG)
DG shall be non-visible type with "V" shaped inverted blades assembled
horizontally, having a fixed frame on one side and a sliding frame on the other side.
7.17.EXHAUST AIR GRILLES (EAG)
EAG shall have single horizontal fixed blade fitted with key operated opposed
blade dampers for airflow adjustment.
7.18.LOUVERS
7.18.1.OUTSIDE AIR LOUVERS (OAL)
OAL shall have sand trap louvers and air filters.
Sand trap louvers with vertically arranged profiled front elements should
separate the sand dust and dirt from the air stream. They shall be suitable to
separate the heavy solid particles by the sand trap and 80% of the light particles by
the air filter. Frame and main body of the sand trap louvers shall be made from
galvanized sheet steel or 1.5mm thick aluminum sheet, which shall also contain an
insect screen of stainless steel. Sand trap louvers that require very large sizes for
low air flow rates shall be avoided due to their large opening requirements.
Air filters shall be made of 50 mm thick synthetic and washable filter mats
with handle and filter channel made of stainless steel for easy removal.
7.18.2.EXHAUST AIR LOUVERS (EAL)
EAL shall be made from rigid extruded aluminum with inclined blades at 45 o
on 40 - 75 mm pitch to minimize water ingress. EAL shall also have insect screens
of stainless steel.
Air outlets and air inlets to be fixed in false ceiling and/or on wall shall have a finish matching with the
wall and false ceiling and coordinated with the architect for the colour.
7.19.AIR DAMPERS
7.19.1.NON RETURN DAMPER (NRD)
Non-return dampers are not permitted and must be replaced by motorized
dampers.
7.19.2.VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS (VCD)
All dampers affected by outdoor air shall be made from stainless steel; others
may be made from galvanized steel, with aerofoil blades moving on 150 mm
centres. The blades shall be mounted in stainless steel roller bearings to be operated
by an exterior linkage.
VCDs shall have manual control with engraved quadrant position indicator,
airtight lateral joint and airtight blades.
Sufficient number of VCDs shall be provided in the ductwork in order to
achieve the designed air distribution by proper air balancing.
7.19.3.MOTORIZED DAMPERS (MD)
Motorized dampers shall be applied on supply duct of all duty and stand-by
AHU’s/Fans.
MD shall be same as the VCD but shall be equipped with an exterior electric
drive motor including electric limit position switch for remote control and indication.
7.19.4.MOTORISED FIRE DAMPERS (MFD)
The casing and other parts of the MFD shall be made from galvanized sheet
steel, the blade axle shall be made of stainless steel and the bushing made of
bronze. The blades shall be made from stainless steel material. The length of the
casing shall suit the thickness of the wall or the floor slab.
The MFD shall have a fusible link (with 72 oC release temperature), with spring
return actuator and an electric limit switch for automatic remote indication.
The fire dampers shall be motorized and interconnected with the building fire
alarm panel to close by spring return activation on de -energization of power supply.
The MFDs shall be tested. On restoration of power, the activator motor shall re-open
the damper and shall simultaneously prime the spring release.
7.20.ACCESS DOORS (AD)

Access doors on air ducts shall be hinge type with insulated double skin and
airtight made from minimum 1.5 mm thick galvanized sheet steel and suitably
stiffened, including handle operated lock.
7.21.AIR FILTERS (AF)
The air filters shall be selected according to this specification. The air filters
shall be bound with inner frames for locking filter media in place and sealing of
edges to prevent air passing, but easily replaceable with all means of suitable access
to the filters for proper maintenance such as ladders, walk-ways, railing, grating,
access doors, etc.
All the filters shall meet the specified criteria of the "ASHREA" classification
method.
The filter banks of the air-handling units shall be equipped with high
efficiency bag filter insets and stainless steel mounting frames, including indicator
instruments of approved type for easy reading of the air pressure difference over the
filter bank and access doors. All outside air intakes shall be provided with stainless
steel mounting frames and with washable synthetic air filter mats.
7.22.SOUND ATTENUATORS (SA)
Indoor installed sound attenuators shall consist of galvanized steel
framework, acoustic splitters and drilled angle flanges. Acoustic splitters shall
incorporate the inert, rot and vermin-proof, non-hygroscopic and non-combustible
mineral wool or glass fibber acoustic medium packed to a density of not less than 48
kg/m3 and retained by a perforated sheet steel facing.
The design and selection of the sound attenuators shall be made according to
this specification and shall be verified by an approved calculation.
7.23.ANTI VIBRATION MOUNTINGS
All dynamic machinery shall be isolated from the building structure by
vibration isolators and/or vibration-isolating materials, which shall be purpose,
designed and selected to suit the various machines.
7.24.SPRING MOUNTINGS
Each mounting shall consist of cast telescopic top and bottom housing
containing one or more helical springs of 50 mm minimum diameter, as the
principal isolation elements. The mountings shall incorporate a built in leveling
device and resilient inserts as guides for the upper and lower housing.
The bottom plate shall be fitted with a 6 mm thick neoprene pad bonded to it
to reduce high frequency flanking. All spring mountings shall be designed such that
the lateral spring stiffness is equal to vertical stiffness.
The mountings shall be selected for all items of plant with stiffness to cater
for any eccentric weight distribution over the unit base. An equal static deflection
shall be provided on all mountings to avoid the possibility of flanking caused by the
plant tilting and rendering one or more of the mounts "solid".
Cage spring mountings shall be used for Air-cooled condensing units
according to manufacturer’s recommendations.
7.25.RESILIENT HANGERS
All resilient hangers shall be of single element design with neoprene element
or double element design with neoprene and helical spring elements. These
elements shall be mounted in a steel cage pre-drilled and tapped at top and bottom
to receive threaded hanger rods.
These hangers shall be used for duct mounted extract fans; fan coil units,
pipes etc. and selection shall be made according to type/weight of equipment and
manufacturer's recommendations.
7.26.NEOPRENE CORK AND NEOPRENE PADS
The pad shall consist either of a thick cork centre-core between two neoprene
pads (6 mm thick), and shall be used for floor mounted air-handling units, small
(less than 5.0 refrigeration tons) condensing and package units, roof mounted
extracts fans etc.
The selection of pads shall be made according to type/weight of equipment
and manufacturer's recommendations.
7.28.FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS
Flexible canvas connections with high temperature resistance shall be
provided at all suction and discharge connections of fans, air-handling units and at
ductwork crossing the building expansion joint.
Flexible connections shall be factory fabricated from chemically impregnated
canvas. The flexible connections shall be securely fixed/clamped to duct work and
equipment in an airtight fashion.
The unclamped section of flexible connection between equipment and
ductwork shall not be less than 100mm.
8.0.CONTROL SYSTEM AND CONTROL PANELS
8.1.GENERAL
The centralized electrical power supply and the control panels of the HVAC
System shall be provided either in the same room where the AHU is placed, or in the
adjacent rooms where various LV equipment are installed.
Fan motors and compressor motors must have a local isolator switch for a
secured service and maintenance work.
8.2.MOTOR CONTROL CUBICLES
Floor mounted panels shall have die cast metal construction, enclosed at all
sides with lockable front door and rubber packing, mounting frames or plates for
equipment at rear, hammer faced texture painted. Panels shall be wired up to the
labeled water repellent and non-tracking terminal blocks, wiring in the cable trunks
with insulated fixed neutral bar.
Operating pilot and indicating devices have to be situated in the front panel
for easy reading. The panels shall be equipped with incoming and outgoing
breakers. Each unit shall be switched on and off by means of push buttons /
switches with MCCB, contactors, OLR etc. and their operation is to be indicated by
signal lamps.
The cubicles and panels must be complete including cabling, wiring, terminal
racks and earthing and must be protected according to IP54.
Wiring for different purposes must be supplied in different colour material to
avoid errors and faults. The wiring shall be labeled and shall be easily legible.
8.3.AUTOMATIC CONTROL SYSTEM
A complete electronic microprocessor based automatic control system shall be
provided, including, but not limited to the following:
Motor control cubicles and control panels including
Phase indicator lamps (R, Y, B)
Voltmeter with selector switch
Ammeter with selector switch
MCCB, Contactors, OLR etc.
Interior panel LED light with door switch
Lamp test button
Anti condensation heaters and humidistat
Temperature and humidity sensors with each electric air re-heaters
Ventilation fan with filter for the A/C control panel
High humidity indication for control/relay room and SAS room
Run/off/trip indication for each condensing unit, AHU, fan and heater
Air flow failure and common dirty filter alarms and run/trip/stage indication
for each heater battery
Common fault alarm of each system on the HVAC panel
Interface facility of HVAC system to SAS
Shut down of all HVAC equipments upon fire alarm with a separate Fire
Alarm Tripped (fault) indication.
Control circuit on/off switch separate circuit breakers for extract fans,
heaters separate circuit breaker/fuse for each damper
Fire alarm reset button
Duty selector switch for each AHU and fan
Hand/off/auto selector switch for each condensing unit, AHU and fan
Automatic change-over of air cooled condensing units due to HP, LP, OP, air
flow failure, compressor failure, condensing fan failure, main fire damper closing,
supply or return air damper closing or circuit breaker trip
Pressure sensor for air filters
Controller receiving input signals and issuing control signals; set point,
proportional band shall be adjustable in the controller with a hand held programmer
for output/input programming
Transmitters with output signal installed at the measuring points
Air-conditioning control panel and all the components inside the panel shall
have identification labels of approved type
Complete cabling, wiring, terminal racks and earthing.
8.4.SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE
The entire HVAC systems shall be maintained during the warrantee period to
the satisfaction of TANTRANSCO . The Bidder/Contractor shall maintain the stock
of necessary spare parts during this period and shall attend immediately the
faults/break-downs reported by TANTRANSCO.
8.5.OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
Operation and maintenance manual as hard copies as well as soft copies (as
per contract) shall be submitted before starting the testing and commissioning at
site and shall include, but not be HVAC arrangement and layout drawing
← Description of HVAC system, its function and operation
Air flow diagrams
Control schematics and single line diagrams
Terminal and wiring diagrams
List of manufacturers and suppliers with their addresses
Manufacturer’s operating and maintenance instructions
Service and maintenance schedules
Shop inspection and site test reports
Technical documents, which shall include the manufacturer’s literatures
List of specified spare parts, consumables and tools
List of as built drawings.
8.6. JOB CONDITIONS
The Bidder/Contractor shall not proceed with testing, adjusting, and balancing
work until work has been completed and is operable. He has to ensure that there is
no latent residual work still to be completed, and the system has been started-up.
8.7. SYSTEM TEST START-UP
The system test start-up shall include the following:
All equipment shall be operable in safe and normal conditions
Temperature control systems shall be complete and operable
The thermal overload protection shall be in place for the electrical equipment
All final air filters shall be clean and in place. If conditions warrant, the
Bidder/Contractor shall install temporary media in addition to the final filters
All fans and duct systems shall be clean of debris
The fan’s rotation shall be correct
Fire and volume dampers shall be in place and open
All coil fins shall be cleaned and combed
Access doors shall be closed and duct and caps in place
All air outlets shall be installed and connected
Duct systems leakage shall not exceed the rate specified.
9.0.FUNCTIONAL AND PERFORMANCE TESTS
9.1.TEST OF THE AHU/CUS
Thermostats setting adjustment shall be tested with the air heaters and air coolers
The performance of the unitary DX air-handling units and the electric duct-heaters
shall be checked. After adjustments at supply and return air systems are made, the
following items shall be re-checked and re-adjusted if required
Compressor full load amperes (for each compressor)
Blower RPM and motor full load amperes
Condenser motor full load amperes
System static pressures, both at suction and discharge
System re-circulated air and outdoor air, DB & WB temperatures
Room inside conditions (for each room) DB & WB temperatures should be checked
and recorded. Preferably a continuous temperature/humidity recording instrument
shall be used.
The back-draft dampers, motorized fire dampers and motorized shutoff dampers
shall be tested
The manual switches and the main disconnection switches external to the main air-
distribution and extraction equipment shall be tested together with the associated
operation and fault lamps
The automatic controls shall be tested individually for satisfactory operation.
The HVAC control panel sequence of operations.
SECTION - 13
ELECTRICALLY OPERATED OVERHEAD TRAVELLING (EOT) CRANES
1.0. SCOPE:
Design, manufacture, supply, erection, testing and commissioning of Electrically
Operated Overhead Travelling (EOT) Crane of adequate capacity as per schedule.
2.0. STANDARDS:
Unless otherwise required by this Specification the crane shall be designed to

comply with the requirements of the following Standards and their latest
amendments.
BS 466 : Specification for power driven overhead traveling cranes
BS 2573 Part 1 : Specification for classification, stress calculations and design
criteria for structures.
BS 2573 Part 2 : Specification for classification, stress calculations and

design
of mechanisms.
BS 1757 : Specification for power-driven mobile cranes.
BS 2853 : Specification for the design and testing of steel overhead
runway beams.
3.0. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
3.1. The Tenderer is required to complete the technical schedules and confirm that
his designs meet the specified standards and requirements.
3.2. The capacity of the crane shall be sized to lift the heaviest GIS switchgear
component.
3.3. Lifting hooks shall be to BS 2903 as applicable.
3.4. The Crane shall be used for the erection and maintenance of the GIS switchgear
component and all plant installed in the GIS switchgear room.
3.5. The Crane shall be installed immediately after the completion of switchgear
room civil works to the approval of the Engineer. The Crane shall be used in the
erection of the GIS switchgear units.
3.6. On completion of erection of the switchgear, the Contractor shall completely
overhaul the Crane and carry out any necessary tests to the satisfaction of the
Engineer before handing over to TANTRANSCO.
3.7. The Contractor shall take into account the prevailing site conditions while
designing the cranes i.e. humidity, dust, temperature and all other loadings.
3.8. The tenderer shall prepare and submit a schedule of permanent and temporary
lifting equipment, which shall detail where electric drive or manual hoists are
proposed.
3.9. Crane hook approaches shall be of the minimum possible dimensions to ensure
maximum coverage of the plant area.
3.10. All lifting equipment shall be clearly marked in English and Tamil with the Safe
Working Load (SWL).
3.11. The cranes shall be capable of lifting and accurately positioning all loads
ranging from crane rated capacity to at least 10% rated capacity. The cranes shall
be furnished with one hoist.
3.12. The Contractor shall provide cranes of approved capacity to handle the
heaviest load to be encountered during normal maintenance and repairs and the
heaviest indivisible load during initial erection or when carrying out extensions. It
shall be capable of lifting at least 8 tones.
3.13. The crane shall have speeds under full load of:
Speed
(a) Hoisting 2 meters/minute
(b) Cross Travel 10 meters/minute
(c) Long Travel 20 meters/minute
Creep speed 25% of operating speed
3.14. All motors on each crane shall be controlled with a control & Protection panel
with adequate capacity MCCB, contactors, overload relays, U/V & O/V relays, and
other equipments required etc.
3.15.The protective devices shall be arranged so that in the event of a fault

developing on any motor, the main contactor will open, isolating all motors and
applying the electro-mechanical brakes.
3.16. Provision for Controlled lowering of any load up to and including the test load
with safety in the event of supply failure shall be made for which a brake release
lever is to be provided. The operation of which shall operate a limit switch to isolate
all crane control circuits.
3.17. Hoisting motors shall also be fitted with a centrifugal type brake capable of
restraining under all conditions of load, including test loads, the lowering speed of
which shall not be greater than twice the normal full load lifting speed. Auto brakes
shall be provided on both long travel and cross travel motors.
3.18. Each automatic brake shall be provided with local manual gear to enable the
brake to be released.
3.19. Runway beams (Rail) shall meet the requirements of the Specification.
4.0. CRANE DUTY/ CLASSIFICATION
4.1. The cranes shall meet the requirements of Group Classification A1 (Ref Table 6
Appendix D of BS 466) except that the auxiliary hoist shall be to Classification A3.
4.2. A factor of safety of 1.5 times the maximum working load is to be taken into
account for all stress calculations and also shock loading.
5.0. WALKWAYS AND PLATFORMS
5.1. The electric overhead cranes shall be provided with walkways, platforms and
guard hand rails along the bridge rails and on the crab to facilitate
cleaning/maintenance of the crane and to give access to the switchgear room high
bay lighting and ventilation/ventilation duct and grilles. Anchor points for safety
harnesses shall be provided.
5.2. The platform and walkways shall be designed to support adequate weight to be
imposed upon them during crane overhaul.
5.3. An access platform shall be provided together with a guarded ladder on the
crane to allow access to the bridge rails.
5.4. Details of the method of access to the cranes together with access ladders,
platforms etc. shall be supplied.
6.0. LONG TRAVEL RAILS
6.1. Rails, supports and stops shall be supplied and erected under this section.
6.2. The Tenderer shall submit the type and section of long travel rails on which the
cranes will run with all design calculations for approval..
6.3. The Contractor shall carryout the design, manufacture, supply, installation,
alignment of the rails used for the EOT crane and got approved by TANTRANSCO..
7.0. CONTROLS
7.1. The overhead crane shall be operated by infrared remote controll in addition to
pendant controll.
7.2. The controls shall include:
(a). Controls are to be arranged conveniently and logically. The crane controls
are to be spring loaded so that on release they return to the "off" position.
(b). A master isolator control switch, operated by a removable key, shall be

provided to open / close the main contactor, the key being removable only
when in the off position.
(c). An emergency stop device to de-energize the main contactor in

emergency.
(d). A read-out of load on each hoist.
(e). A warning Klaxon switch.
(f). A warning bell or siren with lamps shall be provided to warn that the
various motor limit switches have operated. This alarm shall be located at a
convenient location in the switchgear room. However a flashing warning
indicator of the same shall be provided on the pendant.
(g). A warning bell or siren with lamps shall be provided, to warn when the
crane is operating at its maximum load and of any attempt at operation
beyond maximum load. The alarm and flashing light shall be provided as
for (f) above.
7.3. If the switchgear design and arrangement makes the use of a pendant
suspended from the trolley impractical, a pendant which can be plugged into
stations at selected points around the switchgear room shall be provided with an
adequate lead length. These stations shall be located such that safe control of the
crane for all functions can be carried out at the front, rear or top of the switchgear
room as required by the design.
8.0. ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT:
8.1. The electrical requirements shall be generally in accordance with BS 466 except
where otherwise stated in this Specification.
8.2. The Tenderer is to include full details of the type of motor control he will supply
together with the data/ratings etc. of motors, MCCB, contactors, fuses, transformers,
rectifiers.
8.3. The electrical equipment shall consist of one three phase induction motor for
each crane motion, all of them provided with brakes; controllers, resistors, magnetic
contactors, overload protection and limit switches; all complete with hardware,
insulators and any other equipment necessary for proper operation of the crane.
8.4. The crane shall be so designed so as to guarantee fall-safe and satisfactory

operation.
8.5. Brakes shall be able to arrest the heaviest load carried at any position and hold
it.
8.6. Each motor circuit shall include three phase contactors fitted with inverse time
characteristic over current relays of approved type, together with correctly rated
fuses to BS 88.
8.7. The control equipment shall be rated to allow all crane motors to operate
simultaneously at rated speed and load and is to be housed in a drip-proof sheet
steel enclosure class IP 54 to IEC 60947.
8.8. The enclosure shall be fitted with a sheet steel access door interlocked with a
door mounted isolating switch. The door shall, in addition, be pad lockable and
complete with non-ferrous padlock and three keys.
8.9. All electrical equipment provided on cranes shall be suitable for operation both
under normal plant operating conditions and when ventilation plant is inoperative.
9.0 DOWN DROP LEADS/CONDUCTORS
9.1. Conductors, supports, anchorages and insulators are to be supplied and erected
under this Section.
9.2. The conductors shall be of the enclosed 3 phase plus earth type.
9.3. In addition to the main conductor, extra conductors, spanning one bay only in
the crane parking areas, are required to provide a supply to the anti-condensation
heaters.
9.4. The conductor shall be positioned on the side of the buildings and warning
lights are to be provided at 25 m intervals to indicate when the conductors are
energized.
10.0 BRIDGE CONDUCTORS
10.1. These are to be enclosed 3 phase plus earth type or flexible insulated looped
cable conductors. They shall not hang below the bottom flange of the bridge girders.
10.2. Where flexible conductors are used care shall be taken to ensure that cables
cannot be trapped by other parts of the crane. Also, when in the `closed’ curtain
positions the design shall not increase any minimum hook approach.
11.0 EARTHING
11.1. In order to ensure adequate earthing of the crab and bridge an earthing
conductor and pick-up shall be provided for both travel and traverse motions. The
travel-earthing conductor shall be solidly connected to the station earth bar by an
earth lead run to a point adjacent to the main isolating switch for each crane.
11.2. All metalwork of the cranes shall be bonded to the earth conductor pick-ups by
means of copper flat of approved cross sectional area.
11.3. The armoring of all cables must be bonded securely to the casings of
controllers, control panels, motors etc.
11.4. Throughout the earthing system of the cranes particular attention shall be
given to the removal of paint where earthing connections are attached.
12.0 LIMIT SWITCHES
12.1. Limit switches of the automatically self-resetting type shall be provided to

prevent over winding and over lowering of the hook.
12.2. Limit switches shall be provided on the traversing and long traveling motions.
The long traveling motor limit switches shall be provided with overriding control.
13.0. CABLING
Cable ratings shall be in accordance with Table 2, Group M8 of BS 466.

14.0. MAINTENANCE TOOLS AND SPARES
14.1. One full set of tools required for the maintenance of the EOT crane shall be
supplied.
14.2. Each 1 no of contactors, OLR, push buttons, indication lamps and adequate qty
of fuses of each rating is to be provided in a lockable spares cabinet.
15.0. ERECTION PROCEDURES
15.1. The following details of the erection procedures proposed to be used to install
the crane shall be submitted for approval.
(a). Construction Program and Erection Procedure.
(b). Details of loads to be applied to the switchgear room structure.
(c). Details of Long Travel Rails.
(d). Details of access required to erection Area.
15.2. Requirement of completeness of Switchgear Room structure and support

structure in the transformer bays so that the cranes can be erected.
16.0. TESTING:
16.1. ACCEPTANCE/SHOP TEST
16.1.1. All the acceptance test shall be carriedout as per relevant IS/IEC standards.
16.1.2. INSPECTION FOR WITNESSING OF ACCEPTANCE TESTS
16.1.2.1 The purchaser will witness the acceptance tests as identified in the
approved QA plan.
16.1.2.2. The acceptance tests carriedout in the manufacturers premises will be

witnessed by the officials nominated by TANTRANSCO. The entire expenditure
towards To & Fro travel, Boarding, lodging and all other expenses in this connection
with the inspection shall be borne by the bidder.
16.1.2.3. The inspection and acceptance of any equipment shall not relieve the
supplier of his obligation of furnishing equipment in accordance with the
specification and shall not prevent subsequent rejection if the equipment is found to
be defective.
16.1.2.4. The supplier shall keep the purchaser informed in advance, about the
manufacturing program so that arrangement can be made for inspection.
16.1.2.5. The purchaser reserves the right to insist for witnessing the acceptance /
routine testing of the bought out items also.
16.1.2.6. No material shall be dispatched from its point of manufacture unless the
material has been satisfactorily inspected and tested / or the same is waived by the
purchaser in writing and issue of dispatch instruction after approval of test reports
by the purchaser.
16.2. SITE TEST
16.1. The erected EOT crane shall be tested for its performance as per the relevant
standards.
16.2. All operational checks and tests shall be carriedout to confirm the reliability in
the operation of the crane.
16.3. The load test on the EOT crane system shall be carriedout to check the
deflections in the girders are in safe limit.
17.0 WARRANTY
17.1. The products and services offered shall have warranty to be free from defects
in the materials and workmanship for a minimum period of 36 months from the date
of commissioning the protection system.
17.2. The warranty shall not be limited to repair of the goods instead they shall
extend it to replace any faulty product.
18.0 DRAWINGS AND DATA
18.1. The general arrangement, design calculation and test reports and additional
documents required shall be submitted for approval.
18.2. An operation, instruction and Maintenance Manual should be provided with the
system.
18.3. A copy of the test report / certificate stating conformity of BIS/ international
standards must be submitted.
18.4. The drawings required for the maintenance of the system shall be submitted.
SECTION - 14
PASSENGER LIFTS
1.0 SCOPE
This specification covers the specific requirements for the design,

manufacture, inspection, supply, delivery, installation, testing and commissioning of
passenger lift of 8 persons capacity (544 kg). The lifts shall be OTIS / KONE /
Johnson make.
2.0 STANDARD
2.1. All the tests as specified in IS-4666-1968 or its latest edition shall be carried out
on the lift by the contractor which shall include the high voltage test and tests at
site. In particular, the lift shall conform to the following latest editions of applicable
standards with latest amendments.
IS-4666 - Specification for electric passenger and goods lifts.
IS-1860 - Code of practice for installation, operation and maintenance of

electrical passenger and goods lifts.
IS-3534 - Outline dimensions for electric lifts.
2.2. The lifts supplied should confirm all the safety conditions.
3.0 SPECIFICATION
3.1. The quoted price shall include the cost for design and drawings, manufacture,
supply, erection, commissioning and testing of Passenger lift SS 304 Grade with
1m/sec. speed with ARD, Johnson/ Kone /Otis brand, 8 Persons Passenger Lift, Car
Size (1300 x 1100), Gearless Lift without Machine Room to operate from G.Floor to 3
floors with automatic door opening/closing, interiors and doors with SS finishing,
including cost of all materials, suitable capacity Motor and MS ropes, lead, lift, T&P
etc., complete.
3.2 LIFT REQUIREMENTS
1. Number of lifts & Capacity 1 No / 8 persons capacity
2. Type & Make of lift Passenger lift of make ARD/OTIS/KONE/Johnson
3. Load : 544 Kgs for 8 persons capacity
4. Speed : 1 metres/Sec.
5. Control system. :Micro processor based selective collective
simplex system.
6. Drive Processor : Variable voltage variable frequency : 16 BIT
7. Travel :Ground floor to 3 floors for 8 persons capacity

lift
8. Number of landing :one number for 8 persons capacity lift

entrance
9. Type of door :Car entrance automatic center opening solid

sliding stainless steel aesthetic doors with hair
line finish with provision for emergency opening
at all landings.
10. Car enclosure Stainless steel hair line finish.
a) panel False ceiling with diffused florescent lighting and

cabin fan
b) ceiling
PVC flooring.
c) flooring
11. Door safety : Infra red light curtain for full length of door.
12. Indicators : Digital direction and position indicators in car

and at all landings.
13. Power supply : 415/440V, 50 cycles 3 phase AC supply for

power, 230 volts single Phase-AC, supply for
lighting.
14. Emergency Bell :This should be connected to dry cells so as to

function in case of power failure.
15. Automatic Rescue Device :To be provided with all basic safety functional.
In addition to the above the following have to be provided.
1. Fire Man switch

2. Intercom
3. Lift Announcement system
4. Over load warning indicator
5. Mirror
6. Handrails
7. Emergency light.
8. Leveling Device
9. Ventilation system
10. Vision Panel
3.3 INSPECTION OF WORKS
The Engineer or his duly authorized agent shall have at all times full power to
inspect the work wherever in progress either on site or the contractor's premises or
at the premises wherever situated or any firm or company where work in connection
with this contract may be in hand. All records, registers or documents relating to the
works including materials used on works shall be kept open to the inspection of the
Purchaser or his authorized representative when so called for in writing.
3.4 GUARANTEE
3.4.1 The contractor shall guarantee that the goods furnished by him shall be in full
accordance with the requirement of the specification. The contractor shall guarantee
that the goods are new and of high quality and that the goods will be free of defects
in design, materials or workmanship for a period of 2 years from the date of
completion and handing over to the Board.
3.4.2 If within the expiry of the above stipulated Guarantee period, the subject
goods or any parts thereof are found defective because of design, workmanship and
material approved by the Board, the Guarantee period for replaced parts of repair
work shall be the same as above.
3.4.3 Free servicing of the equipments with all call back service should be carried out
at no extra cost during the five year period of Guarantee.
3.4.4 For a period of 5 years from the date of issue of completion certificate,
contractor shall be liable for the replacement of any part of the plant or rectify the
works found to be defective causes arising from faulty design or workmanship and
making good any damage arising there from.
3.5. QUALITY OF MATERIALS
3.5.1. All the materials should be as per ISI/or from reputed firm.
3.5.2. All the materials are to be produced and got approved from the Board's
Engineer at site before execution.
3.5.3. All the materials should have correct specification as mentioned in the tender.
3.5.4. All the materials offered should have Brand Name or make approved by the
Site Engineers. The condition set-forth in the Tamil Nadu Building Practice shall be
adopted and followed.
3.6.0 ACCEPTANCE TEST
3.6.1. Following shall be deemed to be acceptance test, to be specially performed in

addition to usual test.
3.6.2. The lift shall be loaded with weights to such a value that the total load
(including car) is equal to carload plus twice the contract load. after removing the
weights one-hour afterwards, vertical distance between the pre-marked lines on the
car and the landing gate shall not exceed 5 mm.
3.6.3. Accuracy of the floor leveling shall be tested at full load condition. Leveling in
either direction shall be specified and guaranteed in tender. Car should be run to
each floor duly loaded in turn. While traveling in up directions the actual distance of
car floor above or below landing floor be measured. These measurements shall also
be repeated when the car is empty. There should not be any appreciable variation in
these measurements for leveling at the floors. The tolerance shall be specified and
guaranteed by the tenderer.
3.6.4. All safeties will be tested with full contract load in the Car. The Governor
tripping speed shall also be determined if it is feasible under the site condition. The
tripping speed so determined shall not be lower than 115% of contract speed. If the
Governor is present at the factory test/setting certificate shall be supplied.
3.6.5. This test shall be conducted with contract load in the car to verify that the
contract speed is maintainable. It shall be computed/measured on the basis of full
travel from ground floor to top most floor.
3.6.6. Measurement of IR value of the Electrical equipments using Megger as

appropriate.
3.7.0 OPERATING MANUAL
The tenderer shall furnish 10 copies of operating manual for the lifts after
satisfactory completion of work, at free of cost.
3.8.0 TRAINING
The tenderer shall also fully train four numbers Boards operating and
maintenance staff in the operation, repairs and maintenance procedures during the
installation and maintenance period. If necessary the tenderer shall associate an
Engineer of the Purchaser in the training programme.
SECTION – 15
FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM
SPECIFICATION FOR FIRE DETECTION, ALARM, PROTECTION AND
FIGHTING SYSTEM
1.0.FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
SCOPE: supply of Fire Extinguishers
CODES AND STANDARDS:
The design, manufacture and performance of the fire extinguishers shall
comply with all currently applicable standards, regulations and safety codes in the
locality where these equipments will be installed; in particular the fire extinguishers
shall conform to the latest Indian Standard Specifications as detailed below:-
IS. 13386 - Specification for Trolley mounted mechanical Foam Type Fire
Extinguishers .
IS. 10204 - Specification for Portable mechanical Foam Type Fire
Extinguisher.
IS. 10658 - Specification for Higher capacity Trolley Mounted Dry
chemical Powder type Fire Extinguisher.
IS. 2171 - Specification for Portable (Cartridge type) Dry Chemical
Powder Type Fire Extinguisher
2.0.DRAWINGS:
The tenderer shall submit the following information for each type of fire
extinguisher:
Full dimensional drawing showing the assembly and details of Fire Extinguisher.
Technical details with descriptive literature and photograph of Fire
Extinguisher.
Please note that the drawings for all the five types of fire extinguishers shall
be positively furnished along with your offer .
3.0.TESTS:
All tests shall be conducted as per relevant ISS. The successful tenderer shall
submit test certificates for approval. All test certificates shall be got approved by
the Purchaser before despatch of materials. Board is not responsible for despatches
made without observing the above formality.
Internal hydraulic pressure test on every fire extinguisher and hydraulic burst
test on ten percent (10%) of fire extinguishers selected as samples shall be carried
out FREE of cost to the Board.
Discharge performance test on ten percent (10%) of fire extinguishers to be
selected as sample at random by Board’s inspecting official shall also be done FREE
of cost to the Board.
Details of tests to be conducted on various types of fire extinguishers as per
relevant ISS are furnished below:
3.1. MECHANICAL FOAM TYPE OF EXTINGUISHERS:
Every Extinguisher body and cap assembly shall be tested to an internal
hydraulic test pressure of 30 Kg. f/sq.cm. for a period of 2 Mts. During this test, it
shall not show any sign of leakage.
This test may be done either with cap or without cap. In latter case, the cap
shall be tested separately.
In case of hydraulic burst test for extinguisher, mechanical failure shall not
occur at a pressure less than 45 Kg. f/sq.cm.
When an extinguisher is set in operation under normal temperature condition
of 27 + /- 5 Degree Centigrade, the foam solution shall be expelled in the form of
jet which shall maintain a throw of not less than 10 metres for a minimum period
of 60 seconds provided also that 90% of the liquid shall be completely discharged
within a maximum period of 180 seconds. The expelled foam shall cover an area of
1.0 square metre to a depth of 5 cm.
A discharge hose of 50 lts. Mechanical Foam type fire extinguishers shall
have a minimum bursting strength of 42 kg. F/sq.cm.
3.2. DRY CHEMICAL POWDER TYPE EXTINGUISHERS:
The extinguisher body and the cap assembly shall be tested to an internal
hydraulic pressure of 30 kg. f/sq.cm. for a period of two minutes. During this test it
shall not show any sign of leakage.
This test may be done either with cap or without cap and in the latter case,
the cap shall be tested separately.
In case of hydraulic burst failure test, the mechanical failure shall not occur
at a pressure less than 45 kg. f/sq.cm. (The test shall be done through discharge
fittings with cap assembled)
The design and construction of the fire extinguishers shall be such that it shall
be capable of discharging not less than 85% by weight of the actual rated capacity
of dry powder when the extinguisher is operated at angle of 45 degrees from
horizontal position at a temperature of 27+/- 2 Degree centigrade in still weather
condition.
The contents shall be expelled in the form of continuous discharge which shall
comply with following requirements.
Capacity Minimum period Maximum period Throw of jet
for which throw of to discharge 85% (In Mtrs)
jet will be of contents
maintained (In seconds)
(KG) (In seconds)
5 15 20 Not less than 4
10 23 30 Not less than 6
25 25 30 6 to 8
4.0.PACKING AND TRANSPORT:

The method of packing shall be such as to protect the fire extinguishers
with all its component parts against damage, corrosion, heavy rain,
breakages and vibration injury that may be encountered in transportation,
handling and during storage at site. The heads and threaded portion of the fire
extinguishers shall be properly protected against damage.
5.0.GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:
The fire extinguishers in all respects shall incorporate the highest quality of
modern engineering design and workmanship. The fire extinguishers shall be
designed and manufactured in accordance with Indian Standards and Supplier’s
Standard practices when such practices do not conflict with Indian Standards.
The fire extinguishers offered shall be complete with all components and
accessories which are necessary or usual for their satisfactory performance and
efficient maintenance: such parts shall be deemed to be within the scope of this
specification whether specifically included or not.
An air space shall be provided in the body above the specified liquid/dry
powder level and shall be of sufficient volume to ensure that when discharge nozzle
is temporarily closed and extinguisher is put into operation at a temperature of 27
+/- 5 Degree Centigrade, the pressure exerted shall not exceed 15 kg. f/sq.cm.
The specified level of solution in the body before insertion of inner
container shall be indicated on the exterior of the body and shall also be
permanently indicated on the interior.
6.0. 50 LITRES MECHANICAL FOAM TYPE FIRE ENGINE.
Mild Steel Sheets used for the body shall not be less than 3.15mm thick and
shall conform to Grade ‘D’ of IS 1079.’
Extruded brass sections used for the spindle, neck ring, cap, nozzle and other
discharge fittings shall conform to Grade-I of IS.291 or Type-I of IS.319.
Leaded tin bronze used for neck-ring, cap, nozzle and other discharge fittings
shall conform to Grade-LTB-2 of IS.318.
The shape of the body of the mechanical foam fire engine shall be cylindrical
with an outside diameter of 300 +/- 25mm.
The construction of the fire extinguisher shall be as per Clause-7 of IS.13386.
The charges shall consists of foam concentrate conform to IS.4989 (Part-2)
and shall bear ISI certification Mark.
The anti-corrossive treatment and painting shall conform to clauses-9 and 10
of IS.13386 respectively.
The discharge hose shall have a bore of not less than 12.5 mm and it shall
have a minimum bursting strength of 42 Kg f. Per sq.cm and a length of not less
than 3 metres.
The neck ring shall provide a clear opening of not less than 75 mm dia.
7.0. 9 LITRES MECHANICAL FOAM TYPE FIRE EXTINGUISHER:
Mild Steel sheets used for the body shall not be less than 1.6mm thick and
shall conform to Panel sheets Type-P of IS.513, Grade-“D”.
Extruded brass sections used for the plunger, sealing disc, and nozzle shall
conform to Grade-I of IS.291 or Type-I of IS.319.
Leaded tin bronze used for neck-ring, cap, plunger, nozzle, sealing disc and
other discharge fittings shall conform to Grade-LTB-2 of IS.318.
Seamless mild steel tube, if used for neck-ring, shall conform to IS.1239 (Part-I).
The shape of the body of the fire extinguisher shall be cylindrical with an
outside diameter of 175 +/- 25mm.
The construction of the fire extinguisher shall be as per clause 7 of IS.10204.
The charges shall consists of foam concentrate conform to IS.4989 (Part-2)
and shall bear ISI Certification Mark.
The anti-corrosive treatment and painting shall conform to clauses-9 and 10
The discharge hose shall have a bore of not less than 8 mm and it shall have
a minimum busting strength of 45 Kgf per Sq.cm and a length of not less than 600
mm.
The neck ring shall provide a clear opening of not less than 57mm to 63 mm
dia.
8.0. 25 Kg. DRY CHEMICAL POWDER TYPE FIRER EXTINGUISHER:
Mild Steel sheets used for the fabrication of body and neck ring shall conform
to IS.2002 or IS.2041 or IS.226. The neck ring may also be made of seamless tube
as per IS.1239 (Part-I). The construction of body shall be welded and the
requirement in respect of the thickness of the sheets and details of construction shall
be as per IS.2825. The domed ends of the body shall be without reverse of
curvature and shall be dished outwards to a radius not exceeding the internal
diameter of the body to which these are fixed. The thickness of sheets used shall
not be less than 3.15 mm.
Aluminium alloy used for nozzle shall conform to IS.617.
Extruded brass sections used for the cap and other discharge fittings shall
conform to Grade-I of IS.291 or Type-I of IS.319.
Leaded tin bronze used for cap and other discharge fittings shall conform to
Grade-LTB-2 of IS.318.
The shape of the body of the fire extinguisher shall be cylindrical with an
outside diameter not exceeding 300 +/-25 cm.
The construction of the fire extinguisher shall conform to Clause 5 of
IS.10658.
The Dry Powder shall conform to IS.4308 and shall bear ISI certification Mark.
The anti-corrossive treatment and painting shall conform to clauses-6 and 7
The discharge hose shall have bursting pressure of not less than 50 Kgf. Per
sq.cm.
The neck ring shall provide a clear opening of not less than 75mm dia. The
neck ring shall be welded to the body.
The external carbon-di-oxide gas cyclinder shall conform to IS.7285 and shall
bear ISI certifrication Mark. The tube used to interconnect main body and Carbon-
di-oxide gas cylinder shall be of copper and shall have a bursting pressure of not less
than 275 kgf/sq.cm
The Carbon-di-oxide cylinder shall have wheel valve with ISI certification Mark
to operate and discharge CO2 Gas.
The Syphon shall conform to IS.4985 M.S. Syphon tube will not be accepted.
The extinguisher shall be fitted with a separate safety valve incorporated with
cap which shall blow off at a pressure of 25 kgf/sq.cm.
Washers shall conform to Clause-4.5 of IS.10658.
9.0. 5 Kg & 10 Kg DRY CHEMICAL POWDER TYPE FIRE EXTINGUISHER:
Mild steel sheets used for the fabrication of body shall not be less than 1.6
mm in thickness for 5 kg and 2.0mm in thickness for 10 kg and shall conform to
Panel Sheets (Type-P) of IS.513. Mild Steel sheet, if used for inner shell, shall also
conform to Panel sheet of IS.513 and shall not be less than 1,0 mm thick.
Aluminium alloy used for nozzle and discharge fittings shall conform to Grade
4450 or 4225 of IS.617. The nozzle shall be squeezed grip type.
Extruded brass to be used for the plunger, cartridge holder, nozzle and other
discharge fittings shall conform to Grade-I of IS.291 or Type-I of IS.319.
Leaded tin bronze used for neck ring, nozzle, cartridge holder and cap shall
conform to Grade-LTB-2 of IS.318.
Brass forging may be used for neck ring and cap and it shall conform to
IS.3488.
Seamless M.S.pipe used for neck ring shall conform to IS.1239 (Part-I).
Brass used for syphon shall conform to Alloy-2 of IS.407. M.S.Syphon tubes
will not be accepted.
The shape of the body of the fire extinguisher shall be cylindrical.
The construction of the fire extinguisher shall conform to Clause-6 of IS.2171.
The Dry Powder used shall be non-toxic and shall retain its free flowing
properties under normal storage condition in the extinguisher. Any pressurizing
agent used as an expellent shall also be in a dry state. The dry powder shall
conform to IS.4308 and shall bear ISI certification mark.
The gas catridge shall conform to IS.4847 and it shall bear ISI certification
mark.
The discharge hose shall have bursting pressure of not less than 50 kg. f. per
sq.cm.
The plunger rod shall be of such a length that it has a minimum stroke of
7mm. A spring loaded piercing device shall be provided in the plunger for piercing
the seal of the gas catridge when fitted to the cartridge holder. A safety clip shall be
provided to prevent accidental operation of piercing mechanism.
Rubber or leather used for the cap joint washer shall be of standard quality.
The washer (gasket) shall be retaining in a recess in the cap. It shall be acid/alkali
resistant. If rubber like material is used it shall not be less than 2.5mm thick and it
shall tightly fit against the cap.
The performance requirements, testing connection and anti corrosive
treatment shall conform to Clauses-10 and 8 of IS.2171.
Each fire extinguisher shall be clearly and permanently marked with the
information specified in the relevant Indian Standard for such type of fire
extinguisher. The letters TNEB shall be embossed/screen printed or painted on the
cover of each fire extinguisher.
10.0.TEST CERTIFICATES:
Copies of test certificates showing the results of tests carried out as per
relevant ISS on all types of fire extinguishers included in this tender from a
recognized Government Laboratory shall be enclosed with the offer. Offers received
without the test certificates are liable for rejection.
11.0. FIRE PROTECTION ALARM SYSTEM
11.1.DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
This system shall be provided for control room building and cable gallery.
Suitable fire detection system using smoke detectors and/or heat detectors
shall be provided for the entire building, including cable gallery, corridor and toilets.
Fire detectors shall be located at strategic locations in various rooms of the building.
The operation of any of the fire detectors/ manual call point should result in the
following;
A visual signal exhibited in the annunciation panels indicating the area where
the fire is detected.
An audible alarm sounded in the panel, and
An external audible alarm sounded in the building, location of which shall be
decided during detailed engineering.
If the zone comprises of more than one room, a visual signal shall be exhibited
on the outer wall of each room.
Each zone shall be provided with two zone cards in the panel so that
system will remain healthy even if one of the cards becomes defective.
Coverage area of each smoke detector shall not be more than 80 m2 and that
of heat detectors shall not be more than 40 m2. Ionization type smoke detectors
shall be provided in all areas except pantry room (if available) where heat detectors
shall be provided. If a detector is concealed, a remote visual indication of its
operation shall be provided. Manual call points (Break glass Alarm Stations) shall be
provided at strategic locations in the control room building including cable gallery. All
cabling shall be done through concealed conduits.
Cables used should be exclusively for fire detection and alarm system and shall
be 2Cx1.5sq.mm Cu. cables. Un-armoured PVC insulated FR cables conforming to IS
1554 (Part 1) shall be used.
12.0.TESTS
12.1.SHOP TESTS
Shop tests of controls; instrumentation etc. shall be conducted as per
applicable standards/codes.
Shop tests shall include all tests to be carried out at Contractor's works, works
of his sub-contractor and at works where raw materials supplied for manufacture of
equipment are fabricated. The tests to be carried out shall include but not be limited
to the tests described as follows :
 Response of heat/smoke detectors.
 In the absence of any Code/Standard, equipment shall be tested as per
mutually agreed procedure between the supplier and the employer.
 A comprehensive visual and functional check for panels would be
conducted and will include a thorough check up of panel dimensions,
 All test certificates and reports shall be submitted to the Employer for
approval.
The Employer's representative shall be given full access to all tests.The
manufacturer shall inform the Employer allowing adequate time so that, if the
Employer so desires, his representatives can witness the test.
13.0. PRE-COMMISSIONING TESTS
All the detectors installed shall be tested for actuation by bringing a suitable
source of heat/smoke near the detector and creating a stream of hot air/smoke over
the detector. The exact procedure of this test shall be detailed out by the Employer
to the successful Bidder.
14.0.FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEM
Proper attention shall be given to isolation, limiting and extinguishing of fire
so as to prevent damage to costly equipments, reduce chances of serious
interruption of power supply and ensure safety of personnel. The layout of the Sub-
station itself shall be such that the fire shall not spread from one to other equipment
and areas as far as possible.
Fire hydrant, carbon dioxide (CO2) type fire extinguisher or dry chemical
powder type fire extinguisher confirming to relevant IS shall be provided at various
locations to cover the entire Station.
Adequate Number and quantity complying with TAC guidelines, shall be
provided as follows alongwith below accessories:
Quantity Description
SL. No.
Fire extinguisher foam type trolley mounted 50 Ltr
1 1 No
capacity with accessories.
Fire extinguisher foam type trolley mounted 9 Ltr
2 6 No
capacity with accessories
Fire extinguisher DCP type trolley mounted 25 KG
3 2 No
capacity with accessories.
4 3 No Fire extinguisher DCP type Portable 9 KG capacity
5 2 No Fire extinguisher DCP type portable 6 Kg capacity.
Supply and fabrication of sand drums,(size of 580mm
dia & 420 mm height)with conical cover with
6 4 No
handle including the cost of other consumables , sand
etc.,
7 12 No Supply of Fire bucket of 10 lit. capacity made out of

14 SWG G.I Sheet painted with white & red enamel
paint in side & out side respectively bottom of bucket
shall be 'U' shaped out side of the bucket shall be
written as Fire in English & Tamil in white enamel
paint
Dedicated fire water storage tank of 1 lakh litre capacity and pumping
facilities shall be provided for the fire fighting system as per TAC guidelines. Main
fire water pumps shall be electrically driven and standby pumps shall be diesel
driven.
Portable fire extinguishers as per TAC guidelines shall be provided for each
room/area of sub-station in addition to fixed fire protection system to extinguish fire
in its early phase to prevent its spread.
SECTION - 16
EARTHING SYSTEM
1.0 GENERAL
AC system: Solidly earthed
DC system: Unearthed
1.0.1 The earthing system shall be designed for a life expectancy of at least forty
(40) years and for maximum system fault current or 50kA for 3.0 sec, whichever is
higher. The earth mat design shall be done with renowned software packages like
CDEGS or equivalent shall be done on multi layer soil resistivity and IEEE-80 shall
be followed.
The earth mat design shall be prepared by a renowned earthmat design
software and the same shall be submitted for approval. Grounding and Lightning
Protection for the entire station shall be designed with Copper Flat.
1.0.2 High frequency earth mat shall be designed and provided.
1.0.3 Equipotential earth mat shall be provided for GIS.
1.0.4 The earth mat & Earthing design shall be prepared by a renowned earthmat
design software and the same shall be submitted for approval.
1.0.5 The minimum rate of corrosion of COPPER used for earthing conductor shall be
considered as 1% per year while determining the conductor size.
Grounding and lightning protection for the entire Station shall be designed and
provided in accordance with relevant IEEE Standards.
1.0.6 The contractor shall conduct soil resistivity survey in presence of
TANTRANSCO, and report in writing to TANTRANSCO in accordance with the
approved procedure defined with in IEEE standard. The report shall include the
methods and instruments used and the results of the survey.The contractor shall
include in the report the proposals for the resistivity to be used in the design of the
earthing system. The resistivity survey should preferably takeplace during the dry
season.The report shall also state if there are any indications that the ground is
corrosive to bare copper. TANTRANSCO shall approve the report before proceeding
with the detailed design of the earthing system. The contractor is deemed to have
visited the site and entire area where the Sub station is to be located prior to
submitting his tender, to avail soil report to make observations in order that we can
assess the quantity required for earth electrodes to satisfy the specification
requirement. The contractor shall have no claim for extra cost in connection with
earthing system shall be required to provide more copper than allowed for in his
tender due to his failure to make the detailed analysis of the requirement at the time
of tendering.
1.0.7 Combined earth resistance shall be less than 0.1 ohm.
1.0.8 Earthing system shall be designed as per IEEE 80 & 81.
1.0.9 Earthing system to be used for earthing design should be get approved before
submission of design for approval. Combined earth resistance should be less than
0.1Ὡ. The sizes of copper flats mentioned in this specifications are only indicative
purposes only. The exact sizing should be decided during detailed engineering.
However the sizing of copper flats should be not less than 400sq mm. The design
value of step, touch, GTR, & TGPR should be measured as per IEEE-81 and will be
construed as part of the commissioning test. It may please be noted that any pre
commissioning test is to be conducted on any equipment installed at this proposed
sub station permitted only after the validation of earthing test as per approved
earthing design. The bidder should provide all necessary test equipments for
conducting the soil resistance testing and for proving that the earthing system
comply with the approved earthing design by TANTRANSCO. The bidder should be
responsible for measuring the resistance of each electrodes installation and of each
complete earthing system to be general body of earth, step potential, touch
potential, TGPR, GTR etc.. The tests should be carried out as per IEEE-81.2 - 1991.
Permanent joint should be made by exothermic welding or by CAD welding.
Detachable joints shall be bolted and stranded conductor with bolted joints should
be terminated to exothermic welded lugs or a crimped cable socket common.
1.1 EARTH ELECTRODE
Grounding protection for the entire Station shall be provided with earth
electrode made of copper rod of cross section 400 sq mm and 15 mts length. At
least 2 no earth electrode shall be provided for the sub station building diagonally
opposite. The electrode shall be embedded in 150 mm dia hole driven by auguring
and filled with carbon powder mixture. Similarly at least 2 no earth electrode shall
be driven for each Transformer. All the earth electrodes shall be submerged 1 mt
below the basement floor level.
Resistance of each earth electrodes shall be measured and recorded.
1.2 EARTH ELECTRODE INTER-CONNECTION
The earth electrodes provided for the sub station building shall be inter-
connected with each other by providing 400 sq mm stranded bare copper conductor
and copper clamps. The copper conductor loop shall cover entire perimeter of the
substation.
Similarly the earth electrodes provided for the Transformers shall be inter-
connected with each other by providing 400 sq mm stranded bare copper conductor
and copper clamps. The copper conductor loop shall cover entire perimeter of the
Transformers plinth.
Both the loops shall be interconnected at least at 2 locations with each
other by providing 240 sq mm stranded bare copper conductor and copper clamps.
Combined earth resistance shall be measured and recorded. The value shall
be less than 0.1Ώ more earth electrodes can be added, if it is necessary to achieve
the required combined resistance.
1.3 EARTH MAT RISERS
Earth mat risers shall be of copper flats with cross section area of 400 sq
mm connected at 5mts interval to the copper conductor loop below the basement
floor level by copper clamps. These risers shall be brought up from the floors,
through 140 mm PVC pipe filled with fire proof insulating compound.
1.4 EARTH MAT LAYOUT
These earth mat risers shall be looped or inter-connected through out the
inner periphery of each room by providing 400 sq mm copper flats by brazing or
fastening stainless steel bolt and nuts, 300 mm above floor level and secured to the
wall by copper cleats. Forming earthmat layout. At the entrance of any room it
should be fixed below the floor level. All the earthing connections required for any
equipment, and equi-potential earth mat in any particular room shall be taken only
from this copper flat earth mat layout in that particular room, by providing 400 sq
mm copper flat 100 mm below the floor level .
Similarly for connecting the transformers and power cables, 400 sq mm
copper flat earth mat risers shall be connected to the copper conductor loop, where
ever earthing connection is required for the equipments.
1.5 EARTHING OF THE MAIN CIRCUITS
In order to ensure security during maintenance work, it should be possible to
earth all the parts of the main circuits by earthing switches. In addition, even after
opening the enclosure, it must be possible to connect earthing devices while the
work is in progress.
The earthing switches designed for bus bars and feeders shall be
supplemented by the following arrangements :
At each point where it may be necessary to have such an earthing for worker
safety, an orifice with a cover permits the easy installation of a “removable earthing
device” already connected to the earth mat of the substation.
← In cases where it is necessary to take out the earthing switch from service, either to
carry out maintenance on it, or to take out a piece of apparatus in the compartment
in which it is installed, provision shall be given in such a way that prior to taking the
earthing switch out from service, “ a removable earthing device” (temporary
earthing device) shall be given to the main circuit at where intervention is required.
← The possible connection points of the “removable earthing devices” have to
be indicated on the instructions. There shall be at least one connecting point on
each compartment of the bus bar and on each cable box.
In order to reenergize a part of the main circuit, provision shall be given to
refill the compartment in which the removable earthing device was installed, to its
rated pressure of SF6.
The manufacturer shall give the description of the “removable earthing
device”.
1.6 EARTHING OF THE ENCLOSURES:
Generally the metal clad equipment are assembled, by bolting the structures,
cover and partition which may be considered adequate as long as the electrical
continuity has been maintained.
Consequently the metal enclosure of metal-clad substation are used as earth
conductors and hence continuity has to be maintained. In the case of dismantling of
any enclosure, the continuity of the earthing should be maintained by a temporary
earthing arrangement.
In all cases where the enclosures do not ensure earthing continuity, the two
neighbouring enclosures must be linked to a same general earthing network by a
conductor or by an equipotential link.
In order to ensure the continuity of the earthing circuit, it is essential that the
enclosures are linked as directly as possible to the general earthing circuit of the
substation by copper flat of cross section sufficient to carry the rated short circuit
current.
The earthing electrodes of the different pieces of equipment are therefore
directly connected to the enclosures:
← Copper flat of a cross section equivalent to that of the general earthing
circuit, so as to carry the short-circuit current .
These connections shall be supplied by the manufacturer.
All parts of the switch gear are to be adequately earthed in accordance with
the requirements as per earthing system specification in the tender. A copper earth
bar of adequate cross section shall be run along/around the entire length of the
switch gear and shall be connected to the main station earth at two points or more.
1.7 NATURE AND SIZE OF CONNECTING CONDUCTORS:
In order to avoid electrolytic corrosion problems, these connections must be
made by tinned copper flat because the enclosure are made of aluminium alloy .
The minimum size of these earth conductors should carry the short circuit
current shall be specified by the manufacturer and hence its size shall be specified
accordingly.
Concerning the conductors which ensure earthing only, their cross sections
shall be a minimum of 400 Sq.mm copper for 230 KV GIS
1.8 BONDING CIRCUITS
In case where the three phase of a feeder or of a bus bar are placed in
separated enclosures, it is necessary to link the enclosures by “Bonding circuits”, of
size suitable to carry a continuous current equal to the rated current of the feeder or
of the bus bar. It is imperative that these bonding circuits are linked to the general
earth mat of the substation by a circuit suitable to carry the rated short-circuit
current.
1.9 CONNECTION TO THE GENERAL EARTH MAT.
All metal parts intended which does not belong to a main or an auxiliary
circuit, shall be connected to earth.
The general copper earth circuit of the substation shall be formed by an
uninterrupted loop which originates from the buried copper conductor of a cross
section of 400sq.mm. These loops shall be fixed to the base of the chassis with the
help of an earth riser connection bolted into a hole in the chassis or frame and
situated at 0.30 m above the floor level of the switchgear.
The general earth mat design, the connection device and the bimetallic plate
shall be supplied by the GIS manufacturer. The earth connection from earth pad of
equipment to the general earth mat near shall be provided by the supplier.
The continuity of the earthing circuits shall be ensured taking into account the
thermal and electrical stress by the current they may have to carry.
1.10 EQUIPOTENTIAL EARTHMAT :
1.10.1 When a fault current flows through the earthing connections into the soil, the
enclosures, linked to the earthing circuits, will be at the same potential as the
earthing mat conductors but this potential is generally different from that on the soil
surface.
1.10.2 In order to ensure the security of personnel, it is necessary to install an
equipotential mat linked to the general earthing mat in the zones where metal
enclosures and fixed accessories are accessible from the floor.
1.10.3 It is also necessary to provide an equipotential earthing mat in the zones
where an emergency mechanical operation or a locking system is accessible from
the floor. It is therefore possible to extend the equipotential mat to allow the
operator to carry out his maneuvers.
1.10.4 In order to ensure a good equipotential surface, each element of the
equipotential mat must be connected to the general earthing network by the
manufacturer.
1.10.5 This mat will be placed on the floor, all around the switchgears. It is not
required in front of the control cubicles.
1.10.6 If it is an oxidizing material, it should be hot dip galvanized.
1.10.7 The manufacturer must design, specify, and provide this equipotential earth
mat. The location of the equipotential mat should be defined by the supplier for all
the GIS and at places where :
← the enclosures are accessible for the floor.
← Manual operation of apparatus or locking system is located.
1.10.8 Five copies of equipotential earth mat drawings along with design calculations
may be submitted for approval by the successful Bidder.
1.10.9 The earth connections must be as short and direct as possible to limit the
local transient potential rise, bends in earthing conductors can couse high reactance
at high frequencies.
1.10.10. The earthing system of the Sub-station buildings especially of buildings with
gas insulated switch gear must be capble of carrying power frequency, short circuit
current and high frequency current from switching and lightning. The requirements
from the high frequency currents shall determined the layout of the earthing system
inorder to give low inpedenze across it.
1.10.11 An earth Bus shall be provided on each side of the GIS equipments for direct
& short earthing connections. The main earthing conductor that is connecterid earth
electrode at several places shall run along the walls of the GIS hall for earthing of
various components that can carry the fault currents.
1.01.12 The GIS equipment manufacturer shall design and give specifications of the
main earth bus of the GIS and to connect the GIS assembly to the station earth.
1.10.13 The GIS manufacturer is also responsible for the following.
a. The subassembly to subassembly bonding to assure safe voltage gradient
between all intentionally earthed path of GIS assembly and the main earth
bus.
a. Provide connectors allowing atleast for two paths to earth from the main
earth bus, or from each metallic enclosures nd auxiliary piece of GIS
equipment designated for a connection to the Sub station is to the main
earth bus of the GIS assembly doesn’t actually exit.
b. In the fault condition or during normal operation, due to high frequency
current generated electri break down in insulating gas can occur. This
electric break down generates very high frequency transients transient
enclosure voltage, which can be passed on to the GIS grounding system.
These transients may have to be considered in the design of the grounding
system.
c. To avoid exessive steady state current passing through the earthing mat,
the all the enclosures are connected directly by numerous phase
interconnecting earthing bars. If this bars were not present, the earthing
mat could be over loaded and fail due to constant flow of high currents.
With in the return current loops (via:enclosure-interconnection-enclosure-
interconnection) considerable circulating currents are induced due to strong
electromagnetic coupling and low impedences. In some sections of the plant
near the terminal bushings or cables they may attain amplitude similar to
that of operating current. The distribution of the induced current during
normal operation and of the short circuit current in case of a fault in the GIS
can be modeled and GIS manufacturer shall develop engineering guidelines
to ensure all the mandatory specifications with regard to step & touch
potential limits are met.
d. To eliminate a sereous risk for operating personal the step & Touch potential
gradients shall be limited to allowable values as per standards.
e. GIS buildings are an extensive meshed earthing system, which comprises all
metal parts like foundation earth electrode, earthing conductos and the GIS
housing. The esign of the earthing system is such that the potential of the
earthing system together with any person in contact and voltage differences
araising between the metal parts of the GIS, stuctures and the building
during power frequency earth fault shall be safe value as per standards.
f. The design of the earthing system in such away that it shall avoid the
undesirable effects caused by transient ground potential raise (TGPR) due to
very fast transients (VFT).
g. The design of the earthing system is in such away that it shall avoid the
undesirable effects caused by circulating currents due to DC components
under asymmetrical faults conditions.
h. The foundation design of the GIS shall accommodate the particular earthing
requirements of GIS to avoid irregularities in the current discharge path.
i. All metal construction elements of the building like beams, supports, crane
rails, door frames, cable trenches, metal walls etc. shall be solidly connected
to the earth mat. To equalize the ground potential the floor reinforcement
shall be earthed.
ENNORE 230/110/33-11KV GIS SS TECHNICAL TENDER SPECIFICATION T-2280
SECTION - 17
ILLUMINATION
1.0 SCOPE
The scope of work includes design, development, manufacturing, testing,

supply, installation and commissioning of energy efficient luminiar complete with all
accessories, LED lamps with suitable current control driver circuit including mounting
arrangement for recessed type & ceiling mounting arrangements.
The work under this specification shall consist of furnishing of all materials,
tools & plants, labour, transportation and everything necessary for carrying out the
work.
1.1. GENERAL:
1.1.1. All Light fixtures mentioned in the schedule shall be supplied and installed as
per specification.
1.1.2. All Light fixtures must be installed only after approval of the layout by the
Engineer In-charge.
1.1.3. Detailed catalogue for all light fixtures or if so required by the Engineer In-
charge sample fixtures shall be submitted for prior approval of the Engineer In-
charge before orders for the fixtures are placed.
1.1.4. The light fittings and their associated accessories such as lamps/tubes,
reflector housings, ballasts etc. shall comply with the latest applicable standards.
1.1.5. All luminaries, lamps and accessories shall be of the same make for the
particular site as directed by Engineer-In-Charge.
1.1.6. All light fittings must be suitable for single phase, 230 Volts + 10% voltage
rating.
1.1.7. All Light fixtures must be serially numbered for identification as per the
instruction of the Engineer In-charge.
1.1.8. The works shall be executed generally as per the specification and as directed
by the Engineer at site.
199
1.1.9. For details not covered in these Specifications, relevant IS code shall be
referred to. All references to BIS-Specifications and codes are for codes with
amendments issued up to date.
2.0. REQUIREMENT:
2.1. Light ittings shall be designed for continuous trouble-free operation under hot
humid atmospheric conditions, at an ambient of 50o C, without reduction in lamp life
or without deterioration of materials and internal wiring.
2.2. Outdoor fittings shall be weather proof and rain proof type.
II.3. The fittings shall be designed so as to facilitate easy maintenance, including

cleaning, replacement of lamps/starters etc.
2.4. Connectors between different components shall be made in such a way that
they will not work loose by vibrations.
2.5. The fittings shall be supplied complete with lamps.
2.6. The fittings and accessories shall be designed to have low temperature rise, the
temperature above the ambient temperature shall be as indicated in the relevant
standards.
2.7. Outdoor type fittings shall be provided with outdoor type control gear box and
the fittings shall be power factor corrected to 0.95 logging (maximum).
2.8. Each fitting shall have a terminal block suitable for loop-in, loop-out and on-off
connection. The internal wiring shall be complete by the contractor by means of
stressed copper wire and terminated on the terminal block.
2.9. All hardware used in the luminaries shall be cadmium plated.
2.10. Each light fitting shall be provided with an earthing terminal suitable for
connection to the earthing conductor.
2.11. All metal parts of the housing shall be bonded to the earthing terminal so as to
ensure satisfactory earth continuity throughout the fixture.
2.12. All surfaces in the fittings shall be thorough cleaned and degreased. The fitting
shall be free from scale, rust, sharp edges and burns. The housing shall be stove-
enameled / epoxy stove-enameled / vitrous enameled / oxidised as indicated under
various types of fitting.
200
2.13. The finishing of the fitting shall such that no bright / dark spots are produced
either by direct light or by reflection.
2.14. The luminiar shall be suitable for rugged service under the operational and
environmental conditions encountered during service.
2.15. The following types of luminaries are required to be provided:
1. Troffer Light (2 x 2 and 1X1 LED Fixture).
2. LED Down Lighter.
3. LED Tube Light/ LED Line fitting.
4. LED Bulb.
2.2.16. Each type of luminarie shall be supplied with associated driver circuit
compatible with LEDs in all respect as required including complete optics.
2.2.17. A control switch to control all the lightings in the substation shall be provided
at the entrance of the building.
3.0 STANDARDS:
IS: 513 : Cold-rolled low carbon steel sheets and strips
IEC 60529 : Classification of degree of protections provided by enclosures
EN 55015 : CISPR15 Limits and methods of measurement of radio

disturbance characteristic of electrical lighting and similar
equipment.
IEC 62031 : LED modules for general lighting-Safety requirements
EN 61547 : Equipment for general ighting purposes – EMC iimunity
requiement.
EN 60929 : Performance, AC supplied electronics ballast for tubular
flourescent lamps perormance requirement.
IEC 60598-2-1: Fixed general purpose luminaries
IEC 60598-1 : Luminaires - General requirement and tests
IEC 61000-3-2: Electro Magnetic compatibility (EMC) -Limits for Harmonic
current emission (equipment input current ≤16Amps.per phase.

201
IEC 60068-2-38: Environmental Testing :Test Z- AD: composite temperature/
humidity cyclic test
IEC 61347-2-13: Lamp control gear : particular requirements for DC or AC
supplied electronic control gear for LED modules.
IS 10322 : Specification for the luminaries
IS 4905 : Method for random sampling
LM 79 :LED luminair photometry measurement.
LM 80 : Lumen Maintenance
IEC 62384 : DC or AC supplied electronic control gear for LED Modules
performance requirements
IEC/PAS62612 : Self-ballasted LED lamps for general lighting services
Performance Requirements
4.0 CONSTRUCTION:
LUMINAIRES
4.1. All the luminiars shall be finalized based on the performance feedback.
4.2. The detailed calculation for lux level as per clause no.5.8 with uniform
distribution including the lux distribution curve /graph distribution shall be submitted
in support of the dimensions selected and variation thereof.
4.3. Housing, if not used as a heat sink, shall be made of at least 0.8 mm thick sheet
Steel conforming to IS: 513 (Grade O) / CRCA polyester powder coated of at least
60 microns) and high U.V. & corrosion resistance.
4.4. Heat sink used should be aluminium extrusion having high conductivity
preferably to grade 6061 alloy or better having thermal conductivity of at least 170-
180 W/m.K or Aluminium die cast having high conductivity preferably ADC 12 or LM
24.
4.5. Efforts shall be made to keep the overall outer dimensions as minimum as
possible.
202
4.6. All luminaires shall be provided with toughened glass of min. 0.8 mm thickness
of sufficient strength and high efficiency (90%) prismatic diffuser under the LED
chamber to protect the LED and luminaries. And shall not show yellowness during
luminarie life time.
1. Troffer Light (2 x 2 and 1X1 LED Fixture)
2. Down Lighter
3. Tube Light /Line fitting
4. LED Bulb
4.7. Suitable number of LED lamps shall be used in the luminiars.
4.8. LED lamps of NICHIA/CREE/OSRAM/ SEOUL/ PHILIPS/LUMILEDS/AVAGO make

shall be used for the purpose.
4.9. The manufacturer shall submit the proof of procurement of LEDs from above
OEMs at the time of testing.
4.10. The electrical installations shall be carried out as per IS.732.
4.11. Suitable reflector / lenses may also be provided to increase the illumination
uniformity and distribution.
4.12. Supplier will be solely responsible for testing and performance of the
luminaries after installation and shall also ensure the specified and uniform
illumination and comfort level on the work desk/ floor.
4.13. Design of the thermal management shall be done in such a way that it shall
not affect the properties of the diffuser.
REFLECTORS
4.14. The reflectors shall be made of CRCA sheet steel/ aluminium/ silvered glass
indicated for all fittings.
4.15. The thickness of steel/ aluminium shall comply with relevant standards.
4.16. Reflectors made of steel shall have stove enameled / vitreous enameled /
epoxy coating finish. Aluminium used for reflector shall be anodized/epoxy stove
enameled / mirror polished.
203
4.17. Reflectors shall be free from scratches or spots and shall have a smooth and
glossy surface having en optimum light reflecting co-efficient such as to ensure that
the overall light output specified.
4.18. Reflectors shall be readily removable from the housing for cleaning and
maintenance. They shall be securely fixed to the housing by means of positive
fastening device of captive type.
Lamp/ Starter Holders

4.19. Lamp holders shall comply with relevant standards.
4.20. They shall have low control resistance, shall have resistance to wear and shall
be suitable for operation at the specified temperature without deterioration in
insulation value.
4.21. They shall hold the lamps in position under normal condition of shock and
vibration met within normal installation and use.
4.22. Lamp holders for the fluorescent lamps shall be of the spring loaded bi-pin
rotor type.
4.23. Live parts of the lamp holder shall not be exposed during insertion or removal
of the lamp cap pins when in working position.
4.24. All material used in the construction of the holder shall be suitable for tropical
use.
4.25. The holders shall be so designed that they are mechanically robust and free
from any operational difficulties.
4.26. They shall be capable of withstanding the shocks met within normal transit,
installation and use.
CEILING FANS:
4.27. The ceiling fans shall be designed, manufactured and tested as per IS:374.
4.28. The fans shall have totally enclosed capacitor start and run motor suitable for
operating on 240v, single phase, 50Hz AC supply system.
4.29. The fan shall be of double ball bearing type having 3 blades with a sweep of
1200/ 1400 mm or as per specification complete with suspension rod, canopies and
mounting rollers.
204
4.30. The regulators shall be modular type electronic step less regulator suitable for
mounting on modular switch boxes.
EXHAUST FANS:
4.31. The exhaust fans shall be of industrial type designed, manufactured and tested
as per IS: 2312 and operating on 240v, single phase, 50Hz AC supply system.
4.32. The exhaust fan shall be of ring-mounted type and shall be complete with
louvers.
4.33. It shall be designed for opening and closing automatically with air flow
velocity.
4.34. A separate bird screen made of brass wire mesh shall be provided with steel
framework on the outer wall.
WIRES:
4.35. PVC insulated multistranded copper wires of 1100V grade as per IS: 694 and
IS Certification shall be used.
4.36. The type and size of wires to be used shall be as indicated in the specification.
4.37. Colour coding for the wiring shall be as below
Three phase wiring : Red, Yellow, Blue

Single Phase wiring : Red/ Yellow/ Blue
Switched : phase (wire from switch to light fan, bell, socket
etc)
Neutral : Black
Earth : Green
4.38. No joint is permitted in the run of wires.
SWITCHES
4.39. Switches, manufactured in accordance with IS: 3854 shall be used.
4.40. Switches in areas where concealed wiring has been adopted shall be flush
mounting piano/modular type unless otherwise specified.
RECEPTACLES
4.41. Only three-pin type receptacles manufactured in accordance with IS:1293 shall
be used with the third terminal connected to the earth.
205
4.42. All receptacles shall be provided with a switch mounted on the same enclosure
but shall be a separate unit to facilitate replacement by part.
4.43. Flush mounting type receptacles shall be used in areas where concealed wiring
has been adopted and surface type shall be used in other areas.
CONDUIT AND FITTINGS

4.44. Conduit shall be minimum 25 mm PVC pipe minimum 2 mm thick or as
specified.
4.45. Generally, polyethylene conduits shall be uses in concealed wiring and for
surface GI conducts in industrial building and ERW conduit in no-industrial building
shall be used.
4.46. Care shall be taken to see that all conduit ends have no buns and ends are
neatly reamed to avoid damage to wires.
4.47. All metal conduit accessories shall be only of threaded type. Pin grip or clamp
type accessories are not acceptable.
4.48. Samples of these shall be furnished for approval by Engineer-In-Charge at site,

before installation.
4.49. The maximum number of PVC insulated wires which can be drawn in conduits
of various sizes shall be as given below:
Nominal Cross Sizes of Conduits (mm)

Sectional Area 20mm 25mm 32mm 40mm
(Sqmm)
1.5 5 10 12 -
2.5 5 8 12 -
4.0 3 6 8 -
6.0 2 5 7 -
10.0 2 4 5 8
16.0 - 2 3 6
5.0. Lighting Levels:
5.1. The rating and number of ceiling-mounted lighting fixtures are determined to
provide the adequate illumination for the particular area of lighting not less than
following intensities of illumination.
206
← Corridors : 200 lux

← Cable floor-basement : 100 lux
← Toilets : 100 lux
← Control room : 250 lux
← Offices : 250 lux
← 230 kV & 110KV GIS room : 250 lux
← Battery room : 100 lux
← Rectifier room : 100 lux
← Basement : 100 lux
← Air-conditioning : 250 lux
← Stairs : 100 lux
← Stores : 250 lux
← Spares & tools : 250 lux
← Outdoor lighting : 30 Lux
6.0. Single phase Socket:
6.1. Adequate number of 220 V single phase socket with earth of 16A or 20A
capacity shall be provided as per requirement
6.2. The number of 16A or 20A sockets provided shall not less than following
quantities.
Corridor :2
← Offices :2
← Basement :1
← Stores :1
← Spares tools :1
← Conference room :1
← Rectifier room :1
← 400 and 230 KV compartment room :6
← Control room :2
6.3. Adequate number of 220 V single phase socket with earth of 6A capacity shall
be provided in the lighting switch boards as per requirement minimum 1 no for each
switch board.
← 7.0 LIGHTING DISTRIBUTION PANEL:
7.1. A lighting distribution and protection panel of adequate size has to be pro-
vided in the control room to control the entire lighting system of the substation.
7.2. The enclosure shall be suitable for indoor / outdoor installation as per
requirement. A canopy shall also be provided, if panel is located in outdoor area.
207
Panel shall have external fixing lugs, and shall be suitable for mounting on vertical
face such as wall / column, or steel pedestal.
7.3. Panel shall comprise of one four-pole incoming isolating device (MCCB) of
reputed make , bus bars and required number of outgoing feeder-isolating devices
(MCB) equally distributed over the phases. Each single phase outgoing shall have 2
pole isolation viz. Phase and neutral and three phase outgoing has 4pole. The
number of outgoing feeders, and rating of both incomer and outgoing shall be as
required.
7.4.Incomer, bus bars, and outgoing feeder elements shall be housed in separate
compartments. The separation between the compartments should be such that no
flame propagation is allowed.
7.5. Incomer shall have mechanical ON / OFF indication and facility for pad locking
the operating handle in off position. An explosion proof cable gland for incoming
cable shall be provided, suitable for cable size required. Crimping type lugs shall be
provided for incoming cable.
7.6.Bus bars shall be made of high conductivity copper and supported by non-
hydroscopic insulators. Individual compartments shall have separate inspection
covers secured by screws / bolts requiring special tools for opening. All outgoing
circuit shall also have ON / OFF indicators.
7.7. Terminals shall be provided in an independent compartment for connection of

outgoing cables. Terminals should be anti-loosening type and suitable for copper
conductor of required size such that conductor is not damaged due to over
tightening.
7.8. Explosion proof cable glands shall be suitable for cable size required. Explo-
sion proof threaded plug to block unused outgoing cable entry shall be provided in
numbers as required. All cable entries (incoming and outgoing) shall be so designed,
that no water leaks in when panels are installed outdoor and if this cannot be met all
the entries should be necessarily pointing down.
7.9.Caution plates shall be provided on the inspection covers to avoid opening

without isolation. Nameplates shall be provided for each outgoing circuit, and for the
complete panel indicating panel number. All nameplates shall be fixed by screws and
shall be made of laminated plastic with white letters on black background.
208
7.10.The supply of the panel shall include the panel itself complete with all normal
components and devices required for full and proper operation of the equipment
even though such component of devices may not be stated in detail in this
specification. Complete set of special tools for opening / closing of enclosure bolts /
screws (2 sets) shall be supplied with these panels.
7.11. Test certificates and general arrangement drawings shall be furnished for
Approval
7.12. All the non-current carrying metallic parts of the panel shall be inherently
bonded together. Two nos 10 mm dia studs should be provided on the main housing
for external earthing connection. Earthing terminals for outgoing circuits should also
be bonded to main housing.
7.13.All continuous welded seams are finished smooth.
7.14.Must be provided with continuous hinge with stainless steel hinge pin.
7.15.Enclosure must be provided with internal 3-point latching with a keylocking and
padlock handle.
7.16. Enclosure door has a seamless poured in-place gasket.
7.17. Ground stud provided on inside of door.
7.18. The enclosure shall confirm to IP55 protection for outdoor panels and IP52
for indoor panels.
7.19.The gland plate shall be of minimum 3 mm thick steel.
7.20. Enclosures, doors and compartment partitions shall be fabricated using 14SWG
thick CRCA sheet steel. Sheet steel shrouds and partitions shall be minimum 14 SWG
thickness. All sheet steel work forming the exterior of switchboards shall be
smoothly finished, leveled and free from flaws. The corners should be rounded.
7.21. The panel shall be duly powder coated with epoxy polyester powder. The
surfaces shall be powder coated with two coats of epoxy based final paint . Colour
shade of final paint shall be as per IS. Unless otherwise specified all panels shall be
powder coated in Structured Finish Siemens Grey shade.
7.22. All unpainted steel parts shall be cadmium plated or suitably treated to prevent
rust formation. If these parts are moving elements then they shall be greased.
209
8.0. EMERGENCY LIGHTING
8.1. An emergency lighting scheme shall be designed and erected to carryout the
emergency operations if the main supply got failed.
8.2. The emergency lighting shall be provided in all the floors of the building and to
provide minimum lighting facility for the emergency operations.
8.3. The detailed layout scheme will be get approved from TANTRANSCO before
commencement of work.
8.4. The emergency lighting shall be provided by installing a inverter of adequate

capacity to cover all the floors of the building.
9.0. BATTERY ROOM LIGHTING:
9.1. The acid proof LED fittings shall be provided for the battery room to avoid
corrosion due to acid fumes.
9.2. It shall be provided with detachable cover to protect from acid fumes.
9.3. It shall be specially designed with rubber gasket to prevent entry of corrosive
vapoures or dust.
10.0 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP
10.1. All material and equipment shall be new with latest technological applications,
standard design and shall be commercially available for at least 10 years from the
date of installation. These shall also confirm to the latest additions of above codes or
standards.
10.2. The materials and equipment shall be from Owner’s approved makes only as
per approved vendor list provided.
10.3. Where several installations of one type of material or equipment are supplied,
the respective parts / equipments shall be interchangeable.
10.4. All materials and equipment shall be suitable for installation in the applicable
climate as specified elsewhere in this specification.
10.5. The equipment shall be standardized as far as possible to reduce the numbers
and types of various equipment, so that the spares required are minimum.
210
11.0. SWITCH YARD LIGHTNING PROTECTION CUM LIGHTING:

The contractor shall design the switchyard lightning protection cum lighting
for the entire substation area including control room area. The recommended levels
of illumination is General horizontal : 30 Lux. Specific vertical (on disconnects) : 30
Lux. These levels of illumination shall be designed to be achieved by using suitable
rated LED lamps (400Watts wide angle LED FLOOD Light (Natural White) – Reputed
make with all accessories including Control BOX, MCB, cabling and fixing etc.). The
lightning masts in the substation have lighting platforms for mounting of these lamps
at 25 / 50 metre levels. These platforms have to be made use of for mounting the
lighting fixtures. These masts shall be designed by the contractor only after detailed
discussion with the purchaser regarding the height, location and numbers etc, and
the design shall be submitted.
LED FLOOD Light fittings may be fitted in Tower structures wherever access
for Lightning Mast and poles are not accessible or doesn’t have enough clearance in
order to achieve better visibility of equipments.
8 M and 5.5 M Single bracket / Double bracket Yard light poles with 72 watts
LED street light lamps shall be provided at wall boundaries and entry areas as per
field engineer direction.
The design must ensure equal distribution of outdoor lighting in order to
cover all the Yard equipments and the levels of illumination of 30 Lux should be
demonstrated to TANTRANSCO officials after the completion of Illumination works in
all respects and well before the commissioning of substation.
12.0 TESTING AND INSPECTION
12.1. The light fixtures shall be tested in accordance with the relevant standards.
12.2. Routine tests shall be conducted on all fittings in accordance with relevant
IS.
12.3. All the test certificates as applicable shall be furnished for each type of
fixture.
12.4. Inspection of the light fittings shall include inspection of wiring and Electrical
operational tests where necessary, Dimensional & Visual verification.
12.5. All cost regarding testing will be borne by contractor.
12.6. Manufacturer’s test certificates in respect of all light fittings and lamp etc.
prior to inspection shall be produced to the engineer.
211
12.7. All lighting fixtures are installed shall be checked for any physical damages for
any parts.
12.8 If any damages observed in the system, that must be replaced with new one.
12.9 After completion of installation works, all lighting fixtures tested to ensure
proper operation on their correct switch in the presence of the engineer.
12.10 If any deficiencies noticed during testing, that must be set right as directed
by the Engineer In-charge.
13.0. INSPECTION FOR WITNESSING OF ACCEPTANCE TESTS
13.1. The purchaser will witness the acceptance tests as identified in the approved
QA plan.
13.2. The acceptance tests carriedout in the manufacturers premises will be
13.3. The inspection and acceptance of any equipment shall not relieve the supplier
of his obligation of furnishing equipment in accordance with the specification and
shall not prevent subsequent rejection if the equipment is found to be defective.
13.4. The supplier shall keep the purchaser informed in advance, about the
13.5. The purchaser reserves the right to insist for witnessing the acceptance /
13.6. No material shall be dispatched from its point of manufacture unless the
by the purchaser.
14.0 Drawings And Data
14.1. All the drawings, data and test Certificates as per IS for the materials shall be
furnished.
14.2 The contractor shall submit the following documents:
1) General arrangement drawings of light fittings.
2) Layout drawings of lighting scheme.
2) Technical leaflets for all fittings and materials etc.
212
SECTION – 18
230KV, XLPE INSULATED ALUMINIUM CABLE
1.0 SCOPE:
Supply and erection of 230KV cable and terminations and other accessories,
final testing and commissioning of 230KV, 1200sq.mm single core, aluminium
compact, segmental stranded conductor for XLPE insulated, Lead sheathed cable
(Cross bonding system) with accessories for interconnecting Power Transformer and
GIS Bay.
It will include the following:
 The detailed design of the cable etc., as per the Specification shall be
furnished based on the Thermal resistivity results of soil in the feeder route,
immediately on receipt of LOI.
 Complete manufacture including shop testing.
 Providing Engineering drawings, data, operational manuals etc for
purchaser’s approval.
 Packing and transportation from manufacturer’s works to site and unloading
at site.
 Design as per Specification and supply of cable accessories, Sheath bonding
cable, Optic fibre cable and other materials as per Schedule.
 Supply of End termination structures, link boxes etc.
 Laying of cable, erection of joints and terminations, testing and com-
missioning and handing over of the project in complete shape to
TANTRANSCO.
2.0 STANDARDS:
The cable and accessories covered under this Specification shall conform to
the relevant standards (with up to date amendments) specified herein, unless or
otherwise specified. Wherever special requirements are necessary, relevant
standards may be referred.
Sl. Relevant IS / IEC

Description
no standards
i IS.7098 (Part-III/1993), Cross linked Polyethylene insulated HDPE outer
IEC 502, IEC 60840 sheathed cable.
213
ii. IEC. 60811/1999 HDPE outer sheath of electric cables.

iii. IS.8130/1989 Conductors for insulated electric cables & flexible
cords.
iv. IEC Publication Tests on cable over sheath which have a special
60229/1982 protective function and are applied by extrusion.
v. IEC Publication Calculation of continuous current rating of cable.
60287/1982
vi. IEC Publication Tests for power cables with extruded insulation for
60840/1999 rated voltage above 30KV up to 150KV
vii. Swedish standard Power cables XLPE insulated cables with extruded
SS-424-14-17 of 1988 over sheath and rated voltage 12-420KV testing.
viii. IEC Publication Impulse tests on cables and their accessories.
60230/1999
ix. IEC Publication Test methods for insulation and sheaths of electric
540/1982 cables and cords.
x. IEC Publications High Voltage test techniques.
60060/1989
xi. IEC Publication Common test methods for insulating and sheathing
60811/1998 material of electrical cables.
xii. IS.10810 (Pt.34/1984 Methods of test for cables: Part-34 measurement of
thickness of metallic sheath.
xiii. IEC Publication Nominal cross sectional areas and composition of
60228/1978 conductors of insulated cables
xiv. IEC 885- 2 & 3/1987 & Electrical test methods for electric cables – Partial
1988 discharge test.
xv IEC 60815 Guide for the selection of insulators in respect of
polluted conditions
xvi IEC 62067 Tests for power cables with extruded insulation for
rated voltage above 150 kV (Um = 170 kV) upto 500
kV (Um = 550 kV)
xvii IEC 60949 Calculation of thermally permissible short circuit
currents, taking into account non-adiabatic heating
effects
214
The design, manufacture and testing shall be in accordance with the relevant
Technical Specification of Standards indicated above and special requirements
which are specified. All deviations from this Specification, which ensures same or
better quality of material to be supplied, shall be brought out in the Schedule of
Technical deviation. Any deviation between the Specification and catalogues of
BID offered, if not clearly brought out in the Schedule of deviation, will not be
considered as valid deviation. The applicable standards shall be clearly stated
with a copy of Standard (English version) followed.
The Vendor shall furnish the following information:
 Name of the Manufacturer.
 Details of the manufacturing facilities available at manufacturer’s works.
 Details of testing facility available at manufacturer’s works and site.
 Proof for Technical collaboration with other firms and if so, details re-
garding the same.
2.1 The Vendor shall bring out clearly any additional feature, which they deem fit
to include, to give a complete and comprehensive offer. The Vendor shall,
however sustain his reasons for offering such additional features in his proposal
for better quality and the Purchaser reserves the right to accept or reject such
offers.
3.0 CODES:
The design, manufacture, inspection and testing of the said cable and
accessories shall comply with I.E.C. and other Regulations & Safety Codes.
However materials meeting with other International Standards, which ensures
same or better quality, will also be considered.
4.0 GENERAL REQUIREMENT OF CABLE AND ACCESSORIES:
4.1. The following factors that govern long term reliability of cable and accessories
shall be ensured:
 Uniformity of insulation.
 Minimization of contamination in insulation.
 Smoothness and adhesiveness at the interface between insulation and
semi- conducting layers.
215
 Minimization of voids and moisture in insulation.XLPE insulation shall be

dry-cured (radiant curing).
4.2. The maximum permissible over load current of cable, not exceeding conductor
temperature of 90 Degree Centigrade, shall be intimated by the Bidder.
5.0. SYSTEM PARAMETERS:
Sl.N Description Requirements

o
i Type of cable XLPE (Cross linked Polyethylene)
insulated cable
ii. Number of cores & nominal cross Single core, 1200 sq.mm
section of the conductor
iii Conductor material 1200 sq.mm, Aluminium, compact,
segmental (milliken) stranded.
iv. Nominal system voltage (Line) 230 KV (Phase to Phase)
v. Highest system voltage 245KV
vi Rated voltage between conductor 230/ 3 KV (RMS)
and sheath
vii. Rated frequency 50 Hz.
viii. Number of Phases per circuit. Three
ix. System earthing Cross bonding system
x. Impulse level of cable and sealing 1050 KV (Peak)
end.
xi. a.1 minute power frequency
withstand voltage
b. 30 minutes power frequency
withstand voltage
xii. Momentary short circuit current of 40 KA (r.m.s.) for 1 Sec/Phase.
metallic sheath
Single Phase/Three Phase Short 40 KA (r.m.s.) for 1 Sec.
Circuit current
xiii. Maximum permissible operating
temperature of conductor under:
Normal operation 90 O C
Emergency overload 130 O C
Short circuit 250 O C
xiv. Rated Current 630 A
xv. Pollution Very heavy (Zone-IV as per IEC
Publication-815)
6.0. TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT:
216
6.1. GENERAL:
6.1.1 230KV Single core, 1200 sq.mm XLPE cable consisting of compact,
segmental/circular, stranded Aluminium conductor (Voids filled with water swellable
filler material) wrapped with one layer of semi-conductive tape, shielded with black
extruded semi-conducting compound, XLPE insulated, insulation screened with
extruded semi-conducting compound, bedded with longitudinal water tight semi-
conducting swellable tape, radial metallic screen of corrosive resistance annealed
copper wires applied helically followed with open helix of copper tape, then metallic
sheath of Lead Alloy E and Black HDPE Outer sheath. The outer sheath should be
provided with extruded conductive layer on the outer surface to enable sheath test.
6.1.2 Dry curing process (radiant curing) shall be adopted for the manufacture of
cable.
6.1.3 The conductor screen, insulation and insulation screen shall be extruded in one
operation, i.e., by simultaneous triple head extrusion process, with absence of voids,
contaminants and moisture content.
6.1.4 The process should ensure electrical continuity of the extruded conductive
layer above non conductive outer sheath, when checked with the low voltage
continuity tester.
6.1.5. A complete set of experimentally verified data and calculations made in

arriving at the conductor rating, voltage stress at the conductor screen and
insulation screen shall also be enclosed.
6.2.0 CONDUCTOR :
6.2.1. The conductor shall be Aluminium wires conforming to IEC 60228. The shape
of conductor shall be compact, segmental/circular, stranded.
6.2.2. The conductor should be water sealed, by filling suitable water swellable
material between conductor strand, which should turn into jelly when in contact with
water.
6.2.3. Suitable Semi-conducting tape shall be wrapped over the conductor.
6.3.0 CONDUCTOR RESISTANCE:
217
The maximum resistance of the conductor at 20˚C shall be 0.0247 Ohms/

Km as per IEC 60228. If the value of resistance is found higher than the stipulated
values then the entire drum of cable will be rejected.
6.4.0. CONDUCTOR SCREENING :
The conductor screening shall be provided over the conductor by extrusion of semi-
conducting compound. The nominal thickness of conductor screen shall be 1mm and
the minimum thickness at any point shall not fall below 90% of the nominal value.
6.5.0. INSULATION :
6.5.1 Insulation shall be provided over conductor shield with extruded cross linked
polyethylene (XLPE). The extruded XLPE insulation shall be of very high degree of
purity and by adopting dry curing process (radiant curing). Size of the contaminants
shall be kept under 50 mm and number of contaminants of size between 5 and 50
mm shall not exceed 1 per cc of insulation.
6.5.2 The nominal thickness of XLPE insulation shall be 25 mm. The thickness at
any point shall not fall below 90% of the nominal value.. i.e. t
min ³ 0.9 t n and additionally, t max-t min £ 0.15 max
Where t max – is the maximum thickness in mm t min t min – is the minimum

thickness in mm
t n – is the nominal thickness in mm
and d max-d min £ 0.05 where d = dia over insulation max
6.6.0 INSULATION SCREEN :
The insulation screen shall be applied over extruded XLPE insulation. The
insulation screen shall consist of extruded semi-conducting compound. The nominal
thickness of insulation screen shall be 1mm and thickness at any point shall not fall
below 90% of the nominal value and the size of the voids should not be greater than
10mm and the number should be as per standards.
6.6.2 WATER BLOCKING TAPE :
218
Suitable swellable type water-blocking semi-conducting tape (2 layers) shall

be wrapped over the semi-conducting insulation screen. The total nominal thickness
should not be less than 0.5mm.
6.7.0 METALLIC SCREEN AND METALLIC SHEATH:
6.7.1 The metallic screen of corrosive resistant, annealed copper wires ap-plied
helically, followed with open helix of copper tape, should be pro-vided over the
water blocking tape. The diameter of copper wire in the screening shall not be less
than 0.8 mm. The nominal thickness of copper tape shall be not less than 0.1 mm.
The minimum thickness of copper tape shall not fall below the nominal value by
more than 10%.
6.7.2 Metallic sheath shall be of Lead Alloy E confirming to clause 7.2 of IS 7098
(Part 3) and shall be extruded over the metallic screen or wa-ter blocking tape as
the case may be.
6.7.3 The metallic screen and metallic sheath shall also be designed to withstand
the earth fault current liable to occur in the system during a conductor to ground
fault for a duration of short circuit withstand time specified. (Refer System
parameters) and the tolerance should be as per clause 10.7 of IEC 60840, 1999-02.
6.8.0 OUTER SHEATH :
6.8.1 The outer protective sheath shall consist of a black extruded HDPE. The outer
sheath shall be extruded with a conductive layer over the non – conductive outer
protective sheath. Suitable chemicals shall be added to the compound for protection
against rodent and termite attack.
6.8.2 The nominal thickness of the outer sheath shall be 4.0 mm. However, the
thickness at any point shall not be less than 3.5 mm. Other dimensional
characteristics are to be in accordance with clause 8.2 of IEC Publication 60811-1-1.
6.9.0 MECHANICAL, PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL CHARACTERISTICS:
6.9.1. MECHANICAL CHARACTERISTICS :
Determination of the mechanical characteristics of the outer sheath, before

and after thermal ageing shall be in accordance with clauses 9.2 of IEC Publication
60811-1-1 and 8.1 of IEC Publication 60811-1-2.
The following Table gives the values to be obtained:

219
Sl.No. TESTS UNITS HDPE
1. In the delivery state:

a. Minimum tensile strength N/mm 12.5
b. Minimum elongation at break 300
%
2. After ageing in a hot air

oven:
Temperature C 110
Treatment Tolerance C 2
Duration Days 10
Tensile Strength
a. Residual Minimum value N/mm -
b. Maximum variation * % -
Elongation at break
a. Residual Minimum value % 300
NOTE: ( * ) VARIATION:
Difference between the median value obtained after ageing and the median
value obtained without ageing, expressed as a percentage of the latter.
6.9.2. PRESSURE TEST AT HIGH TEMPERATURE ON SHEATHS:
The pressure test at high temperature shall be carried out in accordance with
clause 8.2 of IEC publication 60811.3.1, the test temperature shall be (90  2)
Degree Centigrade.
The maximum depth of indentation shall be less or equal to 50%.
6.9.3. ELONGATION TEST AT LOW TEMPERATURE:
The test at low temperature shall be carried out in accordance with sub clause
8.4 of IEC publication 60811.1.4, the test temperature shall be (-15 2) Degree
Centigrade.
After the tests the elongation without break must be at least 20%
7.0. ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS:

220
7.1 The cable shall be capable of carrying the guaranteed rated current continuously
without exceeding the specified temperature limitation of 65 Degree Centigrade
under the laying conditions specified.
7.2 The sheath voltage under full load conditions, assuming all circuits loaded shall
not exceed 65 volts to ground at any point in the system. The working sheet for the
sheath voltage under full load condition shall be furnished.
7.3 The charging current of the cable shall be 3.8 A/ Km, and shall be stated in the
tender. The surge impedance of the cable shall be low such that the over voltage at
the transformer terminals due to the lightning surges shall be limited well below to
its impulse level of 1050KV.
7.4 The Partial discharge at 2 U0 should be less than 5 pC. The calculations
indicating the over voltage reached shall be supplied as part of Tender. The
characteristics of Lightning Arrestors indicated in IEC/IS for 230KV system may be
used for over voltage calculation purposes. Specific recommendations shall be made
for the use of Lightning Arrestors at the terminals if otherwise.
7.5 The cable system shall withstand the mechanical forces due to short circuit
current value of 31.5 KA (RMS) for 3 seconds. The cable design shall be such that it
should take care of the stresses in the insulation of the cable due to the earth fault
current.
7.6 The cable system shall be designed to have a useful life of not less than Forty
years, operating at full load.
7.7 The minimum bending installation radius of the cable shall be specified.
7.8. The earthing arrangement may be designed well so that the most economical
and technically sound bonding connections for limiting sheath circulating current and
sheath induced voltage is achieved. The sheath voltage under normal operating
conditions shall not exceed 65 Volts to ground to any point (calculation shall be
furnished).
7.9. The sheath shall be insulated from ground at the End termination. The
Purchaser normally adopts the method of bonding the cable sheath at the
Termination by solidly earthing through the single phase disconnecting link boxes at
both the ends and by solidly earthing through three phase disconnecting link boxes
221
at the centre of section. The accessories in ANNEXURE.II are intended only for the
above method of bonding.
8.0 ACCESSORIES:
The accessories mentioned should also be supplied along with cable. If the
accessories are procured elsewhere and supplied, it shall be from a reputed
manufacturer having relevant I.S.O certificate. Any other accessories which are not
mentioned, but are required shall be deemed to be included.
8.1. SEALING ENDS

Indoor/Outer Sealing End (Termination) shall be suitable for the cable
specified. The connection of the cables at GIS shall be made through SF6 filled cable
connection enclosures. A general arrangement of the GIS compartment will be
furnished to the successful tenderer.
8.1.1. OUTDOOR SEALING ENDS:

8.1.1.1 For terminating the cables in the Sub-stations, pre-molded Sealing Ends
suitable for heavily industrial and saline polluted atmospheric condi-tions as per
relevant IEC/IS shall be supplied along with the cables. The Sealing Ends shall
conform to the latest International Standards apart from the specification for the
cable mentioned above. Design tests shall be performed on two Outdoor Sealing
Ends and one Straight through Joint unless the tests have already been done, in
which case, a certificate of proof shall be submitted.
8.1.1.2 The internal electric stress in the Sealing End shall be controlled by the
premoulded Silicon rubber cone arrangement. The outside bushing shall be of Silicon
rubber and shall be weather-proof and of good quali-ty, suitable for use in locations
of severe coastal pollution. The creepage distance (31mm/KV) should conform to
relevant Standards. The design of the termination should be such a way that it does
not involve plumbing of any metal parts and should have provision to control cable
sheath current.
8.1.1.3. Each outdoor type Sealing End shall be supplied complete with mounting
plate insulators to insulate the Sealing End from the supporting structures and to
control the cable sheath current. Phase to phase clearance of sealing end should
match with other terminal equipment.
222
8.1.1.4. The required Bi-metallic terminal connectors shall be supplied free of cost
along with the Sealing Ends to suit the jumper conductor. Size of jumper conductor
will be furnished to the successful bidder.
8.1.1.5 The Vendor shall provide Sheath bonding cable of size 400 sq.mm Copper
flexible conductor with HDPE insulation cover from termination to the earthing point
through single phase link box.
8.1.1.6. The vendor shall supply the galvanised steel structures with necessary civil
foundation design for the outdoor termination structures.. In the terminal structures
one side is to be provided with stainless steel cross bars to break the circulating
current effect.
8.1.2 INDOOR SEALING ENDS:
8.1.2.1.The connection of the cables shall be made through SF6 filled cable
connection enclosures.
8.1.2.1.The following are part of the supply:-
 the cable termination including the pre-moulded stress cone and the connec-
tor
 the cable gland with insulating arrangement from earth (insulating flange
etc.) including stainless steel bolts.
 the sealing of the conductor to prevent the SF6 from penetrating inside the
conductor.
 the sealing at the cable gland for SF6 tightness.
8.1.2.1.The insulating arrangement of the gland shall be designed to withstand the

following:
 Lightning impulse : 35 KV (Peak value)
 Power frequency : 8 KV (r.m.s. value) for 15 min.
8.1.2.1. For impulse withstand test, the wave shall have a virtual front time between
1 and 5 microseconds and a nominal time to half the peak value between 40
microseconds and 60 microseconds.
8.1.2.1. The arrangement shall withstand 10 impulses in positive polarity followed by

10 impulses in negative polarity.
223
8.1.2.1. During a series of 10 impulses a maximum of one or two flashovers can

occur in the air, for which 5 additional impulses are applied.
8.1.2.1. No breakdown of the insulating arrangement shall occur; the number of

flashover shall not be more than two.
8.1.2.1. To protect the cable gland insulation, against over voltages, three voltage
limiters (CCPU) shall be provided and connected between the metallic sheath of the
cable and the GIS cable enclosure.
8.1.2.1. To be effective, the connections shall be as short as possible, of the same

length and regularly distributed at 120° on the same circumference; the connections
of the CCPU shall be bolted (diameter : 14 mm).
8.1.2.1. Routine tests which are conducted in the factory for testing the insulating
arrangement of the gland shall be indicated by the vendor.
8.1.2.1. Characteristics of the surge limiters (CCPU) shall be submitted to Purchaser.

for approval.
8.2. JOINTS:
8.2.1 The Straight through Joints shall be of premoulded type suitable for the type
of cables offered and shall be suitable for underground buried installation with
uncontrolled backfill.
8.2.2 The Joints should be suitably protected against ingress of water, rodent and
termite attack. The details shall be clearly furnished in the offer.
8.2.3 The Joints should conform to the latest International Standards apart from the
specification for the cable mentioned above. Design tests shall be performed on one
Joint and two Terminations. If the tests have already been done a certificate of
proof shall be submitted. If the design warrants provision of coffin box to eliminate
moisture ingress, the same may be included in the joint cost. Conductor connection
shall be of screw/crimping connector type. The design of the Joint should be such a
way that it does not involve plumbing of any metal parts.
8.2.4 All jointing and termination works shall be carried out by the vendor on turn
key basis with their own best supervision in the presence of purchaser.
224
8.2.5 Dust and humidity free enclosures, complete with air conditioners and material
handling equipment shall be used by the vendor.
8.2.6 All special tools including a set of jointer’s hand-tools, that are necessary to
complete the joint/termination works shall be arranged by the vendor. The facilities
available with purchaser can be availed of by the vendor.
8.2.7 Necessary power supply for jointing and termination works shall be arranged
by the VENDOR. Alternatively the power supply will be provided by purchaser
wherever feasible at the tariff rates prevailing on the day of utilisation, at vendors
specific request.
8.2.8 The cost of consumables which are essential for satisfactory erection and
commissioning shall be included. No extra cost will be paid towards the cost of
consumables.
8.2.9 Adequate quantity of consumables shall be supplied for completing the entire
cable laying and jointing works. The list of such consumables shall be furnished..
8.3. EARTHING AT TERMINATION:
8.3.1 Copper flat of 50x8mm should be used to inter connect the earth pits with
Substation earth mat and for earthing termination structures. At each termination
end feeder name board in plastic shall be provided. The cost shall be included with
the termination structure to be supplied.
8.3.2. Bare copper wires, electrodes and connection for the joint chamber earthing
systems, wherever necessary shall be in the scope of supply, he installation will be
done by Vendor as per the instructions of the TANTRANSCO.
8.4. LINK BOXES:
The link box for earthing wherever required shall have provisions with earth
links, so as to isolate the sections and check the integrity of sheath of each section
independently. The connecting bar and disconnecting link shall be of tined copper.
The ‘O’ ring shall be of Chloroprene / Neoprene rubber. Similarly, for the single
phase link box for earthing at the sealing ends shall also have provisions for isolation
during testing.
8.4.1. LINK BOXES FOR SHEATH EARTHING:
225
8.4.1.1. The sheath connections shall be of bolted type the connecting bar and
disconnecting link shall be of copper. The arrangement shall be installed in a water
tight box.
8.4.1.2 The earthing at the sheath separation joints has to be executed by the
supplier. Copper spikes of length 1.5m have to be driven at the corners of the joint
bay up to 12m to the ground. Bare copper (240 sq.mm) conductor of length 12m be
laid inter connecting all the copper spikes. The sheath bonding cable laid for
earthing the link box shall be connected to the bare copper conductor. Copper
clamps shall be used to terminate the copper conductor and the bonding cable firmly
to the spike. The cost shall be included with sheath separation kit.
8.4.2. LINK BOXES FOR SHEATH SECTIONALISING (THREE PHASE TYPE)
8.4.2.1 The provision for sectionalising sheath circuit shall be made in link boxes
where the cable is earthed enroute.
8.4.2.2 The connecting, disconnecting and earthing links shall be made of copper.
The arrangement shall be installed in a watertight box.
8.4.2.3 Detailed description and drawing shall be provided by the vendor along with
the tender. Installation recommendations shall also be provided with particular
reference to protection from explosion risk.
8.4.2.4 The 3 phase link box used for sheath separation shall be housed in a
compact metallic housing unit (to be provided by vendor) and it should be free from
water entry.
8.4.2.5 The erection of link box and link box housing has to be carried out by the
supplier. The link box housing shall be painted with single coat of red oxide paint
and two coats of grey enamel paint. “Danger, TANTRANSCO, 230KV Link box” plastic
board has to be provided over the link box housing. Separate feeder name plastic
board has to be provided.
9.0 SHEATH BONDING CABLE:
Supply and installation of the insulated cables required for sheath earthing
and their connections to the general earthing system at terminations and joint
locations are part of the contract.
9.1. The sheath bonding Cable shall be as detailed below:

226
6.35/11KV, Unearthed, Single Core, 400 sq.mm, HDPE cable consisting of

compact, circular, flexible plain annealed copper conductor, HDPE insulated, and
black PVC outer sheath. The outer sheath should be provided with extruded
conductive layer on the outer surface.
9.2 Insulation shall be extruded by single head extrusion process, with absence of
voids, contaminants and moisture content.
9.3 The conductor shall be of flexible plain annealed copper wires conforming IEC
60228 (class-6). The shape of conductor shall be compact circular.
9.4. Any special tools required for installation of accessories should be supplied free
of cost.
9.5. Each sealing end shall be provided with two terminals, diametrically opposite
each, suitable for bolting (14mm dia.) the sheath bonding cables.
9.6. All sheath bonding and insulated connections to the link boxes shall be designed
for the system fault current conditions.
10.0 STRUCTURE FOR MOUNTING 230KV CABLE:
10.1. The drawing for the structure required for terminating 230KV XLPE cable and
drawings for the foundation shall be furnished by the VENDOR.
10.2. The structures to be supplied shall be made of Galvanized steel. All the bolts
and nuts to be supplied with the structure shall be of stainless steel.
10.3. The required PVC flexible pipes (size 200mm) for use as `KICK GUARD’ and
required spring loaded clamps for fixing the cable to the structure shall be supplied
free of cost by the VENDOR along with the structures.
11.0 CONSUMABLES:
VENDOR shall supply the adequate quantity of consumables, which are

essential for Jointing &Termination works and Testing of 230KV cable, along with
accessories. No extra cost will be paid towards consumables. The list of such
consumables shall be furnished in the tender
12.0 STORAGE DETAILS:
12.1The detailed instructions on storing of cable in stores/site shall be given.
227
12.2 All accessories and spares shall be suitable for storage without deterioration at
temperature up to 45 deg Centigrade under normal condition of storage and should
have a minimum shelf life of 10 years.
13.0 CABLE REELS, FITTINGS:
13.1 The cables should be securely packed in non-returnable, sturdy steel drums so
as to withstand rough handling during transport and subsequent storage.
13.2 The following drum sizes are to be adopted:
i. Barrel diameter 1700 mm
ii. Width including flange thickness 1800 mm (max.)
iii. Overall flange diameter 2900 mm (max.)
iv. Spindle hole diameter 155 mm
13.3. The following information shall be stenciled on steel drum.

i) Reference to IS/IEC.
ii) Manufacturer’s name, trade mark/brand name.
iii) Type of cable and voltage grade.
iv) Number of cores.
v) Conductor cross-section area and material.
vi) Type of insulation.
vii) Cable code.
viii) Cable drum number
ix) Length of cable in each drum.
x) Direction of rotation of the drum.
xi) Approximate gross weight of the drum.
xii) Year and country of manufacture.
xiii)Location of the cable outer end by an arrow.
xiv) Route and section for which cable is intended/Order No.
The details indicated in (viii), (ix), (x), (xiii) and (xiv) should be painted
on both sides of the drum.
13.4 The reel construction, cable placement on the reel and the installation of
protective wrappings and lagging etc., shall be carefully co-coordinat-ed to prevent
228
damage to the cable during normal handling and trans-portation of the

equipment/materials.
13.5 Each cable end shall be hermetically sealed by means of metal cups using
wiping lead so as to protect the cable from outside moisture dur-ing transit, storage
and laying.
13.6 The supplier shall be responsible for any damage to the cables or drums during
transit and until it is taken into stock at Stores, and the same shall be replaced free
of cost.
13.7 Any deviation from the above should be got approved along with the design.
14.0 MARKINGS AND INDICATIONS:
14.1. The cables shall bear the following indications on their over sheath
 The reference to the present specification.

 The name of the manufacturer.
 The conductor cross-section and conductor material.
 The insulation material.
 The rated voltage.
 The year of manufacture.
 The reference to identify the cable-manufacturing batch.
 The purchaser’s identification marks.
14.2. The marks can be either imprinted or embossed on the over sheath and will be
made along two diametrically opposite lines. The interval between the end of one
inscription and the beginning of the next one shall not exceed one meter.
14.3. “Sequential length mark shall be provided along with the above markings”.
14.4. The dimension of alphanumeric types shall be at least 6mm.
15.0 DRAWINGS AND MANUALS:
15.1 Two prints of drawings incorporating the following particulars shall be included
in the tender. (viz) Cross sectional drawing of cable indicating dimensions, cable
Straight through Joints, Sealing End, Termination structure, cable reel drum, link
boxes showing bonding and earthing arrangements, special T&Ps and method of
installation.
229
15.2 The tenderer shall submit the following drawings / characteristics during
subvendor approval.
Cross section of cable furnishing the dimensions (outline).

Detailed drawing of cable earthing arrangement.
Detailed drawing of Sealing Ends and installation instruction.
Assembly drawings and weights of Sealing End.
Detailed drawings for cable end Terminal Structure with foundation.
Schematic diagram of the cable system.
Characteristics of cable (Temperature Vs Current).
Power factor Vs temperature characteristics of cable.
Power factor Vs Voltage characteristics of cable.
Partial Discharge magnitude Vs Voltage characteristics for cable.
Detailed drawing of cable drum.
15.3. Transport drawings showing main dimensions and weight of each package ar-
rangement and other protection arrangements required during transit.
15.4. Dimensional detailed drawing and installation instructions for Straight through
Joints and Insulated joints.
16.0 QUALITY CONTROL AND QUALITY ASSURANCE:
16.1 The details of quality control adopted in manufacturing 230KV Power cables
and accessories including raw materials may be specified.
16.2 For all bought out items, the quality control adopted by sub-vendors may also
be specified.
16.3 The manufacturing facilities for both cable and accessories must have been
certified to qualified system standards ISO 9001 prior to this Bid submission by a
reputed accreditation body.
17.0 SHOP / ROUTINE TESTS:

17.1 The Shop tests shall be carried out in accordance with IEC/ISS/Swedish
Standard wherever it is not specified.
17.2 The following additional special tests shall be conducted on one sample of each
sizes.
i) SHORT CIRCUIT TEST ON METALLIC SHEATH.
230
For short circuit test on metallic sheath, injection of the short circuit current is
made through the conductor on one side and return of short circuit current is
made through the metallic sheaths on the same side. The conductor and
metallic sheath are electrically shorted on the other side. The cable sample
shall withstand a short circuit current of 31.5 KA for 3 seconds. The test
voltage shall be less than or equal to 20 KV. The conductor temperature shall
be raised to the overload rating of 90 deg centigrade before applying the
short circuit current of 31.5 KA for 3 seconds.
17.3 Routine and other tests shall be carried out by the Vendor on the cable and
accessories in the presence of the Purchaser’s representative.
17.4 The Purchaser reserves the right to witness all the tests on cable and
accessories (including bought out items). The Bidder shall provide all facilities to the
Purchaser in this regard and inform the Purchaser suffi-ciently in advance to enable
the Purchaser to depute his representative to witness the same.
17.5 The Routine, Acceptance and Special tests conducted in the presence of the
Purchaser’s representative shall be got approved before the mate-rials are
despatched.
17.6 The size and number of voids and contaminants in the insulation shall be
calculated for 1 out of 10 cable drums manufactured and shall be furnished:
17.7. 20 helically cut samples of Insulation shall be examined with a minimum 15

power magnification by transmitting light and the nos. and sizes shall be tabulated
for the sizes 5 m and larger.
17.8.The largest size shall be measured with a minimum 40 power magnification and
shall be recorded in tabulation form and submitted.
17.9 20 KV DC voltage test between the metallic sheath and the outer sheath for
each and every length of the cable delivered should be conducted and the sheath
leakage at 10 KV, 15 KV and 20 KV are to be furnished and got approved before
despatch of cable drums. The leakage current shall be within limits of 5.0 mA for
500 meters at 20 KV D.C. and 2.0 mA for 500 meters at 10 KV D.C.

17.10.1. The purchaser will witness the acceptance tests as identified in the
approved QA plan.
231
17.10.2. The acceptance tests carriedout in the manufacturers premises will be

17.10.3. The inspection and acceptance of any equipment shall not relieve the
be defective.
17.10.4. The supplier shall keep the purchaser informed in advance, about the
17.10.5. The purchaser reserves the right to insist for witnessing the acceptance /
17.10.6. No material shall be dispatched from its point of manufacture unless the
by the purchaser.
18.0. ERECTION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

18.1. SCOPE:
This specification covers the erection, testing and commissioning of 230KV,
1200 sq mm single core, Aluminum , compact, segmented stranded, XLPE Lead
sheathed cable and accessories.
 Excavation of cable trench and construction of RCC joint pit, Civil works for
the termination support structures including supply of all materials etc., as
per the approved drawing.
 Transportation of cable drums form Contractor’s stores to site for cable lay-
ing. Transportation of the remaining cable bits along with cable drum and de-
volution at TANTRANSCO Stores. Empty cable drums shall be retained by the
Contractor and cleared from site. Transporting and providing of all required
tools and plants like Generator, Winch, rollers, motorized rollers, control cable
etc., at site shall be under the scope of the Contractor.
 Laying of 230KV cable under proper supervision using motorized rollers and
securing them at 3m interval in trefoil formation.
232
 Conducting the test after cable laying in each section in the presence of
TANTRANSCO Engineer.
 Rectification of sheath fault if any and retesting in the presence of
TANTRANSCO Engineer.
 Supply and providing suitable trefoil clamps and applying fire retardant paint
wherever the cable remains exposed.
 Erection of joints and terminations including erection of link boxes with all
preparatory works.
 Adopting all safety measure as per the orders of Local authority in vogue.
18.2.TRANSPORT OF CABLE DRUM, CABLE LAYING, TESTING AND
COMMISSIONING:
The cable shall be loaded at Stores, transported, unloaded at site and laid by
the Vendor under the supervision of Vendor’s supervising Engineer. The cable
laying, erection, testing and commissioning of the cable system shall be carried out
under the supervision of one fully qualified and competent supervising Engineer, by
the VENDOR.
18.3. JOINTING AND TERMINATION WORKS:
18.3.1 For jointing and termination works, one qualified supervising Engineer and
required trained EHV jointers with supporting staff should be deputed. The
supervising Engineer and EHV jointers shall possess valid certificate from the
manufacturer of the cable accessories, for erection.
18.3.2. The joint bays shall be provided by the Vendor generally of size 5.8m x 1.8m
(clear) which may vary according to the site conditions.
18.3.3. Power supply at the jointing bays and at the termination site will be
extended and the consumption will be charged at the appropriate tariff prevailing at
that time.
18.3.4. The preparatory works for jointing and termination works shall be borne by
the VENDOR.
18.3.5. It is the sole responsibility of the Vendor to check for any accidental
damages in the cable while reexcavation, during jointing and termination works. It
will be the responsibility of the Vendor to rectify the damaged cable to make good
with any additional joints free of cost or relocating the joint position.
233
19.0 PRE-COMMISSIONING TESTS:
On completion of cable laying, jointing and termination works, the complete

installation will be tested with:-
A power frequency voltage equal to 1.7 Uo applied for 1 Hour between each
conductor and metallic sheath as per CIGRE Group 21 studies, where Uo is the r.m.s
rated voltage at power frequency, between the conductor and the earth or the
metallic sheath ( or ) With normal operating Voltage of the system for 24 hours as
per IEC 60840.
19.1. SHEATH TEST.
Sheath fault occurring during laying, testing after laying and during pre-
commissioning should be rectified by the Vendor free of cost (including civil works).
Necessary sheath repairing kits with heat shrinkable materials are to be supplied as
per the site requirement during execution of works. Testing after rectification of
defects, if any shall be chargeable to the Vendor.
19.2. The following Pre-commissioning tests shall be carried out by the VENDOR
after installation:
 Electrostatic Capacitance of the cable.
 Resistance of the cable conductor.
 Resistance of the sheath.
19.3 The purchaser reserves the right to witness all the tests and the tenderer shall
provide all facilities to the Purchaser in this regard.
19.4 The Vendor should furnish (5 Copies) of the test results for calculating the total
cable technical losses.
234
ANNEXURE – I
Schedule of Guaranteed Technical Particulars of Cable
The following information shall be given by the bidder in addition to any other
relevant data.
A. Cables.
1. Name of Manufacturer
2. Country of Manufacture
3. Type of cable
4. Applicable Standard
5. a. Rated nominal voltage
b. Rated Maximum voltage
6. Whether suitable for
a. Earthed System
b. Unearthed System
7. Nominal cross-sectional area of conductor
( Sq.mm )
8. Conductor
a. Material
b. Shape
c. Diameter of conductor ( mm )
d.
i. No. of wires in conductor
ii. Nominal dia. of each inlet wire in conductor
before compacting
9. Conductor Screen
a. Material
b. Thickness ( mm )
c. Maximum volume resistivity (at 25 ° Degree
Centigrade) before and after ageing ( ohm – cm )
10. Maximum value of electric stresses at the conductor
screen (Calculation to be shown separately) (
kV/mm )
11. Insulation
a. Material/Composition
b. Dia. of cable over the insulation ( mm )
c. Radial thickness
i. Minimum Average ( mm )
ii. Minimum at Any Point ( mm )
d. Maximum Dielectric Stress in kV/mm
12. Maximum value of dielectric stress at the insulation
( kV/mm )
13. Insulation Screen
a. Material
b. Nominal Thickness ( mm )
c. Maximum volume resistivity ( at 25° C ) ( ohm
– cm )
d. Maximum electrical stress ( kV/mm)
14. Bedding over insulation screen
a. Material
b. Approximate thickness (mm)
15. Tape used for longitudinal water sealing (Swell able
Tape)
a. Material
b. Approximate thickness (mm)
16. Metallic Sheath
a. Type (Extruded)
b. Material
c. Thickness of the sheath (Radial) ( mm )
d. Diameter of the cable across the metallic
sheath
17. External overall sheath
a. Material & Type
b. Nominal thickness ( mm )
c. Spark test voltage at works
18. Tolerance on thickness of overall sheath if any ( mm
)
19. a. Whether conductive layer is provided over the
PE sheath
b. Thickness of coating
20. Approximate external overall dia. of cables ( mm )
21. Minimum cable bending radius
a. for pulling
b. below terminals
22. Permissible maximum tension in the cable ( kg )
23. Maximum safe continuous operating voltage ( kV )
24. Permanent Admissible Current at 90° C
a. Cable laid in trench
b. At road crossings
c. At river/canal crossings
d. Railway Crossing
25. Continuous current rating for sheath solidly earthed
system rating under the specified installation and
operating conditions.
Conductor temperature 90° C, 80° C, 75° C and 70°
C.
Ground Temperature 35° C and depth of laying
1350 mm
26. Maximum permissible conductor temperature for
continuous operation
under the conditions (°C )
27. Temperature of conductor at rated current
28. Basic impulse level at conductor temperature of 90°
C
29. Impulse wave shape
30. Power frequency withstand voltage
31. Ionisation factor at 50 Hz.
32. Maximum potential gradient at conductor surface
( kV/cm )
33. Minimum potential gradient at conductor surface
( kV/cm )
34. Sheath voltage under maximum operating
conditions, assuming all circuits connected ( kV/km )
35. Permissible short circuit current for Metallic sheath
a. 0.1 sec. ( kA )
b. 0.2 sec. ( kA )
c. 0.5 sec. ( kA )
d. 1.0 sec. ( kA )
36. Conductor maximum D.C./A.C. resistance per 1000
m lengths
a. at 20° C ( ohm )
b. at 90° C ( ohm )
c. at 10% Continuous overload ( ohm )
37. Equivalent Star reisistance at 50 Hz. per 1000 m
length of 3 phase current
a. at 20° C ( ohm )
b. at 90° C ( ohm )
c. at 10% continuous overload ( ohm )
38. Star reactance at 50 Hz. per 1000 m
39. Impedance at 50 Hz. per 1000 m length
a. at 20° C ( ohm )
b. at 85° C ( ohm )
c. at 10% continuous overload ( ohm )
40. Positive and negative sequence reactances per 1000
m length ( ohm )
41. Zero sequence data per 1000 m length
a. Series resistance ( ohm )
b. Series reactance ( ohm )
c. Shunt capacitive reactances ( ohm )
42. Sheath resistance at 20 ° C per 1000 m length
( ohm )
43. Surge impedance of the cable in ohm
44. Self electrostatic capacitance per phase
(microfarad/1000 m ) (Max/Min )
45. Dielectric dissipation factor at rated voltage
46. I.R. value at ambient temperature per 1000 m
length
47. P.f. at conductor temperature of 90 ° C
and at
a. 50% of rated phase to neutral voltage
b. 100% of rated phase to neutral Voltage
c. 200% of rated phase toneutral voltage
48. Guaranteed Losses per 1000 m length
(Calculation sheet to be furnished)
a. Dielectric losses per phase at rated
voltage and rated current (kW)
b. Copper losses per phase at rated
voltages and rated current (kW)
c. Other losses (sheath/screen losses/Phase at
rated voltage and current (kW)
d. Losses due to reinforcement, if any
(kW)
e. Total losses at rated continuous
current (kW)
49. Charging current at rated voltage
50. Short circuit capacity of conductor for one second
assuming conductor temperature of 90 ° C prior to
short circuit and 250 ° C during short circuit
51. Short circuit capacity of metallic sheath for one
second assuming screen temperature of 75 ° C prior
to short circuit and 250 ° C during short circuit
52. Maximum tan delta at 130 kV maximum increment
of between 65 kV and 260 kV (0.5 Uo to 2 Uo)
53. A.C. Test voltage for One hour
(Routine test Cl.6.5.2 of Section - 10)
54. A.C. Test voltage for 24 hours
(Type test – Cl. 6.2.3 of Section - 10)
55. Partial discharge
a. at 1.75 Uo
b. 1.50 Uo
(Where Uo = 130 KV)
56. Impulse test voltage
57. Approximate drum dimension
58. Maximum length of cable in a drum
59. Approximate gross weight of cable in a
Drum
a. Approximate weight of cable/km
b. Type of drum
c. Other relevant particulars
60. Maximum charging current per conductor per km. of
cable at Nominal voltage
61. Derating factors for
a. Ground temperature of 20° C, 25° C 30° C,
35° C, & 40° C
b. Depth of burial 0.75 m, 1.0 m, 1.25 m, and
1.5 m
c. Short circuit (current) capacity with conductor
temperature of 90 ° C for durations of 0.5 Secs. 1.0
Secs. and 2.0 sec.
62. Screening factor of the cable for calculating
interference on control and communication cables
63. Manufacturing Practice
a. Manufacturing process
b. Type of curing of XLPE
c. Type of extrusion
d. Control of voids and contaminants of XLPE
Name of the Bidder :

Signature of the Bidder :
Designation :
Date :
Company Seal :
ANNEXURE – II
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR ACCESSORIES
The following information shall be given by the Tenderer in addition to

any other relevant data
A. SealingEnd.
NameofManufacturer
Type&Descriptionofmaterialused
Size(mmandshape)
Ratedvoltage
Ratecontinuouscurrent(A)
Maximumconductorsize(sq.mm)
Ratedimpulsewithstandvoltage
Impulsewaveshape
PowerFrequencywithstandvoltage
Dry (kV rms)
Wet (kV rms)
10. Flashovervoltage
Dry (kV rms)
Wet (kV rms)
11. Impulse(kVrms)
12. Mountingdetailsof
Sealing end/Switchyard
Link Box
13. Detailsofterminalconnector
14. Otherdetails
B. JointingKits
NameofManufacturer
Materialofthecoffin
Detailsofmaterialsusedin
C. CCPU
NameofManufacturer
TypeandMaterial
SizeandShape
RatedVoltage
Detailsofcharacteristics
Nominaldischargecurrent
Powerfrequencywithstandvoltage
Powerfrequencysparkovervoltage
ResealVoltage
10. PressureReliefclass
11. ImpulseHighCurrentShortduration
dischargeamp.(8/20microsecondwave)
12. Creepagedistance
D. Link Box Details
Details of link boxes
Voltage rating
E. CCPU
Name of Manufacturer
Type and Material
Size and Shape
Name of the Bidder :
Signature of the Bidder :
Designation :
Date :
Company Seal :
SECTION 19
110KV, XLPE INSULATED ALUMINIUM CABLE
1.0 SCOPE:
Design, detailed engineering, manufacture, testing at works, offering for
inspection, packing, transport and delivery of 110KV, 1c x 1000 sq.mm & 1c x 630
sq.mm, Aluminium conductor, XLPE insulated, Lead alloy sheathed, HDPE outer
sheathed, underground cable with accessories, startup and essential spares at site,
Laying of cable, Erection of joints and terminations and other accessories, final
testing and commissioning of the 110KV UG cable.
2.0 STANDARDS:
2.1. The cable and accessories covered under this Specification shall confirm to the
relevant standards (with up to date amendments) specified herein, unless or
otherwise specified. Wherever special requirements are necessary, relevant
standards may be referred.
i. IS.7098 (Part-III/1993), Cross linked Polyethylene insulated HDPE outer

IEC 502, IEC 60840 sheathed cable.
ii. IEC. 60811/1999 HDPE outer sheath of electric cables.
iii. IS.8130/1989 Conductors for insulated electric cables & flexible
cords.
iv. IEC Publication Tests on cable over sheath which have a special
229/1982 protective function and are applied by extrusion.
v. IEC Publication Calculation of continuous current rating of cable.
287/1982
vi. IEC Publication Tests for power cables with extruded insulation for
60840/1999 rated voltage above 30KV up to 150KV
vii. Swedish standard Power cables XLPE insulated cables with extruded
SS-424-14-17 of 1988 over sheath and rated voltage 12-420KV testing.
viii. IEC Publication 60230/ Impulse tests on cables and their accessories.
1999
ix. IEC Publication Test methods for insulation and sheaths of electric
540/1982 cables and cords.
x. IEC Publications High Voltage test techniques.
60060/1989
xi. IEC Publication Common test methods for insulating and sheathing
60811/1998 material of electrical cables.
xii. IS.10810 (Pt.34/1984 Methods of test for cables: Part-34 measurement of
thickness of metallic sheath.
xiii. IEC Publication Conductors of insulated cable.
60228/1978
xiv. IEC 885- 2 & 3/1987 & Electrical test methods for electric cables – Partial
1988 discharge test.
2.2. The design, manufacture and testing shall be in accordance with the relevant
Technical Specification of Standards indicated above and special requirements which
are specified. All deviations from this Specification, which ensures same or better
quality of material to be supplied, shall be brought out in the Schedule of Technical
deviation. Any deviation between the Specification and catalogues of BID offered, if
not clearly brought out in the Schedule of deviation, will not be considered as valid
deviation. The applicable standards shall be clearly stated with a copy of Standard
(English version) followed.
2.3. The Vendor shall furnish the following information:
 Name of the Manufacturer.
 Details of the Manufacturing facilities available at manufacturer’s works.
 Details of testing facility available at manufacturer’s works and site.
 Proof for Technical collaboration with other firms and if so, details regarding
the same.
2.4. The Vendor shall bring out clearly any additional feature, which they deem fit to
include, to give a complete and comprehensive offer. The Vendor shall, however
sustain his reasons for offering such additional features in his proposal for better
quality and the Purchaser reserves the right to accept or reject such offers.
3.0. CODES:
The design, manufacture, inspection and testing of the said cable and
accessories shall comply with I.E.C. and other Regulations & Safety Codes. However
materials meeting with other International Standards, which ensures same or better
quality, will also be considered.
4.0 GENERAL REQUIREMENT OF CABLE AND ACCESSORIES:
The following factors that govern long term reliability of cable and accessories
shall be ensured:
 Uniformity of insulation.
 Minimization of contamination in insulation.
 Smoothness and adhesiveness at the interface between insulation and semi-

conducting layers.
 Minimization of voids and moisture in insulation.
 XLPE insulation shall be dry-cured (radiant curing).
The maximum permissible over load current of cable, not exceeding

conductor temperature of 90 Degree Centigrade, shall be intimated by the Bidder.
5.0. SYSTEM PARAMETERS:
i Type of cable XLPE insulated, Lead sheathed,

HDPE outer sheathed UG cable
ii. Number of cores & nominal cross section Single Core, 1000 Sq.mm &
of the conductor Single Core, 630 Sq.mm
iii Conductor material Aluminium
iv. Nominal system voltage (Line) 110 KV
v. Highest system voltage 123 KV
Vi Rated voltage between conductor and 110/ 3 KV (RMS)
sheath
vii. Rated frequency 50 Hz.
viii. Number of Phases per circuit. Three
ix. System earthing Solidly earthed
x. Impulse level of cable and sealing end. 550 KV (peak)
xi. a.1 minute power frequency withstand 230KV (RMS)
voltage
b. 30 minutes power frequency withstand 190 KV (RMS)
voltage
xii. Momentary short circuit current of 31.5KA (RMS) for
metallic sheath 3 Seconds.
xiii. Maximum permissible operating
temperature of conductor under:
Normal operation 90 O C
Emergency overload 130 O C
Short circuit 250 O C
6.0. SUPPLY OF CABLE AND ACCESSORIES.
6.1.0 SCOPE:
The scope of the proposal shall be on the basis of a single Bidder

responsibility completely covering the equipment described under these Specification
and documents.
It will include the following:
 The detailed design of the cable etc., as per the following Specification.
 Complete manufacture including shop testing.
 Providing Engineering drawings, data, operational manuals etc for Purchaser’s

approval.
 Packing and transportation from manufacturer’s works to site and unloading

at Chennai.
 Design as per Specification and supply of cable accessories and Sheath bond-
ing cable etc as per Schedule.
 Supply of End termination structure.
 Laying of cable, erection of joints and terminations, testing and commission-

ing. Testing and commissioning and handing over the project in complete
shape to TANTRANSCO.
 Supply of 2 Nos Heat shrinkable sealing end caps for each cable length in
addition to 10 Nos Heat shrinkable sealing end caps for each lot for use dur-
ing inspection at site.
7.0. DESCRIPTION OF CABLE REQUIRED:
7.1. 64/110KV, Single core, 1000 & 630 sq.mm XLPE cable consisting of compact,
segmental/circular, stranded Aluminium conductor (Voids filled with water swellable
filler material) wrapped with one layer of semi-conductive tape, shielded with black
extruded semi-conducting compound, XLPE insulated, insulation screened with
extruded semi-conducting compound, bedded with longitudinal water tight semi-
conducting swellable tape, radial metallic screen of corrosive resistance annealed
copper wires applied helically followed with open helix of copper tape, then metallic
sheath of Lead Alloy E and Black HDPE Outer sheath. The outer sheath should be
provided with extruded conductive layer on the outer surface to enable sheath test.
7.2. Dry curing process (radiant curing) shall be adopted for the manufacture of
cable.
7.3. The conductor screen, insulation and insulation screen shall be extruded in one
operation, i.e., by simultaneous triple head extrusion process, with absence of voids,
contaminants and moisture content.
7.4 The process should ensure electrical continuity of the extruded conductive layer
above non conductive outer sheath, when checked with the low voltage continuity
tester.
7.5. A complete set of experimentally verified data and calculations made in arriving
at the conductor rating, voltage stress at the conductor screen and insulation screen
shall also be enclosed.
8.0 CONDUCTOR :
8.1. The conductor shall be Aluminium wires conforming to IEC 60228. The shape
of conductor shall be compact, segmental/circular, stranded.
8.2. The conductor should be water sealed, by filling suitable water swellable
material between conductor strand, which should turn into jelly when in contact with
water.
8.3. Suitable Semi-conducting tape shall be wrapped over the conductor.
8.4. CONDUCTOR RESISTANCE:
The maximum resistance of the conductor at 20̊ C shall be 0.0469 Ohms/ Km

for 630 sq mm and 0.0291 Ohms/ Km for 1000 sq mm cable as per IEC 60228. If
the value of resistance is found higher than the stipulated values then the entire
drum of cable will be rejected.
8.5. CONDUCTOR SCREENING:
The conductor screening shall be provided over the conductor by extrusion of

semi-conducting compound. The nominal thickness of conductor screen shall be
1mm and the minimum thickness at any point shall not fall below 90% of the
nominal value.
9.0 INSULATION:
9.1. Insulation shall be provided over conductor shield with extruded cross linked
polyethylene (XLPE). The extruded XLPE insulation shall be of very high degree of
purity and by adopting dry curing process (radiant curing). Size of the contaminants
shall be kept under 50 m and number of contaminants of size between 5 and 50
m shall not exceed 1 per cc of insulation.
The nominal thickness of XLPE insulation shall be 18mm. The thickness at any
point shall not fall below 90% of the nominal value. i.e. t min  0.9 t n
and additionally, t max-t min  0.15 t max

Where t max – is the maximum thickness in mm
t min – is the minimum thickness in mm
t n – is the nominal thickness in mm
and d max-d min  0.05 where d = dia over insulation d max
9.2. INSULATION SCREEN :
9.2.1 The insulation screen shall be applied over extruded XLPE insulation. The
insulation screen shall consist of extruded semi-conducting compound. The nominal
thickness of insulation screen shall be 1mm and thickness at any point shall not fall
below 90% of the nominal value and the size of the voids should not be greater than
10m and the number should be as per standards.
9.3. WATER BLOCKING TAPE :
Suitable swellable type water-blocking semi-conducting tape (2 layers) shall

be wrapped over the semi-conducting insulation screen. The total nominal thickness
should not be less than 0.5mm.
10.0 METALLIC SCREEN AND METALLIC SHEATH

10.1. The metallic screen of corrosive resistant, annealed copper wires applied
helically, followed with open helix of copper tape, should be provided over the water
blocking tape. The diameter of copper wire in the screening shall not be less than
0.8 mm. The nominal thickness of copper tape shall be not less than 0.1 mm. The
minimum thickness of copper tape shall not fall below the nominal value by more
than 10%.
10.2. Metallic sheath shall be of Lead Alloy E confirming to clause 7.2 of IS 7098
(Part 3) and shall be extruded over the metallic screen or water blocking tape as the
case may be.
10.3. The metallic screen and metallic sheath shall also be designed to withstand the
earth fault current liable to occur in the system during a conductor to ground fault
for a duration of short circuit withstand time specified. (Refer System parameters)
and the tolerance should be as per clause 10.7 of IEC 60840, 1999-02.
11.0 OUTER SHEATH :
11.1 The outer protective sheath shall consist of a black extruded HDPE. The outer
sheath shall be extruded with a conductive layer over the non – conductive outer
protective sheath. Suitable chemicals shall be added to the compound for protection
against rodent and termite attack.
11.2 DIMENSIONAL CHARACTERISTICS:
The nominal thickness of the outer sheath shall be 4.0 mm. However, the
thickness at any point shall not be less than 3.5 mm. Other dimensional
characteristics are to be in accordance with clause 8.2 of IEC Publication 60811-1-1.
12.0 Mechanical, Physical And Chemical Characteristics:
12.1. Mechanical Characteristics :
Determination of the mechanical characteristics of the outer sheath, before

and after thermal ageing shall be in accordance with clauses 9.2 of IEC Publication
60811-1-1 and 8.1 of IEC Publication 60811-1-2.
The following Table gives the values to be obtained:
i. Mechanical Characteristics Of The Oversheath :

Sl.No. TESTS UNITS HDPE
1. In the delivery state:
a. Minimum tensile strength N/mm 12.5
b. Minimum elongation at break % 300
2. After ageing in a hot air oven:
Temperature
Treatment Tolerance C 110
Duration C 2
Days 10
Tensile Strength
a. Residual Minimum value N/mm -
Elongation at break
a. Residual Minimum value % 300
NOTE: ( * ) VARIATION:
Difference between the median value obtained after ageing and the median
value obtained without ageing, expressed as a percentage of the latter.
ii. PRESSURE TEST AT HIGH TEMPERATURE ON SHEATHS:
The pressure test at high temperature shall be carried out in accordance with
clause 8.2 of IEC publication 60811.3.1, the test temperature shall be (90  2)
Degree Centigrade.
iii. The maximum depth of indentation shall be less or equal to 50%.
12.1.4.ELONGATION TEST AT LOW TEMPERATURE:

The test at low temperature shall be carried out in accordance with sub
clause 8.4 of IEC publication 60811.1.4, the test temperature shall be (-152)
Degree Centigrade.
12.1.5. After the tests the elongation without break must be at least 20%
13.0. ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS:
13.1. The cable shall be capable of carrying the guaranteed rated current
continuously without exceeding the specified temperature limitation of 65 Degree
Centigrade under the laying conditions specified.
13.2. The sheath voltage under full load conditions, assuming all circuits loaded shall
not exceed 65 volts to ground at any point in the system. The working sheet for the
sheath voltage under full load condition shall be furnished.
13.3. The charging current of the cable shall be  3.8 A/ Km, and shall be stated in
the tender. The surge impedance of the cable shall be low such that the over
voltage at the transformer terminals due to the lightning surges shall be limited well
below to its impulse level of 550KV.
13.4. The Partial discharge at 2 U0 should be less than 5 pC.
13.5. The calculations indicating the over voltage reached shall be supplied as part
of Tender. The characteristics of lightning arrestors indicated in IEC/IS for 110KV
system may be used for over voltage calculation purposes. Specific
recommendations shall be made for the use of Lightning Arrestors at the terminals if
otherwise.
13.6. EARTHING OF METALLIC SHEATH :
13.6.1. The earthing arrangement may be designed well so that the most
economical and technically sound bonding connections for limiting sheath circulating
current and sheath induced voltage is achieved. The sheath voltage under normal
operating conditions shall not exceed 65 Volts to ground to any point (calculation
shall be furnished).
13.6.2. The sheath shall be insulated from ground at the End termination.
13.6.3. The Purchaser normally adopts the method of bonding the cable sheath at
the Termination by solidly earthing through the single phase disconnecting link
boxes at both the ends and by solidly earthing through three phase disconnecting
link boxes at the centre of section. The accessories in ANNEXURE.II are intended
only for the above method of bonding.
13.7. The cable system shall withstand the mechanical forces due to short circuit
current value of 31.5 KA (RMS) for 3 seconds. The cable design shall be such that it
should take care of the stresses in the insulation of the cable due to the earth fault
current.
13.8. The cable system shall be designed to have a useful life of not less than Forty
years, operating at full load.
13.9. The minimum bending installation radius of the cable shall be specified.
14.0 ACCESSORIES:
The accessories mentioned should also be supplied. If the accessories are

procured elsewhere and supplied, it shall be from a reputed manufacturer having
relevant I.S.O certificate. Any other accessories which are not mentioned, but are
required shall be brought out in the tender and rates offered.
14.1.0 DESCRIPTION OF INDOOR/OUTDOOR SEALING END REQUIRED:
14.1.1. Indoor / Outer Sealing End (Termination) shall be suitable for the cable
specified. The connection of the cables at GIS shall be made through SF6 filled cable
connection enclosures. A general arrangement of the GIS compartment will be
furnished by the successful tenderer.
14.1.2. For terminating the cables in the Sub-stations, pre-molded Sealing Ends
suitable for heavily industrial and saline polluted atmospheric conditions as per
relevant IEC/IS shall be supplied along with the cables. The Sealing Ends shall
conform to the latest International Standards apart from the specification for the
cable mentioned above. Design tests shall be performed on two Outdoor Sealing
Ends and one Straight through Joint unless the tests have already been done, in
which case, a certificate of proof shall be submitted.
14.1.3. The internal electric stress in the Sealing End shall be controlled by the
premoulded Silicon rubber cone arrangement. The outside bushing shall be of
Silicon rubber and shall be weather-proof and of good quality, suitable for use in
locations of severe coastal pollution. The creepage distance 31 mm / KV should
conform to relevant Standards. The design of the termination should be such a way
that it does not involve plumbing of any metal parts and should have provision to
control cable sheath current.
14.1.4. Each outdoor type Sealing End shall be supplied complete with mounting
plate insulators to insulate the Sealing End from the supporting structures and to
control the cable sheath current. Phase to phase clearance of sealing end should
match with other terminal equipment.
14.1.5. The required Bi-metallic Terminal connectors shall be supplied free of cost
along with the Sealing Ends to suit the jumper conductor. Size of jumper conductor
will be furnished to the successful bidder.
14.1.6. The Vendor shall provide Sheath bonding cable of size 240 sq.mm Copper
flexible conductor with HDPE insulation cover from termination to the earthing point
through single phase link box.
14.2. JOINTS:
The Straight through Joints shall be of premoulded type suitable for the type
of cables offered and shall be suitable for underground-buried installation with
uncontrolled backfill. The Joints should be suitably protected against ingress of
water, rodent and termite attack. The details shall be clearly furnished in the offer.
The Joints should conform to the latest International Standards apart from the
specification for the cable mentioned above. Design tests shall be performed on one
Joint and two Terminations. If the tests have already been done a certificate of
proof shall be submitted. If the design warrants provision of coffin box to eliminate
moisture ingress, the same may be included in the joint cost. Conductor connection
shall be of screw/crimping connector type. The design of the Joint should be such a
way that it does not involve plumbing of any metal parts.
14.3. LINK BOX FOR EARTHING
14.3.1. The link box for earthing wherever required shall have provisions with earth
links, so as to isolate the sections and check the integrity of sheath of each section
independently. The connecting bar and disconnecting link shall be of tined copper.
The Ò’ ring shall be of Chloroprene/Neoprene rubber. Similarly, for the single
phase link box for earthing at the sealing ends shall also have provisions for isolation
during testing.
14.3.2. The earthing at the sheath separation joints has to be executed by the
supplier. Copper spikes of length 1.5m have to be driven at the corners of the joint
bay up to 12m to the ground. Bare copper (240 sq.mm) conductor of length 12m be
laid inter connecting all the copper spikes. The sheath bonding cable laid for
earthing the link box shall be connected to the bare copper conductor. Copper
clamps shall be used to terminate the copper conductor and the bonding cable firmly
to the spike. The cost shall be included with sheath separation kit.
14.3.3. The 3 phase link box used for sheath separation shall be housed in a
compact metallic housing unit and it should be free from water entry. The erection
of link box and link box housing has to be carried out by the supplier. The bottom of
the link box housing should be covered with brick masonry work to avoid entry of
water. The link box housing shall be painted with single coat of red oxide paint and
two coats of grey enamel paint. “Danger, TNEB, 110KV Link box” plastic board has
to be provided over the link box housing. Separate feeder name plastic board has to
be provided.
14.4. SHEATH BONDING CABLE:
14.4.1.The sheath bonding Cable shall be as detailed below:
6.35/11KV (Unearthed) Single Core, 400 sq.mm HDPE cable consisting of compact,
circular, flexible plain annealed copper conductor, HDPE insulated, and black PVC
outer sheath. The outer sheath should be provided with extruded conductive layer
on the outer surface.
14.4.2. Insulation shall be extruded by single head extrusion process, with absence
of voids, contaminants and moisture content.
14.4.3. The conductor shall be of flexible plain annealed copper wires conforming
IEC 60228 (class-6). The shape of conductor shall be compact circular.
15.0 STRUCTURE FOR MOUNTING 110KV CABLE:
15.1. The drawing for the structure required for terminating 110KV XLPE cable and
drawings for the foundation shall be furnished by the VENDOR. The structures to be
supplied shall be made of Galvanized steel. All the bolts and nuts to be supplied with
the structure shall be of stainless steel.
15.2. The required PVC flexible pipes (size 200mm) for use as `KICK GUARD’ and
required spring loaded clamps for fixing the cable to the structure shall be supplied
free of cost by the VENDOR along with the structures.
16.0 CONSUMABLES:
Bidder shall supply the adequate quantity of consumables, which are essential
for Jointing &Termination works and Testing of 110KV cable, along with accessories.
No extra cost will be paid towards consumables.
17.0. STORAGE DETAILS:
17.1. The detailed instructions on storing of cable in stores/site shall be given.
17.2 All accessories and spares shall be suitable for storage without deterioration
at temperature up to 45 deg Centigrade under normal condition of storage and
should have a minimum shelf life of 10 years.
18.0 CABLE REELS, FITTINGS:
18.1 The cables should be securely packed in non-returnable, sturdy steel drums
so as to withstand rough handling during transport and subsequent storage.
18.2. The following drum sizes are to be adopted:

i. Barrel diameter 1700 mm
ii. Width including flange thickness 1800 mm (max.)
iii. Overall flange diameter 2900 mm (max.)
iv. Spindle hole diameter 155 mm
18.3. The following information shall be stenciled on steel drum.
i) Reference to IS/IEC.
ii) Manufacturer’s name, trade mark/brand name.
iii) Type of cable and voltage grade.
iv) Number of cores.
v) Conductor cross-section area and material.
vi) Type of insulation.
vii) Cable code.
viii) Cable drum number
ix) Length of cable in each drum.
x) Direction of rotation of the drum.
xi) Approximate gross weight of the drum.
xii) Year and country of manufacture.
xiii) Location of the cable outer end by an arrow.
xiv) Route and section for which cable is intended/Order No.
The details indicated in (viii), (ix), (x), (xiii) and (xiv) should be painted on
both sides of the drum.
18.4. The reel construction, cable placement on the reel and the installation of
protective wrappings and lagging etc., shall be carefully co-coordinated to prevent
damage to the cable during normal handling and transportation of the
equipment/materials.
18.5. Each cable end shall be hermetically sealed by means of metal cups using
wiping lead so as to protect the cable from outside moisture during transit, storage
and laying.
18.6. The supplier shall be responsible for any damage to the cables or drums during
transit and until it is taken into stock at Stores, and the same shall be replaced free
of cost.
18.7. Any deviation from the above should be got approved along with the design.
19.0 MARKINGS AND INDICATIONS:
19.1. The cables shall bear the following indications on their over sheath
 The reference to the present specification.

 The name of the manufacturer.
 The conductor cross-section and conductor material.
 The insulation material.
 The rated voltage.
 The year of manufacture.
 The reference to identify the cable-manufacturing batch.
 The purchaser’s identification marks.
19.2. The marks can be either imprinted or embossed on the over sheath and will
be made along two diametrically opposite lines. The interval between the end of one
inscription and the beginning of the next one shall not exceed one meter.
19.3. “Sequential length mark shall be provided along with the above markings”.
19.4. The dimension of alphanumeric types shall be at least 6mm.

20.0 DRAWINGS AND MANUALS:
20.1 Two prints of drawings incorporating the following particulars shall be included
in the tender. (viz) Cross sectional drawing of cable indicating dimensions, cable
Straight Through Joints, Sealing End, Termination Structure, cable reel drum, link
boxes showing bonding and earthing arrangements, special T&Ps and method of
installation.
20.2 The tenderer shall submit the following drawings / characteristics along with
Tender: -
 Cross section of cable furnishing the dimensions (outline).

 Detailed drawing of cable earthing arrangement.
 Detailed drawing of Sealing Ends and installation instruction.
 Assembly drawings and weights of Sealing End.
 Detailed drawings for cable end Terminal Structure with foundation.
 Schematic diagram of the cable system.
 Characteristics of cable (Temperature Vs Current).
 Power factor Vs temperature characteristics of cable.
 Power factor Vs Voltage characteristics of cable.
 Partial Discharge magnitude Vs Voltage characteristics for cable.
 Detailed drawing of cable drum.
 Transport drawings showing main dimensions and weight of each package
arrangement and other protection arrangements required during transit.
 Dimensional detailed drawing and installation instructions for straight Joints.
21.0 QUALITY CONTROL AND QUALITY ASSURANCE:
21.1 The details of quality control adopted in manufacturing 110KV power cables
and accessories including raw materials may be specified.
21.2. For all bought out items, the quality control adopted by sub-vendors may also
be specified.
21.3. The manufacturing facilities for both cable and accessories must have been
certified to qualified system standards ISO 9001 prior to this Bid submission by a
reputed accreditation body.
22.0 TYPE TEST:
22.1. The Bidder shall furnish with his bid Type test reports for cables and
accessories as per relevant IEC, for the materials being offered, from any one of the
following test Laboratories.
 CPRI, BANGALORE, INDIA
 KEMA, HOLLAND
 EDF, FRANCE
 HYDRO QUEBEC, CANADA
 CESI, ITALY
 IPH, GERMANY
 CRIEPI, JAPAN
 STRI, SWEDEN
 ERDA, INDIA
22.2. The type tests should have been conducted not earlier than five years on the
date of bid opening. When valid Type test report for the tendered cable is not
submitted along with the bid, the successful Bidder has to conduct the Type tests on
the tendered cable and submit the Type test report for acceptance before offer of
inspection of the cable. However the delivery schedule shall be kept up.
23.0 SHOP/ROUTINE TESTS:
23.1 The Shop tests shall be carried out in accordance with IEC/ISS/Swedish
Standard wherever it is not specified.
23.2 The following additional special tests shall be conducted on one sample of
each sizes.
i) Gravimetric water absorption test.
ii) Short circuit test on metallic sheath.
23.3. For short circuit test on metallic sheath, injection of the short circuit current is
made through the conductor on one side and return of short circuit current is made
through the metallic sheaths on the same side. The conductor and metallic sheath
are electrically shorted on the other side. The cable sample shall withstand a short
circuit current of 31.5 KA for 3 seconds. The test voltage shall be less than or equal
to 20 KV. The conductor temperature shall be raised to the overload rating of 90 deg
centigrade before applying the short circuit current of 31.5 KA for 3 seconds.
23.3. The VENDOR shall furnish copy of Type test certificates for the cable and
accessories offered, issued by recognized institutions along with the tender. Routine
and other tests shall be carried out on the cable and accessories in the presence of
the purchaser’s representative.
23.4. The Purchaser reserves the right to witness all the tests on cable and
accessories (including bought out items). The Bidder shall provide all facilities to the
Purchaser in this regard and inform the Purchaser sufficiently in advance to enable
the Purchaser to depute his representative to witness the same.
23.5. The Routine, Acceptance and Special tests conducted in the presence of the
Purchaser’s representative shall be got approved before the materials are
despatched.
23.6. The size and number of voids and contaminants in the insulation shall be
calculated for 1 out of 10 cable drums manufactured and shall be furnished:
o 20 helically cut samples of Insulation shall be examined with a mini-

mum 15 power magnification by transmitting light and the nos. and
sizes shall be tabulated for the sizes 5 m and larger.
o The largest size shall be measured with a minimum 40 power magnifi-

cation and shall be recorded in tabulation form and submitted.
23.7. 20 KV DC voltage test between the metallic sheath and the outer sheath for
each and every length of the cable delivered should be conducted and the sheath
leakage at 10 KV, 15 KV and 20 KV are to be furnished and got approved before
despatch of cable drums. The leakage current shall be within limits of 5.0 mA for
500 meters at 20 KV D.C. and 2.0 ma for 500 meters at 10 KV D.C.

23.8.1. The purchaser will witness the acceptance tests as identified in the approved
QA plan.
23.8.2. The acceptance tests carriedout in the manufacturers premises will be
23.8.3. The inspection and acceptance of any equipment shall not relieve the
be defective.
23.8.4. The supplier shall keep the purchaser informed in advance, about the
23.8.5. The purchaser reserves the right to insist for witnessing the acceptance /
23.8.6. No material shall be dispatched from its point of manufacture unless the
by the purchaser.
** ** **
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF CABLE

1. Name of Manufacturer :
2. Country of Manufacture :
3. Type of cable :
4. Applicable Standard :
5. (a) Rated nominal voltage :
(b) Rated Maximum voltage :
6. Whether suitable for:
(a) Earthed System :
(b) Unearthed System :
7. Nominal cross-sectional area of
conductor ( Sq.mm ) :
8. Conductor:
(a) Material :
(b) Shape :
(c) Diameter of conductor ( mm ) :
(d) i. No. of strands(wires) in conductor :
ii. Nominal dia of each inlet wire in
conductor before compacting
(e) Thickness of semi conducting tape :
9. Conductor Screen:
(a) Material :
(b) Thickness ( mm ) :
(c) Maximum volume resistivity (at 25  :
Degree Centigrade) before and after
ageing ( Ohm – cm )
10. Maximum value of electric stresses at
the conductor screen (Calculation to be
shown separately) ( KV/mm):
11. Insulation:
(a) Material/Composition :
(b) Dia of cable over the insulation ( mm ) :
(c) Radial thickness:
i) Minimum Average ( mm ) :
ii) Minimum at Any Point ( mm ) :
(d) Maximum Dielectric Stress (KV/mm ) :
12. Maximum value of dielectric stress at the
insulation ( KV/mm ) :
13. Insulation Screen:
(a) Material :
(b) Nominal Thickness ( mm ) :
©Maximum volume resistivity
( at 25 C ) ( Ohm – cm ) :
(d) Swellable type water blocking semi –
conducting tape:
(a) Material :
(b) Approximate thickness ( mm ) :
(a) Metallic Screen:
(for 1x400 sq.mm Cable)
Material
Nominal diameter
Thickness of copper tape
(b)Metallic Sheath:
(i) Type ( Extruded/Wrapped ) :
(ii) Material :
(iii) Type of lamination/Corrugation :
as applicable.
(iv) Thickness of the sheath (Radial) (mm) :
(v) Diameter of the cable across the
metallic sheath :
16. External overall sheath:
(a) Material & Type :
(b) Nominal thickness ( e ) ( mm )
(c) Spark test voltage at works (6e KV ) :
17. Tolerance on thickness of overall
sheath if any ( mm ) :
(a) Conductive Layer over HDPE sheath :
(b) Thickness of conductive layer :
(c) Whether suitable chemicals added
in outer sheathing compound for
protection against termite. :
19. Approximate external overall dia of
cables ( mm ) :
20. Minimum cable bending radius:
(a) for pulling } :
(b) below terminals }
21. Permissible maximum tension in the
cable ( Kg. ) :
22. Maximum safe continuous operating :
voltage ( KV ) :
23 Rated Current:
(a) In Air (A) :
(b) In Ground (A) :
24. i) Continuous current rating under the
specified installation and operating
conditions. Conductor temperature
90 C and 70 C. Ground
temperature 35 C and depth of laying
1500mm
a) In Ground :
b) In Air :
ii) Maximum permissible current for cable that :
can be overloaded without exceeding
conductor temperature of 100 ° C
25. Maximum permissible conductor
temperature for continuous operation
under the specified and installation
conditions ( C ) :
26. Temperature of conductor at rated current :
(° C)
27. Basic impulse level at conductor
temperature of 90 C (KV) :
28. Impulse wave shape (KV) :
29. Power frequency withstand voltage :
30. Ionization factor at 50 Hz. (Tan Delta) :
31. Maximum potential gradient at conductor
surface ( KV/cm ) :
32. Minimum potential gradient at conductor
surface ( KV/cm ) :
33. Sheath voltage under maximum opera-
ting conditions, assuming all circuits
connected ( KV per KM ) :
34. Withstand voltage of sheath covering
when spark tested :
35. Permissible short circuit current for
interruption:
(a) 0.1 Sec. ( KA ) :
(b) 0.2 Sec. ( KA ) :
(c) 0.5 Sec. ( KA ) :
(d) 1.0 Sec. ( KA ) :
36. Conductor maximum D.C. / A.C.
resistance per 1000Metre lengths:
(a) at 20 C ( Ohm ) :
(b) at 90 C ( Ohm ) :
(c) at 10% Continuous overload ( Ohm ) :
37. Equivalent Star resistance at 50 Hz.

per 1000 Metre length of 3 phase current :
(a) at 20 C ( Ohm ) } :
(b) at 90  C ( Ohm ) } :
(c) at 10% continuous overload (Ohm ) } :
38. Star reactance at 50 Hz. per 1000 Metre :
length (Ohm)
39. Impedance at 50 Hz. per 1000 Metre
length:
(a) at 20 C ( Ohm ) :
(b) at 90 C ( Ohm ) :
(c) at 10% continuous overload ( Ohm ) :
40. Positive and negative sequence reactances
per 1000 Metres length (Ohm)
41. Zero sequence data per 1000 Metre length:
Series resistance (Ohm)
Series reactance (Ohm)
Shunt capacitive reactances (Ohm)
42. Sheath resistance at 20° C per 1000
Metres length ( Ohm ) :
43. Surge impedance of the cable in Ohms. :
44. Self electrostatic capacitance per 1000 :
metres length(micro farads)
45. Dielectric dissipation factor at
rated voltage :
46. I.R. value at ambient temperature
per 1000 metres length (Ohm-cm) :
47. P.F. at conductor temperature of 90  C and at
a. 50% of rated phase to neutral voltage :
b. 100% of rated phase to neutral Voltage:
48. Guaranteed Losses per 1000 Metres length :
(Detailed working sheet should be furnished)
a. Dielectric losses per phase at rated
voltage and rated current (KW) :
b. Copper losses per phase at rated
voltages and rated current (KW) :
c. Other losses (sheath/screen losses/
Phase at rated voltage and current (KW):
d. Losses due to reinforcement, if any
(KW) :
e. Total losses at rated continuous
current (KW)
49. Short circuit capacity of conductor for one
second assuming conductor temperature
of 90  C prior to short circuit and 250  C
during short circuit :
50. Short circuit capacity of metallic sheath
for one second at screen
temperature of 75  C prior to short circuit
and 250  C during short circuit :
51. Maximum tan delta at 64 KV maximum
increment of between 32KV and 128KV
(0.5 Uo to 2 Uo). :
52. A.C. Test voltage for 15 minutes :
(Routine test)
53. A.C. Test voltage for 4 hours (Type test) :
54. Partial discharge at 2 Uo :
1.50 Uo :
(Where Uo = 64KV)
55. Impulse test voltage :
56. Approximate drum dimension
(dia & width)
57. Maximum length of cable in a drum (Metres) :
58. Minimum length of cable in a drum :

(Metres)
59 Approximate gross weight of cable in a :
drum (MT)
60 Maximum charging current of conductor :
per KM of cable at Nominal voltage (Amps)
61. Derating factors for
a. Ground temperature of 20  C, 25  C :
30  C, 35  C, & 40  C
b. Depth of burial 0.75m., 1.0m., 1.25m., and 1.5 m
c. Short circuit (current) capacity with conductor :
Temperature of 90 ° C for duration of 0.5 Secs.
1.0 Secs and 2.0 Secs.
62 Continuous current rating of cable for
double circuit under the specified
installation and operation conditions
and conductor temperature 90  C and
ground temperature 35  C. :
a) When both circuits alive
b) When only one circuit is alive :
and other is dead
63. Screening factor of the cable for
calculating interference on control and
communication cables :
******
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR ACCESSORIES
SEALING END STRAIGHT

THROUGH
JOINT
1. Manufacturer’s Name :
2. Type & Description of material used :
3. Size (mm and shape) :
4. Rated voltage :
5. Rated continuous current (Amps) :
6. Maximum conductor size (Sq.mm) :
7. Rated impulse withstand voltage :
8. Impulse wave shape in :
9. Power Frequency withstand voltage :
(a) Dry (KV rms.) :
(b) Wet (KV rms.) :
10. Flashover voltage:
(a) Dry ( KV rms ) :
(b) Wet ( KV rms ) :
11. Mounting details of
(a) Sealing end / Switchyard :
(b) Link Box(Single phase & 3 phase) :
12. Details of terminal connector :
COMPANY’S SEAL SIGNATURE

DESIGNATION
COMPANY
DATE
SECTION - 20
230KV & 110KV SF6 GAS INSULATED METAL CLAD

TERMINATION
SPECIFICATION FOR SF6 GAS INSULATED METAL CLAD TERMINATION

FOR XLPE CABLES:
1.0. GENERAL:
1.1. The following specification applies to single core XLPE insulated cable
terminations connected to outdoor SF 6 gas insulated metal-clad substations (G.I.S.)
for rated voltage of 245 KV & 132KV, where the HV power cables are terminated
directly in the outdoor GIS metal clad switchgear using cable-sealing ends designed
for use in SF6 gas and shall comply with IEC 62271-209 & IEEE 1300.
1.2. The arrangements and dimensions of the XLPE Cable termination for outdoor
Gas Insulated Metal enclose Switchgear will be in accordance with IEC 62271- 305
(i.e) Dry type A-inner cone type. The position, its entrance below or above, and the
inclination angle in relation to the horizontal plane, will be specified by the
switchgear manufacturer.
1.3. The SF6 gas insulated metal clad termination for XLPE cable shall confirm to the
following specification. They are meant for use with the following cables:
230kv,1x1200 sq.mm, XLPE insulated, Aluminium cable
110KV, 1Cx1000sq.mm, XLPE insulated, Aluminium cable
110KV, 1Cx630sq.mm, XLPE insulated, Aluminium cable
The outer diameter and other details of the cables will be supplied by
TANTRANSCO. The outdoor GIS feeder breaker shall have facility to test the
connected power cable at site. Removable bolted links or similar arrangement will be
accepted.
1.4. A free space is reserved under the cable end for the exclusive use of the cable
supplier. This space is necessary for the passage of the cable termination on
connection and can be used for the placing of the cable gland and the device which
ensures insulation between the metallic sheath of the cable and the GIS enclosure.
2.0. SF6 GAS INSULATED METAL CLAD TERMINATION:
The cable termination is made generally up of the following elements
2.1. The enclosure is filled with SF 6 in which the cable termination has to be placed.
This enclosure is closed by an insulating partitions on the “high voltage” side and by
the flange and the cable gland on the “earth” side.
2.2. The connecting system allowing the electrical joining between the core of the
cable and GIS should withstand the total dynamic forces generated during short
circuit conditions and the axial forces due to temperature variations during service.
2.3. The mechanical connecting system shall be available between the cable gland
and the GIS cable connection enclosure.
2.4. The flange shall provide completely even surfaces. Sealing joints are fixed in the
flange of the metal enclosure and in the cable gland.
2.5. The following are part of the supply:
 the cable termination including the pre-moulded stress cone and the
connector
 the cable gland with insulating arrangement from earth (insulating flange
etc.) including stainless steel bolts.
 the sealing of the conductor to prevent the SF6 from penetrating inside the
conductor.
 the sealing at the cable gland for SF6 tightness.
2.6. The insulating arrangement of the gland shall be designed to withstand the
following:
Lightning impulse 35 kV (Peak value)
Power frequency 8 kV (r.m.s. value) for 15 min.
2.7. TESTS:
 For impulse withstand test, the wave shall have a virtual front time be-
tween 1 and 5 microseconds and a nominal time to half the peak value be-
tween 40 microseconds and 60 microseconds.
 The arrangement shall withstand 10 impulses in positive polarity followed
by 10 impulses in negative polarity.
 During a series of 10 impulses a maximum of one or two flashovers can oc-
cur in the air, for which 5 additional impulses are applied.
 No breakdown of the insulating arrangement shall occur; the number of
flashover shall not be more than two.
3.0. CCPU:
3.1. To protect the cable gland insulation, against over voltages, three voltage
limiters (12 KV CCPU) shall be provided and connected between the metallic sheath
of the cable and the GIS cable enclosure.
3.2. To be effective, the connections shall be as short as possible, of the same

length and regularly distributed at 120° on the same circumference; the connections
of the CCPU shall be bolted (diameter : 14 mm).
3.3. Routine tests which are conducted in the factory for testing the insulating
arrangement of the gland shall be indicated by the vendor.
3.4. Characteristics of the Surge limiters (CCPU) shall be submitted to Purchaser for
approval.
4.0. SHEATH BONDING CONNECTION:
4.1. Each sealing end shall be provided with two terminals, diametrically opposite
each, suitable for bolting (14mm diameter) the sheath bonding cables.
4.2. All sheath bonding and insulated connections to the link boxes shall be designed
for the fault current conditions.
4.3. The sheath bonding Cable shall be as detailed below:

4.3.1. 6.35/11KV (Unearthed) Single Core, 400Sq.mm HDPE cable consisting of
compact, circular, Flexible Plain annealed copper conductor, HDPE insulated, and
black PVC Outer sheath. The outer sheath should be provided with extruded
conductive layer on the outer surface.
4.3.2. Insulation shall be extruded by single head extrusion process, with absence of
voids, contaminants and moisture content.
4.3.3. The conductor shall be of Flexible plain annealed copper wires conforming
IEC60228 (class-6). The shape of conductor shall be compact circular.
4.4. SHEATH SECTIONALISING/INSULATED JOINTS:

4.4.1. For sheath sectionalizing kits, the connection shall be coaxial type; the length
of this connection shall not exceed 10 metre.
4.4.2. All kits shall be supplied complete according to the vendor’s practice. sheath
bonding connection (tinned copper braid etc.)
4.4.3. Sheath sectionalizing joints shall be designed to withstand the following:

Lightning impulse 100 kV (Peak value)
Power frequency 12 kV (r.m.s.) for 15 min.
4.5. The cable gland can be linked either to the cable sheath and insulated from the
GIS enclosure or linked to the GIS enclosure and insulated from the sheath of the
cable
5.0. LINK BOXES
5.1. LINK BOXES FOR SHEATH EARTHING
The sheath connections shall be of bolted type the connecting bar and
tight box.
Detailed description and drawing shall be provided by the Vendor.

5.2. LINK BOXES FOR SHEATH SECTIONALISING
The sheath connections shall be of bolted type the connecting bar and
tight box.
Detailed description and drawing shall be provided by the Vendor.

6.0. EARTHING SYSTEM
Bare copper wires, electrodes and connection for the joint chamber earthing
systems, wherever necessary shall be in the scope of supply, the installation will be
done by Vendor as per the instructions of the TANTRANSCO.
7.0. LIMIT OF SUPPLIES AND SERVICES
7.1. THE CABLE MANUFACTURER
The cable manufacturer supplies the following elements:
 The cable connector.
 The terminal end.
 The sealing joints ensuring the sealing of the core, and those between ca-
ble gland and flange of the GIS enclosure.
 The fixing device.
 The earthing system of the cable sheath.
 Non-linear resistors(CCPU)
 The required insulating ring, bolts, nuts, washers and insulating shield
necessary for fixing the cable gland of the cable termination shall also be
supplied. On testing, this assembly can be put through the same electrical
tests on the inner sheath of the cable.
7.2. GIS MANUFACTURER

The GIS manufacturer supplies the following elements:
 The metal enclosure and flange.
 The pressure monitoring device
 The electrical contacts ensuring the continuity of the electrical circuit be-
tween the terminal end of the cable and the conductor of the metal- clad
substation.
 The mechanical blocking device of the terminal end. This shall be designed
so as to withstand a strain, three times that of the maximum strain guaran-
teed by the cable supplier.
 The parts ensuring the sealing of the different compartments between
themselves and with the insulating flange up to the end of the enclosure
 The grooves and joints are necessary to ensure sealing between the cable
gland and the flange. As this sealing is the responsibility of the cable sup-
plier, the dimensions of the grooves and joints, the surface condition of
the grooves and the quality of the joints shall be furnished. The filling with
SF6 gas is ensured by the manufacturer of the GIS.
8.0. TEST REQUIREMENTS:
8.1. Mechanical physical and electrical tests which are performed before shipment are classified in three
categories:
Type Tests : Tests carried out on same type of accessories

of same Voltage grade and same design.
Routine Tests : Tests carried out systematically on each

accessories.
Special Tests : Tests carried out on samples of accessories

taken from the supply after having completed
the Routine tests.
8.2. The Special and Routine Tests shall be conducted in the presence of a
Purchaser’s representative and got approved before the materials are dispatched.
8.3. The cost of the Routine and Special Tests shall be included in the cost of the
materials.
8.4. TEST CLASSIFICATION:
8.4.1. Type Tests
The Manufacturer must submit Type test reports as per IEC 62067/2001 for
cable accessories obtained or certified from an independent test laboratory. The
Tests should have been conducted within 10 years prior to the date of bid opening.
However, the successful Bidder has to conduct the special test.
Laboratories at which Type tests are to be carried out or certified as below.
1. CPRI, BANGALORE, INDIA

2. KEMA, HOLLAND
3. EDF, FRANCE
4. HYDRO QUEBEC, CANADA
5. CESI, ITALY
6. IPH, GERMANY
7. CRIEPI, JAPAN
8. STRI, SWEDEN
9. ERDA, INDIA
8.4.2. ROUTINE TESTS

The Routine tests shall be conducted as per IEC 62067/2001 for all
accessories.
These tests shall be performed on random samples selected by Purchaser at

the Vendor’s works in the presence of a Purchaser’s representative.
Any accessories which does not meet all the requirements of the Routine
tests shall be rejected.
8.4.3. SPECIAL TESTS & ACCEPTANCE TESTS
The following Tests shall be conducted as Special tests along with the Routine
tests for selected accessories during inspection of cables by Purchaser’s Engineers.
1. Partial discharge tests
2. Tan delta measurement as a function of temperature and voltage
3. A.C. test on insulation as per clause 6.2.3 of the specification.
9.0. ERECTION OF ACCESSORIES:
9.1. All jointing and termination works shall be carried out by the bidder with their own
best supervision in the presence of Purchaser. For jointing and terminations, one
qualified Engineer and required trained EHV jointers with supporting staff should be
deputed. The Engineer and EHV jointers shall possess valid certificate from the
manufacturer of the Accessories, for erection. Dust and humidity free enclosures,
complete with air conditioners and material handling equipment shall be used by the
Vendor.
9.2. All special tools including a set of Jointer’s hand-tools, which are necessary to
complete the joint / termination works shall be arranged by the Vendor.
9.3. The cost of consumables which are essential for satisfactory erection and
commissioning shall be included. No extra cost will be paid towards the cost of
consumables. Adequate quantity of consumables shall be supplied for completing the
entire termination works.
9.4. PREPARATORY WORKS FOR TERMINATION

Erection of termination structure
Removal of cable from the trench, re-routing, cleaning, straightening and
trimming, if necessary, checking the exposed cable before cutting the cable, for
any accidental damages due to re-excavation.
Providing of scaffolding pipes, clamps, wooden planks and tools for erection of
termination
Erection of scaffolding pipe/providing crane for lifting the 230kV Cable end
termination
Lifting the cable up the terminal structure and positioning
Transporting the termination kit from Contractor’s Stores (including link boxes)
Dismantling scaffolding work
Transporting the above item back
9.5. The erection of joints and terminations has to be supervised by a competent Engi-
neer of the bidder in the presence TANTRANSCO Engineer. The cost of power and all
the consumables for the jointing works will be borne by the bidder.
9.6. Erection and supervision of required sheath bonding cable, wires, earth electrodes
and bare copper for sheath bonding has to be done at cross bonding locations. Earth-
ing of termination structures and forming earth mat with existing earthing arrangement
including materials for earthing arrangements and all civil works are to be executed by
the Contractor.
SCHEDULE OF GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS

The following information shall be given by the Tenderer in
addition to any other relevant data.
A. Sealing End.
2. Type & Description of material used
3. Size ( mm and shape )

4. Rated voltage
5. Rate continuous current (Amp. )
6. Maximum conductor size ( Sq.mm )
7. Rated impulse withstand voltage
8. Impulse wave shape
9. Power Frequency withstand voltage

Dry ( kV rms. )
Wet ( kV rms. )
10. Flashover voltage
a. Dry ( kV rms. )
b. Wet ( kV rms. )
11. Impulse ( kV peak )
12. Mounting details of

40.0.Sealing end/Switchyard
41.0.Link Box
13. Details of terminal connector
14. Other details
B. CCPU
2. Type and Material
3. Size and Shape

4. Rated Voltage
5. Details of characteristics
6. Nominal discharge current
7. Power frequency withstand voltage
8. Power frequency sparkover voltage
9. Reseal Voltage
10. Pressure Relief class
11. Impulse High Current Short duration

discharge amp. (8/20 micro second wave)
12. Creepage distance
C. Link Box Details
1. Details of link boxes
2. Voltage rating
NOTE: * TO BE FURNISHED FOR EACH CATEGORY SEPARATELY

SECTION - 21
LT POWER & CONTROL CABLES

1) ARMOURED COPPER CONTROL CABLES
The cable supplied shall be as per IS - 1554/PART I /1988 with amendments
upto date
Sl No Description Details
1 Voltage 1100v
2 Purpose use in substation for supplying Power to

equipments (AC 230 V/ DC 220 V) to be laid
directly under earth / in cable ducts
3 Conductor sizes and As per schedule of materials

no. of cores
4 Conductor material Plain annealed, high conductivity copper

complying with IS - 8130/1984 with amendments
up to date
5 Formation of Multi stranded circular shaped conductor as per

conductor the relevant ISS. Minimum 7 strands irrelevant to
area of crossection.
6 No. of wires in each As per IS 8130/1984 with amendments upto

Conductor date as per the Schedule of materials.
7 Resistance of As per IS 8130/1984 with amendments upto date.

conductor at 20
Degree C
8 Materials and PVC Compound of Type - C as per IS - 5831 /

Thickness of core 1984 shall be extruded over conductor Recycled
insulation granules should not be used for insulation
Thickness should be as per IS-1554/part 1 / 1988
with amendments upto date.
9 Flexibility of Class 2 of IS 8130 / 1984 with amendments

Conductor upto date
10 Colour identification To conform to colour scheme as per IS -

of cores 1554/Part I/1988 with amendments up to date.
11 Laying of cores The outer most layer of cores shall be laid up

together with right hand lay & the successive
layers shall be laid with opposite lay as per IS-
1554 part I / 1988 with amendments upto date &
shall be provided with non hygroscopic material
wherever necessary.
12 Materials and The laid up cores shall be inner Sheathed with

thickness of sheath. extruded PVC compound of type ST2 as per IS
- 5831/1984 with its amendments upto date.
The inner sheath shall fit closely on the laid up

core & it should be possible to remove it without
damage to insulation on individual cores.
Recycled granules should not be used for

sheathing.The thickness of inner sheath shall
conform to IS -1554 / PartI/1988 with
amendments upto date.
13 Armouring The armouring shall be provided over the inner

sheath in left hand lay, as closely as practicable
with galvanised steel wires / strips conforming
to IS - 3975 / 1988 (II revision).The dimensions
of the armouring shall conform to IS - 1554 / Part
I / 1988 with amendments upto date.
14 Outer Sheath The armour shall be outer sheathed with

extruded black PVC compound of type ST2 as
per IS - 1554 / Part I / 1988 with amendments
upto date.
Recycled PVC granules should not be used for

Sheathing .The thickness of outer sheath shall
conform to IS 1554/ PartI/1988 with amendments
upto date.
NOTE:
Both inner and outer sheathing should be done by two separate processes
only. Dual extrusion should not be done.
15.0 EMBOSSMENT
1) "HR 85" Embossment shall be done as per IS 1554/Part I/1988
2) "T.N.E.B" Embossing shall be done for each meter throughout the length of cable.
16.0 CABLE LENGTHS:
The cable to be supplied should be in standard lengths of 500 meters with a

tolerance of +/ - 5% in non returnable wooden drums. The last drum to be supplied
for completion of the quantity ordered with allowed tolerance shall contain bit length
of not less than 50% of the standard length specified. A total tolerance of +/- 5% of
quantity ordered will be allowed to be supplied.
17.0 CABLING MATERIAL

17.1 CABLE TAGS AND MARKERS
17.1.1 Each cable and conduit run shall be tagged with numbers that appear in The
cable and conduit schedule.
17.1.2 The tag shall be of aluminium with the number punched on it and securely
attached to the cable conduit by not than two turns of 20 SWG GI wire
conforming to IS:280. cable tags shall be of rectangular shape for power
cables and of circular shape for control cables.
17.1.3 Location of cables laid directly underground shall be clearly indicated with
cable marker made of galvanized iron plate.
17.1.4 Location of underground cable joints shall be indicated with able marker with
an additional inscription cable joints.
17.1.5 The market shall project 150 mm above ground and shall be spaced at an
interval of 30 meters and at every change in direction. They shall be located
on both sides of road and drain crossings.
17.1.6 Cable tags shall be provided on all cables at each end (just before entering
the equipment enclosure), on both sides of a wall or floor crossing, on each
duct/conduit entry and at each end & turning point in cable tray/trench runs.
Cable tags shall be provided inside the switchgear, motor control centers,
control and relay panels etc. wherever required for cable identification,
where a number of cable enter together through a gland plate.
17.2.0 CABLE SUPPORTS AND CABLE TRAY MOUNTING ARRANGEMENT

17.2.1 The Contractor shall provide embedded steel inserts on concrete floors/walls
to secure supports by welding to these inserts or available building steel
structures.
17.2.2 The supports shall be fabricated from standard structural steel members.
17.2.3 Insert plates will be provided at an interval of 750 mm wherever cables are to
be supported without the use of cable trays, such as in trenches. While at all
other places these will be at an interval of 2000mm
17.3.0 CABLE TERMINATION AND CONNECTION
17.3.1 The termination and connection of cables shall be done strictly accordance
with cable and termination kit manufacturer’s instruction drawing and /or as
directed by the Owner.
17.3.2 The work shall include all clamping, fitting, fixing, plumbing, sold Drilling,
cutting, taping, heat shrinking (where applicable), connecting to cable
terminal, shorting and grounding as required to complete the job.
17.3.3 Supply of all consumable material shall be in the scope of Contractor.
17.3.4 The equipment will be generally provided with undrilled gland plates for
cables/conduit entry. The contractor shall be responsible for drilling of gland
plates, painting and touching up. Holes shall not be made by gas cutting.
17.3.5 Control cable cores entering control panel/ switchgear /MCCB /MCC /
miscellaneous panels shall be bunches, clamped and ties with nylon strap or
PVC perforated strap to keep them in position.
17.3.6 The contractor shall tag/ferrule control cores at all terminations, as instructed
by the owner. In panels where a large number of cables are to be terminated
and cable identification may be difficult, each core ferrule may include the
complete cable number as well.
17.3.7 Spare cores shall be similarly tagged with cable numbers and coiled up.
17.3.8 All cable entry points shall be sealed and made vermin and dust proof.
Unused openings shall be effectively closed.
17.3.9 Double compression type nickel plated (coating thickness not less than 10
microns) brass cable glands shall be provided by the contractor for all power
and control cables to provide dust and weather proof terminations.
17.3.10 The Cable glands shall conform to BIS 6121. they shall comprise of heavy
duty brass casting, machine finished and nickel plated, to avoid corrosion and
oxidation, rubber components used in cable glands shall be neoprene and of
tasted quality. Cable glands shall be of approved make.
17.3.11 The cable glands shall also be suitable for dust proof and weather proof
termination. The test procedure, if required, has to be discussed and agreed
to between owner and cable gland manufacturer
17.3.12 If the cable end box or terminal enclosure provided on the equipment is
found unsuitable and requires modification, the same shall be carried out by
the contractor, as directed by the owner.
17.3.13 Crimping tool used shall be of approved design and make.
17.3.14 Cable lugs shall be tinned copper solderless crimping type conforming to
IS 8309 & 8394. Bimetallic lugs shall be used depending upon type of cables
used.
17.3.15 Solderless crimping of terminals, shall be done by using corrosion
inhibitory compound. The cable lugs shall suit the type of terminals provided.
17.4 STORAGE AND HANDLING OF CABLE DRUMS
17.4.1 Cable drums shall be unloaded handled and stored in an approved manner
and rolling of drums shall be avoided as far as possible. For short distance,
the drums may be rolled provided they are rolled slowly and in proper
direction as marked on the drum.
2) ARMOURED ALUMINIUM LT POWER CABLES
TECHNICAL
1100V , 4x120 SQ.MM LT UG CABLE.
1. Requirements 1100V rated 4 x 120 sq.mm LT UG cable, comprising of

Multi-stranded shaped compacted Aluminium
Conductor of grade H2/H4, XLPE insulated,cores laid
up, inner sheath of extruded PVC of type ST2,
galvanized steel strips armoured and PVC of type ST2
sheathed overall, conforming to IS.7098/Part-1/1988
with its amendments upto date and with ISI marking.
2. Voltage 1100 Volts
3. Purpose For use in L.T. distribution network, cable to be laid in
trench/ directly underground.
4. Conductor size 4 x 120 sq.mm.

5. Conductor Aluminium of H2/H4 grade complying with ISS
materials 8130/1984, with latest amendments, if any
6. Formation of Multistranded shaped compacted conductor
conductor
7. No. of wires in 4x120 sq.mm
conductor For the main core - 37
For the neutral core - 37
4x240 sq.mm
Main core ... 61
Neutral core ... 61
8. Resistance of Maximum resistance at 20 degree Celsius shall be
the conductor 0.253 ohm/Km for main and neutral conductors for
4x120 sq,mm and 0.123 for 4x240 sq.mm.
9. XLPE insulation (1) The insulation shall be extruded over conductor
with cross linked polyethylene (XLPE) conforming to
section VI of table of IS 7098/Part I/1988 with its
latest amendments upto date (i.e) the insulation
should be suitable for normal operation at 90 degree
Celsius and withstand 250 degree Celsius during short
circuit. The insulation shall be applied that it fits closely
on the conductor.
(2) The curing of XLPE insulation shall be processed
with steam curing or Nitrogen gas curing so that the
insulation is cured homogenously.
10. Thickness of Minimum thickness of 1.2 mm for phase and neutral
insulation conductors for 4x120 sq.mm and 1.7 mm for 4x240
sq.mm.
11. Colour To conform to colour schemes as per ISS 7098/Part
identification of I/1988 with its latest amendments upto date. Red,
cores Yellow, Blue for main core and Neutral conductor shall
be black.
12. Laying up of The cores shall be laid up together with right hand lay
core complying with IS 7098/Part I/1988 with amendments
upto date. The interstices shall be filled with non-
hygroscopic material, wherever necessary.
13. Inner sheath The laid up cores shall be provided with inner sheath
of PVC applied by extrusion . The PVC sheathing shall
be extruded from FRESH PVC granules. Recycled PVC
granules should not be used. Polyester Transparent
tape overlap over XLPE is preferable.The sheathing
shall conform to Type ST2, PVC Compound of IS
5831/1984 ie. for 90 degree Celsius operation. It shall
be ensured that it is as circular as possible. The inner
sheath shall fit closely on the laid up cores and it
should be possible to remove it without damage to
insulation of individual cores. The thickness of inner
sheath shall conform clause 12.3 table IV of IS
7098/Part I/1988 with its latest amendments.
14. Armouring Galvanised Steel strip armour conforming to
IS3975/1979 with its latest amendments. The
armouring shall be applied over the inner sheath
(common covering) as closely as practicable and
should cover fully. The number of armour strips so
applied shall
remain the same throughout (i.e.) in the inner end of
the cable/along the length of the cable and the outer
end of the cable. The direction of lay of the armour
shall be left handed.The dimension of the armouring
shall be 4x0.8 mm conforming to table 6 of
IS.7098/Part-I/1988 with its latest amendments.
15. Outer sheath The colour of the outer sheath shall be black. It shall
be applied over the armouring. The thickness shall
conform to clause 14.3 table 8 of IS 7098/Part I/1988
with its latest amendments. PVC sheathing shall
conform to Type ST 2, PVC compound of IS.5831/1984
with its latest amendments for 90 degree Celsius
operation & shall be extruded from fresh PVC granules.
Recycled PVC granules should not be used.
16. Cable length i) Cable shall be supplied in drum with continous drum
lengths of 500 metres with a tolerance of +/- 3%.
ii) A Quantity of cable, not exceeding 5% of the
quantity ordered will be allowed to be supplied in non-
standard lengths, but none of which shall be less than
250 metres.
iii) A tolerance of +/- 2% of the total ordered will be
allowed to be supplied more or less than the quantity
ordered.
17. Manufacturer’s The manufacturers identification shall be provided
identification throughout the length of the cable by embossing the
following on the outer sheath at intervals of two
metres approximately.
i)Trade Mark/ Manufacturer's name/IS
marking .
ii) Year of manufacture.
iii) Type of cable viz. A2XFY.
iv) Voltage Grade as per relevant ISS.
v) Size of the cable (viz) 4 x120 sq.mm
vi)Letters "T.N.E.B.", ELECTRIC CABLES",
vii) The Length of the cable shall be
indicated sequentially along with the
length of the cable in each drum.
18. Packing The cables shall be securely packed in non-returnable,
well-seasoned wooden drum so as to withstand rough
handling during transport by RAIL, ROAD, etc. and
subsequent storage. Following information shall be
marked on the drum.
a) Reference to the Indian Standard ie.
ref. IS 7098/Part-I/1988 with its latest
amendments.
b) Manufacturer's name, brand name or
trade mark
c) Type of Cable and Voltage grade
d) Number of cores.
e) Nominal cross sectional area of the
conductor.
f) Cable Code
g) Length of the cable in the drum
h) No. of lengths in the drum (if more than 1)
i) Direction of rotation of drum (by means
of an arrow)
j) Approximate gross weight
k) Country of manufacture
l) Year of manufacture
m)The drum or label may also be marked
with ISI Certification Mark.
19. Test Certificate Type tests, routine tests, acceptance test and optional
tests as per IS 7098/Part-I/ 1988 with its latest
amendments shall be conducted and test results shall
be furnished for approval.
SECTION: 22
230KV & 110KV SURGE ARRESTERS
1.0 GENERAL:
1.1. The surge arrester shall conform to IEC: 60099- 4 except to the extent
modified in the specification.
1.2. Arresters shall be of hermetically sealed units, self supporting construction,
suitable for mounting on tubular / Lattice support structures to be supplied by the
contractor.
1.3 The surge Arrestors shall be designed for use in the geographic and
metrological conditions.
2.0 DUTY REQUIREMENTS:
a)The surge arrestors shall be of heavy duty station class and gapless type
without any series or shunt gaps.
b) The surge arresters shall be capable of discharging over voltages occurring
during switching of unloaded transformers, reactors and long lines.
c) 230/110 KV class arrestor shall be capable for discharging energy
equivalent to class 3 of IEC for 230/110 KV system on two successive
operations
a) The surge arresters shall be suitable for withstanding short circuit forces.
e) The reference current of the arresters shall be high enough to eliminate the
influence of grading and stray capacitance on the measured reference
voltage.
f) The surge arresters are being provided to protect the following equipment
whose insulation levels are indicated in the table given below:
Equipment to be protected Lightning impulse Lightning impulse

(kVp) for 230 kV (kVp) for 145 kV
system system
Power transformer ±950 ±550
Instrument Transformer ±1050 ±650
Reactor - -
288
CB/Isolator Phase to ground ±1050 ±650
Across open contacts ±1200 ±750
a) The duty cycle of CB installed in 420/230/110KV System of the

purchaser shall be O-0.3 sec min-CO – 3 min -CO. The surge Arrester shall
be suitable for such circuit breaker duties in the system.
3.0 CONSTRUCTIONAL FEATURES:
The features and constructional details of surge arresters shall be in
accordance with requirement stipulated hereunder:
a) The surge arresters shall be of station type, discharge class 3, heavy duty
outdoor self supporting, construction for suitable for mounting tubular
support structures single pole assembly, gapless, Zinc oxide type surge
arrestors for 230/110 KV solidly grounded neutral system. Each equipment
shall be supplied with grading ring, insulating base, pressure relieving
arrangements at both ends of each stack, surge monitor, copper strip/ flat of
suitable size from insulating base to monitor, earth clamp and line top
terminal plate with stainless steel bolts and nuts. The suitable base channels
and mounting tubular lattice support structure for the arrestors to be
supplied.
b) All metallic parts shall be hot dip galvanized. The color of porcelain insulators
shall be glazed brown.
c) The surge monitor shall consist of a milli-ammeter with operating alarm and
danger zones for measuring the leakage current and a five digit surge counter
to register the number of surges. The housing of the surge arrestor shall
conform to IP 67.
d) The non-linear blocks shall be of sintered metal oxide material.
e) These shall be provided in such a way as to obtain robust construction,
with excellent mechanical and electrical properties even after
repeated operations.
f) The surge arresters shall be fitted with pressure relief devices
suitable for preventing shattering of porcelain housing and providing path for
289
flow of rated fault currents in the event of arrester failure. Details shall be
furnished in the bids along with quality checks.
g) The arresters shall not fail due to arrester porcelain contamination.
h) Seals shall be provided in such a way that these are always
effectively maintained even when discharging rated lightning current.
i) Outer insulator shall be porcelain conforming to requirements.
Terminal connectors shall conform to requirements stipulated in the
specification.
j) Porcelain housing shall be so co-ordinate that external flashover will not
occur due to application of any impulse or switching surge voltage up
to the maximum design value for arrester.
k) The end fittings shall be made of corrosion proof material and preferably be
nonmagnetic.
l) The name plate shall conform to the requirement of IEC incorporating the
year of manufacture.
m) The heat treatment cycle details along with necessary quality checks used for
individual blocks along with insulation layer formed across each block are to
be furnished. Metalizing coating thickness for reduced resistance between
adjacent discs is to be furnished with additional information schedule of bid
proposal sheets along with procedure for checking the same. Details of
thermal stability test for uniform distribution of current on individual disc is to
be furnished.
n) The manufacturer will submit data for rejection rate of ZnO blocks during
manufacturing/operation for the past three years.
o) The supplier of surge arrester must be a manufacturer of Zinc/ Metal oxide
blocks to have control over quality and avoid spurious blocks. The type test
on surge arresters is valid only if supplied surge arresters use same make of
blocks on which type test is done. If blocks utilized differentially than used in
type tested surge arresters then type test is not valid. The details of blocks in
GTP should match what is used in Type testing.
290
p) The sealing arrangement of the surge arrester steaks shall be done
incorporating grooved flanges with the O-rings/elliptical cross section
gaskets of Neoprene or Butyl rubber.
4.0 FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES:
a) 230/110 KV Arresters shall be complete with insulating base having
provision for bolting to flat surface of structure.
b) Self contained discharge counters, suitably enclosed for outdoor use and
requiring no auxiliary or battery supply for operation shall be provided for
each single pole unit along with necessary connection. Suitable leakage
current meters should also be supplied within the same enclosure. The
reading of milli-ammeter and counters shall be visible through an
inspection glass panel. The terminals shall be robust and of adequate size
and shall be so located that incoming and outgoing connections are made
with minimum possible bends. The design of the surge monitor shall be
such that it is possible to tilt the surge monitor downwards by an angle up
to 45 deg from horizontal plane.
c) Surge monitor consisting of discharge counters and milliammeters should
be suitable to be mounted on support structure of the arrester and should
be tested for IP67 degree of protection. The standard supporting structure
for surge arrester should be provided with a mounting pad, for fixing the
surge monitor. The surge monitor should be suitable for mounting on this
standard mounting pad. Also all nuts, bolts, washers etc., required for
fixing the surge monitor shall have to be supplied by the contractor.
d) Grading/ Corona ring shall be provided on each complete arrestor units as
required. The contractor shall supply suitable terminal connectors. The
arrangement for surge monitor enclosure fixing to the structure shall be at
its rear/bottom. Connection between the surge arrester base and surge
monitor shall be through a 2.0 m long insulated stranded cable. The cable
shall be terminated at rear/bottom side of the surge monitor. The gaskets
of the surge monitors shall be of Neoprene, Butyl or equivalent material.
291
5.0 TESTS:
5.1 The surge arresters should been type tested as per IEC/IS and shall be
subjected to routine and acceptance tests in accordance with IEC document. In the
switching surge operating duty test, the samples shall be pre-heated to 70 degree C,
(instead of 60°C as given in IEC) prior to application of long duration surges for
contamination test procedures obtained in ANSI: 062-11-1987 may be followed until
IEC beings out alternate procedure for the same.
The test reports of the type test and the following additional type tests shall
be furnished.
i) Radio interference voltage test.
ii) Seismic withstand test.
iii) Contamination test.
iv) Temporary over voltage withstands test procedure to be mutually
agreed. Each metal oxide block surge arrester shall be tested for the
guaranteed specific energy capability in addition to the
routine/acceptance test as per IEC: 60099-4.
5.2 (a) Acceptance Tests:
1. Measurement of power frequency reference voltage of the arrester
units.
2. Lightning Impulse Residual voltage on arrester units.
3. Internal Ionization or partial Discharge test.
(b) Special Acceptance Test:
1. Thermal stability test on three sections.
2. Aging & emerging Capability test on block (procedure to be
mutually agreed).
3. Wattloss tests.
(c) Routine Tests:
1. Sealing test
2. Water dip test at 1.5 m depth from top of surge arrestor for 30
minutes shall be performed during assembly of surge arrester stacks
(followed by other routine tests, i/e/ P.D Measurement, Reference
Voltage, Residual Voltage & IR measurement).
292
3. Measurement of reference Voltage.
4. Residual voltage test of arrester unit.
5. Internal Ionization test or partial discharge test.
6. Vertically check on completely assembled surge arrester as a
sample test on each lot.
7. Pressure relief test
(d) Test on surge Monitors:
The surge monitors shall also be connected in series with the
test specimens during residual voltage and current impulse with stand
tests to verify efficacy of the same. Additional routine/functional tests
with one 100A and 10 kA current impulse, (8/20 micro sec.) shall also
be performed on the surge monitor.
Surge monitors shall be routinely tested for water dip test at 1.5
m for 30 minutes. No water vapors shall be visible on the monitor
glass.
(e) Test on Insulators:
All routine tests shall be conducted on the hollow column insulators as
per IEC – 233.The following additional tests shall be carried out on
230/110KV insulators:
i) Ultrasonic test as a routine test.
ii) Pressure test as a routine test.
iii) Bending load test in 4 directions at 50% specified bending
load as a routine test.
iv) Bending load test in 4 directions at 100% specified bending load
as a sample test on each lot.
v) Burst Pressure test as a sample test on each lot.
6.0 TECHNICAL PARAMETERS:
A. 230KV CLASS LIGHTNING ARRESTERS:

Sl.N DESCRIPTION
o
1 Rated arrester voltage 216 KV
2 Nominal Discharge current 10KA of 8/20 microsecond
293
wave
3 Minimum discharge capability 5Kj/kV(referred to rated
arrester voltage corresponding
to minimum discharge
characteristics.
4 Continuous operating voltage at 168 kV rms.
50°C
5 Max. Switching surge residual 500 kVp
Voltage (1kA
6 Max. residual voltage at 560 kVp
i) 5kA
ii) 10 kA nominal discharge 600 kVp
current
7 Max steep current impulse 650 kVp
residual voltage at 10 kA
8 Long duration discharge class 3
9 High current short duration test 100 kVp
Value (4/10 micro second wave
10 Current for pressure relief test 50kA rms
11 Low current long duration test As per IEC
value (2000 micro sec)
12 Pressure relief class A
B. 110KV CLASS LIGHTNING ARRESTERS:
Sl.N DESCRIPTION
o
1 Rated arrester voltage 96 KV
2 Nominal Discharge current 10KA of 8/20 microsecond wave
3 Minimum discharge capability 5Kj/kV(referred to rated
arrester voltage corresponding
to minimum discharge
characteristics.
4 Continuous operating voltage at 102 kV rms.
50°C
5 Max. Switching surge residual 280 kVp
Voltage (1kA
6 Max. residual voltage at 310 kVp
i) 5kA
ii) 10 kA nominal discharge 330 kVp
294
current
7 Long duration discharge class 3
8 High current short duration test 100 kVp
Value (4/10 micro second wave
9 Current for pressure relief test 40kA rms
10 Low current long duration test As per IEC
value (2000 micro sec)
11 Pressure relief class A
7.0. TESTS AND TEST CERTIFICATES :
7.1. Manufacturers test certificates in respect of all materials as specified in IEC

99-4 and IS 3070 Part I to III of latest issue and other tests as mentioned
elsewhere in the specification shall be supplied in triplicate.
7.2 In addition to the above tests, the purchaser reserves the right of carrying out
at site such tests as he may decide upon. Such additional tests shall be carried out
at the purchasers expense.
7.3 The entire equipment shall after erection be run for one year under normal
operating conditions. Any defects discovered during this period shall be rectified
free of all charge. The equipments should be set properly and demonstrated to
function correctly.
7.4 Test certificates furnishing the results of Routine tests as per appropriate
Indian Standard Specification should be forwarded for, the equipment, before
despatching the materials. The equipments will be rejected, if the test results are
not satisfactory.
7.5 The Corporation reserves the right to have the Acceptance tests as specified
in relevant IS/IEC of latest issue, carried out on the arresters to be supplied against
this contract.
******
295
SECTION - 23
SOLID CORE INSULATORS
The post type insulators shall conform in general to latest IS: 2544, IEC-168
and IEC – 815
1.0 CONSTRUCTIONAL FEATURES
1.1 Post type insulators shall consist of a porcelain part permanently secured in a
metal base to be mounted on the supporting structures. They shall be capable of
being mounted upright. They shall be designed to withstand any shocks to which
they may be subjected to by the operation of the associated equipment. Only solid
core insulators will be acceptable.
1.2 Porcelain used shall be homogeneous, free from lamination, cavities and Other
flaws or imperfections that might affect the mechanical or dielectric quality and shall
be thoroughly vitrified, tough and impervious to moisture.
1.3 Glazing of the porcelain shall be of uniform brown in colour, free from blisters,
burrs and other similar defects.
1.4 The insulator shall have alternate long and short sheds with aerodynamic profile.
The shed profile shall also meet the requirements of IEC-815 for the specified
pollution level.
1.5 When operating at normal rated voltage there shall be electric discharge
between conductor and insulator which would cause corrosion or injury to
conductors or insulators by the formation of substance produced by chemical action.
1.6 The design of the insulators shall be such that stresses due to expansion and
contraction in any part of the insulator shall not lead to deterioration
1.7 All ferrous parts shall be hot dip galvanized in accordance with the latest edition
of IS: 2633, & IS: 2629. the zinc used for galvanizing shall be grade zn99.95 as per
IS: 209. the zinc coating shall be uniform adherent, smooth, reasonably bright,
continuous and free from imperfections such as flux ash, rust stains, bulky white
deposits and blisters. The metal pars shall not produce any noise generating corona
under the operating conditions.
1.8 a)Every bolt shall be provided with a steel washer under the nut so that part of
the threaded portion of the bolts is within the thickness of the parts bolted together.
296
b) Flat washer shall be circular of a diameter 2.5 times that of bolt and of
suitable thickness. Where bolt-heads/nuts bear upon the beveled surfaces
they shall be provided with square tapered washers of suitable thickness
to afford a seating square with the axis of the bolt.
c) All bolts and nuts shall be of steel with well formed hexagonal heads forged
from the solid and shall be hot dip galvanized. The nuts shall be good fit
on the bolts and two clear threads shall show through the nut when it has
been finally tightened up.
1.9 Bidder shall make available data on all the essential features of design Including
the method of assembly of shells and metals parts, number of shells per insulator,
the manner in which mechanical stresses are transmitted through shells to adjacent
parts, provision for meeting expansion stresses, results of corona and thermal shock
tests, recommended working strength and any special design or arrangement
employed to increase life under service conditions.
2.0 TESTS
In accordance with the stipulations of the specification, the post insulators
shall be subject to type, acceptance, sample and routine tests as per IS: 2544 and
IEC 168.
2.1 In addition to acceptance/sample/routine tests as per IS: 2544 and IEC 168, the
following tests shall also be carried out.
a) Ultrasonic test as an acceptance test
b) Soundness test, metallurgical test and magnetic test on MCI caps and
pedestal test as acceptance test.
c) All hot dip galvanized components shall be subject to check for
uniformity of thickness and weight of zinc coating on sample basis.
d) The bending test shall be carried out at 50% minimum failing load in
four directions as a routine test and at 100% minimum failing load in
four directions as an acceptance test.
e) Acceptance norms for visual defects allowed at site and also at works
shall be agreed in the Quality plan.
2.2 In accordance with the stipulation of specification, the following type tests,
reports of the post insulators shall be submitted for approval.
297
a) Power frequency withstand test (dry & wet)
b) Lightning impulse test (dry)
c) Switching impulse test (wet) (For 420 kV Insulator only)
d) Measurement of R.I.V (Dry)
e) Corona extinction voltage test (Dry)
f) Test for deflection under load
g) Test for mechanical strength
2.3 TECHNICAL PARAMETERS OF BUS POST INSULATORS
a) Type Solid Core Solid Core
b) Voltage class (kV) 230 110
c) Dry and wet one minute 460 275
power frequency withstand
voltage (kV rms)
a) Dry lightning impulse +/-1050 +/-650
withstand voltage (kVp)
b) Wet switching surge
withstand voltage (kVp) - -
c) Max. radio interference

Voltage (in microvolts) 500 500
At voltage of 305 kV (rms)
And 156 (rms) for 400 kV &
220 kV respectively between
phase to ground
g) Corona extinction Voltage(kV rms) 156(Min) 105(min)
h) Total minimum cantilever 800 600
strength (kg)
i) Minimum torsional moment As per IEC-273
j) Total height of insulator (mm) 2300 1050
(minimum)
Necessary sub- Structure/stool Required to match Bus height using Standard
structure Shall be provided by the Contractor.
298
k) P.C.D.
Top (mm) 127 127
Bottom (mm) 184/210 184/210
b) No.of bolts
Top 4 4
Bottom 4 4
m) Diameter of bolt/hotes(mm)
Top M16 M16
Bottom dia 18 18
n) Pollution level as per IEC-815 Heavy (III)
o) Minimum total creepage
Distance for Heavy Pollution (MM) 6125 3165
2.4 If corona extinction voltage is to be achieved with the help of corona ring or any
other similar device, the same shall be deemed to be included in the scope of the
Contractor.
*****
299
SECTION - 24
POWER / TERMINAL CONNECTORS
1.0. SCOPE :
The Power Connectors are for use in outdoor equipments in TAMILNADU.
2.0. CODES AND STANDARDS :
2.1.The power connectors should conform to IS 5561-1970 for the latest issue.
2.2.All materials used shall conform to the relevant Indian Standards.
2.3.The Aluminium alloys used in the manufacture of the connectors shall conform
to designation A6 of IS 617-1975.
2.4.Conductor the bimetallic connector made from Aluminium Alloy Wherever for
connecting equipment terminal made of copper or brass to ACSR casting shall be
provided with bimetallic Strip.
2.5.1. All bolts and nuts shall have hexagonal heads.
2.5.2. All Bolts and Nuts shall be of stainless steel conforming to ISS 1570-304
quality.
2.5.3 The design of clamp shall be to our approval. The details of current take off as
required by us shall be detailed out in drawing and shall be submitted along with the
bid. In respect of the terminal connectors following should be ensured:-
(a) The terminal connector should be made of A6 Aluminum Alloy and by
pressure / gravity die cast only. Sand casted terminal connectors are not
acceptable.
(b) All castings shall be free from blow holes, surface blisters, cracks and
Cavities. All sharp edges should be rounded off.
(c) No part of clamp shall be less than 12 mm thick.
(d) The bimetallic strips / sleeve shall be 2 mm thick.
(e) All nuts, bolts & washers shall be of Hot Dip Galvanised mild steel.
(f) The conductor should be tightened by six bolts. Conductor hold length
must not be less than 100 mm.
(g) The surface of clamps to be tightened by six bolts should be flat in
shape so that it may be possible to open the nuts and bolts by normal
flat spanners. Therefore, any type of groove in the clamp body for fixing
300
of nuts should be avoided.
(h) The portion of clamp to hold the conductor should be flat and straight
and not zig-zag in construction, at both the sides, so that holding of
clamp by throttling action of current may be avoided.
(i) Space of at least 50% of diameter of nuts should be available after the
hole at both the sides of conductor holding portion for better mechanical
strength.
(j) All current carrying parts shall be designed and manufactured to have
minimum contacts resistance.
(k) The clamp for Twin Moose ACSR Conductor shall be in three pieces so
that each conductor may be tightened separately.
(l) Size of terminal connector for which the clamp is designed and also rated
current under site conditions shall be embossed / punched on each part
of clamps except hardware
(m) All the power connecters should be corona free and type tested
for RIV irrespective of voltage level.
3.0. RATING :
3.1.The rated current of Power Connectors shall be generally 800 A and for switch
end clamps 1600 A.
3.2.The rated frequency of Power Connectors shall be 50 Hz.
3.3.The rated short time current shall be 63 KA (rms)/ 1 sec for 400KV system and
50 KA (rms) for 3 Seconds for 230 KV & 40KA for 3 Seconds for 110 KV system.
The rated Peak short circuit current shall be 2.5 times that of rated S.T.C.
4.0. REQUIREMENTS :
4.1. The power connectors surface shall be smooth and free from cavities, blow
holes and such other defects which would be likely to cause them to be
unsatisfactory in service also capable of preventing the built up of non conducting
oxide.
4.2. The power connectors shall be so designed and proportioned that they are
capable for safety withstanding stresses to which
301
4.3. They may be subjected during erection, normal service, under short circuit and
climate conditions and that the effects of vibration both on the conductor and the
connector itself are minimized. They shall be designed, manufactured, and
finished so as to avoid sharp radius of curvature, ridges and excrescences which
might lead to localized pressure on or damage to the conductor in service.
4.4. Sufficient contact pressure should be maintained at the joint by the provision of
required number of bolts or other fixing arrangements. But the contact pressure
should not be so great so as to cause relaxation of the joint by cold flow. The joint
should be such that the pressure is maintained within this range under all conditions
of service. To avoid excessive local pressure, the contact pressure should be evenly
distributed by the use of pressure plates, wharewashers or suitable saddles of
adequate area and thickness.
4.5. The Power Connectors shall be so designed that the joints runs cooler than the
associated Bus Bar.
4.6. The Power Connectors shall have short and as far as possible direct current
paths.
4.7. The Power Connectors shall avoid crevices where moisture can accumulate or
through which corrosive atmospheres can penetrate.
4.8. All the current carrying parts shall be designed and manufactured to have
minimum contact resistance.
4.9. The thickness of any current carrying parts shall not be less than 16 mm.
4.10. The clamps and fitting shall be so designed that the post Insulators shall not be
subjected to any abnormal stresses due to thermal change in conductor.
4.11. All the clamps and fittings shall be as short as possible.
4.12. Wherever possible there shall be two halves and no U Bolts shall be used.
5.0. LIMITS OF TEMPERATURE RISE :
5.1. The limits of temperature rise specified are based on the following
reference ambient temperatures :
a) Maximum ambient air temperature : 45 Degree C
b) Maximum daily average ambient temp. : 35 Degree C
c) Maximum yearly ambient temperature : 30 Degree C
302
5.2 The temperature rise of Power Connectors above a reference ambient
temperature 40 Degree C when carrying rated current shall not exceed 45 Degree C.
6.0. PROTECTION AGAINST CORROSION :
All parts of Power Connectors shall either be inherently resistant to
atmospheric corrosion or be suitably protected against corrosion, both during
storage and in service.
TYPE TESTS :
7.1. Tenderers are requested to furnish copy of type test certificates for the
material / equipment of their make in full shape as conforming to relevant IS/IEC
Standards of latest issue obtained from a Government/ Government recognised
Laboratory . The above type test certificates should accompany the drawings of the
material/equipments, duly signed under seal by the Institution who have issued the
type test certificate.
7.2. The above type test certificates shall be furnished and get them approved
before offering of the inspection of first lot of materials/equipments at no extra cost
to TANTRANSCO and no relaxation to TANTRANSCO’s Delivery Clause will be given
on this account.
7.3. The original type test certificates shall be furnished for verification on request
Type Test conducted:
a) Tensile Test
b) Resistance Tests
c) Temperature Rise Test
d) Short Time Current Test
e) Dimensions Check
f) RIV Test & Corona Test for all power connectors in respective of voltage
rating.
7.4. Acceptance Tests :
a) Tensile Test
b) Resistance Tests
c) Dimensions check
303
d) Galvanising Test wherever applicable
7.5. Routine Tests :
a) Visual Inspection and
b) Dimensional check.
8.0 INSPECTION :
The accredited representatives of the Purchaser shall have access to the
contractor’s works at any time during the working hours for the purpose of
inspecting the manufacturing of materials and for testing and may select samples
from the materials. The contractors shall provide facilities for the above.
****
304
SECTION 25
ALUMINIUM BUS BAR
1.0 The Aluminium bus bars are for use in 230/110 KV SS.
2.0 CODES AND STANDARDS :

2.1. The Aluminium tubes should conform to IS 5082/1998
2.2. The material shall be grade 63401 WP (range 2) conforming to IS 5082/1981.
2.3. The tensile strength shall not be less than the minimum value of 20.5 Kgf/
Sq.mm
2.4. The electrical Resistivity corrected to 20º C shall be less than 3.135 micro-
Ohm-cm.
2.6 For outside diameter (OD) & thickness of the tube there shall be no minus
tolerance, other requirements being as per IS: 2678 and IS: 2673
2.7 The welding of aluminium tube shall be done by the qualified welders duly
approved by the owner.
3.0. DESIGN AND REQUIREMENTS :
The metal should have a bright smooth finish free from seams, cracks and
other imperfections. The tubes shall be free from twists. The deflection of bus bars
when supported on post type insulators at both ends, should not exceed half the
diameter of the bus bars.
Sl.No. Size Outer Wall Weight Cross

Diameter thickness (Kg/m) sectional
area
(Sq.mm)
1 4” IPS 114.2mm 8.51 mm 7.7 2825.61
2 3” IPS 88.9mm 7.62mm 5.3 1951

2.0. PROPERTIES:
2.1. The tube sizes offered shall be as per standard International Pipes Sizes (I.P.S)
and extra heavy pipe sizes.
305
2.2. For the inside Diameter (I.D) of the tube there shall be no plus tolerance and
for the outside Diameter (O.D) there shall be no minus tolerance.
3.0. STRENGTH :
The tubular bus bar conductors shall have adequate strength to withstand
mechanical forces due to short circuit.
4.0. TEMPERATURE RISE:
The tubular conductor temperature when carrying full load current shall not
exceed 75º C for over ambient temperature.
5.0. TESTS:
The following tests listed below shall be carried out on the tubular bus bars to
be supplied and shall be deemed to be included in Bidder’s scope.
 Tensile Test
 Resistance Test
 Temperature rise test for rated current
 One second short circuit current test
 Critical disruptive voltage test.
8.1 TYPE TEST :
The supplier is requested to furnish copy of type test certificates for the
material/equipment of their make in full shape as conforming to relevant IS/IEC
Standards of latest issue obtained from a Government/ Government recognised
Laboratory. The above type test certificates should accompany the drawings of the
material/equipments, duly signed under seal by the Institution who have issued the
type test certificate.
8.2. The original type test certificates shall be furnished for verification on request.
8.3 Manufacturers test certificates in respect of all materials as specified in

relevant IS/IEC Standards of latest issue and other tests as mentioned elsewhere
in the specification shall be supplied in triplicate.
306
8.4. In addition to the above tests, the purchaser reserves the right of carrying out
at site such tests as he may decide upon. Such additional tests shall be carried out
at the purchasers expense.
8.5 The entire materials shall after erection be run for one year under normal
operating conditions. Any defects discovered during this period shall be rectified
free of all charge. The materials should be set properly and demonstrated to
function correctly.
8.6 Test certificates furnishing the results of Routine tests as per appropriate
Indian Standard Specification should be forwarded for, the material, before
despatching the materials. The materials will be rejected, if the test results are not
satisfactory.
8.7 The TANTRANSCO reserves the right to have the Acceptance tests as
specified in relevant IS/IEC of latest issue, carried out on the materials to be
supplied against this contract.
******
307
SECTION - 26
VISUAL MONITORING SYSTEM (CCTV)
A. BILL OF MATERIALS FOR MATERIALS FOR COMPLETE VMS SYSTEM
Sl. Description Quantity

no
1 Outdoor PTZ IR camera complete with associated materials As required.
for Electrical switchyard monitoring. (Refer indicative
Associated materials comprise: quantity under
pole for mounting camera and associated devices, Junction scope of areas)
box comprising LIU, Power adapter, Media converter, Surge
protector, LAN communication patch cable and necessary
accessories.
Audio mike to be provided in one or more for cameras in
Electrical switch yard application.
Audio is to sense the equipment and security related noise
in the area of concern.
2 Indoor PTZ IR camera complete with associated materials As required.
for (Refer indicative
Electrical switchyard monitoring. quantity under
Associated materials comprise: scope of areas)
pole for mounting camera and associated devices, Junction
box comprising LIU, Power adapter, Media converter, Surge
protector, LAN communication patch cable and necessary
accessories.
Audio mike to be provided in one or more for cameras in
Electrical switch yard application.
Audio is to sense the equipment and security
related noise in the area of concern.
3 Outdoor Bullet fixed IR camera complete with associated As required.
materials for Monitoring of premises. (Refer indicative
Associated materials comprise: quantity under
Mounting accessories, Junction box comprising LIU, Power scope of areas)
308
adapter,Media converter, Surge protector, LAN
communication patch cable and necessary accessories.
4 Indoor fixed IR camera complete with associated materials As required.
for monitoring of Control room building areas namely (Refer indicative
Battery room, Charger room, Building entrance. quantity under
Associated materials comprise: scope of areas)
mounting accessories, Junction box comprising LIU, Power
adapter,Media converter, Surge protector, LAN
communication patch cable and necessary accessories.
Audio mike to be provided in one or more of the cameras in
control building.
Audio is to sense the equipment and security
related noise in the area of concern.
5 Network video recorder with server for VMS management 2 Nos
common Keyboard, mouse, PTZ joy stick controller for user
interface
6 Server cum client work station complete with Software, 1 No.
Keyboard, mouse, 27 ” Monitors for VMS Management and
surveillance system
7 40” Full HD Flicker free LED monitor 1 No
6 UPS with 24 hours Backup for control room for complete 1 No
VMS with load capacity provision for future 4nos PTZ
cameras
8 Power Distribution Box Complete with mounting 1 Set
accessories.
Provided with MCBs for incomer, application feeders, 4
spare feeders with auxiliary contact for trip alert.
Includes MCB for incomer at source end ACDB.
9 Communication Networks cables. Comprises: 1 Lot
LAN copper cables housed in HDPE pipe As required
LAN Fiber optic outdoor cables housed in HDPE pipe As required
LAN Fiber optic indoor cables housed in HDPE pipe As required
309
10 Power cables. Comprises:
Outdoor armoured insulated Power cable As required
Indoor armoured insulated Power cable As required
11 LAN Network Devices with mounting panel. Comprises: 1 Lot
i) Router 1 no
ii)Ethernet switches equipped for application and 4 nos
spare ports
iii) GPRS MODEM 1 No
iii) LINE INTERFACE UNIT (LIU) for termination of FO
cables: As required
iv) Media converters : As required
v) Fibre optic Splicing kit-1 set.
vi) Panel with Racks frame complete for mounting
equipments: As required
12 ACDB for 230V AC supply distribution to cameras, MCB for As required
incomer source to be mounted at source AC supply.
13 All other necessary materials for VMS implementation As required
Note:
1. Minimum number of cameras and associated materials is specified, however for
the application more number of cameras are required then quantity of cameras shall
be provided accordingly.
2. Power supply cables for outdoor cameras requiring Single phase 230V AC supply
shall be typically armoured 3core 4 sq.mm copper cables as per IS /IEC standard for
outdoor application.
3. Power supply cables shall be copper cables as per IS /IEC standard of sufficient capacity.
BOM FOR Essential spares
Sl.n Description Unit Quantit

o y
1 Outdoor PTZ IR camera complete with associated Set 1
materials,mike for Electrical switchyard monitoring.
2 Intdoor PTZ IR camera complete with associated Set 1
310
materials,mike for Electrical switchyard monitoring.
3 Outdoor Bullet fixed IR camera complete with associated Set 1
materials for Monitoring of premises.
4 Indoor fixed IR camera complete with associated materials Set 1
for
monitoring inside Control building
5 Router ( 4 x 1Gbps SM FO , 8X 10/100Mbps ) No. 1
6 Media converter (1 set comprises 1no of each type) Set 1
B.TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR VISUAL MONITORING SYSTEM

1..1 Visual monitoring system for watch and ward of Substation premises
and Electrical GIS Switchyard:
Visual monitoring system (VMS) for effective watch and ward of substation
premises covering the areas defined in the scope of this specification.
The contractor shall design,supply, erect, test and commission the complete
system including cameras, VMS Management and surveillance software Server and
client, Digital Network video recorder system, mounting arrangement for cameras,
cables, LAN Switches, UPS and any other items/accessories required to complete the
system. To provide all the necessary licenses to run the system successfully shall be
in the scope of contractor.
The VMS data partly/completely shall be recorded (minimum for 15 days) and
stored on network video recorder.
The number of cameras and their locations shall be decided in such a way
that any location covered in the area can be scanned.
1.2 Training :
Training on VMS system is in the scope of erection testing and commissioning
of complete VMS system and associated materials.
On site hands on Training on complete VMS system including configuration,
trouble shooting of equi-pments, principle of operation and technology deployed etc.
shall be provided for five engineers of TANTRANSCO.
All necessary tools, stationary, facilities to impart on site training is in
bidder’s.
311
Training shall be imparted by an experienced trainer from sub-vendor of VMS
system.
2. Qualification requirements for Sub-vendor for VMS
a) The sub-vendor for VMS should have previous experience in design, engineering,
supply, installation and commissioning of Visual monitoring system for one number
110 KV or above rated AIS/ GIS type substation application for day & night
monitoring of electrical switchyard, watch and ward of premises.
b) The VMS supplied by the vendor similar to that proposed for this project should
be in satisfactory performance for atleast one year during the last 5 years.
c) The sub-vendor should be proven established inland support in India for technical
support, repair service, spares support for the main equipments of the VMS such as
All type of cameras for the application, NVR, VMS Software etc.
Testimonials from end user, Credentials of firm including its equipment and
manpower details etc should be furnished to prove the above qualification
requirement.
3.Technical Specification for Visual Monitoring System
The complete Visual Monitoring System should be of industrial grade and
substation hardened, necessary type test reports to relevant standards should be
secured.
The specification of complete VMS is furnished in general however any other
necessary materials and equipments ,better features, better functions as necessary
for the application shall be provided. In this context, the VMS scheme drawing is
subject to TANTRANSCO approval during project engineering stage.
3.1 Technical requirements of major equipment of Visual Monitoring System.
3.1.1 The Video Monitoring system shall be an integrated system with IP network
centric functional and management architecture aimed at providing high-speed
manual/automatic operation for best performance.
3.1.2 The system should facilitate viewing of live and recorded images and
controlling of all cameras by the authorized users.
3.1.3 The system shall use video signals from various types of indoor and outdoor
colour cameras installed at different locations, process them for viewing on
312
workstations/ monitors in the control Room and simultaneously record all the
cameras after compression using H 265,MPEG 4 and better open standard.
Mouse/Joystick-Keyboard controllers shall be used for Pan, Tilt, Zoom, and other
functions of desired cameras.
3.1.4 The System shall provide sufficient storage of all the camera recordings for a
period of 15 days or more @ 25 FPS, at 4 CIF or better quality using necessary
compression techniques for all cameras. It shall be ensured that data once recorded
shall not be altered by any means. The recording resolution and frame rate for each
camera shall be user programmable.
3.1.5 The surveillance VMS System shall operate on 230 V, 50 Hz single-phase
power supply. System shall have back up UPS power supply meeting the power
supply need of all the cameras in the station for a period of 24 hours. The bidder
shall submit the sizing calculation for the UPS considering the total load requirement
of Video Monitoring System.
3.1.6 The VMS shall be based on open standard such that the VMS shall be
compatible to operate with other open standard Cameras.
3.1.7. All necessary materials ,cables, devices, media converters etc for
implementation of the VMS is inclusive of the scope of supply, erection, testing
and commissioning of the VMS.
3.1.8 Computers should be of industrial grade with latest generation processors and
OS.
3.1.9 All types of powers cables and communication cables for VMS shall be rodent
resistant, Fire retardant.
3.1.1.10 VMS shall be compatible with the following interoperability standards:
1.Physical Security Interoperability Alliance (PSIA)
2. Open Network Video Interface Forum Profile S (ONVIF Profile S)
3. Real Time Streaming Protocol (RTSP)
4.Scope of Areas to be covered under VMS
a) For 230/110KV Electrical Switchyard monitoring:
Complete 230KV and 110KV Electrical outdoor switch yard for existing and future
bays,Power Transformers, Auto transformers including future bays.
313
The electrical switch yard shall be segregated in to zones such that the entire
zone area of the zone is within the focal length reach of the cameras, and each zone
shall be covered by two cameras at a given time so that even if there is a failure of
one camera it shall be possible to monitor the respective zone by the alternate
camera.
The cameras shall be located in such a way to monitor at least:
1. Station auxiliary equipments
2. All the Primary electrical equipments, Transformers Bays, and reactor Bays and all
future Electrical bays.
The cameras can be mounted on pole structure for which mounting arrangement to
be provided by the bidder and Supply of all the necessary materials, Laying of
communication and power cables, all erection works including necessary civil works
to erect the support pole structure is in bidder scope.
b) For Substation premises monitoring
Control Room Building : Battery room, Charger room, Control Building entrance.
Substation premises : Main entrance and all other entrances. Complete substation
premises.
The number and type of cameras is indicated as minimum in the BOM in this
specification how ever if more number of cameras are required to monitor the areas
under scope of this tender then it shall be supplied and erected, tested and
commissioned and is inclusive of this tender scope.
The cameras can be mounted on structures, buildings or any other suitable
mounting arrangement to be provided by the contractor.
All necessary mounting fixtures and accessories, mounting arrangements are
inclusive of scope of supply of the VMS.
Supply of all the necessary materials, Laying of communication and power cables, all erection works
including all civil works, foundation materials and its civil works for mounting pole/structure for all cameras to
erect the support pole structure, all civil works for erection panels/racks etc are in bidder scope. All necessary
safety protective equipment for erection of the VMS equipments in live GIS/AIS switch yard is in the scope of
the bidder.
Indicative Quantity of cameras read with

associated materials
Scope of Areas to be covered PTZ PTZ FIXED Bullet FIXED Bullet
314
in VMS O/D I/D I/D O/D
For Entrance gate Monitoring 1
For monitoring along S/S
boundary walls 4
General forecourt monitoring
mounted from terrace for
panoramic viewing of
premises 1
230/110KV Transformer bays 3
110KV Power transformers 4
Within S/S Building
Basement for cable cellar 2
1 in each LT
LT Switchgear room(s) S/G room
C&R Panels room 1
2 (1 for
230/110KV
GIS, 1 for
Battery room(s) 33KV,11KV )
230kv GIS Hall 2
110KV GIS Hall 2
33KV Indoor Switch gear
room 1
11KV Indoor Switch gear
room 1
Reserved cameras 1 1
Total (refer note below) 1 4 9 13
Note: Total Quantity of cameras and associated materials mentioned above
is indicative only, As this is a turnkey project sufficient quantity
of cameras as required to monitor the indoor and outdoor Scope
of Areas to be covered in VMS shall be provided.
5. System requirements:
315
a) System must provide built-in facility of watermarking or Digital certificate to
ensure tamperproof recording.
b) All cameras may be connected through a suitable LAN which shall be able to
perform in intended High voltage sub-station environment without fail.
c) All camera recordings shall have Camera ID & location/area of recording as well
as date/time stamp. Camera ID, Location/Area of recording & date/time shall be
programmable by the system administrator with User ID & Password.
d) Facility of camera recording in real-time mode (25 FPS)/15/12.5/10 or lower FPS
as well as in any desired combination must be available in the system.
e) Facility of Camera recording in HD (1280X720p), D1 , 4CIF , CIF, VGA, as well as
in any combination i.e. any camera can be recorded in any quality.
f) System to have facility of 100% additional camera installation beyond the
originally planned capacity.
g) In order to optimize the memory, while recording, video shall be compressed
using H 265,MPEG-4 or better open standard and streamed over the IP network.
h) System shall be triplex i.e. it should provide facility of Viewing, Recording &
Replay simultaneously.
i) The offered system shall have facility to export the desired portion of clipping(from
a specific date/time to another specific date/time) on CD or DVD or memory stick.
Viewing of this recording shall be possible on standard PC using standard software
like windows media player etc.
j) System shall have provision of WAN connectivity for remote monitoring.
6. VIDEO SURVEILLANCE APPLICATION SOFTWARE
a) Digital video surveillance control software should be capable to display and
manage the entire surveillance system. It should be capable of supporting variety of
devices such as cameras, video encoder, Servers, NAS boxes/Raid backup device
etc. Open Compatibility: ONVIF Profile S and G.
b) The software should have inbuilt facility to store configuration of encoders and
cameras.
c) The software should Support flexible 1/2/4/8/16/32 Windows Split screen display
mode and scroll mode on the PC monitor.
316
d) The software should be able to control all cameras i.e. PTZ control, Iris control,
auto / manual focus, and color balance of camera, Selection of presets, Video
tour selection etc.
e) The software should have user access authority configurable on per device or per
device group basis. The system shall provide user activity log with userID, time
stamp, action performed, etc.
f) The users should be on a hierarchical basis as assigned by the administrator. The
higher priority person can take control of cameras, which are already being
controlled by a lower priority user.
g) It should have recording modes viz. continuous, manual, or programmed modes
on date, time and camera-wise. All modes should be disabled and enabled using
scheduled configuration.
It should also be possible to search and replay the recorded images on date, time
and camera-wise.
It should provide onscreen controls for remote operation of PTZ cameras.
It should have the facility for scheduled recording.
Different recording speeds (fps) and resolution for each recording mode for each
camera should be possible.
h) The software for clients should also be working on a browser based system for
remote users. This will allow any authorized user to display the video of any desired
camera on the monitor with full PTZ and associated controls. Support 10 nos.
concurrent clients.
i) Retrieval: The VMS application should allow retrieval of data instantaneously or
any date / time interval chosen through search functionality of the application
software. In case data is older than 15 days and available, the retrieval should be
possible. The system should also allow for backup of specific data on any drives like
DVD’s or any other device in a format which can be replayed through a standard PC
based software. Log of any such activity should be maintained by the system.
j) VMS shall provide the full functionality reporting tool which can provide reports for
user login/logoff, camera accessibility report, server health check reports etc.
317
7. Network video recorder
Further the digital Network video recorder shall conform to the following
requirements:
a) The NVR shall be compatible with third-party devices making it suitable for
surveillance systems with as well as without a video management system (VMS).
NVR Server Spec Suitable processor,speed,Memory, Graphics
1. card etc
for application absolutely suitable for
continuous
operation.
Windows/ Linux os
Minimum 3TB HDD of RAID 5 for faster and
safer recording.Rackmount type.
2. Audio and Video 32 channels,
: IP Camera Input Two way talk: 1channel i/p 1 channel output
RCA
3. Redundancy Redundancy : In 2nos the NVR shall support
Configuration the highly reliable redundancy i.e Main and Hot
Standby design that provides a secure, failover
technique ensuring immediate backup. In the
event of a system failure, the slave instantly
takes over the master ensuring no data is lost.
4. ANR (Automatic Video record in SD card in IP cameras when the
Network network breaks down and after the network
Replenishment recovered, the video will be automatically
Technology) transferred to NVR and then recorded in it.
5. Display Display Interface 2 X HDMI Ports; Full HD
Display Resolution Upto Full HD 1920 × 1080
Multi-screen Display 1st Screen:
1/4/8/9/16/25/36
2nd Screen: 1/4/8/9/16
OSD: Camera title, Time, Video loss, Camera
318
lock, Motion detection, Recording.
6. Recording Compression : Support all of
H.265,H.264,MJPEG
Resolution : Upto 8MP
Record Rate : 384Mbps
Bit Rate 16Kbps ~ 20Mbps Per Channel
Record Mode : Manual, Schedule (Regular, MD
(Motion Detection), Alarm, IVS), Holiday, Stop
Record Interval 1 ~ 120 min (default: 60 min),
Pre-record: 1 ~ 30 sec,
Post-record: 10 ~ 300 sec
7. Video Detection and Trigger Events : Recording, PTZ, Tour, Alarm Out, Video Push,
Email,FTP, Snapshot, Buzzer and Screen Tips
Alarm
Video Detection : Motion
Detection, MD Zones: 396 (22 ×
18), Video
Loss and Tampering
Alarm input : 16 Channel, Low Level Effective,
Green Terminal Interface
Relay Output : 8 Channel, NO/NC
Programmable, Green Terminal Interface
Tracking Trigger Event : Zoom, Tracking,
Recording, Preset, Snapshot, Alarm etc.
8. Playback and Playback : 128 Mbps in Raid 5 Mode;
Backup 64 Mbps in single HDD Mode
Search Mode: Time /Date, Alarm, MD and
Exact
Search (accurate to second)
Playback Function:
Play, Pause, Stop, Rewind, Fast play, Slow Play,
Next
File, Previous File, Next Camera, Previous
319
Camera,
Full Screen, Repeat, Shuffle, Backup Selection,
Digital Zoom
Backup Mode : USB Device/Network/eSATA
Device
9. Network 2 RJ45 Ethernet Ports Joint Working or 2
Independent 10Mbps/100Mbps/1000Mbps
Ethernet Ports
10. Network Function HTTP, HTTPs, TCP/IP, IPv4/IPv6, UPnP, RTSP,
UDP, SMTP, NTP, DHCP, DNS, IP Filter,
PPPoE,DDNS, FTP, Alarm Server, IP Search
11. Interoperability ONVIF 2.4, CGI Conformant
12. Auxiliary Interface PC interace Port, Keyboard port, Mouse port,

PTZ Control interface port
13 User access Multiuser(Minimum 4 simultaneous access)
14 Intelligent Video Capable Standard and built-in (selectable in

System (IVS) menu)
detect and analyze moving objects for improved
video surveillance.
Facial Detection, for searching or identification
of individuals.
15 User access Its open architecture shall supports multi-user
access and is compatible with ONVIF standard.
16 Operation Triplex (simultaneous
operation recording, playback, network operation)
17 Input Voltage 230V AC or equivalent with UPS as a
back up
18 Operating temp -10°C ~ +55°C, 95RH
Note : Minimum configuration is mentioned above, higher configuration if necessary
for satisfactory performance of VMS shall be provided.
320
8. Other requirements :
i). Support virtualization for multiple NVR in single server.
ii) . Anonymization Support: The objective of this feature is to hide the identifiable
personal data or personal identity in a video surveillance system using masking
techniques.
iii) The Anonymization feature supports two types of masking:
• Blur: Blurs the region
• Pixelize: Pixelizes the region
iv) The complete system should guard against the possibility that someone who
gains unauthorized access to the database can retrieve the passwords of every user
in the system.
v) Native device integrations supporting new features: 4K resolution, H.265+ video
compression codec, 3D PTZ control, 360° camera support, and intelligence events.
vi) Capable of managing motion detection-based recording with pre-event and post-
event recording based on camera based motion detection or Server based motion
detection events (SMART VMD) and “advanced” search on recordings from local or
remote client.
vii) Simultaneous use of multiple video compressions including MJPEG, H.265,H264.
viii) User DB Authentication: Uses preconfigured user name and password
ix). Schedules: Provide options to configure schedule based recording for cameras
connected to the VMS.
x) Users and Roles shall provide option to add/edit/delete users.
xi). Clip Deletion Settings: Provide the ability to automatically utilize more storage on
event-initiated recording.
xii). Independent deletion setting for continuous recording
xiii). Independent deletion setting for event recording.
xiv) Profile Cameras: Multi-zoom views on HD video and support to create virtual
cameras by digitally zooming into the field of view.
xv) 3D Positioning: The user shall be able to view a specific object in the live video
in a 3-dimensional view. This feature shall be available in the Context menu options.
321
3D positioning options include: Click-based camera positioning, Rectangle selection
3D positioning, and Restore to last PTZ position.
xvi) Camera Advanced Settings: Shall enable configuration of Video Format,
Compression Format, Resolution, Compression, Video Frame Rate, Group of picture
(GOP), Record Quality Settings, Clip Deletion Settings, Launching Web View of
camera for Advanced Setup, Motion detection zones configuration for Server based
motion detection, Video Archival Settings, Multi-Stream Settings and Video Preview.
Shall enable configuration of RTSP URL for cameras or encoders added with camera
type – Generic RTSP.
xvii). The following video recording options shall be supported:
a) Scheduled based recording: The system shall support the ability to schedule
recordings for each individual camera for times in the future. By
default, the VMS shall be pre-loaded with the following four schedules: 24x7,
Weekday, Daytime, and total darkness /Night time, which cannot be edited. A
maximum of 10 schedules can be created in the VMS.
b) User based recording: The user shall be able to configure user activated settings
for recording moments of interest while viewing live video from a camera. After
configuring the user activated settings, the operator can start recording of video
when needed. The video is recorded for the time period specified in the System
settings for user activated recording. The User based Recording Time Duration shall
be selectable from a list of values ranging between 30 seconds and 5 minutes.
ci). Event based recording: Event based recording shall be possible on SMART Video
Motion Detection and alarm triggers. The VMS must be capable of managing motion
detection-based recording with pre-event and post-event recording based on camera
and Server-based motion detection events. The server-based SMART VMD analytics
must be object-based and not traditional pixel-based, reducing false alarms due to
changing light conditions, video noise, rain or other false alarm triggers that occur
using pixel-based (traditional) VMD.
9. VMS Client Software: The VMS Client shall have the following minimum
capabilities:
322
i). Main video viewing screen capable of showing 1, 4, 9, 16, and other customized
split salvos of live or recorded video. Standard presets shall be customizable to the
user preferences.
ii). Capable of configuring and running scan sequences.
iii) Capable of adjusting the contrast, brightness, and saturation settings for each
camera independently.
iv) Capable of exporting user selected image or video clips in simple .wmv, .asf,
and .bmp formats. Capable of attaching a digital signature for authentication of
exported clips in .wmv format.
v) Capability to play back the video clips exported. Each video channel that is being
recorded by the recording system shall be overlaid with text
and a time stamp that is customizable by the user.
vi) Clip Export with Anonymization support: Anonymization GDPR masking feature is
supported for both Playback and Clip Export operations
vii). Capability of complete alarm management for the alarms coming from the VMS.
viii) Facility of surrounding camera view.
ix). Ability to manage timeline control of the recording device, which provides
camera recording statistics. Timeline control shall have the following features: Mark
input (with looping facility), bookmark, snapshot, time slider, time jump, play
controls.
x). Preference configuration including: frame rate of unselected panels, rendered
type, preview pane, text display format.
xi). Search: The Search facility shall include search for recorded video and events
based on date and time
xii). Reports: The Report facility shall include event history report and audit log
report
xiii). NVR integration
VMS shall have the ability to access and manage necessary functions of the
recording devices through the VMS client interface, such as live video, recorded
video, camera configuration, PTZ control and other associated functions.
10. VMS Camera
323
10.1 OUTDOOR DAY & NIGHT PTZ CAMERA FOR EHV ELECTRICAL
SWITCHYARD MONITORING APPLICATION
a) The color IP camera for substation switchyard monitoring shall have PAN, TILT
and ZOOM facilities so that it can be focused to the required location from the
remote station through a controller.
b) It should have sufficient range for viewing all the poles of isolators if any and
primary electrical High voltage equipments in the Electrical switch yard with high
degree of clarity.
c) The VMS camera shall be suitable for wall mounting, ceiling mounting and
switchyard structure mounting.
d) It shall be possible to define at selectable preset locations so that the camera gets
automatically focused on selection of the location for viewing a predefined location.
e) The camera should be able to detect motion in day & night environments having
light intensity as specified in this specification. It shall have Infrared illumination
facility for night viewing.
f) All camera recordings shall have Camera ID & location/area of recording as well as
date/time stamp. Camera ID, Location/Area of recording & date/time shall be
programmable by the system administrator with User ID & Password
g) Facility of camera recording in real-time mode or lower FPS as well as in any
desired combination must be available in the system.
h) Cameras shall be compatible to integrate with major third-party systems
through the openo API or the ONVIF Profile S, Profile G standards.
i) cameras use a standard Web browser interface for easy remote setup and administration.
SPECIFICATION: OUTDOOR DAY & NIGHT PTZ CAMERA FOR EHV

ELECTRICAL SWITCHYARD MONITORING APPLICATION
Camera
Type IP ,IR, PTZ Camera
Sensor CMOS
Sensor Lense 1/3' or better
Aspect ratio Suitable for application
Resolution Minimum 2MP
Effective pixels Minimum 1920x1080
324
Scanning system Progressive
Electronic shutter speed Suitable for application
0.1 Lux (33ms), 0.025 Lux
Colour (125ms)
Minimum illumination / 0.05 Lux (33ms), 0.01 Lux
Light Sensitivity at 90% B/W (125ms)
Reflectance With IR ON 0 Lux
S/N Ratio >50dB
Dynamic range Suitable for application
Corrosiion resistant, UV
Stable,Rugged Type, Dome
Construction Indoor drive assembly
The mounting of all the outdoor
cameras for installation in
switchyard should be located so
as to provide intended
monitoring coverage and at the
same time provided with
sufficient safety margin of
clearance from all live parts of
Installation consideration the high voltage switchyard.
Camera Features
Suitable for application.
Max IR LEDs Length Integrated infrared illumination.
Auto (ICR) / Colour/ B/W. IR
Illumination Auto ON in night
Day/Night Capabilities mode
Backlight compensation Required
White balance Auto, Manual, etc
Gain control Auto / Manual
Noise reduction DNR Required
Digital Zoom Minimum 12X
325
Detects contrast changes in the
field of view. An alarm is
triggered if the lens is
obstructed by spray paint, a
cloth, or a lens cap. Any
unauthorized repositioning of
the camera also triggers an
Sabotage detection alarm.
Heater for Auto defog, Fan
Environmental protection blower for dust clerance, Sun
features Shield
IR Cut Filter Required
Clock Real time clock
Lens
Focal length Suitable for application
Max Aperture Suitable for application
Auto , Manual. Autofocus
Focus Control motorized remote zoom lens
Angle of view Suitable for application
Close focus distance Suitable for application
Optical zoom Minimum 20X
Automatic Iris with Manual
Iris Control Override
Video
No of streams Minimum 2 streams
Compression H.264,H.265, MJPEG
Resolution 1080P/720P/D1 /SD
Frame rate Main stream Minimum upto 60fps
Sub-stream Minimum upto 30fps
Bit rate Suitable for application.

Configurable bit rate
326
Memory for recording Provision for SD card for
expandable memory. Memory
card of 16GB shall be provided
with each camera. Record video
continuously in the case of
network outage with option to
overwrite;
access video through FTP
protocol and ONVIF Profile G
Motion detection Generates an alarm in a high
traffic area when a person or
object moves.
Flicker control for 50HZ Required
PTZ Features
Pan /Tilt range Pan , Accuracy 360° Coninuous; +/-0.1°
Auto flip 180°; Suitable for
Tilt application
Manual control speed Pan Minimum : 0.1°~100°/S
Tilt Minimum : 0.1°~50°/S
Preset speed Pan Minimum : 0.1°~240°/S
Tilt Minimum : 0.1°~145°/S
Presets Minimum 60 Nos
PTZ Mode Minimum 8 tours. 4 patterns,
Auto Pan, Auto Scan
Power up action Auto restore to previous PTZ ,
Lens status after power failure
Idle motion Active preset scan / Scan / Tour
/ Pattern if no command in
specified perid
Audio
AudioCompression G.711A/G.711U; Embedded
327
with stream
Audio input Mike input appplicable where
ever called for in specification
Network
Ethernet 100BaseT/100BaseTX/
100Mbps SFP
Protocol All open protocols necessary for
application. Also support
TCP/IP, UDP/IP (Unicast,
Multicast IGMP),ARP, ICMP,
UPnP, DNS, DHCP, RTP, RTSP,
NTP,
IPv4, IPv6, SNMP v2c/v3, QoS,
HTTP, HTTPS,SSH, SSL, SMTP,
FTP, and 802.1x (EAP)
Open API ONVIF Profile S & G
Security Access Password Protection
Encrption AES 256 bit encryption
Max user access 4 simultaneous (Unicast);
Unlimited multicast
Software Interface Web browser view and setup,
Android phone access
Power supply PoE+ (802.3at),12VDC/ 24VDC
Operating temp -10°C to 60°C
Operating Humidty 0 to 90% RH (condensing) or
better
Type test
IP Code IEC 60529 IP66 Required as per IEC/ Equivalent
IEC 61000-4-2 : Immunity to ESD (Level 4)
IEC 61000-4-4 : EFT/ Burst Immunity (Level 4)
IEC 61000-4-8 : Power Frequency Magnetic Field
328
(level 4)
IEC 61000-4-11 Voltage dips and
interuptions
IEC 61000-4-12 AC Voltage Dips &
Interruption/Variation
(level 4)

IEC 61000-4-17 : Ripple on DC Power Supply (level
4)
IEC 61000-4-18: Damped Oscillatory wave test (1
MHz and 100 KHz) (level 3)
IEC 60068-2-1 : Low temperature
IEC 60068-2-2 : High temperature
IEC 60068-2-3 : High temperature & humidity
IEC 60068-2-6 : Vibration
IEC 60068-2-14 : Thermal shock
IEC 60068-2-27 : Product Shock
IEC 62262 : Impact
Other type tests Lightening protection ,
surge protection,
voltage transient
protection.
The outdoor cameras
mounted in the
switchyard shall be
type tested for
EMC/EMI for
satisfactory operation
in the intended high
voltage substation
switchyard
environment of
intended voltage level
of 545 kV and shall be
certified for safety of
operating and
maintenance personnel
329
and safety of
equipment , for
satisfactory operation.
Note:
1. Even though minimum parameter is mentioned it implies that better parameter is
applicable if necessary for application.
2. Suitable for application implies that the bidder shall consider suitable parameter
for satisfactory design and performance of the VMS solution.
10.2 INDOOR DAY & NIGHT PTZ CAMERA FOR SUB-STATION INDOOR
APPLICATION
Specification is same as that for outdoor PTZ day & night camera with the exception
that degree of protection shall be IP54 or better.
10.3 General specification of Fixed camera for application in other than
EHV Switchyard
a) The color IP camera for indoor / outdoor substation monitoring application shall
have facilities as stipulated in the specification so that it can be focused to the
required location from the remote station through a controller.
b) It should have sufficient range for viewing for the designated area of monitoring
with high degree of clarity.
c) The VMS camera shall be suitable for wall mounting, ceiling mounting and
switchyard structure mounting.
d) All camera recordings shall have Camera ID & location/area of recording as well
as date/time stamp. Camera ID, Location/Area of recording & date/time shall be
programmable by the system administrator with User ID & Password
e) Facility of camera recording in real-time mode or lower FPS as well as in any
desired combination must be available in the system.
f) Cameras shall be compatible to integrate with major third-party systems through
the open API or the ONVIF Profile S, Profile G standards.
g) cameras use a standard Web browser interface for easy remote setup and administration.
SPECIFICATION: OUTDOOR/INDOOR FIXED CAMERA FOR CONTROL

BUILDING / PREMISES MONITORING APPLICATION
Camera
Type IP , IR , Bullet Camera
330
Sensor CMOS
Sensor Lense 1/3' or better
Aspect ratio Suitable for application
Resolution Minimum 2MP
Effective pixels Minimum 1920x1080
Scanning system Progressive
Electronic shutter speed Suitable for application
0.01 Lux (33ms), 0.004 Lux
Colour (200ms)
Minimum illumination / 0.01 Lux (33ms), 0.02 Lux
Light Sensitivity at 90% B/W (200ms)
Reflectance With IR ON 0 Lux
S/N Ratio >50dB
Dynamic range Suitable for application
Corrosiion resistant, UV
Stable,Rugged Type, Dome drive
Construction Indoor assembly
The mounting of all the outdoor/
indoor cameras for installation in
switchyard should be located so
as to provide monitoring coverage
of intended area and at the same
Installation consideration time ease of maintenance access.
Camera Features
Max IR LEDs Length Integrated infrared illumination.
Auto (ICR) / Colour/ B/W. IR
Illumination Auto ON in night
Day/Night Capabilities mode
Backlight compensation Required
White balance Auto, Manual, etc
331
Gain control Auto / Manual
Noise reduction DNR Required
Digital Zoom Suitable for application
An alarm should be triggered if
the lens is obstructed or when the
Sabotage detection camera is repositioned.
For outdoor installation : Heater
Environmental protection for Auto defog, Fan blower for
features dust clerance, Sun Shield
IR Cut Filter Required
Clock Real time clock
Lens
Focal length Suitable for application
Max Aperture Suitable for application
Auto , Manual. Autofocus
Focus Control motorized remote zoom lens
Angle of view Suitable for application
Close focus distance Suitable for application
Autofocus motorized remote
Optical zoom zoom lens
Automatic Iris with Manual
Iris Control Override
Video
No of streams Minimum 2 streams
Compression H.264,H.265, MJPEG
Resolution 1080P/720P/D1 /SD
Main stream Minimum upto 60fps
Frame rate Sub-stream Minimum upto 30fps
Bit rate Configurable bit rate
332
Provision for SD card for
expandable memory. Memory
card of 16GB shall be provided
with each camera. Record video
continuously in the case of
network outage with option to
overwrite;
access video through FTP protocol
Memory for recording and ONVIF Profile G
Generates an alarm when there is
motion detected in a selected
zone or with the entire
Motion detection scene.
Flicker control for 50HZ Required
Pan / Tilt adustment
(Manual)
Pan Minimum : 0° to 355°
Pan /Tilt/Rotate (Manual) Tilt Minimum : 0° to 90°
range Rotate Minimum : 0° to 355°
Audio
G.711A/G.711U; Embedded with
AudioCompression stream
Mike input appplicable where ever
Audio input called for in specification
Network
100BaseT/100BaseTX/ 100Mbps
Ethernet SFP
333
All open protocols necessary for
application. Also support TCP/IP,
UDP/IP (Unicast, Multicast IGMP),
UPnP, DNS, DHCP, RTP, RTSP,
NTP, IPv4, IPv6,SNMP v2c/v3,
QoS, HTTP, HTTPS, SSH,
SSL,SMTP, FTP, 802.1x
(EAP),ARP, DDNS, ICMP, IGMP,
Protocol RTCP, SFTP,SIP, TLS/TTLS
Open API ONVIF Profile S & G
Password protected, HTTPS, IEEE
802.X,
Security Access Digest Authentication, IP Filtering
Encrption AES 256 bit encryption
4 simultaneous (Unicast);
Max user access Unlimited multicast
Web browser view and setup,
Software Interface Android phone access
Power supply PoE+ (802.3at),12VDC/ 24VDC
Operating temp -10°C to 60°C
0 to 95% RH (condensing) or
Operating Humidty better
Type test
IP Code IEC 60529 IP65 for Outdoor; IP54 for indoor
IEC 61000-4-2 : Immunity to ESD (Level 4)
IEC 61000-4-4 : EFT/ Burst Immunity (Level 4)
IEC 61000-4-8 : Power Frequency Magnetic Field
(level 4)
Required as per IEC/ Equivalent
Voltage dips and
IEC 61000-4-11 interuptions
AC Voltage Dips &

IEC 61000-4-12
Interruption/Variation
334
(level 4)

IEC 61000-4-17 : Ripple on DC Power Supply (level
4)
IEC 61000-4-18: Damped Oscillatory wave test (1
MHz and 100 KHz) (level 3)
IEC 60068-2-1 : Low temperature
IEC 60068-2-2 : High temperature
IEC 60068-2-3 : High temperature & humidity
IEC 60068-2-6 : Shock and Vibration
Resistance
IEC 60068-2-14 : Thermal shock
IEC 62262 : Impact
Lightening protection ,
surge protection,
voltage transient
protection.
The outdoor/indoor
cameras shall be type
tested for EMC/EMI for
satisfactory operation
in the intended
Electrical environment
of substation and shall
be certified for safety
of operating and
maintenance personnel
and safety of
equipment , for
Other type tests satisfactory operation.
Note:
335
1. Even though minimum parameter is mentioned it implies that better parameter is
applicable if necessary for application.
2. Suitable for application implies that the bidder shall consider suitable parameter
for satisfactory design and performance of the VMS solution.
11. PTZ-Keyboards
The features of PTZ shall include:
· Fully functional dynamic keyboard/joystick controllers
· Controls all pan, tilt, zoom, iris, preset functions
· Control up to 255 units from a single keyboard
· Many preset options and advanced tour programming
· Compatible with all connected cameras
1. Key Application wired keyboard control operation of

PTZ functions for weatherproof dome
cameras.
2. Pan / Tilt / Zoom Selectable
Protocol Languages Supported
3. PTZ Data Transfer selectable baud rate and Support
Baud Rates Supported network connection via 10/100Mbps
RJ45.
4. Other Features dynamic joystick for smooth camera
movements, preset location option for
quick access to frequently monitored
areas.
Auto scan, auto pan, Auto tour and
patttern
12. UPS:
Industrial grade type tested to relevant IS/ IEC standards.
24 HOURS Back up with load designated loads to be all the Cameras, NVR,
Computer.
13. Router :
336
Router ( 4 x 1Gbps SM FO , 8X 10/100Mbps )
Redundant power supply operation.
Substation hardened as per IEC 61850-3 or equivalent.
Cyber security features.
Power over Ethernet compatible where ever required.
It shall be powered by UPS to be supplied with the VMS system.
14. Ethernet switches
Specification as specified for Remote SCADA Scheme.
Substation hardened as per IEC 61850-3 or equivalent.
Cyber security features. Power over Ethernet compatible where ever required.
It shall be powered by UPS to be supplied with the VMS system.
15.0 GPRS MODEM

The GSM MODEM shall support SIM card for 3G,4G bands in India.
The data interface to substation to the VMS shall be through Ethernet port.
Necessary outdoor antenna , cables with accessories shall be provided along with
the GPRS MODEM for the site signal conditions.
It shall be of industrial grade and comply all relevant type tests requirements as per
prevailing standards in India.
GPRS MODEM is required for providing remote client access to VMS by
browser using internet as well as by android devices such as mobile phones through
Ethernet.
16. Mounting accessories
Mounting accessories for outdoor installation shall be anti corrosion treated and
suitable to withstand the intended indoor and outdoor environment.
17. Specification for outdoor Armoured Fiber optic cable
1. It shall be outdoor type and armoured.
2. It shall be of sufficient fibers including spare fibers, armoured and shall be with
the following features
rodent proof, Flame retardant, Low smoke, Halogen free, UV Resistant, Water
blocking, and Impact resistance. Type tested for compliance to the above features
according to IEC 60794 / Equivalent IS Standard
337
Applicable standards
ITU-T-G652 for SMF
ITUG651/IEC 793-2 for MMF
For cable : IEC - 794 - 1 : Tensile strength, Crush, Impact, Torsion,Bend ,Kink,
Temperature cycling.
Operating Temperature -10 deg C to +60 deg C
3.Outdoor FO cable should be housed in HDPE. Deviation in this regard will not be
accepted.
4. Tested for conformance to all type tests , routine tests as per IEC/Equivalent
standards and conform to environmental performance for outdoor application in
substation switch yard.
5. Fiber optic cable shall employ single-mode/Multi mode fiber optic cable of
standard wave length and compatible to the connected LAN interfaces.
6. No outdoor fiber optics connectors are permitted. All fiber optic connections shall
be spliced and stored in a suitable enclosure.
7.A fiber optic cable management box shall be located at one of the pedestal bases.
The cable management box shall contain all fiber optic splices or connectors and be
easily accessible for routine maintenance.
338
18. CONCEPTUAL DIAGRAM FOR VMS SCHEME
339
APPENDIX –A
A. GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR CABINETS VMS
S.no Description Panel

1 Make & Model
Cabinet dimension state with tolerance
2 level.
3 Thickness of cabinet
a) Weight bearing sides
b) Other sides
4 Swing frame play in deg (For C&P)
5 Outer Glass door thickness
6 Degree of protection (IP ?)
7 Paint shade
a) Exterior
b) Interior
Paint standard (IS-5?), Thickness of
c) paint
8 Type tests complied (List out)
4. GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR ETHERNET SWITCH
S.no Description Guaranteed

Specification(Yes/No);
Specify additional details
wherever necessary.
1 Make & Model
SNMP version supported for secure
configuration of network
2 switches
SNMP version supported for providing
secure access to network
devices through
3 authentication, and encryption
SSL Web encryption preventing
eaves dropping, tampering or
4 message forgery
Port Security through disabling
of packets from
5 unauthorized MAC addresses
SNTP for synchronizing the
6 switch’s internal clock
7 RSTP (802.1w) industry standard
340
method for providing
recovery of redundant networks
RMON for monitoring of network
8 status & statistics
VLAN (802.1q) providing the
ability of segregating the
9 network into smaller Virtual networks
QS- (802.1Q) for prioritization of
10 network traffic
Port Mirroring assisting network
11 troubleshooting
IGMP Snooping enabling reductions
12 in multicast traffic
13 Backbone port : Speed, physical port type.
14 Tributary port : Speed, physical port type.
15 Type tests complied
i Degree of protection of enclosure (IP?)
ii IEC61850-3
iii Other tests (List out)
B. GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR VMS

I. NETWORK VIDEO RECORDER
.S.no Description Guaranteed
Particulars. Specify
additional details
wherever necessary.
1 Make
2 Model
3 Hardware configuration:
HDD: Type & Memory capacity
Processor: Type & capacity
OS:
4 No of channels for Video
5 No of channels for Audio
6 Redundancy Configuration details
7. Redundancy Configuration
8. ANR (Automatic Network Replenishment
Technology)
9. Display Ports equipped :
OSD Features :
10. Recording Features/ Functions:
341
a) Compression Standards supported
b) Compression Resolution supported
c) Record Rate (bps) :
d) Record Modes :
e) Record Interval :
Pre-record:
Post-record:
11. Video Detection and Alarm Features
12. Playback and Backup Features

13 Network Ports details
14 Network Functions supported
15 Interoperability (List Open standards
supported)
16 Auxiliary Interface for PC supported
17 User access Details :
No of clients supported:
Remote client access (Browser based):
Remote client access (Android OS based):
18 Intelligent Video System (IVS) Features
19 User access
20 Operation Triplex Features (simultaneous
recording, playback, network operation?)
21 Auxiliary supply input Voltage Range
22 Operating temp and humidity
23 Type test compliance ( List out standards

complied)
II. OUTDOOR /INDOOR DAY & NIGHT PTZ CAMERA FOR EHV ELECTRICAL SWITCHYARD MONITORING APPLICATION
Guaranteed Particulars. Specify additional
S.no Description
details wherever necessary.
342
FOR OUTDOOR FOR INDOOR
1 Camera
I Type
ii Sensor
Iii Sensor Lense
Iv Aspect ratio
v Resolution
vi Effective pixels
Vii Scanning system
Viii Electronic shutter speed
ix Minimum illumination / Light
Sensitivity at 90%
Reflectance
Colour:
B/W:
With IR ON :
x S/N Ratio
xi Dynamic range
xii
Construction Features
2 Camera Features
I
Max IR LEDs Length
ii
Day/Night Capabilities
Iii Backlight compensation
Iv White balance
v Gain control
vi Noise reduction
Vii Digital Zoom
Viii Sabotage detection
Features
ix Environmental protection
features
x IR Cut Filter
xi Clock
3 Lens
I Focal length
ii Max Aperture
Iii
Focus Control
Iv Angle of view
v Close focus distance
Vi Optical zoom
343
vii Iris Control
4 Video
I No of streams
ii Compression
Iii Resolution
Iv Frame rate for
Main stream:
Sub-stream :
v
Bit rate
Vi Memory for recording
vii
Motion detection feature
viii Flicker control for 50HZ
5 PTZ Features
i Pan /Tilt range:
Pan, Accuracy :
Tilt:
ii Manual control speed for:
Pan :
Tilt:
iii Preset speed for:
Pan :
Tilt:
Iv Presets
V
PTZ Mode
Vi
Power up action
vii
Idle motion
6 Audio
i AudioCompression
ii
Audio input
7 Network
i Ethernet port details
ii Protocols supported
iii Open API supported
iv Security Access features
v Encryption type
vi
Max user access
vii
Software Interface for Client
344
user, remote client user
viii Auxiliary Power supply
voltage operating range
ix Operating temp
x Operating Humidty
xii Degree of protection in IP
Code
8 Type tests (list out
standartds complied)
III. OUTDOOR/INDOOR FIXED CAMERA FOR CONTROL BUILDING / PREMISES MONITORING APPLICATION
Guaranteed Particulars. Specify
additional details wherever
S.no Description
necessary.
INDOOR OUTDOOR
TYPE TYPE
1 Camera
I Type
ii Sensor
Iii Sensor Lense
Iv Aspect ratio
v Resolution
vi Effective pixels
Vii Scanning system
Viii Electronic shutter speed
ix Minimum illumination / Light
Sensitivity at 90%
Reflectance
Colour:
B/W:
With IR ON :
x S/N Ratio
xi Dynamic range
xii
Construction Features
2 Camera Features
I
Max IR LEDs Length
ii
Day/Night Capabilities
Iii Backlight compensation
Iv White balance
v Gain control
345
vi Noise reduction
Vii Digital Zoom
Viii Sabotage detection
Features
ix Environmental protection
features
x IR Cut Filter
xi Clock
3 Lens
I Focal length
ii Max Aperture
Iii
Focus Control
Iv Angle of view
v Close focus distance
Vi Optical zoom
vii Iris Control
4 Video
I No of streams
ii Compression
Iii Resolution
Iv Frame rate for
Main stream:
Sub-stream :
v
Bit rate
Vi Memory for recording
vii
Motion detection feature
viii Flicker control for 50HZ
5 Pan / Tilt adustment
(Manual)
i Pan /Tilt/Rotate (Manual)
range
Pan :
Tilt :
Rotate :
6 Audio
i AudioCompression
ii
Audio input
7 Network
i Ethernet port details
346
ii Protocols supported
iii Open API supported
iv Security Access features
v Encryption type
vi
Max user access
vii Software Interface for Client
user, remote client user
viii Auxiliary Power supply
voltage operating range
ix Operating temp
x Operating Humidty
xii Degree of protection in IP
Code
8 Type tests (list out
standartds complied)
347
SECTION - 27
KEY BOARD/LC BOARD

One Number each Key board and LC Board to be supplied and fixed in the
control room duly drawing SLD and other required details. LC / Key board of size
3000 mm length, 1500 mm height made out of 75 x 25 mm aluminium frame
embedded with 12mm pre laminated wood particle board using screws. Rear 2 Nos.
of plain glass of 5mm thick fixed with metal roller moving on aluminium channel
should be provided on front with locking arrangements. Glass pieces should be
fastened on the glass shutter for opening and closing. Wall clamps made out of
6mm GI plate / Angle should be provided on top & Bottom.
The Substation Layout, Single line drawing, Earthmat layout & Other required
details to be written in finished surface on separate boards of adequate size
approved by the site Engineer.
348
SECTION - 28
PROTECTION EQUIPMENTS
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR CONTROL & PROTECTION PANELS
1. General
This specification requires the design, manufacture, FAT, supply inclusive of
insurance, transport and delivery to site, testing and commissioning of SAS, Control
& protection panels for 230 kV Bays,110 kV bays, Auto transformers, Power
transformers, Capacitor bank,Buses etc and other associated equipments. The
equipments shall be capable of working satisfactorily in the intended environmental
conditions and suitable for satisfactory performance for the application.
The manufacturer of control & relay panels and SAS equipments offered by the
bidder is subject to approval of TANTRANSCO.
The equipments shall be capable of working satisfactorily in the intended
environmental conditions and suitable for satisfactory performance for the
application.
All the energy meters should be tested at site for the accuracy of energy
meters for all the parameters to verify the calibration of these meters. The test and
measurement instruments including the source used for the testing the calibration of
the energy meters at should be of valid calibration certificate from NABL/
International accredited Lab. Where ever the energy meters tested for verification of
calibration at site are having errors that are not confirming to the accuracy class of
the energy meter, then the erroneous energy meters should be recalibrated.
All calibration and the recalibration of energy meters should conform to the
IS/ Equivalent standards for calibration procedure and the test and measurement
instruments used for calibration should have a NABL/International standards lab
certified valid calibration certificate.
The Sub-vendor for supply, testing and commissioning of SAS, Control &
protection panels proposed by the bidder is subject to approval of TANTRANSCO and
should be qualified to satisfy the requirements stipulated below.
a. The sub-vendor should be a manufacturer of Control and protection panels and
349
substation automation system.The manufacturer should have at least three

years of experience in the manufacture of the above items.
Control and protection panels and substation automation system
manufactured by the above manufacturer should have been supplied to any
SEB/Public undertaking/power utility for application in 220 KV or higher voltage
rated substation equipments in India. Necessary proof for compliance to this bid
qualification requirement shall be furnished which shall include ISO Certificate or
Certificate of registration or Memorandum of association and End user certificate/
letter as proof.
b) The sub-vendor should have commissioned Substation automation system
(SAS) for at least ONE number 220kV/ 230kV or higher voltage rated substation
of SEB/Public undertaking/power utility in India.
The aforementioned SAS should be in satisfactory performance for at
least one year during the last five years from the date of tender opening.
Necessary proof in this regard should be furnished with authentication of the end
user.
c) The brand, make of SAS HMI application software and the Make, Hardware
platform for numerical protection relays for Main / Main-1/ Group-I application &
BCU proposed in the technical proposal for this tender should be the same as that
shown for compliance to the aforesaid sub-vendor qualification requirements
stipulated above.
2. Cabinet for Control & Protection Panel:
A) CONSTRUCTION:
Free standing simplex type, Metal enclosed with swing frame to house the devices
and an outer glass door. The gland and plate assembly shall be vermin proof. The
panel shall be designed for wiring access from front of the C&P panel Cable entries
to the panel shall be from the bottom. The design of the interior of the panel shall
allow sufficient access to the terminals of all devices for removal and repair. The
design shall ensure that the heat generated by various apparatus mounted in the
panel shall not affect the performance of any of the devices.
Dimension : Depth x width x height : 800 x 800 x 2312 (or more
including base frame) in mm
350
Degree of protection : IP-41 as per IEC 60529 / IS 12063

Tests : All type tests and routine tests prescribed in IS/IEC
60947 Low- voltage Switchgear and Control gear
standards shall be performed on the complete panel
assembly.
Thickness of metal : Minimum 3mm for planes housing the devices and for
bottom plates. Minimum 2mm for all other sides.
Swing frame :
Play of Swing frame : 120 degree or above capable of opening in the
opposite direction to glass door.
No of hinges : 3nos (minimum)
Door stopper : 1 No.
Protective Glass door : Splinter proof and transparent tempered glass of
minimum thickness 3mm.
Bottom plates : Knock slots shall be provided in the bottom plates
for facilitating cable entry at site.
B) PAINTING :
i) All sheet steel work shall be phosphated in accordance with IS-6005

ii) Oil, grease, dirt, swart, rust and scale shall be removed by adopting proper
cleansing procedure.
iii) After phosphating and thorough rinsing, the phosphate coating shall be
sealed with application of two coats of ready mixed stoved type zinc
chromate primer. The first coat shall be flash dried while the second coat
shall be stoved.
iv) After application of primer, two coats of finishing synthetic enamel paint
shall be applied, each coat followed by stoving
v) The colour of the panel shall match with the existing panel colour of subject
station and normally of following choice for new station.
Exterior - stoved enamel grey
Interior - stoved enamel white
Bus frame - stoved enamel black
351
Finish - glossy surface treatment shall be done as per BIS.

In case powder coating painting is adopted then the minimum thickness of paint
shall be 70 microns and subject to TANTRANSCO approval.
C) ACCESSORIES :
• A Door Stopper shall be provided with each door to hold it in the open position
at an angle/angles as specified for each type of panel.
• Door handle shall be provided with padlocking facility.
• Each cabinet is to be provided with removable type lifting eyes or lifting beams
installed on the top.
• Adequate ventilation openings in the form of louvers shall be provided. The
ventilation louvers shall be vermin proof and shall be provided with removable filters
or removable wire mesh to minimize ingress of dust.
• Labels to be provided at front and rear of the panel for each device.
Name plate to be provided on the top of each panel on front ,large and bold name
plates shall be provided for circuit/ feeder designation
• Name plate and labels shall be made of non rusting metal or 3 ply lamicoid.
Name plate shall be black with white engraving lettering.
Typical label size : Width: 1.5cm; length : as per the length of the inscription;
the letter size : 0.75cm.
• Panels shall have base frame with smooth bearing surface, anti vibration strips/
pad made of shock absorbing materials shall be placed between panels and base
frame.
• All doors, removable covers shall be gasketted all around with neoprene
gaskets.
• Necessary cable gland should be fitted. Cable gland plates fitted on the bottom
shall be connected to the earthing of panel/station through a flexible braided copper
conductor rigidly.
• Each panel shall be provided with space heater rated for 230V single phase
A.C. supply with controlling thermostat.
• All equipments in the panel shall be mounted and completely wired to the
terminal blocks ready for external connection. The spare contacts shall also be
wired upto the terminal block.
352
• Each panel shall be provided with the interior fluorescent lights of sufficient
illumination capacity controlled by door limit switch.
• A 240V single phase, 3 pin A.C. socket 15/5A with switch – 1 No.
• Accessories required for fixing the panel such as foundation bolts and nuts
shall be provided along with a panel.
• DC voltage of the panels:- As per station DC supply voltage.
D) CIRCUIT DISTRIBUTION AND ISOLATION :
i) Each C&P panel shall be provided with necessary arrangements for receiving,
isolating and fusing of AC and DC supplies for various control of signaling,
lighting and space heaters.
ii) Each of the distribution circuits and incomer circuits of the AC auxiliary supply
and DC auxiliary supply shall be provide with MCBs such as to ensure
selective clearance of sub circuit faults.
iii) All MCBs should be of suitable rating with auxiliary contact for trip indication
which shall be wired to SAS for alarm alert
iv) Potential circuit for metering and relaying shall be protected by fuses.
v) All fuses shall be of HRC cartridge type conforming to IS 13703 mounted on
plug in type fuse bases. All accessible live connection of fuse base shall be
adequately shrouded.
vi) Fuse shall have operation indications for indicating blown fuse condition.
vii) Fuse carrier shall have imprints of fuse rating and voltage.
viii) Removable links should be provided at the output of each relay for trip output
and reclose output. Adequate space shall be left between fuse units when
arranged adjacently.
E. PANEL WIRING:
i) Wire type :
Single core multi strand copper conductor wires with PVC insulation of FRLS
and shall be flame retardant, vermin, and rodent proof. 1100V grade for
CT,PT circuits. 600V/1100V Grade for other circuits.
ii) Flexible wires shall be used for wiring of devices on moving parts such as
swinging panels or panel door.
iii) Wire size :
353
4 Sq.mm for Auxiliary AC supply circuits.

2.5 Sq.mm for CT circuits, Command circuits, Earthing circuits and DC
Auxiliary supply wiring.
1.5 sq.mm for PT Circuits and all other circuits.
Higher size wires for all of the above mentioned circuits is applicable if
required as per engineering requirement.
iv) Panel wiring shall be securely supported, neatly arranged, readily accessible
and connected to equipment terminals and terminal blocks. Wiring gutters
and troughs shall be used for this purpose. All wiring shall be made without
splices
v) Cables/wires shall be uniformly bunched and tied by means of PVC belts and
carried in PVC carrying troughs. The position of the PVC carrying troughs and
having bunch of wires shall not give any hindrance for fixing or removing
relay casing, switches etc.
vi) Wire termination shall be made with solder less crimping type and tinned
copper lugs, which firmly grip the conductor. Insulated sleeves shall be
provided at the wire terminations.
vii) Engraved core identification plastic ferrules marked to correspond with panel
wiring diagram shall be fitted at both ends of each wire.
viii) The wire number shown on the wiring shall be in accordance with IS 5578.
ix) All wires directly connected to trip circuit breaker or device shall be
distinguished by addition of red colour unlettered ferrule.
x) Interconnection to adjacent panels shall be brought to a separate set of
terminal blocks located near to the slots or holes to be provided at the top of
the panel. Arrangements shall be made for easy connections to adjacent
panels at site and wires for this purpose shall be provided and bunched inside
the panel.
xi) Bus wires shall run at the top the panels. The terminal blocks for the wires
shall be with isolating links.
xii) The terminal blocks used shall be minimum 600V (For other circuits) /1000V
(for CT & PT circuits) grade and have 10A continuous rating, moulded piece,
complete with insulated barriers, stud type terminals washers nuts and lock
354
nuts suitable for operation with a tubular box spanner or screw driver.
Terminal blocks for CT and shall be of disconnect and link type. Terminal
blocks for VT shall be disconnect type.
xiii) Terminal blocks shall be arranged in vertical formation at an inclined angle
with sufficient space between terminal blocks with minimum of 150mm for
easy wiring.
xiv) Terminal blocks shall include a white fibre marking stripe with clear plastic,
slip on/clip on terminal covers. Marking on terminal strips shall correspond to
wire number and terminal number on the wiring diagrams.
xv) There shall be minimum clearance of 250mm between the first row of
terminal blocks and the associated cable and plate or panel side wall.
xvi) At least 20% of total terminal shall be provided as spare for further
connections and these spare terminals shall be uniformly distributed on all
terminal blocks.
xvii) For CT and CVT termination, links terminal blocks to be used shall have links
for disconnection and plugging in facility for testing purposes. Current
transformer secondary leads shall be provided with short circuiting and
earthing facilities.
xviii) Wiring is preferable with the following colour code.
PT supply : Red, yellow, blue for phase and black for neutral.
CT circuits : Red, yellow, blue for phase and black for neutral.
DC circuit : Grey for both positive and negative.
230V AC circuits : Black for both phase and neutral.
Earthing : Green.
xvii) Lugs : Solder less crimping type, Tinned copper lug. Ring type (Generally for
termination on devices). Flat or round type lug is not acceptable.
f. Earthing
i) All panels shall be equipped with bus securely fixed along the inside base of
the panels. When several panels are mounted adjoining to each other, the
earth bus shall be made continuous and necessary connectors and clamps for
this purpose shall be included in the scope of supply.
ii) The size of the earth bus shall be made of 25mmx6mm tinned copper flat.
355
iii) The earth of the substation will be 40mm diameter MS rods, provision shall be
made on the earth bus bars of the end panels for connecting to the earth
grid. Necessary terminal clamps and connectors shall be included in the scope
of supply.
iv) All metal case of the relays, instruments and other panel mounted devices
shall be connected to the earth bus by independent copper wires of size not
less than 2.5 sq.mm. The colour code of the earthing wire shall be green.
Earthing wire shall be connected on the terminals with suitable clamp
connectors and soldering shall not be permitted.
3.TRIVECTOR METER:
The tri-vector meter shall be AC static micro-processor based ABT type tri-
vector energy meters, DLMS (Category-B) compliant, suitable for availability
based tariff application. The meter should be capable to record and display
Active, Reactive and apparent energy and maximum demand for 3 phase 4
wire as well as 3 phase 3 wire AC balanced/ unbalanced loads without
effecting the accuracy for a power factor range of zero (lagging), unity and
zero (leading) for export and import as per the requirement given in this
specification. The meter shall be capable to measure in all the four
quadrants. The meter’s measurement of metering values such as Voltage,
current, frequency, energy etc shall be based on true rms measurements.
3.1 STANDARDS APPLICABLE
Sl.No. Standard No. Title
1 IS 14697 – 1999 AC static transformer operated
With latest amendment Watt
-hour and VAR-hour meters for
class 0.2s and 0.5s.
2 CBIP technical report no. 304 Specification for AC static
with electricity energy meters
latest amendment (only for
Magnet
compliance)
3 IEC 62053-22 with latest AC static Watt-hour meters for
356
amendment active energy, class 0.2 s.

5 IS-9000 Basic environmental testing
With latest amendment procedures for electronic and
electrical items.
6 IS 15959 DLMS Companion Standard (ICS)
Meters matching with requirements of other national or international standard

which ensure equal or better performance than the standards mentioned above
shall also be considered. When the equipment offered by the bidder conforms
to standards other than those specified above, salient points of difference
between standards adopted and the standards specified in this specification
shall be clearly brought out in the relevant schedule and copy of such
standards along with their English translation shall invariably be furnished
along with the offer.
Further, CMRI (Common Meter Reading Instrument) shall confirm to CBIP
Technical report no.88 with latest amendments.
3.2 TECHNICAL PARAMETERS
The energy meter shall be indoor type connected with the secondary side of
outdoor current and voltage transformers.
Supply system:
Rated Voltage : 3x110/3 V Phase to Neutral (3P4W)
3x110 V Phase to Phase (3P3W)
Rated current : 1 Amps / 5 Amps
System frequency : 50 Hz +/- 5%
Earthing system : Solidly grounded
Accuracy : Class 0.2S.
Actual primary values wherever applicable shall be programmable in the
meter as per the CT and PT value of the installed CTs and PTs.
3.3 GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
3.3.1 The meter should be micro processor based 3 phase 4 wire type suitable for
connection to 3 phase 4 wire as well as 3 phase 3 wire system.
357
3.3.2 The meter shall compute the active energy and load import; active energy
and load export from the substation bus bars during each successive 5 minute
as well as 15 minute integration period block and store it in its non volatile memory.
The duration of 5Min / 15Min duration shall be user configurable at site.
3.3.3 The metering system shall normally operate with the power drawn through
the PT secondary voltage.
3.3.4 The meter shall be capable of withstanding surges and voltage spikes as per
IS that occur in the PT & CT circuits of EHV switch yards by providing necessary
isolation and/or suppression system built in the meter.
3.3.4 The active energy measurement shall be carried out on 3 phase 4 wire
principle with accuracy as per class 0.2S of IEC 62053-22. The meter shall compute
the active energy import and export and average frequency during each successive
15 minute block and store in its memory along with its sign. It shall also display on
demand the active import and active export during the previous 15 minutes block.
The values may be displayed directly in secondary quantities.
3.3.5 Further the meter shall continuously integrate and display on demand the
cumulative active energy import and export from the substation up to date and time
of meter reading. The cumulative active energy import and export reading at each
midnight shall be stored in the meter memory for last forty-five (45) days and shall
be reported at Base Computer Software (BCS) end. Separate registers shall be
maintained for active energy import and export.
3.3.6 The average frequency (Hz) of previous 5 minute block as well as 15 minute
block shall be displayed on demand in the metering system.
3.3.7 The meter shall continuously compute the average of the RMS values (fundamental
only) of the 3 lines to neutral PT secondary voltage as the percentage of 63.51 V
and then display the same on demand.
3.3.8 The meter shall compute the reactive power (VAR) on 3 phase 4 wire principle
with accuracy as per IEC 60687-2000 and integrate the reactive energy
algebraically in two separate registers, one for the period for which RMS voltage is
higher than 103%(Reactive High), and the other for the period for which the RMS
voltage is below 97%.(Reactive Low). When lagging reactive power is being sent
out from the substation bus bars, reactive registers shall move forward. When
358
reactive power flow is in the reverse direction, reactive registers shall move
backwards. The Nett KVARH for voltage high (103%) & Nett KVARH for low voltage
(97%) both shall be displayed.
3.3.9 Further, the reactive energy shall also be available as four different energy
registers for viewing at BCS and on meter display:
Reactive energy lag while active energy import (Q1)
Reactive energy lead while active energy import (Q2)
Reactive energy lead while active energy export (Q3)
Reactive energy lag while active energy export (Q4)
3.3.10 Each metering module shall have a built in calendar in clock, having an
accuracy as per IS standard. The calendar and clock shall be correctly set at the
manufacturer’s works. Current date (day-month-year) and time (hour-minute-
seconds) shall be displayed on the front display section on demand. Clock
adjustment shall be possible at site using the common meter reading instrument
(CMRI) with proper security it shall be possible to set the clock with BCS clock.
An automatic back up for continued operation of the offered meters clock and
calendar shall be provided through a long life battery capable of supplying the
required power for at least 2 years under meter un-powered conditions. The offered
meters shall be supplied duly fitted with the battery that shall not be required to be
changed for at least 10 years as long as total VT interruption does not exceed two
years.
3.3.11 Each meter shall have a unique identification code (serial number), which
shall be marked permanently on the front as well as in its memory.
3.3.12 Each meter shall have a non volatile memory in which the parameters as
specified in this specification shall be stored. The non volatile memory shall retain
the data for a period not less than 10 years under un-powered condition; battery
backup memory shall not be treated as NVM.
3.3.13 All meters shall be totally identical in all respects except for their unique
identification codes. They shall be totally sealed with no possibility of any adjustment
at site except for clock correction.
3.3.14 The meters shall safely withstand the usual fluctuation arising during faults in
particular, VT secondary voltage 115% of rated voltage applied continuously and
359
190% voltage of rated for 3 seconds and CT secondary current 120% of rated
current applied continuously and 20 times of maximum current applied for 0.5
seconds, shall not cause any damage to or the mal-operation of the meters.
3.3.15 The meter should be user configurable for all the parameters at site using the
tools provided for the meter.
3.3.15 Power factor Range:
The meter shall be suitable for full power factor range from zero (lagging)
through unity to zero (leading). The meter shall work as an active energy
import and export and reactive (lag and lead) energy meter. The energy
measurement should be true four quadrant type.
3.3.16 Power Supply Variation:
The meter shall be suitable for working with following supply variation
Specified operating range - 0.8 to 1.15 Vref.
Limit range of operation - 0.7 to 1.2 Vref.
Frequency - 50 Hz  5%.
3.3.17 Accuracy:
Class of accuracy of the meter shall confirm to 0.2S as per the relevant
standard.The accuracy should not drift with time.
Each of the meter supplied should be tested and certified for accuracy from in
a NABL recognised laboratory in India.
3.3.18 Power Consumption:
i) Voltage circuit: The active and apparent power consumption in each
voltage circuit including the power supply of meter at reference voltage, reference
temperature and reference frequency shall not exceed 1.5 Watt per phase and 8 VA
per phase respectively.
ii) Current Circuit: The apparent power taken by each current circuit at basic
current, reference frequency and reference temperature shall not exceed 1 VA per
phase.
3.3.19 Starting Current:
The meter should start registering the energy at 0.1% ln at unity power
factor.
Maximum Current:
The rated maximum current of meter shall be 120% of basic current (Ib).
360
3.4 GENERAL AND CONSTRUCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS

3.4.1 Meters shall be designed and constructed in such a way so as to avoid
causing any danger during use and under normal conditions. However, the
following shall be ensured:
a) Personnel safety against electric shock
b) Personnel safety against effects of excessive temperature
c) Protection against heat & spread of fire
d) Protection against penetration of solid objects, dust and water
3.4.2 All the material and electronic power components used in the manufacture of
the meter shall be of highest quality and reputed make to ensure higher
reliability, longer life and sustained accuracy.
3.4.3 The meter shall be designed with application specific integrated circuits. The
electronic components shall be mounted on the printed circuit board using
latest Surface Mount Technology (SMT).
3.4.4 All insulating materials used in the construction of metering module shall be
non-hygroscopic, non-ageing and of tested quality. All parts that are likely to
develop corrosion shall be effectively protected against corrosion by providing
suitable protective coating.
3.4.5 The meter shall be suitable for being connected through test terminal blocks
to the voltage transformer having a rated secondary line to neutral voltage of
110/3 V and to current transformers having a rated secondary current of 1A or 5A
as per requirement. Necessary isolation and suppression shall also be built-in, for
protecting the meters from surges and voltage spikes that occur in the VT and CT
circuits of extra high voltage switchyards.
3.4.6 Each meter shall have test output devices (visual) for checking the accuracy
of active
energy (Wh), reactive energy (VARh) or apparent energy (VAh)
measurement using a suitable test equipment. This device shall be suitable
for use with sensing probe used with test benches or reference standards.
The test output device shall have constant pulse rate i.e. pulse/unit (KWh, KVARh)
and its value (Meter constant) should be indelibly printed/ appropriately
mentioned on the rating plate.
361
3.4.7 The metering system shall conform to the degree of protection IP 53 in the
normal working condition of IS12063/1EC529 for protection against ingress of
dust, moisture and vermin.
3.4.8 The meter base, meter cover, terminal block (as applicable) shall be made of
unbreakable, high grade, fire resistant, non-inflammable and good quality suitable
material to ensure safety. The manufacturer shall clearly indicate the material used.
3.4.9 The terminal block and the meter case shall be designed such that it ensures
reasonable safety against the spread of fire and shall not be ignited by thermic
overload of live parts in contact with them.
3.4.10 All terminals for CT and VT connections shall be arranged at the lower/ back
side of the meters. Terminal shall have a suitable construction with barriers
and cover to provide a safe and secure connection of CT & VT wires.
3.4.11 The metering system shall be compact in design. Entire design and
construction shall be capable of withstanding stresses likely to occur in actual
service and rough handling during transportation. The meter shall be convenient to
transport and immune to shock and vibrations during transportation and
handling as per the relevant standard. Meter shall have the capability and facility to
compensate for errors of external measurement transformers i.e. CT and VT
3.5 SEALING OF THE METER:
Reliable sealing arrangement shall be provided for meter to avoid fiddling by
unauthorized persons.
The meter cover shall have at least 2 sealing sources sealing arrangement
should be accessible from front only.
Separate sealing arrangements shall be provided for terminal cover.
Sealing arrangement should be suitable for application of poly carbonate
seals.
The manufacturer will provide his own seals on each meter before dispatch.
3.6 MARKING OF METER:
The marking on every meter shall be in accordance with IS 14697-1999.
Every meter shall have name plate beneath the meter cover such that the
name plate cannot be accessed without opening the meter cover and without
362
breaking the seals of the meter cover and the name plate should be marked
indelibly.
The basic markings on the meter name plate shall be as follows:
i. Manufacturer's name and trade mark and place of manufacture.
ii. Type designation
iii. Number of phases and wires
iv. Serial Number
v. Month and year of manufacture
vi. Reference voltage & Frequency
vii. Rated secondary current (Basic current & Maximum current)
viii. Principal unit(s) of measurement
ix. Meter constant (Impulse/unit KWh/KVARh)
x. Class index of meter
The marking shall be indelible, distinct & readable from outside the meter.
3.7 Connection Diagram and Terminal Markings:
The connection diagram of the meter shall be clearly shown for 3 phase 4
wire system as well as 3 phase 3 wire system, on inside portion of the terminal
cover and shall be of permanent nature or suitably pasted in meter. The meter
terminals shall also be marked and this marking should appear in the above
diagram. In case of any special precautions need to be taken at the time of
testing the meter, the same may be indicated along with the circuit diagram.
3.8 SALIENT FEATURES:
The metering system shall have the following additional salient features:
3.8.1 It shall be possible to check the healthiness of phase voltages by displaying
all the voltages on the display of the metering system.
3.8.2 The meter shall work accurately irrespective of phase sequence of the mains
supply.
3.8.3 The meter should remain powered up and functional even when either of any
two phases or anyone phases along with neutral is available to the meter.
3.8.4 The meter shall continue to record accurately as per prevailing electrical
conditions even if the neutral of potential supply gets disconnected.
363
3.8.5 The metering system shall be provided with adequate design to ensure
compliance to CBIP Technical Report No.304 (with latest amendments) for external
magnetic influence criteria (AC electro magnet or DC magnet).
3.8.6 It shall not be possible to change the basic meter software by any means in
the field. Moreover critical events like time set, MD reset operation, and tariff
change shall be logged by the meter. Such events shall be logged in roll over
mode for up to twenty numbers.
3.9 Display of Measured Values:
3.9.1 The measured value(s) shall be displayed through Liquid Crystal Display
(Alpha numeric LCD backlit) section of metering system.
3.9.2 It should be possible to easily identify the single or multiple displayed
parameters through legends/ unit on the metering system display.
3.9.3 The register shall be able to record and display starting from zero, for a
minimum of 1500 hours, the energy corresponding to rated maximum current at
reference voltage and unity power factor. The register shall not roll over in
between this duration.
3.9.4 Any interrogation/ read operation shall not delete or alter any stored meter
data.
3.10 Meter Serial Number:
In addition to providing serial number of the meter on the name plate, the
meter serial number shall also be programmed into meter memory for identification
through CMRI meter reading print out. The meter serial number shall also be made
available on the metering system display on selection of appropriate option.
3.11 Display, Load survey capability and billing point requirements:
The meter shall be capable of recording 5 minutes average as well as 15
minutes average of the following parameters for at least last 45 days and
shall display the following parameters on suitable selection through push
button:
Date & Time
Imp WH
Exp WH
Imp Varh lag Q1
364
Imp Varh Lead Q2

Exp Varh Lag Q3
Exp Varh Lead Q4
Voltage RN
Voltage BN
Voltage CN
AVG Frequency
The meter shall be capable of recording 5 minute average of the
following parameter for last 45 days
Date & Time
Imp WH
Exp WH
Imp Varh lag Q1
Imp Varh Lead Q2
Exp Varh Lag Q3
Exp Varh Lead Q4
Imp MD KW
Exp MD KW
AVG Volt Ph A
AVG Volt Ph B
AVG Volt Ph C
AVG Current Ph A
AVG Current Ph B
AVG Current Ph C
AVG Frequency
Net VARh High
Net VARh Low
5 minutes average as well as 15 minutes average of the above parameters
shall be available for last forty five (45) days. It shall be possible to select
either demand or energy view at the BCS end. The load survey data shall be
made available in the form of bar charts as well as in spread sheets at the
metering WS end. The Base computer software shall have the facility to give
365
the complete load survey data both in numeric and graphic form. All the 96
blocks shall be recorded for data indication on block day and no supply period
also shall be recorded .
3.12 Billing Parameters:
All billing parameters shall be transferred to billing registers; the
parameter shall be
Active energy import
Active energy export
Apparent energy while active import .
Apparent energy while active export.
Cumulative Reactive energies for the voltage high condition.
Cumulative Reactive energies for the voltage low condition.
3.13 DAILY MIDNIGHT PARAMETERS:
The meter shall store following end day parameters for last forty five (45)
days at 00:00 hrs.
Mid night Cum Imp WH (T)
Mid night Cum Exp WH (T)
Mid night Cum Varh High (V>103%)
Mid night Cum Varh Low (V<97%)
Mid night Cum Imp VARh Lag Q1
Mid night Cum Imp VARh Lead Q2
Mid night Cum Exp VARh Lag Q3
Mid night Cum Exp VARh Lead Q4
Other requirement as per CEA regulation
Above billing data, load survey data, anomaly information and instantaneous
parameters data shall be retrievable through the meter's communication port
through a common meter reading instrument (CMRI) using DLMS protocol as
well as transferred (down loaded) to a metering Work station to get complete
details for view and print. It should be possible to export the data so collected into
(common data format). The contractor will provide necessary facilities
for the same in the base computer resident software. The necessary base
366
computer software (BCS) for this purpose shall be provided with complete
details.
3.14 TOD (Time of day registers):
The meter shall have TOD registers for active energy import and export,
apparent energy import and export and apparent MD import and export.
Maximum eight time of day registers for each energy and MD can be defined.
It shall be possible to program number of TOD registers and TOD timings
through software/CMRI with multilevel password security system and
authenticated transaction.
3.15 Maximum Demand (MD) Registration:
The meter shall continuously monitor and calculate the average demand
(Active and Apparent) during the integration period set and the maximum, out of
these shall be stored along with date and time when it occurred in the meter
memory. The maximum demand shall be computed on fixed block principle. The
maximum registered value shall also be made available in the meter reading. The
integration period shall be set as 5 minutes as well as 15 minutes it shall be
capable to change to other integration period (30/60 minutes), if required, through
suitable high level software /MRI as an authenticated transaction.
3.16 Maximum Demand Reset:
The meter should have any of the following MD resetting options:
Auto reset of MD at predefined date and time shall be provided.
Resetting through meter reading Instrument or computer capable of
communicating with the meter with explicit password protection. The
manufacture shall provide a software module specifically for resetting MD through
MRI/Computer.
Manual via common MD reset button.
3.17 Data communication capability:
The metering system shall have multiple communication ports for local
reading and remote communication facility.
3.17.1 The meter shall be provided with a galvanically isolated optical
communication port. (Such as IEC, PACT, ANSI etc) with removable cover and with
367
locking arrangement so that it can be easily connected to a MRI / laptop for data
transfer.
3.17.2 The optical communication port shall, be compliant to DLMS protocol and,
also have a sealing provision.
3.17.3 In addition to the optical port, the meter shall be provided with RS-485 port
with DLMS protocol for interface to the Metering Work station, SAS and future
remote server through data concentrator device. The communication port
interface shall facilitate real time data acquisition of metered values and access
of store metering records.
3.18 Real time clock:
3.18.1 The meter offered should have a real time clock and calendar based on a
quartz crystal with a battery totally independent of power supply.
3.18.2 A lithium maintenance free battery of long life (minimum ten years) shall be
provided for operation of time clock. It should be possible to select the various time
zones for various seasons of the year through suitable software built into the
electronic register.
3.18.2 The accuracy of the clock shall not be less than 5 minute in a year or better.
3.18.3 It should be possible to reset Real Time Clock of the meter through a
manually triggered command from Base Computer Software.
3.18.4 The clock of the trivector meter should be synchronised with the GPS clock
of the SAS.
3.19 Self Diagnostic Feature:
The meter shall be capable of performing complete self diagnostic check to
monitor the circuits for any malfunctioning to ensure integrity of data in
memory location all the time. The meter shall have indications/ display for
unsatisfactory/non functioning/malfunctioning of the following:
a) Time and date and
b) Non volatile memory failure indication
c) Low Battery indication at BCS
Above indication should be made available at BCS end also.
While installing the meter, it should be possible to check the correctness of
CT/VT connection to the meter and their polarity from the functioning of the
368
meter for different voltage injections with the help of vector phasor diagrams.
For this purpose suitable software for field diagnosis of meter connections
with the help of MRI should be supplied.
The details of malfunctioning of time and date shall be recorded in the meter
memory.
3.20 Anomaly detection features:
The meter shall have features to detect the occurrence and restoration of, at
least, the following common ways of anomaly:
Missing potential: The meter shall be capable of detecting and recording
occurrences and restoration of missing potential (1 phase or 2 phases) which
can happen due to intentional/ accidental disconnection of potential leads.
CT polarity reversal: The meter shall be capable of detecting and recording
occurrences and restoration of CT polarity reversal of one or more phases.
Current and voltage unbalance: The meter shall be capable of detecting and
recording occurrences and restoration of unbalance of current and voltage.
Snap shots (numerical values) of phase wise voltages, phase wise active
currents, phase wise power factors and energy (active energy) readings shall
be provided with the above specified events.
Last hundred (100) events (occurrence +restoration), in total, shall be stored
in the meter memory on first in first out basis.
There shall be four separate compartments for logging of different type of
anomalies:
Compartment No.1 20 events of Missing Potential
Compartment No.2 20 events of CT Reversal
40 events for Voltage Unbalance,
Compartment No.3
Current Unbalance
20 events of Feeder Fail and Power
Compartment No.4
On/Off
Once one or more compartments have become full, the last anomaly event
pertaining to the same compartment shall be entered and the earliest (First
one) anomaly event should disappear. Thus, this manner each succeeding
anomaly event shall replace the earliest recorded event, compartment wise.
369
Events of one compartment/category should overwrite the events of their

own compartment/category only.
4. ANNUNCIATORS:
i) The annunciator unit shall be microprocessor based and field configurable. An
automatic self supervision system to monitor the functioning of the
annunciation system shall be provided with a means to alert the operator.
ii) The annunciations facia shall be provided with flasher, hooters and bell for
separate indication of tripping alarm/non-tripping alarms. All the panels
shall have the inter connection for accepting the alarm but the reset shall
be from the individual panel.
ii) The display in the annunciator unit shall be High density LED type or cluster
LED type.
Iii )Trip and non-trip discrimination shall be made in the fascia. For example
all trip fascia shall have red colour and non trip fascia white colour.
iv) A test, accept and reset push button facilities shall be provided for testing the
annunciation unit.
v) The annunciator unit should conform to the applicable parts of the IEC
60255/ Equivalent for type tests and routine tests.
vi) The annunciator unit shall be equipped with 230VAC/220VDC redundant
power supply modules.
5. General requirements for Numeric type protection relays
i) Technology shall be based on numeric type.
ii) Equipped with Event recorder. Events storage shall be sufficient for the
application. minimum 200 events of storage is preferable and with a time stamp
resolution of 1ms. It shall be possible to retrieve event records from the numerical
relay using software tools provided for the relay and facilitate viewing the event
records in pdf file format.
iii) Builtin disturbance recorder
Equipped with Disturbance recorder to record in digital oscillography of
instantaneous values simultaneously of all the hardwired protection core CT,VT
analog channels, hardwired relevant binary inputs, relevant virtual binary inputs
and outputs, binary events during faults and disturbances.
370
Trigger criteria and record length (pre-trigger and post trigger record length) for
the disturbance recorder should be user configurable. Trigger criteria shall be
user configurable to be triggered by any of the hardwired inputs
and outputs as well as virtual inputs and outputs , boolean logic, under/over
threshold
levels of relevant analog channels etc.
All disturbance records shall be in latest version of IEEE standard COMTRADE file
format and shall be accessible to any other third party device using IEC 61850
open protocol using MMS services.
The sampling rate of Disturbance recording shall be preferably 24 samples/ cycle or
higher.
Storage capacity for Disturbance record storage shall be sufficient for the
application. The disturbance recorder in the numerical protection relay for Main-
1/Main-2/ Group-A /Group-B / Main protection application shall be equipped with
sufficient memory so as to store up to 20 records of each record length of 3
seconds considering 8analog at sampling rate of 20 samples/cycle and 64 digital
input channels along with necessary virtual inputs/ virtual outputs channels for
application.
iv) All the Numerical relays shall have the capability for storage and display of fault
records
comprising information of Fault element, Type of fault, Value of fault in true rms
value.
For main protection relays: Minimum 12 fault records
For Directional over current and earth fault main protection relays: Minimum 8 fault
records
v) Relay casings shall have a degree of protection of IP 50 for relay enclosure,
IP50 for relay facia as per IEC 60529 or equivalent.
vi) Time stamping of events shall be of resolution of 1ms.
vii) Equipped with optical Ethernet port for Bay level LAN interface and Support
SNTP for time synchronization with resolution of 1ms., IEC 61850 protocol with type
test certification/report for compliance with relevant parts of IEC 61850. The
compliance shall include :
371
Model implementation conformance statement (MICS)

Protocol implementation conformance statement (PICS)
viii) Equipped with communication port (USB or RS232 or Ethernet port) for relay
configuration, Data and records retrieval. It shall be possible to carry out firmware
updates of the numeric relay through internet connectivity free of cost.
ix) Equipped with self monitoring feature during start up and always while in service.
A relay fail alarm should be available in dry contact type alarm output. A relay
healthy indication shall be provided. The numeric relay shall be provided with
diagnostic tools with which it shall be possible to identify and display all the
defective modules of the relay.
x) Provided with the necessary software tools for complete configuration of the
protection relay, record retrieval, data retrieval. All firmware updates to the
numeric relays shall be feasible to be effected with download of files from
the manufacturer’s website free of cost.
xi) Suitable to operate with the auxiliary DC supply voltage available in the sub-
Station (Nominal aux supply Voltage is 110V DC or 220V DC as per station DC
supply voltage.)
xii) Provision for display of alarms with LEDs, LCD/Graphic display. The LEDs shall
be user programmable to any of the hardwired inputs and outputs as well as virtual
inputs and outputs. Graphic or multiline backlit LCD display of suitable size shall be
provided for protection relay application for menu navigation, settings and
parameterization, monitoring measurement, Event, etc.
xiii)Support multiple relay settings for protection. The numeric relay should be
provided with a facility for settings file comparison. Facility should be provided to
view the abstract of adopted settings features of the relay.
xiv) All configuration files, data and records of the protection relay shall be stored in
a non-volatile memory and shall not be lost on absence of dc supply.
xv) The relays should be suitable for testing with universally acceptable testing kit.
xvi) The relay should be equipped with user configurable opto isolated Binary
inputs and potential free binary outputs as required for the specific application.
Numeric relays with non-programmable binary Inputs, non-programmable binary
outputs, non-programmable are not acceptable.
372
xvii) Where ever the numerical relay is connected to the 3phase VTs, the relay
should be equipped to display the angle of vectors with respect to A phase voltage
vector i.e Va angle=0 deg (Voltage vector of phase B and C with respect to Phase
A ) similarly current vector angle of phase A,B and C with respect to voltage vector A
for relay connected to 3 phase CTs.
xviii) All relays shall have screw type terminations for wiring terminations.
xix) Thermal with stand capabilities:
3x In - Continuously
100x In - 1 Second
40x In for 3 second
xx) Equipped with Trip rated binary output contacts specifically for tripping with
Minimum of 4nos for 3-phase breaker application and 6nos for 3x1-ph breaker
applications. The rating of trip rated contacts shall be:
Make and carry continuously :5A ,250V.
Make and carry for 0.2 secs : 30A.
Breaking capacity for DC : 75W.
Breaking capacity for DC (when L/R is within 40 m sec) : 30 W.
- For alarm contacts:
Make and carry continuously : 4A DC/AC
Make and carry for 0.2 secs : 30A DC , 300V.
Operating time shall be less than 10ms for output contacts.
xxi) Current circuit supervision : Open or short circuited current transformer cores
can cause unwanted operation of many protection functions such as differential,
earth fault current and negative-sequence current functions. Relay shall
incorporate continuous supervision of CT secondary’s against any possible open
circuit and if it occurs, shall render the relevant zone of protection inoperative
after a time delay and initiate an alarm. However facility to unblock CT
supervision in case of actual fault occurring in the circuit shall be provided.
Current circuit supervision compares the residual current from a three phase set
of current transformer cores with the neutral point current on a separate input
taken from another set of cores on the current transformer. A detection of a
373
difference indicates a fault in the circuit and is used as alarm or to block

protection functions expected to give unwanted tripping.
xxii) VT circuit supervision:
It shall detect single phase, 2-phase , 3-phase fuse fail conditions. VT fuse fail shall
automatically block directional protection elements, enable the non-directional over
current phase and earth fault protection elements. Retraction of VT fuse fail
condition shall be automatically unblock the directional protection elements. Fuse fail
condition shall not cause mal-operation of directional protection elements.
xxiii) Standards for type tests and routine tests compliance.
a) The numerical relay shall conform to the following standards with latest
amendments:
- IS 8686 in general with impulse Impulse Voltage Withstand Test and High
Frequency Disturbance Test as per Class III of this standard.
- IS 3231 (Relevant parts) / IEC 60255
- IEC 60255-22-2 : ESD
- IEC 60255-22-3 : Radiation susceptibility test
- IEC 60255-22-4 : Fast transient interference
- IEC 60255-21-2 : Shock test
- IEC 60255-21-1 : Vibration test
- IEC 60255- 11 : Alternating component (Ripple) in DC auxiliary energizing
quantity.
- Environmental performance requirements :
IEC 60255-1 : Operating temperature range
IEC 60255-1 : Storage temperature range
IEC 60068-2-30 : Humidity
b) In particular the following type tests should be complied.
a. Power Input:
i. Auxiliary Voltage
ii. Current Circuits
iii. Voltage Circuits
iv. Indications
b. Accuracy Tests:
i. Operational Measured Values
374
ii. Currents
iii. Voltages
iv. Time resolution
c. Insulation Tests:
i. Dielectric Tests
ii. Impulse Voltage withstand Test
d. Influencing Quantities
i. Limits of operation
ii. Permissible ripples
iii. Interruption of input voltage
e. Electromagnetic Compatibility Test:
i. 1 MHZ. burst disturbance test
ii. Electrostatic Discharge Test
iii. Radiated Electromagnetic Field Disturbance Test
iv. Electrical Fast transient Disturbance Test
v. Conducted Disturbances Tests induced by Radio Frequency Field
vi. Magnetic Field Test
vii. Emission (Radio interference level) Test.
viii. Conducted Interference Test
e. Function Tests:
i. Indication
ii. Commands
iii. Measured value Acquisition
iv. Display Indications
f. Environmental tests:
i. Cold Temperature
ii. Dry Heat
iii. Wet heat
iv. Humidity (Damp heat Cycle)
v. Vibration
vi. Bump
vii. Shock
viii. Siesmic
g. Degree of protection : Ingress protection as per IP 50 for relay enclosure,
IP50 for relay facia as per IEC 60529 or equivalent.
375
h. Safety
i. Relay characteristics, performance and accuracy test as per IEC 60255.
Steady state Characteristics and operating time
Dynamic Characteristics and operating time for distance protection relays and
current differential protection relays
j. Protocol certification for compliance with relevant parts of IEC 61850 Edition 2.
The compliance shall include :
c) All acceptance and routine test as stipulated in the relevant standards
should be carried out by the contractor in presence of TANTRANSCO’s
representative without any extra cost.
6. Electro-mechanical Relays:
i) All relays shall confirm to IS: 3231
ii) Unless otherwise specified all auxiliary relays and timers shall be supplied in
non-draw out cases / plug in type modular cases.
7. RELEVANT REFERENCE STANDARDS:
IS/IEC 60947 Low-voltage Switchgear and Control gear
IS – 3231 electrical relays for power system protection
IS – 8686 static protective relays
IEC 60529 Degrees of protection procured by enclosures (IP code 31).
IS – 1248 & IS – 2419 indicating instruments
IS – 0722 energy meters, control switches (LV switching devices for control and
auxiliary circuits)
IEC 60687 /IS 14697 AC static transformer operated watthour and Var-hour
meters.
IS – 0337,0337-1 -do-
IS – 0297(part 1-3) Dimensions for the mechanical structures of the
482.6mm (19”)series
IS – 6875 control switches (LV switching devices for control and aux. circuits)
IS – 0005 Colour for ready mix paints
IS – 1554(part –I) PVC insulated cables upto and including 1000 volts
376
IS –3842(part I-VII) application guide for protection

IS –6005 code of practice for phospating iron and steel
IES –602555-1-0 electrical relays –all-or-nothing elec. relays.
IEC – 60255-3,5,6,7,8,10,11,12,13,16 electrical relays for various specifications
IEC – 60255-21-2,3
IEC – 60255-22-1,2,3,4 electrical relays – vibration and disturbance etc.
IEC – 60255-23 electrical relays – contact performance
IEC 61850-3 EMI Immunity and environmental compliance(Electrical utility
substations)
IEC 61850 All applicable parts of this standard certified by KEMA/ reputed
laboratory. Including type test certification/report for :
For industrial computers :
Compliant to IS/ IEC/Equivalent standards for
Ingress protection : IP40 or better
Operating Temperature 0 deg to 40 deg
Operating Relative humidity Upto 95%
Vibration and shock resistant
EMC/EMI compliance for the intended substation environment.
Power supply compliance.
Note : For standards other than IS mentioned above, the equivalent or better IS
standards may be complied.
The complete substation automation system (SAS) with the control and
protection panels shall conform to NERC:CIP , IEEE1686,IEC 62351
standards for holistically providing cyber security for the entire SAS.
IEC 62351 : Power systems management and associated information exchange -
Data and communications security - ALL PARTS
8. 230kV LINE PROTECTION:
MAIN-I & MAIN –II DISTANCE PROTECTION:
The numeric distance protection relays shall be comply with the following
requirements.
377
1. The numerical distance protection relays shall comply with the specification for
general requirements for numerical protection relay as furnished in this
document.
2. The numeric relays shall be equipped with sufficient binary output contacts for
trip outputs, alarms, spare and for the protection scheme implementation.
3. The numeric relay shall be suitable for operating with Nominal PT input of 110V~
phase to phase, 63.5V ~ phase to ground, CT input of 1A.
b.For application in 400KV diameter bays, the CT inputs of main breaker and tie
breaker bays shall be wired separately to distance protection relay and the vector
sum of the CTs shall be calculated internally in the protection relay.
c. For application in multi circuit lines.
Relay shall have mutual zero sequence compensation unit for application on double
circuit transmission line wherein the relay should be capable of measuring and using
mutually coupled residual current information from parallel lines. The mutual
current should be measured by a dedicated analogue input.
4. Numerical Main -1 and Main-2 protection relays for line protection shall be of
different make or of different hardware platform and of different protection
algorithm.
5. Equipped with the following built in protection functions:
√ 21 : Distance protection
The distance protection relay shall have following maximum operating time
(including trip relay time, if any) under given set of conditions and with CVT being
used on line (with all filters included)
For Source to Impedance 4 15
ratio:
Relay setting (Ohms) 10 2
Fault Locations (as % of 60 60
relay setting)
Fault resistance (Ohms) 0 0
Maximum operating 40 for all faults 45 for 3 ph. Faults & 60
time (Milliseconds ) for all other faults
378
There shall be a minimum of 3 forward and 1 reverse selectable distance protection

zones. Have six independent loop measurements system to cater phase to phase
and phase to ground faults Polygonal characteristics for phase to phase fault and
polygonal characteristics for phase to earth fault. In case of polygonal characteristics
X and R or Z and R should be independently settable.
It shall also support MHO characteristic of phase to phase fault.
have an impedance setting range of 0.05 Ohm – 120 ohm
have a requisite independent continuously variable time setting with range 0-3 sec
Have a resetting time of less than 40 millisec.
have facility for zero-sequence compensation for earth fault on all zones of
measuring element suitable for single and three phase tripping
Have cross polarization, assure 100% directional sensitivity for unbalance
fault and memory for balanced faults.
Have built in fault locator with following features.
a) Shall display the fault location either in percentage of line length
or in actual distance in kilometer based on reactance setting.
b) Shall have an accuracy of +/-3% or better and watch dog output.
√ 98 : Fuse failure detection for single, two and three phases
The scheme shall incorporate necessary precaution in measurement to block the
distance protection. However, during blocking period the relay shall have over
current protection facility for fault detection. . zero sequence voltage detection for
VT fuse fail detection shall be used so that the relay does not mal-operate on system
ground faults
√ 50/27 : SOTF
√ 25 : synchro check function
√ 50BF : LBB Function
√ 79: Built in auto reclose function with single shot, single phase reclose with
adjustable dead time setting of 0.1sec to 1sec, and with adjustable reclaim time of
1 to 250sec.
√ 27/59 : Under voltage/ over voltage protection element. This protection element
should have two independent stages.
379
√ 50N/51N IDMT non-directional earth fault relay with adjustable setting range of
10 to 80% with characteristic curve for normal inverse, very inverse and extremely
inverse of both IEC and IEEE curves.
67/67N (DEF) Directional over current protection and directional earth fault
protection.
- There shall be provision to block DEF protection upon distance start
function.
- Polarisation : Voltage or current user selectable
- Characteristic : Definite time, IDMTL to be user selectable
√ DR : Disturbance recorder with minimum 8 analog and 12 digital inputs and with
minimum memory capacity to store at least 8 disturbance records with each record
of minimum 10 cycles.
√ Event recorder
√ Load encroachment discrimination facility to prevent false tripping due to
encroachment of heavy loads.
6. The distance protection function shall be provided with the following
functionalities,
features:
√ 68 : power swing blocking protection
The power swing shall be detected by rate of change of impedance with suitable
characteristics. The blocking shall have continuously adjustable time delay with
setting range of not less than 2sec or shall have feature to block the tripping as long
as it exists. The relay shall have feature to unblock during fault. It shall be explained
how blocking is effected during power swing for phase to earth fault, phase to phase
faults and three phase faults. In each case the relay shall have feature to unblock in
the event of actual fault and with facility to block each distance zone independently.
√ 85 : Communication aided schemes PUTT, POTT, Blocking, weak infeed and
current reversal logic.
√ 46BC : Broken conductor detection
7. Provided with metering function of class 1.0 accuracy or better and user
programmable display.
380
8. Equipped with sufficient numbers of programmable of opto isolated Binary

inputs and sufficient numbers of programmable potential free binary outputs with
wetting voltage for digital inputs to be field programmable to 48V / 110V / 220V DC.
Binary input Binary output LED (Minimum)

(Minimum) (Minimum)
For 230KV Line/ Feeder : 24 Nos. 20 Nos. 16 Nos.
How ever necessary I/O modules if required more than the minimum count
mentionedabove should be provided for the application including spare I/O points.
9. The minimum number of LEDs shall be 16 nos for important alarms and other
functions.
10.The relay should be equipped to display the angle of vectors with respect to A
phase voltage vector i.e Va angle = 0 degree (Voltage vector of phase B and C
with respect to Phase A ) similarly current vector angle of phase A,B and C with
respect to voltage vector A.
9. Numerical Line differential protection relay
a) For 230kV Line/Feeder Line differential protection application
a. Comply with the general requirements for numeric type relay in the tender
specification with the exception of the following aspects:
b. Longitudinal differential protection shall be based on current. It shall be numerical
phase segregated type protection scheme (summation CT type scheme is
not acceptable) for application at each end of the line. The protection shall
be designed to detect all kinds of poly-phase and ground faults. It operation
shall compare currents on a per phase basis.
- The protection shall be designed for fast operation and be suitable for protection of
lines.
- The relays when applied at both ends of the line must operate simultaneously to
clear a fault rapidly whether fault current is fed from one end or both.
-The relays should be designed to ensure time synchronization with the remote end
relay when same model relay is between put in service at the remote end of
381
the line with direct optic fibre connectivity of up to 10km distance or as

required for longer line at site for implementation of line protection.
- The relay must be compatible to operate with the remote end relay for
implementation of line protection.
-The relay shall have display for indicating/display phase, differential and bias
current magnitudes.
- The maximum operating time of the relay in respect of line differential protection
shall be 30ms.
-Each relay shall be equipped with Two channels of C37.94 standard compliant of
which one channel shall be Single mode 1310nm/1550nm to drive upto 30km
or higher as per the actual application and one channel shall be multimode
820nm/850nm to drive the connectivity length between Relay and the FO
MUX equipment. Necessary attenuators for optical signal wherever necessary
shall be provided.
-The relay shall be designed to measure the real propagation delay in either
direction,so that difference between a transmit signal sent via the two different
paths delays shall not cause mal-operation,errors in protection function. Accordingly
necessary time synchronization accuracy shall be achieved. The relay shall be
designed for continuity of differential protection, even if GPS outages are
encountered.
-Fiber optic patch cables with end connectors of sufficient length to connect the
relay port to the fiber optic patch panel shall be provided for each relay. Exact length
of this FO cable shall be ascertained at site, 1 set of FO patch cable is required as
spare for each site.
c.The relay shall be equipped completely with the distance protection and associated
functions, features and comply with specification as stipulated for numerical distance
protection relay for the respective voltage level Line/ Feeder application.
Relay shall have direct inter-trip/permissive inter-trip facilities selectable.
87L : Current differential protection
21: Distance protection
50/51 : Non-directional phase over current protection
50N/51N : Non-directional stand by earth fault protection
382
68 : Power swing blocking

b) For 110kV Line/Feeder Line differential protection application
The specification is similar to that specified for 230KV Line differential relay. The
distance protection shall be builitin.
10. 110kV LINE PROTECTION:
A. MAIN DISTANCE PROTECTION:
The numeric distance protection relays shall be comply with the following
requirements.
document.
2. The numeric relays shall be equipped with sufficient binary output contacts for
trip outputs, alarms, spare and for the protection scheme implementation.
phase to phase, 63.5V ~ phase to ground, CT input of 1A and 5A (user selectable).
4. Equipped with the following built in protection functions:
√ 21 : Distance protection
The distance protection relay shall have following maximum operating time
(including trip relay time, if any) under given set of conditions and with CVT being
used on line (with all filters included)
For Source to Impedance ratio: 4 15
Relay setting (Ohms) 10 2
Fault Locations (as % of relay 60 60
setting)
Fault resistance (Ohms) 0 0
Maximum operating time 40 for all faults 45 for 3 ph. Faults & 60
(Milliseconds ) for all other faults
There shall be a minimum of 3 forward and 1 reverse selectable distance protection
zones.
Have six independent loop measurements system to cater phase to phase and phase
to ground faults
383
Polygonal characteristics for phase to phase fault and polygonal characteristics for
phase to earth fault. In case of polygonal characteristics X and R or Z and R should
be independently settable. It shall also support MHO characteristic of phase to phase
fault.
have an impedance setting range of 0.05 ohm – 120 ohm
have a requisite independent continuously variable time setting with range 0-3 sec
Have a resetting time of less than 40 millisec.
have facility for zero-sequence compensation for earth fault on all zones of
measuring element suitable for three phase tripping
Have cross polarization, assure 100% directional sensitivity for unbalance
fault and memory for balanced faults.
Have built in fault locator with following features.
a) Shall display the fault location either in percentage of line length
or in actual distance in kilometre based on reactance setting.
b) Shall have an accuracy of +/-3% or better and watch dog output.
√ 98 : Fuse failure detection for single, two and three phases
The scheme shall incorporate necessary precaution in measurement to block the
distance protection. However, during blocking period the relay shall have over
current protection facility for fault detection.
√ 50/27 : SOTF
√ 25 : synchro check function
√ 50BF : LBB Function
√ 79: Built in auto reclose function with single shot, single phase reclose with
adjustable dead time setting of 0.1sec to 1sec, and with adjustable reclaim
time of 1 to 250sec.
√ 27/59 : Under voltage/ over voltage protection element. This protection element
should have two independent stages.
√ 50N/51N IDMT non-directional earth fault relay with adjustable setting range of
10 to 80% with characteristic curve for normal inverse, very inverse and extremely
inverse of both IEC and IEEE curves.
67/67N (DEF) Directional over current protection and directional earth fault
protection.
384
- There shall be provision to block DEF protection upon distance start

function.
- Polarisation : Voltage or current user selectable
- Characteristic : Definite time, IDMTL to be user selectable
√ DR : Disturbance recorder with minimum 8 analog and 12 digital inputs and
with minimum memory capacity to store at least 8 disturbance records with
each record of minimum 10 cycles.
√ Load encroachment discrimination facility to prevent false tripping due to
encroachment of heavy loads.
5. The distance protection function shall be provided with the following
functionalities, features:
√ 68 : power swing blocking protection
The power swing shall be detected by rate of change of impedance with suitable
characteristics. The blocking shall have continuously adjustable time delay with
setting range of not less than 2sec or shall have feature to block the tripping as long
as it exists. The relay shall have feature to unblock during fault. It shall be explained
how blocking is effected during power swing for phase to earth fault, phase to phase
faults and three phase faults. In each case the relay shall have feature to unblock
during fault and with facility to block each distance zone independently.
√ 85 : Communication aided schemes PUTT, POTT ,Blocking, weak infeed and
current reversal logic.
√ 46BC : Broken conductor detection
6. Provided with metering function of class 1.0 accuracy or better and user
programmable display.
7. Equipped with sufficient numbers (minimum is 12 nos) of programmable of opto
isolated input and sufficient numbers (minimum is 16 nos) of progrmmable potential
free outputs with wetting voltage for digital inputs to be field programmable to 48V /
110V / 220V DC. How ever necessary I/O modules if required more than the
minimum count mentioned above should be provided for the application including
spare I/O points.
8. The minimum number of LEDs shall be 14 nos for important alarms.
385
9.The relay should be equipped to display the angle of vectors with respect to A
phase voltage vector i.e Va angle=0 deg (Voltage vector of phase B and C with
respect to Phase A ) similarly current vector angle of phase A,B and C with respect
to voltage vector A.
B. BACK-UP PROTECTION FOR 110kV FEEDERS
: DIRECTIONAL O/C &E/F RELAY:
The relays shall be of numerical type
document.
2. The numeric relays shall be equipped with sufficient digital output potential free
contacts for trip outputs, alarms and for the protection scheme implementation.
phase to phase, 63.5V ~ phase to ground, CT input of 1A and 5A (user selectable).
4. Features and characteristics.
Current settings :
O/C Phase fault setting : 20 to 200 % of rated current in at least 1% steps
E/F setting : 10% to 80 % of rated current in at least 1% steps.
Time multiplier : 0.05 to 1.0 in steps of 0.01 for phase fault and earth fault
settings.
Definite Time Delay : 0.05 to 20 Sec. in steps of 0.01 sec.
Drop out to pick up ratio : > 95%.
Inverse Characteristic : Normal Inverse (3 Sec, 1.3 Sec), Very Inverse &Extremely
Inverse of IEC curves. ( Curves should be Selectable at site)
Characteristic curves and settings shall be separately selectable for phase fault and
earth fault.
High set Instantaneous Unit :
O/C : 50 % to 2500 % of rated current in steps of 50% or lesser step size.
E/F : 50 % to 500 % of rated current in steps of 50% or lesser step size.
Current settings o/c – 50 to 200% & E/F – 10 to 80% in convenient steps
Time multiplier settings 0 to 1 with a resolution of 0.01sec.
386
Have built in IDMT directional O/C and E/F relay with characteristic curve for normal
inverse, very inverse, extremely inverse of both IEC and IEEE curves Directional
element
P.T voltage : 110 V A.C
Phase fault : + 90 deg to -90 deg
E/F fault : + 90 deg to -90 deg
Equipped with in built 50LBB function.
Zero sequence voltage shall be based on 3-phase voltages.
5. Relay shall be provided with Event record & Fault record as stated below:
Storage and display of at least 100 event records with date and time stamp.
Storage and display of at least 16 fault records comprising information of Fault
element (R/Y/B/Earth) , Type of fault, Value of fault in true rms Amps.
6. Relay shall be provided with LED Indications for :
i) Protection healthy or In service
ii) Pickup
iii) Trip operated
iv) High set operated
v) Phase O/C operated
vi) Earth O/C operated
Note : Individual indication of hand reset type shall be provided for each O/C, Earth
fault element & each high set element.
11.BUS-BAR PROTECTION for 230 kV, 110 kV :
Numerical bus bar protection scheme shall comply to the following
requirements.
1. The numerical bus bar protection relays shall comply with the specification for
general requirement for numerical protection relay as furnished in this
document.
2. Bus bar protection relay shall be of numerical low impedance type,
Centralised architecture and shall have operate and restraint
characteristics.
3. Each Bus Bar protection scheme shall comply to the following requirements.
387
(a) have maximum operating time up to trip impulse to trip relay for all types of
faults of 25 milli seconds at 5 times setting value.
(b) Operate selectively for each zone of bus bars for all types of faults i.e Phase
to phase , Phase to ground faults including high resistive faults.
(c) Give hundred percent security up to the rated short time withstand
Current for 3 second duration for the circuit breaker and be stable for through
fault condition up to the rated fault level for the respective voltage level
application.
(d) incorporate continuous supervision of CT secondary’s against any possible
open circuit and if it occurs, shall render the relevant zone of protection
inoperative after a time delay and initiate an alarm. However facility to
unblock CT supervision in case of actual fault occurring in the circuit shall be
provided.
(e) phase segregated triple pole type and provide independent zone of
protection. Separate numerical relay shall be provided for each phase for
phase segregated bus bar protection. Necessary Numerical relay shall be
provided for acquiring the status of bay breakers, isolators and for binary
outputs for the bus bar protection scheme. All the IEDs, numerical relays of
bus bar protection scheme shall communicate with each other using IEC
61850 protocol.
(f) If bus section is provided, then each side of the bus section shall have
separate set of bus bar protection scheme. The bus section breaker and bus
coupler breakers shall be covered by overlapping bus bar protection scheme
of respective buses.
(g) shall include one overall check zone protection in addition to single/multiple
zones specified. Incorporate check zone feature for each phase and clear
zone indication. The check zone shall be without any switching. Also check
zone shall not over stabilize during internal fault due to unequal source & load
distribution.
(h) include provision for protection IN/OUT for each zone and check zone.
(i) be transient free in operation.
(j) includes continuous DC supply supervision.
388
4. The numeric relay shall be suitable for operating with CT inputs of 1A

(nominal). The secondary of the CT shall be directly connected to the Bus bar
relay without the aid of external auxiliary CTs. Ratio correction shall be
possible with through the relay configuration tools itself.
5. the relay must have harmonic rejection and shall not operate on second and
third harmonics. Second harmonic rejection ratio 2:1 minimum, third
harmonic rejection ratio 40 :1 minimum.
6. the high speed electrically reset high speed tripping relays (96) for tripping
each bay breakers on actuation of bus bar protection shall be on respective
bay protection relay panels and necessary provision for running the tripping
bus wires to actuate these relays shall be made. The protection scheme shall
be wired in such a way that both check zone and bus sectionalizing zone
schemes shall operate to isolate the respective faulty bus bar for internal fault
condition.
7. The relay should be equipped for number of bays as mentioned in price
schedule.
8. The bus bar protection relay should support various bus architectures
selectable by means of the relay configuration (Single bus bar, Double bus
bar, Breaker and a half bus bar, two section bus bar with a bus tie, Double
bus bar with transfer bus and tie breaker) for its bus bar protection.
9. The relay shall incorporate dynamic bus replica and provide necessary end
zone fault protection depending on the bus bar protection CT’s location. The
status of isolators, breaker shall be ascertained by hardwired double
indication method i.e Both N/C and N/O contact to be used.
10. The relay shall facilitate through relay configuration tools as well as through
user interface keypad/controls the following requirements:
- Adopting multiple CT ratios of different bays
- CT polarity selection
- Bay IN/OUT selection
- Bus differential enable or disable etc
- IN/OUT selection for each zone and check zone.
389
11. Facility to monitor the individual bay currents, bus differential currents and
bus restraint current for each zones shall be supported in the relay display as
well as through configuration tools.
12. The bus bar protection of respective bus sections shall trip respective set of
bus bar lockout relays and shall initiate BF of respective CB. The bus bar
protection scheme of each bus section shall be developed such that one
lockout relay shall be provided with each circuit breaker.
13. The bus bar protection relay shall be provided with built in breaker fail (50BF)
/ LBB protection implemented in the respective Peripheral bay unit for all the
connected circuits. For LBB protection
Operating time : 15 ms
Resetting time : 15 ms
LBB protection scheme shall be implemented to get individual initiation from
the corresponding phase of main protections of line for each over current
element. However common three phase initiation is acceptable for other
protections and transformer/reactor equipment protections.
Have setting range of 20% to 80% of rated current.
Have timer with continuously adjustable setting range of 0.1 to 1 second.
14. The relay shall be equipped with VT modules to measure the bus voltages so
that reference load flow can be taken from bus voltage as well as for providing
secure operation in case of inadvertent shorting of CT.
Note: In case separate LBB relay is stipulated for EHT breakers, then LBB relay shall
be provided accordingly even though Bus bar relay is equipped with built in LBB
protection.
12. TRANSFORMER PROTECTION (APPLICABLE FOR 230KV/ 110KV AUTO
TRANSFORMER ) :
12.1 Protection scheme for 230KV/110 KV Auto transformer shall be comprised of
2nos Numerical multifunction protection relays i.e. one for Group-A protection and
another for Group-B protection.
Group-A Numerical multifunction protection relays of different Make or different
hardware platform and protection algorithm with respect to Group-B Numerical
multifunction protection relay.
390
GROUP-A
Protection AC analog inputs to map
87T (Low Z) All 3 phases of HV CB CTs,LV CB CTs
REF (Low Z) All 3 phases of HV & LV CB CTs, Neutral bushing CT

67/67N (HV) All 3 phases of HV CB CTs, HV VTs
67/67N (LV) All 3 phases of LV CB CTs, LV VTs
Overflux
HV Winding,
LV Winding All 3 phases of HV VTs, LV VTs
Thermal over
load protection Relevant CT inputs
GROUP-B
Protection AC analog inputs to map
87T (Low Z) All 3 phases of HV & LV bushing CTs
REF (Low Z) All 3 phases of HV & LV bushing CTs, Neutral bushing CT

67/67N (HV) All 3 phases of HV CB CTs, HV VTs
Overflux
(HV Winding) All 3 phases of HV VTs
Thermal over
load protection Relevant CT inputs
87T : Low impedance differential protection

REF : Low impedance restricted earth fault protection
67/67N Directional over current and earth fault protection
i) General requirements for numerical protection relays for Group-A, Group-B
protection schemes shall comply with the following requirements.
a. The numerical differential protection relays shall comply with the specification for
general requirements for numerical protection relay as furnished in this document.
b.The disturbance recording functions should be integrated in the relay module. The
391
disturbance recorder shall have facility to record at least 4 numbers of digital signals
apart from digital signal from the relay and currents in HV&LV winding. Recording
memory capacity: 5secs.
c. Equipped with sufficient numbers (minimum is 16 nos. ) of programmable of
opto isolated Binary inputs and sufficient numbers (minimum is 20 nos.) of
programmable potential free binary outputs with wetting voltage for digital inputs
to be field programmable to 48V / 110V / 220V DC wherein minimum 4 nos spare
Binary inputs and 4nos spare binary outputs shall be provided apart from the
control and protection scheme application. How ever necessary I/O modules if
required more than the minimum count mentioned above should be provided for
the application including spare I/O points.
d. The minimum number of LEDs shall be 16 nos. for important alarms.
d. Separate CT core and PT core shall be used for Group-A and Group-B protection
scheme.
e) All the protection functions of Group-A protection scheme shall be implemented in
one numerical multifunction protection relay.
f). All the protection functions of Group-B protection scheme shall be implemented in
one numerical multifunction protection relay.
g) The disturbance recorder shall have recording memory capacity: 5secs.
ii) Specific requirements for bias differential protection for three winding
transformer protection :
1. Differential protection features and characteristics:
i. Based on low impedance differential principle for protection of three winding
transformer. Three phase with faulty phase identification.
ii. Shall have three instantaneous high set over current units with facility to
adjust 5 to 20 times normal current.
iii. Shall have second and fifth harmonic restraint feature with second harmonic
content in the range of 15 to 35% .Transformer inrush restraint functionality
shall be provided. Inrush and CT saturation shall not influence the differential
function.
iv. Facility to set transformer vector group and CT ratio selection/ correction
through relay configuration software tools.
392
v. Basic bias setting 20 to 40% in steps 1%.

vi. Operating current setting range 15% to 30%.
vii. have operating time not greater than 35ms at 3 times normal current.
viii. Maximum operating time for instantaneous operation: 25ms +/-4% of set
value.
ix. The differential protection shall have adjustable characteristics with adaptive
differential feature to maintain stability in case of through faults.
x. The protection relay shall be equipped with unrestrained differential protection
element for fast tripping on heavy internal faults.
xi. Facility to view the transformer differential current and bias current directly
from the Relay display as well as through configuration software.
xii. The protection relay shall be equipped with built in thermal overload
protection.
iii) over fluxing protection
i) The protection relay shall be equipped with built in Over excitation protection
(ANSI 24)/ Over Fluxing Protection for HV /LV side as specified and shall comply
with the following requirements:
(a) operate on the principle of Voltage to frequency ratio and shall be phase to
phase connected
(b) have inverse time characteristics, matching with transformer over fluxing
withstand capability curve
(c) provide an independent 'alarm' with the time delay continuously adjustable
between 0.1 to 6.0 seconds at values of 'v/f' between 100% to 130% of rated
values
(d) tripping time shall be governed by 'v/f' Vs. time characteristics of the relay
(e) have a set of characteristics for Various time multiplier settings. The maximum
operating time of the relay shall not exceed 3 seconds and 1.5 seconds at
'v/f' values of 1.4 and 1.5 times, the rated values, respectively.
(f) have an accuracy of operating time, better than +/-10%
(g) have a resetting ratio of 95 % or better
393
iv) Restricted Earth Fault Protection both for HV and LV side and comply to the
following requirements.
(i) be of low impedance type
(ii) be of current operated type low impedance type
(iii) have an operating current sensitivity of at least 10% of nominal current with
current setting range of 10-40% of 1 Amp.
(iv) be tuned to the system frequency
(v) Have a slope characteristic to provide a stability during external fault
(vi) Low impedance principle shall be complemented with directional or phase angle
measurement to ensure stability during external fault with CT saturation.
v) Thermal overload function
- Shall be of three pole type
- Shall be based on the thermal characteristics if the transformer by setting the
time constant of the transformer
- The trip level shall be settable from 110% to 150%
- An alarm shall be settable for thermal levels from 80% to 110%
vi) DIRECTIONAL OVER CURRENT PROTECTION WITH HIGH SET
INSTANTANEOUS FOR HV, LV :
The relays shall be of numerical type
document.
2. The numeric relays shall be equipped with sufficient digital output potential free
contacts for trip outputs, alarms and for the protection scheme implementation.
3. Ratio correction shall be possible with through the relay configuration tools itself.
The numeric relay shall be suitable for operating with Nominal PT input of
110V~ phase to phase, 63.5V ~ phase to ground, CT input of 1A through
Merging units.
4. Features and characteristics.
i) Equipped with three over current and one earth fault protection elements.
ii) Necessary VT fuse failure function for alarm.
iii) Over current relay shall
394
Have directional IDMT characteristic with a definite minimum time of 3 sec

at 10 times setting and have a variable setting range of 50-200% of rated
current.
Have low transient . over reach high set instantaneous unit of continuously
variable setting range of 500-2000% of rated current.
Have an adjustable characteristic angle of 30 to 60 degree lead
Shall have high set unit having low transient overreach & variable setting
typically 500-2000% of rated current.
Include hand rest flag LEDs.
iv) Earth fault protection
Have directional IDMT characteristic with a definite minimum time of 3 sec at
10 times setting and have a variable setting range of 10-80% of rated
current.
Have low transient . over reach high set instantaneous unit of continuously
variable setting range of 200-800% of rated current.
Have an adjustable characteristic angle of 30 to 60 degree lead
Shall have high set unit having low transient overreach & variable setting
typically 100-800% of rated current.
Include hand rest flag LEDs.
V) Neutral current protection (For single phase transformer bank)
Have directional IDMT characteristic with a definite minimum time of 3 sec
at 10 times setting and have a variable setting range of 20-80% of rated
current.
13.0 Under Frequency Relay :

* Comply with the general requirements for numeric type relay furnished in this
technical specification document.
* The relay support programmable scheme logic. The PSL shall support Boolean
logic and shall be possible to configure using preferably IEC 61131-3 standard
compliant tools.
395
* The relay shall be equipped with separate protection elements for 4

independent stages for under frequency protection, 3 independent stages for
(81RF) Frequency supervised rate of change of frequency protection.
* The relay shall have a discrete (digital) selection unit with built in timer and
associated tripping relays to activate tripping.
Under frequency protection function (81U)
1 No of Stages 4 independent Stages
2 Frequency range 45 Hertz to 55 Hertz

3 Frequency steps In 0.01 HZ
One timer for each stage independently
4 Timers programmable settings
5 Timer setting Programmable between 0 to 5 sec in step of 0.01 sec

6 Operating time Within 100ms
7 No of phases 3
Frequency supervised df/dt protection (81RF)
1 No of Stages 3 independent Stages

2 Settings range 0.1 HZ/Sec to 1 HZ/Sec in steps of 0.1HZ/Sec
Operational
accuracy 5 milli Hz./sec
Measuring
3 cycles Programmable between 2 to 10 cycles
4 Operating time Within 100ms
5 No of phases 3
* The relay shall be equipped with built in VT supervision function and 2
protection elements for under voltage blocking function selectable between
IDMT/DT to block all the frequency based protection elements. The under
voltage measurement shall be possible on phase to phase as well as phase to
neutral basis.
* The relay shall have negative sequence overvoltage function. zero sequence
voltage detection for VT fuse fail detection shall be used so that the relay does
not mal-operate on system ground faults
396
* Operating Voltage : 50 to 100% of nominal voltage with provision for

selection. Nominal voltage is 110V AC (Phase to phase). Ph-N (63.5V~ nominal
) voltage shall also supported.
Facility for under voltage blocking shall be provided with programmable range for
voltage setting.
* The relay functionality shall include measurement of phase/ line voltages (True
rms) , sequence voltages , system frequency and phase angles.
* Relay should have the capability to build the logic with which one should be
able to adapt to the load shedding requirement of the substation.
*Blocking of each of the protection elements shall be possible with user interface
through keypad/ buttons as well as through configuration port and Engineering
work station.
* The relay shall be highly reliable and immune to transient and surges. In case
of any component failure in the relay, the relay should not cause undesired trip.
Relay outputs:
* It shall be possible to assign each of the trip outputs reserved for feeders to
any of the three stages of under frequency protection function as well as f+
df/dt protection.
Indications
* The relay shall be equipped with indication lamps that is programmable to any
of the protection elements, inputs, outputs and logic outputs.
*Programmable LED indications shall be provided in the relay for each stage of
protection elements operated and for faulted phase indication.
Relay Inputs:
* The relay shall be highly reliable and immune to transient and surges.
* The relay shall be equipped with sufficient quantity of opto-isolated digital
inputs for facilitating external blocking of under frequency as well df/dt
protection elements for each feeder. Necessary isolation links should be
provided to facilitate manual isolation of under 81U and 81RF protection feeder
wise.
397
 The relay shall be equipped with sufficient opto-isolated digital inputs and po-
tential free digital outputs to accommodate feeders all the feeders plus 3 spare
feeders for future use.
14.0 MISCELLANEOUS PROTECTION
14.1 D.C. Supply Supervision Relay.
The relay shall monitor continuously D.C. Supply to Protection System. The
de-energization of this relay will indicate the DC Supply failure. Auxiliary
supply for the relay is 220V DC. The relay shall have a time delay on drop off
of not less than 100 milli second. The relay shall be provided with operation
indicators (Reverse flag) self reset. Sufficient number of contacts potential
free may be provided. Separate relays for dual source are to be provided.
14.2 Trip Circuit Supervision Relays.
The relays shall supervise the healthiness of trip circuit continuously (Both pre-
closing and post-closing conditions of the circuit breakers). The relay shall be
capable of monitoring the healthiness of each phase trip coil and associated
circuits of the circuit breaker during “ ON and OFF ” conditions. The relay shall
work on 220V dc with allowable margin as the case may be. The relay shall
have adequate contacts for providing connection to alarm and event logger,
self reset. The relay shall have a “ time delay on drop off of not less than 200
milli seconds ” and provided with Operation indicators. The short circuiting of
any series resistance provided in this relay or short circuiting the coil of the
relay should not energize the trip coil of the breaker.
14.3 Tripping (Master) Relay :
The relay shall conform to the following requirements.
i) Comply IEC 60255 standard relevant parts including the following tests
Contact performance Test
Rated burden Test
Mechanical durability Test
Insulation test and impulse Tests
Performance test
Degree of protection of enclosure
398
ii) Operating time including contact debounce shall be maximum 10 milli

second.
iii) Immune to capacitive discharge due to earth fault in DC
cable .Immune to DC leakage conditions and shall not mal-operate.
iv) Continuous duty operation
v)Dust-proof with a transparent plastic cover accordingly the relay shall
be hermitically sealed.
vi) Low power consumption
vii) Long mechanical life
viii) Satisfactory Electrical and mechanical endurance performance
ix) LED or Mechanical flag with Hand or electrical reset
x) Hand and electrical reset contacts
xI) very high degree of contact reliability accordingly twin contact shall be
provided for each signal i.e has two contact elements on each contact
member
i) Reset within 20 milli seconds.
j) Have adequate contacts to meet the requirement of scheme, other
functions like auto reclose relay, LBB relay as well as to cater to
associated equipments like SER, DR etc., to be provided with operation
element/ coil. Supervision of master trip relays shall be provided for alert
to user through SAS.
14.5 Check Synchronizing relay:-
Synchro check function should be part of the main relay.
The synchronism and energizing check functions shall feature:
Settable voltage, phase angle, and frequency difference.
Energizing for dead line - live bus, live line - dead bus or dead line– dead bus
with no synchro-check function.
Synchronising between live line and live bus with synchro-check function.
The relays equipped with synchronism and energizing check shall comply with
the requirements as mentioned above.
14.6. Relay for Automatic DC selection
399
Relay for automatic DC selection shall comply with the relevant parts of IEC
60255 / IS standards. The performance of the relay shall be satisfactory so as to
facilitate minimum interruption of DC during DC change over and the DC
interruption during change over shall not cause the numeric relays to reboot /
switch off, also all the numeric relays shall be type tested for DC supply
interruption and suitable to function without reboot/power off during the DC
change over. In case diode o’ ring based DC selection scheme is proposed, then
the scheme should ensure that any kind of component failure will not cause
shorting of the input DC sources, the dielectric isolation between the two input DC
sources should be sufficient for safe operation.
15. 110 KV Power Transformer protection scheme
Applicable for 110 KV / 33 kV Power transformer, 110 KV / 22 kV Power
transformer, 110 KV / 11 kV Power transformer
Separate numerical multifunction relay shall be provided for main protection scheme
and for Backup protection scheme for 110 KV Power transformer.
Main protection for 110KV Power transformer :
87T : Low impedance differential protection (Wire 3-phase CTs of HV and LV side)
REF: Low impedance Restricted earth fault protection (Wire 3-phase CTs of LV
Bushing, Neutral bushing CT of LV winding.
67/67N Directional over current and earth fault protection for 110 kV HV side Over
flux protection for 110 kV HV side (Wire HV 3-phase VTs)
LBB Protection
Thermal overload protection
Backup protection for 110KV Power transformer :
67/67N Directional over current and earth fault protection for 110 kV HV side (Wire
HV 3-phase CB CTs, HV 3-phase VTs)
LBB Protection
16.0. Auxiliary electro mechanical relay for trip signaling and Alarm
signaling
Where ever electro-mechnical relay is used for contact multiplication purpose for
signaling trip signals pertinent to transformer trouble trip, Direct trip send, Direct
trip receive Signals etc those relays shall conform to the following requirements.
400
i) Comply IEC 60255 standard relevant parts including the following tests
Contact performance Test
Rated burden Test
Mechanical durability Test
Insulation test and impulse Tests
Performance test
Degree of protection of enclosure
ii) Operating time including contact debounce shall be maximum 15 milli second.
(Applicable for trip signals application)
iii) Immune to capacitive discharge due to earth fault in DC cable .Immune to
DC leakage conditions and shall not mal-operate.
iv) Continuous duty operation
v)Dust-proof with a transparent plastic cover accordingly the relay shall be
hermitically sealed.
vi) Low power consumption
vii) Long mechanical life
viii) Satisfactory Electrical and mechanical endurance performance
ix) LED or Mechanical flag with Hand or electrical reset
x) Self reset contacts
xI) very high degree of contact reliability accordingly twin contact shall be
provided for each signal i.e has two contact elements on each contact member
xi) Supervision of auxiliary relays used for trip signaling shall be provided for
alert to SAS.
401
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR SUB-STATION AUTOMATION SYSTEM

(SAS)
1. GENERAL :
a) This specification provides for complete Design & Engineering, Manufacture,
FAT (Factory acceptance test), packing, shipment, insurance, transport and
delivery to stipulated destination, installation, testing and commissioning with SAT
(Site acceptance test) of the substation automation system completely as
described in the following sections to control and monitor the 230 kV GIS bays,
110 kV GIS bays, 230KV/110KV power transformers, 110KV switchgear, RMUs
(pertinent to station HT supply if any) and associated equipments at the
substation and all the station auxiliary equipments of the substation.
All material and works towards field interface of SAS to the
switchgears,CT’s,PT’s,power supply equipment, communication equipment etc are
in the scope of the bidder. In case a SCADA RTU is in the scope of supply in the
turnkey project for each substation, then integration of SCADA RTU with the
respective SAS is in the scope of works the SAS.
The details of equipments to be controlled are given in the single line
diagram.
The substation automation system shall be installed to control and monitor all the
substation equipments from Local Control room as well as from the remote load
dispatch centre/ Master.
All the LCC for GIS bays shall be equipped with annunciation unit to indicate
separately the each of the GIS bay alarms and the same shall be provided in the
SAS. The MCBs for DC auxiliary power supply shall be provided with auxiliary
contact for alarm in SAS for trip.
230KV/110KV Auto transformers,RMUs (pertinent to station HT supply if any)
and associated equipments at the substation and all the station auxiliary
equipments of the substation.
The scope of SAS commissioning is inclusive of the system integration with
the SAS of the following items: Control & protection panels for 230 kV GIS bays,
110KV GIS bays,230KV/110KV Auto transformers, control switching devices (CSD)
if any, Online diagnostic monitoring system for Auto transformers,Bushings,GIS
402
etc in this context all necessary materials and works are included in the SAS scope
of supply and commissioning, Station auxiliaires and other associated equipments.
Communication interface between field device of online diagnostic monitoring
system for transformers,bushings and the associated Work station should be
using fibre optic cable only as the this media is necessary to protect from Electro
magnetic interference and the high voltage surges experience in the switch yard.
The testing and commissioning of the SAS Equipments shall be carried out by
engineers authorized /certified by the original equipment manufacturer of SAS
with the witness of the concerned TANTRANSCO P&C engineer and the
completion of all the works should be to the satisfaction of TANTRANSCO. All
the relevant files such as ICD, SCD,SSD,CID etc shall be updated in the relevant
devices and provided in soft copy in CD and in a Spare HDD (Spare HDD to be
supplied in the spares for SAS) to the concerned Protection & Communication
engineer of TANTRANSCO.
The details of Electrical bays in the substation are given in the single line diagram of
respective substation.
1.1) Means of SCADA Monitoring of 33KV & 11KV Bays:
a) MV Switch gear panel scope:
In the scope of supply of 33KV & 11KV Switch gear panels, the following devices
are to be provided.
i) (BCPU with Edition 2 IEC 61850 protocol ) Bay control and control protection
unit for each of the 33KV switch gear panels as well as for each of the 11KV
switch gear panels.
ii) ABT class Static trivector meter (with rear RS 485 port with DLMS protocol,
Class 0.2s accuracy, Self Powered fromVT secondary ) for each of the Switch
gear panels for 33KV LVs, 33KV Feeders, 11KV LVs, 11KV Feeders.
iii) Multifunction energy meter (IEC 60688 standard, Class 0.2 Accuracy, Four
quadrant metering, RS 485 MODBUS port, Auxiliary DC supply powered) for each
of the switchgear panels for 33KV Bay as well as 11KV Bays.
b) SCADA RTU (for 33KV & 11KV) scope:
In the scope of supply, erection and commissioning of SCADA RTU with LDMS the
following are included.
403
Integration of BCPUs for 33KV & 11KV Bays with SCADA RTU using IEC 61850
Edition 2 protocol.
Integration of Multifunction energy meter for 33KV & 11KV Bays with SCADA RTU
using MODBUS protocol.
All necessary Fiber optic cables, Ethernet switches,LIUs, LAN devices etc to
integrate the BCPUs, Energy meters with SCADA RTU is inclusive of the scope of
supply, erection, testing and commissioning of SCADA RTU.
c) SAS Scope :
In the scope of supply, erection and commissioning of SAS for 230/110KV GIS the
following are included.
Integration of ABT class Static trivector meters for 33KV & 11KV Bays with SAS
using DLMS protocol through metering data concentrator.
Integration of SCADA RTU designated for 33KV & 11LKV bays with SAS using IEC
61850 / IEC 60870-5-104 protocol so as to control and monitor the 33KV & 11KV
bays from SAS HMI. The protocol among this shall be decided by TANTRANSCO
during project engineering stage.
All necessary Fiber optic cables, Ethernet switches,LIUs, LAN devices etc to
integrate the SCADA RTU with SAS is inclusive of the scope of supply, erection,
testing and commissioning of SAS.
2.1 Detailed specification
The substation automation system (SAS) shall be installed to control and monitor
all the substation equipments from Local Control room as well as from the remote
load dispatch centre/ Master. The SAS shall be designed such that it enables the
user for control & monitoring of the substation at the HMI level (through
Operator work stations), at the Bay level ( through BCU) and at the switchgear
level/Manually (facilitated by TNC switch, Energy meters etc).
The SAS shall be based on a decentralized architecture and on a concept of bay-
oriented, distributed intelligence. Functions shall be de-centralised, object-
oriented and located as close as possible to the process. The main process
information of the station shall be stored in distributed databases. The typical SAS
architecture shall be structured in two levels i.e. station and bay level. The
404
database sizing shall be sufficient to accommodate for current Single line diagram
and future expansions.
At bay level, the IEDs shall provide all bay level functions regarding control,
monitoring and protection, inputs for status indication and outputs for commands.
The IEDs should be directly connected to the switchgear without any need for
additional interposition of transducers.
The data exchange between the electronic devices on bay and station level
shall take place via the communication infrastructure. This shall be realized
using fiber optic cables, thereby guaranteeing disturbance free
communication. The fiber optic cables shall be run in suitable conduit pipes.
Data exchange is to be realized using IEC 61850 standards with a external
managed switched Ethernet communication infrastructure in decentralized
ring configuration.
All the numerical IEDs must be fully IEC 61850 compliant and must have the
following features.
Peer-to-peer communication using GOOSE messages (IEC 61850) for
interlocking.
Interoperability with third party IEC 61850 compliant devices
Generate XML file for integration/engineering with vendor independent
SCADA systems.
Should be directly connected to the inter bay bus on IEC 61850 without the
use of any gateways. Connections of bay protection IEDs to the IEC 61850 bus
through the bay control units are not acceptable.
The sub-station configuration language shall be based on XML format shall be
defined for system configuration and the same shall be furnished for system
integration and end user.
Failure of one set of fiber shall not affect the normal operation of the SAS.
However, it shall be alarmed in SAS. Each fiber optic cable shall have adequate
spare fibers.
At station level, the entire station shall be controlled and supervised from the
station HMI. It shall also be possible to control and monitor the bay from the bay
level equipment at all times, accordingly a graphic user interface (GUI) display shall
405
be provided in each bay control unit. The GUI display in the BCU shall display the
status of the bay devices (breakers, isolators, switches etc) in real time along with
the related measurands. All alarms related to the respective bay shall be displayed
in the BCU through its LED’s or in its GUI display as an alarm list/scroll. A TNC switch
shall be provided for each breaker in the respective C&P panel of the bay for
facilitating manual operation for facilitating operation in emergency condition. The
BCU’s shall be located in the respective relay panel itself and Multiple BCU’s shall not
be housed in a single panel.
Clear control priorities shall prevent operation of a single switch at the same time
from more than one of the various control levels, i.e. station HMI, bay level or
apparatus level. The priority shall always be on the lowest enabled control level. The
station level contains the station-oriented functions, which cannot be realized at bay
level, e.g. alarm list or event list related to the entire substation etc. All the data
cabling & other interconnections shall be through fibre optic cables wherever
possible except for power supply.
Communication with the remote control centers State Sub-load Dispatch Centre
through Gateway on IEC 60870 – 5 – 101/104 of SCADA/EMS system through
PLCC Modem’s/Fibre optic interface equipment as applicable. This interface
shall support communication to the remote control centre on IEC 60870 – 5 –
101/104 through redundant communication ports. TAN TRANSCO Engineers
shall be coordinated for integration. The data should be made available for
the polling schedule of the SCADA/EMS system at State Sub-load Dispatch
control centre. Any support required for completing the task shall be in
bidders scope.
The complete substation automation system (SAS) with the
control and protection panels shall conform to NERC:CIP ,
IEEE1686,IEC 62351 standards for holistically providing cyber
security for the entire SAS. Accordingly all the necessary hardware,
software, firmware, design shall be incorporated with the
compliance to the aforementioned cyber security standards
including the testing and commissioning of the substation
automation system (SAS) and control and protection panels.
406
2.2. FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS :

Control of all equipments mentioned in the Single Line diagram.
Supervisory function (i.e.) Data Acquisition, Processing,
Monitoring, Analysis and Diagnostic,Data Exchange
Report Generation and Printing.
The updating times on the operator station under normal and
calm conditions in the substation shall be as follows:
Function Typical values
Exchange of display (first reaction) <1s
Presentation of a binary change in the process display < 0.5 s
Presentation of an analogue change in the process display < 1 s
From order to process output < 0.5 s
From order to updating the display < 1.5 s
2.3 CONTROL:
Basic Functions :
To execute commands from both operator work stations HMI.
Select before execute commands.
Operation of all 230 kV and 110 kV Circuit breakers and all the associated motorized
disconnectors through output contacts of corresponding BCUs.
Operation of On load Tap Changer: Manual Operation from HMIs through BCU is
envisaged.
Provide interlocking of different switchgear/isolators for their correct and safe
operation. Monitoring of Circuit breakers, Isolators and Earth Switch contacts
(status)
Monitoring of Circuit breakers, Isolators/Disconnectors and Earth Switch contacts
(status)
Remote operation from SAS of the RMUs (pertinent to station HT supply)
2.4 OTHER FUNCTIONS:
Switching sequences.
Time synchronizing through GPS.
Monitoring of DC system input & output supply Voltages of chargers, load currents,
Battery voltages etc.
407
Monitoring of fire-protection system.

Monitoring of DG operation.
Changing relay settings of all numerical relays from Engg./DR works station with
suitable software.
Storage of data.
Collection of disturbance record files from various relays and analysis of the same
from Engg/DR works station with suitable software.
Auto re closure selection and monitoring.
Bus PT change-over.
Carrier IN/OUT selection.
Synchro check provision.
Reset facility from HMI for reset of all numerical relays, master trip relays.
Monitoring of control room temperature, kiosk room temperature etc.
2.5 INTERLOCKING:
The interlocking function provision through logic gates prevents unsafe
operation of equipments such as breakers, isolators and earthing switches for all
switching operation within a bay or station . An override function at Bay level
shall be provided, which can be enabled to by-pass the interlocking function via
a key/password, in cases of maintenance or emergency situations. This over
ride function should be accessed with higher level pass word security. All critical
interlocks such as close operation of breakers and isolators etc shall be
implemented in hardwired method also. In order to provide additional security
for safe operation of the primary equipments, the hard wired interlock shall also
be implemented preferably at the yard control cubicle.
2.6 SUPERVISORY FUNCTION: DATA ACQUISITION, PROCESSING
MONITORING, ANALYSIS AND DIAGNOSTICS.
The status of each switchgear, e.g., circuit breaker, isolator, transformer tap
changer etc., shall be continuously acquired through polling sequences. ie.,
- Polling on request
- Automatic Polling (Every 5sec, 10sec,….)
- Polling by exception (change of digital status)
408
Every detected change of position shall be immediately visible on the screen

in the single-line diagram, recorded in the event list, Alarms shall be initiated in
cases when spontaneous position changes have taken place.
Each position of an apparatus shall be indicated by two binary auxiliary
switches which are opposite each other in normally closed (NC) and normally
opened (NO) position. An alarm shall be initiated if these position indication
indicate an excessive running time of the operating mechanism to change
position through watchdog timers.
2.7 DATA ACQUISITION, PROCESSING AND MONITORING:
Conventional interlock through hardware wiring is to be provided in addition
to the software interlock. The BCU shall be located in the relay panel itself. The
main and redundant station HMI should be located in the operator table. The
distance between the BCU and the HMI will vary according to site conditions
during execution. Bay control shall be provided to each bay and the number of
bays to be provided in each substation as per SLD is furnished in the bill of
materials.
The SA system shall acquire data (analog and digital inputs) from 1)
Numerical relays Electronic Energy meters (to be made available in all the
feeders, transformers both HV & LV sides). 2) OLTC, Battery charger etc.,.
Data for the system shall be acquired as hard wired input for all station
equipments stated in the single line diagram.
2.8 Automatic Disturbance File Transfer
All recorded data from the IEDs with integrated disturbance recorder systems
shall be automatically uploaded to a station HMI database. All the analog values
shall in the disturbance records shall be displayed in primary values. A dedicated
computer as relay engineer’s console (EWS) shall be offered for analysis of
records additionally.
Initiating of Disturbance record in all the bays for trip of any particular bays shall
be provided by suitable GOOSE configuration and the SAS configuration.
Necessary configuration of all the relevant numerical relays, IEDs and BCU shall
be carried out.
409
2.9 DATA REQUIRED:

For each 230KV /110KV GIS Bay :
Multistage alarms, Status for each GIS compartment phase wise as given below.
230KV GIS as well as 110KV GIS Breaker compartment alarms shall be provided with
separate alarms as below.
Where ever the GIS is phase segregated, all the alarms shall be phase wise
segregated .
Gas Pressure High Alarm
Gas Pressure Low : Stage wise.
Operating mechanism alarms
Necessary GIS alarms for CB close/trip interlock and block,To initiate zone trip of
other breakers connected to the bus of the breaker GIS bay and to trip the remote
end of the feeder / HV/LV side for transformer bay shall be engineered in line with
the GIS design.
CB compartment alarm shall include the following alarms and other necessary
alarms.
- CB trouble alarm
-Auxiliary supply fail alarm in respect of auxiliary supply to switchgears
- CB oil level low alarm
- Reclosing alarm
- Pole discrepancy operated
- Local / Remote switch status
- Normal / Maintenance switch status
- Auxiliary DC & AC Supply Fail alarm ( At LCC)
- Switchgear status (Double indication wiring) for circuit breaker, Disconnector, Earth
switch etc.
SAS Device alarms (Applicable for each device)

- Numerical relay Fail/ Faulty
- BCU Fail/ Faulty
- Ethernet switch Fail/ Faulty
- Numerical relay Fail/ Faulty
410
- IED Fail/ Faulty

- Gateway, Data concentractor Fail/ Faulty
- Inverter fail alarm
- Auxiliary supply Battery Chargers, DCDB, ACDB trip / fail alarms.
- GPS fail/ faulty alarm.
Control & protection panels
- Selector switch status position wise in all control & protection panels, SAS.
- Trip circuit supervision alarms
- Supervision alarms for tripping and lock out relays.
- DC Fail alarms.
- All Protection function elements operated and alarms as applicable for each Feeder
bay, ICT, Power transformer, Reactor, Busbar protection, UF & Over /under voltage
protection etc.
- All trip and lock out relay operated signals.
-All Permissive, DTT, Carrier send/receive signals.
For distance protection: Distance to fault in km, Zone start, operated phase wise
- Virtual signals deduced from Boolean logic, automation logic etc.
Station Auxiliaries:
All necessary Alarms pertinent to:
- Fire alarm system
- Visual monitoring system.
- DG set and Auxiliary power supply control panel.
- All other substation auxiliaries.
- All Communication equipment alarms includes PLCC, Fiber optic, Digital
protection couplers etc.
Control, metering and monitoring of RMUs (pertinent to station HT supply), in this
context all necessary BCU/IED for RMU control, status and transducers for
monitoring the Metering values, communication cables etc are inclusive of scope of
supply,Erection, testing and commissioning of SAS.
The SAS HMI shall acquire the following records and files to present the
oscillography, trend curves and facilitate view in SAS operator work stations and
view and analysis in Engineering work station :
411
- Oscillography in IED, Numerical relays, BCU, Digital fault recorder etc.

- Disturbance records in IED, Numerical relays, BCU, Digital fault recorder etc.
- Fault records in IED, Numerical relays, BCU, Digital fault recorder etc.
- Metering
The SAS HMI shall acquire the analog measurands and analog Measurements
(U, P, Q, F etc)
The analog values shall be displayed locally, on the HMI, Threshold limit values shall
be selectable for alarm actuation.
KW, KVA, V,I, PF, kWh, kVah and kVarh from electronic energy meters (four
quadrant type) , bus voltage and frequency for the relevant voltage level shall be
measured and communicated to SAS and values shall be obtained and displayed in
both HMIs.
Provision shall also be available for extracting these measurements from the relays
and BCUs in addition to following protection function data (not exhaustive).
All necessary Indication, alarms, analog values etc apart from the above
mentioned items for the complete substation shall be provided.
Others
Bus bar protection actuation for 230 kV and 110 kV buses. CT
circuit supervision for above bus bar protection(common for each
voltage). In case the bus bar protection relays provided with
communication port the zone operation and CT supervision function shall
be acquired on the communication interface or DI.
The measured values shall be displayed locally, on the HMI,
Threshold limit values shall be selectable for alarm actuation.
The indication and display in the SAS HMI and event list, alarm list etc of following
signals shall be provided in the SAS HMI through hardwire of these signals to the
relevant BCU/IED devices.
2.10 Basic monitoring functions are:
Switchgear status indication
Measurements (U, P, Q, F)
Event list
Alarm list
412
Status and display of DC system

Status of display of fire protection system
Acquisition of alarm and fault record from protection relays
Disturbance records
Trend curves
Status of all the selector switches, Master & Lockout trip relay operated, Stages if
81U,81RF, UV operated etc. should be wired to BCU for indication and alarm alert in
the SAS HMI.
All necessary Indication, alarms, analog values etc apart from the above mentioned
items for the complete substation shall be provided.
2.11 DATA EXCHANGE TO REMOTE CONTROL CENTRE
All data, records etc as available from all the SAS devices including protection relays
and meters shall be exchanged with Remote control centre through the gateway
equipment with out the aid of Station HMI servers. The gate way equipment shall be
equipped with sufficient memory for data, records etc and shall support IEC 61850
protocol towards the SAS and IEC 60870 – 5 – 101/104 towards the remote control
centre.
2.12 REPORT GENERATION:
Substation Automation System shall record all activities, switching, changes
etc., made in a substation.
Following shall be Automatically monitored:
-Status
-Events, alarms
-Limit values.
Following printouts shall be available from the printer and shall be printed on
demand:
Hourly voltage and frequency curves.
Trend curves for MW & MVAR.
Printouts of the maximum and minimum.
Printout on demand for MW, MVAR, Current, Voltage on
each feeder and transformer tap position, status of pumps
and fans for transformer.
413
Printout on demand system frequency and average

frequency.
Daily, weekly and monthly reports are required. The SA
system shall be capable of delivering the same.
2.13. SMS & email ALERT FACILITY
The SAS HMI shall be provided with comprehensive facility with all necessary
hardware and software for sending SMS alert to the user specified mobile
numbers and email alert to the user specified email addresses wherein the
SMS, Email alert with user defined text messages should be sent on occurrence
of events, alarms user closeable. It shall be possible for the user to specify in
the HMI software through simple means to map the alarms, events to be
specified for generation of SMS, Email alerts. In this context necessary GPRS
interface shall be provided in the router to send the SMS, Email alerts. The
router shall support SIM card for 2G, 3G, 4G in this context. Necessary testing
and commissioning of this feature shall be inclusive of SAS.
2.14 a) BAY CONTROL UNIT
Communication Port : Ethernet Fiber optical port with support for IEC 61850
protocol, SNTP.
Binary Inputs : Sufficient for application plus spare opto-isolated inputs
(Spare binary inputs shall be minimum 4 no.s or 20% of application quantity
whichever is higher).
Binary Outputs : Sufficient for application plus spare potential free outputs (Spare
binary outputs shall be minimum 4 nos or 20% of application quantity whichever is
higher).
Ac anlog input module with inputs for 3-phase voltages and neutral , 3-phase
current and neutral for true rms measurement of Analog Values.
Incase of bus coupler bay application 3-phase and neutral voltages of both the bus
sections should be wired and measured.
For BCU used for common alarms for the sub station : The BCU shall be
equipped with I/O modules sufficient for the application plus spare points of
Binary input : 16 Nos, Binary Output : 8 Nos, DC Analog input : 8 Nos. All
necessary station alarms including but not limited to GIS alarms, Fire alarm
414
system, Inverter, online transformer diagnostic monitoring system shall be

wired to SAS and made available in the SAS HMI.
All binary inputs, binary outputs and LEDs of BCU must be user programmable,
BCU without this facility will not be acceptable. The IEDs should be directly
connected to the switchgear without any need for additional interposition of
transducers. The bay control units shall be equipped with I/O modules
inherently in the unit without external I/O modules for interfacing with the
process inputs and outputs, However, all the commands extending for
control of switchgears (Breakers, isolators) shall be routed through suitable
interposing relays with a scheme to automatically check the healthiness of
these interposing relays. The Bay control IED should be provided with
sufficient number of programmable LED’s.
Each bay control IED shall be independent from each other and its
functioning shall not be affected by any fault occurring in any of the other
bay control units of the station. “The bay control unit shall be fed from
redundant DC power supplies, this may implemented with redundant power
supply modules in the BCU or with automatic DC source selection with a
suitable auxiliary relay.”
Functions for BCU:
Control mode selection
Select-before-execute principle
Command supervision:
Interlocking and blocking
Double command
Synchro check, voltage selection
Run Time Command cancellation
Operation counters for circuit breakers and pumps
Hydraulic pump/ Air compressor runtime supervision
Operating pressure supervision through digital contacts only
Breaker position indication per phase
Alarm annunciation
415
Measurement and display of Vrms, Irms ,HZ ,W, Var for each phase and for 3phase
Local HMI (local guided, emergency mode) with Graphic display for real time display
of the bay status, measurands etc.
The single line diagram in the display of the BCU shall be user configurable at
site.
Interface to the station HMI.
Data storage for at least 200 events
Capability to implement bay level interlocks
The update rate for measurement and display of digital inputs , analog inputs and
the control command execution scheme shall be of satisfactory performance as
applied for sub-station applications.
Wherever there is a redundant LAN architecture is specified for SAS, each BCU shall
be preferably equipped with two separate Ethernet ports for connection to
redundant LANs preferably with separate IP addresses.
Synchronism and energizing check
The synchronism and energizing check functions shall feature:
Settable voltage, phase angle, and frequency difference.
Energizing for dead line - live bus, live line - dead bus or dead line– dead bus with
no synchro-check function.
Synchronising between live line and live bus with synchro-check function.
Each bay control IED shall be independent from each other and its functioning shall
not be affected by any fault occurring in any of the other bay control units of the
station. “The bay control unit shall be fed from redundant DC power supplies which
may implemented with redundant power supply modules in the BCU or with
automatic DC source selection with a suitable auxiliary relay.” The GUI display in the
BCU shall display the status of the bay devices (breakers, isolators, switches etc) in
real time along with the related measurands. All alarms related to the respective
bay shall be displayed in the BCU through its LED’s or in its GUI display as an alarm
list/scroll.
The BCU shall conform to the specification stipulated under General
requirements for Numeric type protection relays in this tender specification. The
416
BCU should be compatible to interoperate and integrate with the IEC 61850 based
SAS in TANTRANSCO sub-stations.
2.15 HMI FUNCTIONS:
PRESENTATION AND DIALOGUES GENERAL
The Local HMI for Operation & Engineers console shall provide basic
functions for supervision and control of the substation. The operator shall give
commands to the switchgear on the screen via mouse clicks or soft-keys through
keyboard. The HMI shall provide the operator with access to alarm and events
displayed on the screen. Besides these lists on the screen, there shall be a print
out of hard copies of alarm or events.
Following standard display shall be available from the HMI:
* Single line diagram showing the switchgear status and measured
values.
* Control dialogues.
* Measured values
* Alarms list.
* Events list.
* System status.
* A/R selection
* PT selection/ CT selection (one and half breaker scheme)
* Carrier status
* Tripping selection
2.15 SYSTEM SUPERVISION DISPLAY:
The SA system shall be comprehensively self-monitored and faults will be
immediately indicated to the operator before they develop into serious situation.
Such faults are recorded as faults in a system supervision display. The display shall
cover the status of the entire substation including all switchgear, Numerical relays
and communication links. Dynamic colouring of single line diagram with load, power
factor voltage. Bay view to zoom all the parameter.
All interlock status information for control circuits pertaining to the CB, Isolator,
earth switch should be displayed in the SAS. Where ever interlock is not satisfied
that should be highlighted in separate colour for operator alert.
417
2.16 EVENT LIST

The event list shall contain events with time tag (universal time
synchronization with GPS) , which are important for the control and monitoring of
the substation. The date and time has to be displayed for events. The events shall
be registered in a chronological events list in which the type of event and its time of
occurrence are indicated. It shall be possible to store all event in the HMI. The
information shall be obtainable also from printed event log.
2.17 ALARM LIST:
Fault and error occurring in the substation shall be listed in an alarm list and shall be
immediately transmitted to the control centre. The alarm list shall substitute a
conventional alarm table, and shall constitute an evaluation of all station alarm
however alarm and visual must be provided on receiving alarm. It shall contain
unacknowledged alarms and persisting faults. Date and time of occurrence shall be
indicated. Historical data sizing for storing Data for 35 days shall be available in the
SA system. The capacity of the server is to be designed accordingly. Also necessary
hardware and software to copy and store data from server should be provided. The
data collected shall not be lost due to overflow. Whenever overflow is likely to
occur, the date shall be archived into storage media like CD so that there is no
change of losing historical data.
2.18 RIGHTS:
local HMI: shall be able to get data from all the equipments for monitoring and
control.
Engineering/DR work station: shall have the facility for relay setting and analysis
of faults by acquiring disturbance recorder data from Numerical relays.
The alarm list consists of a summary display of the present alarm situation. Each
alarm shall be reported on one line that contain.
The alarm date and time.
The name of device in alarming state.
A descriptive text.
The acknowledgement state.
The operator shall be able to acknowledge alarms, which shall be
either audible or only displayed on the monitor. Acknowledged alarms
418
shall be marked at the list. Filters for selection of a certain type or group of
alarm shall be available as for events.
2.19 SYSTEM TESTING:
The contractor shall submit a test specification for factory acceptance test (FAT)
and commissioning tests of the station automation system for approval. If the
complete system consists of parts from various suppliers or some parts are
already installed on the site, the FAT shall be sub-system tests. In such a case,
the complete system test shall be performed on site together with the site
acceptance test (SAT).
2.20 EXTENDABILITY IN FUTURE:
Offered substation automation system shall be suitable for extension in future
for additional bays. During such requirement, all the drawings and
configurations, alarm/event list etc. displayed shall be designed in the such a
manner that its extension shall be easily performed by the Engineers authorized.
During such event, normal operation of the existing substation shall be
unaffected and system shall not require a complete shutdown.
The SAS servers and the Engineering workstations, gateway devices shall be
equipped with all necessary hardware and original softwares to accommodate
the future electrical bays without additional cost to TANTRANSCO and without
the need for additional licenses from original equipment manufacturer.
2.21 RELIABLITY AND AVAILABLITY:
The bidder shall select & design & supply the SAS for the overall
availability of 99.98% with the following understanding.
The SA system shall be designed to satisfy the very high demands for
reliability and availability concerning.
Solid mechanical and electrical design
Security against electrical interference (EMI).
High quality components and TAN TRANSCOs.
Modular, well-tested hardware.
Thoroughly developed and tested modular software.
Easy-to-understand programming language for application programming.
Detailed graphical documentation and application software.
419
Built-in supervision and diagnostic function.

Panel design appropriate to the harsh electrical environment and ambient
conditions.
Panel grounding immune against transient ground potential rise.
The entire SAS shall be provided with comprehensive cyber security including
intrusion protection and protection against virus attacks preferably integrated
in the Ethernet switches, routers, IEDs etc. The cyber security shall provide
protection against unauthorized access to the equipment and unauthorized
transfer, modification or destruction of data whether deliberate or accidental.
The SAS vendor shall propose how the SAS solution provides the cyber
security. In this context all the necessary hardware and softwares is included in
the scope of the SAS.
3. TIME SYNCHRONISATION
i) The Time synchronization equipment shall receive the co-ordinate Universal Time
(UTC) transmitted through Geo Positioning Satellite System (GPS) and synchronize
equipments to the Indian Standard Time in a substation. The system shall be able
to track the satellites to ensure no interruption of synchronization signal.
ii) Time synchronization equipment shall include antenna, all necessary accessories
and all special cables and processing equipment etc.
iii) The GPS antenna shall have adequate protection from wind, lightning etc. and
shall be mounted anywhere in the Substation roof at a place preferable by the
TANTRANSCO
iv) The synchronization equipment shall have 2 micro second accuracy. Equipment
shall give real time corresponding to IST (taking into consideration all factors like
voltage and temperature variations, propagation and processing delays etc.)
v) Equipment shall meet the requirement of IEC 60255 for storage and operation.
vi) The output signal from each port shall be programmable at site for either one
hour, half hour, minute or second pulse, as per requirement. The equipment shall
have a periodic time correction facility of one-second periodicity.
vi) Equipment shall have real time digital display in hour, minute, second (24 hour
mode)
420
vii) A separate time display unit (100 mm display high) at a suitable height in the
control room should also be provided.
vi) It shall be compatible for synchronization of all the SAS equipments, all
numerical devices and IEDs in the relay panels, Event Loggers, Disturbance
recorders, PMUs and SCADA at a substation etc. The time synchronization of all
the relevant SAS equipments shall be realized using the SNTP protocol through
the SAS LAN through optic fiber bus.
A time accuracy of 1ms shall be achieved for all the devices within SAS.
vii) The equipments should be equipped and ready to provide time synchronization
signals with the following ports:
a)Ethernet ports -2nos for SNTP time signaling through the two separate Ethernet
LANs.
b) PPS Fibre optic ports with all necessary devices to time synch additional 20
devices
c) IRIG-B (Modulated) ports – BNC type and FO serial ports of sufficient numbers to
to time
synchronise atleast 10 more future equipments that require accurate time
synchronisation.
d) Potential free contact (Minimum pulse duration of 50 milli Seconds.)
e) PTP port for time synchronization of PTP time synched devices for future use.
4. Documentation:
The following documentation to be provided for the system in the course of the
project shall be consistent, CAD supported, and of similar look/feel:
List of Drawings.
Substation automation system architecture.
Block Diagram.
Guaranteed technical parameters,
List of Signal-Analogue/Digital.
Schematic diagrams.
List of Apparatus.
List of Labels.
Logic Diagram.
421
Test schedule and reports of FAT/SAT

Product Manuals’
Operator’s Manual.
Listing of software and loadable in CD ROM.
3 sets of CD ROM containing all the as built documents/drawing shall be provided.
Also the final documentation shall provide:
- The System specification description (SSD) file that outlines this
substation automation project.
- IED capability description file (ICD) that describes the available functions logical
nodes and services available from IED.
- Substation capability description file (SCD) that describes the relationship among
the IEDs in the substation automation system and their information exchange
structure.
- Configured IED description file (CID) that is final file to download into IED to
enable its configuration.
5. HMI SERVER’s:
The HMI server functionality and operator work station facilities may be integrated
in the station HMI (Main) as well as in the redundant station HMI.
* Each server shall be equipped with at least one (1) CD/DVD RW drive to allow
transfer of data and other software from the Hard Disk(s) to removable CD/DVD
media.
All computers including HMI servers, Work stations etc shall be provided with
comprehensive anti-virus protection and cyber protection as appropriate.
Type Industrial grade substation-hardened computer hardware
equipment suitable to be rack mount in a IP 41 compliant
cabinet housing 19” rack frames.
Includes all necessary software and hardware for the
application. KVM extender with Full size Keyboard with
10key numeric keypad, Mouse ,Monitor. DVD +/- RW read
write facility.
Communication ports : 3XUSB, Dual 1000Mbps LAN ports,
Plus ports for other user interface.
422
Cabinet for IP41 compliant standalone cabinet with outer protective glass
Server door. Equipped with all necessary accessories.
Processor Latest generation intel processor ,3 GHz or Higher
Bus side 1000MHZ or higher
speed
Softwares Windows OS of latest generation and version. 64 bit or
higher. With antivirus software package with validity not less
than the project guarantee period. All necessary softwares
for the application.
Includes SAS HMI software complete for editing and run
version for end user with complete facilities to end user for
any kind of bay modification, Bay addition/deletion etc.
HDD 2 nos HDD 1TB in redundant RAID-1 configuration and hot
swappable type.
(In case 1T GB is not sufficient for application including data
then higher capacity shall be provided for each HDD. The
HDDs should be configured such that mirror image of the
data is available in the other HDD. HDD shall be rated for
continuous operation of 24 Hours X 365 Days.
RAM Expandable RAM equipped for 8GB or 200% application
requirement whichever is higher.
DISPLAY 29” LED monitor Flicker free, high resolution of reputed
MONITOR make. Flicker free (TUV Certified), Anti glare, IPS Panel, Full
HD Resolution (1920x1080) with HDMI port and conventional
port interface for computer interface. Min height : 15.5”.
Note : The above configuration is minimum requirement, however a higher
configuration is required for the application then the server shall be provided
accordingly.
The redundant station HMI server shall operate in hot standby mode and vice
versa in case of a switch over. The real time data base of the main and
redundant HMI servers shall be synchronized at all times without loss of real
time data in case of a switchover. Also one remote client facility for Station HMI
423
access with relevant original licenses and software shall be provided. Each of the
server shall be equipped with two Ethernet ports for interface to SAS LANs
and for time synchronization using SNTP protocol with guaranteed resolution of
1ms.
6. Engineering Work station

equipment.
application. Full size Keyboard with 10key numeric keypad,
Mouse ,Monitor. DVD +/- RW read write facility.
Communication ports : 3xUSB, Dual 1000Mbps LAN ports, Plus
ports for other user interface.
speed
Software Windows OS of latest generation and version. 64 bit or
than the project guarantee period. All necessary softwares
for the application.
HMI Client access software. All softwares for configuration of
numerical relays, IEDs, BCUs etc.
Disturbance recorder Software for View and analysis of
COMTRADE files.
MS Office suite latest version software.
HDD 2 nos HDD 1TB in redundant RAID-1 configuration
(In case 1 TB is not sufficient for application including data
then higher capacity shall be provided for each HDD. The
HDDs should be configured such that mirror image of the
data is available in the other HDD. HDD shall be rated for
continuous operation of 24 Hours X 365 Days.
424
DISPLAY 29” LED monitor Flicker free, high resolution of reputed make.
MONITOR Flicker free (TUV Certified), Anti glare, IPS Panel, Full HD
Resolution (1920x1080) with HDMI port and conventional
port interface for computer interface. Min height : 15.5”.
accordingly.
The engineering work station should be equipped for :
- Data retrieval and analysis of recorded data from SAS devices including
disturbance records, fault records, event records etc
- Remote configuration of SAS IED’s, Numerical protection relays, Digital Energy
meters etc. All relevant software tools is to be provided for this purpose.
- Client access facility to station HMI with all the relevant softwares.
The engineering works station shall be provided with a simple Network Management
System (NMS) software for following management functions of Ethernet switches,
SAS devices supporting SNMP and support SNMP V.3 or higher version supporting
encryption.
a. Configuration Management
b. Fault Management
c. Performance Monitoring
This system shall be used for management of communication devices and
other IEDs in the system. This NMS shall be easy to use, user friendly and menu
based.
The Engineering work station shall be provided with comprehensive anti-virus
protection and cyber protection as appropriate.
Each workstation shall be equipped with at least one (1) CD/DVD RW drive to
allow transfer of data and other software from the Hard Disk(s) to removable
CD/DVD media.
7. Metering Work station
All relevant original software and tools for viewing in real time and generating
reports relevant to metering data. The metering data from the meters shall be
integrated in to the station HMI servers in real time through the SAS LAN and the
425
same shall be available from the HMI server to the metering Work station as a
client. All HMI servers shall be provided with comprehensive anti-virus protection
and cyber protection as appropriate.
equipment
application. Full size Keyboard with 10key numeric keypad,
Mouse ,Monitor. DVD +/- RW read write facility.
Communication ports : 3xUSB, Dual 1000Mbps LAN ports, Plus
ports for other user interface.
Cabinet for IP41 compliant standalone cabinet with outer protective glass
Server door.
Equipped with all necessary accessories.
speed
Software Windows OS of latest generation and version. 64 bit or
than the project guarantee period. All necessary softwares for
the application.
Base communication software/Meter data acquisition
software for ABT meter configuration and automated data
retrieval from ABT meters using DLMS protocol.
MS Office suite latest version software.
HDD 2 nos HDD 1TB SATA.
(In case 1TB is not sufficient for application including data
then higher capacity shall be provided for each HDD. ) HDD
shall be rated for continuous operation of 24 Hours X 365
Days.
DISPLAY 27” LED monitor Flicker free, high resolution of reputed make.
426
MONITOR Flicker free (TUV Certified), Anti glare, IPS Panel, Full HD
Resolution (1920x1080) with HDMI port and conventional port
interface for computer interface. Min height : 15.5”.
accordingly.
All relevant original software and tools for viewing in real time and generating
reports relevant to metering data.
Metering reports should be customized as per TANTRANSCO’s requirements.
The metering data from the meters shall also be integrated in to the station HMI
servers in real time through the SAS LAN. The metering Work station should be
provided with comprehensive anti-virus protection and cyber protection as
appropriate.
8. COMMUNICATION NETWORK:
All the SAS equipments that are to be integrated with the SAS should be
provided with suitable communication ports to connect to the LAN and
support IEC 61850 protocol. Digital energy meter may be integrated with the
IEC 61850 inter bay bus suitably through data concentrators / media
converters.
Station LANs:
i. Communication network at Station level (i.e at Level-2) :
Dual LANs preferably Bus topologies.
Inter-bay LANs:
i.All IEDs/ Numerical relays/BCUs shall be connected to the ethernet switch
directly by fiber optic connectivity.
ii) Communication network at inter-bay level (i.e at Level-1) : LAN implemented
with double Redundant Rings for connectivity between ethernet switches.
This implies that the Ethernet switches shall support double ring connectivity.
ii. Self healing ring architecture shall be provided. The ring LAN architecture
shall have the latest IEEE Standard version of RSTP with acceptable recovery
time satisfactory for the application.
427
iii. Separate line interface unit for devices of 3nos of bays towards fiber optic
cable interface for inter bay LANs shall be provided.
iv) Backbone link that connects all the Ethernet switches shall be of minimum speed
1Gbps.
General:
The station LAN’s shall be separate from the bay level LAN’s.
All the LANs (Level-1, level-2 stipulated in IEC 61850 standard) for SAS shall
support the following features:
* The entire SAS shall be provided with comprehensive cyber security
including intrusion protection and protection against virus attacks preferably
integrated in the Ethernet switches, routers, IEDs etc. The cyber security shall
provide protection against unauthorized access to the equipment and
unauthorized transfer, modification or destruction of data whether deliberate
or accidental. The SAS vendor shall propose how the SAS solution provides
the cyber security.
* IEEE 802.1Q VLAN facility.
* Traffic segregation and prioritization control via IEEE 802.1p and IEEE
802.1Q
* Support SNMP preferably the latest version to provide secure and full
network management. Port Security through disabling of
packets from unauthorized MAC addresses. RMON for monitoring
of network status & statistics.
* IGMP Snooping enabling reductions in multicast traffic
* SNTP for synchronizing the internal clock of all the devices
connected to the LAN.
* RSTP (IEEE 802.1w) industry standard method for
providing recovery of redundant networks
* RMON for monitoring of network status & statistics
* Port Mirroring assisting network troubleshooting
* Event Logs creating a historical record of events
occurring on the network
428
* Port Security through disabling of packets from

unauthorized MAC addresses
* SSL Web encryption preventing eavesdropping, tampering or
message forgery
* The backbone link for each ring network
9. CAPACITY:
The system should be capable of handling up to 150 IEDs and 10,000 data points. In
case the application considering with future bays necessitates to support higher
number of devices and data points then the system shall be equipped accordingly.
10. SEQUENCY OF EVENTS (SOE) FEATURE:
To analyze the chronology or sequence of events occurring in the power system,
time tagging of data is required which should be achieved through SOE feature of
SA. The server should have an internal clock with adequate stability. The Server
time should be set from time synchronization messages received from GPS
equipment to be supplied by bidder. The Server should maintain a clock and should
time-stamp the digital status data. Any digital status input data point in the Server
should be assignable as an SOE point. Each time a SOE status indication point
changes the state, the Server should time-tag the change and store in SOE buffer
within it. SOE shall be transferable to the Remote Control Centre through the
gateway equipment. The time resolution for SOE should be 1 ms at point of
acquisition.
11. ETHERNET SWITCHES:
The Ethernet switches used for creating the LAN network should meet the
specification as laid down in the IEC 61850 standard and should be of managed
type SNMP based. The Ethernet switches should comply to IEC 61850-3
standard/equivalent for EMI Immunity and environmental compliance pertaining
with Electrical utility substations applications.
* The Ethernet switches shall be equipped with 50% spare ports of which
2nos shall be 10/100Mbps copper ports. Ethernet switch shall connect to the
numerical relays, BCUs directly through Optical ports only.
* Ethernet switches shall be of 19” rack mount type with LEDs front side and rear
cable connectivity. User maintenance port shall be front side.
429
* Dedicated Separate set of Ethernet switches shall be provided for connectivity of

devices of 3bays.
*Ethernet switches shall support the features stipulated under general specification
for the LAN.
* Separate Ethernet switches for 230kv Bays shall be separate from that for 110 kV
bays.
* Ethernet switches shall support the features stipulated under general specification
for the LAN.
* Digital Diagnostic Monitoring (DDM) for Fiber :
Ethernet switches shall be equipped with the functionality to monitor ST/SC (as well
as SFP) connectors, and NMS via SNMP trap when abnormalities are detected,
allowing operators to initiate maintenance procedures, Further the complete LAN
system shall allow system operators to monitor things like transmission and
reception power, temperature, and voltage/current along optical fiber connections in
real time.
12. GATEWAY EQUIPMENT
The Equipment shall be based on embedded technology, Rugged fan less design,
without moving parts.
Equipped with sufficient memories for firmware, Configuration data, metering data
Process data, records for reporting to multi-masters.
Memory, data buffer shall be static type such as Flash memory based without
moving parts.
The gateway equipment shall be rack mount housed in a IP31 compliant cabinet
with protective glass door. Cabinet design shall ensure to be equipped with the
standard accessories specified for relay cabinets.
Self diagnostic support with device fail alarm contact.
Auxiliary power supply : 220V DC nominal with range of +10%/-15%
- Support IEC 61850 protocol, IEC 60870-5-101, IEC 60870-5-104 protocols. Also for
acquisition data from transducers necessary RS485 port with MODBUS support shall
be provided.
430
- Perform the data concentration by directly collecting data from the bay level
devices and provide the same to the remote LDC/Master with out the aid of the SAS
HMI servers.
- Equipped with redundant communication ports for SAS interfaces as well as for
remote LDC/Master interfaces.
- Equipped to run high speed programmable logic control function that includes
provision for implementing station level interlocks and automation logic as
necessary.
- Necessary software with original license for Anti-virus protection with Relevant
firewall should be provided for operating system based on MS windows.
- Gateway shall be equipped with redundant power supply modules and
communication modules.
If gateway device is specified in redundant configuration in the
SAS BOM then 2 nos gateway devices with one of which operating in
online and the other operating in hot standby by shall be provided. The
switchover between gateway devices shall be Automatic, quick enough for the
application, bump less without loss of SAS data during switchover, the
databases of the online and hot stand by shall be synchronized in real
time. It shall be possible to operate with one gateway device in case of outage or
failure of one
Type tests:
The Data concentrator for Energy meters should conform to the following
requirements:
i) Type tests for the following tests as per IS/ IEC IEC 60255 standards / Equivalent
international standards :
EMI & EMC tests, ESD tests, Tests for shock and vibration, Environmental tests for
Operating temperature, Storage temperature, Ingress protection against dust,
Protocol certification for all the protocols called for.
The equipment shall designed for galvanic isolation between communication ports.
Influencing Quantities
431

Conform to relevant cyber security standards.
13. Data concentrator for metering application
Hardware:
The Equipment shall be based on embedded technology, Rugged fan less design,
without moving parts.
Equipped with sufficient memories for firmware, Configuration data, metering data
for reporting to multi-masters.
Suitable for 19” Rack mount.
Self diagnostic support with device fail alarm contact.
Auxiliary power supply : 220V DC nominal with range of +10%/-15%
Type tests:
The Data concentrator for Energy meters should conform to the following
requirements:
i) Type tests for the following tests as per IS/ IEC IEC 60255 standards / Equivalent
international standards :
EMI & EMC tests, ESD tests, Tests for shock and vibration, Environmental tests for
Operating temperature, Storage temperature, Ingress protection against dust,
Protocol certification for all the protocols called for.
The equipment shall designed for galvanic isolation between communication ports.
Influencing Quantities
Conform to relevant cyber security standards.
Communication ports:
1 no Ethernet port using IEC61850 protocol for interface to SAS LAN for facilitating
acquisition of energy meter metering data from trivector meters to SAS HMI.
Sufficient number of RS 485 Port using DLMS protocol for interface to Trivector
energy meters for all bays in SLD and for future 3nos Bays at each voltage level.
432
1no. Serial/ Ethernet port for interface to Metering Work station using DLMS protocol
forfacilitating metering data access to Base communication software/ Meter data
acquisition software installed in the metering PC.
1No. Ethernet port for reporting ABT metering data to future remote master server
using DLMS protocol over TCP/IP.
14. Specification for Router
The router should comply with the following requirements.
Design : Rugged, Industrial grade 19” rack mount of fanless design, Potential free
contact for device fail alarm.
Ports :
For substation interface : 4 x 10/100BASE-TX, RJ45-socket, Autocrossing,
Autonegotiation, Autopolarity
For uplink : 5nos 10/100Mbps (RJ45 / FO port as per site requirement) Autocrossing,
Autonegotiation, Autopolarity.
The 4nos uplink are envisaged for : 2nos for redundant communication to
Main Load dispatch centre control, 2Nos for redundant communication to backup
load dispatch centre.
1 no for interface to remote collection of disturbance record and to facilitate
Remote accessibility system
For SMS/Email alert
In respect of facility for SMS, Email alert of user defined SAS alarms, events, the
rouyter shall be equipped with necessary GPRS interface. The router shall support
SIM card for 2G,3G,4G in this context.
Power supply input voltage and operating range : As per station DC auxiliary supply
DC (Range +10%, -20%). Router should be equipped with redundant auxiliary
power supply (As per station auxiliary DC power supply 220V DC/ 110V DC)
modules.
Security : Firewall rules (incoming/outgoing, management), DoS prevention, IPSec
VPN, Layer 3 and Layer 2 Access Control Lists (ACL), ACL flow based
433
limiting, Audit trail, Management VLAN, Role based Access Control, IEEE 1686
compliant configuration possible, Ingress storm protection, Authentication using
LDAP
Routing :
VLAN and port based routing, static routing, multinetting, IP masquerading, 1-to-1
NAT, port forwarding, Static and Dynamic ARP entries, OSPFv2,
Tracking Framework for Static Routing
Management:
SNMPv3, SSH2/SFTP, HTTPS, V.24 CLI, SNMPv1/2, local and central User
Management ( RADIUS)
Diagnostics:
LEDs (Power, Link Status, Data, Status, ACA, RM), Log File, Syslog, Configuration
check
RMON (Statistic),
SFP diagnostics (temperature, optical transmit and receive power), trap for changes
and configuration saves, Counter for ACL Rules
Configuration:
Command Line Interface (CLI ), web interface, Auto Configuration Adapter (ACA22,
ACA31), local & central user management (RADIUS), Configuration from NMS
using SNMP V3
Protocols:
Serial, HTTPS, SSH, SNMP V1/ V2/ V3, LLDP
Mounting :
19” Rackmount , Rear ports for connections, Front port for user interface
Operating Temperature : 0 to +55deg C
Relative Humidity (non-condensing) : 10% to 95%
Standards compliance :
IEC 61850-3 EMI Immunity and environmental compliance(Electrical utility
substations)
IEC 62351 : Power systems management and associated information exchange -
Data and communications security
NERC:CIP , IEEE1686 standards for cyber security
434
* Ingress protection IP41 or better.

Other features:
NTP, VLAN support ( IEEE 802.1Q), rate limiter, QOS 8 classes, port prioritisation
IEEE 802.1D/p, VLAN IEEE 802.1Q
* 802.1Q VLAN facility.
* Traffic segregation and prioritization control via IEEE 802.1p and IEEE
802.1Q
* Port Security through disabling of packets from unauthorized MAC addresses.
* SSL Web encryption preventing eaves dropping, tampering or
message forgery
* Port Mirroring assisting network trouble shooting
* RMON for monitoring of network status & statistics.
* IGMP Snooping enabling reductions in multicast traffic
* SNTP for synchronizing the internal cloc
* IP routing support on any combination of physical and virtual interfaces,
including per VLAN.
* Router shall be provided with built in firewall layer 3 level. The firewall shall be of
comprehensive for providing the cyber security for the application.
15. Substation disturbance records collector (SDC) for implementing DR
collection and Remote accessibility system
( Approved make KALKITECH SYNC 3000)
Automatic collection of Disturbance Records from IEDs and IED Settings
Management
a) Existing System
The existing system of Disturbance Records Collection,IED Settings/Configuration
Management and storage system is supplied and installed by Kalkitech. The system
consists of one Disturbance Records Collector type SYNC 3000 at each substation
and two central servers in redundant configuration with an application called Power
System Enterprise Suite to manage and store Disturbance Records and IED
Settings/Configuration. Access to data stored in the central system is made through
clients installed in various locations across various TANTRANSCO offices including
the control centre.
435
The existing system collects disturbance records from connected IEDs at substations
through scheduled polling and event based immediate transfer. All IEDs, both serial
communicating and TCP based are connected to the substation disturbance records
collector (SDC). The SDC collects the disturbance records and transfers the records
periodically through a secure channel established over a VPN. All communication
protocol drivers viz. IEC 61850, IEC 60870-5-103, SPA, Courier, SEL, Modbus etc.
are available in the SDC for communication with different makes and model of IEDs
for collection of DR data or files. The SDC and terminal servers also creates a
transparent channel for establishing a pass through for the setting and configuration
of IEDs. The central system manages the IEDs at each substation in a hierarchical
manner for easy navigation and access. The navigation structure is further divided
into regions or zones. The communication interface between the substation and the
Control centre is established through Fiber optic channels.
b) Requirements of Automatic Disturbance Records Collection and Setting
Management
The system shall enable automatic Disturbance Records Collection from the
numerical relays/IEDS installed in substations and transfer to a central location for
storage, easy access, and analysis. The system shall also be used for the remote
parameterization of numerical relays/IEDS from one or more remote locations and
from the central location. It is expected to collect disturbance records from Main I
and Main II protection relays of Line/Feeder bays, Differential protection relays of
Transformer/Reactor bays, Bus bar protection relays and manage
settings/configuration of these IEDs.
A DR collector equipment should be installed at each substation, which shall
be automatically collecting the disturbance records from the numerical relays/IEDS.
Where the settings of the numerical relays/IEDS are not accessible through the
remote communication/SCADA port, ‘Terminal Servers’ shall be provided and
connected to the configuration port for the purpose and shall be mounted in cubicles
close to where the numerical relays/IEDS are located. The terminal server shall
provide a virtual serial port at the central station for access to the numerical
relays/IEDS remotely. The respective setting/configuration application of these
relays/IEDs shall be used for the purpose of setting and configuration. The rear port
436
of IEDs communicate on IEC 61850 based standard. The front/configuration ports

shall be based on IEC 61850 or sometimes in a proprietary protocol.
The relays/IEDS provide disturbance record files in COMTRADE format or in a

proprietary format. The software application in the Substation DR collector
equipment shall convert these files to COMTRADE format as required, for further
transmission to the Central Server. The SDC shall rename all the COMTRADE files as
per IEEE naming standards (COMNAME) before they are transferred to the central
server. COMTRADE files shall be transferred to the central server using a secure
protocol like SFTP.
The communication health of all connected IEDs shall be acquired by the SDC
and mapped to SNMP object Ids and be available for the central system to indicate
he IED node status and offline/online status.The SDC status also shall be available
as SNMP OID for indication in the central system.
c) Security Features
Provided the level of importance of configuration file and risk in unintended change
in configuration, the solution shall include measures to secure the data exchange
process. The Station DR collector equipment and the RAS server application shall
support the following security features.
a) Relevant NERC/CIP compliant security
b) User management in Configuration utility to prevent unauthorized configuration
c) End to end SSL encrypted VPN to avoid tampering of data transferred in the
network Integration of Protection and Control IEDs in the substation will be carried
out in a secured manner in compliance with relevant NERC CIP Cyber Security
standards, particularly CIP-005-1.
Remote Access to the IEDs in the substation shall be restricted through VPN
provided by the System Integrator. It shall create an electronic perimeter that
manages communication to all the electronic devices e.g. IEDs/ Numerical relays etc.
From unauthorized access.
d) Communication Protocol Requirements of DR collector
All necessary protocol drivers needed to exchange data with the numerical
relays/IEDS, shall be supported by the Station DR collector equipment (SDC). As a
437
minimum, substation protocols for data transfer such as IEC 61850 Client, IEC
60870-5-103shall be supported by the SDC for collecting the DR files. Any other
communication protocol as needed for communication with IEDs shall also be
available in the SDC.
e) Remote Configuration/upgrade of SDC
There shall be provision for user to remotely configure the SDC. The key
configurable parameters include:
i). Downstream channel information such as COM port, baud rate, parity, data bits,
stop bits, flow control where applicable
ii).Upstream channel information such as IP address, TCP port number
iii).Passwords for different clients such as Local PC Web client, Web client session
timeout
iv).DR Polling interval in absolute time (in seconds)
v).Timeouts and retries – User can specify the device reading timeouts and number
of retries before declaring read failed
As the substations are spread across the state and could be in remote locations, it
shall be possible to upgrade or update the firmware of the SDC from the central
location, whenever needed.
f) System Sizing
The SDC shall be sized in such a way that, they can accommodate 50% expansion in
the number of devices connected to it at the substation level. The SDC shall be sized
to store relay data for at least one month in non-volatile memory considering one
DR file per day from each connected Relay. All status and configuration information
which is to be retained during power failure shall be stored in non-volatile memory.
It shall be possible to include future Numerical relays and IEDs in the
designated substations to automatic DR collector system and RAS without the need
for proprietary items of supplier. Necessary training and tools for integrating future
numerical relays and IEDs to the automatic DR collector system and RAS should be
provided to TANTRANSCO engineers.
g) Time Synchronization
438
The time of the station DR collector equipment shall be synchronized by signals from
those being installed during this project. The DR collector shall support NTP/SNTP
and IEEE 1588 for time synchronization.
h) Hardware Requirements
The hardware as proposed in the system architecture is described here. Any other
hardware required to meet the requirements of this technical specification as per the
vendor's design shall be considered in entirety in their bid.
The substation DR collector (SDC) and terminal servers used in the
substations shall be of industrial grade suitable for operation with high degree of
reliability. The SDC and terminal Servers at the Substation shall be compliant with
the requirements of IEC 61850-3, suitable for operation in a transmission substation.
Refer relevant section for the type test requirements for gateway device is applicable
for this equipment also.
The hardware (SDC, terminal servers, interface converters etc.) shall be
providedwith the configuration tools for defining the various parameters of
communication, IPaddresses, device name etc. and diagnostic tools for identifying
problems with thedevices. The power supply of the equipment shall be 220V DC
(+10%/-15%)/ 110V DC (+10%/-15). The nominal power supply voltage to be
selected shall be finalized during the detailed engineering based on the availability of
power supply at the substation.
i) Station DR collector requirements
The Station DR collector shall have adequate sizing to meet the required response
time and shall be of industrial grade suitable for working in the Substation
environment complying with the requirements of IEC 61850-3. Refer relevant
section for the test requirements.
Mounting: 19-inch rack mountable with rear connection
Design: Rugged, industrial grade, based on embedded technology without moving
parts and shall be based on fan-less cooling technology. Use of industrial PCs as
SDC will not be accepted.
Device management: Support SNMP as well as webserver.
439
Remote configuration: There shall be provision for user to remotely configure the
SDC.
Time synchronisation: Support NTP/SNTP and IEEE 1588
Network Redundancy: Shall support PRP redundancy protocol for connection to IEDs
on the substation LAN
Each SDC shall have the following minimum configuration.

a. Six LAN Ports (10/100) Mbps out of which at least one pair shall be configurable
for PRP for connection to IEDs.
b. Twelve Serial ports for RS232/RS485 devices, at least 4 ports shall be
configurable as RS232/RS485 ports. It shall be possible to have 8 number RS485
ports or 8numbers RS232 when needed.
c. Any protocol shall be configurable to any of the ports as required in field.
d. Memory for the application data storage shall be minimum 4GB non-volatile.
Memory shall be adequate to store DR files and event logs for at least 1 month in
non-volatile memory at the substation, considering one DR file per day from each
connected relay/IED with provision for 50% future requirements. All status and
configuration information which is to be retained during power failure is to be
stored in non-volatile memory.
j) Terminal Servers
Mounting: DIN mount suitable for mounting in existing/new Relay panels.
Design: Rugged, industrial grade, based on embedded technology without moving
parts and shall be based on fan-less cooling technology. IEC 61850-3 compliant
hardware. Use of industrial PCs will not be accepted.
Device management: Support SNMP, remote manageability through TCP/IP
Ethernet Interface: 10/100 Mbps
Serial interface: Support RS232/RS485 (minimum 6 ports)
k) Functional Requirements
Functional requirements of the various components in the DR Collection system as
needed at the substation are described below.
a. Functional requirement of Station DR collector equipment
440
The station DR collector equipment is responsible for automatic DR collection

fromthe numerical relays/IEDs, conversion to COMTRADE format, rename to IEEE
COMNAME recommendations, storage and transfer to the central server. It shall
support web server functionality for Remote access with a web browser for
monitoring. All the functions of the Station DR collector equipment shall start
automatically upon power up or restart of the Station DR collector equipment. The
availability of the station DR collector equipment shall be monitored by the central
server.
a) Data Acquisition: Acquisition of Disturbance data records from vari-
ous Numericalrelays/IEDs
The disturbance records are stored in IEDs/numerical relays in COMTRADE or in a
proprietary format. The access to the devices will be on communication protocols
like IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 61850, SPA, Courier, SELFast Message, etc. The
Numerical relays/IEDs shall be polled periodically and immediately in case of
occurrence of a disturbance (event-based polling), so that the DR files are available
in the station DR collector equipment on occurrence of the disturbance. The Station
DC shall also monitor the communication status/health and inform the loss of
communication with an IED to the remote server. All device communication failures
shall be logged and stored in the Station DC.
b) Data Conversion: Conversion of Disturbance Records
Some of the numerical relays may be capturing and storing records in a proprietary
format. The proprietary DR data shall be converted to COMTRADE format and the
DR files shall be renamed according to IEEE COMNAME recommendations before
they are transferred to the central server.
c) DR File transfer: Transfer of Disturbance Records to central server
COMTRADE file transfer from the SDC to the central server shall be using Secure File
Transfer Protocol (SFTP). The SDC shall act as SFTP client whereas the central RAS
application will be the SFTP server. The client- server communication shall be
encrypted using SSL. DR files from each relay shall be transferred to a specific folder
in the central server.
l) Control Centre Integration:
441
The Substation Data Collector equipment should be integrated to the existing Control
Centre Application- Power System Enterprise Suite for storage, viewing and
management of Disturbance Records and IED settings.
Includes necessary license towards Power system enterprise suite server license for
integration of each of the five sub-stations to control centre is in bidder’s scope.
442
16. CONCEPTUAL DIAGRAM FOR SAS
443
Router : Envisaged connectivity
L L L L
D D D D
C C C C
1 2 1 2
Router 1 for Router 2 for
SAS-1 SAS-1
LDC LDC
Interface Interface
SAS-2 SAS-2
R R R R
C C C C
C C C C
1 2 1 2
LDC 1 : Uplink to Remote Load dispatch centre through route 1/ Main route.
LDC 2 : Uplink to Remote Load dispatch centre through route 2/ backup route.
RCC 1 : Uplink to Remote control centre through route 1/ Main route.
RCC 2 : Uplink to Remote control centre through route 2/ backup route.
RCC : Remote control centre for future unmanned operation of the substation.
SAS-1: Main Connection to SAS LAN with data communication through Gateway.
SAS-1: Backup Connection to SAS LAN with data communication through Gateway.
Note : Gateway to be equipped with communication ports for communication to the
LDC-1,2 and RCC-1,2 and SAS 1,2 interfaces.
17. INVERTER :
1.The inverters shall comply with the following specification and characteristics:
444
Type of inverter On Line µP controlled

TYPE IGBT based Static inverter
120% of assigned load or 6 KVA
Rating @ 50 ºc of each inverter whichever is higher.
Type of power switching Pulse width modulation
2 nos. to operate in redundant
configuration with automatic switch
No. of inverters over in case of failure of one unit.
Nominal 220V DC
Operating range : + 10% to -15% of
nominal input Voltage from station
Input Voltage battery banks
Output voltage Single phase 230V AC + /-1%
Nominal frequency 50 Hz
Frequency regulation i) Free running 0.01 HZ

Total harmonic distortion of output Less than 2.5% for linear load &
voltage Less than 5% for non-linear load
Single harmonic of output voltage Less than 3%
Rated 0.8 (0.6 to Unity, within KVA &
Power factor range KW)
Method of cooling Forced air cooling
SAS Servers, Engineering Workstation,
Metering Work station, LAN
Equipments pertaining
Assigned Load to Level-2, Printers Etc.
Alarm Dry contact for minor and major alarm

Note: A worksheet depicting the total calculation of the assigned load should be
furnished in assessing the rating of the inverter.
2.The inverters shall comply with the following characteristics:
i) The inverters shall normally operate in synchronism with the mains AC power
source. Upon loss of the mains AC power source or its frequency deviating
445
beyond a preset range, the inverters shall revert to their own internal frequency
standard. When the mains AC source returns to normal, the inverters shall return
to synchronized operation with the mains AC source. Such reversal of operation of
inverters from synchronous to free running mode and vice-versa shall not
introduce any distortion or interruption to the connected loads.
A suitable dead band for frequency may be provided to avoid unnecessary
frequent reversal of inverter operation between free running mode and
synchronized mode under fluctuating frequency conditions.
ii). For safe operation in the event of Power failure or input source voltage dropping
below preset value, necessary safeguard software shall be built in for proper
shutdown and restart.
iii) The inverters shall be synchronized to the main AC source unless that
source deviates from 50 Hz by more than 1% (adjustable to "1/2/3/4/5%).
iv). The inverters shall provide interrupter switch to isolate the unit from the load on
failure of the unit. The interrupter switch shall be rated to carry full continuous load
and to interrupt the inverter under full fault load.
v). The inverters shall be capable of supporting a start-up surge or
overload of 150 % of rated output for up to 60 seconds.
vi). The transient voltage response shall not exceed "4% for the first half-
cycle recovering to 1% within ten cycles for a 100 percent step load
application or removal.
3. Control panel for auto/manual switch over of the redundant inverters shall be
provided with the inverter.
The scope of supply, installation, testing and commissioning of inverter also includes
All the necessary AC Distribution boards, DC Distribution boards, Control panel to
facilitate manual change over, auto change over and bypass mode with meters for
monitoring the voltages.
4. Type tests for inverter:
The inverter shall comply to IS 13314 / Equivalent standards as applicable for the
KVA required for the project
This includes the following tests.
1. Visual inspection test
446
2. High voltage test

3. Insulation resistance test
4. No-load test
5. Output test
6. Climatic tests
7. Harmonic contents test
8. Radio frequency interference test for conducted emission in the AC output
circuit.
9. 9. Environmental Test (Operating temperature range and Humidity )
18. Laptop computer for SAS tool
Type Reputed make laptop computer

Software 1. Windows OS of latest generation and version. 64 bit or
higher.
2. Antivirus software package validity for entire project
guarantee period.
3. HMI software for client access to SAS HMI.
4. MS office suite latest version.
5.All other necessary software for configuration of SAS
devices, control & protection panels devices.
HDD HDD 1TB
(In case 1TB is not sufficient for application including data
then higher capacity shall be provided for each HDD. )
DISPLAY 15” LED monitor HD resolution, Anti glare, Flicker free.
Optical drive DVD +/-RW
Keyboard & Full size Spill resistant keyboard with 10key numeric keypad,
MOUSE Optical mouse.
Connectivity Wifi, Bluetooth, USB port-3nos, RJ45 10/100Mbs Ethernet
port.
447
Other accessory Good quality Carry bag for Laptop, Mouse pad
Note: Better configuration of laptop computer and necessary softwares to that
stipulated above should be provided if the application requires so.
19. FURNITURE FOR SAS
All materials used for furniture should be industrial grade with design life of
minimum 15 years. All wood based materials should be moisture proof, termite
proof.
All metal used should be corrosion resistant, pretreated to withstand corrosive
atmosphere, heavy duty sturdy material. All workstation tables shall be provided
with Keyboard tray.
Tables for work stations shall be provided with multiple modular popup box for cable
entry and provided with raceway trucking. Table shall also be equipped with
sufficient plug and power socket for connecting the workstation power cables
including 1 spare plug and socket.
Chairs:
Chair should be industrial grade revolving type with cushion, neck rest and
adjustable height and wheels for mobility.
448
20. BILL OF MATERIALS FOR CONTROL & PROTECTION PANELS

Note :
1.The bill of materials for relay panels in this section is for conceptual information,
however any additional component, devices, cabinet required in the control &
protection panels to fulfill the protection, control and metering scheme shall be
included without additional cost to TANTRANSCO.
2. In case TANTRANSCO orders additional Control & protection panels for tendered
items of Control & protection panels panels, then the control & relay panel should
be provided with necessary materials such as Ethernet switch, Line interface unit
with fibre optic cables etc. for inter bay LAN interface.
3. The under frequency scheme for feeders shall be shall be equipped completely to
accommodate all the feeders including future feeders depicted in the single line
diagram of the substations plus 34 spare feeders.
4. DC supervision relay should be provided for each of DC sources and at the DC
output of the DC selection relay. The DC fail alarm should be made available to
the SAS.
5. If Functions of supervision relays, trip relays, selector switches, auxiliary relays
are incorporated in a multifunction IED then it is subject to design approval from
TAN TRANSCO. Such scheme should be designed such that a single point of
failure in the multifunction IED should not cause failure of simultaneous failures of
Main-I/Main and main-II/Backup protection scheme
6. Devices for PT selection Scheme
a) VT selection for 230KV Relay panes:
VT selection scheme Protection and metering application shall be
designed so that separate core shall be wired for Main-1 protection, Main-2
protection and metering devices.
VT selector scheme shall be provided for selection between Line VT/ Bus VT-1/
Bus VT2, the selection shall be selectable from BCU as well as from SAS HMI.
Necessary programmable logic in the BCU and bistable relays shall be provided.
VT selection Scheme shall be implemented with 4 position selector switch (for
selection modes of : Automatic -Line VT- Bus 1 VT- Bus 2 VT) along with bistable
relays.
449
The scheme shall be ensure logic to ascertain the correct Bus VT, manual over
ride mode and avoid mixing PTs. VT selection shall be designed for blocking VT
based protection during VT selection to avoid mal-operation.
b) VT selection for 110KV Relay panes:
VT selection scheme Protection and metering application shall be
designed so that separate core shall be wired for Main protection, backup
protection and metering devices.
VT selector scheme shall be provided for selection between Bus VT-1/ Bus VT2,
the selection shall be selectable from BCU as well as from SAS HMI. Necessary
programmable logic in the BCU and bistable relays shall be provided.
VT selection Scheme shall be implemented with 4 position selector switch (for
selection modes of : Automatic - Bus 1 VT- Bus 2 VT) along with bistable relays.
VT selection shall be designed for blocking VT based protection during VT
selection to avoid mal-operation.
The scheme shall be ensure logic to ascertain the correct Bus VT, manual over
ride mode and avoid mixing PTs.
7. Devices for trip transfer Scheme
Scheme for trip transfer shall be provided using BCU and auxiliary relays for
selection between states of Normal, Inter-transfer, Transfer, Transfer-inter with
programmable logic implemented in the BCU. Manual over ride facility shall also
be provided through the BCU. Also, Manual selection of Normal-Inter-Transfer
positions using pushbutton switches shall be provided along with SAS/BCU
operated scheme.
8. Where ever auxiliary electromechanical relays are used in trip signals chain,
then Supervision of all these relays for relay failure should be provided in SAS.
I. BOM: SYNCHRONISING CUM ISLANDING PANEL for 230 kV Bays
a) Following items for ISLANDING SCHEME for 230 kV Feeders
1.Numerical under frequency relay 1 Set
(As per specification includes 81U,81RF,27,59 etc)
2.Diode /Link matrix for selection of 81U,81RF,27,59 stages for each feeder 1 Set
(Matrix Comprises separate columns for each of the 4stages for 81U,
3 stages for 81RF, 2 stages for 27/59 and separate rows for each of all the
450
feeders plus 3nos spare feeders)

3. DC supply supervision relay As required.
4.Devices for PT selection Scheme As required.
5. Supervision relays for all the tripping and lockout relays As required
6. Selector switch for IN/OUT selection of UV, UF, f+ df/dt, As required
7. Auxiliary relays and timers to full fill protection scheme - As required
8. Auxiliary relay for Automatic DC source selection As required.
9. 3-phase Master Trip relay for UF (for 81U,81RF) scheme for future feeders: 3 nos
10. Supervision relays for all the 86UF relays 3 nos
11. Standard relay panel accessories as stipulated in this specification -As required
Note :
1. Master Trip relay for UF (81U,81RF) scheme is to be provided in the respective
feeder relay panels and 3 nos shall be provided in loose for future spare bays.
B. Synchronising Scheme for 230 kV Bays
1. Circuit Label 1 Each.
2. Voltmeter 2 Nos.
3. Frequency Meter (45-55 HZ) 2 Nos.
4. Synchroscope 1 No.
5. Synchroscope selector switch 1 No.
6. Check synchronizer IN/OUT selector switch 1 No.
7. Numerical Check synchronizing relay 1 No
8. Auxillary relays, Auxillary VTs, Guard relay, synchronizing socket &plg : As
required
9. Indication lamp for synchronising indication 1 No.
8. Panel Standard accessories As required
Note :
i) The synchronism and energizing check functions of the relay shall feature:
a. Settable voltage, phase angle, and frequency difference.
b. Energizing for dead line - live bus, live line - dead bus or dead line– dead bus
c. Synchronising between live line and live bus with synchro-check function.
ii).The islanding protection panel and synchronsing panel for 230KV feeders shall be
451
assembled in one cabinet for compact design.

II. BOM : Control & Protection Panel for 230 kV Feeder / Line
1. Numerical distance protection relay for Main-1 protection as per Specification.
1 No
2. Numerical distance protection relay for Main-2 protection as per Specification 1
No
3. Bay control unit 1 No
4. Electronic Trivector meter 1 No.
5. Single phase trip relay (with self-reset contacts) 6 Nos.
6. Trip circuit supervision relay 6 Nos.
8. Selector switch for L/R selection 1 No
9. Three phase Master Trip relay 3 Nos.
(2 Nos for 86A&86B,1no. for 86UF)
10. Devices for PT selection Scheme As required.
11. Bus bar Tripping relay (96) 1 No
12. Devices for trip transfer Scheme As required.
13. TNC Switch 1 No.
15. Selector switch for A/R (3Positiion :Main 1 /OFF /Main 2 ) 1 No.
16. Selector switch (Carrier IN/OUT, 2Position, 4 Ways, Stay put) 2 Nos.
17. Synchronisation selector switch 1 No.
18. Auxiliary relays and timers to full fill protection and control scheme - As required
19. Auxiliary relay for Automatic DC source selection As required
20. Standard relay panel accessories as stipulated in this specification- As required
Note :
1. Main-1 and Main-2 distance protection relays should be of different
Manufacturer or of different hardware platform and of different protection algorithm.
2. Both Carrier aided protection channels shall be utilised for Main-1 and Main-2
relays.
452
III. BOM : Control & Protection Panel for 230 kV Feeder / Line ( Line
differential based)
1. Numerical line differential protection relay for Main-1 protection as per
Specification. 1 No
2. Numerical line differential protection relay for Main-2 protection as per
Specification. 1 No
5. Single phase trip relay (with self-reset contacts) 6 Nos.
6. Trip circuit supervision relay 6 Nos.
18. Auxiliary relays and timers to full fill protection and control scheme - As
required
20. FO patch cable of sufficient length between line differential relay to FODP. 3 sets
( 2sets for Main-1 , 2sets for Main-2 , 1set as spare) As required
21. Standard relay panel accessories as stipulated in this specification- As required
Note :
1. Main-1 and Main-2 distance protection relays should be of different
Manufacturer or of different hardware platform and of different protection algorithm.
2. Both Carrier aided protection channels shall be utilised for Main-1 and Main-2
453
relays.
IV. BOM : C&P PANEL FOR 230 kV/110KV Auto Transformer
1. Numerical protection relay for Group-A protection as per specification 1 No.
2. Numerical protection relay for Group-B protection as per specification 1 No.
3. Numerical directional over current protection relay & Earth fault with 1 No
LBB and high set for LV side
4. Bay control unit 2 Nos
5. Electronic Trivector meter 2 Nos.
6. Trip circuit supervision relay for HV & LV As required.
7. DC supply supervision relays As required.
(2 Nos for 86A&86B,1no. for 86 for LV side)
9. Devices for P.T. selection scheme for HV & LV As required.
10. Bus bar Tripping relay (96) 2 Nos
11. Devices for trip transfer Scheme for HV & LV As required.
12. TNC Switch 2 Nos.
14. Transducer for Tap position indication 1 no.
(30-250VDC auxiliary supply, IEC 60688 compliant, Output 4-20mA)
15. Selector switch for L/R selection As required
16. Synchronisation selector switch 2 Nos.
17. Auxiliary relays and timers to full fill protection and control scheme -As required
19. Auxiliary relay for transformer alarms and trip As required
(Typically : Buchholz alarm-3 Element, Oil flow alarm-3, WTI-3 Element, OTI-3
Element, Oil level alarm-3 Element, PRV Trip-3 Element, Buchholz trip-3
Element, OLTC Low oil Level- 3Element )
20. Standard control & protection panel accessories as stipulated in this specification-
As required
Note :
1. Functions of supervision relays, trip relays, selector switches, auxiliary relays
may be incorporated in a multifunction IED subject to design approval from TAN
454
TRANSCO. Such scheme should be designed such that a single point of failure in
the IED should not cause failure of the protection scheme. The IED should
conform to the Specification for the general requirements for numeric relay and
equipped with redundant power supply modules.
2. Group-A and Group-B protection relays should be of different manufacturer or of

different hardware platform and of different protection algorithm..
V. BOM : Bus bar Protection Panel applicable for 230 KV, 110 KV Buses:
1) Set of low impedance bus bar protection scheme of Numerical type for 1 Set
single/double zone with check zone for 230 kV /110KV bus
2) DC supervision relays As required.
3) Bus bar cut IN/OUT switch Main and check zones. As required
4) LBB IN/OUT switch for each bus section As required
5) Auxiliary relays and timers to fulfill scheme As required
6) 3 Phase trip relay (96) (shall be a part of relay panel of the As required
respective panels)
7) Supervision relay for B/B protection As required
trip relays (shall be a part of relay panel of the respective panels)
8) Auxiliary relays for automatic DC source selection As required
9) Standard relay panel accessories as stipulated in this specification- As required
Note : The busbar protection panel should be equipped for all bays
(new,spare,future as shown inSLD) in SLD plus 3 nos spare bays.
VI. BOM : Control & Protection Panel for 230 kV Bus coupler Bay /230 kV
Transfer Breaker Bay /230 kV Bus Section Bay /110 kV Bus coupler Bay
/110 kV Transfer Breaker Bay /110 kV Bus Section Bay :
1) Numerical non directional over current and earth fault relay with LBB 1No
and synchro check
3. Digital Voltmeter (3 line LED Display for Bus voltage, Class 0.2) 2 Nos.
4. Digital Frequency meter (3 line LED Display for Bus frequency Class 0.2) 2 Nos.
5. Single phase trip relay (with self-reset contacts) As required
6. Trip Circuit supervision relay 2nos/6 Nos
455
(quantity applicable as per 1-ph or 3-ph breaker)

8. Indication lamps (for checking bus PT ) 6 Nos.
10. Devices for P.T. selection scheme As required.
12. Devices for trip transfer Scheme for As required.
18. Synchronisation socket (As required for designated substation) 1 No.
19. Auxiliary relays and timers to full fill protection and control scheme-As required
22. Standard control & protection panel accessories as stipulated in this
specification-As required
Note:
Votlmeter and frequency meter shall be 3 line LED display for simultaneous display
of 3phase voltages and frequency. Both Ph-ph and Ph-E voltages shall be
displayed with user selected buttons.
VII. BOM: SYNCHRONISING CUM ISLANDING PANEL for 110 kV Bays
a) Following items for ISLANDING SCHEME for 110 kV Feeders
1. Numerical under frequency relay 1 Set
(As per specification includes 81U,81RF,27,59 etc)
2. Diode /Link matrix for selection of 81U,81RF,27,59 stages for each feeder 1 Set
(Matrix Comprises separate columns for each of the 4stages for 81U, 3 stages
for 81RF, 2 stages for 27/59 and separate rows for each of all the feeders plus
3nos spare feeders)
456

6. Selector switch for IN/OUT selection of UV, UF, f+ df/dt, As required
7. Auxiliary relays and timers to full fill protection scheme - As required
8. Auxiliary relay for Automatic DC source selection As required.
9. 3-phase Master Trip relay for UF (for 81U,81RF) scheme for future feeders: 3
nos
10. Supervision relays for all the 86UF relays 3 nos
11. Standard relay panel accessories as stipulated in this specification-As required
Note :
1. Master Trip relay for UF (81U,81RF) scheme is to be provided in the respective
feeder relay panels and 3 nos shall be provided in loose for future spare bays.
B. Synchronising Scheme for 110 kV Bays Synchronising Panel
1. Circuit Label 1 Each.
2. Voltmeter 2 Nos.
3. Frequency Meter (45-55 HZ) 2 Nos.
4. Synchroscope 1 No.
5. Synchroscope selector switch 1 No.
6. Check synchronizer IN/OUT selector switch 1 No.
7. Numerical Check synchronizing relay 1 No
8. Auxillary relays, Auxillary VTs, Guard relay, synchronizing socket &plg : As
required
9. Indication lamp for synchronising indication 1 No.
8. Panel Standard accessories As required
Note :
i) The synchronism and energizing check functions of the relay shall feature:
d. Settable voltage, phase angle, and frequency difference.
e. Energizing for dead line - live bus, live line - dead bus or dead line– dead bus
f. Synchronising between live line and live bus with synchro-check function.
ii).The islanding protection panel and synchronsing panel for 110KV feeders shall be
assembled in one cabinet for compact design.
457
VIII. BOM : Control & Protection Panel for 110 kV Feeder / Line
1) Numerical distance protection relay for Main protection as per specification. 1 No
2) Numerical directional O/C & E/F relay with LBB for back up protection as 1 No
per specification.
6. Trip circuit supervision relay ( pre close and post close) 2 Nos.
9. Devices for P.T. selection scheme As required.
14. Selector switch for A/R (2Positiion : IN/OUT ) 1 No.
17. Auxiliary relays and timers to full fill protection and control scheme- As required
18. Standard control & protection panel accessories as stipulated in this
specification- As required
IX. BOM : Control & Protection Panel for 110 kV Power transformer
Control & protection panel
Applicable for 110 KV / 33 kV Power transformer, 110 KV / 11 kV Power
transformer.
1) Numerical Main protection relay for Power transformer (As per
specification ) 1 No.
2) Numerical backup protection relay for Power transformer (As per
specification) 1 No.
3) Bay control Unit for 110kv HV side 1No
458
4) Bay control & protection Unit for LV side 1No

5) Electronic Trivector meter 2 Nos.
6) TNC Switch 2 Nos.
6) Three phase Master Trip relay As required.
(86A, 86B,86UF,86LV etc.)
7) Trip Circuit Supervision relay ( pre close and post close) As required
8) D.C. Supervision relay As required.
9) Selector switch for L/R selection 1 No
10) Supervision relays for tripping and lockout relays As required.
11) Devices for PT selection Scheme As required.
12) Highly Speed tripping relay(96) for B/B protection As required
13) High speed intertrip relay As required.
14) Auxiliary relays and timers to fulfill scheme As required
15) Devices for trip transfer Scheme As required.
16) Synchronisation selector switch As required
17. Emergency push button for trip As required
18.Standard relay panel accessories as stipulated in this specification-As required
X. Standard Control & Protection panel accessories:
All the Control & Protection panels shall have the following
1. Cubicle illumination Lamp (LED Type only) with door switch- 1 Set.
2. Space heater with thermostat and ON/OFF switch - 1 Set.
3. 5A&15A, 3-Pin socket with pin and ON/OFF switch - 1 Set.
4. Test terminal block for testing metering & protection devices - As required
5. Test block - As required
6. Cable glands As required
7. Terminal blocks As required+20% Spares
8. Wires for CT, Earthing As required
(2.5 Sq.mm, Multi strand, 1100V Grade, PVC Insulated, FRLS)
9. Wires for VT, Alarms, status, Control As required
(1.5 Sq.mm, Multi strand, 600v/1100V Grade, PVC Insulated, FRLS)
10. 25*6mm Tinned copper bar As required
11. Cabinet 1 Each
459
( Free standing, self supported, with swing frame for devices and outer glass door.)
12. Labels for devices - 2 Sets
(Inside and outside the panel)
13. Label for panel designation - 2 Nos
14. MCBs for AC distribution circuits, MCBs for DC distribution circuits As required
(With auxiliary contact for MCB trip indication)
15.Links As required
16. DC fail test/accept button - 2 Each
17. AC bell for DC fail alarm - 1 no
18. Synchronising socket (12 Pin) - 1 No.
(Applicable when interface is with synchronising trolley)
19. Push button for reset of master trip relays and lockout relays As required.
And for reset of numerical protection relays.
20. Cable glands As required.
21. Line interface unit for inter bay fiber optic LAN interface As required
22. Isolation links for isolation of LBB, trip outputs etc. As required
(Isolation link must be compact sliding SMD type)
Genera The following items are included under the scope of
l: supply for relay panels and for SAS equipments
1. Manuals (hard copy & soft copy) 3 Sets.
2. As built drawings (hard copy & soft copy) 5 Sets.
XI.. BOM FOR SAS (Applicable for each SAS)
Sl. Description Uni

No t Qty
1 Industrial grade computer for station HMI (As per Nos
technical specification) . 2
2 Engineering work station (As per technical No.
specification) 1
3 Metering Work station (As per technical No.
specification) 1
4 Metering data concentrator for energy meter data No. 1
460
acquisition
5 Substation disturbance records collector (SDC) for No.
implementing DR collection and Remote
accessibility system. ( Approved make KALKITECH
SYNC 3000)
1
6 Gateway Panel (Complete with panel, Gateway No.
Devices-2nos in redundant configuration, Hooter-
2nos, for substation urgent & non-urgent alarms) 1
5 Router (As per specification) Nos
. 2
6 GPRS MODEM(As per specification) Nos
. 1
7 Communication equipment (Complete with LS
Lightning arrestors for Communication ports and
Media interface device etc for gateway interface to
Remote control centre, Remote load dispatch
centre) As required.
8 Bay Control Unit Nos As required.
. (Refer note
below.)
9 Ethernet Switches ( 50 % spare ports in each Nos As required.
switch) to implement Redundant LANs at Station .
level and inter bay level and for LAN connectivity of
numerical relays and BCU)
10 General printer (A3 Colour LASER Jet Printer) No. 1
11 Report printer (A4 Colour LASER Jet Printer) No. 1
12 LAN accessories (Includes all cables and associated Lot 1
cable ducts, media converters etc for LAN) and all
materials for establishing communication Link
between the metering WS and all the ABT meters
using DLMS protocol through Metering data
461
concentrator.
i) All cables and associated cable ducts, media
converters etc for implementation of Station LAN
and interbay LAN to cover 230KV bays, 110KV bays,
33KV Bays, 11KV Bays and station auxiliaries.
ii) All necessary materials, FO cables,
Communication cables etc. for establishing
communication Link using DLMS protocol between
the Energy meters and data concentrator for
metering application pertinent to 230KV bays,
110KV bays.
13 Time synchronization system (GPS with all Set
accessories, Antenna, cables, software, Lightning
arrestors for GPS, Separate time display unit display
size of approx. 100 mm height. etc) 1
14 Digital Time display unit for operator No.
1
15 Configuration tools for SAS and Relay panels. Set
1.SAS HMI software for Client access.
2.Laptop computer with all necessary software-1
set.
3. CMRI Instrument (DLMS compatible for ABT
meter)– 1No.
4. Configuration Software for Numerical relays,
BCUs, Gateways, IEDs and other devices in
control & protection panels and SAS equipments
- 1 set
5. Special Crimping tools – 1 set
6. Test plug – 3nos
7. Fibre optic Splicing kit-1 set.
8.Any other necessary tools for SAS & relay panels. 1
16 Inverter (As per technical specification) Sets 2
462
17 Static bypass switch for selection between inverters, No.

Station AC auxiliary supply. 1
18 Relevant manuals as per SA specification. Lot 1
19 Furniture : Chair (industrial grade revolving type Nos
with cushion, neck rest and adjustable height and .
wheels for mobility.) 5
20 Furniture : Curved type Tables for SAS operator – Lot
2Nos; Table for Engg WS & Metering Work station :
2nos. Each table shall be provided with lockable
drawers-2nos. 1
21 Furniture : Tables with drawers-4nos suitable for Lot
housing all the drawings & manuals of the SAS and
protection system. 1
22 Transducer with mounting accessories (DIN Mount, Nos As required
RS485 port with MODBUS support) Quantity should
be as
required as follows:
i) Voltage monitoring of each of the DC buses in
source DCDBs in control building : 2 nos for 220V
DC (DC-1,DC-2), 2 nos for 48V DC (DC-1,DC-2).
ii) DC Load monitoring of each of the DC sources i.e
(DC-1,DC-2)battery chargers: 2 nos for 220V DC, 2
nos for 48V DC.
iii) Digital temperature sensor with backlit LCD
display
and transducer for SAS interface for room
temperature
measurement room : 4 nos (in Relay panel room,
Battery room, Charger)
Note:
463
1. In respect of supply of C&P Panels with SAS for 230 kV and 110 kV level the
price of the Relay panel shall be inclusive of the BCU. The BCUs/IEDs for common
alarms shall be considered under supply of SAS.
2.IED(s)/ BCU(s) with graphic display of sufficient I/O capacity shall be offered for
covering all the sub-station auxiliary items, RMU, Fire alarm system, complete
Power supply (Charger, Battery and distribution system (DCDB,ACDB),common
alarms in the sub-station.
3.Fibre optic media applicable for gateway interface to the remote load dispatch
centre. Includes FO patch cables between Gateway and FO distribution/Splice
panel.
4. a. FO cables to be laid in trenches indoors shall be provided along with HDPE
pipe for housing the FO cables and for its protection.
b. FO cables to be laid outdoor shall be of armoured, outdoor, rodent proof type.
c. FO patch cable running within the panel should be housed housed in a rugged
PVC pipe/ Spiral for safe guarding the FO patch cables.
5. Transducers shall comply for type tests as per IS / IEC in the following aspects
Measurement accuracy, EMC & EMI, Safety, Ingress protection, Environmental
factors suitable for the application.
6. HMI SAS server cum client work station computers should be
housed in a separate panel. This panel may also accommodate GPS, LAN
devices.SAS auxiliary panel housing the IEDs for monitoring of all the station
auxiliaries shall be housed in a separate panel and not combined with Servers.
XII. BOM FOR Essential spares for SAS
Sl.n
o Description Unit Qty Remark
Numerical
Group-A protection relay
for 230 kV/110kv Auto Identical to that in respective
1 transformer No 1 protection panel.
2 Numerical No 1 Identical to that in respective
Group-B protection relay protection panel.
for 230 kV/110kv Auto
464
transformer
Numerical Main-1 (Line Identical to that in respective
differential) protection protection panel.
3 relay for 230KV feeder No 1
Numerical Main-2 (Line Identical to that in respective
differential) protection protection panel.
4 relay for 230KV feeder No 1
Numerical Main Identical to that in respective
protection relay for 110 protection panel.
5 KV feeder No 1
Numerical Backup Identical to that in respective
protection relay for 110 protection panel.
6 KV feeder No 1
Numerical Main
protection relay for
110KV Power Identical to that in respective
7 transformer. No 1 protection panel.
BCU shall be equipped with
Bay control Unit for 230 maximum configuration stipulated
8 KV No. 1 among 230 kV Bays application.
BCU shall be equipped with
Bay control Unit for 110 maximum configuration stipulated
9 KV No. 1 among 110 kV Bays application.
Spares for Numerical
relay for 230 kV bus bar 1 set comprises all type of modules
protection of Relay, IED wherein 1no of each
10 Sets 1 type of Modules is applicable.
Spares for Numerical
relay for 110 kV bus bar 1 set comprises all type of modules
protection of Relay, IED wherein 1no of each
11 Sets 1 type of Modules is applicable.
12 Ethernet switch for Nos. 1 Identical to that in respective SAS
465
station LAN panel.

Ethernet switch for Nos. 1 Identical to that in respective SAS
13 interbay LAN panel.
Electronic Trivector meter No. 1 As per specification of Control &
15 (ABT) protection panel.
Automatic DC selection Nos. 4
16 relay
17 Master tripping relay (86) Nos. 4
Master tripping relay for Nos. 4
18 bus bar application (96)
19 TNC Switch Nos. 4
PT selection Bi-stable Sets
20 relay & Switch 4
D.C. supply supervision Nos.
21 relay 4
Trip circuit supervision Nos.
relay for 3x1 phase
22 breaker 4
Trip circuit supervision Nos.
23 relay for 3 phase breaker 4
Single phase trip relay Nos.
24 (with self-reset contacts) 4
Auxiliary relays Sets One set comprised all of the each
(Electromechanical type) type of auxiliary relay As stipulated
not covered elsewhere in for control & protection panel
25 spares list. 4
Each As stipulated for relay panel
26 LEDs of each type 4
Passive devices for relay Sets (Isolation links etc)
panel not covered
27 elsewhere in spares list. 4
28 Standard accessories for Sets 6 Each set Comprises MCBs,
466
relay panel not covered Contactors, Thermostat etc.

elsewhere in spares list.
Selector switches (Each Sets
set covers selector Selector switches (Each set covers
29 switches of each type) 4 selector switches of each type)
No. As stipulated for SAS
30 Hard disk for HMI server 1
Spares for GPS One set comprises Each type of
31 equipment Set 1 Hardware Modules for GPS device.
Includes all necessary spares for
maintenance of Inverter for 5 years.
Must include Electronic modules of
Spares for Inverter for each type, cooling fan, Fuse, MCB,
32 SAS Set 1 IGBT, Capacitor etc.
Line interface unit for Complete with FO patch cable.
SAS FO LAN for one
33 diameter Set 2
Spare Diode/ Link for
Islanding panel
34 application no 4
for HMI server
35 KVM extender cable Set 1
FO Patch cable of
sufficient length for
interface between Relay
36 to Ethernet switch Sets 6
Transducer ( One set
comprises 1 no of each
37 type of Transducer) Sets 2
Spares for Auxiliary 1 set comprises all of each type of
BCU/IED for monitoring hardware module.
38 of station auxiliaries Set 1
467
Note : The numerical relays, BCU, IEDs pertinent to the Spares for Control &
protection panels and SAS should be of the same make, model as that offered in the
respective C&P panels and SAS and these devices should equipped with maximum
hardware configuration and functions used in the C&P panels and SAS.
21. TRAINING SCOPE:
Training shall be imparted at works and at site as described below.
a) Training at contractor’s works (Applicable for each sub-station)
Minimum one week training for two batches of TANTRANSCO’s engineers at the
manufacturer’s works with lectures and hands on training on complete SAS &
protection relays. This training shall be imparted prior to commissioning of SAS &
protection system. Training shall be organized in batch(s) wherein each batch shall
comprise at least 5 trainees. All relevant training material, tools and equipments
shall be provided for each trainee towards this training. The training shall cover the
technology, principle of operation, functions etc of the protection relays and SAS
devices. Training content should be furnished to TANTRANSCO for obtaining
concurrence prior to training schedule.
All expenses for trainees towards boarding, lodging, travel , travel insurance etc to
attend the training program is in the bidder’s scope. In this context charges of any
kind shall not be levied to TANTRANSCO.
b) Training at site (Applicable for each sub-station):
Comprehensive hands on training of TANTRANSCO engineers at site should be

imparted as follows:
i. For 1 batch of 5 engineers oriented for operations of SAS & protection

system. This training shall be imparted after commissioning of SAS.
ii. For 1 batch of 5 engineers oriented for Testing, commissioning &

maintenance of complete SAS & protection relays. This training shall be
imparted after installation of SAS & protection system. This training
should be implemented to enable the trainees to configure, trouble
shoot all the SAS devices including numeric relays, BCU etc for
rectification of faults and prepare the trainees to use all the
468
configuration tools for all of the SAS devices. The training should enable
the trainees to carry out the necessary modifications in SAS for bay
extensions / deletion/modifications etc.
All expenses of the training instructor for executing the training at site is in the
bidder’s scope.
Delivery receipt signed by the trainees deputed should be furnished towards

completion of training at works and at site. Training scope is included under the
commissioning of SAS.
Training at contractor’s works :
The training syllabus and facilities shall cover the following requirements.
Lectures and hands on training on complete SAS & protection relays.
All relevant training materials, tools and equipments shall be provided for each
trainee towards this training.
Training at contractor’s works shall include “Hands on” training on the
following for which the actual devices shall be provided in the training :
- On the tools for configuration, parameterization (for numeric relays),
Automation logic, Boolean logic, PLC logic etc of all SAS devices such as
Numeric relays, IEDs, BCUs, Servers , work stations and servers, Gateway, LAN
devices etc.
- On all softwares including On HMI editors, data base management softwares,
NMS Software, etc. to maintain, trouble shoot the SAS system and for
modifications in the SAS for future bay extensions/ modifications etc.
Comprehensive hands on training at site should be imparted to TANTRANCO
engineers.
22. Scope pertinent to remote end substations
Sl.no. Description of materials/works Qty for

for remote end SS ETPS ETPS NCTPS-I Manali
EXP Replaceme 400/230KV
startup nt start up / 110KV
station Power GIS
469
station
1 Numerical Main-1 (Line 1 No. 1 No. 1 No. 1 No.
differential) protection relay
with accessories for 230KV
feeder
2 Numerical Main-2 (Line 1 No. 1 No. 1 No. 1 No.
differential) protection relay
with accessories for 230KV
feeder
3 Installation, Testing & 1 No. 1 No. 1 No. 1 No.
commissioning of 230KV Line
differential relays for one
230kv feeder including system
integration with SAS
a) MATERIAL AT REMOTE END SUBSTATION

Specification of Numerical line differential protection relays for 230KV
Line/Feeder for remote end substations
Specification of numerical Numerical Main-1/ Main-2 (Line differential) protection
relay for 230KV line/feeder is similar to that specified in this tender specification,
however the relay shall be suitable to the existing panels at the remote end
substations in all respect of following aspects:
The protocol shall be IEC 61850 Edition 1 / Edition 2 to match the SAS at the remote
end substations.
Size of relay, Physical Ethernet port of relay for IEC 61850 communication
Time sync port,-Auxiliary DC power supply voltage.
Main1 and Main 2 line differential protection relays for remote end should be of
different make but match the respective other end relays.
Necessary wiring accessories is inclusive of the scope of supply with remote end
relays.
Necessary supply of fibre optic patch cable with protective HDPE pipe for
connectivity between numerical relay(s) and Fibre optic distribution panel is inclusive
470
of remote end substation relay(s).

b) Installation , testing & commissioning of Numerical line differential
protection relays for each 230KV Line
Scope of works included in this scope are:
i) installation, testing and commissioning of numerical line differential protection
relay(s) with associated materials.
ii) Dismantling of existing numerical protection relays and hand over to
TANTRANSCO.
iii) Necessary wiring for protection scheme implementation.
iv) Necessary laying of fibre optic patch cable with protective HDPE pipe for
connectivity between numerical relay(s) and Fibre optic distribution panel is inclusive
of remote end substation scope works.
v) Protection parameterization and all necessary numerical relay configuration for
commissioning the line bay.
vi) System integration of the numerical relays for remote end substation with
existing SAS is inclusive of the scope of testing and commissioning of remote end
relay(s).
* The system integration works involves necessary configuration update in the
existing SAS equipments such as the SAS Servers, Engineering/DR Work station,
Metering PC, Gateway devices, NMS,LAN equipments etc.
* All the relevant files such as ICD, SCD,SSD,CID etc shall be updated in the relevant
devices and provided in soft copy in CD to the concerned Protection &
Communication engineer of TANTRANSCO.
* The complete system integration work shall be done with witness of the concerned
P&C engineer of TANTRANSCO without affecting the operation, protection and
control of the respect sub-stations.
* The system integration work should be carried out by an engineer authorized
/certified by the original equipment manufacturer of SAS in the respective
substation.
* Providing all the necessary hardware and software tools, relay testing kit etc. to
carry out the complete testing and commissioning of the remote end relays and
system integration with SAS is in bidder’s scope.
471
* The bidder may carry out survey of the existing remote end substations to
ascertain the details of existing SAS during project engineering stage.
2. Busbar protection Works at Remote end substations
There is no need for augmentation of existing busbar protection for remote end
substations.
Configuration of existing busbar protection relays at existing remote end substation
if necessary shall be considered in the scope of works of remote end commissioning
of relays.
Make of SAS at remote end substations are :
ETPS EXP startup station, ETPS Replacement start up Power station, NCTPS-I :
Make of SAS at these substations to be known during project execution.
Manali 400/230KV/ 110KV GIS :
Make of SAS :M/s.NR Electric Co. Ltd.,China supplied by M/s.NR
Energy solution India Pvt. Ltd in IEC 61850 Edition 1
The bidder may carry out survey of the existing substations at the existing remote
end substations to ascertain the details of existing SAS.
Note: TANTRANSCO reserves its right to re-designate the lines, accordingly the
remote end substations with SAS integration may change to any other station.
472
23.TYPICAL FURNTURES DRAWINGS

OPERATOR AND METERING WS TABLE
ENGINEERING CUM DR WORK STATION
473
TABLE FOR HOUSING THE DRAWINGS AND PRINTERS
474
APPENDIX –A
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS
1. GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR DISTANCE PROTECTION
NUMERICAL RELAY: (Note : Furnish separate for 230KV ,110KV application)
1. Make & Type :
2. Rated voltage, current and frequency :
3. Short time current rating :
4. No. of independent loop measurement :
for phase fault and earth fault.
5. No. of zones :
6. Characteristic of relay for phase and :
Earth fault.
7. Range of ohmic setting :
8. Maximum operating time for the :
case mentioned under Sl.No.6, Technical
Specification for distance relay.
i) System impedance ratio
ii) Relay setting (Ohms)
iii) Fault locations
(as % of relay setting)
iv) Fault resistance (Ohms)
v) Maximum operating time
(milli seconds)
9. Resetting time :
10. Zone time setting range :
11. Facility for Zero sequence :
Compensation for earth fault for
zone 1, zone 2 & zone 3.
12. Method adopted for achieving :
100% direction sensitivity in case
of balanced/unbalanced faults and
frequency range for detecting the same.
13. Whether suitable for single phase and :
475
three phase tripping.

14. Facility for switch on to fault feature :
15. Facility for carrier aided tripping :
16. Facility for weak end in feed :
logic and current reversal logic.
17. VT fuse failure detection:
a) Whether detects single phase :
two phase, three phase PT fuse
failure at Control room and yard.
b) Method of detection :
c) Whether block distance :
protection in case of condition (a).
Whether distance protection :
is allowed for tripping in case of
fault when there is PT fuse failure.
18. Power swing blocking
a) Detection method :
b) Blocking time :
c) Details of combination of Zones :
that can be blocked.
19. a) Details of trip contacts :
b) Details of additional contacts :
provided.
20. Details of Auto reclose relay:
a) Dead time setting :
b) Reclaim time setting :
c) Synchro check facility :
d) Facility to initiate from main-2 :
21. Details of IDMT directional earth :
fault relay.
a) Setting range :
b) Characteristic curve at 10 :
times of set value.
476
22. Characteristic angle range of distance :

relay.
23. Details of Disturbance recorder :
a) No. of Analog input :
b) No. of Digital input :
c) Memory capacity to store records:
d) Facility to down load and :
analyse the recording.
e) Sampling rate :
24. Details of fault locator :
a) Whether in built :
b) Whether accurate for all :
operating conditions.
c) Memory capacity to store records:
d) Sampling rate :
25. Communication ports details (Media & protocol):
26. Details of software needed for setting, :
down loading, fault analysis and
programmable logic control.
27. Whether self diagnostic feature :
is provided.
28. Whether time Synchronising facility :
is available.
29. Type tests complied (List out) :
477
2.GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR GROUP-A, GROUP-B

PROTECTION RELAY FOR 230/110KV Auto transformer.
Note : Furnish separately for Group-A and Group-B protection relays.
Guaranteed
S.no Description Specification
1 Make
2 Model
Protection functions:
(List out the protection functions with ANSI codes and
3 operating time for each function)
4 Current Rating 1 sec
5 Operating time at 3 times normal current:
6 Operating time for instantaneous operation:
Availability of instantaneous High set feature with
9 current setting range
10 Range of second harmonic restrain feature available.
Transformer vector group and CT ratio
11 selection/corrections through software.
12 LBB Protection Setting range:
13 LBB Protection : Time range
14 Auxiliary supply operating range
15 Max Digital Input (Equipped)
16 Max Digital Input (Feasible)
17 Max Digital output (Equipped)
18 Max Digital Output (Feasible)
19 Rating of control output relays provided
20 Max. Single indications
21 Functionalities supported:
a) SOE (Mention resolution, record length)
Disturbance record (Mention resolution, record length,
b) Sampling rate,File type)
c) Fault recorder (Resolution, storage capacity, File type)
d) Self diagnostics (Equipped?)
Time synchronisation interface equipped (Mention
33 media, standard supported)
34 Type tests Standards complied (List out)
478
3.GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICUALRS FOR DIRECTIONALAND NON

DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT AND EARTH FAULT RELAYS:
Guaranteed
1 Make & Model
Selectability between definite :
2 time & IDMT O/C function.
3 Over current setting range :
4 Phase fault
5 Earth fault
6 Time setting range and steps
7 High set Over current setting range :
8 Phase fault. : directional over current relays
9 Earth fault : for LV side of transformer)
10 Time setting range and steps :
11 IDMT characteristics :
P.T. Voltage : Nominal
input voltage
12
Relay characteristic angle :
13 settable for Phase fault and Earth fault.
Operating time for instantaneous :
14 element.
15 Principle of Directionality selection
16 Built in CT circuit Supervision?
17 Built in PT Supervision?
18 Reset ratio :
19 Resetting time :
Indications provided : Indications
21 provided :
22 Max Binary Input (Equipped)
23 Max Binary Input (Feasible)
24 Max Binary output (Equipped)
25 Max Binary Output (Feasible)
b)
Sampling rate)
c) Fault recorder (Resolution, storage capacity)
479
d) Self diagnostics (Equipped)

480
4. GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR BUS BAR PROTECTION

RELAY: Note : Furnish separately for 230KV,110KV application.
Guaranteed
1 Make & Model
2 Architecture (Centralised / Distributed?)

3 Max operating time at 5 times setting
4 CT Supervision facility
5 Dynamic bus replica facility
6 Phase segregated type?
7 Current or voltage setting
8 Availability of faulty phase indication
9 Availability of Check feature
10 Rated voltage and current
11 Resetting value
Does the relay give 100% security and reliability
under all operating conditions and upto applicable
12 fault level
13 Second harmonic rejection ratio
14 Third harmonic rejection ratio
15 Phase current slope adjustment
16 Phase differential current threshold
17 Residual current slope adjustment
18 Residual differential current threshold
19 Dead zone protection
20 Accuracy
21 Pickup
b)
Sampling rate)
c) Fault recorder (Resolution, storage capacity)
481

5. GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR UNDER FREQUENCY RELAY:

Guaranteed
1 Make & Model
Max Binary Input Equipped (mention number of LEDs
for programmable type and for other standard
3 indications)
Max Binary output Equipped (mention number of LEDs
for programmable type and for other standard
4 indications)
6 Protection functionalities supported:
6.1 81U : No of stages
6.2 81U : Settings range with resolution
6.3 81U : Operational accuracy
6.4 81U : Operating time
6.5 81U : Timer range and resolution
6.6 81RF : No of stages
6.7 81RF : Settings range with resolution
6.8 81RF : Operational accuracy
6.9 81RF : Operating time
6.10 No of stages for automatic load restoration scheme
6.11 No of stages for under voltage protection function
6.12 Negative sequence overvoltage function Equipped?
Total number of protection functions supported
concurrently?
(State no stages of 81U,81RF,27,ALS supported
6.13 concurrently)
Programmable scheme logic with Boolean functionalities
7 supported?
Blocking means of protection elements (Specify all
8 possible means )
9 Recording Functionalities supported:
Disturbance recorder (Mention resolution, record length,
a) Sampling rate, list also the Trigger criteria supported.)
482
Fault record: Storage length, no of records, Sampling

b) rate, list also the Trigger criteria supported.
Event record: Time resolution, Storage length, no of
C)
records,
d) Metering of which parameters, true rms?
e) Self diagnostics (Equipped?)
10 Communication ports (Mention media, speed & protocol)
Communication port for device configuration (Mention
11 media )
13 Operating temperature range
14 Relative humidity -Operating range
15 List out the type test standards complied by the relay
6.GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICUALRS FOR 110KV CAPACITOR BANK

PROTECTION .
Note : Furnish separately for Main protection relay and for backup protection relay.
Guaranteed
1 Make
2 Model
(List out details below for each of the protection
2 functions separately)
a Protection function description with ANSI code
b Settings range
c Operating time
3 Built in CT circuit Supervision?
4 Built in PT Supervision?
5 Reset ratio :
6 Resetting time :
Indications provided : Indications
8 provided :
483
b)
Sampling rate, File format)
Fault recorder (Resolution, storage capacity, File
c)
format)
7.GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR PROTECTION RELAY

FOR 110 kV Power transformer (110KV/ 33KV; 110KV/22KV, 110KV
/11KV).
Note : Furnish separately for Group-A and Group-B protection relays for each application.
S.no Description Guaranteed Specification

For 110KV
For 110KV/ Power
33KV Power transforme
transformer r
1 Make
2 Model
(List out details below for each of the
3 protection functions separately)
Protection function description with ANSI
a code
b Settings range
c Operating time
4 Current Rating 1 sec
5 Operating time at 3 times normal current:
Operating time for instantaneous
6 operation:
Availability of instantaneous High set
9 feature with current setting range
Range of second harmonic restrain
10 feature available.
11 Transformer vector group and CT ratio
484
selection/corrections through
software.
12 LBB Protection Setting range:
13 LBB Protection : Time range
15 Max Digital Input (Equipped)
16 Max Digital Input (Feasible)
17 Max Digital output (Equipped)
18 Max Digital Output (Feasible)
Disturbance record (Mention resolution,
b) record length, Sampling rate,File type)
Fault recorder (Resolution, storage
c) capacity, File type)
d) Self diagnostics (Equipped?)
Time synchronisation interface equipped
33 (Mention media, standard supported)
8. GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR BAY CONTROL UNIT:
Guaranteed
1 Make & Model
Disturbance recorder (Mention resolution, storage
capacity, record length-Pre-trigger & post trigger,
b) Sampling rate (samples/cycle))
Metering - Four quandrant measurement? Accuracy
c) class?
Fault recorder (Mention resolution, record length-Pre-
d) trigger, post trigger, Sampling rate (samples/cycle))
485
Self diagnostics (Equipped during start up and always

e)
in powered ON condition?)
Programmable logic control facility in BCU configurable
f) with IEC 61131-3 compliant tool for complex and
sequential automation application, Boolean logic.
Protection functionsApplicable for BCPU)
g) (List out details below for each of the protection
functions separately)
Protection function description with ANSI code
Settings range
Operating time
10 Operating system
11 Data transmission speed supported
Communication ports (Mention media, speed &
12 protocol)
Communication port for device configuration (Mention
13 media )

Time to update the Binary event (Status change of

15 Binary inputs etc ) in the graphic display of BCU.
Time to update the Analog measurand (in the graphic
16 display of BCU.
Provision of sufficient protection in the BCU to protect
17 from natural hazards viz lightning & thunder systems.
Provision of Electrical isolation between all the
functional Boards and field connections. Mention the
18 dielectric isolation rating for each I/O Modules.
19 Operating temperature range
20 Relative humidity -Operating range
21 List out the type test standards complied by the BCU
9. GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR GATEWAY EQUIPMENT:
Guaranteed
1 Make & Model No.
2 Operating system
Processing platform :
3 (Embedded technology? Processing capacity etc)
i Memory for data (Type and capacity)
ii Memory for programme (Type and capacity)
486
iii Facility for programmable logic functionality

iv Maximum Binary Input/ Output Capabilities
Note :Mention for programme, data/records etc with
type i.e non-volatile/Flash etc.)
Availability of communication ports
4 (Mention media, protocol, data transmission speed)
i Towards Master Station’s
ii Towards SAS LAN/Bay level LAN

iii For HMI interface (KB, Mouse, Monitor interface)
iv Other ports (specify)
Switch over time (Applicable if redundant Gateway
5 configuration is stipulated)
10. GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR CABINETS FOR CONTROL & PROTECTION PANELS,SAS
Guaranteed
For C&P For SAS
Panel Panel
1 Make & Model
Cabinet dimension state with tolerance
2 level.
3 Thickness of cabinet
a) Weight bearing sides
b) Other sides
4 Swing frame play in deg (For C&P) Not applicable
5 Outer Glass door thickness
6 Degree of protection (IP ?)
7 Paint shade
a) Exterior
b) Interior
Paint standard (IS-5?), Thickness of
c) paint
8 Type tests complied (List out)
11. GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR HMI Server & Engg. WS
S.no Description Guaranteed Specification
For HMI For Engg. For Laptop

Server WS metering computer
WS for SAS
487
tool
1 Make & Model
Power supply operating

2 voltage range
3 Processor
4 RAM (Type & capacity)
5 HDD (Type & capacity)
6 DVD (Type & capacity)
7 I/O Ports (Type & quantity)
8 Clock speed & Bus speed
9 Operating system
10 Mounting (Rack mount?) N.A
HMI Software : Limitation

of license for data points,
11 IEDs if any.
NMS Software : Limitation

of license for Nodes,
Devices, data points, if
12 any. SNMP version?
Type tests for industrial

grade computer (List out
with the standard
13 complied)
Degree of protection (IP?)

a for enclosure
Operating temperature
b range
c Operating humidity range
Vibration protection
(Mention standard
d complied)
488
Shock protection (Mention

e standard complied)
f EMI/EMC Compliance
g Electrical safety tests
Type tests complied (List

h out other tests)
14 LED Monitor
a Make & Model
b Size with screen height
c Resolution
d Flicker free (TUV Certified)
e Anti glare feature
12. GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR ETHERNET SWITCH
Guaranteed
Specification(Yes/No);
Specify additional details
S.no Description wherever necessary.
1 Make & Model
SNMP version supported for secure
configuration of network
2 switches
SNMP version supported for providing
secure access to network
devices through
3 authentication, and encryption
SSL Web encryption preventing
eaves dropping, tampering or
4 message forgery
Port Security through disabling
of packets from
5 unauthorized MAC addresses
SNTP for synchronizing the
6 switch’s internal clock
7 RSTP (802.1w) industry standard
489
method for providing

recovery of redundant networks
RMON for monitoring of network
8 status & statistics
VLAN (802.1q) providing the
ability of segregating the
9 network into smaller Virtual networks
QS- (802.1Q) for prioritization of
10 network traffic
Port Mirroring assisting network
11 troubleshooting
IGMP Snooping enabling reductions
12 in multicast traffic
13 Backbone port : Speed, physical port type.
14 Tributary port : Speed, physical port type.
15 Type tests complied
i Degree of protection of enclosure (IP?)
ii IEC61850-3
iii Other tests (List out)
Sl. 13.GTP PARAMETERS FOR TRIVECTOR METER BIDDER’S

No. CONFORM
ATION
1 MAKE & TYPE
2 APPLICABLE STANDARD IS 14697 (AMENDED UP TO DATE)
(YES/NO)
3 ACCURACY CLASS 0.2S (YES/NO)
4 RATED VOLTAGE (+20% TO -40%) (YES/NO)
5 BASIC CURRENT (In) 1/5 AMP (YES/NO)
6 MAXIMUM CONTINUOUS CURRENT (1.2In) (YES/NO)
7 STARTING CURRENT 0.001 In (YES/NO)

8 SHORT TIME OVER CURRENT 20 Imax (YES/NO)
9 DISPLAY PROVIDED WITH BACKELIT LCD TYPE (YES/NO)
10 SEVEN NUMBER (5+2) display DIGITS (YES/NO)

11 SIZE OF DIGITS 10X5 MM MINIMUM
12 POWER CONSUMPTION OF VOLTAGE CIRCUIT 1W, 8VA (YES/NO)
13 POWER CONSUMPTION OF CURRENT CIRCUIT 1VA (YES/NO)
14 kVA/KW MD PROVIDED (YES/NO)
490
15 INTEGRATION PERIOD OF MD 30/15/5 MIN With sliding window.

(YES/NO)
16 COMMUNICATION PORTS 3 Nos
(1 No OPTICAL PORT, 1No DLMS,1 No IEC 61850/MODBUS) -
ARE PROVIDED (YES/NO)
17 MATERIAL OF BASE AND COVER POLYCARBONATE (YES/NO)
18 ALL ANTI-TAMPER FEATURES AS PER TENDER SPEC ARE
PROVIDED (YES/NO)
19 TYPE OF BACKUP POWER PROVIDED BATTERY (industrial
type)/SUPER CAPACITOR.
20 PROVISION OF MD RESET (AUTO/MANUAL) RESET DATE AND
TIME (YES/NO)
21 EXTENDED TRANSPARENT TERMINAL BLOCK COVER/ suitable
arrangement (50MM) IS PROVIDED & SEALING ARRANGEMENT
(YES/NO)
22 COMPLIANCE TO PROTECTION FROM TAMPER & FRAUD.
(YES/NO)
23 INTERNAL DIAMETER OF TERMINAL HOLES (5mm)-(Y/N)
24 IN-HOUSE TESTING FACILITIES FOR CONDUCTING ACCEPTANCE
TESTS AS PER IEC AND THIS SPECIFICATION (YES/NO)
25 AVAILABILITY OF CALIBRATED RSS METER OF CLASS 0.05-0.1

ACCURACY WITH VALID CALIBRATION CERTIFICATE (YES/NO)
26 DATA RETENTION FOR A LONG PERIOD UNDER POWER OFF

CONDITION. (YES/NO)
27 DECIMAL RESOLUTION IN CALIBRATION MODE (YES/ NO)
28 ICON/ display support FOR CURRNT REVERSAL, PHASE WISE.

(YES/NO)
29 FIXING ARRANGEMENT OF METERS AS PER SPEC. (Y/N)
30 FURNISH PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION OF METER OUTLINING THE
METHODS AND STAGES OF COMPUTATIONS OF VARIOUS
PARAMETERS STARTING FROM INPUT VOLTAGE AND CURRENT
SIGNALS INCLUDING SAMPLING RATE IF APPLICABLE.(AS A
DOCUMENT HARD&SOFT COPY) (Y/N)
31 WHETHER the tendered meter TYPE TESTED as per IS:14697,
CBIP:88 and DLMS compliant as per ETD 13(6211) of 2010 April
2010 (YES/NO)
32 TYPE TEST REPORT NO.
33 RTC TEMPERATURE COMPENSATED 0-50˚C (Y/N)
34 FACILITY FOR CORRECTING RTC DRIFT THRO
CMRI/REMOTE(Y/N)
491
35 RTC MAKE & ACCURACY (MINUTES/YEAR)

36 PCB IS MANUFACTURED BY SMT AND WITHOUT ANY WIRE
LOOPS AND JOINTS (YES/NO)
37 TOD TIME ZONES ARE PROVIDED FOR ENERGY & DEMAND AS
PER SPECIFICATION (YES/NO)
38 INTERNAL BATTERY GUARANTEE/UNDERTAKING IS SUBMITTED
(YES/NO)
39 WHETHER VOLTAGE&CURRENT CIRCUIT ARE SOLIDLY
CONNECTED INSIDE THE METER BODY WITHOUT ANY LINKS
(Yes/No)
40 WHETHER TYPE TEST REPORTS, MANUAL ALONG WITH COPY
OF THE SAME IN TWO CD'S IS SUBMITTED (YES/ NO)
41 AS PER TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION LEAST COUNT TEST IS

CARRIED OUT (YES/NO)
42 DETAILS OF CT PROVIDED (YES/NO)
43 NUMBER OF PULSES/KWHR&KVARH COUNT.(P.U)
44 TIME TAKEN TO FUNCTION UPON POWERING UP OF METER
45 DETAILS OF TERMINAL BLOCKS PROVIDED (YES/NO)

46 a.) GLOW WIRE TEST OF POLYCARBONATE IS CARRIED OUT
(YES/NO)
47 MEMORY CAPACITY IN MB.
48 NON VOLATILE RETENTION TIME IN ABSENCE OF POWER.
49 OVER ALL DIMENSIONS & WEIGHT.

50 SEALING PROVISION FOR COVER, TERMINAL COVER,
COMMUNICATION PORT (YES/NO)
51 PROTECTION FROM LIGHTNING & HV SURGE (YES/NO)
52 RANGE FOR SAFE OPERATION (Voltage & Current) as per
Specification (YES/ NO).
53 TOTAL NUMBER OF TAMPER EVENTS AVAILABLE as per Clause
10.2.2. (YES/ No).
54 CMRI/BCS SOFTWARE AS PER SPECIFICATION (YES/NO)
55 AVAILABILITY OF SELF DIAGONSITIC FEATURES (YES/NO)
56 VALUE UPTO WHICH METER CAN WITHSTAND DIRECT

CURRENT IN AC CIRCUITS WITH OUT GETTING CT
SATURATED RESULTING IN MEASUREMENT ERROR OF MORE
THAN PERMISBLE LIMIT.
57 MAGNETIC IMMUNITY LEVEL FOR AC/DC
59 WHETHER THE METER CAN RECORD ENERGY AS PER
492
VOLTAGE MEASURED BETWEEN INCOMING PHASE &

NEUTRAL TERMINAL WHEN DC SIGNAL IS INJECTED ON
NEUTRAL TERMINAL THROUGH A DIODE-(YES/NO)
60 PCB MATERIAL GLASS FR-4 GRADE (YES/NO), IF NO FURNISH
DETAILS.
61 SHORT TIME OVER CURRENT WITHSTANDS CAPACITY FOR
ONE HALF CYCLES AT REFERENCE FREQUENCY-(IN TERMS
OF I-MAX.)
62 DISPLAY SEQUENCE AS PER SPECIFICATION (YES/NO)
63 READING PROVIDED IN THE METER IS DIRECT (YES/NO)
64 CONFIRMATION TO THE EFFECT THAT METER DOES NOT GET
DAMAGED EVEN IF 240V (AC) IS APPLIED FOR 5 MINUTES
BETWEEN meters aux PHASE AND NEUTRAL terminals AND
CONITNUE TO RECORD CORRECTLY AFTER RESTORATION OF
NORMAL SUPPLY.(YES/NO)
65 CAN METER PERFORM WITHIN CLASS 0.5S ACCURACY UPTO
150% OF Imax with PF RANGE 0.5 LAG, 0.8 LEAD & UNITY.
(YES/NO)
66 WHETHER METER CAN RECORD ENERGY IF VOLTAGE FALLS
UPTO 50% OF RATED VOLTAGE AT In TO 1.2In. (YES/NO)
67 DEGREE OF PROTECTION IP-51 (Y/N)
68 DATA TRANSFER TIME
A METER TO CMRI (MIN).
B CMRI TO BCS (MIN).
72 view formats as per specification (Y/N)
73 Front port : Physical port (Optical, DLMS ?)
74 Rear Port : (RS 485, DLMS?)
75 Self powered from VT input?
14. GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR Station DR collector for implementing DR collection and
Remote accessibility system (SDC)
Guaranteed
1 Make & Model No.
2 Memory for data (Type and capacity)
3 Memory for programme (Type and capacity)
Equipped communication ports
Ports (Mention quantity, physical port, communication
4 protocol etc.)
Type tests Standards complied ?
493
SECTION - 29
SCIENTIFIC INSTRUMENTS
1.0. BOQ FOR ENNORE 230KV/110KV GIS SS
Sl. No. Description Qty.
1. Digital Multimeter 1 No.
2. 10 kV Digital Insulation Tester (Rechargeble battery operated) 1 No.
3 Circuit Breaker Analyzer kit with DCRM and laptop computer 1 No.
4 Handheld Digital clamp meter (True rms AC/DC currents upto 1 No.
2000 A)
5 Digital Mini Clamp Meter(for mA current measurement range 1 No.
20mA - 200mA - 2 - 200A)
6 Digital earth resistance clamp on meter 1 No.
7 OTDR meter 1 No.
8 Optical Power meter 1 No.
9 Optical LASER source 1 No.
10 Bit error meter 1 No.
11 Optical splicing equipment 1 No.
12 SF6 Gas Analyser 1 No.
2.0. SCIENTIFIC INSTRUMENTS SPECIFICATION FOR ENNORE 230KV SS

2.1. GENERAL FOR INSTRUMENTS AND TESTING EQUIPMENTS:
1. Onsite Service support during project guarantee period should be guaranteed.
2. Inland service support by the manufacturer should be available in Tamilnadu for
all the instruments and testing equipments.
3. Calibration certificate for all the instruments and testing equipments not older
than 2 months from the date of supply should be furnished traceable to from
NABL / Internationally recognized laboratory.
4. All equipments should be type tested as per IS/ IEC/Equivalent standards from
NABL /Internalltionally recognized laboratory that should include but not limited to
the following:
494
i. EMC & EMI

ii. Safety
iii. Environmental : Operating & Storage temperature, Operating humidity,
Vibration,Shock.
Operating Temperature for the application requires in the range of should
be 0 to +50°C,Relative Humidity Max. 95% non-condensing
iv. Degree of protection as per IEC 60529 /IS /Equivalent standard with
suitable IP code.
v. Any other type tests required for the application.
5. Operation manual should be provided.
6. Onsite demonstration cum training on the testing equipments should be
provided.
3.0. DIGITAL MULTIMETER:
UL Certified (IEC 61010, 61326, CAT III-1000V, CAT IV-600V, 8kV
Surge) 5000 count True RMS Digital Multimeter, 1000V, 10A AC & DC
with Resistance & Capacitance Measurement functions : 1 No.
1. AC & DC VOLTAGE
a. Range : Up to 1000V
b. Resolution : 10µV
c. Accuracy : ±(0.12%rdg + 2dgts)
2. AC & DC CURRENT
a. Range : Up to 10A
b. Resolution : 0.1µA
3. CAPACITANCE
a. Range : Up to 9999µF
b. Resolution : 10pF
4. RESISTANCE
a. Range: Up to 50MΩ
b. Resolution: 0.01Ω
c. Accuracy: ± (0.3%rdg + 6dgts)
495
5. Sensing : True RMS

6. Display : 3⅘ digits, 5000 counts LCD display
7. Update Rate : Fast data : 5 / second nominal;
8. 52 Segment Bar-graph: 60 per second nominal.
9. Operating Temperature: 0°C to 45°C
10. Relative Humidity: Maximum 80% R.H. for Temperature up to 31°C
11. Storage Temperature: -20°C to 60°C, 80% R.H. (With battery removed)
12. Pollution degree: 2
13. Altitude: Operating below 2000m
14. Temperature Coefficient : Nominal 0.15 x (specified accuracy)/°C@(0°C ~
18°C or 28°C ~ 45°C)
15. Power Consumption: 4.3mA typical
16. Power Supply : Single 9V battery.
17. Dimension : 198(L)mm x 97(W)mm x 55(H)mm with holster
18. Weight : Approx.340gm / Approx. 430gm with holster.
19. Safety : CAT III 1000V AC & DC and CAT IV 600V AC & DC.
20. Type tests : Degree of protection : IP54, - IEC/EN 61326-1/ Equivalent.
- IEC/EN 61010-1/ Equivalent
21. Transient Protection: 8kV lightning surge (1.2/50µs)
22. The multimeter shall be handy , easy to use and should have im -
pact and shock proof protection holster.
23. The multimeter shall have automatic and manual measurement range se-
lection.
24. The multimeter Shall have integrated data hold, low battery indication
and auto power off feature.
25. Shall have Diode, acoustic continuity test facility and acoustic warn-
ing signal for incorrect use and fuse protection for all modes.
Acceptable Make and Model: Fluke 289 or equivalent advanced

model with all features and functions enabled.
496
3.0. 10 KV DIGITAL INSULATION TESTER (RECHARGEBLE

BATTERY OPERATED)
Portable rechargeable battery operated (2.5/5/10 kV) Digital Insulation
Tester with Automatic AI & PI feature :1 No.
 Functional Requirement : For the measurement of Insulation Resistance
Analysis of various equipment’s insulation
 Voltage selection :
a. 50...1000 V at 10 V steps
b. 1...10 kV at 25 V steps
 Measurement Range : Up to 40TΩ with max resolution of 0.1TΩ
 Short Circuit Current : 1.2 mA, 3 mA and 5 mA test current
 Step Voltage Test :
a. 50...1000 V with 10V steps

b. 1000…10kV with 25V steps
 Continuity Measurement :
a. For protective connections and equipotential bonding with 200 mA

current
b. Measurement range : Up to 999Ω
c. Voltage on open terminals: 4...24 V
d. Compensation of test lead resistance
e. Current flowing in both directions, mean value of resistance is dis-
played
 DC and AC voltage measurement :
a. 0 to 299.9V with 0.1V Resolution

b. 300V to 750V with 1V Resolution
c. Accuracy : ±2% m.v.
d. Frequency range 45...65Hz
 Capacitance Measurement : Up to 49.99μF ±(5% m.v. + 5 digits)
 Measurement of temperature : -40 to 99.9°C with resolution of 1°C
 Test time : Up to 99 Min 59 Sec
 Modes Available
497
a. T1, T2 and T3 test times for measuring one or two absorption coeffi-
cients from the range of 1…600 s
b. Polarization Index (PI)
c. Absorption coefficients Ab1, Ab2
d. Dielectric Absorption Ratio (DAR)
e. Step Voltage Test (SV)
f. Dielectric Discharge calculation (DD)
g. Ramp test/Leakage current/Capacitance/Time constant readings of
Auto / Power transformers, UG cables and Electrical equipment of
Voltage ratings up to 765kV substation environment.
 Data storage :999 objects, which may store up to three levels of sub-ob-
jects, 999 sub-objects for each level. Each subject, and sub-object may
store up to999 measurements
 Display Graphic LCD 5.6'’ backlit
 Operating Temperature : -10ºC to 50ºC
 Environmental Protection Instrument : IP67 (IP40 - with lid open)
 Standards : EN 61010-1 and IEC 61557, CAT-IV 600V (CAT-III 1000V), EN

61326-1 and EN 61326-2-2
 Power supply : The Digital Insulation tester should be capable of operat-
ing both in chargeable Battery supply (Built-in rechargeable battery pack)
or with 230V AC 50 Hz supply
 Charger : 90V to 260V 50 Hz/60 Hz
 PC compatibility: USB port with suitable software to support Windows

Vista, XP & 2000.
 Scope of supply: Instrument with 20m Test Lead Set, Power Supply cable,
Calibration Certificate, USB Cable, Temperature Probe, Crocodile Clip, Pin
Probe, Operation Manual, Software
 Calibration certificate: Unit shall be duly calibrated before supply and the
date of calibration shall not be older than two months from the date of in-
spection/supply of the kit.
498
 Training: Supplier shall have to ensure that the kit is made user friendly.
Apart from detailed demonstration at site, the supplier shall also have to
arrange necessary training to end user engineers.
 Commissioning, Handing over the Instrument: Successful bidder will have
to commission the instrument to the satisfaction of end user.
 After Sales Service: Bidder will have to submit the documentary evidence
of having established mechanism in India for prompt services.
Acceptable Make and Model: Megger S1-1568 with all features and
functions enabled / Equivalent Advanced model.
5.0. CIRCUIT BREAKER ANALYSING KIT (MULTI BREAK)

Circuit Breaker Analyzer Kit for 400kV SS with 6 Channel Dynamic
Contact Resistance Measurement feature having 24 Timing Channels,
6 Travel Channels, 6 Coil Currents, 4 Auxiliary Timing Channels, to be
supplied with 6 Nos of Transducers cum Fixture, Trolley, 35m Test
Lead Set and laptop computer :1 Set.
1. Functional Requirement :
a. The instrument should be suitable for testing the CBs up to 400kV as

per applicable standards and testing procedure for circuit breaker. It
should be operated through laptop. The test data should be automati-
cally saved in laptop after test.
b. The instrument should be suitable for measuring the operation timing of

Main, PIR and Auxiliary Contacts (wet & dry) of CB as well as recording
the Close & Trip Coil Currents.
c. It should carry out the Dynamic Contact Resistance measurement of

Main & Arcing Contacts as well as Travel measurement (with external
travel transducer & fixture) of operating mechanism. It should measure
parameters like contact gap, contact wipe, Additional Insertion of Arcing
Contacts, velocity, over-travel, rebound etc.
d. The test results should have repeatability, consistency & immunity to

electromagnetic interference in live switchyard up to 400kV.
2. No. of Channels
499
a. Main Contact Channels : 24 (4 Main + 4 PIR per pole on 3 poles simul-

taneously)
b. Auxiliary Contact Channel : 04 wet + 04 dry
c. DCRM / Test Current Channels :6 Nos. Dynamic Resistance & Test Curr-
net Channels each. Built-in 100 A DC current source for each of 6 chan-
nels.
d. Travel Channel :06 Nos.
e. Coil Current Channels :06 Nos.
3. Sampling Speed : 1, 5,10 & 20kC
4. Accuracy
a. Timing : ± 0.05 % of reading ± resolution
b. Coil Current : ± 0.5 % of reading ± resolution
c. Resistance : ± 2 % of reading ± resolution
d. Travel : ± 0.5 % of reading ± resolution
5. Measurement Range
a. Timing : 2 S to 40 S
b. Dynamic Resistance : 1, 2, 4 & 8mΩ
c. Coil Current : 1, 2, 5, 10 & 25A
d. DCRM Test Current :100A (Minimum).
6. Resolution
a. Timing : 0.05ms
b. Coil Current : 0.1% of Selected Range
c. Dynamic Resistance : 0.1% of Selected Range
7. Test Leads and accessories: One complete set of cables of sufficient length
(Minimum 25 meters for Contact Timing and DCRM) with suitable clamps &
connectors, compatible with the instruments should be provided for success-
fully carrying out the test in SS. Additionally all the required accessories
should be provided for the smooth functioning of kit. Further hard carrying
case (which should be robust / rugged enough) for ensuring proper safety of
the kit & test leads during transportation shall have to be provided
500
8. Travel Transducers : Supplier should offer 1 set each (one set consisting of 3
nos.) of travel transducers along with suitable clamp / fixtures which suits
400/220 kV SF6 CBs of ABB / AREVA / SIEMENS (having Spring-Spring
Mechanism) for BHEL 400 kV SF6 CB having Hydraulic Mechanism & for CGL
400 / 220 kV SF6 CB having Spring-Pneumatic mechanism along with each
instrument. So with each kit totally 15 Transducers or with additional quan-
tity of Transducer as required in the field, with Fixtures are to be supplied.
9. Trolley: Kit should be supplied with suitable trolley with large wheels. Kit will
be mounted on trolley for easy movement in substation.
10.Design / Engineering : The complete equipment along with complete acces-

sories must be designed / engineered by Original Equipment Manufacturer
11.Power Supply : It shall work on single phase 230V ±10%, 50Hz ±5% supply
with standard socket
12.Operating Temperature : 0 to +50°C
13.Relative Humidity : Maximum 95% non-condensing
14.Portability : It should be portable and trolley mounted for smooth movement

in live switchyards
15.Software: The software should be suitable for automatic testing & report
generation, signature as well as trend analysis of all measured parameters.
Comparison of graphs as well as pass/fail limit entry should be possible. The
kit should have facility to communicate with windows based computer for
control, operation & downloading the test data. The instrument should be
operated through Laptop. The test set-up once entered for one type of CB
should be saved as CB type and should be usable during subsequent testing
to save set-up time. The laptop shall be supplied with Anti glare feature,
DVD drive and suitable antivirus software.
16.PC Interface: Kit should have Ethernet or USB communication port.
17.Kit shall include supply of one Laptop PC of Dell / Lenovo / hp make with lat-
est specifications such as Core i5 Intel Processor, 4 GB RAM, 1TB or better
HDD, 14” TFT screen, 2 Nos USB, 1 No Ethernet, 1 No HDMI, 1 No Optical
wireless Mouse, Power Cord & Carry Bag complete with other required ca-
bles and connectors with preloaded operating system MS Window 7 Profes-
501
sional or better with latest version application software required for storage,
analysis and record management. The laptop shall be supplied with suitable
antivirus software.
18.Environment
a. Temperature - 0 to +50°C
b. Relative Humidity - Upto 95% non-condensing
19.Calibration certificate :Unit shall be duly calibrated before supply and the
date of calibration shall not be older than two months from the date of in-
spection/supply of the kit.
20.Training Supplier shall have to ensure that the kit is made user friendly.
Apart from detailed demonstration at site, the supplier shall also have to ar-
range necessary training to end user engineers.
21.Commissioning, Handing over the Instrument: Successful bidder will have to

commission the instrument to the satisfaction of end user.
22.After Sales Service: Bidder will have to submit the documentary evidence of
having established mechanism in India for prompt services.
Acceptable make & model: SCOPE HISAC ULTIMA + 6 Channel

DCRM Kit with all standard accessories for testing the CBs up to
400kV, features and functions enabled.
6.0. HANDHELD DIGITAL CLAMP METER (TRUE RMS AC/DC

CURRENTS UPTO 2000 A)
1. DC Voltage
a. Range : 60mV, 600mV,6V, 60V,600V,1000V
b. Resolution : 0.01mV, 0.1mV,1mV,10mV,100mV,1V
c. Accuracy : ±(0.5%rdg + 15 dgts)
2. AC VOLTAGE (TRMS)
a. Range : 60mV, 600mV,6V, 60V,600V,750V
b. Resolution : 0.01mV, 0.1mV,1mV,10mV,100mV,1V
c. Accuracy : ±(1.5% rdg + 10 dgts)
502
3. AC CURRENT (TRMS) & DC CURRENT

a. Range : 400A,1000A,2000A
b. Resolution : 0.1A, 1A
c. Accuracy : ± 3.5% rdg
4. RESISTANCE
a. Range : 600Ω,6kΩ,60kΩ,600kΩ,6MΩ,60MΩ
b. Resolution : 0.1Ω,1Ω,10Ω,100Ω,1kΩ,10kΩ
c. Accuracy : ±(1.2%rdg + 10 dgts)
5. CAPACITANCE
a. Range : 40nF, 400nF, 4µF,40µF,400µF
b. Resolution : 10pF,100pF,1nF,10nF,100nF
c. Accuracy : ±5% to 20%rdg
6. FREQUENCY
a. Range : 10Hz, 100Hz,1000Hz
b. Resolution : 0.01Hz, 0.1Hz,1Hz,
7. TEMPERATURE
a. Range : -20 ~ 1000°C
b. Resolution : 1°C / 1°F
c. Accuracy : ±(3°C + 2)
8. General Specification
a. Sensing : AC True RMS Sensing
b. Jaw size : 60mm
c. Polarity : Automatic negative polarity indication.
d. Over range indication: The “OL” or “-OL” display.
e. Protection: Overload protection at all ranges
f. Auto Power Off: after approx. 15 minutes .
g. Display/Control: Low battery indication, Data hold facility, Relative off-
set. Display :3&3/4 digits backlit antiglare display. Keypad
h. Operating Temperature: 0°C ~ 40°C (32°F~104°F); Relative Humidity
£ 80% R.H.
503
i. Storage Temperature: -20 C ~ 60 C (-4°F~140°F); Relative Humidity £

90% R.H.
j. Type Test: Degree of protection: IP54, EMC, Safety, Environmental
tests as per IEC/ Equivalent.
k. Power Supply: Standard 9V battery.
9. Accessories :
a. Test leads (pair)
b. User’s manual.
c. Carrying case.
d. Batteries.
Acceptable Make: Advanced Model in Fluke / Megger make with
all standard accessories, functions and features enabled.
7.0. DIGITAL MINI CLAMP METER (FOR MA CURRENT

MEASUREMENT RANGE 20MA - 200MA - 2 - 200A)
1. Function : Measurement of AC leakage current, AC Current upto 200A
2. Test Mode : Clip-on CT, Integral mode.
3. Display Mode : Four Digit LCD display.
4. LCD Dimension : 35mm x 21.5mm
5. Display Size : 32mm x 15mm
6. Jaw Size : 40mm
7. Construction: Digital, Hand held industrial grade rugged case construction
8. Display/Control: Backlit antiglare Digital LCD/Keypad with Data hold function
to allow for easy reading in dimly lit or hard to read location.
9. Sampling Rate : About 2times/s
10.Range : 0.00mA ~200.0A (50/60Hz)
11.Resolution : 0.01mA
12.Measuring range and accuracy
a. 0.00mA ~ 9.99mA : ±1.2% ± 5dgts
b. 10.0mA ~ 300.0mA : ± 1.5% ± 5dgts
c. 0.00A ~ 9.99A : ± 1.2% ± 5dgts
504
d. 10.0A ~ 99.9A : ± 1.5% ± 5dgts

e. 100.0A ~ 199.9A : ± 2% ± 5dgts
13.Line voltage : Line test under AC600V
14.Data Storage : 60 groups, “FU”symbol flickering means storage is full
15.Peak Hold: Peak value capture and hold function, press HOLD button contin-
uously to show peak value during the course of testing.
16.Data Hold : Display shows “DH” symbol.
17.Overload : Display shows “OL” symbol.
18.Battery Voltage: When battery voltage reduced to 2.5V ~ 2.7V, battery low
voltage symbolwill be displayed. At this time, measurement accuracy will de-
crease.
19.Power Consumption : about 5mW
20.Operating Temperature and Humidity : -0 C ~ 40 C : below 80% R.H.
21.Storage Temperature and Humidity : 10 C~60 C : below 70%rh
22.Insulation Strength : AC 2kV/rms (between core and box)
23.Auto Power Off: 5 minutes to reduce battery consumption.
24. Over Load protection required.
25.Dimension : 64(W)mm x 160(H)mm x 23(T)mm
26.Weight : Approx. 120g (with battery)
27.Power: DC3V Button-type battery LR-44 x 2 or SR-44 x 2.
28. Type Tests: Degree of protection : IP54,
Applicable Safety Rules: IEC1010-1, IEC1010-2-032, Over voltage, CAT
III(600V), Pollution Degree 2
Acceptable make: Advanced model in Fluke/Megger make with all
standard accessories, functions and features enabled.
8.0. DIGITAL EARTH RESISTANCE CLAMP ON METER

TYPE : Handheld digital earth resistance clamp on meter
DISPLAY : Backlit anti glare alpha numeric LCD display
Jaw size : Suitable to accommodate Conductor size of 39mm
Power supply : Battery powered continuous rated for 24hours.
505
Range : Ohm to 0.05 ohm to 1200 Ohm with automatic ranging.
Resolution : 0.01 Ohm upto 200ohm, 5 ohm for range upto 400 ohm, 30 ohm
for higher range.
Range Resolution : Accuracy
0 Ohm to 200 ohm 0.01 Ohm 2%
201 Ohm to 400 ohm 5 Ohm 10%
401 Ohm till 1200 ohm 30 Ohm 25%
Record storage capacity : 100 records
Principle of operation: Induce test current into the earth system and measure
the ground resistance in multi ground installation without the need to
disconnect the ground. The instrument should be designed for suitable
insulation and satisfactory operation in electric and magnetic field in the
substation environment. Self calibration.
Operating temperature: 0deg to 55 Deg
operating humidity : less than 85%
standards for compliance :
EMC : IEC 61326 / Equivalent
Safety: IEC 61010-2-032 / Equivalent
Degree of protection : IP40 or better.
Accessories: All neccessory accessories, Carry case.
Refer also general specification for instruments.
Acceptable Make/Model: Megger DET14C or equivalent advanced model

with all features and functions enabled.
9.0. OPTICAL TIME DOMAIN REFLECTO (OTDR) METER

Technical features required:
a. Ultra long haul measuring capacity
506
b. Transmit Power Should be equal to 5 dB
c. Central Wave length : 1310/1550nm ±20nm
d. Laser safety class (21CFR) : Class1
e. Distance measurement Range : upto380km (380km for HD and VHD

modules)
f. RMS Dynamic Range : 50 db
g. Event Dead Zone : 6m
h. VFL option OTDR module:635nm±15nm Class 2.21 CFR
i. Lithium-ion Battery with minimum of 15 hrs battery operation
j. PC Software for Report Generation
k. Ports required : USB & Ethernets testing – 10/100/1000/1G/10G
l. Dual Optical Spectrum Analysis feature required.
m. Temperature Range: -20ºC to 50ºC
n. Storage: -20ºC to 60ºC
o. Input/Output:
RS232-C Centronics Interface
External Keyboard
Ethernet Interface(optional)
p. Additional items required:-
i) Visual Band Locator
ii) Laser Source & Power Meter features enabled.
iii) Video Inspection Probe
Acceptable Make, model : VIAVI 8100D series (part number

E8136D) or equivalent and all other advanced features and functions
enabled
10.0. OPTICAL POWER METER

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS:
507
1.Calibrated wavelength(nm) : 850/1300/1310/1400/1550/1625

2.Detector Type : InGaAs
3.Accuracy : ±5%±1nm
4.Resolution to +10dBm : 0.01dB@-60 to +10dBm
to -60dBm : 0.1dB@-70 to -60dBm
5. Linearity : ±5%
6. Auto power off : yes
7. Backlight : yes
8. Reference value :yes
9. Measuring range(dBm) : -70 to +26
10. USB interface : yes
11. Data storage : yes
12. Wave length recognize : yes
13. Tone detection(HZ) : 270,1K.2K
14. Operating temperature : -10 to 50° °c
15. Storage temperature : -20 to +70 ° c
16. Power supply : 6VAC/DC 2500 mAH
17.Relevant IEC/Equivalent standards.
STANDARD ACCESSORIES:
1.FC/PC,SC/PC, ST/PC interchangeable connector,
2.Manual
3.Carrying Bag
4.Software(CD),
5.USB cable
6.AC/DC adapter
7.Test report.
Acceptable Make/Model: Advanced model in JDSU/Fluke make with all
features and functions enabled.
11.0. OPTICAL LASER SOURCE
1. wave length(nm) : 1310 &1550
2. Emitter type : Laser diode
3.Central wave length : 1310±20nm & 1550±20nm
4. spectral width : 5nm
508
5. output frequency(HZ) : 270,1K,2K
6. Outputpower : -5dBm
7.Adjustable range : ±3dB,0.1dB/ step
8.auto power off : yes
9. Back light : yes
10. operating temperature : -10to 50°c
11. storage temperature : -20 to 70°c
12. power supply : 6v,2500mAH
13.output stability :short term(15min)˂±0.05Db@1310,1550nm
Long term(8hours)˂±0.1dB@1310,1550nm
14.Relevant IEC/Equivalent standards.
Standard accessories:
1.FC/PC,ST/PC,SC/PC interchangeable connectors,
2.Manual,
3.Carrying bag,
4.Battery,
5.Software(CD with USB cable),
6.AC/DC charger,
7.Test report.
Acceptable Make/Model: Advanced model in JDSU/Fluke make with all
features and functions enabled.
12. BIT ERROR METER
Technical features required:
a) Optical Interface: G.957 Optical Transmitter and Receiver (options)
i) Class 1 laser product
ii) Connectors: FC-PC Connectors
iii) Transmitter wavelength : Single (1310nm), Dual (1310nm and

1550nm)
iv) Line bit rates: 155.52 Mbps, 622.08Mbps, 2488.32 Mbps
b) Optical Transmitter Specifications – Tx Output Power +3dBm to -3

dBm.
509
c) Optical Receiver Specifications: Rx Optical Overload = -6dBm
d) Transmit Clock Synchronisation
i) Internal Stability : ±3.6ppm
ii) Tx bit rate offset: ±100ppm
iii)Increment : 0.1ppm
e) Electrical Interfaces
i) Input Voltage (peak to peak) : 0.2 to 1 V
ii) Connector Impedance: SMA/50Ω.
Acceptable MakeVIAVI T-BERD/MTS 5800 Network Tester with all

features and functions enabled / Equivalent Advanced model.
13. OPTICAL SPLICING EQUIPMENT & TOOLS KIT

Acceptable Make, model : Sumitomo 82C model splicing machine with all
features and functions enabled / Equivalent/ Advanced model.
14. SF6 GAS ANALYSER
Item Specification
Functional Requirement 1. The instrument should be suitable for
online measurement of Moisture (Dew point
& ppm), Purity, SO2, HF, CF4 and Air
content of SF6 Gas in gas insulated EHV
equipments, in live switchyard upto 220/400
kV level, as per applicable standard testing
procedure of IEC & CIGRE.
2. The SF6 gas purity should be based on

Infra Red Technology.
3. The measurement should be possible at

standard pressure/ system pressure.
4. The test results should have repeatability,

consistency & immunity to electromagnetic
510
interference in live switchyard upto 220 kV

levels.
5. The instrument should have the feature of
vacuum purging of sample hose and storage
bag before testing to ensure no mixing of
already tested sample with new gas sample.
Measurement Parameters 1. SF6 purity – Range: 0-100 % ,Accuracy: +/-
0.5 % & Resolution: 0.1 %
2. Dew point - Range: -60 to +20 deg C,
Accuracy: +/-2 deg C
3. SO2 - Range : 0-100 ppm, Accuracy : +/- 2
ppm
4. HF – range : 0 – 10 ppm, accuracy : +/- 1
ppm
5. CF4 – Range: 0 to 80%, accuracy +/- 1%
full scale
6. Air – Range : 0 to 100%, accuracy +/- 1 %
full scale
Input Pressure 0.5 to 9 Bar
Compressor Upto 10 Bar
Battery Life Minimum 8 hours
Weight Not more than 20 Kg (including carrying case)
Printer Integrated thermal printer
Re-circulation/ Pumping Back The kit shall have the inbuilt facility of pumping
of SF6 gas back the measured SF6 gas to the equipment
being tested.
Test Leads and accessories Complete set of Hoses, pipes, coupling, valves
etc. for measurement with suitable adaptors for
connection with Equipment (BHEL, CGL, ABB,
Areva, Siemens make CBs/CTs etc.) If any
additional accessories required in the field, that
have to be supplied by the supplier.
Design/Engg. The complete equipment along with complete
511
accessories must be designed/engineered by

Original Equipment Manufacturer.
Power Supply 150 – 240 V AC at 50 Hz or and Inbuilt battery
with charger/adapter etc.
Operating Temp. -10 to +50 °C
Relative humidity Max. 90 % non-condensing
Display/Control LCD/Keypads.
Environment The test kit shall be compatible for
EMI/EMC/safety environment requirement as
per IEC.
Rapidox SF6 6100 Pump back Gas Analyser with all accessories and
functions enabled or equivalent advanced Model.
SECTION - 30
COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENTS
1.0 INTRODUCTION
1.1 GENERAL:
TANTRANSCO intends to establish Fibre Optic Communication links, through
Optical fibres between the locations given below and Synchronous Digital Heirarchy
512
(SDH) equipments and PDH Multiplexers with interface for Protection inter-trip or Digital
Protection Coupler for its own communication needs.
Sl. Station – A Station – B Distance
No between A &B
. in Kms.
1. Ennore GIS 230 kV SS NCTPS stage-I 10
2. Ennore GIS 230 kV SS Tondiarpet 230 KV 10
3. Ennore GIS 230 kV SS Manali 400 KV 6
4. Ennore GIS 230 kV SS ETPS Expansion 4
The requirement of STM cards, SFPs and Ethernet modules are as given in
Price schedule. The requirement are given considering future integration of
remote end substations to be established also.
2.0 SCOPE:
The scope of the project includes:
a) Design, engineering, manufacture, transport, installation , testing and commis-
sioning of Synchronous Digital Heirarchy (SDH) equipments and PDH Multiplexers
with Cross connect & with standalone Digital Protection couplers.
b) integrating the new F.O. links with the existing F.O. network.
c) Provision of an efficient Element Management System licensed to accommodate
atleast 300 Network Elements and capable to accommodate atleast 400 Network
Elements.
d) All cabling, wiring, patch facilities, equipment DDF’s and interconnections to the
supplied equipment side of the defined interfaces.
e) Supply of testing instruments & mandatory spares.
3.0 EXISTING COMMUNICATION FACILITIES:

Details of Existing PDH Multiplexers, and SDH equipments in adjacent
stations to the proposed stations are shown in Appendix-I.
4.0 The following points were considered for arriving the BOQ referred above.
Optical Attenuation per Km. of fibre = 0.3 dB
Sl.No. Equipment Description Tx level(dB) Rx Margin available
513
threshold dB
dB
1. STM-1-S-1.1 -12.0 -28 16
2. STM-S 1.2/S 4.2(short haul) -12.0 -28 16
3. STM L.1.2(longhaul) -5 to 0 -34 29 to 34
4. STM L.1.2x(extra longhaul) 0 to +5 -34 34 to 39
5. STM-L.4.2 (longhaul) -3 to +2 -28 25 to 30
6. STM-L.4.2x(extra longhaul) 0 to +5 -36 36 to 41
7. STM 4.1 -15 to - 8 -28 13
Sl. Name of the Fibre Optic Dist Fibre ConnectoMtce Tx-Rx Eqpt. Type Tx-Rx
No Link . Loss r loss . margin proposed Margin
. Km @ dB marg require availabl
0.3 in d e
dB/ dB dB dB
Km
in dB
1. Ennore GIS 230 kV SS- 10 3 1.0 3.0 7 STM-4- S 13
NCTPS I 4.1
2. Ennore GIS 230 kV SS- 10 3 1.0 3.0 7 STM-4- S 13
Tondiarpet 230 KV SS 4.1
3. Ennore GIS 230 kV SS- 6 1.8 1.0 3.0 6 STM-4- S 13
Manali 4.1
4. Ennore GIS 230 kV SS- 4 1.2 1.0 3.0 6 STM-4-L-4.1 13
ETPS Expansion
5.0 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:

The work covered by this specification shall include design, manufacture, factory
tests, supply, training, installation, cabling, field tests and commissioning of SDH
equipments and PDH Multiplexers with Digital Protection couplers to be provided by the
Contractor. The Bidder is encouraged to offer standard products and designs. However,
the Bidder must conform to the requirements and provide any special interface
equipment necessary to meet the requirements stated herein. It should be noted
that all preliminary design information (such as distance between stations)
are provided for bidding purposes only. The Contractor is responsible for the
final design and system performance.
The Bidder’s proposal shall address all functional requirements within this
specification and shall include sufficient documentation to provide reviewers with
compliance particulars without further necessity for inquiries.
514
A comparison of the functional requirements of this specification to the

performance characteristics of the bidder’s offering may lead to conclude that
additional items (hardware/software) are required that are not specifically mentioned in
this specification. The bidder shall propose and be responsible for providing these items
such that a viable and fully functional communication network is implemented. Such
materials shall be considered to be within the scope of the contract , whether
specifically called out or not in the specification or in the contract schedules and should
be identified as a part of the bidder’s proposal. The bidder shall not be eligible for extra
charges for such material.
The wideband network shall utilize state- of-art equipment to provide
communication services necessary for the operation of the power system. All
equipment provided shall be designed to interface with existing equipment and shall be
capable of supporting all present and future requirements identified in this
specification. The specified spare capacity requirements for new equipment shall also
be identified.
The communication equipment shall be designed as to provide for expansions and

reconfigurations without impacting normal operation, including adding and removing
circuits. It shall be designed to operate in varying environments, such as those
requiring special enclosures to provide protection against rodents, contaminants,
vibration and electro-magnetic interference.
6.0 GENERAL RESPONSIBILITIES AND OBLIGATIONS:
This section describes the Contractor(s) and Employer’s general responsibilities
and obligations.
CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES AND OBLIGATIONS:
The Contractor shall be responsible for all cables and wiring associated with the
equipment provided. The Contractor shall also be responsible for determining the
adequacy of the local power source for the equipment and for wiring to it with
adequate protective breakers. In addition, the contractor shall be responsible for
shielding equipment and cabling to eliminate potential interference to or from the
equipment and for earthing all cabinets and shields.
The Contractor’s obligations include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Engineering, design, transfer of technology , training of Employer
representatives, supply, testing, integration, delivery to the stores/site,
515
unloading, storing, handling and moving to the final position, installation,

testing and commissioning for successful commercial operation of the system.
b. Equipment engineering and design specific to each site where equipment and
systems supplied on this project will be located, including review of conformance
with local environmental and earthing considerations.
c. Engineering and technical assistance during the contract and warranty period.
d. Equipment necessary to ensure compatibility between new and existing
equipment.
e. All hardware, software and firmware required to satisfy the requirements of this
specification.
f. Factory and field testing of the all hardware, Software and firmware provided.
g. Providing a Quality Assurance Plan ensuring Employer access to the
manufacturing process.
h. Installation and integration of all Contractor(s) supplied communications
equipment into the existing network.
i. All documentation and drawings as specified.
j. All required spare parts, spare cards price, maintenance aids, and test
equipment.
k. All cables and wiring needed to expand/supplement existing Digital Distribution
frames (DDF) as necessary for proper operation of the wideband network.
l. An availability analysis showing MTBF (mean-time-between-failure) and MTTR
(mean-time-to-repair) figures for all system components.
m. Planning for a smooth transition from existing operations to network operations,
including all new equipment.
n. Hardware, software, and firmware maintenance, debugging and support of the
equipment through final acceptance and maintenance on all new equipment
through the warranty period.
o. Availability of service, spare and expansion parts for all equipment for a
minimum period of 10 years from the date of operational acceptance by
Employer or 7 years after the declaration of withdrawal of equipment from
production whichever is later.
p. Any minor modifications such as drilling necessary holes in floors for laying the
cables will be the responsibility of the Contractor.
516
q. Supply, laying and termination of cables from AC/DC panels to the equipment
supplied by the Contractor will be the Contractor’s responsibility.
r) Provision of separate Communication earth as per the requirement( Pipe in Pipe
technology ) or as per standards.
s) Necessary optical attenuaters shall be provided wherever required as per the
prevailing field conditions.
EMPLOYER’S RESPONSIBILITIES AND OBLIGATIONS:
The Employer will provide the following items and services as part of the Project.
a) Review and approval of the Contractor(s) designs, drawings and recom-
mendations.
b) Arranging necessary shut downs and work permits at various sites.
g) Communication network configuration data.
h) Interconnection drawings for existing equipment, including MDFs.
i) Review and approval of test procedures.
j) Participation in and approval of “type” factory and field tests.
k) Review and approval of training plans.
l) Providing support and access to facilities at the sites.
m) Coordination of the Contractor’s activities with the Employer’s Operations and
other departments.
n) Obtaining statutory clearances from regulatory bodies, which includes No-
objection from Department of Telecommunication for the wideband network.
p) Implement the necessary renovations, expansions or construction of facilities
required for the equipment to be provided by the Contractor.
8.0 APPLICABLE STANDARDS:
The SDH equipment shall fulfill the latest version of ITU-T , ETSI & ISO standards
and recommendations including the following minimum requirements:
1) Functional characteristics; G.957,G-783, G-764.
2) Transmission interface characteristics:
Optical fibre: G-652,G.653, G.655.
Optical interface G-707, G-957.
Output jitter (all optical interfaces): G-783, G-823,G-825.
Jitter tolerance(all optical interfaces) G-823,G-825.
Jitter transfer function(all optical interfaces) G-783.
517
Mapping & Demapping G-707.

SOH insertion and extraction G-707, G-783.
Specifications and codes shall be the latest version, inclusive of revisions,
which are in force at the date of the contract award. Where new specifications, codes,
and revisions are issued during the period of the contract, the Contractor(s) shall
attempt to comply with such, provided that no additional expenses shall be charged to
the Employer without the Employer’s written consent.
In general, compliance with ITU-T/ITU-R, ISO, BIS, IEC and IEEE standards
as applicable, shall be mandatory as a minimum. Exceptions shall be documented and
submitted for Employer approval.
9.0 FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS
The primary function of the communications network is to provide a highly
reliable voice, data and protection inter-trip signal transport system. A brief
summary of wideband communication system requirements follows:
1. The Synchronous Digital Hierarchy(SDH)shall be of the state of the

art and capacity – STM-4 or STM-1 as given in the schedule separately
as per latest ITU standards with complete redundancy and protection.
The PDH Multiplexer and Digital Protection couplers shall be as per
latest ITU-T & IEC standards.
2. The equipment shall have Engineering Orderwire and over head channels.
3. The equipment shall support Ethernet ports and Ethernet cards shall be
provided as per Bill of Materials.
4. Local and remote status alarm supervision facilities.
5. Element Management System.

6. Alternative routing system as defined below.
7. The equipment shall support differential protection protocol C 37.94 standard &
adequate cards shall be provided for feeder differential protection which shall
be compatible to other end FOTE/Multiplexer equipment.
10.0 ALTERNATE ROUTING:
All fibre optic terminal equipments provided shall have redundant optical
port. It shall be possible to provide alternate routing through these ports in future
without any need for any additional hardware and software except for fibres. It
518
shall be also possible to reroute the traffic from one direction to other,
in case of fibre problem in one direction in case of ring network.
If during the development and deployment of the network, configuration
schemes providing alternate routing opportunities are identified, there should be a
cooperative effort between the Employer and the Contractor to pursue and
implement these, insofar as it does not negatively impact terms and conditions of
the contract nor the requirements in this specification.
PART-II SECTION-II
SDH EQUIPMENTS, PDH MULTIPLEXERs with cross connect and Interface for
Protection inter-trip & Digital Protection couplers DETAILED TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATION
SCOPE:
The following SDH equipments, PDH Multiplexers with cross connect & Digital
Protection couplers are to be supplied, erected and commissioned in the substations
noted against them:
Schedule A:
Sl. Name of the SDH & Quantity required No. of Differential

No. station PDH STM-1/4 PDH Digital SDH links protection
equip optical Multiplexe protection to be interface cards
ment interfac r with couplers connecte ( C 37.94
e cards Cross- (8 d compatible)
Connect command)
1. Ennore GIS 1 no. 3 Nos. 1 No. 4 Nos. 6 4 nos. ( 4
230 KV SS directions port card), 8
(MSP) directions.
2. Manali 400 -- -- -- 1 no. -- 2 nos. ( 4 port
( FOX 615 card), 2
equipment directions
available) suitable to fix
in FOX 615
FOTE
equipment.
3. NCTPS stage-I -- -- -- 1 no. -- 2 nos. ( 4 port
( FOX 615 card), 2
equipment directions
available) suitable to fix
in FOX 615
519
FOTE
equipment.
4. Ennore 1 no. 2 Nos. 1 No. 3 nos. 4 2 nos. 4 port
Expansion directions interface card.
(MSP)
5. Tondiarpet 1 no. 2 Nos. 1 No. 3 nos. 4 2 nos. 4 port
230 KV SS directions interface card.
(MSP)
SDH EQUIPMENT :
The SDH equipment shall be of STM-1 and upgradable to STM-4
capacity by mere replacement of Small Form factor Pluggable (SFP) as given
in the schedule.
The specified fibre optic transmission data rate is defined in multiples of CEPT
standard E1s as described in ITU-T/CCITT Recommendation G.703.
FOTS shall be designed to utilize the fibre optic cable, in conformance with ITU-
T/CCITT recommendation G.652, G.653 and G.655.
FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENT:
The optical transmit function of a Fibre optic Terminal shall accept and equalize
HDB3 coded electrical inputs that shall meet ITU-T Recommendation G.703.
Combined with the Service Channel and In-Service Monitoring (ISM), the HDB3 coded
bit stream shall be converted for injection into the optical fibre.
The optical receive function shall reconvert the optical signal into electrical
signals, separate ISM and the Service Channel and deliver an equalized HDB3 coded
electrical output that meets ITU-T Recommendation G.703. SDH minimum
transceiver characteristics are specified in table 2-1. Fibre Optic Transceiver
characteristics.
In the SDH Terminal configuration, two transceivers shall be configured as to
provide Primary and Secondary paths for the link.
TABLE -2-1 - FIBRE OPTIC TRANSCEIVER CHARACTERISTICS
Optical Wavelength 1310/1550nm *NOTE

Optical Source Laser.
520
Optical Source Lifespan Better than 5 X 105 hours

Optical Fibre type DWSM
Optical Connectors Type ST-PC Option 1
Type FC-PC Option 2
Jitter Performance Per ITU-T Recommendation G.823
Source Primary Power -48Vdc
Relative Humidity, non-condensing 10-100%
Elevation:
Operating To 3000 meters
Non-operating To 10000 meters
Temperature Range: (Non-environmentally controlled)
 To Manufacturer’s Specification. 0 to + 50 C

 Operation without damage -10 to + 55 C
 Shipping/storage. -40 to + 60 C
Temperature Stabilization: Meet or exceed operational performance
requirements through entire temperature range as specified in Section .
Eye Safety for laser Equipment: To avoid eye damage, when a receiver detects
a line interruption, it is required that the optical power of the laser shall be
reduced to safe limits on the transmitter in the opposite direction.
* NOTE: Optical wavelength shall be selected considering the characteristics of the

optical fibre and the link budget.
SERVICE CHANNEL:
Service channels shall be provided as a function of the SDH.
SUPERVISION AND ALARMS:

ISM circuitry shall be provided as a function of the SDH. Local visual alarm
indicators shall be provided on the equipment and as dry-contact pin-outs. F1 Type
local craftsperson terminal interface and/or remote equipment monitoring is required.
At a minimum, SDH terminals shall provide alarms as specified in Table 2-2.
TABLE-2 -2 FIBRE OPTIC TERMINAL ALARMS:
Alarm Cause
LED/Laser Failure Drive Current Low Threshold
521
Drive Current High Threshold

Receive Failure Optical Receive Low Threshold
Transmit Frame Alarms HDB3 Loss of Input
Distant Alarm Indication Signal (AIS)
Local AIS
Receiver Frame Alarms BER > 10-3
BER > 10-6
Regulator Alarm Clock Recovery (Synchronization Loss)
Power Supply/Converter Alarm Failure, Low Voltage Thresholds
Quality Parameters. Per ITU-T Rec. G.821/G.826
HIGHER ORDER MULTIPLEXING:
The base digital interface is defined at the CEPT standard E1. Configuration
specifics shall require that SDH equipment support multiples of E1 port requirements.
Higher order multiplexing of multiple E1s shall be provided as part of the SDH.
DIGITAL DISTRIBUTION FRAME (DDF) AND PATCHING FACILITIES:
One No. 21x E1 DDF for each station shall be provided and all the 21 E1s shall be
wired.
SDH EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENT:
1. The equipment shall be modular in design and flexible for capacity expansion
either by plugging of modules in the prewired spare slots or by adding additional
shelves to existing racks, without need for rewiring or relocating existing
equipment.
2. All capacity expansion shall be non disruptive to existing traffic under all
circumstances.
3. It shall be hot swappable.
4. The equipment shall be able to work continuously in non air-conditioned
environment at all sites proposed.
5. The equipment shall be immune to Electromagnetic , RF interference

generated by nearby source and shall meet the latest international standards in
this regard.
6. The SDH equipments shall be configurable as STM-1 or STM-4, with suitable
522
type of SFP (Small Formfactor Pluggable).
8. The SDH equipment shall support GFP –F encapsulation for Ethernet data.
9. It shall support Status Message Scheme(SSM) for SDH timing.
10. Network protection timing shall be as per ETSI/ITU.
POWER SUPPLIES:
The SDH equipment shall have its own power supplies with fuses, isolators etc.,
The Power supply shall have over voltage, under voltage, short circuit, reverse power
and surge protection. As soon as the normalcy in voltage, current and surge conditions
are restored, the power supply unit shall restart on its own without need for manual
switching.
Redundant power supply unit shall be provided in each equipment and

there shall not be any sharing of loads between power supply units. Surge
protectors shall be provided for both the power supply inputs.
CROSS CONNECT:
The switching sub system or cross connect in the SDH equipment shall be non-
blocking, It shall have full connectivity , timing transparency, time sequence integrity
and assured correctness of cross connection.
The SDH equipment shall be capable of interfacing a wide range of input
interfaces including SDH, PDH signals, Ethernet/Fast Ethernet ports in an integrated
manner. It shall be possible to support all network topologies –bus, hub, ring, mesh
and mixed to support network evolution in future.
OPTICAL MODULE:
All Optical ports including optical ports in spare cards shall be provided with
SFP for 1550 nm. Short haul equipments may be provided with SFP suitable for
1310 nm.
ETHERNET MODULE:
1. 2 Nos. 4 port , 10/100 Mb, Layer-2 type Ethernet
interface
(Electrical) shall be provided with all SDH equipments.
The following features shall be supported in this module
SFP Slots for Gigabit Ethernet Optical – 2 Nos.
523
ETH ports minimum 4 port

ETH 10/100 Base T.
Auto sensing.
Flow control 802.3x configurable (On/Off)
EoS mapper.,
ITU-T G.707 (Virtual concantenation)
G7041 (GFP) or X.86(LAPS) configurable.
G.7042(LCAS)
INTERFACE WITH PROTECTION RELAYS:
In all power utilities protection inter-trip facility is provided to transfer the trip
command received in a protection relay (Differential Line Protecion & Distance
Protection relay) at one end of a 230 kV and above level transmission line to be
transferred through communication media to the relay at the other end of the line to
clear the faulty line at both ends. The distance protection relay will provide a contact
output whereas the output from differential protection relay will be an optical output of
standard IEEE C37.94 MM at 820 nm/C37.94 SM at 1300 nm.
INTERFACE CARD FOR DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION:
The interface card shall be suitable to interface 4 trip command optical inputs of
standard IEEE C37.94 MM at 820nm or C37.94 SM at 1300 nm from Differential
Protection relays and 4 trip command outputs of standard IEEE C37.94 MM at 820nm
or C37.94 SM at 1300 nm to Differential Protection relays independently. The interface
card shall have two output ports towards SDH equipment and it shall be possible to
cross connect any or all inputs to any one of the output port. It shall be possible to
connect each output port to different fibres. In addition the interface card shall have
facility to transmit & receive 4 Nos. binary inputs/outputs independently apart from
command inputs and outputs, in a similar method as described above for commands.
INTERFACE CARD FOR PROTECTION INTER-TRIP (DISTANCE PROTECTION):
The interface card shall be suitable to interface 4 trip command inputs and 4
trip command outputs independently. The interface card shall have two output ports
towards SDH equipment and it shall be possible to cross connect any or all inputs to
any one of the output port. It shall be possible to connect each output port to different
fibres. In addition the interface card shall have facility to transmit & receive 4 Nos.
524
binary inputs independently apart from command inputs and outputs, in a similar
method as described above for commands.
The Interface cards for Differential Protection/Protection Inter-trip shall be compliant
with tele-protection standard IEC 60834. It should have been tested for EMI/EMC
compliance and type test reports in this regard shall be furnished along with the offer.
a) These cards shall be software programmable.
b) Performance requirements:
c) a) Transmission time less than or equal to 12 mS.
d) b) Fail to trip: < 1x 10 -5.
e) c) False trip: > 1x 10 -3
f) Additional points:
g) All inputs and outputs shall be galvanically isolated.
h) Cross connect and drop insert facilities for binary inputs shall be possible.
i) Point to multipoint operation is required.
j) 4 binary signals per 64 Kbps channel.
The number of Protection interface cards required is furnished in the

Schedule-A.
Alternatively
( Standalone digital protection coupler is recommended as per site

condition, if the other end FOTE equipment is of other vendor make)
Digital Protection coupler as per the specification below shall be provided

alongwith the SDH & PDH Multiplexer.
DIGITAL PROTECTION COUPLER:
General:
Protection coupler to be used in 230 KV lines with distance protection
scheme is permissive under reach scheme, single phase, single shot, auto
re-closure scheme.
The protection coupler equipment shall be provided in such a manner that
the time interval, between the instant the trip signal is received from the
protection relay on the transmitting end and the instant trip signal is
525
received at the protection relay at the receiving end for any of the above
scheme shall not be more than 12 mS.
The protection coupler offered shall have input and output capacity of
8 channels each.
The protection coupler shall be provided with interconnecting/interfacing unit
suitable for connection with Differential Protection Relay or Distance
Protection relay. It shall be possible to test the operational reliability of the
protection channel from both ends of the channel. Necessary test prints,
push buttons and lamps shall be provided for this purpose. During healthy
conditions of the line the test procedure shall not initiate any tripping
command.
However, if a genuine trip signal is received during the testing process, the
test function shall be completely blocked and overridden. i.e., the trip signal
must have absolute priority.
The equipment offered shall not be sensitive to corona noise and impulse
type of noise. Both visual and audible alarm should be provided. To connect
to external audible alarm two potential free relay contacts shall be provided
in the alarm circuit.
Three dry contacts may be provided for each trip output.
Even if trip impulse is momentarily received, the trip output relay should be
held operated for not less than 50 mS. Failure of Protection coupler should
not cause any trip output to protection relay.
The input and output relay and contacts should be capable of carrying
continuously 5A at 220 V DC/110 V DC selectively, which is nothing but
station voltage.
External counters shall be provided in the coupler for Tx & Rx
separately for each command, failing which the bid is liable for
rejection.
The Protection Coupler shall be of Digital version.
The digital transmission medium shall be G.703, co-directional,
with a transmission speed of 2 Mbps.
526
It shall be possible to use V.11 interface or Optical fibre interface, at a later

date by mere replacement of the interface module.
The Protection coupler shall be compliant with tele-protection standard IEC
60834. It should have been tested for EMI/EMC compliance and type test
reports in this regard shall be furnished along with the offer.
The Protection coupler shall be software programmable.
Performance requirements:
a) Transmission time less than or equal to 7 ms.
b) Fail to trip: < 1x 10 -5.
c) False trip: > 1x 10 -3
Additional points:
All inputs and outputs shall be galvanically isolated.
Cross connect and drop insert facilities for binary inputs shall be possible.
Point to multipoint operation is required.
8 binary signals per 64 Kbps channel.
Sl.No. DESCRIPTION Particulars
(1) (2) (3)
1. Digital medium G.703
2. Transmission speed 2 Mbps.
3. Communication interface G.703 (2 Mbps)
Co-directional interface.
4. No. of commands transmitted Eight commands
simultaneously.
5. Command input detail Opto electronic input 24 V

to 250 V DC , 1 ms
selectable by HMI. Duration
of pulse programmable from
1-250ms.
6. Command output Solid state relay contacts.
1 working contact 290 VDC
(Max) 2A Max. Short circuit
current 100A/30ms.
7. Alarm relay output : Yes
Voltage rating : 290 V AC max.
Current rating : 5 A max.
No. of dry contacts. 2 Neutral contacts
527
8. Power supply operation range :

a) Operating Voltage Range 36-72 V DC
b) Operating Temperature Range -10 t0 +55 deg.C
9. Test facilities for local loop test and End Shall be provide for local &
to End test. remote end.
10. Visual and audible alarm provided or not Visual Alarm through LED &
2 Alarm contacts shall be
available.
11. Transmission time (maximum) < 7 ms with protection

coupler in permissive/
direct/blocking mode of
operation with data rate of
2 Mbps.
12. Performance under noise conditions.
a. Fail to trip PMC (max. actual <1 x 10-5
transmission time less than 20 ms)
probability of Missing command
(Dependability).
13. b. False trip PUC (probability of unwanted > 1 x 10-3
command) (Security)
14. Power consumption. 15 W Max.
15. Whether technical pamphlets and Yes
drawing enclosed or not
16. Compliance to Teleprotection standard Yes
IEC 60834.
18. Compliance to IEC-61000 standards Shall be compliant

19. a. Programmable entirely with PC. Shall be possible.
b. Built in event recorder of 255 events Shall be available.
with 1 ms. Precision.
c. Possibility of daily automatic link Shall be possible
check.
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY:
The system availability shall be greater than 99.9%. System BER shall not exceed 1
x 10 – 12 . Theoretical calculations shall be submitted in support of the above for all
the links with 1 hour MTTR.
CLOCK SIGNAL:
528
The system shall have its own internal clock for synchronisation purpose. Also it
shall have the capability to regenerate clock signal from the 2 Mb stream received
from nearby station. The system shall also accept external clock signal to be given
from any reference station.
The priority of working of the clock signals is as below:

1. External clock from reference station.
2. Clock regenerated from 2 Mb stream
3. Internal clock.
1. PDH MULTIPLEXER:
The hardware of PDH Multiplexer shall be equipped to support following
functionalities along with voice and data channel units:
A) Terminal PDH Multiplexer
B) Protected terminal PDH Multiplexer
C) Drop-Inset and Bypass PDH Multiplexer
D) Cross connect PDH Multiplexer
It shall be totally software configurable without any hardware settings.

The systems in the network shall be manageable through central EMS or via.
Local Craft Terminal (LCT).
The offered PDH Multiplexer shall work on 48 V DC +10 % /-15%
It shall support 30 channel time slot content either voice or data.
It shall have provision for security provision via pass word, for preventing
unauthorized access to PDH Multiplexer configuration.
It shall have at least two programmable alarm outputs.
It shall be capable of supporting following voice interfaces:
a) 2W/4W E&M
b) FXS with hot line configuration option
c) FXO
It shall be possible to configure Tx & Rx levels for voice channels.

The PDH Multiplexer shall be capable of supporting following data interfaces:
a) Ethernet interface Layer-1 type ( Transparent bridging, Minimum 2x
10 Base –T LAN ports with nx 64 Kbps WAN bandwidth)
529
b) V.35 interface
c) X.21 interface
d) V.11 interface
e) V.24/V.28 interface
f) G.703 interface
g) 2 B1Q interface
h) The data interface unit shall support sub rate multiplexing.

i) It shall be possible to drop/insert any channel up to n x 8 Kbps
granularity for low speed RS 232 data channels.
CLOCKING:
The PDH Multiplexer shall be able to drive the clock from multiple sources and it
shall be possible to assign priority between these sources.
In case of failure of highest priority clock, the next in line shall take over
automatically and so on.
MODULARITY AND HOT SWAPABILITY.
It shall be possible to increase the capacity by addition of modules.
All capacity expansion shall be non disruptive to existing traffic under all
circumstances.
It shall be hot swappable.
CONFIGURATION OF PDH MULTIPLEXER:
1. PDH Multiplexer rack - 1 No.
2. Cabinet with complete wiring, MDF & DDF - 1 No.
3. Power supply module - 2 Nos.
4. Control card - 2 Nos.
5. 2 Mb interface card (for min. 2 x 2 Mb) - 1 No. or as per Mfr. standard.
6. 2W/4W E&M card for 8 voice channels - 1 No. or as per Mfr. standard.
7. FXS card 2W-sub loop/hot line for 8 subscribers -1 No.or as per Mfr.standard.
8. FXO card for 8 channels -1 No.or as per Mfr.standard.
9. Low speed data interface card V.24/X21 for 4 channels- 1 No. or Mfr. standard.
10. N x 64 Kbps data interface card V.35 for 4 channels-1 No. or Mfr. standard.
11. Ethernet interface card 4 channels (Layer-1 type)- 1 no. or as per Mfr.standard.
12.Cross connect shall be provided with minimum 16 output ports and
shall have the provision to add output ports in steps of 4 or 8 at later stage.
530
ELEMENT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (EMS):

GENERAL:
Element Management System (EMS) shall be provided as a part of this
procurement. This EMS shall provide the capability to monitor, reconfigure, and
control elements of the equipments supplied under this procurement. The above
capability shall be provided at centralized location, Chennai. The EMS shall be
capable of managing minimum of Hundred Nos.(300 Nos.) Network Elements and
shall be upgradable to manage 400 Nos. Network elements minimum in future.
EMS shall provide display of faults for complete equipments under this contract at
central location, Chennai. Following types of faults management shall be provided
by EMS:
1) Real Time alarm monitoring
2) Alarm acknowledgement
3) History of alarms storage & retrieval
The EMS supplied by Contractor shall be capable of upgrading to support an
Integrated TNMS.
TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS – GENERAL:

The management system should follow the ITU-T Recommendations. Management
Framework (IS 7498-4), which defines the following management facilities needed
by the Employer as follows:
a) Configuration management.
b) Fault management
c) Performance management
d) Security management
CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:
Configuration management is concerned with management, display, and control of

the network configuration. Specific requirements that shall be satisfied include the
following:
531
a. Provide tools to establish and maintain the backbone topology and

configuration information and provide graphical maps depicting the
configurations.
b. Gather descriptive information about the current configuration of the

equipment, provide operator displays, and prepare report.
c. Provide tools for planning, establishing, and changing the static

equipment configuration. Provide for changes to the equipment
configuration in response to equipment failures, planned upgrades, and
operator requests to take equipment offline for testing.
d. Provide verification testing to support new equipment installation.
e. Provide a database capability to maintain various types of information,

such as:
1. Network equipment assets, including manufacturer, model number,

maintenance record, and maintenance telephone contact.
2. Future data to be defined by Employer after commissioning.
FAULT MANAGEMENT:
Fault management is concerned with detecting, diagnosing, bypassing, directing

service restoral, and reporting on all the equipments supplied under this tender.
Specific requirements that shall be satisfied include the following:
a. Display equipment status in a consistent fashion regardless of the source of

the data on a graphical topological, map-type display. Status shall be
displayed through the use of colours on links and nodes as well as through
text.
b. Obtain status and detect faults through periodic polling, processing of

unsolicited alarms and error events, and periodic testing for connectivity.
c. Maintain an alarm summary of unacknowledged alarm events on the

management station display and maintain a log of all received alarms. The
operator shall be able to acknowledge and clear alarms individually and as
532
a group. The use of alarm correlation techniques is encouraged to minimize

the proliferation of alarms caused by a single, common event.
d. Provide the capability to diagnose and isolate failures through analysis of

error and event reports and through the use of both on-line and off-line
diagnostic tests and display of monitored data.
e. Bypass failures through the use of automatic failover to redundant

equipment where possible and through operator-initiated actions where
automatic failover is not possible. The criteria for failover shall be
configurable. As an example, the NMS shall support the transfer of
switching orders to hot-standby fibre terminal equipment configurations and
drop insert equipment .
f. Track network equipment failure history.

POWER FAILURE:
After a power failure, all equipment shall return without any manual reset to the
same mode as before the failure.
PERFORMANCE MANAGEMENT:
Performance management is concerned with evaluation of the use of network

equipments and their capability to meet performance objective. Specific
requirements that shall be satisfied include the following:
a. Monitor point to point and end to end signal quality & history.
b. Provide operator controls to monitor performance of specified events,

measures, and resources. Specifically provide displays to permit the
operator to:
1. Select/deselect network equipments, events, and threshold

parameters to monitor.
2. Set monitoring start time and duration or end time.
3. Set monitoring sampling frequency.
4. Set/change threshold values on selected performance parameters.
5. Generate alarm events when thresholds are exceeded.
533
6. Set multiple thresholds on certain performance parameters. Alarm

categories include as a minimum a warning and a failure.
7. Provide graphical displays of current point to point and end to end

performance parameter values. Provide tabular displays of
current, peak, and average values for performance parameters.
8. Generate reports on a daily, weekly, monthly, and yearly basis

containing system statistics.
SECURITY MANAGEMENT:
The EMS shall be provided with security features to limit access to monitoring and
control capabilities to only authorized personnel.
Authentication techniques shall be provided to verify the identify of anyone trying

to access the EMS or any operator interface where network parameters may be
viewed or changed.
Command security shall be ensured, if possible through use of redundant data

communication channels providing command results annunciation and alarms if
command is not executed.
Access methods shall be provided to limit access to only authorized users of the
EMS. At least three levels of access shall be provided – none, read only, and write.
With “read only” access level, network parameters should only be viewed. Access
to database maintenance, command control and test functions shall be available
with “write” access level. Means shall be provided to ensure only one authorized
user has “write” capability for a selected domain of the network. It shall be
possible to define multiple domains for purposes of monitoring and control.
Human error and conflict detection are also required. Such errors and access
violations shall be reported to the offending user as error messages & warnings.
Repetitive violation of security measures shall generate an intrusion alarm, which
shall be logged and displayed at all authorized operator management stations.
Physical intrusion detected should be reported as an alarm condition.
OPERATOR AUTHORIZATION LEVELS:
534
Two levels of operator authorization, as a minimum, shall be provided.
a. Monitoring Level: Monitoring Level operators are authorized to supervise the

network, but should not be able to change the configuration of the network.
b. Master Level: Master Level operators can supervise the network and carry out
protected functions such as change network configuration & other functions such as
database maintenance functions Authorization at the master level may encompass the
whole network or only a part of it.
Monitoring Level
A monitoring level operator shall have access to at least the following items or
features:
a. Diagram of the network.

b. Name of network elements (NE).
c. Connections between NEs.
d. Faults in NEs.
e. Faults in lines.
After the selection of a link or a network element, the operator shall have access
to the following information:
a. All signals with status between two NEs.
b. All input signals with status to NEs.
c. All output signals with status from NEs.
d. Faults in plug-in unit level.
e. Equipped units in subrack.
f. Unequipped units in subrack.
g. Priority levels (class)
Master Level:
The master level operator shall be able to make the following configuration
changes:
a. Increase the number of NEs.
b. Create new or revised connections between two network elements.
535
c. Decrease the number of NEs.
d. Remove the connections between two network elements.
ALARM INDICATIONS:
The following types of alarms shall be provided as a minimum in addition to other

alarms generated as described above.
a. Transit frame alarms (e.g. input data failed)
b. Receiver frame alarms (e.g., BER>10-3 or > 10-6)
c. Receiver alarms (e.g., AGC at max)
d. Switch over requested.
e. Power supply alarms.
f. Quality parameter indications according to ITU-T recommendation

G.821(erroneous seconds, highly erroneous seconds, degraded minutes).
EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS:
In general the minimum monitoring and control requirements for the
communications equipment are summarized in Tables 2-3 through 2-5.
TABLE-2-3-FIBRE OPTIC TRANSMISSION EQUIPMENT ALARMS AND

INDICATORS:
1 Device Status
2 LED/Laser drive current
3 Transmit Output Power Failure
4 Transmit Frame Alarms
5 Receiver Frame Alarms
6 Receiver Alarms
7 Quality Parameter Indicators
8 Loopback Actuated Indicator
9 Configuration Status
10 Power Supply/Converter Alarms
Table -2-4- Higher Order Multiplex Equipment Alarms and Indicators:
536
1 Device Status
2 Clock Supply Failure
3 Loss of Frame Alignment
4 Frame Parity Check Failure
5 Quality Parameter Indicators
6 Configuration Status
7 Tributary Alarms
8 Loopback Actuated Indicator
9 Power Supply Alarms
Table 2-5- Station Alarms, Indicators and Controls
1 Intrusion Detection alarms
2 Power Failure
3 Fire and Smoke Detection
4 Environmental Control (temperature, humidity, etc.)
NMS CONFIGURATION:
Each node on the backbone network shall include provision for connecting a laptop
PC to support local commissioning and maintenance activities. Through the use
of this PC and local displays/controls, the local operator shall be able to:
a) Change the configuration of the station.
b) Perform tests.
c) Get detailed fault information.
The Laptop P.C. shall be connected to Ethernet/Management interface available at

terminal and repeater stations. Two identical portable ( Laptop) computers, each
complete with necessary system and application software to support the functions
listed above, shall be provided.
INTERFACES:
537
The EMS shall be equipped with graphic workstations in the stations which are
defined in the scope of supply.
A Q1 – interface (ITU-T Rec. G.771) is required for network elements as defined

in ITU-T Recommendations.
The Bidder shall include the detailed information of the interfaces, especially
concerning the lower layer protocols and bit rates supported.
EMS ARCHITECTURE:
The EMS architecture shall be described in detail in the proposal. The following
subsystems or features shall be described:
a. Database used in EMS.
b. Desktop PC, hardware, software and operating system.
c. Graphic display terminals.
d. Laptop PCs.
e. Data communication between nodes and EMS computer.
f. Maximum number of Network elements that could be handled and

number of systems.
g. License details.
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS:
All equipment and systems shall be designed to operate in the following
environmental conditions which are a subset of the above referenced
standards.
TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY
Most of the equipment will not be installed in environmentally controlled shelters.
Therefore, equipment shall operate in accordance with the limits specified below:
Temperature Range: (Non-environmentally controlled)
To Manufacturer’s Specification 0 to + 50 C
Operation without damage -10 to + 55 C
Shipping/storage -40 to + 60 C
Max rate of change of temp 0.5 C / min
538
Ventilation Natural
Relative Humidity, non-condensing 10 – 100 %
BIOLOGICAL CONDITIONS:
All telecommunication equipment shall withstand the influences of flora and fauna
as per latest standards. The equipment and components shall be suitably
tropicalized during manufacture through commissioning, as necessary.
CHEMICAL INFLUENCE:
All telecommunication equipment shall withstand the chemically active substances
sea salts, sulphur dioxide, hydrogen sulphide, chlorine, hydrogen chlorine,
hydrogen fluoride, ammonia, ozone and nitrogen oxides.as per latest standards
VIBRATIONS AND SHOCKS:
All telecommunication equipment shall withstand mechanical conditions (vibrations
and shocks) during transportation, handling and under installed condition as per
latest standards.
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPLIANCE:
The equipments offered shall meet the EMI/EMC compliance as per IEC-801.
PROTECTION CLASSES:
The equipments supplied shall comply with IP44.
IDENTIFICATION:
All cabling, equipment, racks/enclosures (cubicle), modules and material shall be
uniquely identifiable as per the following.
EQUIPMENT LABELLING:
Labelling of equipment shall be adequate to enable its correct location, and to
facilitate routine testing and maintenance . All labels shall be clear, durable and
securely fixed.
POWER DISTRIBUTION:
Inter-rack and intra-rack (enclosure) power distribution shall be clearly identified
with source feed, voltage and power rating information. All power feed cabling
shall be clearly identified near the point of termination.
539
SIGNAL CABLING:
Connectorised signal cabling/wiring requires marking with a unique identifier at
each connectorised end. The signal cable/wire identifier shall include a cable
identifier and the location of both terminations.
Signal cable/wiring installed on terminal blocks requires marking with the cable
identifier and distant end location. The cable tag shall be clearly visible at the
cable fanout point.
All signal cable, wiring and terminations shall be clearly labelled/tagged with
identifiers consistent with Contractor supplied cable plant records. Marking
techniques are subject to approval by the Employer.
CONNECTORS AND SOCKETS:

As a general requirement to avoid problems of silver migration, all contacts on
printed circuit boards should be gold-flashed or gold-plated.
Power supply units with/without stabilizers shall be protected with voltage trip and
overload current circuits. Recovery after a fault shall be automatic for input
over/under voltage and manual for output over/under voltage and over current
condition.
HEAVY DUTY SURGE PROTECTOR REQUIREMENTS:
High quality surge protector/diverter of reputed make shall be provided by the
contractor, for each equipment.
CABLING:
All signalling cables within the telecommunication system, and the power supply
cables are part of contractor’s delivery and installation. Signal cables and power
supply cables shall be placed apart from each other (minimum distance 150 mm).
Redundant cables and cables to redundant equipment shall be placed in separate

cable routes.
All Contractor supplied inside plant cables and cable assemblies shall be
constructed from non-PVC, fire/smoke resistant materials.
540
COMPLIANCE OF STANDARDS:
The SDH equipment shall fulfill the latest version of ITU-T , ETSI & ISO
standards and recommendations including the following minimum
requirements:
Functional characteristics; G.957,G-783, G-764.
Transmission interface characteristics:
Optical fibre: G-652.
Optical interface G-707, G-957.
Output jitter (all optical interfaces): G-783, G-823,G-825.
Jitter tolerance(all optical interfaces) G-823,G-825.
Jitter transfer function(all optical interfaces) G-783.
Mapping & Demapping G-707.
SOH insertion and extraction G-707, G-783.
EQUIPMENT SHELF:
An equipment shelf be provided to hold all equipment modules and shall
provide a backplane for system power and inter module communications.
The shelf shall be capable of being mounted on a standard EIA 19 inch rack.
If more than one shelf is required at any site, multiple shelves shall be
combined and shall function as one integrated node.
TESTING OF EQUIPMENTS:
2.5 SITE ACCEPTANCE TESTS
Following are the Site Acceptance Tests to be carried out in different stages
of installation, erection, testing and commissioning:
a. Pre-Commissioning Period - The Phase 1 Site Acceptance Test (SAT)
including Pre-Commissioning tests.
b. Commissioning Period - The Phase 2 SAT
c. Guarantee Test - Guaranteed System Availability Test.
2.5.1 SITE ACCEPTANCE TESTS
2.5.1.1 THE SITE ACCEPTANCE TEST (SAT)-I.
Site Acceptance Test for Telecommunication Equipment and
Subsystems
Site acceptance test for telecom equipment and subsystems shall be
541
conducted in two phases

(a) Phase 1 SAT (Installation & Pre-Commissioning tests)
This phase includes SAT for all equipment & systems procured under the
present tender.
(b) Phase 2 SAT (Integrated System Tests)
The second phase SAT covers the tests for overall integrated
telecommunications system comprising all equipments.
The Phase 2 SAT shall commence after completion of the Phase I SAT. The
contractor has the overall responsibility for planning and ensuring the success of
the Phase 2 SAT.
2.5.2.1 PHASE 1 SAT
I. Installation Testing
The Phase 1 SAT consists of installation testing of the termination equipment. The
Contractor shall connect all inputs, and communications circuits (making all of the
necessary adjustments) and verify the operation of these circuits. The field
installation test shall be performed for all equipment at each location. If any
equipment has been damaged or for any reason does not comply with this
Specification, the Contractor shall provide and install replacement parts at its own
cost and expense.
The minimal installation testing requirements for the fibre optic and network
management subsystems are provided in Tables 2-6 and 2-7.
Table- 2-6 FIBRE OPTIC SYSTEM INSTALLATION TESTING
Item Description
1. Physical Inspection for conformance to drawings, rack elevations and
appearance of equipment and cabling
2. Power supply/converter voltage measurements
3. Terminal transceiver performance testing
4. Service channel performance
5. User interface, alarm and control functional performance
6. Rack and local alarms
7. Network management interface and supervision performance
8. Input/Output interfaces
9. Safety and signaling earthing system
542
10. Simulation of failure conditions and failover of protected components

Table- 2 -7 NETWORK MANAGEMENT SUBSYSTEM INSTALLATION
TESTING
Item Description
1. Physical inspection for conformance to drawings, rack elevations and
appearance of equipment and cabling
2. Power supply/converter/UPS voltage measurements
3. Workstation hardware inventory, configuration and characteristics
4. Demonstration of proper operation of all hardware, including
workstations peripherals
II PRE-COMMISSIONING TESTS
The pre-commissioning tests shall verify that communication between each test site
can be performed. During this testing, actual link measurements should be made
on each fibre optic link to verify compliance with designed system performance
specifications.
This phase of testing shall be conducted by the Contractor and witnessed by The
Employer. Field adjustments should be made to meet established standards.
However if the field adjustments fail to correct the defects the equipments may be
returned to the Contractor with no obligation to the Employer. The exact content of
the pre-commissioning tests shall be determined jointly by the Contractor and The
Employer. Table-2-8 summarises the minimum requirements for pre-commissioning
testing of the wideband communications network.
Table -2-8 FIBRE OPTIC NETWORK FIELD COMMUNICATIONS
TESTING
Item: Requirement Description:
1. Verification of margins and link performance
2. Bit error rate measurements
3. Measurement of error seconds
4. Confirmation of channel assignments
5. Point-to-point checkout of each new VF/data channel installed
6. Verification of predicted link margins
543
The above tests shall be performed after final alignments, correction for test
Equipment calibration and with measured transmit power adjusted (attenuated if
necessary) to reflect guaranteed performance as noted in the Contractor's
documentation.
2.5.2.2 PHASE 2 SAT (FIELD INTEGRATED SYSTEM TEST)

The tests for the Phase 2 SAT shall include the following tests for systems supplied.
(a) Routine tests as can conveniently be applied on site together with any
other which shall be agreed between the Contractor and the Employer.
(b) System tests including in test configuration, all the equipment to satisfy the
requirements of technical Specification.
(c) Functional system tests to check the error-free and secure interfacing
operationally between the existing systems and those delivered under this
Package.
Testing and, specifically, cutover shall be accomplished in a manner that will
minimize the possibility of a communication system failure. The work will be
scheduled with the Employer in order to accomplish an orderly completion of the
work with minimum interruption to the Employer's normal operation. This may
require performing some of the work after normal working hours or on weekends to
minimize exposure to inadvertent outages.
The intent of the Phase 2 SAT (field integrated system test) is to demonstrate that
the equipment is operational end to end under actual conditions, that all variances
identified during factory and field installation and commissioning tests have been
corrected, and that the communication equipment is compatible with other
equipment at all locations. The Integrated System Test shall include all fibre optic
and termination subsystems, and the network management subsystem.
2.6 GUARANTEED SYSTEM AVAILABILITY TEST (GSAT)
The telecommunications systems shall be subjected to a Two hundred (200) hours
Guaranteed System Availability Test after installation at site and before being put
into commercial service.
The purpose of this test is to ensure in advance, the in service availability of the
system and its component parts. Successful completion of this test with no more
than an agreed number of unscheduled errors (to be agreed between the
544
Contractor and the Employer) will constitute the hardware and software acceptance
of the system.
2.7 GSAT DURATION AND ACCEPTANCE DEADLINE
The duration of the GSAT test shall be 200 hrs. If the Contractor is unable to
demonstrate to TANTRANSCO's satisfaction that the system has attained the
acceptance conditions during an initial period of nine (9) days, then the acceptance
period shall continue on a rolling basis up to an acceptance deadline of 18
days.
2.8 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR GSAT
The duration of the availability test shall be 200 hours.
During the availability test time. no adjustment shall be made to any equipment,
unless specifically agreed with the Employer. During this period, in the event of
failure of a unit/component the defective item shall be replaced by a spare
unit/component without interruption of the test, if possible and the damaged item
shall be repaired and returned to its original position as quickly as possible.
By mutual agreement any period of running with faulty equipment may be regarded
as not part of the test.
If the break of the test occurs due to errors in excess of those defined, the test- will
be deemed as failed, and the Employer may require the test to be repeated from
the beginning.
Prior to the commencement of the tests. the behavior of the system to errors which
are monitored by the software shall be demonstrated to the Employer as required.
A schedule of alarm/failure printout and display messages will be required before
such a demonstration.
No additional program or data shall be read into the system except with the
approval of the Employer. Following any such changes a printout may be requested
to be made of the contents of specified memory locations.
In the case of standby equipment. no automatic switchover to any alternative
standby unit will be permitted, except when the switchover itself is being tested
either manually or automatically.
Internal checking routines which cause the equipment to correct an error
automatically will be accepted, providing that no hardware switchover or
disconnection occurs and that the test is otherwise correct in all details.
545
2.9 TEST PROGRAM FOR GSAT

A test program or set of test programs shall be submitted for approval to the
Employer before the commencement of the test.
The program shall be sufficient to demonstrate compliance with the Test Procedure
Specification and the program shall be designed to frequently check the operation
of routines/parts which may normally be entered only rarely, as well as exercise all
modules to prove the absence of interaction during interleaved operations.
It should also be designed to simulate the system loading expected in order to
expose any unforeseen software timing problems which may result in delays in
updating or loss of data.
The general test program shall include and interleave the following tests and
provide the facilities as follows.
a. Functional test of all functions.
b. Functional test of all input, output, display and control equipment.
c. Printout of both internal and external faults which may not be
readily recognizable.
d. Other tests necessary to meet the requirements of the Specification.
The general test program shall have a short cycle time which shall be according to
agreement and shall be run continuously during the test period.
2.10 ACCEPTANCE CONDITIONS
The Contractor shall agree with the Employer to a number of unscheduled errors
per 20 hrs. above which the equipment will be deemed as having failed the tests.
The Bidder shall state in the technical proposal, the minimum number of errors
expected to be achieved.
The tests shall be deemed successful only if the following conditions are satisfied:
a. The total allowable outage time is not exceeded.
b. No errors in excess of the agreed figure and the system have run
without corrections for a period of not less than 20 hrs in the availability test.
c. Satisfactory results of functional tests.
d. No series of errors/faults on a particular item, indicating a design
weakness.
Should any equipment, or part of it, fail under test to give the required
546
performance, further tests which are considered necessary by the Employer shall be
carried out by the Contractor and the whole cost of the completed tests shall be
borne by the Contractor. These requirements shall apply equally for tests on
Subcontractor's equipment.
After satisfactory completion of the witnessed tests at the Contractor's factory, the
equipment shall be submitted for approval during dismantling prior to shipping. No
item of equipment shall be despatched to site until the Emplover has given his
approval in writing.
2.14 MAINTENANCE SUPPORT
2.14.1. CONTRACTOR MAINTENANCE RESPONSIBILITY DURING THE
GUARANTEED AVAILABILITY PERIOD
The Contractor shall guarantee continuous availability of the system
at 99.9% for a period of one year commencing on the date of handover of
the system to The Employer. During this period, The Contractor shall replace
or repair all detective parts and shall have prime responsibility for
maintaining and operational system .
For this period, commencing immediately after operational acceptance, the

actual availability achieved during the period would be calculated jointly by
the contractor's representative and The Employer. The contractor shall take
continual actions to ensure the guaranteed availability. In case the actual
achieved availability falls short of the guaranteed availability, it would be
considered as contractor's default. However before declaring the contractor's
default the Employer shall negotiate for reaching a mutually acceptable
agreement.
2.14.2. CONTINUING MAINTENANCE CONCEPT
After the Guaranteed Availability Period, all normal maintenance will be
undertaken by TANTRANSCO.
2.15. SPARE PARTS AND TEST EQUIPMENT

The following mandatory spares shall be supplied.
1. 20% of the total quantity as per BoM in the project shall be supplied as
spares, item-wise and type-wise such as SFPs( of all types), sub-rack, all
547
types of modules( including SDH module, PDH module, power supply

moudule, alarm module etc.,). Any fraction of quantity should be
rounded-up to the next higher number.
2. 25 Nos. of connectors, 25 Nos. of Baluns (75ohms to 120 ohms) and
500 mtrs. of co-axial cable for DDF connectivity.
3. One set of crimping tool for each substation( 3 nos) suitable for
crimping the connectors and cables supplied.
4. 6 Nos. of surge protection devices in respect of OLTE, Multi-
plexer & Digital Protection couplers shall be supplied.
5. Tools & tackles required for wiring.
2.16 MISCELLANEOUS SUPPLIES
The Contractor shall provide all required consumable and non-consumable supplies
necessary to support all installation and test activities through final operational
acceptance.
2.17 MAINTENANCE SUPPORT FACILITIES IN INDIA
The Bidder shall describe his own maintenance support capabilities and facilities in
India, in his technical bid.
2.18 SUPPORT SERVICES
Throughout design, implementation, factory testing, and field installation and
testing, the Contractor shall supply consulting assistance, as required by the
Employer for site preparation, field installation. and other areas where technical
support may be required.
Most locations have existing communications equipment. The Employer is

concerned about cutover procedures for an orderly transition incorporating the new
communications equipment. In general, incorporation of the new equipment will
take place on a per-loop basis. The Contractor shall review the Employer's existing
equipment, make cutover recommendations, and prepare a detailed field
implementation plan for phasing in the new equipment and expanding the existing
network.
The Contractor shall be responsible for minor facility renovation, equipment
installation, startup of all equipment and maintenance of the communications
equipment up to and including successful completion of the system availability test.
The Employer personnel will be available to assist the Contractor during installation
548
and field testing of the communications equipment. However, the primary

responsibility for successful installation and field testing of the equipment rests with
the Contractor.
After final acceptance of the communications equipment. the Contractor
shall offer continuing technical support and spare parts for the communications
equipment for a minimum of 15 years, or for seven years beyond the announced
withdrawal of equipment from sale, whichever is greater.
2.19. TECHNICAL SUPPORT
Consultation with Contractor's technical support personnel and trained field
service personnel shall be readily available on a short-term/long-term basis to assist
the Employer personnel in maintaining, expanding. and enhancing the
telecommunication network upon expiration of the warranty period. The Contractor
shall include in their offer(s), a proposal for ensuring continued technical support
as stated above.
2.20 CONTINUED MODULE MAINTENANCE SUPPORT PLAN
The Contractor shall provide continued module maintenance support that will
ensure immediate faulty module replacement
without waiting for the receipt of faulty module, thus reducing transportation
delays. The plan shall ensure that after the expiration of the warranty period,
replacement modules shall be dispatched without awaiting receipt of the defective
modules.
Details of the plan shall be submitted by the Contractor as part of the offer
as a separately priced optional item.
2.22 DOCUMENTATION
2.22.1 GENERAL DOCUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS
All the documentation shall be provided in hard copy and also on CD in full
compliance with the specifications. To ensure that the proposed
telecommunications network conforms to the specific provisions and general intent
of this Specification, the Contractor shall submit documentation describing the
telecommunication network, systems, subsystems and equipment to The Employer
for review and approval. The Employer shall have the right to require the
Contractor to make any necessary documentation changes to achieve conformance
549
with the Specification, at no additional cost to The Employer.

Documentation for the Contractor's standard hardware, software, and
firmware shall be furnished to the Employer for review, but approval by the
Employer will not be required. The Employer, however, reserves the right to
determine that this standard hardware, software and firmware is in full
conformance with the contract requirements and that the documentation contains
sufficient information for the Employer to make this determination.
2.22.2 TEST DOCUMENTATION
The Contractor shall provide documentation for all factory and field tests.
The test documentation shall include the following:
a. Test Procedure Document
b. Type test documents
c. Factory Acceptance Test Documents
d. Site Acceptance Test Documents
e. Availability Test Documents
Factory Acceptance Test results will be included in factory test data. Test
results, for any unwitnessed equipment tests, shall be shipped along with the
associated equipment.
2.23 DRAWINGS
Each drawing submitted by the Contractor shall be clearly marked with the
Employer name, the unit designation, the specification title, the specification
number and the name of the Project. All titles, notings, markings and writings on
the drawing shall be in English. All the dimensions should be to the scale and in
metric units.
2.24 DOCUMENT QUANTITIES
All final textual documentation shall be provided on CD and hard copy
acceptable to the Employer, and already in use by the Contractor is proposed. All
drawings shall be provided on electronic media in AutoCAD.
2.25 TRAINING:
The Contractor shall give training for six numbers of TANTRANSCO’s
Engineers on the SDHs, PDH Multiplexers and Interface for Differential
Protection/Protection Inter-trip for a duration of five days at the works. The training
shall cover installation, erection, testing and commissioning of the equipments,
550
Hardware & Software of the equipments and EMS including configuration of all
equipments.The entire training expenses including to & fro, Boarding , lodging etc.,
shall be borne by the contractor.
o0o
PART-II- SECTION_III
SCHEDULE OF GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS(GTP) FORMS
GTP Form 1
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS for OPTICAL LINE TERMINATION
EQUIPMENT (SDH)
Manufacturer: Model #:
Seq. Parameter: Unit: Particulars:

1. Capacity
Aggregate Bit-rate: Mbps
CEPT E-1 Ports: n x E1
2. Is higher order Multiplex in- Yes/No
built unit of SDH
3. Protection Yes/No
SDH = 1:1 APS
E-1 Ports = 1:1 APS
4. Unprotected System Gain for dBm
-3
BER 10 :
BER 10-6:
5. 1 + 1 APS System Gain for dBm
-3
BER 10 :
BER 10-6:
6. MTBF Hours
Unprotected:
1+1APS Protected:
7. Code Format:
8. List Optical Coupling options:
GENERAL SDH FEATURES:
9. Remarks:
OPTICAL TRANSMITTER
10. Source (LED or Laser)
11. Source wavelength: Nm
12. Source spectral width: Nm
551
Mean launched power Maximum:

13. dBm
Nominal:
Launch power during safety
14. dBm
Power-down due to fibre break:
Stability (nominal power variation
15. due to temperature and/or %
biasing):
Date: -continued- Signature:
Place: Name:
Seal: Designation:

16. Source rise time:
17. Source estimated life span: Hours
18. Source extinction ratio:
Low power alarm
19. Threshold: dBm
field adjustable
OPTICAL RECEIVER
20. Nominal receive signal strength: dBm
21. Receiver Threshold dBm
BER 10-6:
BER 10-9:
22. Receiver overload limit: dBm
23. Spectral Bandwidth (3 Db point): Nm
24. Digital Bandwidth: Mbps
25. Signal-to-noise
@ center wavelength:
@ 3 dB points:
26. AGC range:
SERVICE CHANNELS AND ORDER WIRE UNIT
Engineering Orderwire
27. Omnibus calling available
Yes/No
Describe:
28. Selected station calling available?
Yes/No
Describe:
29. Signalling scheme Describe:
30. Tx/Rx level dBm
31. Speech coding method & bit rate Kbit/s
32. Distortion:
S/N
Noise performance:
552
PROTECTION SWITCHING
33. Switching modes available
Auto?
Yes/No
Manual?
Remote/network management?
Date: - continued- Signature:
Place: Name:
Seal: Designation:
34. Switching priority:
35. Tx switchover & switchback criteria:
36. Rx switchover & switchback criteria:
37. Inbuilt Mux (if applicable) switchover &
switchback criteria:
38. Switch option mode & status indicators:
PDH Multiplxer
Voice channels
Are Service channel requirements
39. Yes/No
specified met?
40. No. of VF Channels: Ea
41. Pass band: KHz
42. Subscriber side interface:
43. Input & Output level dBm
44. Idle channel noise dBmOp
45. Distortion:
Data and Supervisory Channel
46. No of data channels: Ea
47. Interfaces/Connectors:
48. Data rates: Kbps
List ITU-T Standards in compliance
49.
With:
50. Tributary bit rate (nominal): Mbit/s
51. Tolerance in bit rate: Ppm
52. Line code:
53. No. of ports:
553
Place: Name:
Seal: Designation:
Impedance of coax cable used for
54. ohms
Input/Output port:
55. Type of Connector
56. Spare cable pairs?
Input jitter acceptance
57. 100 Hz to 10 KHz: UI (p-p)
10 KHz to 800 KHz:
Maximum output jitter in the absence of
i/p jitter
58. UI (p-p)
100 Hz to 10 KHz:
10KHz to 800 KHz:
59. Jitter transfer characteristic:
OUTPUT PORT
60. Line impedance
Balanced: W
Unbalanced:
61. Test load impedance (Unbalanced): W
62. Peak pulse amplitude
V dc
(nominal + tolerance):
63. Pulse width
ns
(nominal + tolerance):
64. Ratio of +ve & -ve pulses at the
center of a pulse interval
65. Ratio of width of +ive & -ive pulses at
nominal half Amplitude
66. Maximum insertion loss dB
INPUT PORT
67. Attenuation Char. of inter-
connecting cable for
digital signal presented at input port
68. Return loss (at 1.024 MHz) dB
69. Admissible i/p signal attenuation dB
70. Cable loss Equalization Range dB
71. Maximum insertion loss dB
72. Electromagnetic compatibility(List standards & severity levels)
Place: Name:
Seal: Designation:
554

MECHANICAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL PARAMETERS
73. Number of chassis (including. DC/DC
converters, O/W muldem etc.,) required
for Unprotected Terminal:
I: 1 Protected Terminal
74. Chassis Dimensions (L *W*H): Cm
75. Chassis Weight: Kg
76. Chassis mounting options:
77. Chassis clearance requirements
Top * Bottom * Sides:
M
Front Access:
Rear Access:
78. Chassis colour and finish
79. Rack options available
19" ETSI? Yes/No
Slim rack? Yes/No
Others (specify)? Yes/No
80. Protection Class (IP Class):

81. Rack Colour and Finish:
82. Temperature range
Guaranteed performance: °
C
Operation without damage:
Storage/ transport:
83. Relative humidity Minimum:
%
Maximum:
84. Altitude Installed:
M
Transport/storage:
85. Describe Ventilation requirements:
86. Describe dust proofing provisions:
Date: Signature:
Place: Name:
Seal: Designation:
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS for OPTICAL LINE

TERMINATION EQUIPMENT (SDH)
555
POWER SUPPLY UNIT (DC/DC CONVERTER)

Manufacturer:
Model #:
Seq. Parameter Unit: Particulars:
1. Nominal supply voltage: Vdc

Power supply variation
2. Guaranteed performance: Vdc
Operation without damage:
3. Polarity: +
Whether 220 Vac mains operation

4.
Capability inbuilt
5. List derived DC voltages: V dc

Total power consumption (Fully
6. equipped incl. Service channels) Watt I
Unprotected terminal:
1+1 Protected terminal:
7. 1+1 APS protection provided? Yes/No
8. MTBF of Power supply unit: Hours
9. Ultimate Power delivery capacity Watt

Are the following protections
Provided
Over voltage?
10. Under voltage? Yes
Overload?
Reverse polarity?
Other(specify)?
Date: Signature ...................................
Place: Name ........................................
Seal Designation …………………………...
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS for Optical amplifiers
Seq. Parameter Unit: Particulars:

GENERAL PARAMETERS:
556
1. Type of amplifier
2. Source Power supply requirements
Volt:
Current:
3. Gain medium
4. Small signal gain
5. Connection loss to transmission fibre dB
6. Insertion loss dB
7. System noise figure
8. Type of pump – Laser
9. Pumping wavelength
10. Bit-rate Distance Product
11. Type of Optical coupler
12. Type of Optical isolator
13. Operating optical bandwidth
14. Polarisation gain dependant
15. Can the same optical amplifier operate at:
STM-1 ?
STM-4 ? Yes/No.
STM-16 ?
16. Operating bit-rate
Lower limit:
Upper limit:
17. “ F “ type interface ? Yes/No
18. Optical input:
Signal wavelength:
Signal input power (max.):
Signal input power (min.):
Spectral width (-20 dB from peak):
Connector type:
Pulse shape:
Optical reflectance:
557
19. Optical output:

Signal output power (max.):
Signal output power (min.):
Connector type:
20. List & describe Monitor, control & Alarm

points:
21. Alarm contact
Alarm output
Describe Network Management interface
provisions: F & Qx
Date: Signature ...................................

Place: Name ........................................
Seal Designation …………………………...
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS for INSIDE PLANT EQUIPMENT and

MATERIALS - DIGITAL DISTRIBUTION FRAMES
Manufacturer: Model Name & #:
Seq. Parameter: Units: Particulars
1. Dimensions
Height:
cm
cm
Width:
cm
Depth:
2. Weight: Kg
3. Colour and Finish:
4. Method(s) of Mounting
5. Clearances required for Installation:
From Ceiling: mtr
From Rear: mtr
6. Cable entry (s):
7. Cable Glanding:
8. Frame material & Guage:
9. Locking Arrangement
558
10. Frame capacity: (No. of co-axialEach

panels)
11. Co-axial panel capacity: (Number ofEach
PCM Systems)
12. Co-axial connectors:
Type:
Characteristic impedance: W
Return loss (up to 90 MHz): dB
Transfer impedance: W
Test voltage (1 Minute): V
Maximum current rating: A
13. Provide details on installation, cabling, cross connections and patching

facilities (if any).
Date: Signature:
Place: Name:
Seal: Designation
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS for INSIDE PLANT EQUIPMENT and

MATERIALS - MAIN DISTRIBUTION FRAMES
Manufacturer: Model Name & #:
Seq. Parameter: Units: Particulars
1. Dimensions
Height:
cm
cm
Width:
cm
Depth:
2. Weight: Kg
3. Colour and Finish:
4. Method(s) of Mounting
5. Clearances required for Installation:
From Ceiling: mtr
From Rear: mtr
6. Cable entry (s):
7. Cable Glanding:
8. Frame material & Guage:
9. Locking Arrangement
10. Frame capacity: Each
Number of horizontal rows:
559
Number of vertical rows:

No. of terminal blocks per row:
13. Provide details on installation, cabling, cross connections and patching
facilities (if any).
Date: Signature:
Place: Name:
Seal: Designation
APPENDIX –I F.O. NETWORK FOR THE PROPOSED STATIONS IN THIS TENDER
Tondiarpet NCTPS-I
10 km 10 km
Manali 400 6 Km
4 Km
ENNORE GIS ETPS Expansion
Proposed F.O. network

Existing stations
Ennore GIS station
560
APPENDIX – 2
DETAILS OF EQUIPMENT IN ADJACENT STATIONS TO THE PROPOSED STATION
Eqpt. In
Sl.
Name of the station Adjacent station adjacent
No.
station
Manali 400 Fox 615
2.
NCTPS stage-I Fox 615
Ennore GIS 230 KV
Ennore Expansion --
3.
Tondiarpet 230 KV SS --
1) 48 VOLT BATTERY & CHARGER

A) BATTERY CHARGERS
TECHNICAL SCHEME
A. The charger to be supplied should be fully automatic, solid state, and SMPS
Version. It should take care of full variations in the primary A.C. Input voltage. The
stability of the set output voltage should be maintained from the no load of the
charger to the full load and for all combinations of PLCC and battery loads.
B. The charger shall work either as constant voltage source with current limit set
at 120% of rating or as a constant current source with the compliance of voltage
equal to a maximum of 70V. In constant voltage mode (normally used as float
charger) output voltage can be set at anywhere within the range. The current limit is
at 120% of the rating. In constant current mode (normally used for initial charging
of the battery), the current may be set at any value and the charger will adjust its
voltage to maintain the set current constant. The constant voltage or constant
current operation is selected by means of a switch. In the constant voltage mode
(used as float charger) the required number of dropper diodes can be included to
boost charge the battery at a higher current while maintaining constant output
voltage to PLCC equipments.
C. The following provisions should be made in the chargers.
1. Soft-start to avoid any voltage shootup more than the set voltage at the
time of switch on condition, with or without load. The control circuit
should be suitable to prevent overshoot or undershoot or voltage spike in the
event of steep increase or decrease of input voltage or load current.
561
2. Two Potentiometers - one for voltage setting and another for current setting
along with a constant current/constant voltage mode selector switch is
provided. The voltage drops below 48V when overloading occurs.
3. Miniature circuit Breaker for the A.C. input side, and separate circuit breakers
for the PLCC load and battery should be provided. The CB should be of
suitable capacity. The terminals for A.C. supply, PLCC load, battery and Earth
should be clearly marked. The external connection to AC input points, PLCC
load points, Battery points and earth etc. shall be made by means of sturdy
good quality studs provided with washers and hexagonal nuts and not by
screw heads. The circuit breaker should isolate the charger in case of
overload and component failure.
4. Selenium surge suppressors alongwith R.C. circuits or any other suitable
device should be provided for adequate protection against transients to
IGBTs, diodes and ICs.
5. A Digital voltmeter with first decimal display to indicate the D.C. voltage
with a selector switch to read either load or battery voltage should be
provided. The meter shall be of reputed make having class of accuracy 1.0.
6. Digital ammeters with first decimal display should be provided with selector
switch for indicating the load current and battery current. This meter should
have +ve sign for Battery charging and -ve sign for Battery discharging.
The meters shall be of reputed make having class of accuracy 1.0.
For measuring Battery Trickle current a suitable "mA" reading Ammeter with
second decimal accuracy (Analog/Digital Type) may be provided with a
through/bye-pass switch.
7. All transformers and chokes should be wound with properly rated copper
conductor on ferrite core and firmly fixed to the main chasis of the charger
and will not emanate too much humming noise.
8. For easy replacement, the modules and the charger should be linked using
connectors. Alarm annunciation should be operated only in the event of
actual failures.
9. Sufficient lugs and suitable size of bolts and nuts for the input and output
terminals should be provided.
562
10.Sufficient space for good circulation of air inside the charger should be
provided so that the electronic components are not affected by conduction,
convection and radiation of the heat generated by the charger. The
temperature inside the charger should not exceed the normal operating
ambient temperature of the static components used and should be within
the insulation class of materials such as transformers and chokes as
specified in the ISS/BSS.
11.When A.C. supply fails, the charger should not draw abnormal load from
the battery except where the battery supply is required for control and
indication purpose of the charger only. The bleeder resistor should be
disconnected immediately by suitable contactor.
12.The D.C. output voltage to the PLCC load should not be beyond 54V under
any conditions of load and battery current. Dropper diodes shall be
provided accordingly. The number of dropper diodes should be controlled
by a front panel switch to adjust the voltage in PLCC load to 54V or less.
In case of A.C. failure, the dropper diodes should be automatically cutout
by suitably rated power relay and full battery voltage should be available to
PLCC load.
On availability of AC supply after a considerable absence period,
the battery charging current so resulted shall not exceed the permitted
value and this may be specifically ensured.
13.The terminal blocks for external cable connection for A.C. input and D.C.
output should be mounted externally so that the side panels need not be
removed. The external connection points shall be located one foot from the
bottom resting level.
14.Two/Three pole MCB shall be provided in the input side.
15.All electronic components used should be of Industrial grade quality or
higher.
16.Each charger should be supplied with one operating manual with details of
components used in the chargers and detailed circuitry.
17.The dropper diodes are selected by a rotating switch.
563
18.a) As the chargers are to be used in the PLCC system, the positive will be
earthed. The dropper diodes shall be provided in the negative pole lead.
b) For the chargers meant for Microwave communication both positive
and negative should not be grounded and should be in float condition.
19.Provision should be made to isolate the charger on the A.C. input side
instantaneously by midget breaker, whenever the output voltage to PLCC
load exceeds 56V D.C. However, during the isolation, the battery voltage
should be available to PLCC load and alarm indication should be given.
20.R.F. filter on the A.C input side shall be provided for arresting Radio
Frequency interference. Snubber circuits can also be provided as the
equipment will be working in electrical sub-station environment where fault
events are very high.
21.Power factor shall be maintained at 0.8 or above.
22.Alarm indication with LED shall be provided for A.C. mains fail, failure of
fuses, Under Voltage, Over Voltage, output failure, main on, battery
discharge conditions.
23.The wiring should be made with copper conductors of suitable ISS Grade or
voltage class of applications. The frame should be powder coated with
good quality paint.
24.Mains on/Battery Discharge Alarm Facility:
This circuit should give an alarm in the event of mains supply on
but, charger due to fault in the circuit is not supplying the load current fully
but the battery discharges and supplies the load current fully or even
partially.
25.For over voltage and over current condition, the charger should trip.
26.The components of the chargers should be legibly identified with
reference to circuit diagram.
27.IMPORTANT:
A timer circuit with delay shall be incorporated in the AC
Mains Input circuit. The contacts shall be sturdy and of high speed
operation without any sparking. This is envisaged to avoid dip and
564
transient/switching surges occurring in the sub-station environment and

avoid these reflections in the output DC.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR SMPS BATTERY CHARGER
1. Input AC :i) 20A :170 to 270 V AC, 1ph, 50Hz

ii) 40A, 80A & 120A: 370 to 490 V AC, 3 ph, 50Hz
2. DC Output : 46V - 70V DC Continuously variable
3. Ripple : 300mv peak to peak
4. Noise voltage : 2mV phopho
5. Regulation : ± 0.3 V
6. Efficiency : 70%
7. Power Factor : 0.8 @ 230V/440V, 70V DC & full load
8. Alarm Indication :
a) A.C. fail
b) DC over voltage
c) DC under voltage
d) Output fail
e) Audible alarm to be cancelled
AC fail on acknowledgement
20A 40A 80A 120A
9. Rating in Amps : Load Current - 10 20 40 60
Battery current- 10 20 40 60
Total current - 20 40 80 120
10. Initial Charging :
For initial charging of the battery
The constant current mode is to
be used and the current shall be
set at any value within the range
565
B) 48 VOLT BATTERY SET

GENERAL :
This Specification covers the manufacture, testing before despatch and
delivery FOR(D) of Lead-Acid Stationary Battery sets conforming to ISS
1651/1991.
The materials used for the manufacture of the Lead Acid Battery sets
shall be of best class and capable of satisfactory operation on tropics with
humid atmospheric condition without distortion (or) deterioration. The
workmanship shall be of highest grade and the entire works in accordance with the
best modern practice.
I. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS:-
i) Type : Lead-Acid
ii)Positive Plates : Tubular plates
iii)Negative Plates : Pasted plates
iv)Connector : Lead plated copper connector and
Lead plated Brass nuts, bolts and washers.
v)Initial charging : Conforming to IS:1651/1991
vi)Accessories : Teak wood stand, cell stand insulators, cell number
plates.
2 Nos. Syringe Hydrometers, Battery Thermometer and
3V-0-3V cell testing voltmeter shall be supplied in
the accessories with battery set. It may be noted that
the voltmeter shall be of accuracy class not inferior to 0.5
and the resistance shall be atleast 1000 Ohms per Volt.
The Thermometer shall be for measuring appropriate
temperature and one division of the graduated scale
shall represent at the most1 Degree "C". The accuracy of
calibration shall be not less than 0.5 Degree "C".
The Hydrometer shall be provided with graduated scale
one division of which shall represent at the most
0.005 unit of Specific Gravity. The accuracy and
566
calibration shall not be less than 0.005 unit of Sp.

Gravity.
vii)Capacity : The capacity of the Batteries are at 10Hrs discharge
rate to an end voltage of 1.85V per Cell. The batteries
are assembled with tubular positive, pasted negative
plates and microporous PVC separators in wrapped hard
rubber containers complete with acid level indicating
floats, connectors, Bolts, nuts and washers as per IS
1651/1991. The battery sets shall be supplied with
battery stands made out of seasoned Teakwood,
stand insulators, cell insulaltors and Inter-row cell
connectors, in dry uncharged condition and acid for filling
in separate containers (with 10% excess) as per IS
1651/1991.
viii)Insulation :The internal insulation of the cell shall be such as to
stand the heavy wear & tear. The separators shall not
split (or) crush under heavy strain (or) discharge.
ix) Terminals and : Batteries with individual cells connectors in series
Connectors by welding, soldering will not be accepted.
The connectors should be such as to facilitate
easy isolation of any cell, when necessary, for
purpose of maintenance and shall be made of lead.
Copper connectors suitably coated with lead to
withstand corrosion due to sulphuric acid shall be used
where the cells are called upon to discharge at very
high rates. Bolts, nuts and washers for connecting
the cells with intercell connectors shall be robust,
made of brass material and effectively coated with lead
to prevent corrosion.
x) Wooden Stand : The stand shall be for single tier two row cell
arrangement for all the battery sets. The stand shall
be made of seasoned teakwood and shall be
567
supplied well finished but without painting. However, in

order to apply three coats of anti-corrosive black paint
subsequently sufficient quantity of anti-corrosive black
paint in separate containers shall be supplied with
each stand. TNEB will arrange to paint the stands
made of Teakwood. The drawing of the wooden stand
may be furnished. If any change in the dimensions of
the wooden stand is required, the same has to be
incorporated to meet the requirements.
xi) Electrolyte: 10% excess electrolyte in carboys for initial charging. The
specific gravity of electrolyte supplied for the initial
charging of the batteries shall be uniform and such as
to obtain the required value i.e. 1.200 (or) as per
specification of the manufacturer, equally in all the cells
after the completion of the first charge itself. It shall
not necessitate adding concentrated acid for obtaining
required specific gravity later.
xii) Cell containers: The containers shall be of moulded (or) wrapped Hard
rubber and shall conform to IS 1146/1981. The Type
Tests for containers conforming to the requirements
as per IS 1146/1981 may be furnished. The containers
shall be designed such that they do not crack (or)
become leaky and shall withstand normal conditions of
service and will resist any acid action on them.
The Technical particulars are specified in Annexure.
TECHNICAL PARTICULARS.
LEAD-ACID STATIONARY BATTERIES IS1651/1991
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
---
Sl. Description 48V/120 AH 48V/250 AH 48V/400AH
No.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Make & Type :
568
2. Capacity : 120AH AT 250AH AT 400AH AT

10 HRS. 10 HRS. 10 HRS.
3. Number of cells in Battery 24 NOS. 24 NOS. 24 NOS.

set
4. Discharge capacity at 3 Hrs. : 86AH 179.25AH 287AH

Rate for end volt 1.8 volt.
5. Discharge capacity at 10 120AH 250AH 400AH

Hours Rate for end voltage
1.85 volt
6. Normal charging rate : 6A 15 A 24 A
7. Maximum charging rate : 12 A 30 A 48A
8. Normal charging time after 12-14 HRS. 12-14 HRS. 12-14

HRS.
complete discharge
9. Recommended current 6 Amps. 15 Amps. 24 Amps.

for initial charging
10. Time required for initial 100 Hrs. 100 Hrs. 100 Hrs.
charging at the above
current
11. Watt-Hour efficiency when 75% 75% 75%
discharged at 10 Hours
rate
12. Number of rows : Double row Double row Double row

used for the stand
13. Approximate weight of Lead: 5.5 Kg. 11.00 Kg. 17.4 Kg.
required per cell (kg)
14. Approximate weight of : 0.175Kg. 0.325Kg. 0.525Kg.

Antimony per cell
15. Type & Material of : PVC Envelope PVC Envelope PVC Envelope
separators
16. Material of containers : Hard Rubber Hard Rubber Hard Rubber
569
17. Amount and specific gravity: 3.7 Lit. 8.5 Lit. 12.2 Lit.
of electrotyle required per 1.190 SG 1.190 SG 1.190 SG
cell for first filling at 27 Deg.C at 27 Deg.C at 27 Deg.C
18. Recommended specific gravity: 1.200 1.200 1.200
at the end of a full charge
19. Expected specific gravity at : 1.095 1.095 1.095
the end of the discharge at
the specified rate ( 0.015%)
20. Recommended trickle charging 120-480 mA 250-1000mA 400-1600 mA
rate for different type of working
21. Overall dimensions of each : As per IS 1651

cell and complete battery set.
22. Distance between centres of : As per IS 1651
cells when erected.
23. Weight of cell complete with : As per IS 1651
Acid.
24. Recommended Maximum period : 2 Year 2 Year 2 Year
of storage (dry uncharged)
25. Internal resistance of cell : 1.60 m  0.795 m  0.535 m 
Testing Equipments:
1. Voltmeter:
a) accuracy class 0.5
b) resistance per volt 1000 Ohms per volt
2. Hydrometer:
a) graduations
reading possible. Min. 0.005
3. Thermometer:
a) Range: 0 to 100 Deg.C
b)Graduation: 1 Deg.C Min. temperature possible
C) ELECTRONIC PRIVATE ATOMATIC EXCHANGE (EPAX)

DETAILED TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR ELECTRONIC PRIVATE ATOMATIC
EXCHANGE (EPAX)
1.0 SCOPE:
570
1.1 This specification provides for design, manufacture, inspection and testing before
despatch of EPAX Exchanges for Communication application and for use in
conjunction with the existing PLCC carrier sets and PDH Multiplexer.
1.2 The EPAX exchanges shall conform in all respects to high standards of
engineering design, workmanship with latest state of art technology and latest
revisions of relevant standards at the time of offer and the purchaser shall have the
power to reject any work (or) material, which in his judgment is not in full
accordance therewith. The material used for manufacture of the equipment shall be
of best class and capable of satisfactory operation in tropics with humid atmospheric
condition without distortion (or) deterioration.
2.0 STANDARDS:
2.1 Unless otherwise specified elsewhere in the specification, the Power Line Carrier
Communication Indoor equipment along with accessories shall conform to the latest
revisions and amendments thereof, of the following standards/Technical Particulars.
Electronic Private Automatic Exchange(EPAX) : As specified under Technical
Particulars.
2.2 Equipment meeting with the requirements of other authoritative International
standards which ensure equal (or) better performance than the standards mentioned
above, shall also be considered. When the equipment offered by the supplier
conforms to other standards, salient points of difference between standards adopted
and the standards in this specification shall be clearly brought out in the offer.
3. ELECTRONIC PRIVATE AUTOMATIC EXCHANGE(FOR PLCC
APPLICATION):
3.1 The Electronic Private Automatic Exchanges shall work as local private
automatic exchange. It should be fully micro-processor based system with pulse
code modulation/time division multiplexing principle.
3.2 The Electronic Private Automatic Exchange should be compatible for operation
with Electronic Switching Devices at the farther end, having the common pulsing
criteria as under.
a. Engage Pulse : 200 to 250 ms. ON
70 to 90 ms. OFF
571
70 to 90 ms. ON
b. Priority Pulse : -do-
c. Release Pulse : Greater than 800 ms and less than 1000 m sec.
d. Dialling Pulse : 50 ms ON and 50 ms OFF
e. Operating voltage : 48V DC  10% - 15%
f. Ringing voltage : 75V MIN.
3.3 The EPAX to be supplied against this specification should be of static version and
co-ordinate with the existing exchanges. It should be compatible for connection to
different versions of Power Line Carrier Communications sets in service.
3.4 The trunk line dialing system shall provide full automatic dialing between
subscribers. The existing trunk number of each station consists of two digits and the
subscriber number is of two digits. In the EPAX, facility for storing atleast all the
four/six digits of dialed number should be provided. The time taken for the
discrimination of the station and passing on the call to the adjacent
section should be kept to a minimum and the exact time shall be given.
3.5 Provision shall be made for each subscriber and trunk to have selective access or
bar to specific area and stations.
3.6 The entire static circuitry should be well shielded and earthed so that any kind
of external EMI noise should not affect the performance. The power supply and
other circuit should be well protected against high voltage surges and spikes
normally encountered in input power supply.
3.7 The EPAX should have the following facility.
1. To bar selected subscribers from entering the communication trunk lines.
2. To bar selected incoming call from outer station to other outer station on
selective basis.
3. to have free line selection.
4. The EPAX offered shall be designed for double (2)/treble(3) digit station
number for discrimination and for onward transmission. The EPAX in
case of PLCC application should be capable to store and forward
572
more than five digit at the lowest possible time. This shall be
included in the Test Certificate.
5. Dry contact output for monitoring the general alarms of the EPAX shall
be provided for connection to the local/remote SCADA system. This will
be in addition to the alarms to be displayed in the EPAX itself. Both
Audible and visual alarms shall be provided.
3.8 The racks and modules of EPAX shall be mounted in a compact steel cabinet.
The drawing of the cabinet along with the arrangement of various modules etc.,
shall be submitted along with the equipments. The MDF shall be separately
mounted with a length of 10 Mtrs. of cable.
3.9 The capacity of the EPAX shall be wired upto MDF but equipped for the number
of subscribers and No. of trunks as follows (viz)
The EPAX shall be capable for easy expansions if required at a later date as
detailed below:
Proposed Provision for future expansion
8S/8T atleast 16S/16T
Additional connector shall be provided for expansion so that by mere insertion of

subscriber/Trunk module the capacity expansion can be achieved. Replacement of
existing subscriber/Trunk module of lower capacity by a subscriber/Trunk module of
higher capacity for achieving capacity expansion is not acceptable.
Additional Features for EPAXes of 16S/16T configuration:
3.10 EPAX shall have a microprocessor and programmable at site. The

software shall support both E&M signaling and CO Trunks. The EPAX shall be
provided with universal ports wherein the subscriber line card and CO trunk cards
can be inserted into any slots.
3.11 The software provided for EPAX shall be programmable to work as a

combination of PLCC and CO trunks (or) as a network exchange on E&M
(PSTN/VSAT/VHF) and shall be user friendly.
573
3.12 ISDN compatibility for the CO trunks may be offered as optional. For
this EPAX shall support a minimum dialing of 16 digits at a time and a maximum of
20 digits.
3.13 The EPAX is for real-time operation and trouble free operation
without resetting the CPU often shall be ensured.
GENERAL:
The Booklet containing the details of the EPAX shall contain a brief outline of
operation, simple user friendly instructions for programming and maintenance. This
shall enable the field engineer to understand, operate and maintain the system.
10 Years after sales service guarantee/supply of spare cards components etc.,

shall be assured and an undertaking in this regard may be submitted.
3.14 TEST REQUIREMENTS:
Since static version of PAX are to be tendered as per this specification, they
should conform to the voltage withstand requirement as per clause 6.1.1 and 6.3. of
I.S.9482-1980.
Since power supply circuits are connected with long lead in 48V batteries which
are kept away from carrier rooms, the input circuits may experience transient
voltage of short duration but of relatively high peak value. The EPAX shall be
subjected to impulse withstand test and High frequency disturbance test as per
clause 4.2 and 5 of I.S. 8666 - 1977. The tenderer should state whether the EPAX
offered by them has been subjected to the above type test and proof for the same
shall be enclosed.
Whenever the EPAX is reset the exchange shall become operational within the
lowest time as its application is for real-time basis grid operation purposes.
TECHNICAL DATA OF EPAX

1. Subscriber lines : Wired for Maximum capacity
2. Trunk lines : Wired for Maximum capacity
3. Switching Network : 256 Port for Non-blocking switch.
574
4. Numbering scheme : Flexible numbering scheme.

5. Switching Technique : Digital Type (Details shall be given)
6. Max. loop resistance : 1200 ohm for subscriber lines
2400 ohm for Trunk lines.
7. Insertion loss : 4 db for line to line at 800 HZ.
0.5 db for trunk to line at 800 HZ.
8. Frequency Response: 300 Hz to 3400 Hz.
9. Cross Talk : More than 70 DB between 300 to 3400Hz
10. Ringing
Local ring : 1500 MS On/1500 MS Off.
Trunk ring : 400 MS On/200 MS Off.
400 MS On/2000 MS Off.
Ring back tone : 500 MS On/500 MS Off.
11. Tones
Local ring : 1500 MS On/1500 MS Off.
Trunk ring : 400 MS On/200 MS Off.
400 MS On/2000 MS Off.
Call back ring : 500 MS On/500 MS Off.
12. Alarms : Card level fault visual display and
audible alarm.
13. Display : Line status.
System status.
Power Supply.
Faulty trunks.
Time.
14. Line Protection : Line fuse and surge protection on each
subscriber line.
15. MDF : To be mounted separately with a length of 10
Mtrs. Cable.
16. Operating Power supply: DC 48V (+) 10% & (-) 15%
575
17. The Exchange if needed in future shall support Load Despatch feature
and the subscribers at the remote end provided with a remote extension
interface (RE I) through which the remote subscriber can be given eight
dialing or lift and talk facility through the Exchange at Load Despatch
Centre.
18. The Exchange also shall provision of operator consoles for use in future.
ANNEXURE-III
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS.
1. Name & Address of the Manufacturer :
2. Type/Model :
3. Type of technology :
4. Architecture used
(32/64 bit Microprocessor) :
5. Method of mounting cubicle :
6. Method of connection to external circuits:
7. Cable Entry :
8. Literature :
9. Operating temperature range :
10. Operating relative humidity :
11. Operating voltage with range :
12. Power requirement :
13. Numbering scheme :
14. Maximum number of trunk lines :
15. Maximum number of subscriber lines :
16. No. of trunk lines per card :
17. No. of subscriber lines per card :
18. Method of extending capacity :
19. Method of implementing and modifying :
scheme
20. Speech signal levels : 4 wire transmit level=
4 wire receive level =
21. Facility for expansion :
22. PSTN/VSAT/VHF compatibility for future :
applications.
D)MULTICORE CABLE 0.6 MM/4 PAIR/TELEPHONE CABLE 0.6 MM/1 PAIR
TECHNICAL PARTICULARS for MULTICORE CABLE 0.6 MM/4 PAIR/ TELEPHONE

CABLE 0.6 MM/ 1 PAIR
576
0.6mm dia. Annealed Tinned copper conductor, PVC insulated, colour

coded, 2 cores twisted to form a pair, pairs laid up, Aluminium Mylar shielded with
drain wire, melinex taped, over-all PVC sheathed, screened Telephone Cables
conforming to I.T.D. Specification No.S/WS-113C.
Four pair Single pair
1. Wire diameter : ............0.6mm ...............
2. Dia. Over Insulation : ............1.1mm ...............
3. Thickness of Insulation : ............0.25mm (Max.)........
4. Elongation.
a) Conductor : ..............15% ...............
b) Insulation : ............150% at break .......
c) Sheath : ............150% at break........
5. Tensile Strength.
a) Insulation : ........Min. 12.5 N/mm2
b) Sheath : ........Min. 12.5 N/mm2 ..........
6. Colour of pairs : As per Table-2 of I.T.D.
Specification
S/WS-113C.
7. Laid up dia of pairs : 4.5mm 2.2mm
8. Mylar Tape : ...........13 micron ............
9. Polythene Aluminium tape : ...........25 micron ............
10. Drain wire : ...........7/0.15mm..............
11. Dia.Over shielded cable : 4.7mm 2.4mm
12. Overall diameter (Max.) : 6.3mm 3.5mm
13. Thickness of sheath (Min.) : 0.65mm 0.5mm
14. Colour of sheath : ...........Grey ................
15. Max. conductor resistance : ...........64.0 Ohms/KM ........
at 20 C
16. Dielectric strength : 2KV rms at frequency of 50 HZ
between conductors.
17. Volume resistivity at 27 C : Min. 1x1013 Ohms/KM.
18. Capacitance unbalance : 250 P.F. Max.Per km.
577
19. Shrinkage Test : As per Clause VIII of IS:5831

20. Solder Test : As per clause 11.20 of I.T.D.
Specification S/WS-113C.
MANUFACTURER'S IDENTIFICATION:
The manufacturers identification shall be provided throughout the length
of the cable and shall be by embossing the Trade Mark/Manufactureres name. In
addition, the letters, "Tamil Nadu Electricity Board" should also be embossed in
the outer sheath of the cable at two metre intervals.
TEST BEFORE DESPATCH
Each cable coil shall be subjected to the following tests:
I. TELEPHONE CABLE:
MECHANICAL:
PVC Outer Size (Overall)
PVC Thickness
Conduction Dia. with PVC
Conductor above Dia.
PVC Tape-Thickness over lap
Presence of Rip card
Presence of Drain Wire.
ELECTRICAL:
High voltage Test for 2 KV for 1 minute
Insulation Resistance.
Conductor Resistance.
Capacitance unbalance.
MECHANICAL PHYSICAL TEST:
Conductor Elongation
Insulation Elongation
Tensile strength of PVC and sheath
Shrinkage Test
Solder Test
The purchaser reserves the right to inspect the cables and workmanship during
the period of manufacture and to be present during the testing of the cables.
578
579
SECTION - 31
CIVIL WORKS
1.0. SCOPE
1.1. This Specification covers the general requirements for concrete to be used on
jobs using on-site production facilities including requirements in regard to the quality,
handling, storage of ingredients, proportioning, batching, mixing and testing of
concrete and also requirements with regard to the quality, storage, bending and
fixing of reinforcement. This also covers the transportation of concrete from the
mixer to the place of final deposit and the placing, curing, protecting, repairing and
finishing of concrete.
1.2. The two parts viz. Specific Technical requirement for the project and this
specification are complementary and are to be read together for correct
interpretation of the provisions of this specification. Where requirement of the two
sections conflict ,those of Specific Technical requirement for the project shall govern.
1.3. It shall be very clearly understood that the specifications given herein are brief
and do not cover minute details. However ,all works shall have to be carried out in
accordance with the relevant standards and codes of practices or in their absence in
accordance with the best accepted current Engineering practices or as directed by
ENGINEER from time to time. The decision of ENGINEER as regards the specification
to be adopted and their interpretation and the mode of execution of work shall be
final and binding on CONTRACTOR and no claim whatsoever will be entertained on
this account.
2.0. APPLICABLE CODES AND SPECIFICATIONS
All standards, tentative Specification, Specifications, Codes of practice referred

to herein shall be the latest editions including all applicable official amendments and
revisions. In case of discrepancy, between this Specification and those referred to
herein, this Specification shall govern.
2.1. MATERIALS
1. I.S.269 - Specification for ordinary, rapid Hardening and low heat
Portland cement.
2. I.S.1489 - Specification for Portland -pozzolana Cement.
580
3. I.S.650 - Specification for standard sand for testing of cement.
4. I.S.383 - Specification for coarse and fine aggregates From natural sources
for concrete.
5. I.S.2386 - Methods of test for aggregate for concrete (Parts I to VIII)
6. I.S.516 - Method of test for strength of concrete.
7. I.S.1199 - Method of sampling and analysis of concrete.
8. I.S.3025 - Method of sampling and testing (Physical and Chemical) of
water used in industry.
9. I.S.1139 - Specification for hot rolled mild steel, medium tensile steel and
high yield strength steel deformed bars for concrete
reinforcement.
10. I.S.1786 - Specification for cold worked steel high strength deformed
bars for concrete reinforcement.
11. I.S.4990 - Specification for plywood for concrete shuttering work.
12. I.S.2645 - Specification for integral cement water proofing compounds.
13. I.S.4461 - Cold worked steel bars for the reinforcement of concrete.
14. I.S.4031 - Methods of physical tests for hydraulic cement.
2.2. EQUIPMENT
1. I.S.1791 - Specification for batch type concrete mixers.
2. I.S.2505 - Specification for concrete / vibrators (immersion type)
3. I.S.2750 - Specification for steel scaffoldings.
2.3. CODES OF PRACTICE FOR CONCRETE
1. I.S.456 - Code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete.
2. I.S.3935 - Code of practice for construction.
3. I.S.2751 - Code of practice for welding of mild steel bars used for
reinforced concrete construction.
581
4. I.S.2502 - Code of practice for bending and fixing of bars for concrete
reinforcement.
5. I.S.3558 - Code of practice for use of immersion Vibrators for
consolidating concrete.
6. I.S.3414 - Code of practice for design and installation of joints in
building.
7. I.S.4014 - Code of practice for steel tubular (Part I & II) scaffolding.
8. I.S.2571 - Code of practice for laying in-situ cement concrete flooring.
9. I.S.1343 - Code of practice for pre stressed concrete.
2.4. CONSTRUCTION SAFETY
1. I.S.3696 - Safety code for scaffolds and ladders (Part I & II)
2.5. MEASUREMENT
1. I.S.1200 - Method of measurement of building works.
2. I.S.3385 - Code of Practice for measurement of Civil Engineering works.
Note: In the event that state, city or other Government bodies have requirements
more stringent than those set forth in this Specification, such requirements shall
be considered part of this specification and shall supersede this Specification
where applicable.
1.0. MATERIALS FOR CONCRETE
The ingredients to be used in the manufacture of standard concrete shall

consist solely of a standard type Portland cement, clean sand, natural coarse
aggregate, clean water, and admixtures, if specially called for on drawings or
specifications.
The quality of materials, method, control, manufacture and transportation of all

concrete irrespective of mix, whether reinforced or otherwise, shall conform to the
applicable portion of this specification.
ENGINEER shall have the right to inspect the sources of materials, the layout
and operation of procurement and storage of materials, the concrete batching and
582
mixing equipment, and take quality control systems such an inspection shall be
arranged of concrete work.
1.1. CEMENT
3.1.1. Unless otherwise specified in Section C or called for by ENGINEER/ OWNERS,

cement shall be ordinary Portland cement conforming to not less than Grade 43 of
relevant I.S. and in 50-kg bags. The use of bulk cement will be permitted only with
the approval of ENGINEER. Changing of brands on type of cement within the same
structure will not be permitted without approval of ENGINEER.
3.1.2. While purchasing cement or before commencing the work for every batch of
cement consignments, the CONTRACTOR should satisfy himself about the quality of
cement by conducting initial test on concrete cubes in the presence of the
representative of the PURCHASER and only after establishing the suitability, the
cement should be used on work. To have quick evaluation results, the above
specimens should be cured by steam curing and tested immediately at
CONTRACTOR’s cost at an approved laboratory.
3.1.3. CONTRACTOR shall not be entitled to any claim of any nature on this account.
3.2. AGGREGATES:
3.2.1.Àggregate’ in general designates both fine and coarse inert materials used in
the manufacture of concrete. `Fine Aggregate’ is aggregate most of which passes
through 4.75mm IS sieve. `Coarse Aggregate’ is aggregate most of which is retained
on 4.75mm IS sieve.
3.2.2. All fine and coarse aggregates proposed for the use in the work shall be
subject to ENGINEER's approval and after specific materials have been accepted, the
source of supply of such materials shall not be changed without prior approval of
ENGINEER.
3.3. STORAGE OF AGGREGATES
All coarse and fine aggregates shall be stacked separately in stock piles in the
material yard near the work site to avoid inter-mixing of different aggregates.
Contamination with foreign materials and earth during storage and while heaping the
materials shall be avoided. The aggregate must be of specified quality not only at the
time of receiving at site but more so at the time of loading into mixer. Coarse
583
aggregates shall be piled in layer not exceeding 1.20 metres in height to prevent
coning or segregation. Each layer shall cover the entire area of the stockpile before
succeeding layers are started. Aggregates that have become segregated shall be
rejected. Rejected materials after remixing may be accepted, if subsequent tests
demonstrate conformity with required gradation.
3.3. SPECIFIC GRAVITY
Aggregates having a specific gravity below 2.6 (Saturated surface dry basis)
shall not be used without special permission of ENGINEER.
3.5. FINE AGGREGATE
Fine aggregate except as noted above, and for other than lightweight
concrete shall consist of natural sand to I.S.383. The sand shall be clean, sharp,
hard, strong and durable and shall be free from dust, vegetable substances,
adherent coating, clay alkali, organic matter, mica, salt, or other deleterious
substances, which can be injurious to setting qualities/strength/durability of
concrete.
3.5.1. SCREENING AND WASHING
Sand shall be prepared for use by such screening or washing, or both as

necessary to remove all objectionable foreign matter while separating the sand
grains to the required size fractions.
3.5.2. FOREIGN MATERIAL LIMITATIONS
The percentages of deleterious substances in sand delivered to the mixer shall

not exceed the following.
Percent by weight
Uncrushed Crushed
i) Material finer than 75micron I.S. sieve 3.00 15.00
ii) Shale 1.00 --
iii) Coal and lignite 1.00 1.00
iv) Clay lumps 1.00 1.00
v) Total of all the above substances
including items (i) to (iv)for uncrushed 5.00 2.00
sand and items (iii) and (iv) for crushed sand
584
3.5.3. GRADATION
3.5.3.1. Unless and otherwise directed or approved, the grading of sand shall be
within the limits indicated hereunder:
I.S.Sieve Designation Percentage passing for

grading Zone-I Zone-II Zone-III Zone-IV
10 mm 100 100 100 100
4.75 mm 90-100 90-100 90-100 95-100
2.36 mm 60-95 75-100 85-100 95-100
1.18 mm 30-70 55-90 75-90 90-100
600 micron 15-34 35-59 60-79 80-100
300 micron 5-20 8-30 12-40 15-50
150 micron 0-10 0-10 0-10 0-15
3.5.3.2. Where the grading falls outside the limits of any particular grading zone of
sieves, other than 600 I.S. Sieve, by total amount not exceeding 5 percent, it shall
be regarded as falling within that grading zone. This tolerance shall not be applied
to percentage passing the 600 micron I.S. sieve or to percentage passing any other
sieve size on the coarser limit of Grading Zone-I or the finer limit of Grading Zone-IV.
Fine aggregates conforming to Grading Zone-IV shall be used unless mix designs and
preliminary tests have shown its suitability for producing concrete of specified
strength and workability.
3.5.4. FINENESS MODULUS
The sand shall have fineness modulus of not less than 2.2 or more than 3.2.
The fineness modulus is determined by adding the cumulative percentages retained
on the following I.S. sieve sizes (4.75mm, 2.36mm, 1.18mm, 600 micron, 300 micron
and 150 micron) and dividing the sum by 100.
3.6 COARSE AGGREGATE
Coarse aggregate for concrete, except as noted above and for other than
lightweight concrete shall conform to I.S. 383. This shall consist of natural stone and
shall be clean, and free from elongated, flaky or laminated pieces, adhering
coatings, clay lumps,coal residue, clinkers, slag, alkali, mica, organic matter of
other deleterious matter.
585
3.6.1. GRADING
3.6.1.1. Coarse aggregate shall be either in single size or graded. In both cases, the
grading shall be within following limits.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
IS Percentage Passing for Percentage
Sieve single aggregate of passing for
Desig- nominal size graded aggregate of
nation nominal size
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
40 20 16 12.5 10 40 20 16 12.5
mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
63mm 100 -- -- -- -- 100 -- -- --
40mm 85-100 100 -- -- -- 95-100 100 -- --
20mm 0-20 85-100 100 -- -- 30-70 95-100 100 --
16mm -- -- 85-100 100 -- -- -- 90-100 -
10mm 0-5 0-20 0-30 0-45 85-100 10-35 25-55 30-70 40-85
4.75mm -- 0-5 0-5 0-10 0-10 0-10 0-10 0-10 0-10
2.36mm -- -- -- -- 0-5 -- --- --- ---
3.6.1.2. The pieces shall be angular in shape and shall have granular or crystalline
surfaces. Friable flaky and laminated pieces, mica and shale, if present, shall be only
in such quantities that will not, in the opinion of ENGINEER, affect adversely, the
strength and/or durability of concrete. The maximum size of coarse aggregate shall
be 40mm for class A concrete and 20mm for class B concrete. The maximum size of
coarse aggregate shall be the maximum size specified above but in no case greater
than 1/4 of the maximum thickness of the member, provided that the concrete can
be placed without difficulty so as to surround all reinforcement thoroughly and fill the
corners of the form. For heavily reinforced concrete member, the nominal maximum
586
size of the aggregate shall be 5mm less than the minimum clear distance between
the reinforcing main bars or 5mm less than the minimum cover to the reinforcement
whichever is smaller. The amount adherent shall not exceed 1% when determined
by laboratory sedimentation tests as per I.S.2386. After 24 hours immersion in
water, a previously dried sample shall not have gained more than 10% of its over
dry weight in air, as determined by I.S.2386.
3.7. FOREIGN MATERIAL LIMITATIONS
The percentage of deleterious substance in the aggregate delivered to

the mixer shall not exceed the following:
Percent by weight
Uncrushed Crushed
i) Material finer than 75
micron I.S.sieve 3.00 3.00
ii) Coal and lignite 1.00 1.00
iii)Clay lumps 1.00 --
iv) Soft Fragments 3.00 --
v) Total of all the above
substances 5.00 --
4.0. WATER
4.1. Water used for both mixing of mortar / concrete and curing shall be free from
injurious amounts of deleterious materials. Potable water is generally satisfactory for
mixing of mortar / concrete and curing concrete. The relevant essential Water tests
pertaining to access the suitability for construction standards shall have to be done
before commencement of work.
4.2. The suitability of water for making concrete shall be ascertained by the
compressive strength and initial setting time test specified in I.S.456. The sample of
water taken for testing shall be typical of the water proposed to be used for
concreting, due account being paid to seasonal variation. The sample shall not
receive any treatment before testing other than that envisaged in the regular
supply of water proposed for use in concrete. The sample shall be stored in a
clean container previously rinsed out with similar water.
587
4.3. Average 28 days compressive strength of atleast three 150mm concrete cubes
prepared with water proposed to be used shall not be less than 90% of the average
strength of three similar concrete cubes prepared with distilled water.
4.4. The initial setting time of test block made with the appropriate test cement and
the water proposed to be used shall not be less than 30minutes and shall not differ
by more than 30 minutes from the initial setting time of control test block prepared
with the appropriate test cement and distilled water. The test blocks shall be
prepared and tested in accordance with the requirements of I.S.4031.
4.5. Where water can be shown to contain an excess of acid, alkali, sugar or salt,
ENGINEER may refuse to permit its use. As a guide, the following concentrations
represent the maximum permissible values.
 To neutralise 100 ml sample of water, using phenolphthalein as indicator, it

should not require more than 5 ml. of 0.02 Normal NaOH. The details of test
shall be as given in IS.3025.
 To neutralise 200ml sample of water using methyl orange as an indicator, it

should not require more than 10ml of 0.1. Normal HCL. The details of test
shall be as given in IS.3025.
4.6. Presence of solids, when tested in accordance with the method indicated below,
shall not exceed the following :
Percent Method of Test

(Ref. to Clause No. in S.3025/60)
Organic 0.02 10 & 11 (Organic Solids
Total solids minus Ignited Residue)
Inorganic
Sulphates (as SO4) 0.30 11 (Ignited residue)
Alkali 0.05 20
Chlorides (as Cl) 0.20 24
5.0. REINFORCEMENT
5.1. SUPPLY
5.1.1. The supply of steel shall be arranged by the contractor himself. Reinforcement
if supplies are arranged by CONTRACTOR shall be either plain round mild bars
588
Grade – 1 as per IS.432 (Part – 1) or medium tensile steel bars as per IS.432 (Part
– 1)and deformed bars of Fe 415 grade as per IS:1786. Wire mesh or fabric shall be
in accordance with IS 1566. Substitution of reinforcement will not be permitted
except upon written approval from ENGINEER.
5.1.2. No advance amounts shall be paid to the contractor towards purchase of steel.
Note: The tenderer, in his tender, shall give details of Fe 415 grade. viz. sizes
(diameter) available, necessary test reports and manufacturers certificate on
the every consignment of steel that are brought to site shall be furnished to
the Engineer then and there and approval of Engineer shall be obtained
before proceeding the works.
5.2. STORAGE
5.2.1. The reinforcement shall not be kept in direct contact with the ground but
stacked on top of an arrangement of timber sleepers or the like.
5.2.2. If the reinforcing rods have to be stored for long duration, they shall be coated
with cement wash before stacking and/or be kept under cover or stored as directed
by ENGINEER.
5.2.3. Fabricated reinforcement shall be carefully stored to prevent damage,

distortion, corrosion and deterioration.
5.3. QUALITY
5.3.1. All steel shall be of Grade-I quality unless specifically permitted by ENGINEER.
No re-rolled material will be accepted. If demanded by ENGINEER, CONTRACTOR
shall submit the manufacturers test certificate for steel. Random tests on steel
supplied by CONTRACTOR may be performed by OWNER as per relevant Indian
Standards. All costs incidental to such tests shall be at "CONTRACTOR's” expense.
Steel not conforming to Specifications shall be rejected.
5.3.2. All reinforcement shall be clean, free from grease, oil, and paint, dirt loose mill
scale, loose rust, dust bituminous material or any other substances that will destroy
or reduce the bond. All rods shall be thoroughly cleaned before being fabricated.
Pitted and defective rods shall not be used. All bars shall be rigidly held in position
before concreting. No welding of rods to obtain continuity shall be allowed unless
approved by ENGINEER. If welding is approved, the work shall be carried out as per
589
I.S.2751 according to best modern practices and as directed by ENGINEER. In all

cases of important connections, tests shall be made to prove that the joints are of
the full strength of bars welded. Special precautions, as specified by ENGINEER, shall
be taken in the welding of cold worked reinforcing bars and bars other than mild
steel.
5.4. LAPS
Laps and splices for reinforcement shall be as shown on the drawings. Splices
in adjacent bars shall be staggered and the locations of all splices, except those
specified on the drawings, shall be approved by ENGINEER. The bars shall not be
lapped unless the length required exceeds the maximum available lengths of bars at
site.
5.5. BENDING
5.5.1. Reinforcing bars supplied bent or in coils, shall be straightened before they are
cut to size. Straightening of bars shall be done in cold and without damaging the
bars. This is considered as a part of reinforcement bending fabrication work.
5.5.2. All bars shall be accurately bent according to the sizes and shapes shown on
the detailed working drawings/ bar bending schedules. They shall be bent gradually
by machine or other approved means. Reinforcing bars shall not be straightened and
re-bent in a manner that will injure the material. Bars containing cracks or splits
shall be rejected. They shall be bent cold, except bars of over 25mm in diameter
which may be bent hot if specifically approved by ENGINEER, Bars which depend for
their strength on cold working, shall not be bent hot, shall not be heated beyond
cherry red colour (not exceeding 845°C) and after bending shall be allowed to cool
slowly without quenching. Bars incorrectly bent shall be used only if the means used
for straightening and re-bending be such as shall not, in the opinion of ENGINEER,
injure the material. No reinforcement shall be bent when in position in the work
without approval, whether or not it is partially embedded in hardened concrete. Bars
having kinks or bends other than those required by design shall not be used.
5.6. FIXING
Reinforcement shall be accurately fixed by any approved means and

maintained in the correct position shown in the drawings by the use of blocks,
590
spacers and chairs as per IS.2503 to prevent displacement during placing and
compaction of concrete. Bars intended to be in contact at crossing points shall be
securely bound together at all such points with number 16 gauge annealed soft iron
wire. The vertical distances required between successive layers of bar in beams or
similar members shall be maintained by the provision of mild steel spacer bars at
such intervals that the main bars do not perceptibly sag between adjacent spacer
bars.
5.7. COVER
5.7.1. The cover to reinforcement shall be in accordance with clause 26.4 of IS 456-
2000. Unless indicated otherwise on the drawings, clear concrete cover for
reinforcement (exclusive of plaster or other decorative finish) shall be as follows:
5.7.2. At each end of reinforcing bar, not less than 25mm or less than twice the
diameter of the bar.
5.7.3. For a longitudinal reinforcing bar in a column, not less than 40mm, not less
than the diameter of the bar. In case of columns, of minimum dimension of 200mm
or under with reinforcing bars of 12mm and less in diameter, a cover of 25mm may
be used.
5.7.4. For longitudinal reinforcing bars in a beam, not less than 25mm, nor less than
the diameter of the bar.
5.7.5. For tensile, compressive, shear or other reinforcement in a slab or wall not
less than 15mm nor less than diameter of such reinforcement.
5.7.6. For any other reinforcement not less than 15mm nor less than the diameter of
such reinforcement.
5.7.7. For footings and other principal structural members in which the concrete is
deposited directly against the ground, cover to the bottom reinforcement shall be
75mm. If concrete is poured on layer of lean concrete the bottom cover may be
reduced to 50mm.
5.7.8. For concrete surface exposed to the weather / the ground after removal of
forms, such as retaining walls, grade beams, footing sides and top etc., not less than
50mm for bars larger than 16mm dia nor less than 40mm for bars 16mm dia or
smaller.
591
5.7.9. Increased cover thickness shall be provided as indicated on the drawings, for
surfaces exposed to the action of harmful chemicals (or exposed to earth
contaminated by such chemical), acid, alkali, saline atmosphere, sulphurous smoke
etc.
5.7.10. For reinforced concrete members, totally or periodically immersed in sea

water or subject to sea water spray, the cover of concrete shall be 50mm more
than specified above.
5.7.11. For liquid retaining structures, the minimum cover to all steel shall be 40mm
or the diameter of the main bar, whichever is greater. In the presence of sea water
and soils and water of a corrosive character the cover shall be increased by 10mm.
5.7.12. Protection to reinforcement in case of concrete exposed to harmful

surroundings may also be given by providing dense impermeable concrete with
approved protective coatings, as specified on the drawings. In such a case, the
extra cover mentioned in (h) and (i) above, may be reduced by ENGINEER to those
shown on the drawings.
5.7.13. The correct cover shall be maintained by cement mortar cubes or other
approved means. Reinforcement for footings, grade beams and slabs on subgrade
shall be supported on precast concrete blocks as approved by ENGINEER. The use
of pebbles or stones shall not be permitted .
5.7.14. The 28 days crushing strength of cement mortar cubes precast concrete
cover blocks shall be atleast equal to the specified strength of concrete in which
these cubes blocks are embedded.
5.7.15. The minimum clear distance between reinforcing bars shall be in accordance
with IS.456 or as shown in drawings.
5.8. INSPECTION
Erected and secured reinforcement shall be inspected and approved by

ENGINEER prior to placement of concrete.
6.0. CONSISTENCY AND SLUMP
6.1. The concrete mix proportions chosen should be such that the concrete is of
adequate workability for the placing conditions of the concrete and can properly be
592
compacted with the means available. Suggested ranges of workability of concrete

measured in accordance with IS 1199 are given below:
Placing Conditions Degree of Slump

Workability (mm)
Blinding concrete; Shallow sections; Very low See5.6.b
below
Pavements using pavers
Mass concrete; Lightly reinforced Low 25-75

Sections in slabs, Beams, walls,
columns; Floors; Hand placed
pavements; Canal lining; Strip footings.
Heavily reinforced sections in slabs,

beams, walls, columns, slip formwork, Medium 50-100
Pumped concrete.
75-100
Trench fill, In situ piling. High 100-150

Tremie concrete Very See 5.6.c
high below
NOTE: For most of the placing conditions, internal vibrators (needle vibrators) are
suitable. The diameter of the needle shall be determined based on the
density and spacing of reinforcement bars and thickness of sections. For
tremie concrete, vibrators are not required to be used.
6.2. In the 'very low" category of workability where strict control is

necessary, for example pavement quality concrete, measurement of workability
by determination of compacting factor will be more appropriate than
slump (see. IS 1199) and a value of compacting factor of 0.75 to 0.80 is
suggested.
6.3. In the 'very high' category of workability, measurement of workability by

determination of flow will be appropriate (see IS 9103)
7.0. TESTING OF CUBES
Arrangement shall be made by CONTRACTOR to have the cubes tested in an

approved laboratory at his expense, with the prior consent of the ENGINEER.
593
7.1. SAMPLING FOR STRENGTH OF CONCRETE
At least 6 test cubes of each class of concrete shall be made for every 15
cu.m. concrete or part thereof. At least one sample shall be taken from each shift.
Such samples shall be drawn on each day for each type of concrete. Of each set of 6
cubes, three shall be tested at 7 days age and three at 28 days age. The laboratory
test results shall be tabulated and furnished to ENGINEER. ENGINEER will pass the
concrete if the acceptance criteria as per clause 16 of IS: 456-2000 are met with.
7.2. NOMINAL / DESIGN MIX CONCRETE
Concrete grade shall be designated on drawings. Concrete in the works shall

be "DESIGN MIX CONCRETE” or "NOMINAL MIX CONCRETE.” Design mix is
preferred to nominal mix. If design mix concrete can not be used for any reason on
the work for Grades M20 or lower, nominal mixes may be used with permission
from Engineer. CONCRETE grade M20 and above shall be DESIGN MIX CONCRETE.
7.3. DESIGN MIX CONCRETE
7.3.1. For Design Mix Concrete, the mix shall be designed according to IS: 10262
and SP: 23 to provide the grade of concrete having the required workability and
characteristic strength not less than appropriate values given in IS: 456. The design
mix shall in addition be such that it is cohesive and does not segregate and should
result in dense and durable concrete and also capable of giving the finish as
specified. For liquid retaining structures, the mix shall also result in water tight
concrete. The CONTRACTOR shall exercise great care while designing the concrete
mix and executing the works to achieve the desired result. The minimum cement
content for different grades of Concrete for RCC / P.C.C works shall be as per IS
456-2000 or as specified in the drawings/schedule.
7.3.2. It shall be CONTRACTOR's sole responsibility to carry out the mix designs in a
reputed Institution / Research Institute at his own cost. He shall furnish to
ENGINEER at least 30 days before concreting operations, a statement of proportions
proposed to be used for the various concrete mixes and the strength results
obtained. The strength requirements of the concrete mixes ascertained on 150mm
cubes as per IS: 516 shall comply with the requirements of IS: 456.
594
7.4. CONSISTENCY
Slump tests shall be carried out as often as demanded by ENGINEER and

invariably from the same batch of concrete from which the test cubes are made.
Slump tests shall be done immediately after sampling.
8.0. ADMIXTURES
Admixtures may be used in concrete only with the approval of ENGINEER

based upon evidence that, with the passage of time, neither the compressive
strength nor its durability reduced. Calcium chloride shall not be used for
accelerating setting of the cement for any concrete containing reinforcement, or
embedded steel parts. When calcium chloride is permitted to be used, such as in
mass concrete works, it shall be dissolved in water and added to mixing water in an
amount not to exceed 1½ percent of the weight of the cement in each batch of
concrete. When admixtures are used, the designed concrete mix shall be corrected
accordingly. Admixtures shall be used as per manufacturer’s instructions and in the
manner and with the control specified by ENGINEER. No extra cost will be paid for
admixtures .
8.1. WATER PROOFING AGENT
Where specified and approved by ENGINEER, water proofing agent

conforming to IS.2645, shall be added in quantity specified by Engineer.
9.0 TESTS
9.1. Engineer if he so desires may order tests to be carried out on cement, sand,
coarse aggregate, water in accordance with the relevant Indian Standards.
9.1.1. Tests on cement shall include
 fineness test
 test for normal consistency
 test for setting time
 test for soundness
 test for tensile strength
 test for compressive strength
 test for heat of hydration (by experiment and by calculations) in accordance
with IS: 269.
595
9.1.2. Tests on sand shall include.
 Sieve test
 test for organic impurities.
 Decantation test for determining clay and silt content
 specific gravity test
 test for unit weight and bulkage factor
 test for sieve analysis and fineness modulus.
9.1.3. Tests on coarse aggregate shall include.
 Sieve analysis
 specific gravity and unit weight of dry, loose and clodded aggregate.
 Soundness and alkali aggregate reactivity.
 Petrographic examination.
 Deleterious materials and organic impurities.
 Test for aggregate crushing value.
9.1.4. Any or all these tests would normally be ordered to be carried out only if
ENGINEER feels the materials are not in accordance with the specifications or if the
specified concrete strengths are not obtained and shall be performed by
CONTRACTOR or at an approved test laboratory
9.1.5. If the test cubes of the work do not give the stipulated strengths, ENGINEER
reserves the right to ask CONTRACTOR to dismantle such portions of the work,
which in his opinion are unacceptable and re-do the work to the standard stipulated
at CONTRACTOR’s cost. The unit rate for concrete shall be all-inclusive, including
making preliminary mix design and test cubes, works-cubes, testing them as per
Specification, slump tests, optional tests, etc. complete.
9.2. LOAD TEST ON MEMBERS OR ANY OTHER TESTS:
9.2.1. In the event of any work being suspected of faulty materials or

workmanship or both, ENGINEER requiring its removal and reconstruction may order,
or CONTRACTOR may request that it should be load tested in accordance with the
following provisions.
9.2.2. The test load shall be 125 percent of the maximum superimposed load for
which the structure was designed. Such test load shall not be applied before 56 days
596
after the effective hardening of concrete. During the test, struts strong enough to
take the whole load shall be placed in position leaving a gap under the members.
The test load shall be maintained for 24 hours before removal.
9.2.3. If within 24 hours of the removal of the load, the structure does not show a
recovery of at least 75 percent of the maximum deflection shown during the
24hours under load, the test loading shall be repeated after a lapse of at least
72hours. The structure shall be considered to have failed to pass the test if the
recovery after the second test is not at least 75 percent of the maximum deflection
shown during the second test. If the structure is certified as failed by the ENGINEER,
the cost of the load test shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR.
9.2.4. Any other tests, e.g. taking out in an approved manner concrete cores,
examination and tests on such cores removed from such parts of the structure as
directed by ENGINEER, sonic testing etc. shall be carried out by CONTRACTOR if so
directed.
9.3. UNSATISFACTORY TESTS
Should the results of any test prove unsatisfactory, or the structure shows
signs of weakness, undue deflection or faulty construction CONTRACTOR shall
remove and rebuild the member or members involved or carry out such other
remedial measures as may be required by ENGINEER/ OWNER. CONTRACTOR shall
bear the cost of redoing, unless the failure of the member or members to fulfil the
test conditions is proved to be solely due to faulty design.
9.0. PREPARATION PRIOR TO CONCRETE PLACEMENT, FINAL INSPEC-

TION AND APPROVAL
10.1. Before the concrete is actually placed in position, the inside of the formwork
shall be inspected to see that they have been cleaned and oiled. Temporary
openings shall be provided to facilitate inspection, especially at bottom of columns
and wall forms, to permit removal of saw dust, wood shavings, binding wire, rubbish,
dirt etc. Openings shall be placed or holes drilled so that these materials and water
can be removed easily. Such openings/ holes shall be later suitably plugged.
10.2. The various trades shall be permitted ample time to install drainage and
plumbing lines, floor and trench drains, conduits, hangers, anchors, inserts, sleeves,
597
bolts, frames, and other miscellaneous embedment to be cast in the concrete as

indicated on the drawings or as is necessary for the proper execution of the work.
CONTRACTOR shall co-operate fully with all such agencies, and shall permit the use
of scaffolding, formwork etc. by other trades at no extra cost.
10.3. All embedded parts, inserts etc. supplied by OWNER or CONTRACTOR shall be
correctly positioned and securely held in the forms to prevent displacement during
depositing and vibrating of concrete.
10.4. All anchor bolts shall be positioned and kept in place with the help of properly
manufactured templates unless specifically waived in writing by ENGINEER. The use
of all such templates, fixtures etc. shall be deemed to be included in the rates.
10.5. Slots, openings, holes, pockets etc. shall be provided in the concrete work in
the positions indicated in the drawings or as directed by ENGINEER.
10.6. Reinforcement and other items to be cast in concrete shall have clean surfaces
that will not impair bond.
10.7. Prior to concrete placement all work shall be inspected and approved by
ENGINEER and if found unsatisfactory, concrete shall not be poured until after all
defects have been corrected at CONTRACTOR’s cost.
10.8. Approval by ENGINEER of any and all materials and work as required herein
shall not relieve CONTRACTOR from his obligation to produce finished concrete in
accordance with the drawings and Specifications.
10.9. RAIN OR WASH WATER
No concrete shall be placed in wet or on a water-covered surface. Any

concrete that has been washed by heavy rains shall be entirely removed, if there is
any sign of cement and sand having been washed away from the concrete mixture.
To guard against damage, which may be caused by rains, the works shall be covered
with tarpaulins immediately after the concrete has been placed and compacted
before leaving the work unattended. Any water accumulating on the surface of the
newly placed concrete shall be removed by approved means and no further concrete
shall be placed thereon until such water is removed. To avoid flow of water over/ all-
round freshly placed concrete, suitable drains and sumps shall be provided.
598
10.10. BONDING MORTAR
Immediately before concrete placement begins, prepared surfaces except

formwork, which will come in contact with the concrete to be placed shall be covered
with a bonding mortar.
11.0. TRANSPORTATION
11.1. All buckets, containers, or conveyer used for transporting concrete shall be
mortar-tight. Irrespective of the method of transportation adopted, concrete shall be
delivered with the required consistency and plasticity without segregation or loss of
slump. However, chutes shall not be used for transport of concrete without the
written permission of Engineer and concrete shall not be re-handled before placing.
11.2. RETEMPERED OR CONTAMINATED CONCRETE
Concrete must be placed in the final position before it becomes too stiff to
work. On no account water shall be added after the initial mixing. Concrete,
which has become stiff or has been contaminated with foreign materials shall be
rejected and disposed off as directed by ENGINEER.
11.3. CLEANING OF EQUIPMENT
All equipment used for mixing, transporting and placing of concrete shall be
maintained in clean condition. All pans, buckets, hoppers, chutes, pipelines and other
equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned after each period of placement.
12.0. PROCEDURE FOR PLACING OF CONCRETE: ENGINEER’S

APPROVAL OF EQUIPMENT & METHODS
12.1. Before any concrete is placed, the entire placing programme, consisting of
equipment, layout, proposed procedures and methods shall be submitted to
ENGINEER for approval if so demanded by ENGINEER and no concrete shall be
placed until ENGINEER's approval has been received. Equipment for conveying
concrete shall be of such size and design as to ensure a practically continuous flow
of concrete during depositing without segregation of materials considering the size of
the job and placement location.
599
12.2. TIME INTERVAL BETWEEN MIXING AND PLACING
Concrete shall be placed in its final position before the cement reaches its
initial set and concrete shall normally be compacted in its final position within thirty
minutes of leaving the mixer, and once compacted it shall not be disturbed.
12.3. AVOIDING SEGREGATION
Concrete shall, in all cases, be deposited as nearly as practicable directly in its final
position, and shall not be re-handled or caused to flow in a manner which will cause
segregation, loss of materials, displacement of reinforcement, shuttering or
embedded inserts or impair its strength. For locations where direct placement is not
possible, and in narrow forms, contractor shall provide suitable drop and "Elephant
Trunks” to confine the movement of concrete. Special care shall be taken when
concrete is dropped from a height, especially if reinforcement is in the way,
particularly in columns and thin walls.
12.4. PLACING BY MANUAL LABOUR
Except when otherwise approved by Engineer, concrete shall be placed in the

shuttering by shovels of other approved implements and shall not be dropped from a
height more than 1.0metre or handled in a manner, which will cause segregation.
12.5. PLACING BY MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
The following specification shall apply when placing of concrete by use of

mechanical equipment is specifically called for while inviting bids or is warranted
considering the nature of work involved. The control of placing shall begin at the
mixer discharge. Concrete shall be discharged by a vertical drop into the middle of
the bucket or hopper and this principle of vertical discharge of concrete shall be
adhered to throughout all stages of delivery until the concrete comes to rest in its
final position.
12.5.1. TYPE OF BUCKETS
Central-bottom-dump buckets of a type that provides for positive regulation of

the amount and rate of deposition of concrete in all dumping position, shall be
employed.
600
12.5.2. OPERATION OF BUCKET
In placing concrete in large open area, the bucket shall be spotted directly
over the position designated and then lowered for dumping. The open bucket shall
clear the concrete already in place and the height of drop shall not exceed 1.00m.
The bucket shall be opened slowly to avoid high vertical bounce. Dumping of buckets
on the swing in any manner, which results in separation of ingredients or disturbance
of previously placed concrete, will not be permitted.
12.6. PLACEMENT IN RESTRICTED FORMS
Concrete placed in restricted form by barrow, buggies, cars, short chutes or

hand shovelling shall be subject to the requirements for vertical delivery of limited
height to avoid segregation and shall be deposited as nearly as practicable in its final
position.
13.0 CHUTING
Where it is necessary to use transfer chutes ,specific approval of Engineer

must be obtained to type ,length, slopes ,baffles, vertical terminals and timing of
operations . These shall be so arranged that an almost continuous flow of concrete is
obtained at the discharge and without segregation .To allow for the loss of mortar
against the sides of the chutes, the first mixes shall have less coarse aggregate.
During cleaning of chutes ,the waste water shall be kept clear of the forms. Concrete
shall not be permitted to fall from the end of the chutes by more than 1m.Chutes
when approved for use shall have slopes not flatter than 1vertical :3 horizontal and
not steeper than 1vertical :2 horizontal. Chutes shall be of metal or metal lined and
of rounded cross section .The slopes of all chute sections shall be approximately the
same .The discharge end of the chutes shall be maintained above the surface
concrete in the forms.
14.0. PLACING CONCRETE IN LAYERS
Concreting, once started, shall be continuous until the pour is completed.

Concrete shall be placed in successive horizontal layers of uniform thickness ranging
from 150 to 900 mm as directed by Engineer. These shall be placed as rapidly as
practicable to prevent the formation of cold joints or planes of weakness between
each succeeding layer within the pour. The thickness of each layer shall be such that
601
it can be deposited before the previous layer has stiffened. The bucket leads or other
units of Deposit shall be spotted progressively along the face of the layer with such
overlap as will facilitate spreading the layer to uniform depth and texture with a
minimum of shovelling. Any tendency to segregation shall be corrected by shovelling
stones into mortar rather than mortar on to stones. Such a condition shall be
corrected by redesign of mix or other means, as directed by Engineer.
15.0. BEDDING OF LAYERS
The top surface of each pour and bedding planes shall be approximately
horizontal unless otherwise instructed.
16.0. COMPACTION
Concrete shall be compacted during placing, with approved vibrating

equipment until the concrete has been consolidated to the maximum, practicable
density, is free of pockets of coarse aggregate and fits rightly against all form
surfaces, reinforcement and embedded fixtures. Particular care shall be taken to
ensure that all concrete placed against the form faces and into corners of forms or
against hardened concrete at joints is free from voids or cavities. The use of
vibrators shall be consistent with the concrete mix and caution exercised not to over
vibrate the concrete to the pointing that segregation result.
16.1. TYPE OF VIBRATORS
Vibrators shall conform to IS specifications. Type of vibrator to be used shall

depend on the structure where concrete is to be placed. Shutter vibrators to be
effective, shall be firmly secured to the formwork which must be sufficiently rigid to
transmit the vibration and strong enough not to be damaged by it. Immersion
vibrators shall have "no load” frequency, amplitude and acceleration as per I.S.2505
depending on the size of the vibrator. Immersion vibrators in sufficient numbers and
each of adequate size shall be used to properly consolidating all concrete.
Tapping of external vibrating of forms by hand tools or immersion vibrators will not
be permitted.
16.2. USE OF VIBRATORS
The exact manner of application and the most suitable machines for the
purpose must be carefully considered and operated by experienced men. Immersion
602
vibrators shall be inserted vertically at joints not more than 450mm apart and
withdrawn when air bubbles cease to come to the surface. Immersion vibrators shall
be withdrawn very slowly. In no case shall immersion vibrators be used to transport
concrete inside the vibration at the top of a lift e.g. in column or wall.
16.3. MOULDING SUCCESSIVE BATCHES
When placing concrete in layer, which are advancing horizontally as the work
progress, great care shall be exercised to ensure adequate vibration, blending and
moulding of the concrete between the succeeding layers.
16.4. PENETRATION OF VIBRATOR
The immersion vibrator shall penetrate the layer being placed and also
penetrate the layer below while the under layer is still plastic to ensure good bond
and homogeneity between the two layers and prevent the formation of cold joints.
16.5. VIBRATING AGAINST REINFORCEMENT
Care shall be taken to prevent contact of immersion vibrators against

reinforcement steel. Immersion vibrators shall not be allowed to come in contact
with reinforcement steel after start of initial set. They shall also not be allowed to
come in contact with forms or finished surfaces.
16.6. USE OF FORM ATTACHED VIBRATORS
Form attached vibrators shall be used only with specific authorisation of

ENGINEER.
16.7. USE OF SURFACE VIBRATORS
The use of surface vibrators will not be permitted under normal conditions.
However, for thin slabs, such as highways, runways and similar construction, surface
vibration by specially designed vibrators may be permitted, upon approval of
ENGINEER.
17.0. STONE POCKETS AND MORTAR PONDAGES
The formation of stone pockets or mortar pondages in corners and against

faces of forms shall not be permitted. Should these occur, they shall be dug out,
reformed and refilled to sufficient depth and shape for thorough bonding, as directed
by ENGINEER.
603
18.0 PLACEMENT INTERVAL
Except when placing with slip forms, each placement of concrete in multiple
lift work, shall be allowed to set for at least 24 hours after the final set of concrete
and before the start of a subsequent placement.
19.0. SPECIAL PROVISION IN PLACING
When placing concrete in walls with openings, in floors, of integral slab and
beam construction and other similar conditions, the placing shall stop when the
concrete reaches the top of the opening in walls or bottom horizontal surface of the
slab, as the case may be. Placing shall be resumed before the concrete in place takes
initial set, but not until it has had time to settle as determined by ENGINEER.
20.0 PLACING CONCRETE THROUGH REINFORCING STEEL
When placing concrete through reinforcing steel, care shall be taken to

prevent segregation of the coarse aggregate. Where the congestion of steel make
placing difficult it may be necessary to temporarily move the top steel aside to get
proper placement and restore reinforcing steel to design position.
21.0. BLEEDING
Bleeding or free water on top of concrete being deposited into the forms shall
be a cause to stop the concrete pour and the conditions causing this defect
corrected before any further concreting is resumed.
22.0. CONSTRUCTION JOINTS AND KEYS
22.1. Concrete shall be placed without interruption until completion of the part of the
work between predetermined construction joints, as specified herein after. Time
lapse between the pouring of adjoining units shall be as specified on the drawing or
as directed by ENGINEER.
22.2. If stopping of concreting becomes unavoidable anywhere, a properly formed

construction joint shall be made where the work is stopped. Joints shall be either
vertical or horizontal, unless shown otherwise on drawings. In case of an inclined or
curved member, the joints shall be at right angles to the axis of the member. Vertical
joints in walls shall be kept to a minimum. Vertical joints shall be formed against a
stop board: horizontal joints shall be level and wherever possible arranged so that
604
the joint lines coincide with the architectural features of the finished work. Battens
shall be nailed to the formwork to ensure a horizontal line and if directed, shall also
be used to form a grooved joint. For tank walls and similar work, joints shall be
formed as per I.S.3370.
22.3. Concrete that is in the process of setting shall not be disturbed or shaken by
traffic either on the concrete itself or upon the shuttering. Horizontal and vertical
construction joints and shear keys shall be located and shall conform in detail to the
requirements of the plans unless otherwise directed by ENGINEER. Where not
described, the joint shall be in accordance with the following.
23.0. COLUMN JOINT
In a column, the joint shall be formed 75mm below the lowest soffit of the
beams including haunches if any. In flat slab construction, the joint shall be 75mm
below the soffit of column capital. At least 2 hours shall elapse after depositing
concrete in columns, piers or walls, before depositing in beams, girders or slabs
supported thereon.
24.0. BEAM AND SLAB JOINTS
Concrete in a beam shall be placed throughout without a joint but if the

provision of a joint is unavoidable the joint shall be vertical and at the centre or
within the middle third of the span unless or otherwise shown on drawings. Where a
beam intersects a girder, the joints in the girder shall offset a distance equal to twice
the width of the beam and additional reinforcement provided for shear.
The joints shall be vertical throughout the full thickness of the concrete member. All
joints in a slab shall be vertical and parallel to the principal reinforcement. Where it is
unavoidably at right angles to the principal reinforcement, the joint shall be vertical
and at the middle of the span.
25.0. JOINT IN LIQUID RETAINING STRUCTURES
Vertical construction joints in watertight construction will not be permitted

unless indicated on the drawings. Where a horizontal construction joint is required to
resist water pressure, special care shall be taken in all phases of its construction to
ensure maximum water tightness.
605
26.0. DOWELS
Dowels for concrete work, not likely to be taken up in the near future, shall be
wrapped in tar paper and burlap.
27.0. MASS FOUNDATIONS
Mass foundations shall be poured in lifts not exceeding 1.5m in height unless
otherwise indicated on the drawings or approved by Engineer.
28.0. TREATMENT OF CONSTRUCTION JOINTS ON RESUMING

CONCRETING
28.1. A drier mix shall be used for the top lift of horizontal pours to avoid laitance. All
laitance and loose stones shall be thoroughly and carefully removed by wire
brushing/backing and surface washed.
28.2. Just before concreting is resumed, the roughened joint surface shall be
thoroughly cleaned and loose matter removed and then treated with a thin layer of
cement grout of proportion specified by Engineer and worked well into the surface.
The new concrete shall be well worked against the prepared face before the grout
mortar sets. Special care shall be taken to obtain thorough compaction and to avoid
segregation of the concrete along the joint plane.
29.0. CURING, PROTECTING, REPAIRING AND FINISHING CURING
29.1. All concrete shall be cured by keeping it continuously damp for the period of
time required for complete hydration and hardening to take place. Preference shall
be given to the use of continuous sprays, or ponded water, continuously saturated
coverings of sacking, canvas, hessian or other absorbent materials, or approved
effective curing compounds applied with spraying equipment capable of producing a
smooth, even textured coat. Extra precautions shall be exercised in curing
concrete during cold and hot weather as outlined herein after. The quality of curing
water shall be the same as that used for mixing concrete.
29.2. Certain types of finish or preparation for overlaying concrete must be done at
certain stages of the curing process and special treatment may be required for
specific concrete surface finish.
606
29.3. CURING WITH WATER
Fresh concrete shall be kept continuously wet for a minimum period of 10

days of placing of concrete, following a lapse of 12 to 14hours after laying concrete.
The curing of horizontal surfaces executed during winds shall however begin
immediately the concrete has hardened. Water shall be applied to unformed concrete
surfaces, within 1hour after concrete has set. Water shall be applied to formed
surfaces immediately upon removal of forms. Quantity of water applied shall be
controlled so as to prevent erosion of freshly placed concrete.
29.4. CONTINUOUS SPRAYING
Curing shall be assured by use of ample water supply under pressure in

pipes, with all necessary appliances of hose, sprinklers and spraying devices.
Continuous fine mist spraying or sprinkling shall be used unless otherwise specified
or approved by ENGINEER.
29.5. ALTERNATIVE CURING METHODS
Wherever in the judgement of ENGINEER, it may be necessary to omit the

continuous spray method, covering of clean sand or other approved means such as
wet gunny bags which will prevent loss of moisture from the concrete, may be used.
No type of covering will be approved which would stain or damage the concrete
during or after the curing period. Covering shall be kept continuously wet during the
curing period.
29.6. CURING EQUIPMENT
All equipment and materials required for curing shall be on hand and ready for
use before concrete is placed.
29.7. PROTECTING FRESH CONCRETE
Fresh concrete shall be protected from the elements, from defacements and
damage due to construction operations by leaving forms in place for an ample
period as specified later in this specification. Newly placed concrete shall be
protected by approved means such as tarpaulins from rain, sun and winds. Steps as
approved by Engineer shall also be taken to protect immature concrete from damage
by debris, excessive loading vibration, abrasion or contact with other materials etc.
that may impair the strength and or durability of the concrete. Workman shall be
607
warned against and prevented from disturbing green concrete during its setting
period. If it is necessary that workmen enter the area of freshly placed concrete,
ENGINEER may require that bridges be placed over the area.
29.8. REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT OF UNSATISFACTORY CONCRETE
29.8.1. Immediately after the shuttering is removed, the surface of concrete shall be
very carefully gone over and all defective areas called to the attention of ENGINEER
who may permit patching of the defective areas or also reject the concrete unit
either partially or in its entirety. Rejected concrete shall be removed and replaced by
CONTRACTOR at no additional expense to owner. Holes left by form bolts etc. shall
be filled up and made good with mortar composed of one part of cement to one and
half parts of sand passing 2.36 mm IS sieve after removing any loose stones
adhering to the concrete. Mortar filling shall be struck off flush at the face of the
concrete. Concrete surfaces are finished as described under the particular items of
work.
29.8.2. Superficial honey combed surface and rough patches shall be similarly made
good immediately after removal of shuttering, in the presence of ENGINEER and
superficial water and air holes shall be filled in. The mortar shall be well worked into
the surface with a wooden float. Excess water shall be avoided. Unless instructed
otherwise by ENGINEER, the surface of the exposed, concrete placed against
shuttering shall be rubbed down immediately on removal of shuttering to remove
fine or other irregularities, care being taken to avoid damaging the surface. Surface
irregularities shall be removed by grinding.
29.8.3. If reinforcement is exposed or the honey combing occurs at vulnerable

position e.g. ends of beams and columns it may be necessary to cut out the member
completely or in part and reconstruct. The decision of Engineer shall be final in this
regard. If only patching is necessary, the defective concrete shall be cut out till solid
concrete is reached (or to a minimum depth of 25mm) the edges being cut
perpendicular to the affected surface or with a small under cut if possible. Anchors,
tees or dovetail slots shall be provided whenever necessary to attach the new
concrete securely in place. An area extending several centimetres beyond the edge
and the edges and the surfaces of the prepared voids shall be saturated with water
for 24 hours immediately before the patching material is placed.
608
29.8.4. USE OF EPOXY
The use of epoxy for bonding fresh concrete used for repairs will be permitted
upon written approval of ENGINEER. Epoxies shall be applied in strict accordance
with the instructions of the manufacturer.
29.8.5. METHOD OF REPAIR
Small size holes having surface dimension about equal to the depth of the
hole, holes left after removal of form bolts, grout insert holes and slots cut for repair
of cracks shall be repaired as follows. The holes to be patched shall be roughened
and thoroughly soaked with clean water until absorption stops. A 5mm layer of grout
of equal parts of cement and sand shall be well brushed into the surface to be
patched, followed immediately by the patching concrete, which shall be well
consolidated with a wooden float and left slightly proud of the surrounding surface.
The concrete patch shall be built upon weather conditions, it shall be worked off
flush with a wooden float and a smooth finish obtained by wiping with Hessian, a
steel trowel shall be used for this purpose. The mix of patching shall be of the same
materials and in the same proportions as that used in the concrete being repaired,
although some reducing in the maximum size of the coarse aggregates may be
necessary and the mix shall be kept as dry as possible. Mortar filling by air pressure
(guniting) shall be used for repair of areas to large and/or too shallow for patching
with mortar. Patched surfaces shall be given a final treatment to match the colour
and texture of the surrounding concrete. White cement shall be substituted for
ordinary cement, if so directed by ENGINEER to match the shade of the patch with
the original concrete.
29.8.6. CURING OF PATCHED WORK
The patched areas shall be covered immediately with an approved non

staining, water-saturated material such as gunny bags, which shall be kept
continuously, wet and protected against sun and wind for a period of 24 hours.
Thereafter, the patched area shall be kept wet continuously by a final spray of
sprinkling for not less than 10days.
29.8.7. APPROVAL BY ENGINEER
609
All materials, procedures, and operations used in the repair of concrete and
also the finished repair work shall be subject to the approval of ENGINEER. All fillings
shall be tightly bonded to the concrete and shall be sound, free from shrinkage
cracks after the fillings have been cured and dried.
29.8.8. FINISHING
This specification is intended to cover the treatment of concrete surface of all

structures. Areas requiring special finish not covered by this specification shall be
clearly indicated on the drawings and special specifications shall be furnished.
29.8.8.1. FINISH FOR FORMED SURFACES
The type of finish for formed concrete surfaces shall be as follows, unless
otherwise specified by the ENGINEER.
For surface against which backfill or concrete is to be placed, no treatment is

required except repair of defective areas.
For surface below grade which will receive water proofing treatment the
concrete shall be free of surface irregularities, which would interfere with proper
application of the waterproofing materials which is specified for use.
Unless specified, surface which will be exposed when the structure is in

service shall receive no special finish, except repair of damaged or defective
concrete, removal of fins, and abrupt irregularities, filling of holes left by form ties
and rods and clean up of adhering debris.
29.8.8.2. Surfaces which will be exposed to the weather and which would normally
level shall be sloped for drainage, unless the drawing specifies a horizontal surface
or shows the slope required, the tops of narrow surfaces show the slope required,
the tops of narrow surfaces such as stair treads, walls, curbs, and parapets shall be
sloped across the width approximately 1 in 3. Broader surfaces such as walkways,
road, parking areas and platforms shall be sloped about 1 in 50. Surfaces that will be
covered by backfill or concrete, subfolders to be covered by backfill or concrete, sub-
floors to be covered with concrete topping, terrazzo or quarry tile, and similar
surfaces shall be smooth screeded and levelled to produce even surfaces.
29.8.8.3. STANDARD FINISH FOR EXPOSED CONCRETE
610
Exposed concrete shall mean any concrete, other than floors or slabs,
exposed to view upon completion of the job. Unless otherwise specified on the
drawings, the standard finish for exposed concrete shall be smooth finish. A smooth
finish shall be obtained with the use of lined or plywood forms having smoothed and
even surfaces and edges. Panels and form linings shall be of uniform size and be as
large as practicable and installed withclosed joint. Upon removal of form the joint
marks shall be smoothed off and all blemishes, projections etc. removed leaving the
surfaces reasonably smooth and unmarred.
29.8.8.4. INTEGRAL CEMENT CONCRETE FINISH
When specified on the drawings an integral cement concrete finish of specified

thickness for floors and slabs shall be applied either monolithic or bonded, as
specified on the drawings, as per IS 2571. The surfaces shall be compacted and then
floated with a wooden float or power floating machine. The surface shall be tested
with a straight edge and any high and low spots eliminated. Floating or trowelling of
the finish shall be permitted only after all surface water has evaporated. Dry cement
or mixture of dry cement and sand shall not be sprinkled directly on the surface of
the cement finish to absorb moisture or to stiffen the mix.
29.8.8.5. RUBBED FINISH
A rubbed finish shall be provided only on exposed concrete surfaces as

specified on the drawings. Upon removal of forms, all fins and other projections in
the surfaces shall be carefully removed, offsets levelled and voids and/or damaged
sections immediately saturated with water and repaired by filling with concrete or
mortar of the same composition as was used in the surface. The surfaces shall then
be thoroughly wetted and rubbed with carborundum or other abrasive. Cement
mortar may be used in the rubbing, but the finished surfaces shall not be brush
coated with either cement or grout after rubbing. The finished surfaces shall present
a uniform and smooth appearance.
29.8.8.6. PROTECTION
All concrete shall be protected against damage until final acceptance by

ENGINEER/OWNER.
30.0. FORM WORK
611
30.1. The formwork shall consist of shores, bracing, sides or beams and
columns bottom of slabs, etc., including ties, anchors, hangers, inserts etc. complete
which shall be properly designed and planned for the work. False work shall be so
constructed that vertical adjustments can be made to compensate for take up and
settlements. Wedges may be used at the top or bottom of timer shores, but not at
both ends, to facilitate vertical adjustment or dismantling of a formwork. Only steel
scaffolding and steel centering materials should be used for all RCC works.
30.2. DESIGN OF FORMWORK
The design and engineering of the formwork as well as its construction shall
be the responsibility of CONTRACTOR. If so instructed, the drawings and/or
calculations for the design of the form work shall be submitted to ENGINEER's
approval and thereon. Such approval shall not however relieve contractor of the full
responsibility for the design and construction of the form work. The design shall take
into account all the loads vertical as well as lateral that the forms will be carrying
including live and vibration loadings.
30.3. TOLERANCES
Tolerance is a specified permissible variation from lines, grade or

dimension given in drawings. No tolerances specified for horizontal or vertical
building lines or footings shall be construed to permit encroachment beyond the legal
boundaries. Unless otherwise specified, the tolerances on the shapes, lines and
dimensions will be permitted as per I.S. 456:2000.
30.4. TYPE OF FORM WORK
Form work may be of timber, plywood, metal, plastic or concrete. For

special finishes the formwork may be lined with plywood, steel sheets, oil
tempered hard board, etc. Sliding forms and slip forms may be used with the
approval of ENGINEER.
30.5. FORMWORK REQUIRERMENTS
30.5.1. Forms shall conform to the shapes, lines, grades and dimensions including
camber of the concrete as called for on the drawings. Ample studs, walers,
braces, ties, straps, shores, etc. shall be used to hold the forms in proper position
without any distortion whatsoever until the concrete has set sufficiently to permit
612
removal of forms. Forms shall be strong enough to permit the use of immersion
vibrators. In special cases, form vibrators may also be used. The shuttering shall be
close boarded. Timber shall be well seasoned, free from sap, shakes, loose, knots,
worm holes, warps or other surface defects in contact with concrete. Faces coming
in contact with the concrete shall be free from adhering grout, plaster, paint,
projecting nails, split, or other defects, joints shall be sufficiently tight to prevent loss
of water and fine materials from concrete.
30.5.2. Plywood shall be used for Exposed Concrete surfaces. Where called for,
Sawn and wrought timer may be used for unexposed surfaces. Inside faces of
forms for concrete surfaces, which are to be rubbed, finish shall be planed to
remove irregularities or unevenness in the face. Formwork with linings will be
permitted.
30.5.3. All new and used form timber shall be maintained in a good condition with
respect to shape, strength, rigidity, water tightness, smoothness and cleanliness
of surfaces. Form timber unsatisfactory in any respect shall not be used and if
rejected by ENGINEER shall be removed from the site.
30.5.4. Shores supporting successive storeys shall be placed directly over those
below or be so designed and placed that the load will be transmitted directly to
them. Trussed supports shall be provided for shores that cannot be secured on
adequate foundations.
30.5.5. Formwork, during any stage of construction showing signs of distortion or

distorted to such a degree that the intended concrete work will not conform to the
exact contours indicated on the drawings shall be repositioned and strengthened.
Poured concrete affected by the faulty formwork, shall be removed entirely and the
formwork corrected prior to placing new concrete.
30.5.6. Excessive construction camber to compensate for shrinkage, settlement etc.

that may impair the structural strength of members will not be permitted.
30.5.7. Forms for substructure concrete may be omitted when in the opinion of
ENGINEER the open excavation is firm enough to act as the form. Such excavations
shall be slightly larger than required by the drawings to compensate for irregularities
in excavation and to ensure the design requirements.
613
30.5.8. Forms shall be so designed and constructed that their removal will not
damage the concrete. Face formwork shall provide true vertical and horizontal joints
conforming to the architectural features of the structure as to location of joints and
be as directed by ENGINEER.
30.5.9. Where exposed smooth or rubbed concrete finishes are required the form
shall be constructed with special care so that resulting concrete surfaces require a
minimum finish.
30.6. BRACINGS, STRUTS AND PROPS
Shuttering shall be braced, strutted, propped and so supported that it shall

not deform under weight and pressure of the concrete and also due to the
movement of men and other materials. Bamboo shall not be used as props or cross
bearers. The shuttering for beams and slabs shall be so erected that the shuttering
on the sides of the beams and under the soffit of slabs can be removed without
disturbing the beam bottoms. Re-propping of beams shall not be done except
when props have to be reinstated to take care of construction loads anticipated to
be in excess of the design load. Vertical props shall be supported on wedges or
other measures shall be taken where by the props can be gently lowered vertically
while striking the shuttering. If the shuttering for column is erected for the full
height of the column, one side shall be left open and built up in sections as
placing of concrete proceeds or windows may be left for pouring concrete from the
sides to limit the drop of concrete to 1.0m or as directed by ENGINEER.
30.7. MOULD OIL
Care shall be taken to see that the faces of formwork coming in contract with
concrete are perfectly cleaned and two coats of mould oil or any other approved
materials applied before fixing reinforcement and placing concrete such coating shall
be insoluble in water, non-staining and not injurious to the concrete. It shall not
become flaky or be removed by rain or wash water. Reinforcement and/or other
items to be cast in the concrete shall not be placed until coating of the forms is
complete. Adjoining concrete surfaces shall also be protected against contamination
from the coating material.
30.8. CHAMFERS AND FILLETS
614
All corners and angles exposed in the finished structure shall be formed
with mouldings to form chamfers or fillets on the finished concrete. The standard
dimensions of chamfers and fillets, unless otherwise specified, shall be 20mm x
20mm. Care shall be exercised to ensure accurate mouldings. The diagonal face
of the moulding shall be planed or surfaced to the same texture as the forms to
which it is attached.
30.9. VERTICAL CONSTRUCTION JOINT CHAMFERS
Vertical construction joints on faces, which will be exposed at the completion

of the work, shall be chamfered as above except where not permitted by
ENGINEER for structural or hydraulic reasons.
30.10. WALL TIES :
Wire ties passing through the walls shall not be allowed. In their place
bolts passing through sleeves shall be used.
30.11. REUSE OF FORMS:
Before reuse, all forms shall be thoroughly scrapped, cleaned, nails

removed, holes that may leak suitably plugged and joints examined and when
necessary, repaired and the inside retreated to prevent adhesion, to the
satisfaction of ENGINEER. Warped timber shall be resized. CONTRACTOR shall
equip himself with enough shuttering to complete the job in the stipulated time.
30.12. REMOVAL OF FORMS:
30.12.1. The stripping time for forms shall be in accordance with clause 11.3 of IS
456-2000.
30.12.2. CONTRACTOR shall record on the drawing or a special register the date
upon which the concrete is placed in each part of the work and the date on which
the shuttering is removed there from.
30.12.3. In no circumstances shall forms struck until the concrete reaches a

strength of at least twice the stress due to self weight and any
construction/erection loading to which the concrete may be subjected at the
time of striking formwork.
615
30.12.4. In normal circumstances (generally where temperatures are above 20oC)

forms may be struck after expiry of the following periods:
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Type of Form work Minimum Period
Before Striking
Form work.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
a) Vertical formwork to columns, walls, 16-24 hours
beams.
b) Soffit formwork to slabs 3 days
(Props to be refixed immediately
after removal of formwork)
c) Soffit formwork to beams 7 days
(Props to be refixed immediately
after removal of formwork)
d) Props to slabs:
1) Spanning up to 4.5m 7 days
2) Spanning over 4.5m 14 days
e) Props to beams and arches:
1) Spanning up to 6m 14 days
2) Spanning over 6m 21 days
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
30.12.5. Striking shall be done slowly with utmost care to avoid damage
to raises and projections and without shock or vibration by gently easing the
wedges. If after removing the form work, it is found that timber has been
embedded in the concrete, it shall be removed and made good as specified earlier.
30.12.6. Reinforced temporary opening shall be provided, as directed by

ENGINEER to facilitate removal of formwork which otherwise may be in accessible.
30.12.7. Tie rods, clamps, form bolts, etc. which must be entirely removed from
walls or similar structures shall be loosened not sooner than 24 hours nor later
than 48 hours after the concrete has been deposited. Ties, except those required
to hold forms in place, may be removed at the same time. Ties withdrawn from
walls and grade beams shall be pulled towards the inside face. Cutting ties
back from the faces of walls and grade beams will not be permitted.
616
30.12.8. For liquid retaining structures no sleeves for through bolts shall be
used nor shall through bolts be removed. The bolts, in this case, shall cut at
25mm depth from the surface and then the hole shall be made good by sand
cement mortar of the same proportions as the concrete just after striking the form
work.
31.0 FOUNDATION BEDDING, BONDING AND JOINING
31.1. All surfaces upon or against which concrete will be placed shall suitably
prepared by thoroughly cleaning, washing, dewatering,as may be indicated in the
plans or directed by ENGINEER, to meet the various situations encountered in the
work.
31.2. Prior to construction of form work for any item where soil will act as bottom
form, approval shall be obtained form ENGINEER as to the suitability of the soil.
31.3. PREPARATION OF EARTH STRATA OF FOUNDATIONS
All earth surfaces upon which or against which concrete is to be placed

shall be well compacted and free form standing water, mud or debris. Soft
yielding soil shall be removed and replaced with suitable earth well compacted as
directed by ENGINEER where specified, lean concrete shall be provided on the
earth stratum for receiving concrete. The surface of absorptive soils against which
concrete is to be placed shall be made moisture thoroughly so that no moisture will
be drawn from the freshly placed concrete and later shall help to cure the
concrete.
31.4. PREPARATION OF CONCRETE SURFACES
The preparation of concrete surfaces upon which additional concrete is to be

placed later, shall preferably be done by scarifying and cleaning while the concrete
is between its initial and final set. This method shall be used wherever practicable
and shall consist of cutting the surface with picks and stiff brooms and
by use of an approved combination of air and water jet as directed by ENGINEER.
Great care shall be taken in performing this work to avoid removal of too
much mortar and the weakening of the surface by loosening of aggregate. When it
is not practicable to follow the above method, it will be necessary to employ air tools
to remove laitance and roughen the surface. The final required result should be a
617
pitted surface from which all dirt, unsound concrete laitance and glazed mortar
have been removed.
31.5. BONDING TREATMENT (MORTAR)
31.5.1. After rock or concrete surfaces upon which new concrete is to be placed
have been scarified, cleaned, and wetted as specified herein, they shall
receive, a bonding treatment, immediately before placement of the concrete.
31.5.2. The bonding medium shall be a coat of cement-sand mortar. The mortar
shall have the same cement- sand proportions as the concrete, which shall be placed
on it. The water-cement ratio shall be determined by placing conditions and as
approved by ENGINEER.
31.5.3. Bonding mortar shall be placed in sufficient quantity to completely cover the
surface about 10mm thick for rock surface and about 5mm thick for concrete
surfaces. It shall be brushed or broomed over the surface and worked thoroughly
into all cracks, crevices and depressions. Accumulations or puddles of mortar
shall not be allowed to settle in depressions and shall be brushed out to a
satisfactory degree, as determined by ENGINEER.
31.5.4. Mortar shall be placed at such a rate that it can be brushed over the surface
just in advance of placement of concrete. Only such area shall be covered with
concrete before initial set in mortar taken place. The amount of mortar that will be
permitted to place to any one time, or the area, which it is to cover, shall be in
accordance with ENGINEER's directions.
31.6. CLEANING AND BONDING FORMED CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
Vertical construction joints shall be cleaned as specified above or by other

methods approved by ENGINEER. In placing concrete against formed construction
joints, the surfaces of the joints, where accessible, shall be coated thoroughly with
the specified bed joint bonding mortar immediately before they are covered with
concrete or by scrubbing with wire brooms dipped into the fresh concrete. Where it
is impracticable to apply such a mortar coating, special precautions shall be taken to
ensure that the new concrete is brought into intimate contact with the surface of the
joint by careful puddling and spading with aid of vibrators and suitable tools.
31.7. EXPANSION AND CONTRACTION JOINTS
618
Provision shall be made for expansion and contraction in concrete by use of

special type joint located as shown on the drawing. Contraction by joint surfaces
shall be treated as directed by the specification on the drawing or as directed by
ENGINEER.
32.0 HOT WEATHER REQUIREMENT
32.1. All concrete work performed in hot weather shall be in accordance with I.S:
456 except as herein modified.
32.2. Admixture may be used only when approved by ENGINEER.
32.3. Adequate provisions shall be made to lower concrete temperatures by cool

ingredient, eliminating excessive mixing, preventing exposure of mixers and
conveyors to direct sunlight and the use of reflective paint on mixers etc. The
temperature of the freshly placed concrete shall not be permitted to exceed 38 °C.
32.4. Consideration shall be given to shading aggregate stockpiles from direct rays of
the sun and sprayings stockpiles with water, use of cold water when available, and
burying insulating shading and/or painting white the pipe lines and water storage
tanks and conveyance.
32.5. In order to reduce loss of mixing water the aggregates, wooden forms,
sub-grade, adjacent concrete and other moisture absorbing surfaces shall be well
wetted prior to concreting placement and finishing shall be done as quickly as
possible.
32.6. Extra precautions shall be taken for the protection and curing of concrete.
Consideration shall be given to continuous water curing and protection against high
temperatures and drying hot winds for a period of at least 7days immediately after
concrete has set and after which normal curing procedures may be resumed.
33.0. PLACING CONCRETE UNDER WATER
33.1. Under all ordinary conditions all foundations shall be completely dewatered and
concrete placed in the dry. However, when concrete placement under water is
necessary, all work shall conform to IS.456 and the procedure shall be as follows:
33.2. METHOD OF PLACEMENT
619
Concrete shall be deposited under water by means of tremies, or drop

bottom buckets of approved type.
33.3. DIRECTION, INSPECTION AND APPROVAL
All works requiring placement of concrete under water shall be designed,

directed and inspected with due regard to local circumstance and purposes. All under
water concrete shall be placed according to the plans or specifications and as
directed and approved by ENGINEER.
34.0. PRECAST CONCRETE
34.1. Pre-cast units shall comply with I.S: 456 and with the following requirements:
All pre-cast units shall be cast on a suitable bed or platform with firm
foundation and free from wind. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the accuracy
of the level or shape of the bed or platform. A suitable serial number and the date of
casting shall be impressed or painted on each unit.
34.2. STRIKING FORMS
Side shutters shall not be struck in less than 24 hours after depositing
concrete and no pre-cast unit shall be lifted until the concrete reaches strength of at
least twice the stress to which the concrete may be subjected to at the time of
lifting.
34.3. PRECAST UNITS
The lifting and removal of precast units, that shall be undertaken without
causing shock, vibration or undue bending stresses to or in the units. Before lifting
and removal takes place, CONTRACTOR shall satisfy ENGINEER or his representative
that the methods he proposes to adopt for these operations will not over stress or
otherwise affect seriously the strength of the precast units. The reinforced side of
the units shall be distinctly marked.
34.4. CURING
All precast work shall be protected from the direct rays of the sun for at least
7 days after casting and during that period each unit shall be kept constantly
watered or preferably be completely immersed in water if the size of the unit so
permits. Otherwise curing practice as given in clause D 1.29 shall be followed.
620
35.0. SLOTS OPENING ETC.
Slots, openings, or holes, pockets etc. shall be provided in the concrete work
in the positions indicated in the drawings or as directed by ENGINEER. Any deviation
from the approved drawings shall be made good by CONTRACTOR at his own
expense without damaging any other work. Sleeves, bolts, inserts etc. shall also be
provided in concrete work where so specified.
36.0. INSPECTION
36.1. All materials workmanship and finished construction shall be subject to the
continuous inspection and approval of ENGINEER.
36.2. All materials supplied by CONTRACTOR and all work or construction performed
by CONTRACTOR rejected as not in conformity with the specifications and drawings
shall be immediately replaced at no additional expense to the OWNER.
36.3. Approvals of any preliminary materials or phase work shall in no way relieve
the CONTRACTOR from the responsibility of supplying concrete and or producing
finished concrete in accordance with the specifications and drawings.
36.4. All concrete shall be protected against damage until final acceptance by
OWNER or his representative.
36.5. CLEAN-UP
36.5.1. Upon the completion of concrete work, all forms, equipment construction
tools, protective covering and any debris resulting from the work shall be removed
from the premises.
36.5.2. All debris i.e., empty containers, scrap wood etc. shall be removed to "Dump"
daily or as directed by ENGINEER.
36.5.3. The finished concrete surfaces shall be left in a clean condition satisfactory
to ENGINEER.
37.0. ACCEPTABLE CRITERIA
37.1. Any concrete work shall satisfy the requirements given below individually and
collectively for it to be acceptable.
621
a) Properties of constituent materials

b) Characteristic compressive strength
c) Specified mix proportions
d) Minimum cement content
e) Maximum free –water /cement ratio
f) Workability
g) Temperature
h) Density of fully compacted concrete
i) Curing
j) Tolerances in dimensions
k) Tolerances in levels
l) Durability
m)Surface finishes
n) Special requirements such as
i) Water tightness
ii) Resistance to aggressive chemicals
iii) Resistance to freezing and thawing
iv) Improved fire resistance
v) Wear resistance
vi) Resistance to early thermal cracking
37.2. The ENGINEER ‘s decision as to the acceptability or otherwise of any
concrete work shall be final and binding on the CONTRACTOR.
37.3. For work not accepted, the ENGINEER may review and decide whether
remedial measures are feasible so as to render the work acceptable. The ENGINEER
shall in that case direct the CONTRACTOR to undertake and execute the remedial
measures. These shall be expeditiously and effectively implemented by the
CONTRACTOR. Nothing extra shall become payable to the CONTRACTOR by the
OWNER for executing the remedial measures.
38.0. MODE OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
38.1. The unit rate for concrete work under various categories shall be all inclusive
and no claims for extra payment on account of such items as leaving holes,
622
embedding inserts, etc. shall be entertained unless separately provided for in the
schedule of quantities. No extra claim shall also be entertained due to change in the
number, position and/or dimensions of holes, slots or openings, sleeves, inserts or on
account of any increased lift or scaffolding etc. All these factors should be taken into
consideration while quoting the unit rates. Unless consideration while quoting the
unit rates. Unless provided for in the schedule of quantities the rates shall also
include fixing inserts in all concrete works, whenever required.
38.2. Payments of concrete will be made on the basis of unit rates quoted for the
respective items in the schedule of quantities. No deduction in the concrete quantity
will be made for the reinforcement, inserts etc. and opening less than 1/20 of a
sq.m. in area where concrete is measured in sq.m and 1/150 cu.m. Where concrete
is measure in cu, Metres. Where no such deduction for concrete is made, payment
for shuttering work provided for such holes, pockets etc. will not be made. Similarly
the unit rates for concrete work shall be inclusive or exclusive of shuttering as
provided for in the schedule of quantities.
38.3. Where formwork is paid for separately, it shall be very clearly understood that
payment for formwork is inclusive of form work, shuttering, shoring, propping,
scaffolding etc. complete.
38.3. Payment for beams will be made for the quantity placed on the depth being
reckoned from the underside of the slabs and length measured as the clear distance
between supports. Payments for columns shall be made for the quantity based on
height reckoned upto the underside of slabs.
38.4. The unit rate for precast concrete members shall include form work,
mouldings, finishing, hoisting and setting in position including setting mortar,
provision of lifting arrangement etc. complete. Only if reinforcement is used it shall
be measured and paid for separately under item rate.
2.0. SPECIFICATION FOR GENERAL BUILDING WORKS
1.0. SCOPE:
623
This specification covers the general requirement for brick masonry, plastering,
flooring, doors, windows, ventilators, wood work, water proofing, false ceiling,
painting and such other related work forming a part of this job which may be
required to be carried out though not specifically mentioned above. The work under
this specification shall consist of furnishing of all tools, plants, labour, materials, any
and everything necessary for carrying out the work.
2.0. APPLICABLE CODES AND SPECIFICATIONS :
2..1 This specification covers standards and specifications and are made a part of
this specification. All standards, tentative specifications, specifications, codes of
practices referred to herein shall be the latest edition including all applicable official
amendments and revisions.
2..2. In case of discrepancy between this specification and those referred to herein,
this specification shall govern:
IS.1077 - Common burnt clay building bricks.

IS.3102 - Classification of burnt clay solid bricks
IS.2180 - Burnt clay building bricks, heavy duty
IS.3495 - Method of tests for burnt clay building bricks
IS.2691 - Burnt clay facing bricks
IS.2212 - Code of practice for brick work.
IS.2645 - Integral cement water – proofing compounds
IS.1443 - Code of practice for laying and finishing of cement
concrete flooring tiles
IS.2114 - Code of practice for laying in situ Terrazzo floor Finish
IS.777 - Glazed Earthenware tiles.
IS.4021 - Timber door, window and ventilator frames
IS.2202 - Wooden flush shutters (solid, core type) Part – II
IS.1003 - Timber panelled and glazed shutters(Part-I& II)
IS.4020 - Methods of tests for wooden flush doors: Type tests.
IS.1761 - Transparent sheet glass for glazing and framing purposes.
IS.4351 - Steel door frames.
IS.1038 - Steel doors, windows and ventilators.
IS.1081 - Code of practice for fixing and glazing of metal (steel and
624
aluminium) doors, windows and ventilators.

IS.5807 - Method of test or clear finishes for wooden Furniture (Part-I to III)
IS.1477 - Code of practice for painting of ferrous metals in buildings and
allied finishes (Part I & II)
IS.2338 - Code of practice for finishing of wood and wood-based materials
(Part-I).
IS.427 - Distemper, dry, colour as required.
IS.428 - Distemper, oil emulsion, colour as required.
IS.2395 - Code of practice for painting concrete, masonry and plaster
surfaces.
IS.3384- Bitumen primer for use in water – proofing and damp –
proofing.
IS.1580 - Bituminous compound for water-proofing and caulking purposes.
IS.1322 - Bitumen felts for water-proofing and damp – proofing.
IS.1346 - Code of practice for water-proofing of roofs with Bitumen felts.
3.0. BRICKWORK:
3.1 Bricks used in works shall conform to the relevant Indian Standards. Theyshall
be sound, hard, homogenous in texture well burnt in kiln without being
vitrified,table moulded, deep red, cherry or copper coloured, of regular shape and
sizeand shall have sharp and square edges and parallel faces. The bricks shall be
free from pores chics, flaws of humps of any kind, bricks containing unground
particles and/or which absorb water more than 1/6th of their weight when soaked in
waterfor twenty-four hours shall be rejected. Over-burnt or under-burnt bricks shall
be liable to rejection. The bricks shall give a clear ringing sound when struckandshall
have a minimum crushing strength of 50Kg./Sq.cm. unless otherwise noted in
drawings.The classes and quality requirements of bricks shall be as laid down in
IS.3102.
3.2. The size of the brick shall be 22.86 x 11.43 x 7.62 cm. Unless and otherwise
specified, but tolerance upto +/- 3mm in each direction shall be permitted. However
bricks conforming in size to IS 1077 could be used. Bricks shall be provided with
frogs. Only full size bricks shall be used for masonry work. Brick bats shall be
used only with the permission of the ENGINEER to make up required wall length or
625
for bonding. Sample bricks shall be submitted to the ENGINEER for approval and
bricks supplied shall confirm to approved samples. If demanded by ENGINEER, brick
sample shall be got tested as per IS 3495 by CONTRACTOR at no extra cost to
OWNER. Bricks rejected by ENGINEER shall be removed from the site of works
within 24 hours.
4.0. MORTAR
4.1. Mortar for brick masonry shall be prepared as per IS : 2250. Mix for cement
mortar shall be as specified in the respective items of work.
4.2. Gauge boxes for sand shall be of such dimensions that one completed bag of
cement containing 50kgs of cement forms one unit. The sand shall be free from
clay, shale, loam, alkali, organic matter and shall be of sound, hard, clean and
durable particles. Sand shall be approved by ENGINEER. If so directed by the
ENGINEER, sand shall be thoroughly washed till it is free of any contamination.
4.3. For preparing cement mortar, the ingredients shall first be mixed thoroughly in
dry condition. Water shall then be added and mixing continued to give a uniform
mix of required consistency. Cement mortar shall preferably be machine mixed,
though hand mixing in a thorough manner may be allowed. The mortar so mixed
shall be used within twenty five (25) minutes of mixing. The mortar left unused in
the specified period shall be rejected.
4.4. The CONTRACTOR shall arrange for test on mortar samples if so directed by the
Engineer. Re-tempering of mortar shall not be permitted.
5.0. WORKMANSHIP
5.1. All bricks shall be thoroughly soaked in clean water for at least one hour
immediately before being laid. The cement mortar for brick masonry work shall be
as specified in the respective item of work. Brick work 230mm thick and over shall
be laid in English Bond unless otherwise specified. 115mm thick wall shall be laid
with stretchers. For laying bricks a layer of mortar shall be spread over the full width
of suitable length of the lower course. Each brick shall be pressed into the mortar
and shoved into final position so as to embed the brick fully in mortar. Bricks shall
be laid with frogs upper-most.
626
5.2. All brick work shall be plumb, square and true to dimensions shown. Vertical
joints in alternate courses shall come directly one over the other and be in line.
Horizontal course shall be levelled. The thickness of brick courses shall be kept
uniform. For walls of thickness greater than 230mm both faces shall be kept in
vertical planes. All interconnected brickwork shall be carried out at nearly one level
(so that there is uniform distribution of pressure on the supporting structure) and no
portion of the work shall be left more than one course lower than the adjacent work.
Where this is not possible, the work shall be raked back according to bond (and not
saw toothed) at an angle not exceeding 45 Degree. But in no case the level
difference between adjoining walls shall exceed 1.25m. Workmanship shall conform
to IS : 2212.
5.3. Bricks shall be so laid that all joints are well filled with mortar. The thickness of
joints shall not be less than 6mm and not more than 10mm. The face joints shall be
raked to a minimum depth of 12mm by raking tools daily during the progress of work
when the mortar is still green, so as to provide a proper key for the plaster or
pointing to be done. When plastering or pointing is not required to be done, the
joints shall be uniform in thickness and be struck flush and finished at the time of
laying. Face of brickwork shall be cleaned daily and all mortar droppings removed.
The surface of each course shall be thoroughly cleaned of all dirt before another
course is laid on top. If the mortar in the lower course has begun to set, the joints
shall be raked out to a depth of 12mm before another course is laid.
5.4. All brick work shall be built tightly against columns, floor slabs or other structural
members.
5.5. Where drawings indicate that structural steel columns are to be fire proofed with
brick work, the brick shall be built closely against all flanges and webs with all spaces
between the steel and brick work filled solid with mortar. Steel members partly
embedded in brick work and not indicated to be fire proofed with concrete, shall be
covered with not less than 12mm thick mortar unless directed otherwise by Engineer.
5.6. Miscellaneous inserts in masonry, e.g sleeves, wall ties, anchors, conduits,
structural steel, steel lintels etc shall be installed by the CONTRACTOR at no extra
cost to the OWNER. Furnishing of any of these inserts by the CONTRACTOR, will
be paid for separately. Openings, arches, etc. shall be provided as on the drawings.
627
Chases, pockets etc. shall be provided as shown in the drawings to receive windows,
louvers, doors, frames etc. Wall ties and flashings shall be built into the brickwork in
accordance with the drawings and specifications. It shall be clearly understood that
the rates quoted by the CONTRACTOR include for fixing of inserts, leaving openings,
cutting chases in brickwork for various trades etc.
6.0. FACING BRICK WORK :
6.1. Facing bricks of the type specified shall be laid in the positions indicated on the
drawings and all facing brickwork shall be well bonded to the backing bricks. No
facing brickwork shall at any time be more than 600mm above the backing
brickwork.
6.2. All facing brickwork shall be pointed as the work proceeds and internal faces of
the brickwork shall be pointed with neat flush joint to give a fair face.
6.3. Faced work shall be kept clean and free from damage, discolouration etc. at all
time. The CONTRACTOR shall fill carefully all holes with bricks similar to the
surrounding brickwork and point brick as required.
6.4. For facing brickwork, double scaffolding shall be used. No holes in brickwork for
scaffolding shall be permitted.
6.5. The green work shall be protected from rain by suitable covering. Bricks shall
be kept constantly moist on all faces for a minimum period of ten days. Brick work
shall not be raised more than one metre per day.
6.6. The rates quoted by the CONTRACTOR are exclusive of transoms and mullions.
CONTRACTOR shall provide the same as shown or indicated in the drawings. These
shall be generally provided only in half and full brick walls. Dimensions of the
transoms and mullions shall conform to the thickness of the wall. Concrete work for
transoms and mullions shall conform to the specifications for concrete and shall be of
grade M20.
6.7. Where shown on the structural drawings bricks for partition walls shall be
stacked adjacent to the structural member to pre-deflect the structural member
before the wall is built.
6.8. All joints in masonry shall be raked to a depth of 12mm with a hooked tool
made for the purpose when the mortar is still green and in any case within 48
628
hours of its laying. The surface to be rendered shall be washed with fresh,
clean, water free from all dirt, loose material, grease, etc .and thoroughly wetted for
6 hours before plastering work is commenced. Concrete surfaces to be rendered
will however be kept dry. The wall should not be too wet but only damp at the time
of plastering. The damping shall be uniform to get uniform bond between the
plaster and the wall.
6.9. The proportion of the mortar shall be as specified under the respective items of
work. Cement shall be mixed thoroughly in dry condition and then just enough
water added to obtain a workable consistency. The quality of water, sand and
cement shall be as per I.S. Standards. The mortar thus mixed shall be used
immediately and in no case shall the mortar be allowed to stand for more than
25minutes after mixing with water.
6.10. Curing of plaster shall be started as soon as the applied plaster has hardened
enough so as not to be damaged. The decision as to when the plaster has hardened,
will be given by the ENGINEER. Curing shall be done by continuously applying water
in a fine spray and shall be carried out for at least 7 days.
6.11. Whenever the specification or the item of work calls for water proofing, the
CONTRACTOR shall provide the percentage of water-proofing compound as specified
in the items of work.
6.12. Where lath plaster is specified, it shall be paid for at the same rate as for
plaster work without metal lath except that separate payment for metal lath will be
made.
6.13. Ceiling plaster shall be done before wall plaster and wall plaster shall
commence at top and work downwards.
6.14. INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR PLASTER – This plaster shall be laid in a single
coat of 12mm thickness. The mortar shall be dashed on the prepared surface with a
trowel and finished smooth by trowelling on the surface with neeru (lime cream).
Neeru shall be properly slaked fat lime. The standard of finish expected is high and
shall conform to IS:2394. Interior plaster shall be carried out on jambs, lintel and sill
faces, top and undersides, etc. as shown in the drawing or as directed by the
ENGINEER. Rate quoted for plaster work shall be deemed to include plastering of all
629
those surfaces. However, if the item of work includes plaster finish, no separate
payment would be made under ‘Plastering work’.
7.0. WATERPROOFING ADMIXTURE
If directed by the ENGINEER, the CONTRACTOR shall use approved water proofing
admixtures made by reputed manufacturer in the mortar for plaster work. The
quantity to be used etc, shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions
subject however to the approval of the ENGINEER. These admixtures shall not
contain calcium chloride unless specifically allowed by Engineer and shall conform to
IS : 2645. Payment shall be made for actual quantity of such admixture used unless
it is already covered in the rates for the work concerned.
8.0. CERAMIC TILED WORK IN FLOORING
8.1. The type, quality, size, thickness, colour, etc. of the tiles for flooring and skirting
work shall be of test quality approved by the ENGINEER. For this purpose, the
CONTRACTOR shall provide the ENGINEER with necessary samples for his selection.
8.2. Before the tiling work is commenced, the sub-surface shall be thoroughly
cleaned and washed of all loose materials, dirt, and scum or laitance and then well
wetted without forming water pools on the surface.
8.3. The tiles shall be laid on mortar bedding of about 20mm thick. The proportion
of mortar shall be one part of cement and 3 parts of sand. The tiles shall be fixed
on this bed one after another, each tile being gently tapped with a wooden mallet till
it is properly bedded and in level with the adjoining tiles. The joints shall be
perfectly straight and uniform in thickness. The tiles shall be laid perfectly in level
unless otherwise specified or required or desired by the ENGINEER. After laying the
tiles the joints shall be finished with white cement or cement of approved colour.
8.4. For lime mortar, lime from burnt stone shall be used. It shall be free from ash
and impurities and be in the form of lumps and not powder when brought to site.
Lime which is damaged due to rain, soaking, moisture or air slaking will be rejected.
8.5. Floor tiles laid adjoining the wall project 12mm under the plaster, skirting or
dado as may be required by the ENGINEER. Half tiles and pieces shall be avoided as
far as possible. After laying, the flooring shall be allowed to cure undisturbed for
630
seven days. Design traffic shall not be allowed on the floor at least 14 days after
laying the tiles.
8.6. About a week after laying the tiles, each and every tile shall be lightly tapped
with a small wooden mallet to find out if it gives a hollow sound. If it does, such
tiles along with any other cracked or broken tiles shall be removed and replaced with
a new tile to proper line and level. The same procedure shall be followed again after
the tiles are finally laid. For the purpose of ensuring that such replaced tiles match
with those earlier laid, it is necessary that the contractor order enough extra tiles
from the factory to meet this contingency.
8.7. For dado and skirting work, the vertical surface shall be thoroughly cleaned and
wetted. Thereafter it shall be evenly and uniformly covered with about 12mm thick
cement mortar. For this work the tiles as obtained from the factory shall be of the
size required and practically fully polished. The back of each tile to be fixed shall be
covered with a thin layer of neat cement paste and the tile shall then be gently
tapped, against the wall with a wooden mallet. This shall be done from the bottom
of the surface upwards. The joints shall be as close as possible and the work shall
be truly vertical and flush.
8.8. After the work has set, hand polishing with carborandum stones shall be done
so that the surface attains a high glossy finish corners and junctions shall be finished
true. True workmanship shall conform to IS:1443.
8.9. The work is subject to the approval of the ENGINEER. If any portion of the work
is rejected by the ENGINEER, the same shall be removed and redone by the
CONTRACTOR to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER at no extra cost to the OWNER.
9.0. GLAZED TILE WORK :
The glazed tiles in paving and dado shall be of the best available first class
quality approved by the ENGINEER and they should be laid on a base of 12mm thick
cement mortar.The tiles shall be of standard size without warp and with straight
edges true and even in shape and size and of uniform colour. They shall be laid truly
vertical on walls and truly horizontal on floors or to slopes as directed. The joint shall
be very thin, uniform and perfectly straight. The joint shall be floated with white
cement as approved by the ENGINEER. At the top of dado work, a coloured glazed
631
tile border 75mm deep shall be provided as approved by ENGINEER. The rate quoted
for paving and dado work shall be inclusive of angles, corner pieces and approved
colour border on top. Glazed tiles shall conform to IS:771.
10.0. INTEGRAL CEMENT FINISH ON CONCRETE FLOOR :
In all case where integral cement finish on a concrete floor has been specified, the
top layer of concrete shall be screeded off to proper level and tamped with tamper
having conical projections so that the aggregate shall be forced below the surface.
The surface shall be finished with a wooden float and a trowel with pressure. The
finish shall be continued till the concrete reaches its initial set. No cement or cement
mortar finish shall be provided on the surface. Where specified, a floor hardener as
approved by the ENGINEER shall be supplied and used as recommended by the
manufacturer.
10.0. WOOD WORK IN DOORS, WINDOWS, PARTITIONS, LOUVERS, RAIL-

INGS ETC :
11.1. Wood used for all work shall be the best of the respective class specified and
properly seasoned by at least 6 months air drying, suitable for joiner’s work, should
be of natural growth, uniform in texture, straight grained, free from sapwood, dead
knots, open shakes, boreholes, rot, decay and any and all other defects and
blemishes.
11.2. The thickness specified for joiner’s wrought timbers are unless otherwise
specified, prior to planning and 3mm will be allowed from the thickness stated for
each wrought faces.
11.3. All joining shall be wrought on all faces and finished off by hand with sand
paper, with slightly rounded arises.
11.4. The joints shall be pinned with hard wood pins and put together with white
lead. Jointing shall be by means of mortice and tennon or dovetailed joints as
approved.
11.5. Any joiner’s work which shall split, fracture, shrink, or show flaws or other
defects due to unsoundness, inadequate seasoning or bad workmanship, shall be
removed and replaced with sound material at the CONTRACTOR’s expense.
632
11.6. Doors, windows, and ventilator frames, transoms and mullions shall be
rebated. All dimensions shall be as per drawings. The top framing member of doors
and top and bottom framing of windows and ventilators shall project about 150mm
in brickwork. The verticals of door frames shall project about 50mm below finished
floor. Surface coming in contact with brick work shall be painted with bitumen as
directed by the ENGINEER. Each of the door and window frames shall be provided
with 3 Nos. M.S.230 x 50 x 5mm flat split hold-fasts on each side. These hold fasts
shall be embedded in masonry or concrete work. The work shall conform to IS:4021.
11.7. The doors shall be panelled or solid flush doors as described in the item of
work. All flush doors shall be supplied with approved fittings such as hinges, lock of
approved make with handles on both sides, anodised aluminium tower bolts, aldrop
and latch arrangements, door stoppers etc. and as detailed in schedule. Panelled
doors shall have the same fittings except lock, shall be provided. Each door leaf
shall have two 200mm tower bolts, two anodised aluminium or oxidised brass
handles, rubber ush and one door stopper mounted near the bottom of door.
External flush doors shall be made of weather-proof plywood. Flush doors shall
conform to IS:2202 (Part-I)
11.8. Doors will generally have no sills but if a few have to be provided, the
CONTRACTOR shall do so at no extra cost to the OWNER.
11.9. The type of window shall be as specified. Each shutter shall have minimum
one pair of hinges, two tower bolts, one handle and peg stay. Ventilators shall have
two M.S. hold fasts and hinges, one handle at each and one small tower bolt in the
centre, where so directed by the ENGINEER.
11.10. The workmanship of all door and window shutters shall conform to the
requirements of IS:1003 (Part I & II) and IS:2203 (Part I). If required, flush door
panels shall be got tested as per IS: 4020.
11.11. Cupboards, almirahs and shelves shall be provided as shown in drawings.
11.12. The finish expected is of a very high order and the work shall be all inclusive
whether or not all detailed specifications have been spelt out and the work shall be
free from blemish.
633
11.13. Iron bars or grills are proposed to be provided in the windows or ventilators.
Glass louvered ventilators where specified shall be provided.
11.14. Glazed windows, louvers, ventilators and doors shall be provided with
eitherclear or pin headed glass 4mm thick which shall be free from all blemishes and
shall conform to IS:1761. It should be clearly understood that glass which does not
have uniform refractive index or which is wavy, will be rejected.
11.15. Wood work shall not be painted, oiled or otherwise treated before it has been
approved by the ENGINEER.
12.0. ALUMINIUM DOORS, WINDOWS AND FITTINGS
12.1. The aluminium doors, windows and fittings shall conform to IS:1948-1961.
13.0. PAINTING/POLISHING WOOD WORK AND IRON WORK.
13.1. Paint / Polish to be used for various items of work shall be of best quality and
shall be obtained ready mixed in sealed containers from approved manufacturer.
The CONTRACTOR shall obtain the ENGINEER’s approval for the make and colour of
the paint he proposed to use. If required, polish for wood work shall be tested as
per IS:5807 (PART I & III)
13.2. All surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned of all dirt, loose particles and rust and
approved, prior to application of paint. For wood surfaces, a priming coat without
colouring matter shall be first applied after which all holes, cracks, etc. shall be made
good with putty and all knots properly filled with quicklime. Workmanship shall
conform to IS:1477 (Part I & II) and 2330 (Part I)
13.3. Specified number of coats shall be applied and at least 24 hours shall elapse
between the application of successive coats. No painting shall be carried out on
exterior work in wet weather or on surfaces which are not entirely dry.
13.4. Painting / polishing rate shall include all necessary scaffolding, cradles and
plant. Measurements will be on the basis of sq.m for doors and windows, only the
projected area will be measured. If such painting / polishing is not already a part of
the item, without deducting for the glazed portions though not painted. The
CONTRACTOR’s rate should take this into account.
634
14.0. DISTEMPERING, WHITE, COLOUR WASHING AND PAINTING OF

WALLS.
14.1. DISTEMPERING
14.1.1. The surface to be treated shall be thoroughly cleaned of all dirt and loose
particles etc. Inequalities and holes shall be filled with gypsum, which should be
allowed to set hard before distemper is applied.
14.1.2. Distemper shall be of well known brands of approved make. It shall be

applied by a board stiff brush in two coats over a coat of primer. The first and
second coat shall be applied only after the primer coat has thoroughly dried. The
first coat shall be of a lighter tint. The shade of the distemper shall be got approved
by the ENGINEER. Water bound and oil bound distemper shall conform to the
requirements of IS:427 and 428 respectively.
14.2. WHITE WASH
14.2.1. Walls to be thoroughly cleaned before white wash is applied. White wash
shall be of ordinary fat lime and of good quality. It shall be slaked with an excess of
water to the consistency of a cream and allowed to remain under water for 2 days.
It shall then be strained through a cloth and 2kg of clean gum added for every cubic
metre of lime ready for white washing.
14.2.2. Each coat is to be applied with a brush. It shall be laid with a stroke of the
brush from the top, downwards, another from bottom upwards over the first stroke
and similarly, one stroke from the right and another from the left over the first brush
before it dries. Three such coats shall be applied.
14.3. COLOUR WASH
Colour wash shall be applied the same way as white wash. Necessary and
approved colouring matter shall be added to the white wash which has been
strained. Only wash sufficient for the day’s work shall be prepared each morning.
If the finished surface is powdery and comes off easily or the general appearance is
streaky, the work shall be rejected.
635
14.4. PAINTING
14.4.1. Paint to be used for the various items of work should be of approved make
and colour. It is imperative that the CONTRACTOR should obtain ENGINEER’s
permission in regard to the make and colour of paint that he proposes to use for the
various items of work. The painting work shall be carried out as directed by the
ENGINEER, keeping however, in view the recommendations of the manufacturers.
14.4.2. Where painting with plastic emulsion is specified all uneven surfaces shall be
made up by use of putty of appropriate quality, after the surface has been
thoroughly cleaned of all dust, dirt and sand papered. One primer coat and two
coats of emulsion paint shall be applied. Workmanship shall conform to the
requirements of IS:2395.
15.0. EXPANSION JOINTS, WATER STOPS, PREMOULDED JOINT FILLERS,

FLASHINGS
15.1. EXPANSION JOINTS
Expansion joints shall be provided with 20gauge copper strips/mild steel hot
dip galvanised strips of 250mm width at locations shown on drawings or as approved
by ENGINEER. The strips shall be bent to the shape indicated on the drawing and
embedded properly in masonry. The joint width shall be uniform throughout and
special care shall be taken to ensure proper bending at expansion joints. Expansion
joints shall be continuous and where two or more strips meet, they shall be lapped to
the extent of 75mm and joints properly soldered. The expansion joints shall be filled
with premoulded joint fillers and sealed with mastic compound. For purposes of
measurement, the laps provided will be neglected. Wherever an expansion joint
between the existing part and new part is proposed the rate quoted shall be inclusive
of making necessary connections with existing part.
15.2. WATER STOPPERS :
Water stops shall be of rubber or PVC Bars of approved make. These shall be
provided at locations indicated on drawings. Water stops shall be lapped 100mm
and heat sealed to obtain continuity. Water stops shall be cleaned thoroughly of all
concrete and mortar coating as directed before resuming concrete work. Water
stops shall be in long lengths to avoid joints as far as possible.
636
15.3. JOINT FILLER :
Premoulded joint fillers shall be of a non-deteriorating and resilient type. A

sample of material shall be approved by the ENGINEER before being brought to site.
Installation shall be carried out properly and as directed.
15.5. FLASHINGS :
Metal or tar felt flashings shall be fixed as directed by the ENGINEER. Metal
flashings where provided shall be welded / soldered to obtain continuity. Tar felt
flashings shall be lapped for a minimum length of 150mm. Flashings shall be
measured and paid for in linear metres for the specified width disregarding laps or
joints.
16.0. WATER PROOFING WORK :
All surfaces to be water proofed shall be dry, clean, smooth and free from
dust and loose particles.
17.0. TAR FELT TYPE :
For a five layer treatment, bitumen primer conforming to IS:3394 shall be

applied. Over this primer coat, hot bitumen conforming to IS:1580 shall be applied
at the rate of 1.2 kg./Sq.m. Hessian based felt type-3 Grade-2 conforming to
IS:1322 shall be spread and embedded in the previously laid bitumen while hot.
Hot bitumen will again be applied over the felt at the rate of 1.2 Kg./Sq.m. Pea size
gravel or grit shall be uniformly spread at the rate of 0.008cu.m./sq.m. The end and
side laps of each sheet shall not be less than 100 and 175mm respectively and shall
be firmly bonded with bitumen. The extreme ends shall be taken up about 100 –
150mm along parapet wall and embedded in chases made in the wall and brick
masonry and made good in plaster. The standard of water proofing shall comply
with IS:1346. For seven layer treatment, one additional layer of bitumen shall be
laid before gravel layer in a manner described above for five layer treatment.
3.0. SPECIFICATION FOR WATER SUPPLY AND SANITARY WORKS
1.0. SCOPE :
This specification covers the general requirements for supplying and laying of
water supply pipe line with necessary fittings and fixtures for buildings / structures
637
tapping off from potable water supply distribution system, supplying and laying
sewage pipe line with disposal works including provision of all fittings and fixtures of
sanitary works and such other related items of work forming a part of the job, which
may be required to be carried out though not specifically mentioned above. The
work under this specification shall consist of furnishing of all tools, plants, labour,
materials and any and everything necessary for satisfactorily carrying out the work.
2.0. APPLICABLE CODES :
2.1. The following standards and codes are made part of this specification. All
standards, codes of practice referred to herein shall be the latest editions including
all official amendments and revisions.
a. IS.458 - Concrete Pipes (with and without reinforcements).

b.IS.554 - Dimensions for pipe threads where pressure tight joints
are required on the threads.
c . IS.651 - Salt glazed stoneware pipes and fittings.
d. IS.774 - Flushing cisterns for water closets and urinals (valve-less
siphonic type).
e.IS.775 - Cast iron brackets and supports for wash basins and sinks.
f.IS.781 - Sand cast brass screw-down bib taps and stop taps for
water services.
g.IS.783 - Code of practice for laying of concrete pipes.
h.IS.1068 - Electroplated coatings of nickel and chromium on iron and steel.
i. IS.1239 - Mild steel tubes (Part-I) and Mild steel tubulars and other
wrought steel pipe fittings (Part-II)
j.IS.1536 - Centrifugally cast (Spun) iron pressure pipes for water,
gas and sewage.
k.IS.1626 - Asbestos cement building pipes, gutters and fittings
(spigot and socket types).
l. IS.1703 - Ball valves (horizontal plunger type) including floats for
water supply purposes.
m.IS.1726 - Cast iron manhole covers and frames.
n.IS1729 - Sand cast iron spigot and socket soil, waste and
638
ventilating pipes, fittings, and accessories.

o.IS.1742 - Code of practice for building drainage.
p.IS.2326 - Automatic flushing cisterns for urinals.
q.IS.2470 - Code of practice for design and construction of septic tanks.
r.IS.2556 - Vitreous sanitary appliances (Part-I to Part-XV)
s.IS.2963 - Non-ferrous waste fittings for wash basins and sinks.
t. IS.3311 - Waste plug and its accessories for sinks and wash
basins.
u.IS.5329 - Code of practice for sanitary pipe work above ground for
buildings
v.IS.5434 - Non-ferrous alloy bottle traps for marine use.
3.0. DRAWINGS:
3.1. Drawings released for construction showing locations of sanitary and water
supply fixtures will be furnished to the CONTRACTOR and all drawings so furnished
shall form a part of this specification. Drawing will also furnish the details of one/or
more supply points outside the building for the water supply system and disposal
points/schemes for sanitary works. The CONTRACTOR shall refer to these drawings
for all information contained therein which pertains to as required for this work.
CONTRACTOR shall submit to OWNER/ENGINEER for his approval, detailed working
drawings showing layout of water supply and sanitary works with necessary fittings
and fixtures before the actual construction is undertaken.
3.2. All Civil works will be measured and paid under respective items of work.
4.0. SANITARY INSTALLATION :
4.1. The work shall be carried out complying in all respect with any specific
requirements of the Local Body in whose jurisdiction the work is situated and as
approved by the OWNER/ENGINEER.
4.2. Any damage caused to the building, or to installations therein, either due to
negligence on the part of the CONTRACTOR or due to actual requirements of the
work, shall be made good and the building or the installation shall be restored to its
original condition by the CONTRACTOR.No extra payments shall be made for such
works except when there is an item specifically included for such work in the
schedule
639
4.3. All sanitary and plumbing work shall be carried out by licensed plumbers.
4.4. On completion of the work, the site shall be cleaned and all rubbish disposed off
as directed by the ENGINEER.
4.5. All sanitary appliances including sanitary fittings, fixtures, toilet requisites shall
be of size and design as specified in the item of work and as per sample approved by
the ENGINEER.
4.6. All sanitary fittings and fixtures shall be acceptable to the ENGINEER/ OWNER
and if there are any variations, they shall satisfy the permissible tolerances in
dimensions/slope/contour as specified in relevant IS Codes /Standards.
4.7. All white glazed porcelain fixtures, such as wash basin sink, drain board, water
closet pan, urinal ‘P’ trap etc., shall have hard durable white glazed finish. They shall
be free from cracks, indentations or other glazing defects. No chipped porcelain
fixtures shall be used. Joints between iron and earthenware pipes shall be made
perfectly air and water tight by chaulking with near cement mortar.
4.8. INDIAN TYPE WATER CLOSET (I.W.C)
This shall be the long pan pattern with separate foot-rests made of white
glazed earthenware, white glazed vitreous china or white glazed fire clay. The
general requirements shall conform to IS:2556 (Part – III and Part-X). Each pan
shall have an integral flushing rim of suitable type. It shall also have an inlet or
supply horn for connecting the flush pipe. The flushing rim and inlet shall be of self-
draining type. It shall have a weep hole at the flushing inlet to the pan. The
flushing inlet shall be in the front unless otherwise specified or ordered by the
ENGINEER. The inside of the bottom of the pan shall have sufficient slope from the
front towards the outlet and the surface shall be uniform and smooth to enable easy
and quick disposal while flushing. The exterior surface shall be unglazed and
sufficiently rough or grooved at right angle to the axis of the outlet. Pans shall be
provided with a trap ‘P’ or ‘S’ type with a minimum 50mm water seal and 50mm
diameter vent horn. Pan shall be laid at the correct location and level over a bed of
lime concrete using brick aggregates (1 part lime mortar to 2 parts brick bats with
lime mortar of 1 part lime to 2 parts of sand) or cement – sand admixture as
specified in the drawings.
640
4.9. WASH BASINS
4.9.1. Wash basins shall be of Hi-lites colour glazed earthenware, Hi-lites colour
glazed vitreous China or Hi-lites colour glazed fire clay as specified and conforming
to IS:2556 (Part – IV).
TYPE SIZE
Corner wash basin 400 x 400mm
Flat Back 550 x 400mm
4.9.2. Wash basin shall be of one piece construction, including as combined
overflow. All internal angles shall be designed so as to facilitate cleaning. Each
basin shall have a rim sloping inside towards the bowl on all sides except sides in
contact with the walls and shall have skirting at the back. Basins shall be provided
with single or double tap holes as specified. The tap holes shall be square. A
suitable tap hole button shall be supplied if one tap hole is not required in
installations. Each basin shall have a circular waste hole to which the interior of
basin shall drain. The waste hole shall be either rebated or levelled internally with
diameter of 65mm at top and a depth of 10mm to suit a waste plug having 64mm
diameter. Each basin shall be provided with a non-ferrous 32mm waste fitting. Stud
slots to receive the brackets on the underside of the wash basins shall be suitable for
a bracket with stud not exceeding 13mm diameter, 5mm high and 305mm from the
back of basin to the centre of the stud. The stud slots shall be of depth sufficient to
take 5mm stud. Every basin shall have an integral soap holder recess or recesses
which shall fully drain into the bowl. The position of the chain stay-hole shall not be
lower than the over flow slot. A slot type of overflow having an area of not less than
5sq.cm shall be provided and shall be so designed as to facilitate cleaning of the
overflow. The specifications for waste plug, chain and stay shall be the same as
given for sinks.
4.9.3. All the waste fittings shall be chromium plated. Bottle trap shall conform to
IS:5434. The chromium plating shall be of service grade No.2 conforming to IS:1068.
5.0. CAST IRON SOIL WASTE AND VENT PIPES AND FITTINGS :
5.1. All cast iron pipes and fittings shall be of uniform thickness with strong and deep
socket, free from flaws, air-holes, cracks, sand-holes and other defects and conform
to IS:1536. The diameter specified shall be internal diameter of pipe. The pipes and
641
fittings shall be true to shape, smooth and cylindrical and shall ring clearly when
struck over with a light hand hammer. All pipes and fittings shall be properly cleaned
of all foreign material before being fixed.
5.2. All plug bends of drainage pipes shall be provided with inspection and cleaning
caps, covers which shall be fixed with nuts and screws. Pipes shall be fixed to the
wall by C.I. or MS holder bat clamps, unless projecting ears with fixing holes are
provided at socket end of pipe. The pipes shall be installed, truly vertical or to the
lines and slopes as indicated. The clamps shall be fixed to the walls by embedding
their hooks in cement concrete blocks (1:2:4) 10cm x 10cm by making necessary
holes in the walls at proper places. All holes and breakages shall be made good.
The clamps shall be kept 25mm clear of the finished face of the walls to facilitate
cleaning and painting of pipes.
5.3. The annular space between the socket and spigot shall be filled with a gasket of
hemp or spun yarn soaked in neat cement slurry. The joint shall then be filled with
stiff cement mortar 1:2 (1 cement : 2 find sand) well pressed with caulking tool and
finished smooth on top at an angle of 450 . The joint shall be kept wet for not less
than 7days by tying a piece of gunny bag kept moist. Joints shall be perfectly air
and water tight.
5.4. C.I. Pipes and fittings which are exposed shall be first cleaned and then painted
with a coat of red lead primer. Remaining two coats of paint shall be white zinc base
and approved colour.
5.5. The thickness of fittings and their socket and spigot dimensions shall conform to
the thickness and dimensions specified for the corresponding sizes of straight pipes.
5.6. The connection between the main pipe and branch pipes shall be made by using
branches and bends with access for cleaning. Floor traps shall be provided with
25mm dia. puff pipe where the length of the waste is more than 1800mm or the
floor trap is connected to a waste stack through bends.
5.7. C.I. Pipe shall be measured along the centre lines of pipes including fittings
such as branches, plug bends, etc.
5.8. All cast iron pipes and fittings including joints shall be tested by a smoke test to
the satisfaction of the ENGINEEER and left in working condition after completion.
642
The smoke test shall be carried out as stated under. Smoke shall be pumped into
the pipe at the lowest end from a smoke machine which consists of bellows and
burner. The materials usually burnt is greasy cotton waste which gives out a clear
pungent smoke which is easily detectable by sight as well as smell if there is a leak
at any point of the pipe line.
5.9. Water test and air test shall be conducted as stipulated in IS:5329.
6.0. ASBESTOS CEMENT PIPES AND FITTINGS :
6.1. All A.C. soil waste vent pipes and fittings shall conform to IS:1626. The pipes
shall have spigot and socket ends. These shall be composed of an inert aggregate
consisting of clean asbestos fibre cemented together by ordinary Portland cement
conforming to IS:269 or Portland blast furnace slag cement conforming to IS:455.
No organic materials shall be added to the composition.
6.2. The pipes shall be straight and the ends of the pipes and fittings shall be
finished square to their axes. The finished pipes and fittings shall be true and
smooth, their inner and outer surfaces being as nearly as procurable, concentric.
They shall be in all respects, homogenous and free from impurities or other
imperfections.
6.3. The permissible tolerances on the thickness and external dimensions of pipes
and fittings including hydraulic test pressure of the pipes and fittings shall conform to
IS:1626.
6.4. All A.C. pipes and fittings shall be of approved make and with necessary
accessories, wherever required. The diameter wherever specified for pipes and
fittings shall be clear internal diameter. All gaps between pipes and fittings and walls
shall be filled with cement mortar 1:3 neatly finished for which no extra payment will
be made. All pipes and fittings shall be supported with standard fixing brackets.
6.5. The annular space between the socket and spigot shall be filled with a gasket of
hemp or spun yarn soaked in tar. The joint shall then be filled with stiff cement
mortar 1:2 (1 cement : 2 fine sand) well pressed with caulking tool and finished
smooth on top with neat cement paste at an angle of 450. The joint shall be kept
wet for not less than 7days by tying a piece of gunny bag kept moist. Joints shall be
perfectly air and water tight.
643
6.6. A.C. Pipes shall be measured along with centre lines of pipes including fittings
such as junctions, bends, etc.
6.7. Pipes and fittings shall be tested with a smoke test as specified in Clause–7.5.8
7.0. STONEWARE PIPES AND FITTINGS :
7.1. All pipes with spigot and socket ends shall conform to IS: 651 and
shall be of Grade ‘A’ as specified. These shall be sound, free from
visible defects such as fine cracks or hair cracks. The glaze of the pipes shall be free
from crazing. The pipes shall give a sharp clear note, when struck with a light
hammer. There shall be no broken blisters. The pipe shall be handled with sufficient
care to avoid damage to them.
7.2. Pipes shall be laid to the correct grade and alignment shown in the plan /
sections with their sockets up the gradient. Laying and jointing shall conform to the
general requirements specified in IS:651
7.3. Stoneware pipe used for sewers shall be subjected to a test pressure of 1.5m
head of water at the highest point of the section under test. The test shall be
carried out suitably by plugging the low end of the drain and the ends of the
connection if any and filling the system with water. A buckle bend shall be
temporarily joined in at the top end and sufficient length of vertical pipe joined to it
so as to provide the required test head or the top may be plugged with a connection
to a hose ending in a funnel which could be raised or lowered till the required head is
obtained and fixed suitably for observation. Where leakage will be visible, the
defective part of the work shall be removed and made good.
7.4. In measuring the length of sewer pipes, laid length between faces of manholes
shall only be measured omitting lengths of channels between inside faces of walls of
manholes or chambers.
8.0. P.V.C. PIPES AND FITTINGS :
8.1.All pipes with spigot and socket ends shall conform to IS:651 and shall be of
grade ‘A’ as specified. These shall be sound, free from visible defects such as fine
cracks or hair cracks. The glaze of the pipes shall be free from crazing. There shall
be no broken blisters. The pipe shall be handled with sufficient care to avoid
damage to them.
644
8.2.Pipe shall be laid to the correct grade and alignment shown in the plan/sections
with their sockets up the gradient. Laying and jointing shall conform to the general
requirements specified in IS.
8.3. P.V.C. pipes used for sewers shall be subjected to a test pressure of 40m head
of water at the highest point of the section under test. The test shall be carried out
suitably by plugging the low end of the drain and the ends of the connections if any
and filling the system with water. A buckle bend shall be temporarily joined in at the
top and a sufficient length of vertical pipe joined to it so as to provide with a
connection to a hose ending in a funnel which could be raised or lowered till the
required head is obtained and fixed suitably for observation. Where leakage is
visible, the defective part of the work shall be removed and made good.
8.4. In measuring the length of sewer pipes, laid length between faces of manholes
shall only be measured omitting lengths of channels between inside faces of walls of
manholes or chambers.
9.0. STOP COCK AND BIB COCK :
9.1. A Bib cock (Bib tap) is a draw-off tap with a horizontal inlet and free outlet and
stop cock (stop tap) is a valve with a suitable means of connections for insertions in
a pipe line for controlling of stopping the flow. They shall be of specified size and
shall be of the screw down type. The closing device should work by means of a disc
carrying a renewable non-metallic washer, which shuts against water pressure on a
seating at right angles to the axis of the threaded spindle. The cocks shall open in
anti-clockwise direction. When the bib cocks and stop cocks are required to be
chromium plated, the chromium plating shall be of service Grade No.2 conforming to
IS:1068. In finish and appearance, the plated articles shall be free from plating
defects such as blisters, pits, roughness and shall not be stained or discoloured.
9.2. These fittings shall be of brass heavy class, chromium plated (C.P.) and of
approved manufacture and pattern with screwed or flanged ends as specified. The
fittings shall in all respects comply with the requirements of IS:781. The standard
size of brass fittings shall be designed by the nominal bore of the pipe to which
fittings are attached. A sample of each kind and all supplies made according to the
approved samples.
645
9.3. All cast fittings shall be sound and free from laps, blow-holes and fittings. Both
internal and external surfaces shall be clean, smooth, etc. Boring, plugging,
stopping or patching of the casting shall not be permitted. The bodies, bonnets,
spindles and other parts shall be axial, parallel, and cylindrical with surfaces
smoothly finished. The area of the water way of the fittings shall not be less than
the area of the nominal bore.
9.4. The fittings shall be fully examined and cleared of all foreign matter before
being fixed. The fittings shall be fitted in the pipe line in a workman-like manner.
The joint between fittings and pipes shall be made leak-proof. The joints and fittings
shall be leak proof when subjected to a pressure test specified by the ENGINEER and
the defective fittings and joints shall be replaced or redone.
10.0. GUARANTEE FOR WATER SUPPLY, SOIL VENT SYSTEM :
10.1. The CONTRACTOR shall deliver to the OWNER / ENGINEER upon completion of
his work under this CONTRACT, a written GUARANTEE.
i. That for a period of five (5) years after acceptance by the ENGINEER,
plumbing and drainage work shall be free from defective material and
workmanship.
ii. That for a period of five (5) years after acceptance by the ENGINEER, the
CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the water / air tightness of all joints.
iii. That he will, at his own expense, repair, replace all such defective work and
all other works damaged thereby, during the terms of GUARANTEE.
10.2. After completion of the work, the CONTRACTOR shall obtain and hand over to
the ENGINEER necessary certificates.
4.0. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION - SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS
1.0. CEMENT
IS :269 - Specification for 43 grade ordinary Portland cement.Material Storage

IS:4082 -Recommendations on stacking and storing of Construction materials
at site.
2.0. CONSTRUCTION SAFETY
IS:7969 - Safety code for handling and storage of building materials.
646
3.0. CONCRETE MIX DESIGN :
IS:10262 - Recommended guidelines for concrete mix de
SP:23 (S&T) - Handbook on concrete mixes.
4.0. MEASUREMENT
IS : 3385 - Code of practice for measurement of Civil Engineering works
5.0. STORING OF MATERIALS
5.1. All materials shall be stored in a manner so as to prevent its deterioration and
contamination which would preclude its use in the works. Requirement of IS:4082
shall be complied with.
5.2. CONTRACTOR will have to make his own arrangements for cement and the
storage of adequate quantity of cement. If such cement is not stored properly and
has deteriorated, the material shall be rejected. Cement bags shall be stored in dry
weather proof shed with a raised floor, well away from the outer walls and insulated
from the floor to avoid moisture from ground. Not more than 15 bags shall be
stacked in any tier. Storage arrangement shall be approved by ENGINEER. Storage
under tarpaulin shall not be permitted. Each consignment of cement shall be stored
separately and consumed in its order of receipt.
5.3. Each size of coarse and fine aggregate shall be stacked separately and shall be
protected from leaves and contamination with foreign material. The stacks shall be
on hard, clear, free draining bases, draining away from the concrete mixing area.
5.4. CONTRACTOR shall make his own arrangements for water at site for
construction.
5.5. The reinforcement shall be stacked on top of timber sleepers to avoid contact
with ground/water. Each type and size shall be stacked separately.
6.0. CONCRETE
6.1. GENERAL
Concrete grade shall be designated on drawings. In concrete grade M20, the

number represents the specified characteristic compressive strength of 150mm cube
at 28 days, expressed in N/Sq.mm as per IS: 456. Concrete in the works shall be
‘DESIGN MIX CONCRETE’ or “NOMINAL MIX CONCRETE”. All plain cement concrete
647
works shall be nominal mix concrete and reinforced cement concrete works of M20
grade and above of Design mix concrete.
6.2. DESIGN MIX CONCRETE :
6.2.1. MIX DESIGN & TESTING :
For Design Mix concrete, the mix shall be designed according to IS:10262 and
SP:23 to provide the grade of concrete having the required workability and
characteristic strength not less than appropriate values given in IS:456. The design
mix shall in addition be such that it is cohesive and does not segregate and should
result in a dense and durable concrete and also capable of giving the finish as
specified. For liquid retaining structures, the mix shall also result in water tight
concrete. The CONTRACTOR shall exercise great care while designing the concrete
mix and executing the works to achieve the designed result.
6.2.2. The minimum cement content for Design Mix Concrete shall be as given
below.
Grade of concrete Minimum Cement Content in

Kg/cu.m of concrete
M 20 360 & 315
M 25 400
6.2.3. The minimum cement content stipulated above shall be adopted irrespective
of whether the contractor achieves the desired strength with less quantity OF
CEMENT. The CONTRACTOR’s quoted rates for concrete shall provide for the above
eventuality and nothing extra shall become payable to the CONTRACTOR in this
account. Even in the case where the quantity of cement required is higher than that
specified above to achieve desired strength based on an approved mix design,
nothing extra shall become payable to the CONTRACTOR.
6.2.4. It shall be CONTRACTOR’s sole responsibility to carry out the mix designs at
his own cost. He shall furnish to ENGINEER at least 30days before concrete
operations, a statement of proportions proposed to be used for the various
concrete mixes and the strength results obtained. The strength requirements of
the concrete mixes ascertained on 150mm cubes as per IS:516 shall comply with the
requirements of IS:456.
648
6.3. SUPERSTRUCTURE :
Brick work in CM 1:6 of chamber burnt II class bricks of size 9” x 41/2” x 3” of

bearing walls plastered with CM 1:5, 12mm thick inside and outside shall be
provided. All main walls shall be 230mm (1Brick) thick. The partition walls will be in
brick work in CM 1:4, 115 mm thick will have to be provided with reinforcement bars
as indicated in the drawing.
6.2. RCC LINTELS :
A continuous RCC lintel in M20 mix of 150mm thick using 20mm graded hard
granite stone shall be provided for the entire building except for the portion of grill in
service verandah. Necessary reinforcement for the drop in service verandah shall be
taken from the roof slab. The lintel beam shall be for full width of the walls even on
partition walls.
6.4. RCC SUNSHADE :
RCC sunshade in M20 mix using 20mm graded HBG stone shall be 600mm
wide and shall be cast along with the continuous lintel beam as per drawing.
6.3. ROOFING AND FLOORING :
6.4.1. The roof slab shall be of RCC M20 mix using 20mm graded hard machine
broken granite stone, 125 mm thick and reinforcement as shown in drawing. The top
of the roof slab will be provided with weathering course consisting of one course of
pressed tiles of size 200 x 200 x 20mm embedded in CM 1:3 mixed with crude oil as
specified in Tamil Nadu Building Practice of Tamil Nadu Public Works department and
pointed at top with CM 1:3 mixed with crude oil, over a bed of brick jelly concrete in
lime (proportion being 32:12.5 of 80 mm average thickness). The underside of the
roof shall be plastered with cement mortar 1:3, 12mm thick.
6.4.2. Ceramic tiled floorings shall be provided in the rooms detailed in clause 4.6 of
this section. The floor level of the above rooms should be suitably depressed to
allow for laying of tiles and mortar. The floor level of all rooms shall be maintained
uniform on completion of flooring works.
6.4.3. Flooring for bath and F.O.L. shall be anti-skid ceramic tile of size
200mmx200mm with C.M 1:3,20mm thick immediately after the concrete is laid.
649
Necessary water proofing compound should be added for all flooring in F.O.L. and
Bath.
6.4.4. The floor level in bath room and F.O.L. in all floors should be depressed by
50mm below the level of the general floor area.
6.4.5. The sunken portion of slab, if needed, below floor level in toilet rooms to
receive Indian type water closets (orissa pan type) shall be plastered with CM 1:3,
12mm thick with admixture of approved water proofing compound and painted with
two coats of asphaltic paint.
6.4.6. M.S. sheets for centering for RCC slab works to be adopted instead of wooden
planks.
6.4.7. The entire centering arrangements for the RCC slabs and beams should be
checked and approved by the Board’s Engineer before concrete is laid. All centering
and props shall be properly braced and cross braced in two directions and well
stayed or strutted on all sides enough to resist storm or sudden high winds or any
other unforeseen impact during execution. All RCC concrete shall be vibrated with
suitable vibrators depending on depth/ thickness of concrete .
6.4.8. The concrete for the entire building should be mixed only by using diesel or
electricity operated concrete mixers. Hand mixing by manual labour is not permitted.
6.4.9. Necessary hooks for fixing fan may be provided at suitable locations in floor /
roof slabs while concreting for which no extra payment will be made. PVC conduits,
junction boxes and accessories should be laid before concreting wherever necessary
for concealed wiring.
6.5. FLOORING :
6.5.1. CERAMIC TILED FLOORING:
Ceramic tiled flooring using rectified tile of size400mmx400mm in CM 1:3,

20mm thick bedding shall be provided in the room. Pointing to be done with the
same colour cement. Necessary samples of tile shall be provided by the contractor
for approval of the Engineer. The floor level should be suitably depressed to allow for
laying tiles and mortar so as to maintain uniform level for all rooms.
6.5.2. DOORS, WINDOWS & VENTILATORS :
650
6.5.2.1. All doors except toilet doors shall be of CW hollow core flush door with
frame of size 100x65mm and shutter using 75x30mm CW scantlings for frame work
and fixing 4mm thick commercial plywood on both sides, TW lipping on edges, fixing
1mm thick lamination of approved quality & design on both sides, Brass butt hinges,
Brass parallel bolt, Brass handles on both sides, Brass door stopper etc and as per
the specification and sizes mentioned in the drawing and painted with two coats of
approved brand enamel paint over a coat of primer. The fixtures to be provided as
per the schedule of items for all doors.
6.5.2.2. Toilet doors shall be of PVC door with frame, Forex or equivalent, the frame
made out of hollow core door frame of size 50x47mm with a wall thickness of 5mm
rigid foam sheet, mitre cut at two corners and joined with 2Nos of 150mm long
brackets of 15x15mm MS square tube & reinforced with 19x19mm MS square tube of
19G and fixed to thr wall by drilling 100mm long MS screws using PVC fasteners and
PVC shutter made out of 30mm thick PVC rigid foam panel door and PVC shutter
made out of 30mm thick PVC rigid foam panel door and shutter made from MS
tubular frame of 19 G of size 19x19mm for styles and 15x15mm for top & bottom
rails and covered with 5mm thick heat moulded PVC 'C' channel of size 50x30mm for
styles with 5mm thick PVC sheet [width 75mm for lock rail, bottom rail, top rail on
either side]. The inner panelling should be inserted with 5mm thick PVC sheet
sealed with solvent cement adhesive to the styles and rails with 5x25mm PVC sheet
beading on either side and as per the specification and sizes mentioned in the
drawing .
6.5.2.3. All windows shall be of aluminium glazed windows with 5mm thick plain
glass and as per the specification & of sizes noted in the drawing. The fittings and
furniture shall be provided as per the specification MS grills for windows using MS
flats 25x5mm painted with one coat red oxide primer and of design approved by the
Engineer at site shall be provided inside.
6.5.2.4. All Ventilators are of Anodized aluminum fixed type ventilator, Zig-Zag type,
using Aluminium Box section 63x38xmmx0.85kg/m, 4mm thick machine frosted
glass, aluminium mesh fixed with aluminium beading clip 17.15x17.27x0.178kg/m,
fixing rubber lining etc.
6.6. PLASTERING WITH CEMENT MORTAR :
651
6.6.1. Plastering with CM 1:5, 12 mm thick to be laid for the interior and exterior
faces of walls. Plastering with CM 1:3, 12 mm thick as shown in the drawing to be
provided.
6.6.2. Plastering specification laid down in IS:1661-1972 shall apply. For external
rendered finishes, the specification laid down in IS:2402-1963 shall apply.
6.7. PROPORTIONING :
The material used in the preparations of plastering mixer may be measured

by volume using gauge boxes.
6.8. QUANTITY OF WATER :
For general cement plaster work, the quantity of water required is about 70%
by weight of cement. IS:2250 – 1965 may be followed.
6.9. MIXING :
6.9.1. Cement and sand IS:1543-1960 shall be mixed only in the required proportion
to obtain a uniform colour. Water shall then be added to get the required
consistency for the plaster.
6.9.2. Mixing may be done either manually or mechanically. Hand mixing shall be
carried out on a clean, water tight platform. During mixing, the mortar shall be heed
back and forth for 10 to 15minutes, after the water is added. In machine mixing, the
mixer shall run atleast 5minutes after placing all the ingredients in the drum.
6.9.3. The thickness of plaster work for single coat, both internal and external shall
12mm. For single coat plaster, the fineness modulus of sand should be as far as
possible, 1.5 and confirming to grading zone IV of IS:383-1970. Where only fine
sand is available, the fineness modulus of sand may be improved by mixing the
required percentage of coarse sand. The strength of plaster mix gets reduced with
the reduction in the fineness modulus of sand.
6.9.4. Should mortar crack or perish through neglect of watering or other fault of the
contractor, the work shall be removed and redone at the contractor’s expense or
should the contractor fail to water the work to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-
charge of the work, the later may supply the requisite men to water the work
properly and charge the cost to the contractor.
652
6.10. COLOUR WASHING :
The outside of the walls and the entire building to be colour washed with two
coats using supercem pigments over a coat of primer. The inside of the walls to be
colour washed with two coats using Oil Bound Distemper over a coat of primer
6.11. PAINTING :
All the wood work and M.S. grills to be painted with two coats of approved
brand/ colour enamel paint. Painting has to be carried out as per the specification.
6.12. STAIR CASES
The stair-case shall be with RCC M20 mix waist slabs with flat intermediate
landing. The steps will be with brick work in cement mortar 1:5. MS hand Rails for
staircase using MS square 20x20mm and MS Pipe 40mm dia, painted with one coat
red oxide primer as per approved design and as directed by Engineer at site, painted
with one coat red oxide primer The width of flight should be as indicated in the
drawing.
6.13. DRAINS :
Suitable down-fall pipes 100mm dia of P.V.C. pipes (6kg/sq.cm) with necessary
clamps of plastic with screws of brass shall be provided and taken outside the
building up to basement level and finally connected to the outside drain.
6.14. SANITARY FITTINGS :
6.14.1. Lavatory shall be provided with Indian water closet of Orissa pan type and
European water closet in the places shown in the drawing. The pan of Indian water
closet set shall be of Hi-lites colour of 580x420mm size.
6.14.2. In order to clean the portion between the trap in the flush out latrine, and
pipe, suitable specials with eye should be provided. The cleaning of the section will
be done when necessary arises through this eye.
6.14.3. The plumbing shall be of best workmanship and the whole apparatus shall be
handed over in good condition after testing them to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
6.14.4. The sewer connections shall be taken to the outside sewer line or to a
distance of 3metre from the outer face of the building, if the outside main sewer is
not within 3metre.
653
6.14.5. The quantities given in schedule and for drainage and sewage arrangements
are only tentative. These items of work have to be executed as per the decision and
direction of the Engineer at site according to site condition.
6.15. WATER SUPPLY :
6.15.1. The bath room, lavatory and the kitchen should be fitted with a 15mm C.P.
brass screw down bib cock tap connected to the PVC distribution main including
necessary bib-cock, collars, reducers, bends, elbows, connecting special pipe. The
rates quoted should be for the complete work including the labour for cutting, and
should be done to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer at site. The exact size of
distribution main valves and bib cock will however be decided by the Engineer at site
to suit site conditions. The quantities indicated in the schedule for water supply
items are tentative and are for tender comparison purposes All PVC used for water
supply should be of heavy duty and approved make with necessary specials
conforming to relevant I.S.S. 4985/1988 or latest editions with working pressure
15kgf/cm2 .
6.15.2. In all bathrooms, C.P. showers with shower arm 300mm ,necessary pipe line
with suitable wheel valve shall be provided.
6.15.3. Necessary RCC brackets have to be provided in the bathroom. Necessary

floor trap using 150mm dia brass grating to be provided as instructed by the
Engineer at site.
6.16. STEPS
Steps shall be of brickwork in CM 1:6 shall be provided wherever necessary.

ENDURA step/landing Tiles of approved colour/ design for steps set in CM 1:3,20mm
thick with contrast colour shall be provided. The tread and rise of each step shall be
as indicated in the drawing.
6.17. FINISH OF THE BUILDING :
The building is to be finished to the high standard and neat in all respects as
directed by the Engineer at site.
6.18. SAMPLES FOR APPROVAL
654
Samples of all sanitary fittings, water supply fittings, such as bib-cocks,

valves, etc. shall be provided for the approval of the Engineer-in-charge before
installation. Sample of all furniture fittings for doors, windows, aluminium sections for
windows and joinery fittings in ventilator, cupboard, country wood shutters shall be
produced for the approval of the Engineer-in-charge before fixing.
6.19. GENERAL
The buildings shall be executed generally as per the approved drawings and
specification.
5.0. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR BORED CAST-IN-SITU CONCRETE

PILES
1.0. SCOPE
1.1. This specification covers the furnishing of all materials, plant, labour, equipment,
tools and services for the complete and proper installation of vertical concrete piles,
as shown on the drawings or specified, including all surveying and setting out
necessary for correct location of piles, furnishing everything necessary for forming
working piles, test piles and anchor piles (if required), excavations for pile cut-off of
all piles to a true plane at the elevation specified, load test of single pile and/or pile
groups designated for that purpose or as directed during the progress of the work
(unless otherwise specified) and clean-up of the working area. Contractor shall also
exhume test piles, before/after load tests, as directed by Engineer, if so specified, for
checking the quality of the pile shaft in case of cast-in-situ piles. Contractor shall
provide everything requisite and necessary exhume the pile as instructed.
1.2. Access to the work areas be kept unobstructed and clear at all times so as not
to hamper the work of other trades.
1.3. Contractor shall, prior to submitting a proposal, acquaint himself fully in

regard to the scope of the work in accordance with the intent and meaning of the
borings and soil investigation report, where such bore hole data and soil investigation
report, are available, and drawings and specifications, examine the premises
sufficiently to compare them with the drawings and specifications and satisfy himself
as to the condition of the site, obstructions, accessibility, etc. required in connection
with the work. Failure to comply with this requirement shall in no way relieve
655
Contractor of his responsibility to completely perform the work in accordance with

the specification.
1.4. Contractor shall on award of the contract, install test piles as directed by
Engineer and load test the same as per this specification and as directed by
Engineer. In the case of cast-in-situ piles, Engineer may direct contractor to
completely exhume some or all test piles, before or before load testing, to examine
the quality of the pile shaft. This shall be done either by excavating around the pile
or by pulling out or by a combination of both methods.
1.5. If the quality of the pile shaft does not satisfy the requirements of this
specification and / or if the pile fails to attain the specified safe pile capacity and if
this can be attributed to defective workmanship and / or negligence on the part of
Contractor, all costs of mobilization, Installation and testing of test piles, exhuming
or test piles and any other work in connection with the test piles shall be to the cost
of Contractor.
1.6. In the event of test piles not satisfying the requirements of this specification,
Owner reserves the right to terminate the contract and to award the contract to
other parties.
1.7. The information given in the bore logs and soil investigation report, where
such bore logs and soil investigation report are available, is given to Bidders /
Contractor in good faith and Owner / Engineer will not be responsible for any
inaccuracies or discrepancies therein and shall not entertain any claim whatsoever
from Bidders / Contractor on this account.
1.8. Nothing contained in the contract documents shall relieve Contractor from the
responsibility of obtaining approval from Engineer for all pile installation criteria.
1.9. Scope of this Specification covers bored cast in situ piles of circular cross
section. These piles shall be formed by boring to the specified depth as shown and
called for on the drawings or as directed by Engineer. Execution on pile bore shall
be any one of the methods outlined below.
a) Using percussion type of boring technique and bentonite slurry to stabilise

the hole, with temporary guide casing through unstable strata only upto a
maximum of 5m below working ground level.
656
b) Using Direct Mud Circulation or Reverse Mud Circulation method with

bentonite slurry as drilling mud and appropriate equipment and with
temporary guide casing through unstable strata, only upto a maximum of 5m
below working ground level.
c) Using permanent rigid liners of steel or any other material approved by the
ENGINEER.
1.10. Temporary casings of length exceeding 5m below working ground level shall
not be used for forming the pile bores. Concrete piles formed shall be free of any
necking and excessive bulging. Contractor shall not proceed with the work before
obtaining instruction / clarification from the Owner / Engineer.
2.0. APPLICABLE CODES AND SPECIFICATIONS
2.1. All applicable documents, including standards, codes, rules, laws, regulations
of regulatory bodies referred to herein shall be of latest issue or edition and shall be
considered part of this specification, except as may otherwise be stated herein.
2.2. Unless otherwise stated herein and in specific technical requirements. the
design, materials and workmanship shall conform to the following standards:
IS : 2911 :Code of practice for design and construction of pile foundations.

a) Part – I :Part – I concrete piles, Section-2 (SEC.2-1979) Bored cast in
situ piles.
b) Part -4-1985:Part 4 Load test on piles
IS : 2131 – 1981: Method of standard penetration test for soils
IS : 456 – 2000 : Code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete.
IS : 455 : Portland slag cement
IS : 269 – 1989 : Specification for ordinary, Rapid hardening and low heat
Portland cement
IS: 1489 – 1991: Portland Pozzolana cement
IS:8112 – 1989 : High Strength ordinary Portland cement
IS : 383 – 1970 : Specifications for coarse and fine aggregates from Natural
sources for concrete
IS : 2386 – 1963 : Methods of Test for aggregates for concrete
IS : 432 – 1982 :Specification for Mild steel and medium Tensile steel bars
657
and hand drawn steel wire for concrete reinforcement

IS:1786–1985 :Specification for cold twisted steel bars for concrete
reinforcement
IS : 3764 – 1992 : Safety code for excavation work
IS : 1200 – 1988 : Method of measurement of building works – Part-XXIII
3.0. MATERIALS
3.1. CONCRETE
3.1.1. All concrete work shall conform to IS 456 unless otherwise stated herein. All
aspects of concrete work including materials specifications, preliminary mix designs,
workability, inspection, testing etc. shall be as specified Section D of this
specification.
3.1.2. Cement used shall be ordinary port land cement of not less than 43 grade
conforming to I.S. 269. Where port land Pozzolana Cement is specified to be used,
only such cement which does not contain fly ash as Pozzolans, shall be approved.
3.1.3. In case of piles where concrete is to be placed through tremie pipe, coarse
aggregates, as per I.S. 383, are preferable to crushed aggregates for better
workability.
3.1.4. Maximum size coarse aggregate shall be 20mm.
3.1.5. Concrete shall be M25 grade as per specification for concrete work unless
otherwise called for. Concrete, for piles in alkali soil/alkaline water, shall have a
minimum 28 days 15cm works cube compressive strength of 250kg/cm2 (25 N/mm2)
and shall not contain less than 400kgs. of cement per cum. of concrete in piles.
3.1.6. Concrete, for piles formed in-situ, shall have sufficient slump (125 to 175m) to
drop into place properly. The water-cement ratio including the water contained in
the aggregates, shall be limited to 0.5, unless otherwise stipulated. Special
plasticizing admixtures, if approved by Engineer, shall be added to the concrete as
per manufacturer’s instructions to improve the slump, without impairing the specified
strength.
3.1.7. Atleast one test shall be made for every 25 piles cast and not less than one
test shall be made for any one day’s concreting operation. Each test shall consist of
658
three works test cubes field cured. One cube shall be tested at 7 days and the other
two at 28 days. Records of all cube test results shall be communicated to Engineer.
3.1.8. Owner reserves the right to reject piles of deficient concrete General Body
Meeting of the Society on 28.9.06 at 5.30 PM. strength. Such rejected piles
(installed or to be installed) shall be replaced by Contractor, by new or additional
piles and the cost of such replacement shall be wholly borne by Contractor.
3.1.9. Engineer reserve the right to order a change in the mix or in the water-
cement ratio to obtain the specified strength and / or workability.
3.2. REINFORCEMENT
3.2.1. All reinforcement for use within the pile shaft, shall be as per drawings and be
associated and tied and or welded together and made up into cages sufficiently rigid
to withstand handling without damage and distortion.
3.2.2. Joints in longitudinal bars, if unavoidable, shall be made by lapping and the
laps shall be tack-welded to prevent distortion of the reinforcing cages except for
driven precast piles where they shall be butt-welded.
3.2.3. The projecting lengths of the longitudinal bars beyond the pile cut-off level
shall be equal to a minimum of 50 times bar diameter or such other length as shown
on drawings.
3.2.4. For precast driven piles, all the longitudinal bars shall be of the same length
and be fitted into the pile shoe. Shorter bars, to resist local bending moments near
the middle point of the pile or any other location, may be added but shall be
carefully arranged as sudden discontinuity of bars may lead to cracks under heavy
driving.
3.2.5. The lateral links / helix shall fit tightly against the longitudinal bars and be
fixed to them by welding or soft annealed 16 gauge black iron wire, the free ends of
which shall be turned into the interior of the pile.
3.2.6. The spacing of lateral reinforcement shall be such as to permit free flow of
concrete around it. For precast driven piles, the transition between closer spacing
and maximum spacing, shall be gradual over a length of three times the diameter /
side.
659
3.2.7. Concrete cover over all reinforcement including lateral links or helix, shall be
50mm unless other wise shown on drawing. Care shall be taken to preserve the
correct over and alignment of reinforcement free from any twist, throughout the
whole operation of placing the reinforcing cage into the bore hole and concreting
the pile. The inside the dimension of the reinforcing cage shall be adequate for
operation of the tremie pipe when used.
3.3. STEEL CASING
3.3.1. Temporary steel castings, used for driven cast-in-situ piles and for bored piles
using casings, shall be straight and shall have sufficient wall thickness and strength
to withstand without damage, distortion, etc. the handling stresses and driving
stresses set up in obtaining the specified depth and set (in the cast of the former
piles)and to resist harmful distortion of buckling due to soil pressures developed
during installation of pile or adjacent piles. Joints shall be welded or lock seamed.
Screwed joints shall be permitted for casings for bored piles. Casings and their joints
shall be sufficiently water - tight.
3.3.2 Casings shall be of such diameter as to give the specified nominal diameter of
the pile. Casing lengths shall be the maximum consistent with standard practice,
transport, handling and driving facilities.
3.3.3 Detachable shoes used with the temporary steel casings for driven cast-in-situ
piles shall be of cast iron and for requisite strength of the standard sizes used with
the respective steel castings and the shoe shall be coaxial with the steel casing.
3.3.4. Casings distorted from true and uniform shape, whether caused by driving or
earth and water pressure, resulting in a reduction of the cross –sectional area of the
pile in excess of 10%, shall not be used on the work.
4.0. PILE CAPACITY, QUALITY AND TOLERANCES
4.1. Piles individually and in groups, installed in place, shall safely sustain the load
specified on the drawings. The capacity of the piles in place, shall be tested by
conducting routine tests as decided by Engineer on one or more working piles. The
safe load i.e pile capacity shall be assessed as defined under “Routine Tests on
Working Piles” herein after.
660
4.2. In the case of cast-in-situ piles, Contractor shall guarantee 90% of full cross
sectional area of the pile and also guarantee against occurrence of necking or
wasting, bulging, spelling of pile shaft concrete, exposure of pile shaft reinforcement,
honey combed/porous pile shaft concrete and similar defects which will impair the
strength and durability of the pile.
5.0. SETTING OUT
5.1. The CONTRACTOR will be furnished with one reference benchmark and with
two mutually perpendicular reference axes. The CONTRACTOR shall locate
accurately the position of piles and install stakes as directed or as required by
drawings with reference to the reference bench mark and axes furnished. The
CONTRACTOR shall make good to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER, defective or in
fructuous work arising out of error in field layout, notwithstanding that such layout
and staking may have been checked and approved by the ENGINEER.
5.2. The CONTRACTOR shall check the co-ordinates of initial guide casing or
permanent liner position for each pile during and immediately after placing the
casing on the ground prior to its driving and confirm the same with the co-ordinates
of that pile as shown on the drawing.
6.0. CONTINUITY OF CONSTRUCTION
6.1. Any pile that is taken up for execution from boring to final concreting shall be
executed at a continuous stretch without interruption, stoppage of work in between
shifts will be permitted only during boring stage of the pile execution if further boring
is pending. Thereafter right from boring or chiseling of the final portion of the length
of the pile, through subsequent activities of flushing, lowering of reinforcement cage,
lowering of tremie, preconcrete flushing and upto concreting, no halt whatsoever in
the execution of the pile will be permitted.
6.2. In case there is a halt of work during any of these activities except concreting
the CONTRACTOR shall take steps to bore an extended length of further 300mm or
as decided by the ENGINEER, or adopt any other measure as decided by the
ENGINEER.
6.3. If there is any stoppage of work during concreting, this pile shall be
abandoned altogether.
661
6.4. Cost of remedial measures and their consequences shall be borne by the
CONTRACTOR’s act of commission or omission.
7.0. BENTONITE DRILLING MUD
7.1. The bentonite powder shall be mixed thoroughly with clean, potable water to
make a suspension of density as specified. The temperature of the water used and
that of the bentonite fluid supplied to the pile bore shall not be lower than 5C.
where saline or chemically contaminated ground water occurs, special precautions
shall be taken as approved by the ENGINEER to modify the bentonite suspension or
pre-hydrate the bentonite with fresh, potable water so as to render the fluid suitable
for construction of piles. The PH of the fluid shall range from 9.5 to 12. The density
freshly prepared bentonite suspension should be between 1.03 to 1.1gm/ml. The
density of the bentonite suspension after mixing with deleterious material in the bore
hole may go upto 1.25gm/ml. The marsh viscosity when tested by a marsh cone
shall be between 30 to 60 second. The differential free swell shall be more than
540%. The bentonite suspension fluid shall be continuously circulated and agitated
using circulating pumps to prevent deposition of suspension and coagulation.
7.2. The suspension fluid shall be regularly tested to ensure its suitability for use
as drilling mud. The frequency of testing the fluid and the method of sampling shall
be proposed by the CONTRACTOR for approval prior to the commencement of the
work. The frequency may subsequently be varied as deemed necessary by the
ENGINEER. These tests shall ensure consistency of the fluid properties, after the
mixing process, blending of freshly mixed bentonite suspension and previously used
betonite suspension and any pricess which may be adopted to remove impurities
from previously used bentonite suspension.
8.0. PILE BORING:
8.1. FORMATION OF PILE BORES:
8.1.1. Pile bores for bored cast in situ concrete piles shall be executed upto a
minimum depth specified in the Drawings or as modified by the ENGINEER in writing
during progress of boring. The pile shall achieve its required capacity to take
downward and upward force and horizontal forces in combination as specified.
8.1.2. Pile bores shall be executed by any of the following methods:
662
a) using the Direct Mud Circulation or Reverse Mud Circulation Methods with
bentonite slurry as drilling Mud and appropriate equipment.
b) Using percussion type of drilling and bentonite slurry to stabilize the hole.
c) Using permanent rigid liners of steel or any other material approved by the
ENGINEER and boring through the liners
The BIDDER shall indicate along with his Bid which of the above methods he
proposes to adopt for this work. However the decision of the ENGINEER regarding
the method to be adopted for executing the bores shall be binding on the
CONTRACTOR.
8.1.3. Use of temporary guide casings through unstable strata is permitted only upto
a maximum of 5 m below ground level.
8.1.4. The CONTRACTOR shall ensure that bores formed are true to a cylindrical
shape to the extent possible and over cutting is minimized. The CONTRACTOR shall
also ensure that water cavities behind temporary casings are altogether avoided so
as to ensure quality concrete for the pile shaft.
8.1.5. Boring shall not be carried out within a distance of five times the diameter of
the pile from a pile which has been freshly concreted within the past forty-eight
hours.
8.2. DIRECT MUD CIRCULATION METHOD:
8.2.1. The initial boring of about 1.5 m shall be done by bailer and the guide casing
shall then be lowered into the bore hole. The bore shall be filled with bentonite slurry
fed from bentonite installation.
8.2.2. The centre-line of the guide casing shall be checked with respect to the
reference points before proceeding with further boring. Further boring shall proceed
with the use of direct mud circulation chisel upto the founding strata.
8.2.3. The chisel used to bore the hole, shall be of diameter appropriate for the
specified nominal diameter of the hole to be bored. The chisel shall be connected to
API rods of adequate diameter and thickness through which bentonite slurry shall be
pumped.
663
8.2.4. Bentonite slurry shall be pumped through the chisel rods by means of high
pressure pumps. The chisel shall have suitable ports for the bentonite slurry to flow
out at high pressure. The bentonite slurry and the cuttings, which are carried to the
surface by the rising flow of slurry shall pass through a setting tank of adequate size
to remove the cuttings and spoils from the slurry before the slurry is re-circulated to
the pile bore. A suitable bentonite slurry mixing and re-circulation plant shall be
designed and installed.
8.3. REVERSE MUD CIRCULATION METHOD
8.3.1. The CONTRACTOR shall adopt Reverse Mud circulation Method only where
strata encountered are such that there is no danger of loosening of the sub-soil
during the boring operations and the subsoil gradually becomes denser and more
compact with progressive depth, or where bedrock is being penetrated at shallow
depths. This methods shall be adopted only if approved by the ENGINEER
8.3.2. The Method is essentially the same as the Direct Mud Circulation Method
except that the bentonite slurry shall be sucked through the chisel instead of being
pumped through it. Except for this, the specifications for Direct Mud Circulation
Method apply here also.
8.4. BAILER BORING USING BENTONITE SLURRY.
8.4.1. This process is essentially the same as the Mud Circulation Method except
that all boring shall be done by flap value bailer or flap valve bailer and chisel upto
the founding stratum, using bentonite slurry. Bentonite slurry shall be allowed to flow
into the guide casing through pipes or channels, so that the guide casing is always
kept filled with bentonite. The material extracted by the bailer shall be left alongside
the boring if so directed by ENGINEER. Fresh bentonite slurry shall be allowed to
flow into the casing so that the top level of the bentonite is kept the same at all
times.
8.4.2. Except as modified herein above, the specification for Direct Mud Circulation
Method shall apply to Bailer Boring also.
8.4.3. Loss of drilling mud while boring:
664
In the event of a rapid loss of drilling mud in a pile bore, the CONTRACTOR
shall immediately draw the attention of the ENGINEER and take necessary action as
8.5.0. AUGER BORING
Augers are used cohesive and other soft soils above water table. Hand
augers are used for depths upto about 6 metres. Mechanically operated augers
are used for greater depths and they can also be used is gravelly soils. Samples
recovered from the soil brought up by auguers are badly disturbed and are useful for
identification purpose only.
8.5.1. AUGER AND SHELL BORING
Cylindrical auguers and shells with cutting edge on teeth at the lower end can
be used for making deep borings. Hand operated rings are used for depths upto
25m and the mechanical rigs upto 50m . Auguers suitable for soft to stiff clays,
shells for very stiff and hard clay and shells or sand pumps for sandy soils, small
boulders thin soft strata or rock, or cemented gravel can be broken by chisel bits
attached to drill rods. The hole usually requires a casing.
8.5.2 PERCUSSION BORING
In this methods, soil and rock formation are broken by repeated blows of
heavy chisel or bit suspended by a cable or drill rod. Water is added to the hole
during boring if not already present, and the slurry of pulverised material is bailed
out at intervals.
8.6. FINAL POST-BORE FLUSHING AND CLEANING:
On completion of the total length of the pile bore, the bore shall be thoroughly
cleaned and flushed.
8.6.1. If the pile bore has been executed by either of the mud circulation methods,
fresh bentonite slurry shall be pumped through the chisel resting at the base of the
bore to completely remove all currings and other loose material from the base.
During the flushing, the speed of the bentonite circulation pump shall be raised to
maintain high pressure. Such flushing shall be continued for at least 20 minutes
while occasionally agitating the chisel. Flushing shall be continued beyond 20
minutes if the return slurry indicates presence of cuttings still within the bore.
665
8.6.2. In case the pile bore has been executed by Bailer Boring with Bentonite Slurry
the bore shall be initially cleaned of loose material by light tampering of the flap-
valve bailer. Thereafter the bailer shall be withdrawn and a string of AP1 rods shall
be lowered up to the base of the bore and bentonite slurry shall be pumped through
under high pressures in the case of the Mud Circulation Method. Agitation shall be
effected by circular movement of the string of rods around the pile bore. Flushing
shall be thus continued for at least 20 minutes. Flushing shall continue beyond 20
minutes till the return wash indicates that the bore is clean to the satisfaction of the
ENGINEER.
8.6.3. Where permanent liners have been used, the bore shall be filled with water
that has been certified for concreting and a flap valve bailer shall be used to remove
the loose material light tamping. The bailer shall then be withdrawn and a string
of API rods shall be lowered down to the base of the bore. The certified water
shall then be pumped through the string of rods at high speed for atleast 20
minutes. Agitation shall simultaneously be effected by a gentle vertical movement
and vigorous circular movement to the rods. Flushing shall continue thus beyond 20
minutes till the return wash indicates that the bore is clean to the satisfaction of the
ENGINEER. The water from within may be pumped out with approval of the
Engineer. However no pumping out shall be done if the ground water table is above
the bottom of the pile bore and/or if the subsoil around the bottom of the pile bore is
likely to be disturbed by pumping out the water.
9.0. PLACEMENT OF REINFORCEMENT CAGE:
9.1. Immediately after successful completion of final post-bore flushing and

cleaning, the reinforcement cage shall be lowered into the pile bore. All care shall be
taken during transporting, lifting and lowering of the cage that the cage does not
twist or distort out of alignment.
9.2. The cage shall be lowered into the pile – bore by gravity and shall not be
forced linto the bore. Care shall be exercised that no collapse of any portion of the
unlined bore occurs while lowering. In case the total length of the pile is such that
handling of the entire length of the cage becomes unwieldy, the cage shall be
fabricated in two lengths. The location of such jointing shall however be got
approved by the ENGINEER in writing. After the first section of the cage is lowered
666
and held with the top of the bars adequately outside the bore, the upper cage
section shall be lifted, held vertical and gradually lowered over the lower cage
section so that the main longitudinal reinforcement bars of the two cage sections are
aligned bar for bar. Jointing of the respective bars of the two cages shall be
effected as per Clause – 5.3.2 above. The internal cage shall then be lowered into
the pile bore and into final position and held in place by slings or suitable devices
9.3. Longitudinal reinforcement above the ground level shall not be arbitrarily bent
for seating the concrete tremie hopper. If the reinforcement cage has been
fabricated longer than that required on the Drawing (in view of a shorter pile bore
than that envisaged earlier), the excess lengths shall be cut. Outward flaying of the
main reinforcement bars of the cage shall not exceed 5 degrees with the vertical to
avoid breaking of the bars while rebending the reinforcement back into position after
the concreting. In any case, the internal radius of the bend shall not be less than five
times the bar diameter. While flaying the reinforcement cage outwards, it shall be
ensured that the cover to reinforcement within the pile bore to be concreted is
maintained.
10.0. FINAL PRE-CONCRETING FLUSHING:
10.1 Immediately after the reinforcement cage is positioned, the concrete tremie
pipe shall be lowered into the pile bore concentrically within the reinforcement cage,
with the bottom of the tremie pipe just above the bottom of the bore. The top of
the tremie pipe shall be connected to a high speed bentonite pump and flushing with
bentonite slurry shall be resumed. If concreting of the pile bore is to be done by
concrete pump, flushing shall be done through a string of API rods lowered into the
pile bore concentrically within the reinforcement cage with the bottom of the string
of rods just above the bottom of the pile bore.
10.2. The procedure for flushing shall be the same as that indicated in clause
5.8.6 above. At the end of such flushing the CONTRACTOR shall ensure that heavy
contaminated bentonie suspension, which could impair free flow of the concrete from
the tremic pipe or concrete pump trunk has not accumulated in the bottom of the
pile bore. The suspension shall be sampled from the pile bore bottom by a suitable
device approved by the ENGINEER and the density of the suspension checked by a
667
calibrated hydrometer. The density of the sampled suspension shall not exceed
1.2gm/cc. In case this value is exceeded, flushing shall be resumed as per Clause
5.8.6 till the suspension is within the desired density range.
11.0. PILE CONCRETING
11.1. GENERAL
11.1.1. Concreting of pile bores shall be executed only through a tremle system of
concrete pump over the entire length of the pile. Tipping in of concrete from ground
level or above into the pile bore is prohibited even if the pile bore is dry (as may
perhaps be the case for pile bores with permanent liners).
11.1.2. Only freshly mixed concrete shall be used. Placement of the concrete shall be
a continuous operation. The CONTRACTOR shall ensure that concrete mixers of
adequate capacity are provided at the site with standby. If concrete pump is to be
used for concreting a standby pump shall be provided. The pile shall be abandoned if
concreting operations are suspended due to any reason by more than 20 minutes. It
shall also be ensured that there are no air pockets created within the concrete shaft.
11.2. TREMIE CONCRETING SYSTEM
11.2.1. Tremie pipe concreting shall be done as per IS.456 and IS:2911 (Part
I/Sec.2). The minimum diameter of the tremie pips shall be 200mm. The steel
hopper at the top of the tremie pipe shall have a volume in excess of the total
volume of the tremie pipe below. The neck of the hopper shall be fitted with a steel
plate covering the entire opening. Suitable arrangements shall be made to remove
the steel plate and uncover the hopper neck aperture when the hopper is full of
concrete. The hopper and the entire length of the tremie pipe shall be thoroughly
clean and free of any encrusted concrete or internal protrusions such a sleeves,
collars etc. or any soil or debris. The entire tremie pipe-hopper system shall be water
tight.
11.2.2. After the final pre-concreting flushing has been successfully executed, the
tremie pipe shall not be extracted but shall continue to remain upto the bottom of
the pile bore. Suitable ramps or staging shall be provided to facilitate easy and
smooth feeding of the hopper with concrete either manually or by mechanised
668
means, The ramps of staging shall be flexible enough to allow concrete feeding if the
hopper is raised during concreting.
11.2.3. A sliding plug of polystyrene for similar material lighter than water and
approved by the ENGINEER shall be placed in the tremie pipe to prevent direct
contact between the first charge of concrete in the tremie and the bentonite slurry.
At the commencement of concreting, the steel plate shall first cover the hopper neck
while the hopper iscompletely filled with concrete. The steel plate shall then be
removed and the concrete in the hopper allowed to flow into the tremie pipe.
Subsequent charges of concrete shall be maintained as continuous as possible until
the pile bore is concreted as specified in Clause 5.11.5 below. The tremie pipe
shall at all times penetrate the concrete by minimum two meters after placing of the
concrete has commenced and shall not be withdrawn from within the concrete until
completion of concreting. Care shall be exercised when vertical movement is
imparted on the tremie pipe to force the concrete down the tremie pipe. Such
movements shall be limited. The CONTRACTOR shall note that the pile shall be
abandoned if in the opinion of the ENGINEER, the tremie pipe bottom has been
raised above the concrete level within the pile bore. While raising the tremie pipe,
care shall be exercised that the reinforcement cage is not disturbed from its position.
11.3. CONCRETE PUMP :
11.3.1. If the concrete pump is used to feed the hopper of a tremie concreting
system Clause –5.11.2 shall apply.
11.3.2. If the concrete pump is used for placing concrete directly into the pile bore,
the trunk of the pump shall be placed upto the bottom of the pile bore immediately
after the string of AP1 rods used for final pre-concreting flushing have been removed
after successful flushing. The trunk shall at all times penetrate the concrete after
commencement of concreting by at least two metres and shall not be withdrawn
from within the concrete until the completion of concreting. The CONTRACTOR shall
note that the pile shall be abandoned if in the opinion of the ENGINEER, the trunk
has been raised above the concrete level within the pile bore. While raising the
trunk, care shall be exercised that the reinforcement cage is not disturbed from its
position.
669
11.4. LIFTING OF TEMPORARY CASING :
11.4.1. The temporary casing shall be carefully withdrawn only after the concrete
surface in the pile bore has risen to not less than three metres above the bottom of
the casing or not less than one metre above the level of ground water whichever is
higher. The casing shall be lifted only to the extent that there is minimum one metre
of concrete above the casing bottom. The level of concrete shall be checked vis a vis
the casing bottom and ground water level by suitable methods as approved by the
ENGINEER.
11.4.2. While withdrawing the temporary casing, care shall be exercised that the
reinforcement cage is not pulled out along with the casing.
11.4.3. It shall also be ensured that no voids or ground water pockets are formed
around the pile shaft during withdrawal. Adequate precautions shall be exercised
to ensure that the concrete is not lifted up along with the casing and that no necking
or waisting occurs in the pile shaft. Special care shall be exercised when the ground
water level is high. During withdrawal, the movement of the temporary casing shall
be maintained in an axial direction relative to the pile.
11.5. COMPLETION OF CONCRETING:
Irrespective of the specified pile cut-off level, concrete shall be poured into
the pile bore until all the contaminated concrete at the top of the bore overflows the
top of the pile bore and beat concrete appears continuously as overflow. Concreting
shall then be terminated after permission of the ENGINEER.
12.0. PILE CUT – OFF AND EXTENSION :
12.1. Excavation for pile cut-off shall be done by the CONTRACTOR unless indicated
otherwise in Data Sheet A. The extent of excavation shall not exceed the minimum
necessary for the required pile cut-off. The CONTRACTOR shall provide adequate
side slopes / shoring at no extra cost to the OWNER. In order to provide safe
working space for pile cut-off, Excavated material shall not be stacked near the edge
of any excavation. The material shall be stacked at spots designated by the OWNER
near the excavation within the plant limits at no extra cost to the OWNER.
Dewatering if required, will not be paid separately.
670
12.2. Pile cut-off to specified levels shown on the Drawing shall be done by the
CONTRACTOR for all piles at no extra cost. The CONTRACTOR shall station an
adequate work force at site for the same.
12.3. When cutting off and trimming piles to the specified cut-off level, the
contractor shall take care to avoid shattering or otherwise damaging the rest of the
pile. Any cracked or defective concrete shall be cut away and the pile repaired in an
approved manner to provide a full and sound section at the cut-off level.
12.4. Minimum chipping of the pile shall be 600 mm or till sound concrete is met
with or specified cut-off level, whichever is greater. While chipping the concrete, care
shall be taken to ensure that the reinforcement is not damaged in any way. If the
reinforcement is damaged while chipping or bending back, the CONTRACTOR shall
rectify the same as directed by the ENGINEER at no extra cost to the OWNER. If the
specified cut-off level is less than 600 mm below the ground level (which is the
concrete overflow level after all temporary casings are withdrawn) or if the cutoff
level is above the ground level, the concrete shaft shall be chipped by minimum
600mm or till sound concrete is met with, whichever is greater. Thereafter, if found
necessary, additional reinforcement shall be jointed as specified earlier in Clause
5.3.2 above. The pile shall then built up to the specified cut-off level using suitable
circular formwork & concrete of grade specified for the pile shaft.
12.5 If due to any defective concreting, honey-combing, exposure of

reinforcement, snapping of reinforcement bars etc., stripping of pile concrete is
required to be done to a level lower than the specified cut-off level to obtain dense
and sound concrete, the pile shall be built up with the good concrete of specified
grade for the pile shaft upto the specified cut off level by the CONTRACTOR at no
extra cost to the OWNER. Such building up including excavation, concreting, form
work and compacted backfiring shall be at CONTRACTOR’s cost.
12.6. On completing pile cut-off for any pile, all exposed reinforcement surface shall
be coated with cement wash at no extra cost to the OWNER.
12.7. The CONTRACTOR shall backfill all excavation done by him for pile cut-off to
levels specified by the ENGINEER or as shown on the Drawing, These levels shall be
lower that or at least equal to the original working level.
671
12.8. Any over-excavation and backfilling of the same with consolidation

shall be at no extra cost to the OWNER.
13.0. TOLERANCES;
13.1. POSITIONAL:
13.1.1. For a pile cut off at or above ground level, the maximum permitted deviation
of the pile centre from the centre-point shown on the Drawing shall be 75 mm in any
direction. An additional tolerance for the pile head, cut off below ground level will be
permitted as below.
13.2. VERTICAL:
Tolerance of verticality shall be with in 1 in 75 for the completed pile shaft.
13.3. RAKE:
The equipment governing alignment of the inclined permanent casing and

boring tool shall be set to give the correct alignment of the pile to within a tolerance
of 1 in 50.
The maximum deviation of the finished pile from the specified rake shall be 1
in 25 for piles raking up to 1:6 and 1 in 15 for piles raking more than 1:6.
13.4. CORRECTIVE MEASURES:
13.4.1. No forcible corrections to piles to overcome errors of position or alignment

shall be attempted.
If after excavation for pile cut off, any pile or piles are found to exceed the
specified positional and/or alignment tolerances, these shall be replaced or
supplemented by the CONTRACTOR by additional pile(s) as directed by the
ENGINEER at no extra cost to the OWNER. Also if as a result of pile(s) exceeding the
specified permissible positional deviations, and/or the consequent addition of any
replacement pile(s), any pile cap is required to be enlarged, the extra cost of such
pile cap enlargement shall be to the CONTRACTOR’s account.
14.0. ABANDONED PILE BORES AND REJECTED PILES :
14.1. Abandoned pile bores shall be filled with sand which constitutes fine aggregate
used for making concrete. If a permanent liner has already been driven, the same
shall be withdrawn progressively as the sand is poured in. However no attempts
672
shall be made to extract the liner if, in the opinion of the ENGINEER, this can
damage or set out of alignment any other pile in the vicinity.
14.2. No attempt shall be made to forcibly extract a rejected pile shaft. Rejected
piles shall be cut off as directed by the ENGINEER. The CONTRACTOR shall install
replacement pile or piles in lieu of rejected piles as directed by the ENGINEER.
14.3. Piles / casing / borings that are defective or exceed the tolerance specified,
shall be left in place or pulled out as directed by the Engineer, without adversely
affecting the performance of adjacent piles. In case piles/casings can not be
extracted, that shall be cut off as directed by the Engineer.
14.4. The CONTRACTOR shall not be paid any additional amount for filling up
abandoned pile bores or cutting off rejected piles, provision of extra piles,
enlargement of pile cap etc., necessitated due to faulty work of the CONRACTOR,
filling of voids, etc.
15.0. PILE CAPACITIES :
15.1. Safe structural capacity of the pile shall be taken as the load calculated on the
basis of permissible concrete stresses and permissible steel stresses as per IS : 456.
15.2. The total load carrying capacity shall be determined by conducting initial load
tests on piles installed to full length.
15.3. Pile load tests on both initial piles as well as working piles shall be carried out
to establish and prove these capacities.
16.0. PILE LOAD TESTS :
16.1. GENERAL :
16.1.1. Any number of test piles and working piles as specified in the schedule of
items or at the discretion of the ENGINEER shall be subjected to load tests. The
CONTRACTOR shall provide everything, necessary including equipment, measuring
devices, jacks, structural framework, kentledges etc. This includes installation of
test piles also and concreting of pile cap either temporary or permanent over single
or group of piles for testing the piles. The pile cap concreting will not be paid for
separately.
673
16.1.2. Load tests shall in general be carried out as per IS : 2911 (Part-4) except as
modified herein or directed otherwsie by the ENGINEER.
16.1.3. Piles to be load tested shall either be so designated on the Drawings or

specified / selected by ENGINEER in the field.
16.1.4. Test load shall be applied to the piles by any suitable means preferably by a
properly calibrated hydraulic jack with a remote control pump. Test load applied to
the piles shall be such that a constant load is maintained under increasing
settlement.
16.1.5. The required reaction may be derived from either a loaded platform or
anchor piles. Anchor piles shall not be closer than 6 times the pile diameter on
either side. Working piles shall not be used anchor piles. Anchor piles, if provided,
shall be at CONTRACTOR’S cost.
16.1.6. Load tests shall in general be carried out not earlier than 28 days from the
time of casting the pile and may be performed concurrently with the pile installation
operations if permitted by the ENGINEER.
16.1.7. The design and arrangement of application of loading etc. for all types of
load tests, shall be submitted by the CONTRACTOR to the ENGINEER for his
approval.
16.1.8. All load tests shall be conducted under the supervision of the ENGINEER. All
responsibilities for conducting the tests safely and properly shall rest with the
CONTRACTOR.
16.1.9. Arrangements shall be made to cast the test piles and conduct initial load
test on the same. On conformation of load test results, further testing of piles shall
be done.
16.2. CALIBRATION OF EQUIPMENT
The CONTRACTOR shall ensure, that all the equipment / instruments are
properly calibrated, at the start of the tests, to reflect the correct values. If so
demanded by the ENGINEER, the CONTRACTOR shall have all or such specific
instruments tests at an approved testing laboratory at the CONTRACTOR’S cost and
the test report shall be submitted to the ENGINEER. If the ENGINEER desires to
674
witness / inspect such tests, the CONTRACTOR shall arrange for this and also
provide such access and facilities for inspection as are required.
16.3. INITIAL LOAD TESTS
16.3.1. Immediately on mobilisation to site, the CONTRACTOR shall prepare to install

piles for conducting initial vertical load (downward and pull-out) tests.
16.3.2. In case the cut off is below ground level, a suitable excavation shall be made
to provide access to the level after breaking off the unsound concrete as specified
earlier in Clause – 5.12.
16.3.3. For the compression type of test, the pile head shall be cut off level and
capped by a R.C. cap to provide a horizontal plane bearing surface upon which a
steel plate shall be placed. Earth from under the pile cap shall be scooped out so
that pile cap has no soil support. Thereafter, the kentledge and all other accessories
outside the pit pertaining to and necessary for conducting the test shall be set up.
An easy access to the pile test head shall be provided.
16.3.4. If the pile test head is below the ground water level, the CONTRACTOR shall
provide suitable sumps and dewater the pit so as to render the pit dry enough to
enable conducting the test. Any dewatering will be considered as part of the test
and the CONTRACTOR shall not be separately paid for the same.
16.3.5. The test load shall be so applied that it reaches the pile in a static manner.
The loading may be applied directly by kentledge or jacking against a reaction
system provided by means of kentledge, tension piles or ground anchors. Where
kentledge is used it shall be supported on a properly designed frame or gantry such
that there is no possibility of the load tilting or collapsing. The foundations of this
frame or gantry should be sufficiently far way from the test pile so as not to affect its
behaviour to any significant extent. Where tension piles or ground anchors are used,
they shall be located a minimum distance of three times the test pile size from the
centre of the test pile to the centre of the pile / anchor.
16.3.6. The displacement of the test pile shall be related to a fixed datum. This may
consist of a reference beam (datum bar) supported by two foundations positioned
outside the zones of influence of the reactions support area. The deflection
measuring equipment must be set up in such a way that any tilting of the
675
test pile will not cause errors in the measurements. Dial gauges shall be
used for measuring deflection. The least count of the dial gauges shall be at least
0.01mm. At least two but preferably four dial gauges shall be used and shall be
placed at diagonally opposite corners.
16.3.7. The reference bars for the strain gauges shall be adequately rigid and on firm
supports. The supports for the reference bars shall be so located that they are
beyond the zone of influence of the loaded test pile (equal to three times the pile
size from pile edge) and the zone of influence of kentledge supports. The bars shall
be adequately stiffened and placed on supports in a manner such that any effect due
to ambient temperature variations and vibrations due to traffic etc. are minimised.
The reference bars and strain gauges shall not be exposed to direct sun and the pit
shall be protected by tarpaulin sheets while the test is in progress.
16.3.8. The total test load shall be three (3) times the estimated safe load-carrying
capacity of the pile. Percentage of the above load shall be applied in equal
increments of 20 percent of the estimated safe load. Unloading may however be in
higher decrements with total number not less than five. At each load increment, pile
deflection shall be observed accurate to 0.02mm at an interval of 2, 4, 8, 15, 30,60
and 120 minutes as the case may be upto a time when the rate of deflection of the
pile top reduces to 0.1mm in first half an hour or 0.2mm in one hour or till 2hours
whichever occurs first. The load increment in any case shall be maintained for 1
hour atleast. The design load as well as the final load shall be maintained for 24
hours. At these load increments, after the first hour, deflection readings shall be
taken at every one hour interval.
16.3.9. During the release stage, each load decrement shall be maintained at least
for 30 minutes & readings of deflection noted. When the load is fully released to
zero, measurements of rebound shall be continued till the deflection of the pile top is
not more than 0.1mm per half hour.
16.3.10. If the initial test pile (s) which is (are) load tested fails (fall) to attain the
specified safe structural capacity of piles and if this can be attributed to defective
workmanship and / or negligence on the part of the CONTRACTOR, the OWNER
reserves the right to terminate the contract and to award the contract to other
parties. In such an event, all costs of mobilization, installation and testing of test
676
pile(s) and any other work in connection with the test piles, shall be borne entirely
by the CONTRACTOR.
16.3.11. While executing the pile bore for all test piles, a record of bore log and
Standard Penetration Tests shall be maintained over the continuous length of boring
in an approved format. Sub – soil samples and rock cuttings shall be collected and
systematically preserved. A complete log of the sub surface profile shall be
maintained during execution of boring for each and every pile shaft and a copy of
such log shall be maintained to the owner for scrutiny prior to commencement of
lowering of reinforcement cage
17.0. LOAD TESTS ON WORKING PILES :
17.1. These tests shall be carried out on poles selected by the ENGINEER after they
have been cast. Tests to be carried out on working piles shall essentially be ordinary
compression type. The test will be similar to that conducted on initial test piles,
except that the capacity of the pile shall be limited to 1.5 times the safe pile
capacity, the maximum settlement during test loading not exceeding 12mm.
17.2 The working pile shall be considered to have stood the test satisfactorily if
total settlement under final test load is not more than 12 mm and as stated in IS
2911 Part IV.
17.3. If the pile does not satisfy these requirements and if this can be attributed to
defective workmanship or negligence on the part of CONTRACTOR, all costs of the
load test, the cost of providing and installing additional piles, cost of additional or
enlarged pile caps and other work necessitated because of the defective pile, shall be
at the cost of CONTRACTOR.
17.4 Records of load test results:
Within 48 hours of completion of each test, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish a

copy of all recorded test data to the ENGINEER. Upon completion of pile load tests,
the CONTRACTOR shall furnish the ENGINEER at no extra cost with a pile test report
in triplicate and this shall include the following information where applicable.
 Identification of working pile/test as per Drawing.

 Co-ordinate axes of pile, elevation of bottom of pile, cut-off Level of pile, type
of pile, pile size.
677
 Pile Bore log Records.

 SPT Results
 Deviation from designated location / alignment.
 Jack gauge calibration curves from approved Test House.
 Tabulation of loads and settlement readings during the loading and unloading
of the pile.
 Graphic representations of the test results in the form of time-load-settlement
curves.
 Graphic analysis of Initial Cyclic test results to separate skin friction and end
bearing as set out in IS : 2911 (Part-IV)
 Remarks concerning any unusual occurrences during installation or test load-
ing of the working piles / test piles.
18.0. INDIRECT INTEGRITY TESTS FOR PILES
The ENGINEER may desire to get bored cast in situ piles subject to integrity
tests by indirect methods through another agency. The CONTRACTOR shall give all
cooperation in getting such tests conducted. The ENGINEER reserves the right to
give due weightage and consideration to results of these tests which will affect the
integrity of the installed piles.
19.0. INSTALLATION RECORDS :
19.1. The CONTRACTOR shall submit each working day, detailed pile installation
records in duplicate for each pile installed in the enclosed formats. The ENGINEER’S
piling plans will show all piles serially numbered as per the piling layout plans. The
cost of all labour, materials and services called for herein shall be included in the
CONTRACTOR’s unit rates.
The details of the record shall include but not be limited to the list below :
PILE INSTALLATION RECORD :
19.2. A. BASIC DATA :
 Piling Layout Drawing No.

 Pile Number
 Location Co-ordinates
 System / Structure
678
 Pile Location vis-a – vis Pile Group (Draw dimensioned sketch with reference
axes and shade the pile)
 Pile Type : Vertical / Raker
 Pile Nominal Diameter
 Pile Tip Elevation
 Pile Cut-off Elevation
 Ground Level at Pile Location.
 Grade of Concrete Specified
 Reinforcement Details (Draw sketch if complex)
 Safe Capacity of Pile Specified.
19.3. B. PILE BORE DATA :
 Date and Time of Start
 Date and Time of Completion
 Method of Boring
 Inner Nominal Diameter of Temporary Casing / Permanent Liner
 Length of Temporary Casing / Permanent Liner
 Material of Permanent Liner.
 Method of Jointing Temporary Casing / Permanent Liner
 Treatment to Permanent Liner
 Length Bored in Soil
 Length Bored in Rock
 Bore Log (Draw sketch or refer to separate sheet)
 Details of Standard Penetration Test
 Number of Subsoil Samples / Rock cuttings collected.
 Ground Water Elevation
 Any Artesian Conditions
 Any Bore Collapse and Details
 Any Loss of Drilling Mud and Details
 Any other Details or Phenomena Observed.
19.4 C. FLUSHING RECORD :
 Date and Time of Start of Final Post-bore Flushing.

 Date and Time of Completion of Final Post-bore Flushing.
679
 Remarks on inspection of Wash of Post-bore Flushing.

 Date and Time of Start of Final Pre-concreting Flushing.
 Date and Time of completion of Final Pre-concreting Flushing.
 Remarks on Inspection of Wash of Pre-concreting Flushing.
19.5. D. CONCRETING RECORD :
1. Date and Time of Start of Concreting.

2. Date and Time of Completion of Concreting.
3. Grade of Cement and Name of Manufacturer
4. Date of Manufacture of Cement
5. Date of Concrete as mixed
6. Grade of Concrete Specified
7. Slump of Mixed Concrete at pile Head
8. Cube-Test Results
9. Method of Concrete Placement in Pile Bore.
10. Theoretical Volume of Concrete : (Pile Tip to Top Pile as Cast)
11. Actual Volume of Concrete : (Pile Tip to Top of Pile as Cast)
12. Ratio of Actual Volume to Theoretical Volume of Concrete :
(Express as Percentage)
13. Any Delays during Concreting and Reasons.
14. Overflow Quantity
15. Any other details
20.0. CLEAN-UP :
20.1. All throughout the work, the CONTRACTOR shall take all steps to prevent
spillage of bentonite slurry on the site in areas outside the immediate vicinity of
boring. The slurry shall not be allowed to flow into any water courses, nallahs, site
drains or any public drains.
20.2. Any discarded and / or used bentonite shall be removed from the site without
any undue delay.
20.3. Upon completion of piling work, all casings, equipment, construction tools,
protective coverings and any debris resulting from the work shall be removed from
the premises.
680
20.4. All debris, empty containers, scrap timber etc. shall be removed as directed by
the ENGINEER / OWNER.
20.5. Exposed and finished concrete and dowel surfaces shall be left in a clean
condition satisfactory to the ENGINEER.
6.0. SPECIFIC TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT
1.0. GENERAL DESCRIPTION:
The work shall be executed as per the construction drawings furnished by the
contractor.
2.0. MATERIALS USED IN THE WORK.
2.1. CEMENT : The cement shall be OPC of not less than 43 grade. RCC M25 with
the minimum cement content of 400 kg/m2 and maximum water cement ration of
0.5 shall be adopted.
2.2. STEEL : Steel reinforcement to be used for RCC work shall be of Fe415 grade
conforming to IS 1786 manufactured by standard companies.
2.3. The following are the details of works to be carried out by the contractor.
a) Setting up of piling / boring rigs equipment with all accessories, mobilization

& demobilisation from location to location.
b) Boring and concreting of bored cast-in-situ piles 450mm dia up to 15 m

length in all kind of soil, using Bentonite slurry for boring with pile
augurs/rigs, concreting with M25 grade concrete with 20mm HBS metal with
minimum cement content of 400 kg/m3 and maximum water cement ratio
of 0.5 using tremie pipe for concreting.
c) Mud circulation method shall be used for boring. The minimum cut off level
shall be 600mm below Ground level to meet sound concrete in the pile and
clearing the dismantled debris from pile location.
d) Carrying out initial load test on single vertical test pile in one location total
load of 100 MTl as per specification.
e) Carrying out routine load test on single vertical working pile to a load of
100 Tonnes all as per specification on one pile.
681

Ennore 230KV 110KV Spec 15.11.2022

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ennore 230KV 110KV Spec 15.11.2022

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SECTION – 3

50MVA, 110/33KV & 16MVA, 110/11KV POWER TRANSFORMER

2.0. CLIMATIC CONDITIONS

(a) Atmosphere : Highly polluted

(b) Maximum ambient air temperature : 50  C.

(c) Minimum ambient air temperature : 5  C.

(d) Maximum daily average ambient air temperature : 40  C.

(e) Maximum yearly weighted average ambient air : 32  C

(g) Average thunder storm days per annum : 65

(h) Average dust storm days per annum : Occasional

(i) Average rainy day per annum. : 65

(j) Average annual rainfall : 100 cm.

(k) Number of months during which tropical monsoon : 5

(l) Maximum wind pressure : 150kgf/sq.m.

(m) Altitude above M.S.L : <1000 M

3.0. CODES AND STANDARDS

4.0. TYPE, RATING AND OTHER TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS

The requirement of Power Transformers shall be as below

i) For 50MVA, 110/33KV - ANNEXURE – I(a).

The insulation requirement of windings shall be as below

i) For 50MVA, 110/33KV - ANNEXURE – I(a).

i) For 16MVA, 110/11KV - ANNEXURE – I(b).

i) For 50MVA, 110/33KV - ANNEXURE – I(a).

i) For 16MVA, 110/11KV - ANNEXURE – I(b).

6.4 Positive tolerance of + 10% for Impedance is accepted. (Negative tolerance

For 50MVA, 110/33KV

No Load Loss at rated voltage and frequency : 25.0 KW (Max.)

I2R Loss at rated current and at 75°C for HV and

Stray + Eddy Loss : 20.0 KW (Max.)

Load Loss at rated current and at 75°C for HV and

Auxiliary Loss at rated voltage and frequency : 3.0 KW (Max.)

For 16MVA, 110/11KV

No Load Loss at rated voltage and frequency : 12.0 KW (Max.)

I2R Loss at rated current and at 75°C for HV and

Stray + Eddy Loss : 12.0 KW (Max.)

Load Loss at rated current and at 75°C for HV and

Auxiliary Loss at rated voltage and frequency : 1.0 KW (Max.)

8.0. TEMPERATURE RISE :

Permissible Temperature rise of winding, measured by resistance : 55 o C.

9.0 DUTY REQUIREMENTS

9.8. Radio interference and Noise Level:

10.0. CONSTRUCTIONAL FEATURES

10.4. Corresponding parts liable for replacement shall be inter- changeable.

10.7.4 Taper washers shall be provided where necessary.

10.8.7 DAMAGED PAINT WORK:

10.8.8. DRY FILM THICKNESS

10.8.9. TESTS FOR PAINTED SURFACE:

10.8.9.1. The painted surface shall be tested for paint thickness.

12.27.Winding paper moisture shall be less than 0.5%.

12.28.Current carrying connections:

12.29.Winding Terminations into Bushings:

13.0. INSULATING OIL:

i) Prior to filling of the transformer.

i) Recommended Technical parameters of the oil.

14.0.TANK AND TANK ACCESSORIES:

 Mechanical shocks, during transportation

 Vacuum filling of oil

 Continuous internal pressure of 35 kN/sq.m, over normal hydrostatic pressure of oil.

 Short circuit forces

Bottom plate thickness of the Tank

14.2. LIFTING AND HAULAGE FACILITIES

Each tank shall be provided with:

14.3. TANK COVER: